Lighting Handbook A Lot of Good Examples For Interior Lighting PDF

Lighting Design Light and interiors
Catalogues Light.
The current TRILUX product
portfolio includes interior
luminaires, exterior luminaires
and installation systems for
the hospital sector.
Corresponding product infor-

mation can be ordered by
fax and telephone or online
at www.trilux.de.
Interior lighting
The TRILUX catalogue
Lighting Design Light and
interiors at hand contains
the complete range of inno-
vative and tried-and-tested
luminaires for interior
lighting.
Exterior lighting
In order to consider and
document the complex tech-
nical and mechanical param-
eters of various exterior
lighting systems, individual
brochures give detailed infor-
mation on these luminaire
series.
Medical technology
Light and installation systems
for light and normal care,
for intensive care areas and
clean rooms are featured
in several catalogues and
brochures.
Lighting planning
The TRILUX lighting design
software TX-WIN is an easy-
to-operate tool which ena-
bles the correct and rapid
planning on site of interior
lighting installations, street
lighting and the lighting of
squares.
Positive light influences
Good lighting is the prereq-
uisite for harmonious and
motivating surroundings,
improving peoples well-
being and promoting the
individual, to greater things.
See. Perceive. Experience.
1
Contents
Downlights and circular luminaires

Programme review 16
Downlights 290, 293 19
Downlights 1280, 1281 33
Recessed circular luminaires 129, 367 39
Circular luminaires PSH, PSG 43
High-performance suspended luminaires
ROT, ROS, ROD, ROB 49
Voltage-track spotlights CLASSICA

Programme review 58
Spotlights for low-voltage halogen lamps 62
Spotlights for mains-voltage halogen lamps 62
Spotlights for high-pressure discharge lamps 64
3-phase voltage tracks 68
Tubular track system T200

Programme review 72
Spotlight modules 595 80
Positionable modules 596 92
Translucent modules 597 96
Louvre luminaires 593, 594 98
Diffuser luminaires 333 262
Bidirectional office lighting system DiVisio

Programme review 106
General lighting 112
Task area lighting 114
DIALOG for workstation and ambient lighting
Individual workstation luminaires DESKTOP 124
Free-standing workstation luminaires TASK 126
Free-standing workstation luminaires DUAL 128
Wall-mounted ambient luminaires 132
Wall-mounted luminaires
DIALOG WALL-I 132
DIALOG WALL-II 134
ES 50 136
4022 138
Universal recessed and surface-mounted luminaires
CENERA, 3604 142
362 144
Surface-mounted and suspended louvre luminaires

526 154
504, 505 170
598, 599 184
500 196
152 210
1510 222
Recessed louvre luminaires

368, 369 234
390, 391 244
136, 236 248
362 144
2
Surface-mounted diffuser luminaires
333 262
330, 331, 332 266
1330 F 270
740 276
654, 664, 665, 717 278
CENTA-S 302
Recessed diffuser luminaires

4401 284
3331 262
136 PA/OA, 236 PA/OA 256
Weather-proof surface-mounted luminaires

ARAGON 288
713, 717 294
1715N 296
719 298
Trunking 190 300
CENTA-S 302
WINLIGHT-Q 422
Weather-proof recessed luminaires

739 306
720P, 721P 308
720T, 721T 310
722, 723 312
2911 316
4401 284
Sports hall luminaires

506 322
366, 376 326
Trunking 110N 328
WINLIGHT-Q 422
Continuous-line luminaires, batten luminaires,

WINLIGHT-Q
Rapid-mounting, continuous-line system DELTA 336
... Combinations of base units and optical accessories 342
Rapid-mounting, continuous-line system E-LINE 368
... Combinations of reflectors and optical accessories 372
796 414
1615, 6141 418
WINLIGHT-Q 422
Accessories, technical information

Emergency lighting 428
Intelligent lighting management LIGHTGATE 431
Lighting controller LR 803 434
Technical information 435
Multi-Lamp electronic control gear, ballasts 436
Starters 439
Photometric planning 440
Lamp characteristics 444
Reference index 448
3
The World-Wide Web
The TRILUX virtual portal is world-wide. Downloading Light can also be experien-
located at www.trilux.de or new software and current ced in our virtual light studio,
www.trilux.co.uk where the data for photometric calcula- allowing the visitor to inter-
latest information on TRILUX tions is just one of the many actively explore light effects,
and its products can be possibilities this website has light control, light situations
obtained around the clock, to offer. and light spaces.
See. Perceive. Experience. E-Mails

TRILUX Designer light Service Products
CD-ROM The relevance of this medi-

The TRILUX CD turns your um is guaranteed by means
computer into a self-support- of CD updates featuring the
ing tool for the extensive plan- latest product and software
ning of lighting installations. developments.
The CD contains everything

lighting specialists require,
e.g. electronic product data,
photometric luminaire data
as well as several lighting
planning and ROI calculation
programs.
News Contact Sitemap
Communication Beyond that, TRILUX defines

and information active partnership as com-
New ideas for future-fair prehensive consultation and
lighting solutions can only customer-specific service at
arise by exchanging views all project levels, from plan-
with light users, designers ning and commencement of
and architects. Bearing this operation up to after-sales-
in mind, national and inter- support. This includes
national lighting trade fairs design and development
are a logical communication consultancy, to ensure that
platform for TRILUX. your project is solved as
such, and not from a range
Even long before possible of compromises!
projects are discussed we
attach great importance to As a competent partner,
an intensive and constant the TRILUX field service
dialogue with all participants, team will gladly answer all
e.g. in our light information your lighting questions.
centre at our headquarters
in Germany or during semi-
nars and presentation shows
world-wide.
www.trilux.de
5
TRILUX headquarters New developments are sim- TRILUX Area 2
Arnsberg/Germany ulated, prototypes are test- Arnsberg/Germany
At the headquarters, admin- ed and the high quality of Area 2 houses the develop-
istration, client information the production is routinely ment and production of med-
centre, luminaire production check-tested in photometri- ical supply units for normal or
and a fully automatic high- cal, electromechanical and intensive care. In addition to
bay warehouse are brought acoustic laboratories. the actual product portfolio
together on a 100 000 m2 this TRILUX branch also offers
site. The light information centre extensive planning services
with integrated showrooms ranging from design engi-
Here, our development engi- allowing to experience various neering up to CAD realisation
neers research lighting solu- lighting effects is an ideal drawings.
tions of tomorrow by using platform for the intensive
progressive means. exchange of views.
The World
of TRILUX
6
CETEK S.A.S. ZALUX S.A. TEL TRILUX ELECTRONICS
Clermont-Ferrand/France Zaragoza/Spain & LUMINAIRES INC.
The production site CETEK The production range of Manila/Philippines
S.A.S. in Clermont-Ferrand ZALUX S.A. in Zaragoza/ With TEL TRILUX ELEC-
in France stands for the Spain the TRILUX group TRONICS & LUMINAIRES
Pan-European commitment plant which is specially TRILUX is also present in the
of the TRILUX group. Line adjusted to the production East-Asian market. At this
optimisation for key product of plastic is mainly char- site, production is mainly
ranges offers us the chance acterised by weather-proof concentrated on luminaires
to improve efficiency with luminaires and the corre- for the Far-East and elec-
segment-oriented produc- sponding components. tronic lighting components.
tion.
The international identity of

TRILUX is characterised by
consultation competence
thanks to local support cen-
tres and short-term availability
of market-specific products.
Sales branches and produc-

tion sites all around the world
underline the global vision of
TRILUX.
7
I cant understand why people are frightened by
new ideas. Im frightened of old ones.
John Cage
The targetted deployment of Prestigious lighting planning CALIS represents the TRILUX
light activates, motivates, featuring architecture-com- concept developed to visu-
offers visual comfort and patible light effects requires alise these requirements.
puts the built environment planning competence. Realised by highly-specialised
into the right light. CALIS (Computer Aided designers, the program deliv-
Light Simulation) is a state- ers, as stills or animations,
When planning an environ- of-the-art planning tool the first, 3D-based impres-
ment, the conception of arti- paving the way from a cre- sions about the interplay of
ficial lighting compatible ative light idea to a suitable architecture and light, even
with the architectural objec- technical lighting solution. during the design stages.
tives is of crucial impor-
tance.
Photometric laboratory
TRILUX optics are developed for the pro-
duction stage in interactive processes by
means of computer simulations and meas-
urements on the goniophotometer or on
the rotating mirror goniophotometer. Tests
on the precision photometer bench supply
decisive elements for the material selection.
Close co-operation with all major lamp
manufacturers, and a multi-source philosophy
underline the objectivity of our research.
10
Product developments
for better light
The solution of lighting tasks An application-conform An exemplary solution is The elliptical form in classical
is the result of many exactly product with maximum effect CLASSICA the TRILUX retro design gives CLASSICA
harmonised individual steps. is the major goal that should system for well-aimed and an unmistakable originality.
always be reached. accentuated lighting.
Based on a differentiated
requirement profile, photom- CLASSICA offers a wide
etric, electromechanical, range of technical charac-
ergonomical and architectural teristics which turn the
aspects have to be consid- product into a problem solver
ered during development and for accentuated lighting.
construction.
11
A star-spangled sky for
the European Parliament
in Strasbourg/France
The power of emotion, illuminated

TRILUX Competent part- Atatrk International
ner for project solutions Airport
Apart from an extensive Istanbul/Turkey
standard portfolio of interior The 400 000 m2 large termi-
luminaires, exterior lumi- nal with an annual passenger
naires and products for the volume of over 20 million
hospital sector, TRILUX was planned in intensive co-
offers competent and expert operation with the architec-
advise in project planning. tural groups Kantasi (Turkey)
In close co-operation with and GMV (Great Britain),
building owners and archi- resulting in a lighting design
tects, special solutions for oriented around key princi-
the project-specific require- ples such as customer spe-
ments as to design and cialisation, energy efficiency
photometrics are developed. and environmental compati-
Put us to the test! bility. The 11 m high sloped
pyramidal ceilings were
European Parliament illuminated by approx. 1000
Strasbourg/France* uplighters, equipped with
TRILUX lights up the Euro- 400 W metal halide lamps,
pean Parliament in Stras- 200 W auxiliary mains lamps
bourg: The plenary assembly and state-of-the-art electronic
hall of this impressive archi- control systems, achieving
tectural complex has been more than 300 lx on the
equipped with thousands of working plane. This project
illuminated reflectors which represents the crme de la
conjure a fascinating star- crme in customising over
spangled sky. Taking into 70 % of the 60 000 luminaires
account both the architec- were adapted and designed
tural and the photometric for our clients requirements.
concept of this prestigious
building, a bright and light-
flooded environment had to
be realised. Since the ple-
nary assembly hall was not
equipped with any windows,
TRILUX designed a state-of-
the-art customised solution:
3 000 fluorescent lamps,
working behind motor-
adjustable opal glass lamel-
las, create a perfect illusion
of daylight incidence. An
ideal synchronisation with
the star-spangled sky simu-
lates an impressive day and
night atmosphere. In the
total complex, a 220 000 m2
working plane has been
equipped with approx.
48 000 luminous points,
following the concept of the
renowned lighting designer
Georges Berne.
*Conception: A.S.E. Building owner: SERS
12
Atatrk International Airport
in Istanbul/Turkey:
Dynamic lighting for an
architectural star-performance
13
For reflection ...
The value of specular louvres Reflection-intensified Post-anodised reflectors

is determined by their dura- aluminium Post-anodised aluminium
bility and photometric char- RSX, RPX reflectors are polished,
acteristics. TRILUX louvres Reflection-intensified louvre anodised and hot-sealed in
Security lock and reflectors in aluminium surfaces are characterised the totally automatic TRILUX
The spring-tensioned contact are manufactured according by a system of anodised galvanic station as one unit
clips of TRILUX louvres min- to three different manufac- layers, applied to high-purity after all mechanical opera-
imise mounting and mainte- turing procedures, each with aluminium, with an exactly tions on it have been com-
nance costs. Louvre retention specific characteristics: defined thickness. By this pleted. Important features are:
by means of spring-tensioned means, an outstanding total long-time stable reflection
clips providing earth continu- Anodised louvres reflection is created which characteristics, insensitivity
ity. The louvre can be lowered RSV, RMV, RPV, RPR contributes decisively to high to soiling and no disturbing
and hung from either side for Louvres made of anodised working efficiencies of lumi- iridescence phenomena. Plastic reflectors
maintenance purposes. aluminium basic material naires. RSX and RPX louvres Purity aluminium aluminised
are ageing-resistant and can are specially conceived for in high-vacuum on PC reflec-
be easily cleaned and main- T5 lamps. tors creates the maximum
tained. in directed reflection. The
photometrically efficient layer
is protected by a UV stabilised
coating against oxidation.
Louvre production
The basic material for TRILUX
louvres is processed in
modern production sites by
means of procedures which
are tested in conformance
with ISO 9001. All aluminium
reflectors for downlights and
suspended circular luminaires
are surface-coated (post-
anodised).
Louvres RWV, RWX, RSV

Louvres with highly-reflective,
white surface RWV, hybrid
louvres as a combination of
white cross blades and high-
ly-reflective lateral reflectors
RWX as well as specular
louvres with concave-profiled
cross blades RSV have ver-
satile applications, e.g. in
offices, schools, sales areas
and showrooms.
Parabolic louvres
RPV, RPR, RSX, RPX
Louvres with parabolic longi-
tudinal and transverse reflec-
tors shine out thanks to
practice-oriented light distri-
bution, high rentability as
well as luminance limitation
required for areas with normal
DSE usage. The monitors
can be arranged towards the
luminaires at will when using
RPR, RSX and RPX louvres
which are characterised by
their all-round luminance limi-
tation.
14
... and transmission
Diffuser luminaires enable Diffusers in unbreakable Opal diffusers Prismatic diffusers

extended maintenance inter- polycarbonate PC are used Opal diffusers in PMMA or Diffusers in PMMA or PC
vals thanks to constant dust for weather-proof luminaires PC enable the adaptation of with photometrically effec-
protection of the photometri- which have to meet increased the lighting installation to the tive prisms direct the light
cally effective system com- mechanical requirements. architectural design, e.g. in primarily onto the working
ponents. Beyond that they case of surrounding white plane. In combination with
also offer mechanical pro- ceiling panels. specular reflectors which
tection of the lamps. are adjusted to the lamp
Translucent diffusers geometry, they realise high
TRILUX luminaire diffusers Contrary to pigmented mate- working efficiencies and
are made of non-yellowing rial, PLEXIGLAS with fine standard-conform glare
polymethylmethacrylate spherical inclusions made of limitation.
PMMA (PLEXIGLAS) in clear, other polymerised methacry-
opal or translucent version. lates with a differing refrac-
tive index ensures virtually
loss-free light diffusion.
Diffuser production
Decades of experience in
the processing of plastics
and regular laboratory tests
for quality assurance in the
current production guarantee
the long service life of
TRILUX luminaire diffusers.
PMMA and PC
TRILUX diffusers made of PC
or PMMA are mechanically
stable and torsionally rigid.
However, in the unlikely case
of damages, replacement
diffusers are available at
least 10 years after a lumi-
naire model is discontinued.
With additional
specular reflectors
Increased working efficien-
cies and improved glare
limitation are realised by
computer-optimised specular
reflectors within the diffuser
luminaires. The reflectors of
the high-quality series 333
are made of reflection-inten-
sified aluminium with a par-
ticularly high total reflection.
15
Circular Luminaires in circular shape
offer a wide planning scope
luminaires thanks to their non-directional
form. The TRILUX range of
circular luminaires includes
downlights, double-reflection
systems and suspended
luminaires with PEXIGLAS or
aluminium reflectors.
290, 293
290 or 293 series down-
lights for recess openings
offer an excellent all-round
package. The basic versions
can be equipped with a wide
range of modular design
accessories. All items are
retro-fit, meaning that later
adaptations are possible with
no additional hassle!
Page 20
16
1280, 1281 129, 367 PSH, PSG ROT, ROS ROD, ROB
128 downlights convince The 367 series represents PSH or PSG circular lumi- These high-performance Rooms with different ceiling
with their rapid installation a non-directional recessed naires with double-reflec- suspended luminaires are heights can be illuminated by
by means of the tool-free luminaire system with radial tion system are striking predestined for use in repre- these rotationally symmet-
spring mechanism. Different specular louvres. A radial light ornaments for surface, sentative areas. The optical rical suspended luminaires.
reflector versions with colour- louvre with the same con- recess and suspended systems consist of trans- The reflectors are facetted
adapted or contrast-forming struction principle also char- mounting. All luminaires of parent refraction reflectors in the lower section. Concen-
bezel rings offer a wide acterises the design of the this series share the same with a well-balanced indirect tric profiled prisms of the
planning scope. smaller 129 versions. convincing optical principle. component or of purely ROB version wash the ceiling
direct parabolic reflectors. area in a favourable light.
Page 34 Page 40 Page 44 Page 50 Page 54
17
18
290, The 29 series represents
downlights in two sizes
293 for recess openings of
224 mm or 138 mm.
Both sizes are optionally

available with smooth or
facetted reflectors. All ver-
sions are equipped with eco-
nomic compact fluorescent
lamps TCD or TCT.
HIT options are available on
request. 290 293 291
Accessories are fixed to the Analogous to the construc- 291 downlights in IP 54 all-
functional slot of the 290 tion principle of the 290 round are perfectly suitable
basic downlights. The wide series, 293 compact for the lighting of damp
range of decorative accesso- downlights can also be or corrosive environments
ries consists of spherical equipped with complemen- and covered exterior areas.
bezel rings, protective covers, tary accessories. Decor This series is described in
Fresnel lenses as well as disks or conical lenses are section Weather-proof lumi-
decor disks or conical lenses. available. naires.
Page 20 Page 24 Page 316
19
Downlights with smooth reflector
or specular facetted reflector
Application
Sales areas, reception halls,
corridors, conference
rooms, hotels, restaurants
and residential areas.
Optical system
Highly-specular reflector, for
narrow/wide-angle light dis-
tribution. Reflector made of
high-purity post-anodised
aluminium. Safe retention by
means of screwed plug pro-
viding earth continuity. With
smooth reflector.
B With facetted specular
reflector.
Luminaire body
Sheet steel, galvanised, with
bezel ring made of die-cast Reference Lamps/socket Recess kg Reference Lamps/socket Recess kg
zinc. Shadow gap between W opening mm W opening mm
bezel ring and reflector rim.
2901 W/TCD13 1xTC-D13/G24d-1 224 1.7 2901 C/TCD13 1xTC-D13/G24d-1 224 1.7
Ceiling recess mounting by
2901 W/TCD18 1xTC-D18/G24d-2 224 1.7 2901 C/TCD18 1xTC-D18/G24d-2 224 1.7
means of rapid-mounting
springs. 2901 W/TCT26 1xTC-T26/GX24d-3 224 2.1 2901 C/TCT26 1xTC-T26/GX24d-3 224 2.1
C Chrome bezel ring. 2902 W/TCD13 2xTC-D13/G24d-1 224 2.2 2902 C/TCD13 2xTC-D13/G24d-1 224 2.2
W White bezel ring. 2902 W/TCD18 2xTC-D18/G24d-2 224 2.2 2902 C/TCD18 2xTC-D18/G24d-2 224 2.2
2902 W/TCT26 2xTC-T26/GX24d-3 224 2.9 2902 C/TCT26 2xTC-T26/GX24d-3 224 2.9
Electrical connection
Luminaires supplied ready
for connection. With 5-pole
plug-in connection terminal
and strain relief systems for
mains supply and further wir-
ing for wires up to 2.5 mm2,
including earth connection
terminal. With low-loss bal-
lasts.
Luminaires can also be sup-

plied with electronic control
gear, reference suffix E,
e.g. 2901 W/TCD13 E.
TC-D(EL) C 0 - C 180 Data table TC-D(EL) C 0 - C 180 Data table
TC-T(EL) No. 2001 TC-T(EL) No. 2001
DIN 5040: A40 DIN 5040: A40
CIBSE BZ: CIBSE BZ:
BZ6/0.75/BZ5/1.5/BZ4 BZ6/0.75/BZ5/1.5/BZ4
NBN L 14-002: NBN L 14-002:
BZ4/1.5/BZ3 BZ4/1.5/BZ3
A wide range of accessories for the 29 series downlights,

Indications Page including decor disks and conical lenses, allows adaptation
Equipment accessories 26 to many different architectural requirements. All decorative
Recess mounting accessories can also be attached after installation.
accessories 31
Downlights IP 54 316
20
Reference Lamps/socket Recess kg Reference Lamps/socket Recess kg
W opening mm W opening mm
2901 W-B/TCD13 1xTC-D13/G24d-1 224 1.7 2901 C-B/TCD13 1xTC-D13/G24d-1 224 1.7
2901 W-B/TCD18 1xTC-D18/G24d-2 224 1.7 2901 C-B/TCD18 1xTC-D18/G24d-2 224 1.7
2901 W-B/TCT26
2902 W-B/TCD13
1xTC-T26/GX24d-3
2xTC-D13/G24d-1
224
224
2.1
2.2
2901 C-B/TCT26
2902 C-B/TCD13
1xTC-T26/GX24d-3
2xTC-D13/G24d-1
224
224
2.1
2.2
652d
Degree of protection IP 20
2902 W-B/TCD18 2xTC-D18/G24d-2 224 2.2 2902 C-B/TCD18 2xTC-D18/G24d-2 224 2.2 Degree of protection in closed
2902 W-B/TCT26 2xTC-T26/GX24d-3 224 2.9 2902 C-B/TCT26 2xTC-T26/GX24d-3 224 2.9 ceiling systems underside IP 23
Degree of protection combined with
CA, WA, FS, FT underside IP 44
Data table no. 2001

1 Number of luminaires
En 100 lx 200 lx
Room height H 2.5 m 3.0 m 2.5 m 3.0 m
20 3.8 4.4 7.5 8.8
30 5.3 5.8 11 12
40 6.7 7.2 13 15
Area
50 8.1 8.8 16 18
A
in m2 60 9.4 10 19 20
80 12 13 25 26
100 15 16 30 31
150 22 23 44 46
200 29 30 58 60
Calculation parameters
Reflectance values 0.7 / 0.5 / 0.2
Light loss factor v 0.8
TC-D(EL) C 0 - C 180 Data table TC-D(EL) C 0 - C 180 Data table Height of the working plane e 0.85 m
No. 2001 No. 2001 Suspension length lp 0.00 m
TC-T(EL) TC-T(EL)
DIN 5040: A40 DIN 5040: A40 2 Max. luminaire

spacings for
g1 = Emin : E 1 : 1.5
CIBSE BZ: CIBSE BZ:
BZ6/0.75/BZ5/1.5/BZ4 BZ6/0.75/BZ5/1.5/BZ4 Transverse spacing centre / centre Xmax = 2.0 h
Longitudinal spacing centre / centre Ymax = 2.0 h
NBN L 14-002: NBN L 14-002: h = Luminaire height above working plane
BZ4/1.5/BZ3 BZ4/1.5/BZ3
3 Multiplication factor M 4 Photometric
for no. of luminaires characteristics
Reference M LB L
direct indirect
Exterior DLOR ULOR
2901/TCD13 1.19 0.79 0.79 0.00
applications + 02900 DS(CS. WS) 1.30 0.71 0.67 0.05
29 series down- + 02900 KS(KT) 1.33 0.70 0.65 0.05
2901/TCD18 1.00 0.70 0.70 0.00
lights are a pre- + 02900 DS(CS. WS) 1.11 0.63 0.59 0.04
destined design + 02900 KS(KT) 1.09 0.64 0.60 0.04
2901/TCT26 0.62 0.75 0.75 0.00
element for repre- + 02900 DS(CS. WS) 0.69 0.68 0.64 0.04
sentative entrance + 02900 KS(KT) 0.66 0.70 0.66 0.04
2902/TCD13 0.69 0.67 0.67 0.00
areas. 29 down- + 02900 DS(CS. WS) 0.83 0.60 0.56 0.04
lights in IP 54 + 02900 KS(KT) 0.81 0.61 0.57 0.04
share the same 2902/TCD18 0.57 0.62 0.62 0.00
+ 02900 DS(CS. WS) 0.74 0.49 0.46 0.03
architectural + 02900 KS(KT) 0.74 0.49 0.46 0.03
design as the 2902/TCT26 0.35 0.67 0.67 0.00
+ 02900 DS(CS. WS) 0.40 0.58 0.55 0.03
IP 20 versions and + 02900 KS(KT) 0.38 0.61 0.57 0.03
are suitable for Technical information see page 440.
use in covered
exterior areas,
protected against
moisture and the
intrusion of
insects (see
page 316).
21
Downlights with smooth reflector
or specular facetted reflector,
suitable for DSE applications
Application
Sales areas, reception halls,
corridors, conference
rooms, hotels, restaurants
and residential areas. Suita-
ble for areas with normal
DSE usage.
Optical system
aluminium. Luminance limit-
ed to L 200 cd/m2 at ref-
erence angle 65, thus
corresponding fully to LG 3,
Cat. II. Safe retention by
smooth reflector.
reflector.
Luminaire body
Sheet steel, galvanised, with 2901 W/TCD18 CAT2 1xTC-D18/G24d-2 224 1.7 2901 C/TCD18 CAT2 1xTC-D18/G24d-2 224 1.7
bezel ring made of die-cast 2901 W/TCD26 CAT2 1xTC-D26/G24d-3 224 2.1 2901 C/TCD26 CAT2 1xTC-D26/G24d-3 224 2.1
zinc. Shadow gap between 2902 W/TCD18 CAT2 2xTC-D18/G24d-2 224 2.1 2902 C/TCD18 CAT2 2xTC-D18/G24d-2 224 2.1
bezel ring and reflector rim. 2902 W/TCD26 CAT2 2xTC-D26/G24d-3 224 2.8 2902 C/TCD26 CAT2 2xTC-D26/G24d-3 224 2.8
Ceiling recess mounting by
means of rapid-mounting
springs.
C Chrome bezel ring.
W White bezel ring.
lasts. No. 0307 No. 0307
DIN 5040: A60 DIN 5040: A60
Luminaires can also be sup- CIBSE BZ: CIBSE BZ:
plied with electronic control BZ1 BZ1
gear, reference suffix E, NBN L 14-002: NBN L 14-002:
BZ2/0.8/BZ1 BZ2/0.8/BZ1
e.g. 2901 W/TCD26 CAT2 E.
Cover accessories Luminance limitation

Indications Page prevent mechanically damaged lamps Special downlight reflectors with lumi-
Equipment accessories 26 from falling down. The transparent float nances limited to L 200 cd/m2 at ref-
Recess mounting glass covers safely retained in the erence angle 65 all-round were
accessories 31 spherical bezel ring are fixed without found effective when lighting areas with
Downlights IP 54 316 using tools. normal DSE usage.
22
2901 W-B/TCD18 CAT2
2901 W-B/TCD26 CAT2
1xTC-D18/G24d-2
1xTC-D26/G24d-3
224
224
1.7
2.1
2901 C-B/TCD18 CAT2
2901 C-B/TCD26 CAT2
1xTC-D18/G24d-2
1xTC-D26/G24d-3
224
224
1.7
2.1
652d
2902 W-B/TCD18 CAT2 2xTC-D18/G24d-2 224 2.1 2902 C-B/TCD18 CAT2 2xTC-D18/G24d-2 224 2.1 Degree of protection in closed
2902 W-B/TCD26 CAT2 2xTC-D26/G24d-3 224 2.8 2902 C-B/TCD26 CAT2 2xTC-D26/G24d-3 224 2.8 ceiling systems underside IP 23
CA, WA, underside IP 44
Data table no. 0307

En 100 lx 200 lx
20 5.0 5.8 10 12
30 6.9 7.8 14 16
40 8.8 9.6 18 19
Area
50 11 12 21 23
A
in m2 60 12 13 25 26
80 17 18 35 36
100 20 21 40 42
150 29 30 58 60
200 38 39 76 78

spacings for
g1 = Emin : E 1 : 1.5
CIBSE BZ: CIBSE BZ:
BZ1 BZ1 Transverse spacing centre / centre Xmax = 1.5 h
BZ2/0.8/BZ1 BZ2/0.8/BZ1
Reference M LB L
direct indirect
High-power DLOR ULOR
2901/TCD18 CAT2 1.00 0.53 0.53 0.00
performance 2901/TCD26 CAT2 0.68 0.52 0.52 0.00
For ceilings and 2902/TCD18 CAT2 0.52 0.51 0.51 0.00
2902/TCD26 CAT2 0.38 0.47 0.47 0.00
special lighting
effects in interior Technical information see page 440.
areas, a metal
halide version of
2901 series
downlights is
available.
Lamps with up
to 150 W and
14 000 lumens
can be utilised,
guaranteeing the
right light for
Mechanical glare limitation every situation.
The luminance limitation necessary for
DSE workplaces assures specific light
guiding thanks to highly-specular,
post-anodised reflector surfaces and
efficient lamp shielding.
23
Compact downlights with smooth reflector
or specular facetted reflector
Application
Reception halls, corridors,
conference rooms, can-
teens, lounges, hotels, res-
taurants and residential
areas.
Optical system
aluminium. Safe retention by
smooth reflector.
reflector.
Luminaire body
Sheet steel, galvanised, with
bezel ring made of polycar-
bonate. Shadow gap
between bezel ring and
reflector rim. Easy ceiling
recess mounting by means
of rapid-mounting springs. Reference Lamps/socket Recess kg Reference Lamps/socket Recess kg
C Chrome bezel ring. W opening mm W opening mm
W White bezel ring. 2931 W/TCD10 1xTC-D10/G24d-1 138 0.7 2931 C/TCD10 1xTC-D10/G24d-1 138 0.7
lasts.

e.g. 2931 W/TCD10 E. No. 2002 No. 2002
DIN 5040: A40 DIN 5040: A40
CIBSE BZ: CIBSE BZ:
BZ3/1.5/BZ2 BZ3/1.5/BZ2
NBN L 14-002: NBN L 14-002:
BZ4/1.25/BZ3 BZ4/1.25/BZ3
Decor disk 02930 DS Conical lens 02930 KS

1 piece, consisting of circular glass 1 piece, consisting of circular glass
Indications Page attachment, transparent, with frosted attachment, transparent, with frosted
Equipment accessories 30 centred concentric detail. See page 30 cone. See page 30 for further details.
Recess mounting for further details.
accessories 31
24
2931 W-B/TCD10 1xTC-D10/G24d-1 138 0.7 2931 C-B/TCD10 1xTC-D10/G24d-1 138 0.7 652d
Data table no. 2002

En 100 lx 200 lx
20 9.4 11 19 22
30 13 14 26 29
40 17 18 33 36
Area
50 20 22 40 44
A
in m2 60 24 25 47 51
80 30 32 61 65
100 37 39 74 79
150 54 56 108 113
200 71 73 142 147

spacings for
g1 = Emin : E 1 : 1.5
CIBSE BZ: CIBSE BZ:
BZ3/1.5/BZ2 BZ3/1.5/BZ2 Transverse spacing centre / centre Xmax = 2.6 h
BZ4/1.25/BZ3 BZ4/1.25/BZ3
Reference M LB L
direct indirect
DLOR ULOR
2931 C/TCD10 1.00 0.57 0.57 0.00
+ 02930 DS 1.04 0.55 0.55 0.00
+ 02930 KS 1.04 0.55 0.55 0.00
+ 02930 KT 1.04 0.55 0.55 0.00
2931 C-B/TCD10 1.00 0.57 0.57 0.00
+ 02930 DS 1.04 0.55 0.55 0.00
+ 02930 KS 1.04 0.55 0.55 0.00
+ 02930 KT 1.04 0.55 0.55 0.00
2931 W/TCD10 1.00 0.57 0.57 0.00
+ 02930 DS 1.04 0.55 0.55 0.00
+ 02930 KS 1.04 0.55 0.55 0.00
+ 02930 KT 1.04 0.55 0.55 0.00
2931 W-B/TCD10 1.00 0.57 0.57 0.00
+ 02930 DS 1.04 0.55 0.55 0.00
+ 02930 KS 1.04 0.55 0.55 0.00
+ 02930 KT 1.04 0.55 0.55 0.00
Technical information see page 440.
Conical lens 02930 KT

1 piece, consisting of circular glass
attachment, frosted, with transparent
cone. See page 30 for further details.
25
290
Decorative accessories
The design of 290 series

downlights can be effectively
varied by means of bezel
rings and glass attachments.
All items are retro-fit, mean-
ing that later adaptations
are possible without using
tools and without additional
hassle!
The cross-blade louvre with

highly-specular aluminium
surface, also for retro-fitting,
adds a decorative touch to
the downlight and provides
glare limitation.
Decorative bezel rings Decorative glass attachment with Decor disk 02900 DS
1 piece, spherical, made of die-cast bezel ring 1 piece, consisting of circular float glass
zinc, to be fixed without tools, safe 1 piece, consisting of spherical bezel attachment, transparent, with frosted
retention by means of spring catches. ring and circular float glass attach- centred concentric detail, interior
ment, transparent, with frosted centred opening 100 mm, to be mounted into
02900 C chrome concentric detail, interior opening downlight without tools, safe retention
02900 W white 100 mm, fixed to the bezel ring by means of chromed spring catches.
without tools by means of chromed
retention rods. Safe retention by means
of spring catches.
02900 CS
with chrome decorative bezel ring
02900 WS
with white decorative bezel ring
26
C 0 - C 180 Data table
No. 2003
DIN 5040: A50
CIBSE BZ:
BZ2, BZ3
NBN L 14-002:
BZ3/1.5/BZ2
Data table no. 2003

En 100 lx 200 lx
20 4.8 5.5 9.6 11
30 6.8 7.4 14 15
40 8.6 9.3 17 19
Area
50 11 11 21 23
A
in m2 60 12 13 25 26
80 16 17 32 34
100 20 21 40 41
150 29 30 58 60
200 38 39 76 79
Height of the working plane e 0.85 m
Suspension length lp 0.00 m
2 Max. luminaire

spacings for
g1 = Emin : E 1 : 1.5
Transverse spacing centre / centre Xmax = 1.8 h
Conical lenses For rapid mounting Cross-blade louvre 02900 X Longitudinal spacing centre / centre Ymax = 1.8 h
1 piece, consisting of circular glass The cross-blade louvre support can for 290 downlights. h = Luminaire height above working plane
attachment with cone, to be mounted be retro-fitted by means of a simple 1 piece, consisting of parabolic lamella 3 Multiplication factor M 4 Photometric
into downlight without tools, safe screw. The louvre itself is easily unit made of highly-specular reflection- for no. of luminaires characteristics
Reference M LB L
retention by means of chromed spring snapped onto the support without intensified aluminium and support. direct indirect
catches. using tools. Can also be used in combination with 2901/TCD13 + 02900 X 1.18 0.59
DLOR
0.59
ULOR
0.00
further decorative accessories. 2901/TCD18 + 02900 X 1.00 0.52 0.52 0.00
02900 KS frosted cone, 2901/TCT26 + 02900 X 0.59 0.59 0.59 0.00
2902/TCD13 + 02900 X 0.69 0.53 0.53 0.00
transparent glass attachment. 2902/TCD18 + 02900 X 0.63 0.43 0.43 0.00
02900 KT transparent cone, 2902/TCT26 + 02900 X 0.33 0.53 0.53 0.00
frosted glass attachment. Technical information see page 440.
27
290
Accessories for higher degrees of protection
Transparent glass covers

and Fresnel lenses for
tool-free installation in 290
series downlights achieve
the increased degree of pro-
tection IP 44 (underside).
In addition, Fresnel lenses

also create optical effects.
The transparent versions
intensify the narrow-angle
distribution effect of the
reflector, the frosted ver-
sions on the other hand
accentuate the 29 down-
lights with additional light
scattering effect.
Glass covers Transparent Fresnel lenses Frosted Fresnel lenses

To achieve IP 44 (underside). To achieve IP 44 (underside). To achieve IP 44 (underside).
1 piece, consisting of cover and bezel 1 piece, consisting of Fresnel lens and 1 piece, consisting of Fresnel lens
ring. Cover in transparent float glass, bezel ring. Fresnel lens in transparent and bezel ring. Fresnel lens in frosted
integrated into spherical decorative float glass, integrated into spherical float glass, integrated into spherical
bezel ring, to be fixed without tools, decorative bezel ring, to be fixed with- decorative bezel ring, to be fixed with-
safe retention by means of spring out tools, safe retention by means of out tools, safe retention by means of
catches. spring catches. spring catches.
Not suitable for 2902/TCT26 with Not suitable for 2902/TCT26 with Not suitable for 2902/TCT26 with
inductive ballasts. inductive ballasts. inductive ballasts.
02901 CA with chrome decorative 02901 C-FT with chrome decorative 02901 C-FS with chrome decorative
bezel ring. bezel ring. bezel ring.
02901 WA with white decorative 02901 W-FT with white decorative 02901 W-FS with white decorative
bezel ring. bezel ring. bezel ring.
28
Cover accessories
also prevent mechanically
damaged lamps from falling
down highly recommended
e.g. in the food industry, gro-
cery shops or restaurants.
2911 series
29 downlights in IP 54 all-round are recommended for
ceilings which are not fully closed, e.g. strip ceilings.
The fully closed luminaire body made of die-cast aluminium
offers protection against the ingression of dust and humidity
in the ceiling void. Transparent glass covers or Fresnel lenses,
described opposite, close the downlight from the underside.
Downlight series 2911 in IP 54 all-round is described from

page 316 on.
29
293
Decorative accessories
293 series compact down-

lights can be further visually
enhanced by means of deco-
rative accessories. Decor
disks and conical lenses are
available.
All accessories can be retro-

fitted to the functional slot of
the basic downlight without
using tools by means of
chromed spring catches.
Decor disk 02930 DS Conical lens 02930 KS Conical lens 02930 KT

1 piece, consisting of circular glass 1 piece, consisting of circular glass 1 piece, consisting of circular glass
attachment, transparent, with frosted attachment, transparent, with frosted attachment, frosted, with transparent
centred concentric detail, interior cone, to be mounted into downlight cone, to be mounted into downlight
opening 65 mm, to be mounted into without tools, safe retention by means without tools, safe retention by means
downlight without tools, safe retention of chromed spring catches. of chromed spring catches.
by means of chromed spring catches.
30
290, 293
Mounting accessories
Mounting accessories
290 or 293 series down-
lights can be installed in
almost all suspended ceiling
systems due to their low
heights of only 120 mm or
90 mm.
Perfectly adapted installation

accessories are available for
mounting in strip or concrete
ceilings. Mounting plate
accessories made of sheet
steel are recommended in
case the ceiling tiles have
low load-bearing capability
or little impression resistance.
Mounting plate Mounting case Sealed housing

1 piece, sheet steel, 1 mm, fully gal- 1 piece, sheet steel, 1 mm, white, with For mounting of downlights in concrete
vanised, to mount downlights in sus- press-folded sides and integrated angle ceilings. 1 piece, sheet steel, 1 mm,
pended ceilings or in closed ceiling brackets. For strip ceilings in 100 mm fully galvanised, with two connection
systems (wood, gypsum plaster or module with 16 mm shadow gap. openings 37 mm and four fixing
similar) with low load-bearing capability brackets to be fixed on the panel.
or little impression resistance. 02900/284 for 290, 291, ceiling
recess opening 284 x 284 mm, 02900/150 for 290/291,
02900/625 for 290, 291, for 02930/184 for 293, ceiling recess total height 150 mm
mounting in ceilings in module opening 184 x 184 mm (not illustrated), (not for CAT2 versions)
625 mm, 02930/100 for 2931,
02900/600 for 290, 291, for 02900 LS Light emission shield for total height 100 mm.
mounting in ceilings in module 600 mm, 290CAT2, (not illustrated).
02930/625 for 293, for mounting 02930 LS Light emission shield for
in ceilings in module 625 mm, 293, (not illustrated).
02930/600 for 293, for mounting
in ceilings in module 600 mm.
02930/100 02900/150
286 172
22
100
90 138
59
23
200 (0293)
450 (0290)
228
188
595 (/600) 60
620 (/625) 324
344
31
32
1280, 128 series TRILUX down-
lights stand for efficiency
1281 and technical know-how.
A careful selection of quality
materials ensures long serv-
ice life and high technical
performance. Options for
facetted reflectors are avail-
able for the 128 series.
1280 1281
Downlights for ceiling re- Downlights for ceiling re-
cess opening 185 mm. cess opening 240 mm.
Predestined for low to For application areas with
medium illuminances up to increased light requirements.
300 lx. With white or highly- With white or highly-specular
specular reflectors made of reflectors made of UV-stabi-
UV-stabilised polycarbonate lised polycarbonate and
and perfectly integrated perfectly integrated colour-
colour-adapted or contrast- adapted or contrast-forming
forming bezel rings. bezel rings.
Page 34 Page 36
33
Downlights with white or highly-specular reflector,
recess opening 185 mm
Application
areas.
Optical system
Reflector made of UV-stabi-
lised polycarbonate.
W white, for a uniform
light distribution. With per-
fectly integrated white bezel
ring.
HW aluminised, highly-
specular, for narrow/wide-
angle light distribution. With
perfectly integrated white
bezel ring.
H aluminised, highly-
perfectly integrated highly-
Reference Lamps/socket Recess kg
specular bezel ring.
W opening mm
Options for facetted reflec- 1280 W/1TCD13 1xTC-D13/G24d-1 185 0.9
tors are available for the 1280 W/1TCD18 1xTC-D18/G24d-2 185 0.9
128 series. Please add 1280 W/2TCD13 2xTC-D13/G24d-1 185 1.3
the reference -F to the 1280 W/2TCD18 2xTC-D18/G24d-2 185 1.3
main code,
e.g. 1280 H-F/2TCD18.
130
100
Luminaire body
1-25
Sheet steel, galvanised. Ceil-
7
185-190
ing recess mounting, thanks 315
to integrated spring brack-

ets, does not require tools.
20
TC-D(EL) C 0 - C 180 Data table
ing for wires up to 2.5 mm2, Golden attraction No. 0300
including earth connection Prestigious applications call for corresponding luminaires. DIN 5040: A40
terminal. With low-loss bal- The 128 series downlights are optionally available with CIBSE BZ:
lasts. gold-coloured reflectors and matched bezel rings, com- BZ4
bining appealing design and excellent photometrics. NBN L 14-002:
BZ4
e.g. 1280 W/1TCD13 E. Lighting installation with 96 downlights
1280/2 TCD 18 ...with VVG ...with EVG
Low-loss ballast Electronic control gear
System rating per luminaire / W 48 36

Total system rating / W 4 608 3 456
Annual operation / h 3 120 3 120
Annual energy consumption / kWh 14 377 10 783
Energy cost kWh / 0.11 0.11
Annual energy cost / 1 582.00 1 187.00
Annual energy savings / kWh 3 594

Annual cost savings / 395.00
Pay-back period 3 4 years
Electronic control gear Prismatic covers

Electronic control gear represents future-fair operating elec- Mechanical lamp protection and an
tronics for fluorescent lamps. With practice-oriented advan- increased underside degree of protec-
tages electronic control gear creates decisive conditions for tion IP 44 are realised thanks to option-
Indications Page energy saving, environmental compatibility, comfort and ally available covers, made of non-yel-
Prismatic covers 35 safety. lowing plastic, to be fixed without using
Lamp characteristics 444 tools.
34
1280 HW/1TCD13
1280 HW/1TCD18
1xTC-D13/G24d-1
1xTC-D18/G24d-2
185
185
0.9
0.9
1280 H/1TCD13
1280 H/1TCD18
1xTC-D13/G24d-1
1xTC-D18/G24d-2
185
185
0.9
0.9
652d
1280 HW/2TCD13 2xTC-D13/G24d-1 185 1.3 1280 H/2TCD13 2xTC-D13/G24d-1 185 1.3 Degree of protection in closed
1280 HW/2TCD18 2xTC-D18/G24d-2 185 1.3 1280 H/2TCD18 2xTC-D18/G24d-2 185 1.3 ceiling systems underside IP 23
01280 O, 01280 P underside IP 44
130 130 Data table no. 0300

100
100
1-25
1-25
7
7
185-190 185-190 En 100 lx 200 lx

315 315 Room height H 2.5 m 3.0 m 2.5 m 3.0 m
20 4.1 4.8 8.1 9.6
30 5.6 6.3 11 13
40 7.1 7.8 14 16
Area
50 8.6 9.3 17 19
A
60 10 11 20 22
20
in m2
20
80 13 14 26 28
100 16 17 32 34
150 24 25 48 50
200 31 32 61 63

spacings for
g1 = Emin : E 1 : 1.5
CIBSE BZ: CIBSE BZ:
BZ4/1.25/BZ3 BZ4/1.25/BZ3
Reference M LB L
direct indirect
DLOR ULOR
1280 W/1TCD13 1.36 0.65 0.65 0.00
1280 W/1TCD18 1.12 0.59 0.59 0.00
1280 W/2TCD13 0.72 0.61 0.61 0.00
1280 W/2TCD18 0.60 0.56 0.56 0.00
1280 HW/1TCD13 1.23 0.72 0.72 0.00
1280 HW/1TCD18 1.00 0.66 0.66 0.00
1280 HW/2TCD13 0.65 0.68 0.68 0.00
1280 HW/2TCD18 0.53 0.62 0.62 0.00
1280 H/1TCD13 1.23 0.72 0.72 0.00
1280 H/1TCD18 1.00 0.66 0.66 0.00
1280 H/2TCD13 0.65 0.68 0.68 0.00
1280 H/2TCD18 0.53 0.62 0.62 0.00
Prismatic covers
Plastic, with concentric detail. To be
mounted into the downlight without
tools, safe retention with bayonet
system. IP 44 from underside.
01280 O opal, 1 piece
01280 P transparent, 1 piece
35
Downlights with white or highly-specular reflector,
recess opening 240 mm
Application
areas.
Optical system
Reflector made of UV-stabi-
lised polycarbonate.
W white, for a uniform
light distribution. With per-
fectly integrated white bezel
ring.
HW aluminised, highly-
perfectly integrated white
bezel ring.
H aluminised, highly-
perfectly integrated highly-
specular bezel ring.
W opening mm
Options for facetted reflec- 1281 W/1TCD18 1xTC-D18/G24d-2 240 1.2
tors are available for the 1281 W/1TCD26 1xTC-D26/G24d-3 240 1.6
128 series. Please add 1281 W/2TCD18 2xTC-D18/G24d-2 240 1.6
the reference -F to the 1281 W/2TCD26 2xTC-D26/G24d-3 240 2.4
main code,
e.g. 1280 H-F/2TCD18.
140
125
Luminaire body
Sheet steel, galvanised. Ceil-
1-25
10
ing recess mounting, thanks 240
to integrated spring brack- 394
ets, does not require tools.
Luminaires supplied ready 28
ing for wires up to 2.5 mm2, Golden attraction No. 0302
including earth connection Prestigious applications call for corresponding luminaires. DIN 5040: A40
terminal. With low-loss bal- The 128 series downlights are optionally available with CIBSE BZ:
lasts. gold-coloured reflectors and matched bezel rings, com- BZ4
bining appealing design and excellent photometrics. NBN L 14-002:
BZ4
e.g. 1281 W/1TCD18 E.
Ecological electronics! Prismatic covers

Electronic control gear embodies three characteristics dear Plastic, with concentric detail. To be
to the heart: Economy Efficiency Ecology. A sensible use mounted into the downlight without
of natural resources helps to realise long-term environmental tools, safe retention with bayonet
Indications Page benefits on the one hand, with material and fiscal advanta- system. IP 44 from underside.
Prismatic covers 36 ges on the other hand. 01281 O opal, 1 piece
Lamp characteristics 444 01281 P transparent, 1 piece
36
1281 HW/1TCD18
1281 HW/1TCD26
1xTC-D18/G24d-2
1xTC-D26/G24d-3
240
240
1.2
1.6
1281 H/1TCD18
1281 H/1TCD26
1xTC-D18/G24d-2
1xTC-D26/G24d-3
240
240
1.2
1.6
652d
1281 HW/2TCD18 2xTC-D18/G24d-2 240 1.6 1281 H/2TCD18 2xTC-D18/G24d-2 240 1.6 Degree of protection in closed
1281 HW/2TCD26 2xTC-D26/G24d-3 240 2.4 1281 H/2TCD26 2xTC-D26/G24d-3 240 2.4 ceiling systems underside IP 23
01281 O, 01281 P underside IP 44
140 140 Data table no. 0302

125
125
1-25
1-25
En 100 lx 200 lx
10
10

240 240
394 394 20 2.7 3.2 5.4 6.4
30 3.7 4.2 7.3 8.7
40 4.7 5.2 9.3 11
Area
50 5.8 6.2 12 13
A
in m2 60 6.7 7.4 14 15
80 8.7 9.4 18 19
100 11 12 22 23
28
28
150 16 17 32 33
200 21 22 41 42

spacings for
g1 = Emin : E 1 : 1.5
CIBSE BZ: CIBSE BZ:
BZ4/1.25/BZ3 BZ4/1.25/BZ3
Reference M LB L
direct indirect
DLOR ULOR
1281 W/1TCD18 1.53 0.65 0.65 0.00
1281 W/1TCD26 1.12 0.59 0.59 0.00
1281 W/2TCD18 0.81 0.61 0.61 0.00
1281 W/2TCD26 0.60 0.56 0.56 0.00
1281 HW/1TCD18 1.38 0.72 0.72 0.00
1281 HW/1TCD26 1.00 0.66 0.66 0.00
1281 HW/2TCD18 0.73 0.68 0.68 0.00
1281 HW/2TCD26 0.53 0.62 0.62 0.00
1281 H/1TCD18 1.38 0.72 0.72 0.00
1281 H/1TCD26 1.00 0.66 0.66 0.00
1281 H/2TCD18 0.73 0.68 0.68 0.00
1281 H/2TCD26 0.53 0.62 0.62 0.00
Prismatic covers
Mechanical lamp protection and an
increased underside degree of protec-
tion IP 44 are realised thanks to option-
ally available covers, made of non-yel-
lowing plastic, to be fixed without using
tools.
37
38
129, 129 and 367 series
recessed luminaires with
367 radial specular louvres are
suitable for versatile use due
to their characteristic look
and their brilliant surface in
combination with higher light
output and limited ceiling
space required. All louvres
consist of concentric ring
reflectors and V-wedges
radially arranged between
the two reflectors. 129 367
129 series circular reces- 367 luminaires are con-
sed luminaires with radial ceived for architecturally
specular louvre are an ar- interesting installations with
chitectural alternative to illuminances of 300 lx up to
conventional downlights. 500 lx. They can be equipped
Predestined for low up to with two or three lumen-rich
medium illuminances because compact fluorescent lamps
of the consequent twin-lamp TCD 26 W.
equipment with compact
fluorescent lamps.
Page 40 Page 41
39
Circular recessed luminaires
with radial specular louvre
Application
Offices, sales areas, show-
rooms, reception halls, corri-
dors and financial institu-
tions.
Optical system
Highly-specular radial louvre
made of aluminium, for nar-
row/wide-angle light distribu-
tion, aluminised. Radial lou-
vre consisting of interior and
exterior ring reflector with
V-wedges radially arranged
between the two reflectors.
Safe louvre retention by
means of spring catches, to
be used without tools. With
highly-specular overhead
reflector made of aluminium,
upper section of 129
series reflector with addition-
al structural effect.
Luminaire body
Consisting of ceiling ring Reference Lamps/socket Recess kg Reference Lamps/socket Recess kg
made of solvent-free pow- W opening mm W opening mm
der-coated sheet steel, 1295/2TCD13 2xTC-D13/G24d-1 200 1.2 1296/2TCD18 2xTC-D18/G24d-2 236 1.2
white, and gear tray made of 1295/2TCD18 2xTC-D18/G24d-2 200 1.2 1296/2TCD26 2xTC-D26/G24d-3 236 1.2
sheet steel, joined together
by three fixing brackets.
Ceiling mounting by means 155 155
151
151
of integrated brake latch
system.
10-30
10-30
5
200 236
Electrical connection 362 425

for connection. 129 with
3-pole, 367 with 5-pole
for wires up to 2.5 mm2,
lasts.
No. 2007 No. 2007
Luminaires can also be sup- DIN 5040: A60 DIN 5040: A60
plied with electronic control CIBSE BZ: CIBSE BZ:
gear, reference suffix E, BZ1 BZ1
e.g. 3672N C-RPH/TCD26 E. NBN L 14-002: NBN L 14-002:
BZ4/1.25/BZ3 BZ4/1.25/BZ3
= 30
Brake-latch fixing Mechanical glare limitation

The 129/367 series are equipped The lamps in the 129/367 series
with rapid-mounting fixing accessories. are out of sight under flat viewing
During installation the downlight is posi- angles exceeding 60. This character-
tioned in the ceiling and locked by istic also meets increased require-
Indications Page means of catch springs, without using ments as to direct glare limitation in
Lamp characteristics 444 tools. offices.
40
W opening mm
3672N C-RPH/TCD26 2xTC-D26/G24d-3 304 3.6
3673N C-RPH/TCD26 3xTC-D26/G24d-3 304 4.4 652d
160
Data table no. 2007
152
En 100 lx 200 lx
10-30

304 20 3.3 3.7 6.7 7.4
535 30 4.8 5.1 9.6 10
40 6.1 6.5 12 13
Area
50 7.5 8.0 15 16
A
in m2 60 8.8 9.3 18 19
80 12 12 23 24
100 14 15 29 29
150 21 22 42 44
200 28 29 56 57
TC-D(EL) C 0 - C 180 Data table Height of the working plane e 0.85 m
No. 2007 Suspension length lp 0.00 m
DIN 5040: A60 2 Max. luminaire

spacings for
g1 = Emin : E 1 : 1.5
CIBSE BZ:
BZ1 Transverse spacing centre / centre Xmax = 1.4 h
NBN L 14-002: h = Luminaire height above working plane
BZ4/1.25/BZ3
Reference M LB L
direct indirect
DLOR ULOR
1295/2TCD13 1.04 0.47 0.47 0.00
1295/2TCD18 1.00 0.36 0.36 0.00
1296/2TCD18 0.95 0.38 0.38 0.00
1296/2TCD26 0.70 0.34 0.34 0.00
3672N C-RPH/TCD26 0.49 0.49 0.49 0.00
3673N C-RPH/TCD26 0.35 0.45 0.45 0.00
Mounting plate
1 piece, sheet steel, 1 mm, fully galvanised. Recommended
for mounting of 367 luminaires in ceilings made of wood,
gypsum plaster or similar with low load-bearing capability or
little impression resistance.
02062/600 for ceiling plates in module 600 mm.
02062/625 for ceiling plates in module 625 mm.
41
42
PSH, PSG Circular luminaires PSH and
PSG place distinctive archi-
tectural accents. Functional
elements of the luminaire
system are turned into deco-
rative design components.
All luminaires of this series

are characterised by the effi-
cient primary optics for eco-
nomic compact fluorescent
lamps while the secondary
systems differ depending on Combined surface- Combined surface- Combined surface-
the respective version. mounted and recessed mounted and suspended mounted and suspended
luminaires PSH luminaires PSG luminaires PSH
The design is deter- PSG luminaires with partially With a secondary
mined by the striking frosted glass ring shine out system differing from
secondary facetted reflector. thanks to the decorative the PSG system. Variable
Fully compliant to CIBSE LG 3, secondary system. The lumi- mounting of the facetted ring
Cat. II in combination with naires can be used as sur- between the primary optics
the primary system. face-mounted luminaires and ceiling reflector. Recom-
or in combination with wire mended for normal DSE
suspension accessories. usage.
43
Surface-mounted and recessed luminaires
with double-reflection PSH system
Application
rooms, foyers, stairwells and
financial institutions. Suitable
for areas with normal DSE
usage.
Primary optics
Consisting of circular reflec-
tor, lamp support and deco-
rative glass ring. Highly-
specular reflector made of
aluminium. Decorative ring
made of transparent float
glass which envelops the
reflector. To be fixed to the
secondary reflector by
means of four chromed
profile rods.
Secondary facetted
reflector
Highly-specular, made of
aluminium. The edge of the
secondary facetted reflector
covers the grid in case of
recess mounting of the lumi-
naire body.
Luminaire body
Circular, made of solvent-
free powder-coated sheet
steel, white. Secondary
facetted reflector and prima-
ry optics are fixed to the
luminaire body by means of
spring catches and wire
brackets to be used without
tools. Tool-free electrical
connection by means of
plug-in coupling.
lasts.

e.g. 5383 PSH/TCD26 E.
Indications Page
44
652d
Data table no. 2008

En 300 lx 500 lx
20 4.5 5.7 7.5 9.6
30 6.1 7.6 10 13
40 7.7 9.3 13 16
Area
50 9.4 11 16 18
A
in m2 60 11 13 18 21
80 14 16 24 26
100 17 19 29 32
150 25 27 42 45
200 32 35 54 58
Reference Lamps/socket kg
2 Max. luminaire

spacings for
g1 = Emin : E 1 : 1.5
W Transverse spacing centre / centre Xmax = 2.0 h
5383 PSH/2xTCF24 2xTC-F24/2G10 7.7 h = Luminaire height above working plane
5383 PSH/TCD26 3xTC-D26/G24d-3 9.5
Reference M LB L
593 direct indirect
570 DLOR ULOR
5383PSH/2xTCF24 1.00 0.70 0.62 0.08
5383PSH/TCD26 0.82 0.57 0.51 0.06
300
272
260
E
160
400

No. 2008 Fixing accessories 05380 Recess accessories 05380/600
DIN 5040: B50 1 set (2 pieces) of mounting rails for For 5383 luminaires, consisting of
CIBSE BZ: 5383 luminaires for ceilings with fixing accessories 05380 and mount-
BZ2/0.75/BZ1 cut-out recess openings. Ceiling sys- ing case, sheet steel, white.
NBN L 14-002: tems with low load-bearing capability 05380/600 for module 600.
BZ2/0.8/BZ1
or little impression resistance have to 05380/625 for module 625.
be reinforced additionally.
45
Surface-mounted and suspended luminaires
with double-reflection PSG or PSH system
Application
rooms, foyers, stairwells and
financial institutions.
PSH also suitable for
areas with normal DSE
usage.
Primary optics
Consisting of circular reflec-
tor, lamp support and deco-
rative glass ring. Highly-
specular reflector made of
aluminium. Decorative ring
made of transparent float
glass which envelops the
reflector. To be fixed to the
luminaire body by means of
four chromed profile rods.
Secondary optics
PSG with decorative
element made of satin-finish
float glass.
PSH with concave, high-
ly-specular facetted second-
ary reflector ring, made of
aluminium. Variable mount-
ing between the primary
optics and ceiling reflector.
Ceiling reflector
To cover the luminaire body,
highly-specular, made of
aluminium.
Luminaire body
Circular, made of solvent-
free powder-coated sheet
steel, white. The primary and
secondary optics are fixed
to the luminaire body by
means of flat head bolt and
wire brackets. Tool-free Reference Lamps/socket kg
electrical connection by W
means of plug-in connection. 5393N PSG/2xTCF24 2xTC-F24/2G10 7.9
5393N PSG/TCD26 3xTC-D26/G24d-3 8.6
for connection. With 4-pole Wire suspension
plug-in connection terminal 05390 SN
for wires up to 2.5 mm2, For luminaires
including earth connection 5393N PSG, 5393 PSH.
terminal. With low-loss bal- Height continually adjustable,
lasts. consisting of:
2 steel wires, galvanised,
Luminaires can also be sup- 1 mm, 4150 mm long,
plied with electronic control for suspension lengths of
gear, reference suffix E, up to 2 m,
e.g. 5393N PSG/TCD26 E. 1 circular ceiling fixing plate
220 mm including ceil-
Further lamp options upon ing trim cap, sheet steel,
request. steel-grey,
4 luminaire fixing clamps,
1 connection terminal
TC-D C 0 - C 180 Data table
TC-F No. 2009 5 x 2.5 mm2,
DIN 5040: C42 2 strain relief systems,
CIBSE BZ: 1 connection wire set
BZ3/1.5/BZ4 4 x 0.75 mm2, 2300 mm
NBN L 14-002: long.
BZ4
Indications Page
46
652d
Data table no. 2009

En 300 lx 500 lx
20 5.7 9.2 9.5 15
30 7.7 12 13 20
40 9.6 14 16 23
Area
50 12 16 19 27
A
in m2 60 13 18 22 31
80 17 22 29 37
100 21 26 35 44
150 30 36 50 60
200 39 46 64 76
2 Max. luminaire

spacings for
g1 = Emin : E 1 : 1.5
5393 PSH/2xTCF24 2xTC-F24/2G10 6.8 h = Luminaire height above working plane
5393 PSH/TCD26 3xTC-D26/G24d-3 7.6
Reference M LB L
direct indirect
Wire suspension DLOR ULOR
5393N PSG/2xTCF24 1.13 0.64 0.43 0.21
05390 SC 5393N PSG/TCD26 0.87 0.51 0.34 0.17
For fixing 5393 luminaires 5393PSH/2xTCF24 1.00 0.72 0.48 0.24
5393PSH/TCD26 0.79 0.58 0.39 0.19
to inclined ceilings. Height
continually adjustable up to Technical information see page 440.
2.5 m. With 4 pivotable ceil-

ing fixing elements.
Cover 05390 K
(not illustrated) 1 piece,
sheet steel, steel-grey. For
the ceiling-oriented covering
of the suspended luminaire
body 5393 PSH.
TC-D C 0 - C 180 Data table

TC-F No. 2009
DIN 5040: B52
CIBSE BZ:
BZ1
NBN L 14-002:
BZ2
47
ROT, ROS
ROD, ROB
48
Public halls or represent-
ative interiors are just a
few examples of room
architectures which can
be put into the right light
by means of appealing
rotationally symmetrical
suspended luminaires.
Direct or direct/indirect
reflectors as well as opti-
cal systems with deco-
rative indirect light compo-
nent are winning light- ROT ROS ROD ROB
guiding components. ROT features attractive The direct light distribution Suspended luminaires ROD As compared to the ROD
suspended luminaires with of the ROS luminaires cre- with direct double parabolic versions, ROB luminaires
refraction reflectors offering ates a pleasant atmosphere reflector offer additional have profiled prisms in the
a direct light component of thanks to glare-free light. planning scope with three upper section of the reflector
85 % compared to 15 % indi- The similarity with the ROT different construction sizes which provide additional
rect light. The striking design series is clearly accentuated and lumen packages ranging decorative indirect light. The
with chromed construction by the corresponding design from 1200 lm up to 19000 lm. working plane is illuminated
components fits perfectly in of the luminaire body and All reflectors can also be by the partially facetted
technical architectures. suspensions. equipped with decor disks. aluminium reflector just like
with ROD.
Page 50 Page 52 Page 54 Page 56
49
with refraction reflector ROT
Application
Public rooms and halls,
financial institutions, station
and airport foyers, trade fair
and exhibition halls and rep-
resentative entrance areas.
Production halls with a low
degree of pollution.
Optical system
Parabolic transparent refrac-
tion reflector made of acrylic
glass, with photometrically
effective prismatic system
for well-balanced ceiling illu-
mination by means of 15 %
indirect light component.
Luminaire body
Consisting of circular base
housing and anti-glare ring,
joined by functional chromed
steel rods, shaped around
the reflector form. Base
housing made of aluminium,
finished in graphite-grey
structuralised paint, to
house the electrical compo-
nents. Anti-glare ring made
of specular anodised alumini-
um, adding a decorative
touch to the refraction
reflector. With continually
adjustable wire suspension,
for suspension length of up
to 3.40 m.
for connection, with freely
suspended connection
cable.
TCT with electronic
control gear.
HIE with inductive
ballast.
With 3-pole plug-in connec-
tion terminal for wires up to
2.5 mm2, including earth
connection terminal, located
on the ceiling fixing plate of
the wire suspensions.
Parabolic prismatic optics

Suspended luminaires with transparent
refraction reflector made of PMMA
shine out thanks to light output ratios in
excess of 90 %. A multitude of lumen
Indications Page packages is available.
50
652d
Data table no. 2010

En 300 lx 500 lx
20 2.0 3.3 3.3 5.6
30 2.6 4.0 4.3 6.6
40 3.2 4.6 5.3 7.6
Area
50 3.8 5.1 6.3 8.5
A
in m2 60 4.3 5.8 7.2 9.6
80 5.5 7.0 9.2 12
100 6.6 8.3 11 14
150 9.3 11 16 19
200 12 14 20 23
2 Max. luminaire

spacings for
g1 = Emin : E 1 : 1.5
W Reference Lamps/socket kg Transverse spacing centre / centre Xmax = 1.8 h
5361 ROT/TCT42 E 1xTC-TEL42/GX24q-4 4.4 W h = Luminaire height above working plane
5361 ROT/HIE100 1xHIE100/E27* 6.7 5363 ROT/1xHIE250 1xHIE250/E40* 8.5
* Only lamps suitable for operation in open luminaires. * Only lamps suitable for operation in open luminaires. for no. of luminaires characteristics
Reference M LB L
direct indirect
DLOR ULOR
5361ROT/TCT42 E 2.41 0.94 0.77 0.17
5361ROT/HIE100 1.00 0.93 0.77 0.16
5363ROT/1xHIE250 0.42 0.91 0.71 0.20
TC-TEL C 0 - C 180 Data table HIE C 0 - C 180 Data table

HIE No. 2010 No. 2010
DIN 5040: A50 DIN 5040: A50
CIBSE BZ: CIBSE BZ:
BZ4 BZ4/2/BZ5
NBN L 14-002: NBN L 14-002:
BZ4 BZ4/2/BZ5
51
with specular reflector ROS
Application
Optical system
Parabolic reflector made of
post-anodised aluminium.
Highly-specular outer sur-
face, semi-specular inner
surface. The cut-off angle is
at least 30.
Luminaire body
housing made of aluminium,
finished in graphite-grey
structuralised paint, to
nents. With four chromed
steel rods, for the connec-
tion to the steel wires. With
continually adjustable wire
suspension, for suspension
length of up to 3.40 m.
cable.
TCT with electronic
control gear.
HIE with inductive
ballast.
the wire suspensions.
Design and technology

Suspended luminaires ROS
represent design and tech-
nology: on the one hand the
supporting construction
made of steel and chrome
harmonises perfectly with
the aluminium reflector with
highly-specular outer surface
and a semi-specular inner
surface which is examplary
for a modern material
design. On the other hand
the narrow or narrow/wide-
angle light distribution
depending on the luminaire
size creates a pleasing
atmosphere thanks to
glare-free light. Superb
working efficiencies guaran-
tee the rentability of this
Indications Page lighting concept.
52
652d
Data table no. 2011

En 300 lx 500 lx
20 1.7 2.8 2.9 4.6
30 2.3 3.3 3.9 5.6
40 2.9 3.8 4.8 6.4
Area
50 3.5 4.3 5.8 7.2
A
in m2 60 4.0 5.0 6.7 8.3
80 5.2 6.3 8.7 10
100 6.3 7.6 10 13
150 8.9 10 15 17
200 12 13 20 22
2 Max. luminaire

spacings for
g1 = Emin : E 1 : 1.5
5361 ROS/TCT42 E 1xTC-TEL42/GX24q-4 4.4 h = Luminaire height above working plane
5361 ROS/HIE100 1xHIE100/E27* 6.7
* Only lamps suitable for operation in open luminaires. for no. of luminaires characteristics
Reference M LB L
direct indirect
DLOR ULOR
5361ROS/TCT42 E 2.57 0.77 0.77 0.00
+ 05361ROS-DS 2.78 0.72 0.72 0.00
5361ROS/HIE100 1.00 0.82 0.82 0.00
+ 05361ROS-DS 1.06 0.77 0.77 0.00
TC-T C 0 - C 180 Data table

HIE No. 2011 Accessory 05361 ROS-DS
DIN 5040: A50 Circular float glass panel
CIBSE BZ: 450 mm, with interior opening
BZ2 230 mm, to be fixed to the alu-
NBN L 14-002: minium reflector by means of
BZ3
chromed retention rods.
53
Suspended luminaires direct
with double parabolic reflector ROD
Application
Optical system
Double parabolic aluminium
reflector for rotationally sym-
metrical direct light distribu-
tion. Reflector made of
post-anodised aluminium
with a surface purity of
99.98 %, highly-specular
inner surface, semi-specular
outer surface, facetting in
lower reflector section. The
cut-off angle is at least 30.
Luminaire body
housing, extruded aluminium
profile, silver-coated, to
nents. With vertical cooling
ribs and adapted longitudinal
rods, for connection of the
wire suspension. Integrated
wire suspension with ceiling
fixing plate and cover plate
made of sheet steel, graph-
ite-grey. Continually adjusta-
ble wire suspension, for sus-
pension length of up to
3.40 m.
cable.
TCT with electronic
control gear.
HIE with inductive Reference Lamps/socket kg
ballast. W
With 3-pole plug-in connec- 5361 ROD/TCT18 E 1xTC-TEL18/GX24q-2 1.4
tion terminal for wires up to 5361 ROD/TCT26 E 1xTC-TEL26/GX24q-3 1.4
the wire suspension.

Decor disks No. 2012
Float glass, 282 mm, 395 mm or DIN 5040: A60
505 mm for ROD and ROB. Fixing by CIBSE BZ:
means of chromed retention rods. BZ1
05361 ROB/D-DS for 5361 NBN L 14-002:
BZ1
Indications Page 05363 ROB/D-DS for 5363
Lamp characteristics 444 05365 ROB/D-DS for 5365
54
652d
Data table no. 2012

En 300 lx 500 lx
20 1.3 1.6 2.2 2.7
30 1.9 2.1 3.2 3.5
40 2.4 2.6 4.1 4.4
Area
50 3.0 3.2 5.0 5.3
A
in m2 60 3.5 3.6 5.9 5.9
80 4.7 5.0 7.9 8.3
100 5.8 6.3 9.7 10
150 8.5 9.0 14 15
200 11 12 19 20
Reference Lamps/socket kg Reference Lamps/socket kg
W W
2 Max. luminaire

spacings for
g1 = Emin : E 1 : 1.5
5363 ROD/1xTCT42 E 1xTC-TEL42/GX24q-4 2.2 5365 ROD/2xTCT42 E 2xTC-TEL42/GX24q-4 5.0 Transverse spacing centre / centre Xmax = 0.8 h
5363 ROD/1xHIE70 1xHIE70/E27* 3.5 5365 ROD/1xHIE150 1xHIE150/E27* 6.9 h = Luminaire height above working plane
5363 ROD/1xHIE100 1xHIE100/E27* 3.9 5365 ROD/1xHIE250 1xHIE250/E40* 8.6
Reference M LB L
direct indirect
DLOR ULOR
5361ROD/TCT18 E 6.49 0.78 0.78 0.00
+ 05361ROB/D-DS 7.21 0.70 0.70 0.00
5361ROD/TCT26 E 4.38 0.77 0.77 0.00
+ 05361ROB/D-DS 4.71 0.72 0.72 0.00
5363ROD/1xTCT42 E 2.35 0.81 0.81 0.00
+ 05363ROB/D-DS 2.62 0.73 0.73 0.00
5363ROD/1xHIE70 1.42 0.78 0.78 0.00
+ 05363ROB/D-DS 1.59 0.70 0.70 0.00
5363ROD/1xHIE100 1.00 0.78 0.78 0.00
+ 05363ROB/D-DS 1.12 0.70 0.70 0.00
5365ROD/2xTCT42 E 1.27 0.75 0.75 0.00
+ 05365ROB/D-DS 1.42 0.67 0.67 0.00
5365ROD/1xHIE150 0.69 0.78 0.78 0.00
+ 05365ROB/D-DS 0.74 0.72 0.72 0.00
5365ROD/1xHIE250 0.36 0.89 0.89 0.00
+ 05365ROB/D-DS 0.39 0.83 0.83 0.00
TC-TEL C 0 - C 180 Data table TC-TEL C 0 - C 180 Data table

HIE No. 2012 HIE No. 2012
DIN 5040: A60 DIN 5040: A70
CIBSE BZ: CIBSE BZ:
BZ2 BZ1
NBN L 14-002: NBN L 14-002:
BZ2 BZ1
55
Suspended luminaires direct/indirect
with bifunctional reflector ROB
Application
Optical system
Bifunctional reflector,
direct/indirect, consisting of
upper part in PLEXIGLAS
with concentric channel
prisms for ceiling-oriented
indirect component and par-
abolic lower reflector part in
aluminium. Reflector made
of post-anodised aluminium
99.98 %, highly-specular
inner surface, semi-specular
outer surface, facetting in
lower reflector section,
increasing to the lower part.
The cut-off angle is at
least 30.
Luminaire body
housing, extruded aluminium
profile, silver-coated, to
nents. With vertical cooling
ribs and adapted longitudinal
rods, for connection of the
wire suspension. Integrated
wire suspension with ceiling
fixing plate and cover plate
made of sheet steel, graph-
ite-grey. Continually adjusta-
ble wire suspension, for sus-
pension length of up to
3.40 m.
Luminaires supplied ready Reference Lamps/socket kg
for connection, with freely W
suspended connection 5361 ROB/TCT18 E 1xTC-TEL18/GX24q-2 1.6
cable. 5361 ROB/TCT26 E 1xTC-TEL26/GX24q-3 1.6
TCT with electronic
control gear.
HIE with inductive
ballast.
the wire suspension.

Decor disk No. 2013
The partially frosted decor disk offers an appealing design DIN 5040: B52
alternative. See page 54. CIBSE BZ:
Adjustable wire suspension BZ2
Indications Page The stable mounting plate with flat canopy assures secure NBN L 14-002:
BZ2
Decor disks 54 fixing to the ceiling. Tool-free adjustable wire holders guar-
Lamp characteristics 444 antee high mounting comfort.
56
652d
Data table no. 2013

En 300 lx 500 lx
20 1.7 2.5 2.9 4.1
30 2.4 3.0 4.0 5.1
40 3.0 3.6 5.0 6.0
Area
50 3.7 4.2 6.1 6.9
A
in m2 60 4.3 5.1 7.1 8.5
80 5.6 6.4 9.3 11
100 6.8 7.8 11 13
150 9.7 11 16 18
200 13 14 22 23
W W
2 Max. luminaire

spacings for
g1 = Emin : E 1 : 1.5
5363 ROB/1xTCT42 E 1xTC-TEL42/GX24q-4 2.4 5365 ROB/2xTCT42 E 2xTC-TEL42/GX24q-4 5.4 Transverse spacing centre / centre Xmax = 1.1 h
5363 ROB/1xHIE70 1xHIE70/E27* 3.7 5365 ROB/1xHIE150 1xHIE150/E27* 7.3 h = Luminaire height above working plane
5363 ROB/1xHIE100 1xHIE100/E27* 4.1 5365 ROB/1xHIE250 1xHIE250/E40* 9.0
Reference M LB L
direct indirect
DLOR ULOR
5361ROB/TCT18 E 6.19 0.82 0.69 0.13
+ 05361ROB/D-DS 6.53 0.78 0.61 0.17
5361ROB/TCT26 E 4.07 0.83 0.75 0.09
+ 05361ROB/D-DS 4.28 0.79 0.65 0.14
5363ROB/1xTCT42 E 2.45 0.78 0.67 0.11
+ 05363ROB/D-DS 2.59 0.74 0.59 0.15
5363ROB/1xHIE70 1.42 0.78 0.65 0.13
+ 05363ROB/D-DS 1.53 0.73 0.55 0.18
5363ROB/1xHIE100 1.00 0.78 0.65 0.13
+ 05363ROB/D-DS 1.08 0.73 0.55 0.18
5365ROB/2xTCT42 E 1.26 0.76 0.63 0.13
+ 05365ROB/D-DS 1.34 0.71 0.54 0.16
5365ROB/1xHIE150 0.71 0.75 0.62 0.13
+ 05365ROB/D-DS 0.76 0.71 0.54 0.17
5365ROB/1xHIE250 0.37 0.87 0.72 0.15
+ 05365ROB/D-DS 0.38 0.85 0.65 0.20
TC-TEL C 0 - C 180 Data table TC-TEL C 0 - C 180 Data table

HIE No. 2013 HIE No. 2013
DIN 5040: B52 DIN 5040: B62
CIBSE BZ: CIBSE BZ:
BZ2 BZ2
NBN L 14-002: NBN L 14-002:
BZ3 BZ1/3/BZ2
57
58
CLASSICA,
3-phase
voltage tracks
Spotlights for low-voltage Spotlights for mains- Spotlights for high-pres- 3-phase voltage tracks
halogen lamps voltage halogen lamps sure discharge lamps 3-phase voltage tracks for
Brilliant light is a characteris- The lamps for direct mains Lumen-rich metal halide surface, recess and sus-
tic feature of the CLASSICA connection are available lamps and high-pressure pended mounting allow to
spotlights for low-voltage in QT 60-150 W and sodium vapour lamps are realise versatile arrange-
halogen lamps in wattages QPAR 75 W. The QT-150 predestined for striking illu- ments of CLASSICA spot-
QT 35-90 W. Modern reflec- reflector has a 30 flood mination. The HIT version lights. Cross, L- and T-con-
tor technology for optimised characteristic, the PAR includes an integrated safety nectors as well as flexible
uniform circular surface versions are available for glass with UV protection. couplings extend the planning
lighting. 10 or 30. scope.
59
CLASSICA
Unmistakable retro design
Each era is characterised by

a certain style and fashion,
which is also expressed
by the design of industrial
products. However, those
creations that go beyond
the actual mainstream and
also affect eras to come
are called classics.
The new TRILUX spotlight

range CLASSICA truly lives
up to its name. The elliptical
form in classical retro design
turns CLASSICA into an un-
mistakable lighting system
allowing to accentuate ob-
jects in a modern yet time-
less way.
CLASSICA is available in
silver-grey and white ver-
sions.
60
61
for halogen lamps
Version F Distribution Electrical connection

Spotlights for 3-phase vol- characteristic flood With easy-to-handle voltage-
tage tracks, can be pivoted S Distribution track adapter for commer-
by 120 and oriented by 355. characteristic spot cial 3-phase voltage-track
R for reflector lamps systems. Spotlights can be
Equipment adjusted to the desired
Low-voltage halogen lamp The reflector is integrated circuit without using tools.
QT12 35-90 W, in the lamp for PAR ver- QT12 with electronic
Mains-voltage halogen sions. transformer in ballast
lamp QT32 60-150 W, housing, colour-adapted to
Halogen reflector lamp Luminaire body reflector housing.
QPAR30 75 W. Ellipsoid reflector housing
with ergonomic handle. Indications Page
Reflector Data tables 66
Aluminium, semi-specular Silver-grey Surface-mounted
(QT32) or highly-specular in W White voltage tracks 68
MRU-technology for optimi- Recessed voltage tracks 70
sed uniform circular surface Lamp characteristics 444
lighting (QT12).
652d
Reference Data Lamps Socket

CLASSICA table
F/1x90 QT12 ET* 2162 40 1xQT12 35-90 GY6.35

S/1x90 QT12 ET* 2159 12 1xQT12 35-90 GY6.35
W-F/1x90 QT12 ET* 2162 40 1xQT12 35-90 GY6.35
W-S/1x90 QT12 ET* 2159 12 1xQT12 35-90 GY6.35
F/1x150 QT32* 2161 35 1xQT32 60-150 E27

W-F/1x150 QT32* 2161 35 1xQT32 60-150 E27
R/1x75 QPAR30 2163 1xQPAR 30 75 E27

W-R/1x75 QPAR30 2163 1xQPAR 30 75 E27
*Use only lamps suitable for operation in open luminaires (self-shielded lamps).
62
3-phase adapter
The voltage-track adapters
for 3-phase voltage tracks
convince thanks to their in-
creased mechanical stability
and functional advantages
such as earthed conductor
connection and phase selec-
tion after installation.
m kg white silver-grey white silver-grey
0.8 1.8
0.8 1.8
0.8 1.8
0.8 1.8
0.8 1.2
0.8 1.2
0.8 1.2
0.8 1.2
63
for high-pressure lamps
Version F Distribution Electrical connection

Spotlights for 3-phase vol- characteristic flood With easy-to-handle voltage-
tage tracks, can be pivoted S Distribution track adapter for commer-
by 120 and oriented by 355. characteristic spot cial 3-phase voltage-track
systems. Spotlights can be
Equipment Luminaire body adjusted to the desired
Metal halide lamp HIT-CRI Ellipsoid reflector housing circuit without using tools.
35 W, 70 W or 150 W with ergonomic handle. HIT optionally available
High-pressure sodium with inductive ballast or elec-
vapour lamp HST-CRI 50 W Silver-grey tronic control gear, HST
or 100 W. W White with inductive ballast in
housing which is colour-
Reflector adapted to reflector housing.
Aluminium, semi-specular
(HST) or highly-specular in Indications Page
MRU-technology for optimi- Data tables 66
sed uniform circular surface Surface-mounted
lighting (HIT). HIT version voltage tracks 68
includes an integrated safety Recessed voltage tracks 70
glass with UV protection. Lamp characteristics 444
652d
Reference Data Lamps Socket

CLASSICA table
F/1x35 HIT 2162 40 1xHIT-CRI 35 G12

F/1x35 HIT E 2162 40 1xHIT-CRI 35 G12
F/1x70 HIT 2162 40 1xHIT-CRI 70 G12
F/1x70 HIT E 2162 40 1xHIT-CRI 70 G12
F/1x150 HIT 2162 40 1xHIT-CRI 150 G12
F/1x150 HIT E 2162 40 1xHIT-CRI 150 G12
S/1x35 HIT 2160 17 1xHIT-CRI 35 G12
S/1x35 HIT E 2160 17 1xHIT-CRI 35 G12
S/1x70 HIT 2160 17 1xHIT-CRI 70 G12
S/1x70 HIT E 2160 17 1xHIT-CRI 70 G12
S/1x150 HIT 2160 17 1xHIT-CRI 150 G12
S/1x150 HIT E 2160 17 1xHIT-CRI 150 G12
W-F/1x35 HIT 2162 40 1xHIT-CRI 35 G12
W-F/1x35 HIT E 2162 40 1xHIT-CRI 35 G12
W-F/1x70 HIT 2162 40 1xHIT-CRI 70 G12
W-F/1x150 HIT 2162 40 1xHIT-CRI 150 G12
W-S/1x35 HIT 2160 17 1xHIT-CRI 35 G12
W-S/1x35 HIT E 2160 17 1xHIT-CRI 35 G12
W-S/1x70 HIT 2160 17 1xHIT-CRI 70 G12
W-S/1x150 HIT 2160 17 1xHIT-CRI 150 G12
F/1x50 HST 2161 35 1xHST-CRI 50 PG12-1

F/1x100 HST 2161 35 1xHST-CRI 100 PG12-1
W-F/1x50 HST 2161 35 1xHST-CRI 50 PG12-1
W-F/1x100 HST 2161 35 1xHST-CRI 100 PG12-1
64
m kg white silver-grey white silver-grey white silver-grey
0.8 3.0
0.8 1.4
0.8 3.0
0.8 1.4
0.8 3.2
0.8 1.6
0.8 3.0
0.8 1.4
0.8 3.0
0.8 1.4
0.8 3.2
0.8 1.6
0.8 3.0
0.8 1.4
0.8 3.0
0.8 1.4
0.8 3.2
0.8 1.6
0.8 3.0
0.8 1.4
0.8 3.0
0.8 1.4
0.8 3.2
0.8 1.6
0.8 3.5
0.8 3.8
0.8 3.5
0.8 3.8
65
Planning indications
Data table no. 2159 Data table no. 2160 Data table no. 2161 Data table no. 2162 Data table no. 2163
1 Luminous intensity distribution 1 Luminous intensity distribution 1 Luminous intensity distribution 1 Luminous intensity distribution 1 Luminous intensity distribution
20 000 80 000 2 500 30 000 7 000
25 000 6 000
16 000 2 000 10
60 000 5 000
20 000
12 000 1 500 4 000
40 000 15 000
8 000 1 000 3 000
10 000 30
20 000 2 000
4 000 500 5 000 1 000
I/cd I/cd I/cd I/cd I/cd

-45 -30 -15 0 15 30 45 -45 -30 -15 0 15 30 45 -45 -30 -15 0 15 30 45 -45 -30 -15 0 15 30 45 -45 -30 -15 0 15 30 45
2 Cone diagram 12 2 Cone diagram 17 2 Cone diagram 35 2 Cone diagram 40 2 Cone diagram 10
/m 0.21 /m 0.30 /m 0.32 /m 0.37 /m 0.17
19 000 36 000 9 000 36 000 5 000
0.60 0.63 0.73 0.35
0.42 9 000 2 250 9 000
4 800 0.95 1.10 1 250
0.63 0.90 1 000 4 000 0.50
2 100 4 000 1.27 1.47 550
0.84 1.20 560 2 250 0.70
2 250 2 250 1.58 1.83 300
1.05 1.50 360 1 450 0.85
1 200 1 450 1.90 2.20 200
1.80 250 1 000 1.05
1.26 1 000
530 150
Illuminance
Illuminance
Illuminance
Illuminance
Illuminance
Em / lx
Em / lx
Em / lx
Em / lx
Em / lx
0 1.0 2.0 3.0 4.0 5.0 6.0 Spacing h/m 0 1.0 2.0 3.0 4.0 5.0 6.0 Spacing h/m 0 0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0 2.5 3.0 Spacing h/m 0 0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0 2.5 3.0 Spacing h/m 0 1.0 2.0 3.0 4.0 5.0 6.0 Spacing h/m
3 Lamp data 3 Lamp data 3 Lamp data Cone diagram 30

3 Lamp data
Lamp type Lamp type Lamp type Lamp type /m 0.25
Metal halide lamp High-pressure sodium vapour lamp Metal halide lamp 5 750
Low-voltage halogen lamp 12 V with axial filament 0.55
with improved colour rendering 1 450
Socket Socket Socket 0.80
G 12 Socket G 12 650
GY 6.35 1.05
PG12-1 360
Lamp designation Luminous Multipl. Lamp designation Luminous Multipl. Lamp designation Luminous Multipl. 1.35
flux / lm factor Lamp type flux / lm factor 230
flux / lm factor 1.60
e.g. Philips SDW-T 160
LBS QT-ax 12 90W GY6.35 12V LBS HIT 150W G12 LBS HIT 150W G12
1800 1.00 14000 1.30 14000 1.30
ILCOS HSG/AX/UB-90-12-GY6.35 ILCOS MT-150/30/1B-H-G12 Lamp designation Luminous Multipl. ILCOS MT-150/30/1B-H-G12
LBS HIT 70W G12 flux / lm factor LBS HIT 70W G12
6600 0.87 6600 0.75
Illuminance
ILCOS MT-70/30/1B-H-G12 LBS HST-C 100W PG12-1 ILCOS MT-70/30/1B-H-G12
4800 1.60
LBS HIT 35W G12 ILCOS STH-100-H/E-PD12 LBS HIT 35W G12
Em / lx
3300 0.48 3300 0.39
ILCOS MT-35/30/1B-H-G12 LBS HST-C 50W PG12-1 ILCOS MT-35/30/1B-H-G12
2300 0.92
ILCOS STH-50-H/E-PD12 Lamp type 0 0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0 2.5 3.0 Spacing h/m
Lamp type Low-voltage halogen lamp 12 V with axial filament
Mains-voltage halogen lamp 230 V
with semi-specular bulb
Socket
GY 6.35
3 Lamp data
Socket Lamp type
Lamp designation Luminous Multipl. Mains-voltage halogen lamp 230 V with PAR reflector
E 27 flux / lm factor
Lamp designation Socket
Luminous Multipl. LBS QT-ax 12 90W GY6.35 12V E 27
flux / lm factor 1800 0.25
ILCOS HSG/AX/UB-90-12-GY6.35
LBS QT32 150W/m E27 Lamp designation Beam
2400 1.00 angle
ILCOS HEGT/F/UB-150-320-E27
LBS QPAR30 75W/10 E27
10
ILCOS HMG-PARD-75-230-E27-97/10
LBS QPAR30 75W/30 E27
30
3-phase voltage tracks for

recess, surface and sus-
pended mounting offer a
wide planning scope for the
arrangement of CLASSICA
spotlights, thus forming the
basis of flexible and variable
accentuation and architec-
tural lighting.
66
3-phase adapter 3-phase adapter with integrated Connection elements
CLASSICA spotlights are equipped ballast Cross, L- and T-connectors as well
with an electrical universal adapter for Spotlights for high-pressure lamps are as flexible couplings enable versatile
3-phase voltage tracks. Installation as equipped with a ballast housing within arrangements for voltage tracks, thus
well as phase selection and earthed the area of the voltage-track adapter. assuring maximum flexibility and varia-
conductor connection can be effected An additional locking device assures bility as to the architectural design and
without using tools. safe retention of the spotlights within installation of lighting installations with
the voltage track, also in case of spotlights.
increased loads.
E E E
400 V/16 A Mains supply
EU 27 WS EU 37 EU 30 WS EU 24 WS with 3-phase
N
L1
L2
A.C. 400 V/16 A
L3
230 V/16 A
Mains supply
N
LX with 1-phase
A.C. 230 V/16 A
EU 27 WS EU 37 EU 29 WS EU 35 WS
E E
Feeding and connection elements The planning example above shows Connection possibilities for 3-phase
(planning indications for earthed the guidance of the earthed conductor voltage tracks with the 3-phase
conductor) including the arrangement of the mains 400 V
In 3-phase voltage tracks, the earthed corresponding feeding and connection Max. load 3 x 3600 W = 10800 W.
conductor is guided on one side in the elements. Single fuse protection of all three
lower profile edge. During the planning, phases with 3 x 16 A. Cable cross-
the feeding and connection elements section 5 x 1.5 mm2 up to 5 x 2.5 mm2.
have to be selected in such a way that
the continuous guidance of the earthed Connection possibilities for 3-phase
conductor is assured. The location of voltage tracks with A.C. network
the earthed conductor is shown in the 230 V
product illustrations on the following Max. load 3600 W, optional distribution
accessories pages, defined for a to 3 circuits. Protection 1 x 16 A.
viewing direction looking down at the Cable cross-section 3 x 1.5 mm2 up to
voltage-track system from above. 3 x 2.5 mm2.
67
3-phase voltage tracks and accessories
for surface and suspended mounting
Easy direct ceiling mounting

of the surface-mounted vol-
tage track thanks to pre-
perforated longitudinal
fixing holes as well as fixing
clamps. In addition, wire and
pendant suspensions enable
suspended mounting of the
surface-mounted voltage
tracks.
The surface-mounted voltage

tracks and the accessories
are available in three versions:
WS white
SW black
AL silver-grey
3-phase voltage tracks Feeding EU 24 Feeding EU 25

for surface and suspended Earthed conductor, left* Earthed conductor, right*
mounting Front- and upper-plane Front- and upper-plane
white feeding possibilities. feeding possibilities.
32
EU 10 WS ...........1000 mm
EU 20 WS ...........2000 mm
EU 21 WS ...........3000 mm
EU 22 WS ...........4000 mm
black
36
EU 10 SW ...........1000 mm
EU 20 SW ...........2000 mm
EU 21 SW ...........3000 mm
EU 22 SW ...........4000 mm L-connector EU 27 L-connector EU 79
silver-grey Earthed conductor, interior* Earthed conductor, exterior*
EU 10 AL ............1000 mm Lateral or upper-plane Lateral or upper-plane
EU 20 AL ............2000 mm feeding possibilities. feeding possibilities.
EU 21 AL ............3000 mm
EU 22 AL ............4000 mm
Consisting of an extruded
aluminium profile, white, black
or silver-grey which serves
as earthed conductor at the
same time, and an inserted,
folded plastic profile with T-connector EU 30 T-connector EU 29
4 embedded copper con- Earthed conductor, left* Earthed conductor, right*
ductors, each with a cross- Lateral or upper-plane Lateral or upper-plane
section of 3 mm2 for three feeding possibilities. feeding possibilities.
separately switchable circuits.
Can be shortened on site.
Connection elements for

voltage tracks
When selecting the feedings
and the different connector
versions, attention must
be paid to the continuous Cross connector EU 31
guidance of the earthed Upper-plane feeding
conductor. The earthed con- possibilities.
ductor is always guided in
the lower profile edge and
results from the voltage
tracks course.
The dimensional illustrations

show the voltage-track
components from above. *Earthed conductor, viewed from above
68
Flexible coupling Wire suspension
EU 33 WS, EU 33 SW L 23
Upper-plane feeding Steel wire for sus-
possibility. pension lengths
of up to 1.40 m,
length to be regu-
lated, including
fixing clamp.
Longitudinal connector Pendant suspen- Suspended mounting

EU 78 sion L 19 Easy-to-handle fixing clamps
with lateral or upper-plane Pendant rod with for wire and pendant suspen-
central feeding. canopy for suspensions and wire suspensions
sion length 1.2 m, with continually and tool-
can be shortened, free adjustable wire lengths
including fixing guarantee easy and rapid
clamp. mounting of suspended
voltage-track systems.
Longitudinal connector Carrying capacity of voltage tracks

EU 26 Suspension distance Max. number of Max. weight per
interior, for gap-free electrical of fixing points load points load point
connection of two voltage per 1000 mm*
tracks.
1000 mm 4 3 kg
End cap EU 35 500 mm 4 5 kg
Front-plane conclusion. 333 mm 3 10 kg
*assuming uniform
distribution
Fixing clamp Point outlet AP 75 for

EU 80 surface ceiling mounting
Fixing clamp for alignment of For individual mounting of
two voltage tracks. spotlights.
(Not for CLASSICA 35 HIT,
70 HIT, 150 HIT, HST due
to additional gear box).
Fixing clamp
EU 23
Fixing clamp for surface
ceiling mounting.
69
3-phase voltage tracks and accessories
for recess mounting
The recessed voltage tracks

are equipped with lateral
support profiles serving as
ceiling support in case of
suspended ceilings. Profile
suspensions guarantee easy
suspension of the recessed
voltage tracks from the
ceiling fundament.
3-phase voltage tracks Feeding EUE 24 WS Feeding EUE 25 WS

for recess mounting with surrounding ceiling with surrounding ceiling
EUE 20 WS .........2000 mm support, earthed conductor support, earthed conductor
EUE 21 WS .........3000 mm left*. Front- or upper-plane right*. Front- or upper-plane
44
EUE 22 WS .........4000 mm feeding possibilities. feeding possibilities.

Consisting of an extruded
aluminium profile, white,
which serves as earthed
36 2 conductor at the same time
11,5 and an inserted, folded
plastic profile with 4 em-
bedded copper conductors.
with a cross-section of L-connector EUE 27 WS L-connector EUE 79 WS
3 mm2 for three separately with surrounding ceiling with surrounding ceiling
switchable circuits. Can be support, earthed conductor support, earthed conductor
easily shortened on site. interior*, lateral or upper- exterior*, lateral or upper-
plane feeding possibilities. plane feeding possibilities.
Connection elements for
voltage tracks
When selecting the feedings
and the different connector
versions, attention must
be paid to the continuous
guidance of the earthed
conductor. The earthed T-connector EUE 30 WS T-connector EUE 29 WS
conductor is always guided with surrounding ceiling with surrounding ceiling
in the lower profile edge support, earthed conductor support, earthed conductor
and results from the voltage left*, lateral or upper-plane right*, lateral or upper-plane
tracks course. feeding possibilities. feeding possibilities.
The opposite dimensional

illustrations show the
voltage-track components
from above.
Cross connector EUE 31 WS

with surrounding ceiling
support, upper-plane feeding
possibility.
*Earthed conductor, viewed from above
70
Longitudinal connector Feeding EUE 41 WS
EUE 26 WS Wall-to-wall feeding for
interior, for gap-free electrical recess and wall-to-wall
connection of two voltage mounting including end cap
tracks. EUE 42 WS.
Longitudinal connector End cap EUE 42 WS Recess mounting of point

EUE 78 WS Front-plane conclusion for outlet in system ceilings
with surrounding ceiling 3-phase voltage track EUE, Additional mounting plates
support, lateral or upper- interior, for wall-to-wall MP 31 are recommended in
plane central feeding. mounting. suspended system ceilings
or closed ceilings (wood,
gypsum plaster or similar)
with low load-bearing capa-
bility or little impression
resistance.
End bracket EUE 35 WS Point outlet EP 81 for

Front-plane conclusion with recess mounting
ceiling support. For individual mounting of
spotlights.
(Not for CLASSICA 35 HIT,
70 HIT, 150 HIT, HST due
to additional gear box).
Profile suspension Mounting plate MP 31

EUE 40 WS For recess mounting of point
2 pieces, for suspended outlets EP 81 in ceilings with
mounting of recessed vol- low load-bearing capability.
tage tracks for recess
mounting with quick-acting
tension spring.
71
T200
72 Katalog 2001
Spotlight modules Positionable modules Translucent modules Louvre luminaires Diffuser luminaires
Spotlight modules with car- The positionable louvre Due to a convincing The combination of 333 series diffuser lumi-
danic suspension for halo- modules prove themselves double-reflection louvre luminaires naires can also be integrated
gen, metal halide and high- as a superb feature of the technology, trans- and flexible tubular in the T200 system. This
pressure sodium vapour T200 tubular track system: lucent modules create a track arrangements offers a series with opal and trans-
lamps are striking compo- The manuvrability through comfortable and completely maximum planning scope. lucent PLEXIGLAS diffusers is
nents for accentuation light- a range of 50 offers uniform brightness. These The parabolic louvres in documented from page 262
ing. They meet the architec- ample scope of movement modules are thus specially either semi-specular or high- on, including the necessary
tural and functional demands for enabling excellent illumi- recommended for lighting of ly-specular finish are fully fixing accessories for inte-
for a successful integration nation in both confined and workstations equipped with compliant to CIBSE LG 3, gration in the tubular track
into the T200 system. expansive areas. TFT screen systems. cat. II. system T200.
Katalog 2001 73
T200
The essence of lighting
Light attracts
this motto acknowledges
the fact that good lighting
attracts prospective clients,
and charges the feel of the
facility.
In other words:
Accentuated light, focused
on sales objects, creates
the basic conditions for an
effective presentation of
goods. However, the neces-
sary basic lighting compo-
nent must meet modern
design criteria. This results
in diverging lighting tasks
which have been solved so
far with different lighting
systems.
The innovative tubular track

system T200 divorces
this concept from tradition!
Luminaires for accentuation
lighting and general lighting
are now combined in a single
lighting system.
An impressive example is
shown here: ultra-low-profile
translucent modules for a
uniform basic lighting are
combined with flexible spot-
lights in cardanic suspension.
74 Katalog 2001
Katalog 2001 75
T200
Dynamic design & architecture
Creative lighting solutions Positionable spotlight or

Bored with office lighting? louvre modules challenge
Enter the new, versatile you to play with light.
tubular track system T200. Depending on the lamp type
used, they allow accentu-
Tubular track arrangements ation in both confined and
promote creative lighting expansive areas.
solutions. This planning
scope is further extended
by use of nodes and jointed
connectors adaptation to
a multitude of architectural
scenarios guaranteed.
Photometric components
provide the right light, e.g.
louvre luminaires for general
lighting or for task area
lighting fully compliant
to CIBSE LG 3, cat. II, no
matter if traditional DSE
equipment or innovative
TFT screens are used.
76 Katalog 2001
Katalog 2001 77
T200
Programme review
Active lighting
components
T200 tubular track arrange-
ments offer a multitude of
combinations with five differ-
ent photometric systems:
Spotlight modules in single,

double or triple arrangement
for halogen lamps.
Spotlight modules
for high-pressure lamps.
Positionable modules
for halogen lamps, compact
fluorescent lamps and T5
fluorescent lamps.
Translucent modules
for T5 fluorescent lamps.
Louvre luminaires
for T5 fluorescent lamps.
The electrical connection of

these luminaires is effected
by mains cables which are
connected with the through-
wiring sets within the rods.
In addition, 333 series

surface-mounted diffuser
luminaires can also be
used, see page 262.
Pages 80-87 Pages 88-91
Spotlight modules Spotlight modules

in single, double and with semi-specular
triple arrangement, or specular facetted
with semi-specular, reflectors for
highly-specular or facetted specular metal halide lamps 35 W,
reflectors for beam angle 13,
low-voltage halogen lamps up to metal halide lamps 70 W,
50 W, beam angle 10, beam angle 13,
low-voltage halogen lamps up to high-pressure sodium vapour lamps
100 W, beam angle 8, 50 W, beam angle 33,
mains-voltage halogen lamps 150 W, high-pressure sodium vapour lamps
beam angle 33, 100 W, beam angle 33.
halogen PAR lamps 75 W,
beam angle 10 or 30.
78 Katalog 2001
Design scope
Geometrical arrangements
realised with T200 nodes
or jointed connectors offer
increased design scope,
allowing to enhance the
architectural aspects of the
built environment.
Pages 92-95 Pages 96-97 Pages 98-101
Positionable modules Translucent modules Louvre luminaires

direct or direct/indirect, with primary direct/indirect, with parabolic
direct/indirect, diffuser and interior, slot- louvres for task area and
with cross- perforated reflector for general lighting with
blade louvres or parabolic louvres for T5 fluorescent lamps, 16 mm. T5 fluorescent lamps, 16 mm.
mains-voltage halogen lamps 150 W,
compact fluorescent lamps 26 W,
T5 fluorescent lamps, 16 mm.
Katalog 2001 79
Spotlight modules for low-voltage halogen lamps
with highly-specular reflector, beam angle 10
Application Reference Lamps/Socket Length kg Reference Lamps/Socket Length kg

Spotlight modules for bril- max. W mm max. W mm
liant accentuation lighting in 5951/QT50 1xQT12 50/GY6.35 320 1.2 5952/QT50 2xQT12 50/GY6.35 498 1.7
sales areas, showrooms,
reception halls, conference
rooms, corridors, hotels
and restaurants.
Reflectors
For low-voltage halogen
lamps 12 V, 50 W, socket
GY6.35, preferably with axial
filament. In case of reduced
lighting requirements 35 W
or 20 W lamps can also be
used. Highly-specular reflec-
tor made of high-purity an-
odised aluminium. Beam
angle 10.
Luminaire body
Silver-grey, consisting of alu-
minium swivel frame, inte-
grated aluminium reflector
housing and end adapter ele-
ments in aluminium/plastic
material. Frame and reflec-
tor housing can be pivoted in
two planes by means of the
cardanic suspension. End
adapter elements with inte-
grated electronic transform-
er for incorporation into the
239
239
tubular track system.

5951 Single module
102 166 102 166 166
5952 Double module 320 498
5953 Triple module
90 90 90
for connection. Mains con-
nection is made within the
rods via box terminals up to
1.5 mm2, which are also
QT/12 V C 0 - C 180 Data table QT/12 V C 0 - C 180 Data table
suitable for through-wiring to No. 2020 No. 2020
the next unit. With electronic
transformers, dimming is
possible when combined
with phase-chop dimmers to
be provided by the client.
Please contact your local

TRILUX support centre for
information regarding light-
ing management systems.
Low-voltage halogen lamps Light in motion

Low-voltage halogen lamps with great Systems destined for accentuation lighting must allow flexi-
Indications Page colour rendering are predestined for ble adaptation to new lighting tasks. An exemplary solution
Rods 102 accentuation lighting. Use of lamps are T200 spotlights which offer optimal room for movement
Nodes 103 with axial filament guarantees exact due to their cardanic suspension.
Suspensions 103 focussing.
80
Reference Lamps/Socket Length kg
max. W mm
5953/QT50 3xQT12 50/GY6.35 676 2.2
652dj
max. 157 14 14 14
Data table no. 2020
239
1 Luminous intensity distribution

14 000
102 166 166 166 12 000
676 10 000
8 000
6 000
4 000
90 90 90 2 000

I/cd
-45 -30 -15 0 15 30 45
2 Cone diagram, beam angle 10

/m 0.17
9 900
QT/12 V C 0 - C 180 Data table 0.35
2 400
No. 2020 0.50
1 100
0.70
625
0.85
400
1.05
275
Illuminance
Em / lx
0 1.0 2.0 3.0 4.0 5.0 6.0 Spacing h/m
3 Lamp data
Lamp type
Low-voltage halogen lamp 12 V with axial filament
Socket
GY 6.35
Lamp designation Luminous Multipl.
flux / lm factor
LBS QT-ax 12 50W GY6.35 12V
930 1.00
ILCOS HSG/AX/UB-50-12-GY 6.35
600 0.65
320 0.34
Electronic transformers
The adapter units of low-voltage spotlight modules are
equipped as standard with electronic transformers. Essential
characteristics of these devices are a soft lamp start and
easy dimming by means of phase-chop dimmers.
81
Spotlight modules for low-voltage halogen lamps
with specular facetted reflector, beam angle 8

liant accentuation lighting in 5951 HO/QT90 1xQT12 35-100/GY6.35 394 1.4 5952 HO/QT90 2xQT12 35-100/GY6.35 572 2.2
sales areas, showrooms,
and restaurants.
Reflectors
For low-voltage halogen
lamps 12 V, 90 W or 100 W,
socket GY6.35, preferably
with axial filament. In case of
reduced lighting require-
ments 75 W, 50 W or 35 W
lamps can also be used.
With specular facetted sur-
face. Highly-specular reflec-
angle 8.
Luminaire body
adapter elements with inte-
239
239
grated electronic transform-

er for incorporation into the
102 166 102 166 166
tubular track system. 394 572
5951 Single module
5952 Double module
5953 Triple module
130 130 130
QT/12 V C 0 - C 180 Data table QT/12 V C 0 - C 180 Data table
rods via box terminals up to No. 2021 No. 2021
suitable for through-wiring to
the next unit. With electronic
transformers, dimming is
possible when combined
with phase-chop dimmers to
be provided by the client.

Low-voltage halogen lamps Multiple modules

Low-voltage halogen lamps with great Spotlight modules in single, double or triple arrangement
Indications Page colour rendering are predestined for can also be combined to form longer units. In this case only
Rods 102 accentuation lighting. Use of lamps one adapter unit is necessary at the junction between the
Nodes 103 with axial filament guarantees exact modules. T200 modules can be modified accordingly
Suspensions 103 focussing. before leaving our premises, on request.
82
max. W mm
5953 HO/QT90 3xQT12 35-100/GY6.35 750 3.0
652dZ
max. 157 43 43 43
Data table no. 2021
239

40 000
35 000
102 166 166 166 30 000
750
25 000
20 000
15 000
10 000
130 130 130
5 000

I/cd
-45 -30 -15 0 15 30 45

/m 0.15
26 000
QT/12 V C 0 - C 180 Data table 0.30
6 600
No. 2021 0.40
2 900
0.55
1 600
0.70
1 000
0.85
750
Illuminance
Em / lx
0 1.0 2.0 3.0 4.0 5.0 6.0 Spacing h/m
3 Lamp data
Lamp type
Low-voltage halogen lamp 12 V with axial filament
Socket
GY 6.35
flux / lm factor
LBS QT-ax 12 100W GY6.35 12V
2200 1.22
1800 1.00
1450 0.81
930 0.52
600 0.33
Brilliant facets
The reflector of the high-lumen spot-
light modules has a surface structure
consisting of multiple precise facets
which lend the reflector a truly bril-
liant appearance.
83
Spotlight modules for mains-voltage halogen lamps
with semi-specular reflector, beam angle 33

liant accentuation lighting of 5951 HO/QT150 1xQT32 60-150/E27 320 1.4 5952 HO/QT150 2xQT32 60-150/E27 498 2.3
larger surfaces in sales
areas, showrooms, recep-
tion halls, conference
and restaurants.
Reflectors
For mains-voltage halogen
lamps 230 V, 150 W, socket
E27, preferably with semi-
specular encapsulated bulb.
In case of reduced lighting
requirements 60 W, 75 W or
100 W lamps can also be
used. Semi-specular reflec-
angle 33.
Luminaire body
adapter elements for inte-
gration into the tubular track
system.
5951 Single module
5952 Double module
5953 Triple module
QT C 0 - C 180 Data table QT C 0 - C 180 Data table
1.5 mm2, which are also No. 2022 No. 2022
the next unit.

Mains-voltage halogen lamps Design quality to the last detail

Mains-voltage lamps offer halogen light The technical demands placed on the spotlight modules are
Indications Page for direct mains connection, without reflected in a distinctive function-oriented appearance, with
Rods 102 additional transformer units. Mains-volt- system components perfectly integrated into the product-
Nodes 103 age lamps with semi-specular encapsu- specific techno-design.
Suspensions 103 lated bulb are recommended for T200
Lamp characteristics 444 spotlight modules.
84
max. W mm
5953 HO/QT150 3xQT32 60-150/E27 676 3.0
652dN
Data table no. 2022

4 000
3 500
3 000
2 500
2 000
1 500
1 000
500

I/cd
-45 -30 -15 0 15 30 45

/m 0.30
9 200
0.60
QT C 0 - C 180 Data table 2 300
No. 2022 0.90
1 000
1.20
575
1.50
375
1.80
250
Illuminance
Em / lx
0 0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0 2.5 3.0 Spacing h/m
3 Lamp data
Lamp type
Mains-voltage halogen lamp 230 V
Socket
E 27
flux / lm factor
LBS QT32 150W/m E27
2400 1.00
LBS QT32 100W/m E27
1430 0.60
LBS QT32 75W/m E27
1050 0.44
LBS QT32 60W/m E27
780 0.33
Semi-specular reflector
Semi-specular reflector surfaces create
a very uniform lighting of accentuated
areas. This impression is further pro-
moted by use of mains-voltage halogen
lamps with semi-specular encapsulated
bulb.
85
Spotlight modules for mains-voltage halogen lamps
with PAR reflector, beam angle 10 or 30

Spotlight modules for accen- W mm W mm
tuation lighting with halogen 5951 HO/QPAR75 1xQPAR75/E27 320 1.4 5952 HO/QPAR75 2xQPAR75/E27 498 2.2
reflector lamps PAR with
either spot or flood charac-
teristic depending on the
lamp type in sales areas,
showrooms, reception halls,
conference rooms, corri-
dors, hotels and restaurants.
Lamps
For mains-voltage halogen
lamps 75 W with PAR reflec-
tor, socket E27. Beam angle
10 or 30.
Luminaire body
adapter elements for inte-
gration into the tubular track
system.
5951 Single module
5952 Double module
5953 Triple module
239
239
118 166 118 166 166
Luminaires supplied ready 320 498
1.5 mm2, which are also 130 130 130
the next unit.

Q PAR C 0 - C 180 Data table Q PAR C 0 - C 180 Data table
TRILUX support centre for No. 2023 No. 2023
10 30 10 30
10 30
Halogen PAR lamps Wiring passage within the rods

The tried-and-tested PAR lamps are now also available as The rods of the T200 system are open towards the ceiling
Indications Page halogen versions, in spot and flood characteristic with beam and can easily be equipped with through-wiring sets. Sepa-
Rods 102 angles of 10 or 30 respectively. Within the tubular track rate switching of luminaire and spot modules can simply be
Nodes 103 system T200 these brilliant light sources can be used for realised by use of separate mains cables within the rods.
Suspensions 103 both confined and expansive accentuation surfaces.
86
Reference Lamps/Socket Length kg 10
W mm
5953 HO/QPAR75 3xQPAR75/E27 676 3.0
30
652d
WU
max. 157 43 43 43
Data table no. 2023
239

7 000
6 000
118 166 166 166 10
676 5 000
4 000
3 000
30
2 000
1 000
130 130 130

I/cd
-45 -30 -15 0 15 30 45

/m 0.17
5 000
Q PAR C 0 - C 180 Data table 0.35
1 250
No. 2023 0.50
550
0.70
300
0.85
200
1.05
150
10 30
Illuminance
Em / lx
0 1.0 2.0 3.0 4.0 5.0 6.0 Spacing h/m

Cone diagram, beam angle 30
/m 0.25
5 750
0.55
1 450
0.80
650
1.05
360
1.35
230
1.60
160
Illuminance
Em / lx
0 0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0 2.5 3.0 Spacing h/m
3 Lamp data
Lamp type
Mains-voltage halogen lamp 230 V with PAR reflector
Socket
E 27
Lamp designation Beam
angle
Node = Design freedom LBS QPAR30 75W/10 E27
10
Additional design scope for lighting LBS QPAR30 75W/30 E27
30
installations with the T200 system is ILCOS HMG-PARD-75-230-E27-97/30
realised by the corresponding nodes Technical information see page 440.
with continuously adjustable angles.
A maximum of four connections is
possible.
87
Spotlight modules for metal halide lamps HIT
with specular facetted reflector, beam angle 13
Application
Spotlight modules for eco-
nomic accentuation lighting
in sales areas, showrooms,
and restaurants.
Reflector
For 1 metal halide lamp
35 W or 70 W, preferably in
ceramic version, socket
G12. With facetted brilliant
surface and integrated safe-
ty glass with UV protection.
Highly-specular reflector
made of high-purity anodised
aluminium. Beam angle 13.
Luminaire body
minium swivel frame with
ballast, integrated aluminium
reflector housing and end
adapter elements in alumini-
um/plastic material. Frame
and reflector housing can be
pivoted in two planes by
means of the cardanic su-
spension. End adapter ele-
ments for integration into
the tubular track system.
for connection, with induc-
tive ballast, parallel compen-
sated. Mains connection is
made within the rods via box
terminals up to 1.5 mm2,
which are also suitable for
through-wiring to the next
unit.
Metal halide lamps HIT Light in motion

For accentuation lighting metal halide Systems destined for accentuation lighting must allow flexi-
Indications Page lamps convince thanks to numerous ble adaptation to new lighting tasks. An exemplary solution
Rods 102 advantages: great colour rendering, are T200 spotlights which offer optimal room for movement
Nodes 103 increased luminous efficiency, reduced due to their cardanic suspension.
Suspensions 103 heat dissipation and increased service
Lamp characteristics 444 life.
88
W mm
5951 HO/HIT35 1xHIT-CRI 35/G12 520 3.3
5951 HO/HIT70 1xHIT-CRI 70/G12 520 3.5
652d
SX
max. 157 34
Data table no. 2024
239

50 000
145 366
520
40 000
30 000
20 000
10 000

I/cd
130
-45 -30 -15 0 15 30 45

/m 0.25
34 000
HIT C 0 - C 180 Data table 0.45
8 500
No. 2024 0.70
3 800
0.90
2 100
1.15
1 350
1.35
950
Illuminance
Em / lx
0 1.0 2.0 3.0 4.0 5.0 6.0 Spacing h/m
3 Lamp data
Lamp type
Metal halide lamp
Socket
G 12
flux / lm factor
LBS HIT 70W G12
6600 1.00
ILCOS MT-70/30/1B-H-G12
LBS HIT 35W G12
3400 0.52
ILCOS MT-35/30/1B-H-G12
Glass ceramic cover (UV filter) Wall adaptation

The reflectors of the HIT modules are Wall adapters increase the arrangement scope of the T200
equipped as standard with heat-resist- tubular track system. They allow the creation of architec-
ant glass ceramic covers which offer turally appealing wall-to-wall installations. In addition, wall
safe protection in case of mechanical adapters can be used to introduce the mains cable in case
defects of metal halide lamps. of wall outlets.
89
Spotlight modules for high-pressure sodium vapour lamps HST
with semi-specular reflector, beam angle 33
Application
Spotlight modules for eco-
nomic accentuation lighting
of larger surfaces in sales
and restaurants.
Reflector
For 1 high-pressure sodium
vapour lamp 50 W or 100 W,
socket PG12-1, in version
with improved colour render-
ing. Semi-specular reflector
aluminium. Beam angle 33.
Luminaire body
minium swivel frame with
ballast, integrated aluminium
reflector housing and end
um/plastic material. Frame
and reflector housing can be
pivoted in two planes by
means of the cardanic su-
spension. End adapter ele-
ments for integration into
the tubular track system.
for connection, with induc-
tive ballast, parallel compen-
sated. Mains connection is
made within the rods via box
terminals up to 1.5 mm2,
which are also suitable for
through-wiring to the next
unit.
High-pressure sodium vapour Improved colour rendering

lamps High-pressure sodium vapour lamps
Indications Page The semi-specular reflectors of T200 are especially economic light sources.
Rods 102 spotlight modules for colour-improved The development of versions with
Nodes 103 high-pressure sodium vapour lamps improved colour rendering has allowed
Suspensions 103 guarantee a uniform accentuated illumi- successful utilisation in interior appli-
Lamp characteristics 444 nation of expansive areas. cations.
90
W mm
5951 HO/HST50 1xHST-CRI 50/PG12-1 520 3.4
5951 HO/HST100 1xHST-CRI 100/PG12-1 520 4.3
652d
TY
Data table no. 2025

7 000
6 000
5 000
4 000
3 000
2 000
1 000

I/cd
-45 -30 -15 0 15 30 45

/m 0.60
4 500
1.20
HST-C C 0 - C 180 Data table 1 100
No. 2025 1.80
500
2.40
275
3.00
180
3.60
125
Illuminance
Em / lx
0 1.0 2.0 3.0 4.0 5.0 6.0 Spacing h/m
3 Lamp data
Lamp type
High-pressure sodium vapour lamp
with improved colour rendering
Socket
PG12-1
Lamp version
e.g. Philips SDW-T
flux / lm factor
LBS HST-C 100W PG12-1
2300 1.00
ILCOS STH-100-H/E-PG12
LBS HST-C 50W PG12-1
4800 2.09
ILCOS STH-50-H/E-PG12
Versatile lighting systems Rapid mounting, rapid new positioning

Thanks to a multitude of photometric components the T200 Easy-to-handle locking elements of the adapter units allow a
tubular track system is truly versatile: classical louvre lumi- simple and safe integration of T200 spotlights into the tubu-
naires, translucent modules, positionable modules and car- lar track system. In case the lighting conditions change, they
danic spotlights provide good light and brilliant accentuation. assure that the position of the spotlight modules can be
adapted in no time.
91
Compact positionable modules with cross-blade louvre RSV
for mains-voltage halogen lamps or with reflection-intensified,
highly-specular parabolic louvre RPX for compact fluorescent lamps
Application
For accentuated lighting
effects in sales areas, show-
rooms, reception halls, con-
ference rooms, corridors,
hotels and restaurants.
Optical system
Direct. Louvre retention by
means of spring-tensioned
clips providing earth conti-
nuity.
RSV
Semi-specular louvre with
graduated concave-profiled
cross blades made of an-
odised aluminium, for nar-
row/wide-angle light distri-
bution.
RPX
Micro-segmented, high-
ly-specular louvre made of
reflection-intensified alumini-
um with a surface purity of
99.99 %.
Luminaire body
Silver-grey, consisting of
positionable louvre module in
compact version, manu-
vrability 50 for accentu-
ated lighting effects. End
um/plastic material assure
safe integration of position-
able louvre modules into the
T200 tubular track system.
suitable for through-wiring
to the next unit.
5961 RPX/TC-D26 E with
electronic control gear (E).

Greater accentuation range Manuvrability

Compact positionable modules are Thanks to their manuvrability of
Indications Page optionally available in versions for dou- 50 the positionable modules of the
Rods 102 ble-ended halogen lamps with great T200 tubular track system create the
Nodes 103 colour rendering or for energy-saving perfect conditions for expansive and
Suspensions 103 compact fluorescent lamps. yet accentuated lighting effects.
92
Reference Lamps/Socket Length kg Reference Lamps/Socket Length kg
W mm W mm
5961 RSV/QTDE150 1xQT-DE150/R7s 376 1.0 5961 RPX/TCD26 E 1xTC-DEL26/G24q-3 450 1.3
652d
R
50 50
Data table no. 2026
239
239
95
95
1 Arrangement
2.75
64 224 64 224 2.25

376 450
30
0.85
Horizontal
surface
working plane
Wall

z/m
-1.0 0 1.0 0 1.0 y / m
QT-DE C 0 - C 180 Data table TC-DEL C 0 - C 180 Data table Suspension length lp 0.5 m
No. 2026 No. 2026
2 Illuminances Horizontal working plane
DIN 5040: A60 DIN 5040: A50
2.0
CIBSE BZ: CIBSE BZ:
BZ3/1.25/BZ2 BZ1
50 25 1.0
NBN L 14-002: NBN L 14-002: 150 100
BZ2 BZ2/1.5/BZ1/4/BZ2
0
1.0

y/m
-2.0 -1.0 0 1.0 2.0 x / m
3 Illuminances Wall surface
50 2.5
2.0
1.5
300 1.0
200
0.5
100

z/m
-2.0 -1.0 0 1.0 2.0 y / m
4 Photometric characteristics
Reference Lamps Luminous Multipl.
flux / lm factor
5961 RSV/QTDE 150 1 x 150 W 2600 0.85
5961 RPX/TCD 26 E 1 x 26 W 1800 0.49
Lamp-specific louvres T200 functional and flexible

The photometric alternatives of the T200 positionable lou- Compact positionable modules and cardanic spotlights for
vre modules include uniformly illuminated RSV louvres for accentuation lighting in combination with conventional, work-
high-lumen, mains-voltage halogen lamps and RPX parabolic zone-oriented or ambience-enhancing lighting components
louvres for compact fluorescent lamps offering exact light are design tools which allow architectural perfection of the
distribution. lighting situation.
93
Positionable modules with reflection-intensified,
highly-specular parabolic louvre RPX,
for T5 fluorescent lamps 16 mm
Application
For accentuated lighting of
expansive surfaces in sales
and restaurants.
Optical system
Direct/indirect louvre for
increased lighting efficiency.
Micro-segmented, highly-
specular RPX louvre made of
um with a surface purity of
99.99 %. When positioned
horizontally fully compliant to
CIBSE LG 3, cat. II, i.e.
L 200 cd/m2 at reference
angle 60 in the planes
C0/C180, C90/C270 and above
65 all-round.
Louvre retention by means

of spring-tensioned clips
providing earth continuity.
Louvre can be lowered and
hung from either side with-
out tools.
Luminaire body
Silver-grey, consisting of
positionable louvre module,
manuvrability 50 for
expansive and yet accentu-
ated lighting effects. End
um/plastic material assure
safe integration of position-
able louvre modules into the
T200 tubular track system.
for connection, with elec-
tronic control gear (E). Mains
connection is made within
the rods via box terminals up
to 1.5 mm2, which are also
the next unit.

Colours identify and design

Indications Page As tried-and-tested architectural design elements, colours
Rods 102 are an effective means to create and promote a company-
Nodes 103 specific corporate design and individual identity. T200
Suspensions 103 components are available in special coatings on request,
Overhead reflectors 103 allowing the adaptation of the lighting installation to an
Lamp characteristics 444 architectural colour concept.
94
Reference Lamps Length kg
W mm
5961 RPX/24 E 1x24 890 1.7
5961 RPX/39 E 1x39 1190 2.1
5961 RPX/2x24 E 2x24 890 1.8
5961 RPX/2x39 E 2x39 1190 2.3
652d
50
Data table no. 2027
239
95
En 300 lx 500 lx
59 594/24W, 894/39W 20 3.9 4.3 6.4 7.2
890/24W, 1190/39W 30 5.4 6.0 9.0 10
40 7.0 7.5 12 13
Area
50 8.5 9.0 14 15
A
in m2 60 10 11 17 18
80 13 14 21 23
100 16 16 26 27
150 23 24 38 40
200 30 31 50 52
T5 C 0 - C 180 Data table T5 C 0 - C 180 Data table Height of the working plane e 0.85 m
No. 2027 No. 2028 (page 105) Suspension length lp 0.50 m
with overhead reflector
DIN 5040: D62 2 Max. luminaire spacings for
T5 T5
05960 DR/
g1 = Emin : E 1 : 1.5
CIBSE BZ: DIN 5040: A60
CIBSE BZ: Longitudinal spacing centre / centre Ymax = 1.5 h
NBN L 14-002: BZ2/1.5/BZ1 h = Luminaire height above working plane
BZ2/0.8/BZ1
NBN L 14-002: 3 Multiplication factor M 4 Photometric
BZ2/0.8/BZ1 for no. of luminaires characteristics
Reference M LB L
direct indirect
DLOR ULOR
5961 RPX/39 E + DR 1.0 m
5961 RPX/24 E 1.75 0.95 0.36 0.59
5961 RPX/39 E 1.00 0.95 0.36 0.59
5961 RPX/2x24 E 0.91 0.93 0.38 0.55
5961 RPX/2x39 E 0.52 0.93 0.38 0.55
30
2.75 m
500
300
200
100
50
1.5 1.0 0.5 0 0.5 1.0 1.5 m
Overhead reflector 05960 DR/ Planning example: wall illumination with positionable
In order to intensify the accentuated lighting effects the posi- louvre module and overhead reflector illuminance
tionable louvre modules for T5 fluorescent lamps can easily distribution (indications in lux)
and rapidly be equipped with additional overhead reflectors Room height: 2.75 m
and are thus converted into purely direct versions. Positionable louvre module: 5961 RPX/39 E
Overhead reflector: 05960 DR/39
Pivoting angle: 30
95
Translucent modules with double-reflection system PST,
Application
For increased lighting com-
fort in sales areas, show-
rooms, conference rooms
as well as in offices and
financial institutions. Also
suitable for areas with nor-
mal DSE usage where
high-intensity TFT screens
are used.
Optical system
Translucent module in dou-
ble-reflection technology
PST, consisting of primary
diffuser enveloping a primary
reflector. Primary reflector
made of reflection-intensified
aluminium, with slot perfora-
tion allowing a light transmis-
sion of approximately 10 %.
Primary diffuser made of
translucent PLEXIGLAS for
low-loss forward diffusion of
the transmitted light compo-
nent. The ceiling surface
acts as a secondary reflec-
tor and thus creates a com-
fortable luminance contrast
to the translucent module.
Luminaire body
Consisting of chromed brass
fixings for translucent mod-
ules and end adapter ele-
material for safe integration
into the T200 tubular track
system.
the next unit.

T5 fluorescent lamps Translucent modules

T5 fluorescent lamps with a diameter A slot-perforated interior reflector and
Indications Page reduced to 16 mm enable compact an enveloping diffuser in highly-trans-
Rods 102 dimensions of the optical systems and missive PLEXIGLAS are central compo-
Nodes 103 the luminaire sections. nents of the T200 translucent mod-
Suspensions 103 ules.
96
W mm
5971 PST/24 E 1x24 930 1.4
5971 PST/39 E 1x39 1230 1.6
652d
Data table no. 2029

239
53
En 300 lx 500 lx
632/24W, 932/39W 20 5.7 6.6 9.5 11
35 930/24W, 1230/39W 30 7.7 8.8 13 15
40 9.8 11 16 18
Area
50 12 13 20 22
A
in m2 60 14 15 23 25
80 17 19 29 32
100 21 23 35 38
150 30 32 51 54
200 39 42 65 69
T5 C 0 - C 180 Data table Height of the working plane e 0.85 m
T5

g1 = Emin : E 1 : 1.5
CIBSE BZ:
BZ7/1.5/BZ8
Reference M LB L
direct indirect
DLOR ULOR
>> 200 cd/m2 5971 PST/24 E 1.75 0.86 0.65 0.21
5971 PST/39 E 1.00 0.85 0.64 0.21
TFT screens Aesthetics and functionality

Innovative optical systems which con- The slender translucent modules offer attractive photom-
vince thanks to sensibly reduced lumi- etrics: optical system, adapter units and T200 rods form
nances even under steep angles are an integrated whole. The progressive design is effectively
specially recommended for lighting enhanced by the colours of the system components.
of workstations equipped with TFT
screens.
97
Suspended luminaires with reflection-intensified,
semi-specular parabolic louvre RSX,
Application Reference Lamps Length kg

For decorative lighting of W mm
offices, sales areas, show- 5931 RSX/28 E 1x28 1230 3.2
rooms and financial institu- 5931 RSX/35 E 1x35 1530 3.7
tions. Especially recom- 5931 RSX/2x28 E 2x28 1230 3.5
mended for areas with 5931 RSX/2x35 E 2x35 1530 4.0
normal DSE usage.
Optical system
Direct/indirect.
Micro-segmented louvre
aluminium with a surface
purity of 99.99 %. Fully com-
pliant to CIBSE LG 3, cat. II,
i.e. L 200 cd/m2 at refer-
ence angle 60 in the
planes C0/C180, C90/C270
and above 65 all-round.
RSX semi-specular,
RPX highly-specular.

out tools.
Luminaire body
Sheet steel, silver-grey, in
slender profile design. With
232
176
stable and frictionally inte-

grated end caps in die-cast
68 1185/28W, 1485/35W
aluminium which also form a 1230/28W, 1530/35W
connecting design element
between the subtly rounded
side profiles. Integrated fix-
ing brackets for mounting to
rods.
T5 C 0 - C 180 Data table
tronic control gear (E). Mains No. 2030
connection is made within DIN 5040: D62
suitable for through-wiring
to the next unit.
T5 CIBSE BZ:
BZ2
NBN L 14-002:
BZ2/0.8/BZ1

plied with dimmable elec-
tronic control gear, refer-
ence suffix ED,
e.g. 5931 RPX/35 ED.

Indications Page
Rods 102 Luminance limitation LIGHTGATE
Nodes 103 Louvres with luminances limited to L 200 cd/m2 above 60 The energy-saving lighting manage-
Suspensions 103 in the principal longitudinal and transversal planes are effec- ment system LIGHTGATE embodies an
Overhead reflectors 103 tive when lighting rooms with DSE workstations. A corre- individual, manually operated lighting
Lighting management sponding requirement at international level is the compliance control and a daylight-dependent regu-
system 431 to all-round luminance limitation (L 200 cd/m2 above 65). lation with integrated presence detec-
Lamp characteristics 444 RPX and RSX louvres meet both requirements. tion. Description see page 431.
98

W mm
5931 RPX/28 E 1x28 1230 3.2
5931 RPX/35 E 1x35 1530 3.7
5931 RPX/2x28 E 2x28 1230 3.5
5931 RPX/2x35 E 2x35 1530 4.0
652d
Data table no. 2030

232
176
En 300 lx 500 lx
68 1185/28W, 1485/35W Room height H 2.5 m 3.0 m 2.5 m 3.0 m
1230/28W, 1530/35W
20 3.8 4.2 6.3 6.9
30 5.2 5.8 8.7 9.7
40 6.8 7.2 11 12
Area
50 8.2 8.7 14 15
A
in m2 60 9.6 10 16 17
80 12 13 21 22
100 15 16 26 27
150 22 23 37 38
200 29 30 48 50
T5

g1 = Emin : E 1 : 1.5
CIBSE BZ:
BZ2/0.8/BZ1
Reference M LB L
direct indirect
DLOR ULOR
5931 RPX/28 E 1.27 0.95 0.36 0.59
5931 RPX/35 E 1.00 0.95 0.36 0.59
5931 RPX/2x28 E 0.65 0.93 0.38 0.55
5931 RPX/2x35 E 0.51 0.93 0.38 0.55
5931 RSX/28 E 1.27 0.95 0.36 0.59
5931 RSX/35 E 1.00 0.95 0.36 0.59
5931 RSX/2x28 E 0.65 0.93 0.38 0.55
5931 RSX/2x35 E 0.51 0.93 0.38 0.55
Individual luminaires Wire suspensions for individual luminaire mounting

In combination with wire suspensions 05000 SN and wiring without rods
connection units 05000 ESBN the T200 suspended lumi- 05000 SN for suspension lengths of up to 1.0 m,
naires 5931 and 5941 can also be used as individual 05000 SN/2m for suspension lengths of up to 2.0 m.
luminaires without rods. Wiring connection unit 05000 ESBN
(not illustrated) for mains feeding for 05000 SN.
99
Suspended luminaires for task area lighting,
Application
Task area lighting of single-
or twin-desk workstations in
offices and financial institu-
tions. Especially recom-
mended for areas with
normal DSE usage.
Optical system
Special task zone louvre for
increased contrast render-
ing, made of reflection-inten-
sified, highly-specular alu-
minium with a surface purity
of 99.99 %. Fully compliant
to CIBSE LG 3, cat. II, i.e.
65 all-round.

out tools.
Luminaire body
Sheet steel, silver-grey, in
slender profile design. With
stable and frictionally inte-
grated end caps in die-cast
aluminium which also form a
connecting design element
between the subtly rounded
side profiles. Integrated fix-
ing brackets for mounting to
rods.
the next unit.

tronic control gear, refer- Data table no. 2031 Suspended luminaire for workstation lighting 5941 AD/2 x 80 E
Isolux curve diagram Isolux curve diagram
ence suffix ED,
y 0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0 2.5 3.0 3.5 4.0 4.5 5.0
0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0 2.5
Evaluation zone for

e.g. 5941 AD/2x24 ED. 2-workstation-office
contrast rendering
Room width m 3.40 200
Room depth m 5.00
Please contact your local Room height m 2.70
300
400
TRILUX support centre for Reflectance values 500
information regarding light- Ceiling/walls/floor % 80/ 50/ 30 600
ing management systems. Luminaire 5941 AD/ 2 x 80 E
600
0
Lamps W 2 x 80 (T5)
500
2.5 2.0 1.5 1.0 0.5
Mounting height m 1.90 600

400
Light loss factor v=0.8 300 500
(whole room) lx 364 200 400
(desk) lx 638 300
Working plane Working plane
Contrast rendering factor above floor above floor 200
CRFm 0.91 0.75 m 0.75 m
CRFmin 0.79 Illuminance (lx) m x 0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0 2.5 3.0 3.4 Illuminance (lx) m 2.0 1.5 1.0 0.5 0 0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0
Indications Page
Rods 102
Nodes 103
Suspensions 103
Lighting management
system 431
100
Reference Data table Lamps Length kg
No./Page W mm
5941 AD/2x24 E 2033/105 2x24 630 4.9
5941 AD/2x54 E 2032/104 2x54 1230 5.4
5941 AD/2x80 E 2031/100 2x80 1530 6.3
652d
232
176
68 585/24W, 1185/54W, 1485/80W

630/24W, 1230/54W, 1530/80W
T5 C 0 - C 180 Data tables

No. 2033 (2x24W)
No. 2032 (2x54W)
T5
No. 2031 (2x80W)
DIN 5040: D23
CIBSE BZ:
BZ4/1/BZ3
NBN L 14-002:
BZ4/0.8/BZ3
Task area lighting Task area louvres

T200 luminaires in AD version offer Special task area louvres realise effective light direction in
creative and photometric flexibility. the longitudinal luminaire plane. The diagonal light distribu-
Special task zone louvres guarantee tion achieves a pleasantly decentralised illumination on the
contrast-promoting light even in case working surface, thus eliminating glare, however reflective
luminaires are arranged directly above the subject in question is, and improving contrast rendering
the working plane. at the same time.
101
T200
Accessories and dimensions
5
100 12 50
40
Rods Rods closure 05930 AP Connector 05930 K Rod end caps 05930 E Wall adapter 05930 WA
Aluminium, naturally 1 piece, to close off the upper 1 pair, in-line extruded alu- 1 pair, to close the rod ends 1 pair, to fix rods
anodised, 28 mm side of rods 05930//35. minium connector to be of 05930//35. Chrome- 05930//35 to the wall.
05930/I/35 Light-grey plastic material, inserted without using tools. plated plastic end caps, to Plastic wall adapter, chrome-
1 pair of rods, 1800 mm. 1600 mm long, to be snapped Fits snugly into the rods be fixed to the rods without plated, to be fixed to rods
05930/II/35 into the rod opening without 05930//35 to form an tools. without tools, with entry
1 pair of rods, 3200 mm. tools. To be shortened on invisible joint. possibility for mains cable.
05930/III/35 site.
1 pair of rods, 4800 mm.
Distance module
05930 AM
(not illustrated) 1 piece,
for rods > 2000 mm not
equipped with luminaire.
Ceiling rose 05900 A* Jointed connectors

(not illustrated) 1 piece, for allow realisation of
the connection of the mains continuously adjustable
cable. angles between 90 and
270. The resulting different
Ceiling rose 05900 AN* rod lengths depending on the
as described in 05900 A, respective adjusted angle are
but suitable to receive a indicated in the table below.
ceiling fixing unit of the wire
suspensions 05930 S.
c
Illustrations of ceiling roses
can be found on page 116.
b
Angles Distances
b
Feeding tube 05302 ZR* b/mm c/mm

Fixing aid 05930 MH (not illustrated) 1 piece, 90 200 283
1 pair, to allow precise pre- 1700 mm long, to be 100 168 261
mounting of rod pairs. shortened on site. 110 140 244
120 115 231 The luminaire modules are
130 93 221 The T200 rods form a connected within the rods by
140 73 213 wiring channel for through- means of the through-wiring
150 54 207 wiring on site. The wiring set. For this purpose, each
160 35 203 is made using commercial luminaire has a connection
170 17 201 light plastic-sheathed cables, possibility laid outside the
180 0 200 e.g. NYM. end cap.
*Incoming cables are not supplied. They must be provided by the contractor.
102 Katalog 2001

200
90- 270
Overhead reflectors Overhead reflectors
55
Sheet steel, photometrically effective Polycarbonate, white.

surface in white finish, exterior surface Designed to convert position-
35
silver-grey. Easy attachment to lumi- able modules to luminaires
naire body and potential equalisation with a purely downward light
Jointed connector 05930 GK Wire suspensions by means of screw connection. output. To be attached with-
1 pair, exterior, chrome finish, angles 1 pair, 2-point suspension, suspension DR closed version out tools.
continuously adjustable between 90 lengths of up to 1.5 m. DG perforated version
and 270. With 5-conductor wiring 05960 DR/24 for
1.5 mm2. 05930 S for continuous length 05931 DR/28 for luminaires /28 W 596RPX/24 E.
adjustment by means of 05931 DR/35 for luminaires /35 W 05960 DR/39 for
Jointed connector with wire screw driver. 05931 DG/28 for luminaires /28 W 596RPX/39 E.
suspension 05930 GKS 05930 SV for tool-free continuous 05931 DG/35 for luminaires /35 W
1 pair, as 05930 GK, but with con- length compensation.
tinuously adjustable wire suspension,
for suspension lengths of up to 1.5 m.
Suspension distances max. 1500 mm (2000 mm*)

Charge max. 6.5 kg
*The suspension distance 2000 mm is

only admissible in case the length of each
luminaire between the wire suspensions
is at least 800 mm.
110
117
Node adapter 05930 KA Node with pendant Node with wire suspen-
1 piece, die-cast aluminium, structura- suspension 05900 PV sion 05900 SV
lised finish, steel-grey. For the connec- 1 piece, consisting of: 1 piece, consisting of:
270
tion of rods 05930//35 to nodes 1 node for up to four con- 1 node for up to four con-
05900 SV or 05900 PV. nections, angles continu- nections, angles continu-
ously adjustable between ously adjustable between
90 and 270, coated in 90 and 270, coated in
aluminium paint, aluminium paint,
1 steel pendant rod, silver- 1 steel wire, 2 mm, for
grey, 13 mm, 800 mm suspension lengths of up
90 long, with vernier clip, to to 1.5 m,
be shortened on site to 1 ceiling fixing unit, with
the required suspension threaded cap.
lengths,
1 plastic ceiling trim cap,
chrome-plated.
Katalog 2001 103

T200
Practice-oriented ordering examples
Geometrical arrangements
are versatile design means
in modern interior architec-
ture. The innovative tubular
track system T200 allows
to combine luminaires for
accentuation lighting and
general lighting in a single
lighting system. Exemplary
solutions are shown below.
3200 mm
3300 mm
5000 mm 5000 mm
Planning example: seminar room Planning example: office

T-shaped geometrical arrangement, with translucent modules Multi-bended geometrical arrangement, with suspended
and positionable modules for T5 fluorescent lamps luminaire for task area lighting and spotlight modules for
low-voltage halogen lamps
Ordering example: Ordering example:

Rods .............................................................. Reference Rods ...............................................................Reference
1 pair of rods, 3200 mm ................................ 05930/II/35 2 pairs of rods, 4800 mm.............................. 05930/III/35
1 pair of rods, 4800 mm ............................... 05930/III/35 Luminaires
Luminaires 1 suspended luminaire ............................ 5941 AD/2 x 80 E
3 translucent modules................................ 5971 PST/39 E 4 spotlight modules........................................ 5953/QT 50
2 positionable modules ........................... 5961 RPX/2x24 E Accessories and fixings
Accessories and fixings 2 pairs of wire suspensions ................................ 05930 SV
6 pairs of wire suspensions ...................................05930 S 3 pairs of jointed connectors
1 pair of jointed connectors with wire suspension .....................................05930 GKS
with wire suspension......................................05930 GKS 2 pairs of wall adapters ..................................... 05930 WA
3 pairs of rod end caps........................................ 05930 E
1 ceiling rose .................................................... 05900 AN
Data table for luminaire Data table no. 2032 Suspended luminaire for workstation lighting 5941 AD/2 x 54 E
5941 AD/2 x 54 E
y 0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0 2.5 3.0 3.5 4.0 4.5 5.0
0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0 2.5
Evaluation
shown on page 101. 2-workstation-office
zone for
Room width m 5.15
contrast
Room depth m 5.00 rendering 200
Room height m 2.70
300
Reflectance values
Ceiling/walls/floor % 80/ 50/ 30 400
Luminaires 2 x 5941 AD/ 2 x 54 E
0
Lamps W 2 x 54 (T5) 500

2.5 2.0 1.5 1.0 0.5

400
Light loss factor v=0.8 300
300
(whole room) lx 374 200
(desk) lx 611 200
Contrast rendering factor above floor above floor
CRFm 0.92 0.75 m 0.75 m
CRFmin 0.80 Illuminance (lx) m x 0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0 2.5 3.0 3.5 4.0 4.5 5.0 Illuminance (lx) m 2.0 1.5 1.0 0.5 0 0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0
104 Katalog 2001

Data table no. 2028
En 300 lx 500 lx
20 3.3 3.5 5.4 5.9
30 4.7 5.1 7.8 8.5
40 6.2 6.5 10 11
Area
50 7.6 8.0 13 14
A
in m2 60 9.1 9.3 15 16
80 12 13 20 21
100 15 15 25 26
150 22 22 36 37
200 29 30 48 49
2 Max. luminaire

spacings for
g1 = Emin : E 1 : 1.5
h = Luminaire height above working plane

Reference M LB L
direct indirect
DLOR ULOR
5961 RPX/24...+...DR 1.75 0.79 0.79 0.00
5961 RPX/39...+...DR 1.00 0.78 0.78 0.00
5961 RPX/2x24...+...DR 1.06 0.64 0.64 0.00
5961 RPX/2x39...+...DR 0.61 0.63 0.63 0.00

239 mm
6000 mm 4500 mm
3500 mm
Planning example: shop-window Planning example: optician shop

Straight geometrical arrangement, with spotlight modules Rectalinear geometrical arrangement, with two transverse
for low-voltage halogen lamps continuous lines, with positionable modules for T5 fluorescent
lamps and spotlight modules for halogen reflector lamps

Rods...........................................................Reference Rods...........................................................Reference
1 pair of rods, 4800 mm ............................... 05930/III/35 4 pairs of rods, 3200 mm .............................. 05930/II/35
Luminaires 4 pairs of rods, 4800 mm.............................. 05930/III/35
3 spotlight modules........................................ 5953/QT 50 Luminaires
Accessories and fixings 8 positionable modules ........................... 5961 RPX/2x24 E
1 pair of wire suspensions.................................. 05930 SV 4 positionable modules ........................... 5961 RPX/2x39 E
2 pairs of wall adapters ..................................... 05930 WA 6 spotlight modules............................... 5953 HO/QPAR 75
Accessories and fixings
10 pairs of wire suspensions .............................. 05930 SV
8 pairs of jointed connectors
with wire suspension......................................05930 GKS
2 pairs of connectors........................................... 05930 K
1 ceiling rose .................................................... 05900 AN
Data table no. 2032 Suspended luminaire for workstation lighting 5941 AD/2 x 54 E Data table for luminaire
5941 AD/2 x 24 E
y 0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0 2.5 3.0 3.5 4.0 4.5 5.0
0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0 2.5
Evaluation
2-workstation-office
zone for
shown on page 101.
Room width m 5.15
contrast
Room depth m 5.00 rendering 200
Room height m 2.70
300
Reflectance values
Luminaires 2 x 5941 AD/ 2 x 54 E
0
Lamps W 2 x 54 (T5) 500

2.5 2.0 1.5 1.0 0.5

400
300
(desk) lx 611 200
Contrast rendering factor above floor above floor
CRFm 0.92 0.75 m 0.75 m
Katalog 2001 105

106 Katalog 2001
DiVisio DiVisio stands out as an
architectural highlight in its
own right. The luminaire,
with its dominating refrac-
tion arrays of only 35 mm in
height, appears to float.
High-quality materials and
surfaces underline the mod-
ern technical design.
Task area lighting General lighting

DiVisio for task area lighting DiVisio luminaires for general
has been designed to be lighting are predominantly
positioned directly above the destined for arrangement
desks. The system guaran- next to the workstations.
tees freedom from reflective With a striking ultra-slender
glare and promotes a con- design they differ greatly
trast-rich environment thanks from traditional general light-
to the combination of direct/ ing systems.
indirect refraction elements
with special parabolic louvres.
Page 114 Page 112
Katalog 2001 107

DiVisio excellent light
for modern office environments
Task area lighting

These DiVisio luminaires
destined for arrangement
directly above the task
area shape modern office
environments and convince
thanks to their trifunctional
photometric concept: an
indirect component provides
uniform ceiling illumination,
a special task zone louvre
guides the direct component
in diagonal directions and
lateral refraction elements
create an additional direct/
indirect component. The
result: an efficient, contrast-
promoting task area lighting
combined with a balanced
ambient lighting.
General lighting
Parabolic louvres with an
increased direct component
distinguish the DiVisio ver-
sions for general lighting
from the task area lumi-
naires. The general lighting
louvres are destined for a
classical arrangement of
the luminaires beside the
workstations.
108 Katalog 2001

Katalog 2001 109
DiVisio increased lighting comfort
and photometric efficiency
Lighting of modern DSE

workstations
Traditional screens in CRT
technology (Cathode Ray
Tube) are more and more
replaced by modern TFT
screens (Thin Film Transistor).
Higher background illumi-
nances and improved surface
anti-reflection coating lead
to character representation
with excellent contrasts. The
considerably increased regu-
lating range for the screen
inclination corresponding
to individual user require-
ments is a further advan-
tage of the TFT technology.
DiVisio has been developed

for workstations in general,
and in particular for work-
stations equipped with these
TFT screens. The balanced
direct/indirect distribution
of DiVisio is adapted to the
highly inclinable TFT screens
and leads completely inde-
pendent of the screen hard-
ware to a consistently com-
fortable lighting atmosphere.
High contrast rendering

Reflections on reflective or
highly-specular objects can
impair the lighting quality
considerably. The degree of
disturbances is described
by the contrast rendering
factor. As to visual tasks in
offices, values of at least
0.85 are mostly required.
The indirect component of

DiVisio luminaires contributes
substantially to high contrast
rendering factors and thus
to reduced reflective glare.
The special parabolic louvres
of the task area versions
further underline this effect
by efficacious light control in
the longitudinal luminaire
plane. The resulting lateral
light incidence provides
despite the fact that the
luminaires are transversally
arranged above the desks
high contrast rendering fac-
tors exceeding 0.95 in the
standardised evaluation zone
on the working plane.
110 Katalog 2001

Balanced shadowing
Insufficient shadowing im-
pedes plastic sight, whereas
lateral light incidence pro-
motes recognition capabili-
ties of objects and surface
structures.
All the DiVisio louvres pro-

vide the direct light compo-
nent required for balanced
shadowing. In case of the
RSX and RPX parabolic louvre
versions for general lighting,
this component amounts to
approximately 40 % of the
luminaire luminous flux. In
case of the task area ver-
sions, the lamps are further
shielded by the light guiding
plates integrated into the
louvre; however, the direct
component still amounts to
around 15 %, which, due to
the usually short distance to
the task area, contributes
considerably to a well-lit
working area even in this
case.
Colour accents
Colours are an effective inte-
rior design means which in
case of DiVisio luminaires
can also enhance a lighting
installation. Decor elements
in blue, green, red and yellow
are available as accessories,
to be mounted without tools
in front of the refraction
arrays. The resulting, deco-
rative colour accents only
affect the refraction fields,
the light colour in the task
area and on the room limiting
surfaces remains practically
the same.
Katalog 2001 111

DiVisio for general lighting,
Application Reference Lamps LxWxH kg

Offices and financial institu- W mm
tions. Especially recom- 5302 RSX/28 E 2x28 1326x420x52 4.6
mended for workstations 5302 RSX/35 E 2x35 1626x420x52 5.7
equipped with high-bright-
ness TFT screens.
Optical system
Direct/indirect optical sys-
tem for general lighting; con-
sisting of parabolic louvre
and linear refraction ele-
ments. Highly-transmissive
refraction elements made of
polycarbonate, for a uniform
brightness distribution in the
room. Louvre made of re-
flection-intensified aluminium
99.99 %.
RSX Semi-specular para-
bolic louvre.
RPX Highly-specular para-
bolic louvre.
Luminaire body
minium frame to house the
optical system, linear alumin-
ium rods and front-plane bal-
last housing in aluminium/
plastic material.
for connection, with
light-grey mains cable
3 x 1.0 mm2, for suspension
lengths of up to 1.70 m,
including earthed conductor,
for luminaire connection at
the ceiling. With electronic
control gear (E).
No. 2034
DIN 5040: D53
T5 CIBSE BZ:
BZ2
NBN L 14-002:
BZ2
Wire suspensions Electronic control gear

Wire suspensions, optionally available as 4-point or 2-point DiVisio luminaires are equipped as standard with electronic
version, guarantee flexible adaptation to different built envi- control gear, with the result that these luminaires shine out
Indications Page ronments and architectural styles. thanks to the following characteristics: energy-saving opera-
Suspensions 116 tion, lamp-preserving rapid lamp start, flicker-free light and
Colour decor elements 117 avoidance of electrode flicker and disturbing noises.
112
Reference Lamps LxWxH kg
W mm
5302 RPX/28 E 2x28 1326x420x52 4.6
5302 RPX/35 E 2x35 1626x420x52 5.7
652d
Data table no. 2034

En 300 lx 500 lx
20 2.0 2.2 3.3 3.7
30 2.6 3.1 4.6 5.1
40 3.6 3.8 5.9 6.4
Area
50 4.3 4.6 7.2 7.7
A
in m2 60 5.1 5.4 8.5 8.9
80 6.5 6.9 11 12
100 8.0 8.4 13 14
150 12 12 19 20
200 15 16 25 26
T5

g1 = Emin : E 1 : 1.5
CIBSE BZ:
BZ2
Reference M LB L
direct indirect
DLOR ULOR
>> 200 cd/m2 5302 RPX/28 E 1.27 0.91 0.34 0.57
5302 RPX/35 E 1.00 0.91 0.34 0.57
5302 RSX/28 E 1.27 0.91 0.34 0.57
5302 RSX/35 E 1.00 0.91 0.34 0.57
TFT screens
Innovative optical systems which con-
vince thanks to sensibly reduced lumi-
nances even under steep angles are
specially recommended for lighting of
workstations equipped with TFT
screens.
113
DiVisio for task area lighting,
Application
Offices and financial institu-
mended for workstations
equipped with high-bright-
ness TFT screens.
Optical system
Direct/indirect optical sys-
tem for contrast-promoting
lighting of task zones; con-
sisting of a special task zone
louvre and linear refraction
elements. Task-zone louvre
made of reflection-intensi-
fied, highly-specular alumini-
um, for glare-free lighting of
the working surface, with
balanced shadowing. High-
ly-transmissive refraction
elements made of polycar-
bonate, for a uniform bright-
ness distribution in the
room.
Luminaire body
minium frame to house the
optical system, linear alumin-
ium rods and front-plane bal-
last housing in aluminium/
plastic material.
for connection, with
light-grey mains cable
3 x 1.0 mm2, for suspension
lengths of up to 1.70 m,
including earthed conductor,
for luminaire connection at
the ceiling. With electronic
control gear (E).
Data table no. 2035 Suspended luminaire for workstation lighting 5302 ADH/80 E
y 0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0 2.5 3.0 3.5 4.0 4.5 5.0
0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0 2.5
2-workstation-office Evaluation zone for

Room width m 3.40 contrast rendering
200
Room depth m 5.00 300
Room height m 2.70 400
Reflectance values 500
Ceiling/walls/floor % 80/ 50/ 30
Luminaire 5302 ADH/ 80 E
0
Lamps W 2 x 80 (T5) 500

2.5 2.0 1.5 1.0 0.5

(desk) lx 576 300
Contrast rendering factor Working plane above Working plane above 200
CRFm 0.95 floor 0.75 m floor 0.75 m
CRFmin 0.91 Illuminance (lx) m x 0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0 2.5 3.0 Illuminance (lx) m 2.0 1.5 1.0 0.5 0 0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0
Indications Page
Suspensions 116
Colour decor elements 117
114
Reference Data table Lamps LxWxH kg
no./Page W mm
5302 ADH/49 E 2037/117 2x49 1626x420x52 5.8
5302 ADH/54 E 2036/116 2x54 1326x420x52 4.7
5302 ADH/80 E 2035/114 2x80 1626x420x52 5.8
652d

No. 2037 (49 W)
No. 2036 (54 W)
T5
No. 2035 (80 W)
DIN 5040: D23
CIBSE BZ:
BZ2
NBN L 14-002:
BZ5/1/BZ4
TFT screens Tri-functional photometrics

Innovative optical systems which convince thanks to sensibly In addition to the indirect component, the guiding shield of
reduced luminances even under steep angles are specially the louvre system provides a glare-free direct component
recommended for lighting of workstations equipped with TFT directly above the working zone, further complemented by
screens. the light diffusion created by the lateral refraction elements.
115
DiVisio
Accessories
Suspension and connec-

tion accessories
Depending on the project-
specific requirements as to
design and mounting com-
fort, DiVisio luminaires can
be delivered with special wire
suspensions and feeding
accessories. The connection
cable is delivered with the
luminaires as standard.
4-point wire suspension 2-point wire suspension 05302 ST Ceiling rose 05900 AN
1 set, to fix one luminaire 5302, 1 set, to fix one luminaire 5302, 1 piece, for the connection of the the
for suspension lengths of up to 1.70 m, for suspension lengths of up to 1.70 m, mains cable in case of ceiling outlets.
consisting of: consisting of: Y Suitable to receive the ceiling fixing unit
4 steel wires 1.0 mm, 2 steel wire suspensions in -shape of wire suspensions 05302 S.
4 ceiling fixing units. 1.0 mm,
2 ceiling fixing units, with integrated, Ceiling rose 05900 A
05302 SV additionally with 4 wire tool-free continuous height compensa- (not illustrated) 1 piece, for the
adjusting elements for continuous, tion. connection of the mains cable in case
tool-free height compensation. of ceiling outlets.
05302 S for continuous height com-
pensation by means of screwdriver. Feeding tube 05302 ZR
1 piece, plastic, white, 10 mm,
1700 mm long, to be shortened on site.
To guide and cover the mains cable.
Data table for luminaire Data table no. 2036 Suspended luminaire for workstation lighting 5302 ADH/54 E
5302 ADH/54 E described
y 0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0 2.5 3.0 3.5 4.0 4.5 5.0
0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0 2.5
Evaluation
on page 115. 2-workstation-office
zone for
contrast
Room depth m 5.00 rendering
Luminaires 2 x 5302 ADH/ 54 E
0
Lamps W 2 x 54 (T5) 500

2.5 2.0 1.5 1.0 0.5

400
300
(desk) lx 573 200
Contrast rendering factor 100
above floor above floor
CRFm 0.94 0.75 m 0.75 m
116 Katalog 2001

Colour decor elements Combination with T200
For colour accentuation of T200 stands for a flexible
the refraction elements. tubular track system com-
1 set (2 pieces), PLEXIGLAS, prising louvre modules, spot-
to be fixed without tools. light modules, positionable
modules and translucent
modules as active photom-
Reference etric components, see
For luminaires 5302/28 E, page 72. DiVisio luminaires
5302/54 E for task area and general
05302 FB/1200 blue lighting can also be integra-
05302 FG/1200 green ted into this system, please
05302 FR/1200 red contact your local TRILUX
05302 FY/1200 yellow support centre for further
details.
For luminaires 5302/35 E,
5302/49 E, 5302/80 E
05302 FB/1500 blue
05302 FG/1500 green
05302 FR/1500 red
05302 FY/1500 yellow
Data table no. 2037 Suspended luminaire for workstation lighting 5302 ADH/49 E Data table for luminaire
5302 ADH/49 E described
y 0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0 2.5 3.0 3.5 4.0 4.5 5.0
0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0 2.5
Evaluation
zone for
on page 115.
contrast
Room depth m 5.00 rendering
Ceiling/walls/floor % 80/ 50/ 30
400
Luminaires 2 x 5302 ADH/ 49 E
0
Lamps W 2 x 49 (T5) 500

400
2.5 2.0 1.5 1.0 0.5
Mounting height m 1.90

400
300
(desk) lx 568 200
Contrast rendering factor 100
CRFm 0.95 0.75 m 0.75 m
Katalog 2001 117

118 Katalog 2001
Lighting systems in office
DIALOG buildings basically have to
meet the criteria described
in standards and laws with
regard to typical visual
tasks. In addition, DIALOG
luminaires for workstation
and ambient lighting also
allow to create user-oriented
working zones. Their effect
can be supported by wall-
mounted luminaires which are
also suitable for individual DIALOG Wall-mounted luminaires
use. TRILUX will always be DIALOG represents the Wall-mounted luminaires
happy to give you the latest TRILUX workstation-related ideally complement DIALOG
insider info on the benefits lighting system in striking lighting concepts, e.g. for
of task-area lighting. design. It is based on the meeting areas or circulation
principle that luminaires with zones in offices. Highly
special lighting characteris- recommended for effective
tics interact with each lighting outside offices in
other in order to fulfil the ulti- conference rooms, corridors
mate lighting requirements. and foyers.
Page 120 Page 132
Katalog 2001 119

DIALOG
DIALOG individual and free-

standing workstation lumi-
naires represent a modern
lighting system for versatile
light scenarios. Free-standing
workstation luminaires DUAL
thus function independently
without further additional
light components whereas
free-standing luminaires TASK
provide standard-conform
workstation and ambient
lighting in perfect dialogue
with the individual luminaire
DESKTOP. In addition,
DESKTOP is also recom-
mended for combination
with conventional surface-
mounted, recessed and
suspended luminaires.
120 Katalog 2001

DIALOG
DESKTOP TASK DUAL

Individual workstation lumi- Thanks to their distinct orien- Direct/indirect free-standing
naires DESKTOP form the tation towards the work- workstation luminaires DUAL
basis of varied lighting con- station, indirect free-standing shine out thanks to a combi-
cepts, e.g. in combination workstation luminaires TASK nation of general and work-
with free-standing work- are the ideal complement to station-oriented lighting com-
station luminaires TASK of individual workstation lumi- ponents. The equipment is
the DIALOG range or with naires DESKTOP. conceived for the lighting of
general lighting systems. both individual and twin-desk
workstations.
Katalog 2001 121

DIALOG
standard-conform, flexible and future-oriented
How much
light do peo-
ple require in
the office?
Minimum val-
ues are given
in respective
standards.
The pan-Euro-
pean harmoni- DUAL
sation tends The free-standing DUAL luminaire achieves
to favour individual illumination of single and twin-desk
office lighting workstations. Both the indirect general com-
providing bet- ponent usually switched from the door
ween 500 lx and the additional direct workstation-oriented
in working component are jointly integrated into the
zones and luminaire. Integral intelligence is another
300 lx in option for presence detection and daylight
ambient sur- control.
roundings.
This can sug-

gest a lighting
system con-
sisting of one
component
providing
300 lx for
general light-
ing and an-
other compo-
nent increas-
ing the work-
station lighting
to at least
500 lx, offer-
ing a perfect
replication of
the natural
human envi-
ronment.
DESKTOP + TASK
The purely indirect free-standing TASK lumi-
naire provides the general lighting. This lumi-
naire is preferably installed at single or twin-
desk workstations and is usually operated by
switchable sockets. Following the DIALOG
concept, the individual DESKTOP luminaire
allows for a workstation-related increase of
the illuminance to more than 500 lx.
122 Katalog 2001

DESKTOP + direct general lighting
The lighting installation designed to achieve
300 lx creates a uniform basic illumination.
The workstation-related DESKTOP luminaire
provides mean illuminances of more than
500 lx at the desk. When used in combina-
tion with luminaires equipped with T5 fluores-
cent lamps this allows the creation of energy-
saving lighting installations with specific
power requirements of less than 10 W/m 2.
DESKTOP + direct/indirect
general lighting
Direct/indirect suspended luminaires in T5
technology suitable for use in rooms with
only 2.5 m height create a very pleasant
lighting atmosphere. DESKTOP luminaires
allow the increase of basic illumination from
300 lx to 500 lx at the workstation, thus
improving acceptance and well-being.
Katalog 2001 123

Individual workstation luminaires DESKTOP
Application
For decorative lighting of
individual workstations in
combination with different
general lighting systems.
Especially recommended in
combination with the TASK
luminaires of the DIALOG
range.
Optical system
Specular reflector made of
anodised aluminium integrat-
ed into the luminaire head.
Distinctive asymmetrical light
distribution for excellent con-
trast rendering is achieved
thanks to the lateral angle of
incidence. The constant hori-
zontal alignment of the light
emitting surface provides
glare-free illumination.
Luminaire body
Luminaire head made of
impact-resistant plastic
material, with integrated
deco-element. Aluminium
stand profiles. Circle-seg-
mented stand foot in
laser-cut steel, 10 mm thick-
ness. Orientable stand pro-
files and ballast housing
fixed to stand foot. Lumi-
naire head, stand profiles
and luminaire foot silver-
grey, with chromed joints.
The luminaire head can be
swung open, thus allowing
rapid lamp replacement and
easy status test.
With flexible cable, 3 m long,
including earthed plug, for
mains supply. With electronic
control gear (E) and switch.
Data table no. 2038 Luminaire arrangement DESKTOP Isolux curve diagram DESKTOP
Desk Main working Illuminances (lx)

Desk length m 1.60 surface 60x60cm realised exclusively
(DIN 5035 part 8) by individual
Desk width m 0.80 with evaluation luminaire DESKTOP
Luminaire 6001 DT/ TCD 13 E zone for contrast 6001 DT/ TCD13 E
Lamps W 1 x TC-DEL 13 rendering
Luminous flux lm 900
0
5
Light loss factor v=0.8

0
0
1
Illuminance
0
0
(desk) lx 243
3
450
g1 (desk) = Emin : 1: 5.9

0
0
5
(main working surface) lx 345

0 00
0
g2 (main working surface) = Emin : Emax 1: 8.3

0
5
6
0
1
5
0
4
Contrast rendering factor

3
8
0
0
CRFm 1.00
5
0
CRFmin 0.75 Dimensions in mm Illuminance (lx)
TC-DEL C 0 - C 180 Data table

No. 2038
DIN 5040: A30
CIBSE BZ:
BZ6/0.75/BZ5
NBN L 14-002:
BZ5
Indications Page
124
652d
W
6001 DT/TCD E 13 1xTC-DEL13/G24q-1 6.1
Flexibility Electrical connection

Different tasks call for varying attitudes All DIALOG free-standing luminaires for
not only in the workforce! DESKTOP workstation lighting are equipped with
units allow full 3D positioning of the an integrated earthed socket for the
luminaire head to the required plane electrical connection of desk lumi-
under all circumstances. naires.
125
Free-standing workstation luminaires TASK
indirect
Application
For decorative office light-
ing in combination with
DESKTOP individual work-
station luminaires of the
DIALOG range. Especially
recommended for areas with
normal DSE usage.
Optical system
um, for asymmetrical light
distribution providing gener-
ous ceiling illumination above
the working zone. 6021
with cover made of highly-
resistant toughened UV-
absorbing safety glass.
Luminaire body
sheet steel with circular-arc-
profiled contour, end caps
made of die-cast aluminium,
white, solvent-free powder-
coated. With integrated
deco-element. Parallel stand
profiles with integrated bal-
last housing, silver-grey.
Stand profiles inclined
towards the working zone
above approx. 1 m height.
Stand foot made of cast alu-
minium, dark-grey-coated,
with integrated regulation
system for compensating
uneven flooring.
HIT Primary metal halide

lamp HIT-DE with mains halo-
gen lamp QT-DE (length
115 mm) as secondary
source for adequate illumina-
tion during the ignition period.
With flexible cable, 2.5 m
long, including earthed plug,
for mains supply. With elec-
tronic control gear (E). With
integrated earthed socket
and switch. 6024 with Data table no. 2039 Isolux curve diagram TASK + DESKTOP Isolux curve diagram TASK
three-stage switch: off, 50 %
y 0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0 2.5 3.0 3.5 4.0 4.5 5.0
Main working
and 100 %. 6021 with 2-workstation-office
2.0 1.5 1.0 0.5 0 0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0 2.5
surface 60x60cm 100

Room width m 3.50
inclination switch to switch (DIN 5035 part 8)
150
Room depth m 5.00 with evaluation
off at inclination angles Room height m 2.70 zone for contrast 200
> 45 and switch on again Reflectance values rendering
300
at inclination angles < 15. Ceiling/ walls/ floor % 80/ 50/ 30
500
Luminaire TASK 6024 AS/ TC 36 E
400
Sockets are of Central Euro- Lamps W 4 x TC - L 36
300
Luminaire DESKTOP 6001 DT/ TCD 13 E Contrast
pean standard. Further Lamps W 1 x TC - DEL 13 rendering factor 200
details, including different Light loss factor v=0.8 CRFm 1.00 300
Working plane
socket options or blank Illuminance CRFmin 0.75 above floor 0.85 m 200
cover plates, are available (whole room) lx 304 Working plane Illuminance (lx) 150
on request. (desk) lx 530
y
above floor 0.75 m Multiplication factor for

(main working surface) lx 681 Illuminance (lx) m x 0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0 2.5 3.0 3.5 6021 AS/HIT 150 E: 0.92 m x 1.5 1.0 0.5 0 0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0
TC-L C 0 - C 180 Data table HIT-DE C 0 - C 180 Data table

No. 2039 QT-DE No. 2039
DIN 5040: E03 DIN 5040: E03
CIBSE BZ: CIBSE BZ:
BZ10 BZ10
Indications Page NBN L 14-002: NBN L 14-002:
BZ10 BZ10
Glass cover 127
126
652d
Reference Lamps/socket kg W
W 6021 AS/HIT150 E 1xHIT-DE150/RX7s + 13.7
6024 AS/TC36 E 4xTC-L36/2G11 13.1 1xQT-DE150/R7s
Glass cover Fire prevention

Made of toughened safety An integrated inclination sen-
glass. sor which cuts off the power
06000 GA/TC36 for supply at an angle of more
6014, 6024 than 45 to the vertical axis
06000 GA/TC55 for avoids inadmissible heating
6013. of surrounding materials for
HIT luminaires in
non-common position.
127
Free-standing workstation luminaires DUAL
direct/indirect
Application
For decorative office light-
ing. Especially recommend-
ed for areas with normal
DSE usage.
Optical system
Consisting of specular
reflector for asymmetrical
indirect light distribution and
parabolic louvre for distinc-
tive asymmetrical direct light
distribution. Specular reflec-
tor made of reflection-inten-
sified aluminium. Parabolic
louvre made of highly-specu-
lar, post-anodised high-purity
aluminium.
Luminaire body
coated. With integrated
deco-element. Parallel stand
profiles inclined towards the
working zone above approx.
1 m height, silver-grey.
AS With stand foot
made of cast aluminium,
dark-grey-coated, with inte-
grated regulation system for
compensating uneven floor-
ing.
AT With clamp fixing for
attachment to desks with
plate thicknesses between
10 and 50 mm.
With flexible cable, 2.5 m
long, including earthed plug,
for mains supply. With elec-
tronic control gear (E) offer-
ing increased lamp service
life also for applications with
increased switching frequen-
cy. With integrated earthed
socket and three-stage
switch (indirect, off,
direct + indirect). Sockets Data table no. 2040 Isolux curve diagram DUAL Isolux curve diagram DUAL
2-workstation-office 4-workstation-office
are of Central European
y 0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0 2.5 3.0 3.5 4.0 4.5 5.0
y 0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0 2.5 3.0 3.5 4.0 4.5 5.0
Main working
standard. Further details, 2-workstation-office
surface 60x60cm
Room width m 3.50
including different socket (DIN 5035 part 8) 400
Room depth m 5.00
options, telephonic or LAN Room height m 2.70
with evaluation
zone for contrast
systems or blank cover Reflectance values rendering 600
plates, are available on Ceiling/ walls/ floor % 80/ 50/ 30
request. Luminaire DUAL 6013 AS/ TC 55
Lamps W 3 x TC - L 55
400 600 600
Light loss factor v=0.8 Contrast
LG With lighting manage- Illuminance rendering factor
300 400
ment system with integrated (whole room) lx 378 CRFm 0.92 200 300
Illuminance (lx)
presence detection. Adjusta- (desk) lx 704 CRFmin 0.80 200 200

ble to control with program- (main working surface) lx 784 Working plane
mable illuminance set value Multiplication factor above floor 0.75 m
6014 A/TCT 42 0.70 m x 0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0 2.5 3.0 3.5 m x 0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0 2.5 3.0 3.5 4.0 4.5 5.0 5.5 6.0 6.5 7.0
or to manual mode for con- Illuminance (lx)
tinual dimming. Integrated
TC-L C 0 - C 180 Data table
switch-off device. TC-TEL No. 2040
DIN 5040: D43
Indications Page CIBSE BZ:
Glass cover 127 BZ1
Lighting management NBN L 14-002:
BZ3
system 431
128
652d
W
6013 AS/TC55 E 3xTC-L55/2G11 13.7
6013 AS/TC55 LG 3xTC-L55/2G11 13.7
6014 AS/TCT42 E 4xTC-TEL42/GX24q-4 13.4
6014 AS/TCT42 LG 4xTC-TEL42/GX24q-4 13.4
6014 AT/TCT42 E 4xTC-TEL42/GX24q-4 8.1
Version LG
Thanks to integrated presence detec-
tion, switches are not necessary: the
luminaire is switched on immediately
after movements have been registrated
and switched off 15 minutes after peo-
ple have left the registration area.
129
130 Katalog 2001
Wall-mounted
luminaires
DIALOG WALL-I DIALOG WALL-II ES 50 4022

Due to their design, wall- Indirect wall-mounted lumi- A successful interplay of Glare-free light is guaran-
mounted luminaires WALL-I naires WALL-II in the DIALOG technology and aesthetics, teed thanks to a balanced
are predestined for combi- design are optionally avail- that is the striking feature of proportion of direct and indi-
nation with DIALOG free- able with decorative direct the wall-mounted luminaires rect light. Sufficient luminous
standing luminaires, e.g. in lighting component. Thanks ES 50. For decorative, flux is assured due to twin-
meeting areas. The integra- to their compact design predominantly indirect addi- lamp equipment options with
ted, asymmetrical reflector these luminaires are an ideal tional lighting or general compact fluorescent lamps.
directs the indirect light lighting solution for entrance lighting in corridors and
effectively towards the areas or corridors. bed zones.
room centre.
Katalog 2001 131

Wall-mounted ambient luminaires WALL-I
indirect
Application
For decorative general and
additional lighting in offices,
financial institutions, confer-
ence rooms, sales areas,
corridors and hotels. Espe-
cially recommended in com-
bination with free-standing
range.
Optical system
um, for generous ceiling illu-
mination thanks to the dis-
tinctive asymmetrical light
control.
6041 with highly-resistant
toughened UV-absorbing
safety glass.
Luminaire body
made of die-cast aluminium.
6041 with ballast housing
made of die-cast aluminium.
Luminaire body white, sol-
vent-free powder-coated.
With integrated deco-ele-
ment.
HIT Primary metal halide

lamp HIT-DE with mains halo-
gen lamp QT-DE (length
115 mm) as secondary
source for adequate illumina-
tion during the ignition period.
for connection. With elec-
tronic control gear (E).
Data table no. 2042 Isolux curve diagram WALL- I + DUAL Isolux curve diagram WALL- I
1-workstation-office with conference area
y 0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0 2.5 3.0 3.5 4.0 4.5 5.0
0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0 2.5
Room width m 4.50
Room depth m 5.00
Room height m 2.70
Reflectance values
Ceiling/ walls/ floor % 80/ 50/ 30
Luminaires WALL- I 2 x 6042 UW/TC 24 E
25 50 75 100
0

2.5 2.0 1.5 1.0 0.5
Lamps W 2 x TC - L 24 400
Luminaire DUAL 6013 AS/ TC 55 E 300
Lamps W 3 x TC - L 55
200 Working plane
Light loss factor v=0.8 above floor 0.85 m
Illuminance Working plane Illuminance (lx)
(whole room) lx 397 above floor 0.75 m Multiplication factor for
(desk) lx 821 Illuminance (lx) m x 0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0 2.5 3.0 3.5 4.0 4.5 6041 UW/HIT 70 E:1.22 m 4.0 3.5 3.0 2.5 2.0 1.5 1.0 0.5 0
Indications Page
132
652d
Reference Lamps/socket kg W
W 6041 UW/HIT70 E 1xHIT-DE70/RX7s + 4.2
6042 UW/TC24 E 2xTC-L24/2G11 3.2 1xQT-DE150/R7s
Glass cover
Made of highly-resistant
toughened safety glass,
secured against falling
TC-L C 0 - C 180 Data table HIT-DE C 0 - C 180 Data table
No. 2042 QT-DE No. 2042 down.
DIN 5040: E03 DIN 5040: E03 06000 GA/TC24 for
CIBSE BZ: CIBSE BZ: 6042 UW.
BZ10 BZ10
NBN L 14-002: NBN L 14-002:
BZ10 BZ10
133
Wall-mounted ambient luminaires WALL-II
indirect or direct/indirect
Application
For decorative general and
additional lighting in offices,
financial institutions, confer-
ence rooms, sales areas,
corridors and hotels. Espe-
cially recommended in com-
bination with free-standing
range.
Optical system
um, for generous wall and
ceiling illumination thanks to
the wide-angle light distribu-
tion.
Luminaire body
coated.
G with slot-perforated
luminaire body adding a
decorative direct lighting
component.
Data table no. 2043 Isolux curve diagram WALL- II Isolux curve diagram WALL- II
Entrance hall with conference area
4.0 4.5 5.0 5.5
Entrance hall
2.5 2.0 1.5 1.0 0.5 0 0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0 2.5
20
Room width m 5.50
Room depth m 5.50
350
Luminaires 6 x 6052 UW-G/ TCT 42 E 400 30 50 80
Lamps W 2 x TC - TEL 42
y0.5 1.0 1.5
Illuminance
(whole room) lx 345
Multiplication factors above floor above floor 20
WALL- II 6052 UW/TCT 42 E 0.87 0.85 m 0.85 m
WALL- II 6052 /TCD 18 E 0.35 Illuminance (lx) m x0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0 2.5 3.0 3.5 4.0 4.5 5.0 5.5 Illuminance (lx) m 5.5 5.0 4.5 4.0 3.5 3.0 2.5 2.0 1.5 1.0 0.5 0
Indications Page
134
652d

W W
6052 UW/TCD18 E 2xTC-DEL18/G24q-2 2.3 6052 UW-G/TCD18 E 2xTC-DEL18/G24q-2 2.2
6052 UW/TCT42 E 2xTC-TEL42/GX24q-4 2.4 6052 UW-G/TCT42 E 2xTC-TEL42/GX24q-4 2.3
Glass cover
Made of highly-resistant
toughened safety glass,
secured against falling
TC-T(EL) No. 2043 TC-T(EL) No. 2043 down.
DIN 5040: E03 DIN 5040: E03 06000 GA/TCT42 for
CIBSE BZ: CIBSE BZ: 6052 UW/TCD18 E and
BZ10 BZ5 6052 UW/TCT42 E.
NBN L 14-002: NBN L 14-002:
BZ10 BZ5
135
indirect
Application
For decorative, predominant-
ly indirect additional lighting
in offices, financial institu-
tions, conference rooms,
sales areas, lounges, hotels
as well as recuperation facili-
ties, homes for the eldery
and nursing homes. Also
especially recommended for
general lighting in corridors
and bed areas.
Optical system
Predominantly indirect. Ceil-
ing-oriented prismatic cover
made of translucent polycar-
bonate, convex, with internal
channel prisms, transmission
degree 80 %. Internal reflec-
tor. Luminaire body with
slot-perforation at the lower
plane for decorative direct
light emission, with internal
cover made of opal polycar-
bonate.
Luminaire body
extruded aluminium profiles
with circle-segmented con-
tour. End caps and ballast
housing made of die-cast
aluminium. Separate fixing
profile for easy mounting to
wall.
ES 502 W/ solvent-free
powder-coated, white,
ES 502/ silver-grey.
for connection. ES 502E
with electronic control
gear (E), ES 502ED with
dimmable electronic control
gear (ED).
Data table no. 2158 Isolux curve diagram Isolux curve diagram
Waiting area
y 0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0 2.5 3.0 3.5 4.0 4.5 5.0 5.5
Waiting area
2.5 2.0 1.5 1.0 0.5 0 0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0 2.5
100
Room depth m 5.50
Room height m 2.75
Reflectance values
Luminaires 6 x ES 502 W/TCT 32 E
25 50 75 100
Lamps W 2 x TCT 32
Illuminance
0.85 m 0.85 m
Illuminance (lx) m x 0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0 2.5 3.0 3.5 4.0 4.5 5.0 5.5 Illuminance (lx) m 5.5 5.0 4.5 4.0 3.5 3.0 2.5 2.0 1.5 1.0 0.5 0
Indications Page
136
652d

W W
ES 502 W/TCT32 E 2xTC-TEL32/GX24q-3 2.6 ES 502/TCT32 E 2xTC-TEL32/GX24q-3 2.6
ES 502 W/TCT32 ED 2xTC-TEL32/GX24q-3 2.6 ES 502/TCT32 ED 2xTC-TEL32/GX24q-3 2.6

Electronic control gear No. 2158
TRILUX luminaires equipped with electronic control gear DIN 5040: E03
shine out thanks to the following characteristics: energy- CIBSE BZ:
saving operation, lamp-preserving rapid lamp start, flicker- BZ6/0.75/BZ5/1.5
free light and avoidance of electrode flicker and disturbing NBN L 14-002:
BZ5/2/BZ6
noises. The increased lamp service life allows for benefits
in moneys worth.
137
Wall-mounted luminaires for decorative lighting
Application
For a decorative lighting with
cosy flair in corridors, wait-
ing and reception areas,
hotels, restaurants, homes
for the eldery, nursing
homes as well as lounges
and dining rooms.
Optical system
Indirect, room-oriented lumi-
naire cover with radiation
openings covered at the
inner side for a decorative
direct light component.
Luminaire body
Luminaire body and cover
made of sheet steel, sil-
ver-grey. Slot-perforated
cover, with user-oriented
convex front cover.
Data table no. 2046 Isolux curve diagram Isolux curve diagram
Foyer with waiting areas
y 0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0 2.5 3.0 3.5 4.0 4.5 5.0 5.5
Foyer with waiting areas

2.0 1.5 1.0 0.5 0 0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0 2.5

Room height m 2.70
25
Reflectance values
150
Ceiling/ walls/ floor % 80/ 50/ 30 50
200
Luminaires 8 x 4022/ TCT 42 E
250 100 150
350
Lamps W 2 x TC-TEL 42
Illuminance
(whole room) lx 249
Multiplication factors
4022/ TCT 42 E 1.00
y
0.85 m 0.85 m
4022/ TCT 32 E 0.75 Illuminance (lx) m x 0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0 2.5 3.0 3.5 4.0 4.5 5.0 5.5 Illuminance (lx) m x 5.0 4.5 4.0 3.5 3.0 2.5 2.0 1.5 1.0 0.5 0
Indications Page
138
652d
W
4022/TCT32 E 2xTC-TEL32/GX24q-3 3.1
4022/TCT42 E 2xTC-TEL42/GX24q-4 3.1

Easy re-lamping No. 2046
The easily accessible lamp housing of the 4022 wall- DIN 5040: A40
mounted luminaires enables rapid and easy re-lamping: just CIBSE BZ:
release the screw connection to swing out or remove the BZ5
luminaire front cover. NBN L 14-002:
BZ5/1.5/BZ4
139
CENERA,
362
140 Katalog 2001

When it comes to mounting
possibilities, recessed and
surface-mounted luminaires,
either equipped with louvres
(362) or the double-reflec-
tion system (CENERA), are
the first true universal lumi-
naires. They cannot only be
installed in ceilings with cut-
out openings as well as in
ceilings with concealed or
exposed grids universally
suitable for both ceiling mod- PST RWX RSX/65 RPX/65
ules 600 and 625 mm The double-reflection system An exclusive combination of Semi-specular mate- Superb surface
but thanks to their exquisite consists of a primary dif- white cross blades and rials are becoming clarity, aided by
ultra-low design they equally fuser made of translucent reflection-intensified parabolic increasingly popular reflection-intensified
stand out as surface-mounted PLEXIGLAS enveloping a per- side panels, offering a neo- in the built environment. aluminium, offers a louvre
luminaires. forated aluminium primary classical appearance with TRILUX refines the use of that is not only fully compli-
reflector and a concave great performance. these materials with a reflec- ant to the requirements of
white secondary diffuser. tion-intensified material, photometric bodies, but also
offering peak photometric excels with a working effi-
performance with the bene- ciency of up to 80% in direct
fits of diffuse distribution. applications.
Katalog 2001 141

Luminaires with double-reflection system PST,
or compact fluorescent lamps TC-L
Application Reference Lamps Module D D1 E1 kg Reference Lamps Module D D1 E1 kg

Sales areas, showrooms, W mm W mm
conference rooms as well as 3631 PST/14 E 1x14 300/312.5 270 174 96 3.0 3631 PST/28 E 1x28 300/312.5 900 174 96 5.5
offices and financial institu- 3631 PST/35 E 1x35 300/312.5 1200 174 96 6.7
tions.
3631 PST/14 E: particularly
recommended for corridors
and entrance areas.
363 universal application

as surface-mounted and as
recessed luminaires in ceil-
ings with cut-out recess
openings as well as in ceil-
ings with concealed or
exposed grids, modules 625
and 600 mm.
3604 for concealed or

exposed grids in module
625 mm as well as for
cut-out ceiling openings.
Primary optics
Consisting of primary dif-
fuser enveloping a primary
reflector. Primary reflector
aluminium with special slot
perforation allowing about
10 % light transmission. Pri-
mary diffuser made of trans-
lucent PLEXIGLAS for virtual-
ly loss-free forward diffusion
of the transmitted share of
light. Easy maintenance of
the primary optics thanks to
front-plane fixings.
Secondary diffuser
Concave (363) or double
concave (360) shape, with
highly-reflective, solvent-free
powder-coating.
T5 C 0 - C 180 Data table T5 C 0 - C 180 Data table
No. 2047 No. 2047
Luminaire body DIN 5040: B30 DIN 5040: B30
Sheet steel, white.
363 refined to a particular-

ly elegant convex design.
With flush end caps, inclined
T5 CIBSE BZ:
BZ6/0.75/BZ5
NBN L 14-002:
BZ6/0.8/BZ5
T5 CIBSE BZ:
BZ6/0.75/BZ5
NBN L 14-002:
BZ6/0.8/BZ5
by 30 and perfectly adapt-

ed to the luminaire profile.
The required recess depth is
only 18 mm.
terminal. With electronic con-
trol gear (E).
T5 fluorescent lamps Primary reflector

T5 fluorescent lamps with a diameter The primary reflector realises its
reduced to 16 mm enable compact desired light transmission by means of
dimensions of the optical systems and a special slot-perforation. And the pri-
Indications Page the luminaire sections. mary diffuser which envelops the pri-
Fixing accessories 151 mary reflector creates a virtually
Lamp characteristics 444 loss-free forward light diffusion.
142
Reference Lamps Module D D1 D2 E1 kg
W mm
3633 PST/1xTC55 E 1xTC-L55 600/625 480 72 220 196 5.3
3604 PST/2x24 E 2x24 625 - - - - 7.1
652d
Data table no. 2047

En 300 lx 500 lx
20 4.2 4.9 7.0 8.1
30 5.8 6.5 9.6 11
40 7.3 8.1 12 13
Area
50 8.8 9.7 15 16
A
in m2 60 10 11 17 19
80 13 14 22 24
100 16 17 26 29
150 23 24 38 41
200 30 31 49 52
TC-L C 0 - C 180 Data table TC-L C 0 - C 180 Data table Height of the working plane e 0.85 m
T5 T5
DIN 5040: B30 DIN 5040: B30 2 Max. luminaire

spacings for
g1 = Emin : E 1 : 1.5
CIBSE BZ: CIBSE BZ:
BZ6 BZ6/0.75/BZ5 Transverse spacing centre / centre Xmax = 2.1 h
BZ6 BZ6/0.8/BZ5
Reference M LB L
direct indirect
DLOR ULOR
3604PST/2x24 E 1.14 0.65 0.65 0.00
3631PST/14 E 2.75 0.84 0.70 0.14
3631PST/28 E 1.27 0.84 0.70 0.14
3631PST/35 E 1.00 0.84 0.70 0.14
3633PST/1xTC55 E 0.89 0.66 0.58 0.08
Uniform appearance 3604 PST

The optimised interplay between primary diffuser and sec- Version 3604 PST/2x24 E does not only offer comfortable
ondary optics leads to a pleasantly balanced appearance of photometrics but is also suited for mounting in almost all
the luminaires 3604 PST and thus increases the lighting common ceiling systems in module 625 as well as for cut-
comfort. out ceiling openings.
Rapid-mounting swivel brackets 370/1N
for concealed grids, see page 259.
143
with specular hybrid louvre RWX,
for T5 linear fluorescent lamps 16 mm
and compact fluorescent lamps TC-EL
For efficient and elegant W mm W mm
lighting of offices, sales 3621 RWX/28 E 1x28 300/312.5 900 174 56 4.4 3622 RWX/28 E 2x28 300/312.5 900 174 96 4.4
areas and showrooms. 3621 RWX/35 E 1x35 300/312.5 1200 174 56 5.5 3622 RWX/35 E 2x35 300/312.5 1200 174 96 5.5
TC-EL 11 W versions particu-
larly recommended for corri-
dors and entrance areas.
Universal application as sur-

face-mounted and as re-
cessed luminaires in ceilings
with cut-out recess openings
as well as in ceilings with
concealed or exposed grids,
modules 625 and 600 mm.
Optical system
Micro-segmented hybrid par-
abolic louvre RWX, com-
posed of white aluminium
cross blades and highly-
specular side panels made
of reflection-intensified alu-
minium for increased effi-
ciency.

out tools.
Luminaire body
Solvent-free powder-coated
sheet steel, white, refined to
a particularly elegant convex
design. With flush end caps,
inclined by 30 and perfectly
adapted to the luminaire pro-
file. The required recess
depth is only 18 mm.
Luminaires supplied ready No. 2048 No. 2048
for connection. With 3-pole DIN 5040: A50 DIN 5040: A50
trol gear (E).
T5 CIBSE BZ:
BZ1
NBN L 14-002:
BZ2
T5 CIBSE BZ:
BZ1
NBN L 14-002:
BZ2
Luminaires 14, 28, 35

can also be supplied with
gear, reference suffix ED,
e.g. 3622 RWX/28 ED.
T5 fluorescent lamps RWX louvre

T5 fluorescent lamps with a diameter RWX louvres stand for photometric effi-
Indications Page reduced to 16 mm enable compact ciency, thanks to a striking combination
Fixing accessories 151 dimensions of the optical systems and of white-coated aluminium cross blades
Lighting management the luminaire sections. and specular side panels made of
system 431 reflection-intensified aluminium.
144
W mm
3622 RWX/TC11 E 2xTC-SEL11 300/312.5 150 111 96 1.6
3623 RWX/14 E 3x14 600/625 480 72 220 137 4.3
652d
Data table no. 2048

En 300 lx 500 lx
20 3.3 3.7 5.5 6.2
30 4.7 5.1 7.9 8.4
40 6.1 6.4 10 11
Area
50 7.4 7.9 13 13
A
in m2 60 8.7 9.3 15 16
80 12 12 19 20
100 14 15 23 24
150 20 21 35 36
200 27 27 45 46
TC-EL C 0 - C 180 Data table T5 C 0 - C 180 Data table Height of the working plane e 0.85 m
DIN 5040: A60 DIN 5040: A50 2 Max. luminaire spacings for
T5

g1 = Emin : E 1 : 1.5
CIBSE BZ: CIBSE BZ:
BZ1 BZ2
Reference M LB L
direct indirect
DLOR ULOR
3621RWX/28 E 1.26 0.79 0.79 0.00
3621RWX/35 E 1.00 0.79 0.79 0.00
3622RWX/28 E 0.65 0.77 0.77 0.00
3622RWX/35 E 0.51 0.77 0.77 0.00
3622RWX/TC11 E 2.72 0.53 0.53 0.00
3623RWX/14 E 0.90 0.79 0.79 0.00
Cost-minimised operation Universal luminaires

The lamp package 2 x TC-EL 11 W for 362 luminaires is Universal application of TRILUX luminaires 362, 363 as
predestined for areas with lighting requirements up to surface-mounted and as recessed luminaires in ceilings with
approx. 200 lx. The reduced power consumption, only 28 W concealed or exposed grids as well as in ceilings with
per luminaire, creates the best conditions for efficient light- cut-out recess openings.
ing solutions in corridors, waiting and entrance areas.
145
with reflection-intensified, semi-specular parabolic louvre RSX,
or compact fluorescent lamps TC-EL
lighting of offices, sales 3621 RSX/28 E 1x28 300/312.5 900 174 56 4.4 3622 RSX/28 E 2x28 300/312.5 900 174 96 4.4
areas and showrooms. 3621 RSX/35 E 1x35 300/312.5 1200 174 56 5.5 3622 RSX/35 E 2x35 300/312.5 1200 174 96 5.5

Optical system
Micro-segmented, semi-
specular parabolic louvre
RSX made of reflection-
intensified aluminium with a
surface purity of 99.99 %.
Fully compliant to CIBSE LG
3, Cat. II, i.e. L 200 cd/m2
at reference angle 60
in the planes C0/C180,
C90/C270 and above 65
all-round.

out tools.
Luminaire body
adapted to the luminaire pro-
file. The required recess
depth is only 18 mm. No. 2049 No. 2049
DIN 5040: A50 DIN 5040: A50
T5 CIBSE BZ:
BZ1
NBN L 14-002:
BZ2
T5 CIBSE BZ:
BZ1
NBN L 14-002:
BZ2

trol gear (E).

e.g. 3621 RSX/35 ED.
T5 fluorescent lamps Luminance limitation

T5 fluorescent lamps with a diameter Parabolic louvres RPX and RSX with
Indications Page reduced to 16 mm enable compact luminances limited to L 200 cd/m2 at
Fixing accessories 151 dimensions of the optical systems and reference angle 65 were found
Lighting management the luminaire sections. effective when lighting areas with nor-
system 431 mal DSE usage.
146
W mm
3622 RSX/TC11 E 2xTC-EL11 300/312.5 150 111 96 1.6
3623 RSX/14 E 3x14 600/625 480 72 220 137 4.3
652d
Data table no. 2049

En 300 lx 500 lx
20 3.3 3.7 5.5 6.2
30 4.7 5.1 7.9 8.4
40 6.1 6.4 10 11
Area
50 7.4 7.9 13 13
A
in m2 60 8.7 9.3 15 16
80 12 12 19 20
100 14 15 23 24
150 20 21 35 36
200 27 27 45 46
T5

g1 = Emin : E 1 : 1.5
CIBSE BZ: CIBSE BZ:
BZ1 BZ2
Reference M LB L
direct indirect
DLOR ULOR
3621RSX/28 E 1.26 0.83 0.83 0.00
3621RSX/35 E 1.00 0.83 0.83 0.00
3622RSX/28 E 0.65 0.81 0.81 0.00
3622RSX/35 E 0.51 0.81 0.81 0.00
3622RSX/TC11 E 2.72 0.53 0.53 0.00
3623RSX/14 E 0.90 0.83 0.83 0.00
Cost-minimised operation
The lamp package 2 x TC-EL 11 W for 362 luminaires is
predestined for areas with lighting requirements up to
approx. 200 lx. The reduced power consumption, only 28 W
per luminaire, creates the best conditions for efficient light-
147
with reflection-intensified, highly-specular parabolic louvre RPX,
or compact fluorescent lamps TC-EL
lighting of offices, sales 3621 RPX/28 E 1x28 300/312.5 900 174 56 4.4 3622 RPX/28 E 2x28 300/312.5 900 174 96 4.4
areas, showrooms and finan- 3621 RPX/35 E 1x35 300/312.5 1200 174 56 5.5 3622 RPX/35 E 2x35 300/312.5 1200 174 96 5.5
cial institutions. Especially
recommended for areas
with normal DSE usage.

Optical system
RPX made of reflection-inten-
sified aluminium with a sur-
face purity of 99.99 %. Fully
compliant to CIBSE LG 3,
Cat. II, i.e. L 200 cd/m2 at
reference angle 60 in
the planes C0/C180, C90/C270

out tools.
Luminaire body
adapted to the luminaire pro- No. 2050 No. 2050
file. The required recess DIN 5040: A60 DIN 5040: A60
depth is only 18 mm.
T5 CIBSE BZ:
BZ2/1.5/BZ1
NBN L 14-002:
BZ2/0.8/BZ1
T5 CIBSE BZ:
BZ2/1.5/BZ1
NBN L 14-002:
BZ2/0.8/BZ1

trol gear (E).

e.g. 3622 RPX/35 ED.
T5 fluorescent lamps Luminance limitation

T5 fluorescent lamps with a diameter Parabolic louvres RPX and RSX with
Indications Page reduced to 16 mm enable compact luminances limited to L 200 cd/m2 at
Fixing accessories 151 dimensions of the optical systems and reference angle 65 were found
Lighting management the luminaire sections. effective when lighting areas with nor-
system 431 mal DSE usage.
148
W mm
3622 RPX/TC11 E 2xTC-EL11 300/312.5 150 111 96 1.6
3623 RPX/14 E 3x14 600/625 480 72 220 137 4.3
652d
Data table no. 2050

En 300 lx 500 lx
20 3.1 3.5 5.2 5.9
30 4.5 4.8 7.5 8.0
40 5.8 6.1 9.6 10
Area
50 7.0 7.5 12 12
A
in m2 60 8.3 8.8 14 15
80 11 11 18 19
100 13 14 22 23
150 21 21 33 34
200 26 26 43 44
T5

g1 = Emin : E 1 : 1.5
CIBSE BZ: CIBSE BZ:
BZ1 BZ2/0.8/BZ1
Reference M LB L
direct indirect
DLOR ULOR
3621RPX/28 E 1.21 0.83 0.83 0.00
3621RPX/35 E 1.00 0.83 0.83 0.00
3622RPX/28 E 0.63 0.81 0.81 0.00
3622RPX/35 E 0.52 0.81 0.81 0.00
3622RPX/TC11 E 2.62 0.56 0.56 0.00
3623RPX/14 E 0.90 0.83 0.83 0.00
Cost-minimised operation
The lamp package 2 x TC-EL 11 W for 362 luminaires is
predestined for areas with lighting requirements up to
approx. 200 lx. The reduced power consumption, only 28 W
per luminaire, creates the best conditions for efficient light-
149
CENERA and 362
Indications and accessories for luminaire mounting
By means of the fixing

accessories 03620
described opposite, CENERA
and 362 luminaires can
easily be mounted in all
conventional ceiling types:
1. Ceiling systems with

concealed grids
2. Ceiling systems with

exposed grids
3. Ceilings with cut-out

recess openings, e.g. made
of wood or gypsum plaster
The illustrations below show examples of commonly used grid and ceiling systems and the
flange widths admissible for luminaire mounting. The maximum total height for grids plus
ceiling tile is a uniform 56 mm for all kinds of ceilings.
362 series 363 series

Ceilings with
exposed grids
Maximum height of the grid
is 56 mm. Maximum lower
flange width is 24 mm. max. 56 mm
max. 24 mm
Ceilings with
concealed grids
plus ceiling tile is 56 mm.
Maximum lower flange width max. 56 mm
is 24 mm.
max. 24 mm
Ceilings with cut-out

recess openings
plus ceiling tile is 56 mm.
Maximum grid overhang is max. 56 mm
12 mm.
max. 12 mm
150
Fixing accessories LIGHTGATE
1 set mounting rails for the mounting of luminaires in system LIGHTGATE stands for an energy-saving and
ceilings or ceilings with cut-out recess openings. comfort-enhancing lighting management sys-
tem preferably used with TRILUX luminaires
Reference for luminaires equipped with dimmable electronic control
03620/1 3621, 3622, 3631 gear. LIGHTGATE embodies an individual, manually operated
03620/3 3623, 3633 lighting control and a daylight-dependent regulation with
integrated presence detection, see page 431.
Vacuum plug 03630 S (not illustrated)
1 piece. Recommended for removing secondary reflectors
of 363 series luminaire bodies.
Reference Reference
362 series 363 series 362 series 363 series
3621/28 E
3621/35 E
3622/28 E 3631 PST/14 E
3622/35 E 3631 PST/28 E
3622/TC 11 E 3631 PST/35 E 3623/14 E 3633 PST/1 x TC 55 E
Module 600 mm Module 600 mm
Cut-out openings Cut-out openings

... for 3622/TC 11 E 334 x 290 mm ... for 3623 RPX/14 E 600 x 600 mm
... for 3631/14 E 580 x 290 mm ... for 3633 PST/1 x TC 55 E 600 x 600 mm
... for 3621, 3622, 3631/28 E 1210 x 290 mm
... for 3621, 3622, 3631/35 E 1510 x 290 mm
151
Surface-mounted Numerous series within the
TRILUX louvre luminaire
and suspended range can be equipped with
innovative T5 fluorescent
louvre luminaires lamps in efficient version,
thus creating the best condi-
tions for extremely economic
lighting installations. 526,
504, 505 luminaires can
be additionally equipped with
lumen-rich T5 lamps.
Furthermore, part of the 526

range remain the tried-and- The modular-design principle
tested series for exclusive based on T5 basic luminaires
use of T8 lamps with high- offers possibilities for sus-
quality louvres. pended luminaires with vari-
able direct/indirect light dis-
tribution and direct surface-
mounted luminaires. The
highlight: surface-mounted
luminaires providing a deco-
rative ceiling illumination.
Page 154
152
504, 505 598, 599 500 152 1510
The distinctive style of the Modern slender design with 500 series luminaires The 152 system for T8 flu- The 1510 series for T8
luminaire body for T5 lamps a luminaire height of a mere include versions for both effi- orescent lamps in spherical lamps convinces with techni-
characterises the timeless 62 mm, high efficiency and cient T5 lamps and tried-and- design is not only predes- cal efficiency and a timeless
slender cubist design of this state-of-the-art photometrics tested T8 lamps. A smooth tined for versatile use in profile design. The luminaire
series. Five louvre versions are some of the architectural transition to the new lamp offices. The luminaire body body in combination with the
as well as photometrically and functional merits this technology can therefore be dimensions are also architec- characteristic lateral profiles
optimised diffusers are avail- series has to offer, partly easily planned because both ture-compatible when used in blends in with the room
able for surface-mounted due to the use of T5 fluores- versions feature the same rooms with higher ceilings. architecture without prevail-
and suspended luminaires. cent lamps. architectural design. ing the built environment.
153
526 The innovative system for
architectural lighting effects
is based on T5 basic lumi-
naires which can be com-
bined to surface-mounted
and suspended luminaires
with optional direct/indirect
light distribution by means of
accessories. Geometrical
arrangements by means of
nodes are possible as well.
154
RWV RWX RSV RSX/65 RPX/65
Designed for An exclusive For high-effi- Semi-specular Superb sur-
even illumi- combination ciency illumi- materials are face clarity
nation of of white nation in becoming offers a lou-
general surfaces and utility cross blades and reflection- areas with public access and increasingly popular in the built vre that is not only fully com-
areas. Uniform, balanced intensified parabolic side non-DSE offices. Narrow/ environment. TRILUX refines pliant to the requirements
light distribution with high panels, offering a neo-classi- wide-angle light distribution the use of these materials with of photometric bodies, but
efficiency. Louvre made of cal appearance with great with excellent efficiency due a reflection-intensified material, also excels with a working
white-coated aluminium or performance. to concave-profiled aluminium offering peak photometric efficiency of up to 80 % in
sheet-steel depending on cross blades and highly-reflec- performance with the benefits direct and over 90 % in
application. tive aluminium side panels. of diffuse distribution. direct/indirect applications.
155
Light variations
Lighting effects
Versatile lighting tasks call for corre-
sponding lighting solutions. A perfect
choice: the new louvre luminaire
system 526.
Whether as direct surface-mounted

luminaire, as surface-mounted lumi-
naire with a decorative indirect com-
ponent or as suspended luminaire
with an optional indirect component
everything is possible.
All solutions are based on the slender

526 luminaire body with a ceiling-
oriented opening. Rooms can be
perfectly lit with surface-mounted or
suspended luminaires in combination
with closed or perforated overhead
reflectors, thus creating a lighting
effect that suits the architecture. 1 2 3
Suspended luminaires Suspended luminaires Suspended luminaires

Indirect component 45 % Indirect component 15 % Indirect component 0 %
A basic luminaire suspended Also rooms with only moder- Indirect components cannot
by wires creates an indirect ate ceiling reflectance values create special lighting effects
lighting component of 45 %. benefit from increased light- in case of insufficient ceiling
This solution for contrast-promoting ing comfort due to indirect light. The reflection. In these cases, suspended
light allows realisation of lighting perforated overhead reflector inten- luminaires covered with closed over-
installations with higher user ac- sifies the direct component in case head reflectors efficiently guide the
ceptance. of moderate ceiling illumination. lamp light directly onto the working
plane.
156
4 5
Direct surface-mounted Surface-mounted luminaires

luminaires with indirect component
guide their light primarily onto the combine efficient direct light of
working plane recommended surface-mounted systems with the
for rooms with lower ceilings and comfort-increasing indirect com-
lower reflectance values. ponent of suspended luminaires.
4 5
Surface-mounted luminaires Surface-mounted luminaires Geometrical arrangements

purely direct with indirect component Nodes offer extended planning scope
Classical purely direct sur- Luminaires with perforated for architecture-enhancing environ-
face-mounted luminaires are overhead reflectors mounted ments. Up to four surface-mounted or
particularly recommended with distance to the ceiling suspended continuous-line luminaires
for rooms with lower ceilings and offer lighting comfort even in rooms can be connected at variable angles
lower ceiling reflectance values. For with lower ceilings. This solution shines by means of special adapters.
this purpose, basic luminaires are out thanks to a pleasant effect and
combined with closed overhead the impression that the luminaire
reflectors. seems to float beneath the ceiling.
157
Luminaires with white louvre RWV,
Application Reference* Lamps D D1 D2 kg Accessories for suspended mounting

Offices, sales areas and W mm Wire suspension Wire suspension
showrooms. 1m 2m
5261 RWV-L/28/54 E 1x28/54 1192 17.5 3.0 05000 SN 05000 SN/2m
Universal application as sus- 5261 RWV-L/35/49/80 E 1x35/49/80 1492 17.5 3.9 05000 SN 05000 SN/2m
pended luminaires and with 5261 RWV-L/28 ED 1x28 1192 17.5 3.0 05000 SN 05000 SN/2m
overhead reflectors and fix- 5261 RWV-L/35 ED 1x35 1492 17.5 3.9 05000 SN 05000 SN/2m
ing accessories also as sur-
5261 RWV-L/49 ED 1x49 1492 17.5 3.9 05000 SN 05000 SN/2m
face-mounted luminaires.
5261 RWV-L/54 ED 1x54 1192 17.5 3.0 05000 SN 05000 SN/2m
Optical system 5261 RWV-L/80 ED 1x80 1492 17.5 3.9 05000 SN 05000 SN/2m
Micro-segmented louvre * End caps for individual luminaires or for the completion of continuous lines to be ordered separately.
RWV made of aluminium,

white, for a uniform light dis-
tribution. Louvre retention by
clips providing earth continu-
ity. Louvre can be lowered
and hung from either side
without tools.
Light distribution
Direct/indirect, indirect com-
ponent approx. 45 %. With
perforated overhead reflec-
tors: indirect component
approx. 15 %. With closed
overhead reflectors: indirect
component 0 %.
Luminaire body
Slender and elegant lumi-
naire profile, upper profile
arched towards the ceiling,
made of solvent-free powder-
coated sheet steel, white.
With integrated coupling
brackets for non-interrupted
continuous lines. End caps to
be ordered separately.
plug-in connection terminal No. 2051 No. 2051
for mains supply and further DIN 5040: C43 with perforated overhead
wiring for wires up to
T5 T5
reflector 05261 DG/
CIBSE BZ:
2.5 mm2, including earth BZ2/2.5/BZ3 DIN 5040: B53
connection terminal. NBN L 14-002: CIBSE BZ:
BZ4 BZ2/4/BZ3
NBN L 14-002:
E BZ3
With electronic control gear
in Multi-Lamp technology
for T5 lamps in different
wattages.
ED
With dimmable electronic
control gear with 1-10 V
interface.
Indications Page
Overhead reflector 168
Node 168
Surface mounting
accessories 169
Prismatic cover 169
Suspensions 169
End caps 169 Order. example: cont. line (4 suspended luminaires) Photometrically effective cover options
Through-wiring set 169 4 luminaires 5261 RWV-L/35/49/80 E The lighting effect of 526 luminaires can be effectively var-
Lighting management 1 pair of end caps 05261 K ied by means of optional overhead reflectors. Overhead
system 431 4 perforated overhead reflectors 05261 DG/1500 reflectors DR turn the luminaires into a purely direct system
Multi-Lamp electronic 5 wire suspensions 05000 SN whereas perforated overhead reflectors DG reduce the indi-
control gear 436 3 through-wiring sets 3700/3LV/58 rect component to approx. 15 %. Prismatic covers for
Lamp characteristics 444 1 wiring connection unit 05000 ESBN improved dust protection are another option.
158
Reference* Lamps D D1 D2 kg Accessories for ceiling surface mounting
W mm Ceiling Overhead reflector, Overhead reflector,
spacer perforated closed
5261 RWV-L/28/54 E 1x28/54 1100 64 92 3.0 05261 AB 05261 DG/1200 05261 DR/1200
5261 RWV-L/35/49/80 E 1x35/49/80 1400 64 92 3.9 05261 AB 05261 DG/1500 05261 DR/1500
5261 RWV-L/28 ED 1x28 1100 64 92 3.0 05261 AB 05261 DG/1200 05261 DR/1200
5261 RWV-L/35 ED 1x35 1400 64 92 3.9 05261 AB 05261 DG/1500 05261 DR/1500
5261 RWV-L/49 ED 1x49 1400 64 92 3.9 05261 AB 05261 DG/1500 05261 DR/1500
5261 RWV-L/54 ED 1x54 1100 64 92 3.0 05261 AB 05261 DG/1200 05261 DR/1200
5261 RWV-L/80 ED 1x80 1400 64 92 3.9 05261 AB 05261 DG/1500 05261 DR/1500
* End caps for individual luminaires or for the completion of continuous lines to be ordered separately.
652d
Data table no. 2051 Data table no. 2052

1 Number of luminaires 1 Number of luminaires
En 300 lx 500 lx En 300 lx 500 lx
Room height H 2.5 m 3.0 m 2.5 m 3.0 m Room height H 2.5 m 3.0 m 2.5 m 3.0 m
20 4.1 4.6 6.8 7.7 20 3.9 4.4 6.6 7.4
30 5.7 6.4 9.5 11 30 5.5 6.0 9.2 10
40 7.3 8.0 12 13 40 7.0 7.6 12 13
Area Area
50 8.9 9.6 15 16 50 8.5 9.2 14 15
A A
in m2 60 10 11 17 19 in m2 60 10 11 17 18
80 13 14 22 24 80 13 14 22 23
100 17 17 28 29 100 16 17 26 28
150 24 25 40 42 150 23 24 39 40
200 31 33 52 54 200 30 31 51 52
Calculation parameters Calculation parameters
Reflectance values 0.7 / 0.5 / 0.2 Reflectance values 0.7 / 0.5 / 0.2
Light loss factor v 0.8 Light loss factor v 0.8
C 0 - C 180 Data table Height of the working plane e 0.85 m Height of the working plane e 0.85 m
No. 2052 Suspension length lp 0.50 m Suspension length lp 0.00 m
with closed overhead 2 Max. luminaire

spacings for 2 Max. luminaire

spacings for
reflector 05261 DR/ g1 = Emin : E 1 : 1.5 g1 = Emin : E 1 : 1.5
DIN 5040: A50 Transverse spacing centre / centre Xmax = 2.3 h Transverse spacing centre / centre Xmax = 1.8 h
Longitudinal spacing centre / centre Ymax = 1.5 h Longitudinal spacing centre / centre Ymax = 1.5 h
CIBSE BZ: h = Luminaire height above working plane h = Luminaire height above working plane
BZ2/1.25/BZ3
NBN L 14-002: 3 Multiplication factor M 4 Photometric 3 Multiplication factor M 4 Photometric
BZ3 for no. of luminaires characteristics for no. of luminaires characteristics
Reference M LB L Reference M LB L
direct indirect direct indirect
DLOR ULOR DLOR ULOR
5261 RWV-L/28 1.27 0.84 0.44 0.40 5261 RWV-L/28
+ 05261 DG/1200 1.41 0.75 0.64 0.12 + 05261 DR/1200 1.27 0.73 0.73 0.00
+ 05261 DG/1200 1.27 0.75 0.64 0.12
+ 05261 P/1200 1.27 0.83 0.50 0.33
5261 RWV-L/35
5261 RWV-L/35 1.00 0.84 0.44 0.40 + 05261 DR/1500 1.00 0.73 0.73 0.00
+ 05261 DG/1500 1.11 0.75 0.64 0.12 + 05261 DG/1500 1.00 0.75 0.64 0.12
+ 05261 P/1500 1.00 0.83 0.50 0.33 5261 RWV-L/49
5261 RWV-L/49 0.77 0.84 0.44 0.40 + 05261 DR/1500 0.78 0.72 0.72 0.00
+ 05261 DG/1500 0.85 0.75 0.64 0.12 + 05261 DG/1500 0.76 0.75 0.64 0.12
+ 05261 P/1500 0.78 0.82 0.49 0.33 5261 RWV-L/54
+ 05261 DR/1200 0.77 0.70 0.70 0.00
5261 RWV-L/54 0.74 0.84 0.44 0.40 + 05261 DG/1200 0.74 0.75 0.64 0.12
+ 05261 DG/1200 0.82 0.75 0.64 0.12 5261 RWV-L/80
+ 05261 P/1200 0.77 0.80 0.48 0.32 + 05261 DR/1500 0.57 0.69 0.69 0.00
5261 RWV-L/80 0.54 0.84 0.44 0.40 + 05261 DG/1500 0.54 0.75 0.64 0.12
+ 05261 DG/1500 0.60 0.75 0.64 0.12
+ 05261 P/1500 0.57 0.79 0.47 0.31
Overhead reflectors DR Overhead reflectors DG

Combined with overhead reflectors DR, In addition to efficient direct light, per-
526 luminaires can be conceived as forated overhead reflectors DG provide
purely direct surface-mounted lumi- a decorative ceiling illumination. Due to
naires. Recommended for rooms with this special effect the luminaires seem
lower ceilings or lower ceiling reflec- to float beneath the ceiling.
tance values.
159
Luminaires with specular hybrid louvre RWX,

Offices, sales areas and W mm Wire suspension Wire suspension
showrooms. 1m 2m
5261 RWX-L/28/54 E 1x28/54 1192 17.5 3.0 05000 SN 05000 SN/2m
Universal application as sus- 5261 RWX-L/35/49/80 E 1x35/49/80 1492 17.5 3.9 05000 SN 05000 SN/2m
pended luminaires and with 5261 RWX-L/28 ED 1x28 1192 17.5 3.0 05000 SN 05000 SN/2m
overhead reflectors and fix- 5261 RWX-L/35 ED 1x35 1492 17.5 3.9 05000 SN 05000 SN/2m
5261 RWX-L/49 ED 1x49 1492 17.5 3.9 05000 SN 05000 SN/2m
5261 RWX-L/54 ED 1x54 1192 17.5 3.0 05000 SN 05000 SN/2m
Optical system 5261 RWX-L/80 ED 1x80 1492 17.5 3.9 05000 SN 05000 SN/2m
Micro-segmented hybrid par- * End caps for individual luminaires or for the completion of continuous lines to be ordered separately.

ciency. Louvre retention by
without tools.
Light distribution
component 0 %.
Luminaire body
No. 2053 No. 2053
Electrical connection DIN 5040: C63 with perforated overhead
T5 T5
reflector 05261 DG/
CIBSE BZ:
for connection. With 5-pole BZ3/1.25/BZ2 DIN 5040: B63
plug-in connection terminal NBN L 14-002: CIBSE BZ:
BZ2 BZ2
for mains supply and further
NBN L 14-002:
wiring for wires up to BZ2
connection terminal.
E With electronic control
gear in Multi-Lamp technolo-
gy for T5 lamps in different
wattages.
ED With dimmable electronic
interface.
Indications Page
Node 168
Surface mounting
accessories 169
Prismatic cover 169
Suspensions 169
End caps 169 Ordering example: LIGHTGATE
Through-wiring set 169 individual suspended luminaire, direct The energy-saving lighting manage-
Lighting management 1 luminaire 5261 RWX-L/49 ED ment system LIGHTGATE embodies an
system 431 1 pair of end caps 05261 K individual, manually operated lighting
Multi-Lamp electronic 1 closed overhead reflector 05261 DR/1500 control and a daylight-dependent regu-
control gear 436 2 wire suspensions 05000 SN lation with integrated presence detec-
Lamp characteristics 444 1 wiring connection unit 05000 ESBN tion. Description see page 431.
160
5261 RWX-L/28/54 E 1x28/54 1100 64 92 3.0 05261 AB 05261 DG/1200 05261 DR/1200
5261 RWX-L/35/49/80 E 1x35/49/80 1400 64 92 3.9 05261 AB 05261 DG/1500 05261 DR/1500
5261 RWX-L/28 ED 1x28 1100 64 92 3.0 05261 AB 05261 DG/1200 05261 DR/1200
5261 RWX-L/35 ED 1x35 1400 64 92 3.9 05261 AB 05261 DG/1500 05261 DR/1500
5261 RWX-L/49 ED 1x49 1400 64 92 3.9 05261 AB 05261 DG/1500 05261 DR/1500
5261 RWX-L/54 ED 1x54 1100 64 92 3.0 05261 AB 05261 DG/1200 05261 DR/1200
5261 RWX-L/80 ED 1x80 1400 64 92 3.9 05261 AB 05261 DG/1500 05261 DR/1500
652d

En 300 lx 500 lx En 300 lx 500 lx
20 3.6 3.9 6.0 6.6 20 3.4 3.9 5.7 6.5
30 5.0 5.6 8.4 9.4 30 4.9 5.2 8.2 8.7
40 6.6 7.0 11 12 40 6.2 6.5 10 11
Area Area
50 8.0 8.5 13 14 50 7.5 8.2 13 14
A A
in m2 60 9.5 9.9 16 16 in m2 60 8.8 9.5 15 16
80 12 13 20 22 80 12 12 19 20
100 15 16 25 26 100 14 15 24 24
150 22 23 37 38 150 21 22 35 36
200 29 30 48 50 200 27 28 46 47


spacings for
BZ3
BZ2/4/BZ3 for no. of luminaires characteristics for no. of luminaires characteristics
DLOR ULOR DLOR ULOR
5261 RWX-L/28 1.27 0.88 0.47 0.41 5261 RWX-L/28
+ 05261 DG/1200 1.44 0.78 0.66 0.11 + 05261 DR/1200 1.27 0.80 0.80 0.00
+ 05261 DG/1200 1.38 0.78 0.66 0.11
+ 05261 P/1200 1.23 0.91 0.56 0.35
5261 RWX-L/35
5261 RWX-L/35 1.00 0.88 0.47 0.41 + 05261 DR/1500 1.00 0.80 0.80 0.00
+ 05261 DG/1500 1.13 0.78 0.66 0.11 + 05261 DG/1500 1.09 0.78 0.66 0.11
+ 05261 P/1500 0.97 0.91 0.56 0.35 5261 RWX-L/49
5261 RWX-L/49 0.77 0.88 0.47 0.41 + 05261 DR/1500 0.78 0.78 0.78 0.00
+ 05261 DG/1500 0.87 0.78 0.66 0.11 + 05261 DG/1500 0.84 0.78 0.66 0.11
+ 05261 P/1500 0.76 0.89 0.55 0.34 5261 RWX-L/54
+ 05261 DR/1200 0.77 0.77 0.77 0.00
5261 RWX-L/54 0.74 0.88 0.47 0.41 + 05261 DG/1200 0.81 0.78 0.66 0.11
+ 05261 DG/1200 0.84 0.78 0.66 0.11 5261 RWX-L/80
+ 05261 P/1200 0.75 0.88 0.54 0.33 + 05261 DR/1500 0.57 0.75 0.75 0.00
5261 RWX-L/80 0.54 0.88 0.47 0.41 + 05261 DG/1500 0.58 0.78 0.66 0.11
+ 05261 DG/1500 0.61 0.78 0.66 0.11
+ 05261 P/1500 0.55 0.86 0.53 0.33

tance values.
161
Luminaires with semi-specular cross-blade louvre RSV,

Offices, sales areas, show- W mm Wire suspension Wire suspension
rooms, financial institutions. 1m 2m
5261 RSV-L/28/54 E 1x28/54 1192 17.5 3.0 05000 SN 05000 SN/2m
Universal application as sus- 5261 RSV-L/35/49/80 E 1x35/49/80 1492 17.5 3.9 05000 SN 05000 SN/2m
pended luminaires and with 5261 RSV-L/28 ED 1x28 1192 17.5 3.0 05000 SN 05000 SN/2m
overhead reflectors and fix- 5261 RSV-L/35 ED 1x35 1492 17.5 3.9 05000 SN 05000 SN/2m
5261 RSV-L/49 ED 1x49 1492 17.5 3.9 05000 SN 05000 SN/2m
5261 RSV-L/54 ED 1x54 1192 17.5 3.0 05000 SN 05000 SN/2m
Optical system 5261 RSV-L/80 ED 1x80 1492 17.5 3.9 05000 SN 05000 SN/2m
Micro-segmented louvre RSV * End caps for individual luminaires or for the completion of continuous lines to be ordered separately.

aluminium, with graduated
concave-profiled cross
blades, for narrow/wide-
angle light distribution. Lou-
vre retention by means of
spring-tensioned clips pro-
viding earth continuity. Louvre
can be lowered and hung
from either side without tools.
Light distribution
component 0 %.
Luminaire body
for connection. With 5-pole DIN 5040: C63 with perforated overhead
T5 T5
reflector 05261 DG/
CIBSE BZ:
for mains supply and further BZ2 DIN 5040: B63
wiring for wires up to NBN L 14-002: CIBSE BZ:
BZ1/4/BZ2 BZ2
NBN L 14-002:
connection terminal. BZ1/4/BZ2
E
wattages.
ED
interface.
Indications Page
Node 168
Surface mounting
accessories 169
Prismatic cover 169
Suspensions 169
End caps 169 Order. example: cont. line (4 suspended luminaires) Multi-Lamp electronic control gear
Through-wiring set 169 4 luminaires 5261 RSV-L/35/49/80 E The innovative T5 series 526 convin-
Lighting management 1 pair of end caps 05261 K ces with a striking new feature: the
system 431 5 wire suspensions 05000 SN electronic control gear units in Multi-
Multi-Lamp electronic 1 feeding tube 05000 ZR Lamp technology used in this series
control gear 436 3 through-wiring sets 3700/3LV/58 allow operation of T5 lamps in different
Lamp characteristics 444 1 wiring connection unit 05000 ESBN wattages.
162
5261 RSV-L/28/54 E 1x28/54 1100 64 92 3.0 05261 AB 05261 DG/1200 05261 DR/1200
5261 RSV-L/35/49/80 E 1x35/49/80 1400 64 92 3.9 05261 AB 05261 DG/1500 05261 DR/1500
5261 RSV-L/28 ED 1x28 1100 64 92 3.0 05261 AB 05261 DG/1200 05261 DR/1200
5261 RSV-L/35 ED 1x35 1400 64 92 3.9 05261 AB 05261 DG/1500 05261 DR/1500
5261 RSV-L/49 ED 1x49 1400 64 92 3.9 05261 AB 05261 DG/1500 05261 DR/1500
5261 RSV-L/54 ED 1x54 1100 64 92 3.0 05261 AB 05261 DG/1200 05261 DR/1200
5261 RSV-L/80 ED 1x80 1400 64 92 3.9 05261 AB 05261 DG/1500 05261 DR/1500
652d

En 300 lx 500 lx En 300 lx 500 lx
20 3.9 4.3 6.5 7.1 20 3.9 4.4 6.5 7.3
30 5.5 6.1 9.2 10 30 5.6 6.0 9.3 9.9
40 7.2 7.6 12 13 40 7.1 7.5 12 13
Area Area
50 8.7 9.2 15 15 50 8.6 9.3 14 16
A A
in m2 60 10 11 17 18 in m2 60 10 11 17 18
80 13 14 22 23 80 13 14 22 23
100 17 17 28 29 100 16 17 27 28
150 24 25 40 41 150 24 25 40 41
200 32 33 53 54 200 32 33 53 54


spacings for
BZ3/2/BZ2
DLOR ULOR DLOR ULOR
5261 RSV-L/28 1.27 0.80 0.44 0.36 5261 RSV-L/28
+ 05261 DG/1200 1.49 0.68 0.58 0.10 + 05261 DR/1200 1.27 0.68 0.68 0.00
+ 05261 DG/1200 1.32 0.68 0.58 0.10
+ 05261 P/1200 1.26 0.81 0.49 0.31
5261 RSV-L/35
5261 RSV-L/35 1.00 0.80 0.44 0.36 + 05261 DR/1500 1.00 0.68 0.68 0.00
+ 05261 DG/1500 1.17 0.68 0.58 0.10 + 05261 DG/1500 1.04 0.68 0.58 0.10
+ 05261 P/1500 0.99 0.81 0.49 0.31 5261 RSV-L/49
5261 RSV-L/49 0.77 0.80 0.44 0.36 + 05261 DR/1500 0.78 0.67 0.67 0.00
+ 05261 DG/1500 0.90 0.68 0.58 0.10 + 05261 DG/1500 0.80 0.68 0.58 0.10
+ 05261 P/1500 0.78 0.79 0.48 0.31 5261 RSV-L/54
+ 05261 DR/1200 0.77 0.66 0.66 0.00
5261 RSV-L/54 0.74 0.80 0.44 0.36 + 05261 DG/1200 0.77 0.68 0.58 0.10
+ 05261 DG/1200 0.87 0.68 0.58 0.10 5261 RSV-L/80
+ 05261 P/1200 0.77 0.77 0.48 0.30 + 05261 DR/1500 0.57 0.64 0.64 0.00
5261 RSV-L/80 0.54 0.80 0.44 0.36 + 05261 DG/1500 0.56 0.68 0.58 0.10
+ 05261 DG/1500 0.63 0.68 0.58 0.10
+ 05261 P/1500 0.57 0.76 0.46 0.29

tance values.
163
Luminaires with reflection-intensified,

Universal application as sus- 5261 RSX-L/28/54 E 1x28/54 1192 17.5 3.0 05000 SN 05000 SN/2m
pended luminaires and with 5261 RSX-L/35/49/80 E 1x35/49/80 1492 17.5 3.9 05000 SN 05000 SN/2m
overhead reflectors and fix- 5261 RSX-L/28 ED 1x28 1192 17.5 3.0 05000 SN 05000 SN/2m
ing accessories also as sur- 5261 RSX-L/35 ED 1x35 1492 17.5 3.9 05000 SN 05000 SN/2m
5261 RSX-L/49 ED 1x49 1492 17.5 3.9 05000 SN 05000 SN/2m
5261 RSX-L/54 ED 1x54 1192 17.5 3.0 05000 SN 05000 SN/2m
Optical system
Micro-segmented, semi- 5261 RSX-L/80 ED 1x80 1492 17.5 3.9 05000 SN 05000 SN/2m
specular parabolic louvre * End caps for individual luminaires or for the completion of continuous lines to be ordered separately.
RSX made of reflection-inten-

Light distribution
component 0 %.
Luminaire body
Slender and elegant luminaire
profile, upper profile arched
towards the ceiling, made of
solvent-free powder-coated
sheet steel, white. With inte-
grated coupling brackets for
non-interrupted continuous
lines. End caps to be ordered
separately.
Electrical connection No. 2057 No. 2057
Luminaires supplied ready DIN 5040: C63 with perforated overhead
T5 T5
reflector 05261 DG/
CIBSE BZ:
plug-in connection terminal BZ2/1/BZ1 DIN 5040: B63
for mains supply and further NBN L 14-002: CIBSE BZ:
BZ1 BZ2/1/BZ1
NBN L 14-002:
2.5 mm2, including earth BZ1

gy for T5 lamps in different 25 25
wattages.
65 65
interface.
Indications Page
Node 168
Surface mounting
accessories 169
Prismatic cover 169
Suspensions 169
End caps 169 Ordering example: individual surface-mounted Luminance limitation
Through-wiring set 169 luminaire with decorative indirect component Louvres with luminances limited to L 200 cd/m2 above 60
Lighting management 1 luminaire 5261 RSX-L/80 ED in the principal longitudinal and transversal planes are effec-
system 431 1 pair of end caps 05261 K tive when lighting rooms with DSE workstations. A corre-
Multi-Lamp electronic 1 perforated overhead reflector 05261 DG/1500 sponding requirement at international level is the compliance
control gear 436 1 pair of ceiling spacers 05261 AB to all-round luminance limitation (L 200 cd/m2 above 65).
Lamp characteristics 444 1 wiring cover 05261 LK RPX and RSX louvres meet both requirements.
164
5261 RSX-L/28/54 E 1x28/54 1100 64 92 3.0 05261 AB 05261 DG/1200 05261 DR/1200
5261 RSX-L/35/49/80 E 1x35/49/80 1400 64 92 3.9 05261 AB 05261 DG/1500 05261 DR/1500
5261 RSX-L/28 ED 1x28 1100 64 92 3.0 05261 AB 05261 DG/1200 05261 DR/1200
5261 RSX-L/35 ED 1x35 1400 64 92 3.9 05261 AB 05261 DG/1500 05261 DR/1500
5261 RSX-L/49 ED 1x49 1400 64 92 3.9 05261 AB 05261 DG/1500 05261 DR/1500
5261 RSX-L/54 ED 1x54 1100 64 92 3.0 05261 AB 05261 DG/1200 05261 DR/1200
5261 RSX-L/80 ED 1x80 1400 64 92 3.9 05261 AB 05261 DG/1500 05261 DR/1500
652d

En 300 lx 500 lx En 300 lx 500 lx
20 3.5 3.8 5.9 6.4 20 3.3 3.7 5.5 6.2
30 5.0 5.5 8.3 9.1 30 4.8 5.1 8.0 8.4
40 6.5 6.9 11 12 40 6.1 6.4 10 11
Area Area
50 7.9 8.3 13 14 50 7.5 8.0 13 13
A A
in m2 60 9.4 9.7 16 16 in m2 60 8.8 9.4 15 16
80 12 13 20 21 80 12 12 20 20
100 15 16 25 26 100 14 15 24 24
150 22 23 37 38 150 21 22 35 36
200 29 30 48 49 200 28 29 47 48


spacings for
BZ2
DLOR ULOR DLOR ULOR
5261 RSX-L/28 1.27 0.88 0.47 0.40 5261 RSX-L/28
+ 05261 DG/1200 1.45 0.77 0.65 0.11 + 05261 DR/1200 1.27 0.76 0.76 0.00
+ 05261 DG/1200 1.31 0.77 0.65 0.11
+ 05261 P/1200 1.28 0.87 0.54 0.33
5261 RSX-L/35
5261 RSX-L/35 1.00 0.88 0.47 0.40 + 05261 DR/1500 1.00 0.76 0.76 0.00
+ 05261 DG/1500 1.14 0.77 0.65 0.11 + 05261 DG/1500 1.03 0.77 0.65 0.11
+ 05261 P/1500 1.01 0.87 0.54 0.33 5261 RSX-L/49
5261 RSX-L/49 0.77 0.88 0.47 0.40 + 05261 DR/1500 0.78 0.75 0.75 0.00
+ 05261 DG/1500 0.88 0.77 0.65 0.11 + 05261 DG/1500 0.79 0.77 0.65 0.11
+ 05261 P/1500 0.79 0.85 0.53 0.33 5261 RSX-L/54
+ 05261 DR/1200 0.77 0.73 0.73 0.00
5261 RSX-L/54 0.74 0.88 0.47 0.40 + 05261 DG/1200 0.76 0.77 0.65 0.11
+ 05261 DG/1200 0.85 0.77 0.65 0.11 5261 RSX-L/80
+ 05261 P/1200 0.78 0.84 0.52 0.32 + 05261 DR/1500 0.57 0.72 0.72 0.00
5261 RSX-L/80 0.54 0.88 0.47 0.40 + 05261 DG/1500 0.55 0.77 0.65 0.11
+ 05261 DG/1500 0.61 0.77 0.65 0.11
+ 05261 P/1500 0.58 0.82 0.51 0.31

tance values.
165
Luminaires with reflection-intensified,

Universal application as sus- 5261 RPX-L/28/54 E 1x28/54 1192 17.5 3.0 05000 SN 05000 SN/2m
pended luminaires and with 5261 RPX-L/35/49/80 E 1x35/49/80 1492 17.5 3.9 05000 SN 05000 SN/2m
overhead reflectors and fix- 5261 RPX-L/28 ED 1x28 1192 17.5 3.0 05000 SN 05000 SN/2m
ing accessories also as sur- 5261 RPX-L/35 ED 1x35 1492 17.5 3.9 05000 SN 05000 SN/2m
5261 RPX-L/49 ED 1x49 1492 17.5 3.9 05000 SN 05000 SN/2m
5261 RPX-L/54 ED 1x54 1192 17.5 3.0 05000 SN 05000 SN/2m
Optical system
Micro-segmented, highly- 5261 RPX-L/80 ED 1x80 1492 17.5 3.9 05000 SN 05000 SN/2m
specular parabolic louvre * End caps for individual luminaires or for the completion of continuous lines to be ordered separately.

Light distribution
component 0 %.
Luminaire body
Slender and elegant luminaire
profile, upper profile arched
towards the ceiling, made of
sheet steel, white. With inte-
lines. End caps to be ordered
separately.
Luminaires supplied ready DIN 5040: C63 with perforated overhead
T5 T5
reflector 05261 DG/
CIBSE BZ:
plug-in connection terminal BZ2/1.5/BZ1 DIN 5040: B63
for mains supply and further NBN L 14-002: CIBSE BZ:
BZ1 BZ2/0.75/BZ1
NBN L 14-002:

gy for T5 lamps in different 25 25
wattages.
65 65
interface.
Indications Page
Node 168
Surface mounting
accessories 169
Prismatic cover 169
Suspensions 169
End caps 169 Ordering example: continuous line with 3 luminaires, Luminance limitation
Through-wiring set 169 ceiling mounting, direct Louvres with luminances limited to L 200 cd/m2 above 60
Lighting management 3 luminaires 5261 RPX-L/35/49/80 E in the principal longitudinal and transversal planes are effec-
system 431 1 pair of end caps 05261 K tive when lighting rooms with DSE workstations. A corre-
Multi-Lamp electronic 3 closed overhead reflectors 05261 DR/1500 sponding requirement at international level is the compliance
control gear 436 3 ceiling fixing rails 05261 DBS/1500 to all-round luminance limitation (L 200 cd/m2 above 65).
Lamp characteristics 444 2 through-wiring sets 3700/3LV/58 RPX and RSX louvres meet both requirements.
166
5261 RPX-L/28/54 E 1x28/54 1100 64 92 3.0 05261 AB 05261 DG/1200 05261 DR/1200
5261 RPX-L/35/49/80/ E 1x35/49/80 1400 64 92 3.9 05261 AB 05261 DG/1500 05261 DR/1500
5261 RPX-L/28 ED 1x28 1100 64 92 3.0 05261 AB 05261 DG/1200 05261 DR/1200
5261 RPX-L/35 ED 1x35 1400 64 92 3.9 05261 AB 05261 DG/1500 05261 DR/1500
5261 RPX-L/49 ED 1x49 1400 64 92 3.9 05261 AB 05261 DG/1500 05261 DR/1500
5261 RPX-L/54 ED 1x54 1100 64 92 3.0 05261 AB 05261 DG/1200 05261 DR/1200
5261 RPX-L/80 ED 1x80 1400 64 92 3.9 05261 AB 05261 DG/1500 05261 DR/1500
652d

En 300 lx 500 lx En 300 lx 500 lx
20 3.5 3.8 5.9 6.4 20 3.3 3.7 5.5 6.1
30 5.0 5.5 8.3 9.2 30 4.8 5.0 8.0 8.3
40 6.5 6.9 11 12 40 6.1 6.3 10 11
Area Area
50 7.9 8.4 13 14 50 7.4 8.0 12 13
A A
in m2 60 9.4 9.8 16 16 in m2 60 8.7 9.3 15 16
80 12 13 20 21 80 12 12 19 20
100 15 16 25 26 100 14 15 24 24
150 22 23 37 38 150 21 21 35 36
200 29 30 48 50 200 28 28 46 47


spacings for
BZ2/1.5/BZ1
DLOR ULOR DLOR ULOR
5261 RPX-L/28 1.27 0.88 0.47 0.41 5261 RPX-L/28
+ 05261 DG/1200 1.44 0.77 0.66 0.11 + 05261 DR/1200 1.27 0.77 0.77 0.00
+ 05261 DG/1200 1.32 0.77 0.66 0.11
+ 05261 P/1200 1.27 0.87 0.54 0.33
5261 RPX-L/35
5261 RPX-L/35 1.00 0.88 0.47 0.41 + 05261 DR/1500 1.00 0.77 0.77 0.00
+ 05261 DG/1500 1.13 0.77 0.66 0.11 + 05261 DG/1500 1.05 0.77 0.66 0.11
+ 05261 P/1500 1.00 0.87 0.54 0.33 5261 RPX-L/49
5261 RPX-L/49 0.77 0.88 0.47 0.41 + 05261 DR/1500 0.78 0.75 0.75 0.00
+ 05261 DG/1500 0.87 0.77 0.66 0.11 + 05261 DG/1500 0.80 0.77 0.66 0.11
+ 05261 P/1500 0.79 0.86 0.53 0.33 5261 RPX-L/54
+ 05261 DR/1200 0.77 0.74 0.74 0.00
5261 RPX-L/54 0.74 0.88 0.47 0.41 + 05261 DG/1200 0.78 0.77 0.66 0.11
+ 05261 DG/1200 0.84 0.77 0.66 0.11 5261 RPX-L/80
+ 05261 P/1200 0.78 0.84 0.52 0.32 + 05261 DR/1500 0.57 0.72 0.72 0.00
5261 RPX-L/80 0.54 0.88 0.47 0.41 + 05261 DG/1500 0.56 0.77 0.66 0.11
+ 05261 DG/1500 0.61 0.77 0.66 0.11
+ 05261 P/1500 0.57 0.82 0.51 0.31

tance values.
167
526
Accessories
90
3284 mm
1492 mm
Ordering example: Ceiling node A 03 D Node with wire suspension

Geometrical arrangement 1 piece, for up to four con- A 03 S
according to the draft nections, angles continuously 1 piece, consisting of:
above with 4 luminaires adjustable between 90 and 1 node as described in
5261 RPX-L/35/49/80 E 270. Die-cast aluminium, A 03 D,
and 2 luminaires white. 1 steel wire, for suspension
5261 RPX-L/28/54 E, wire lengths of up to 1.5 m,
suspensions, 5-conductor 1 ceiling fixing unit.
through-wiring set.
4 luminaires Ceiling rose 05900 AN*
5261 RPX-L/35/49/80 E (not illustrated) 1 piece, for
2 luminaires the connection of the mains
5261 RPX-L/28/54 E End-cap adapter 05261 KA cable.
8 end-cap adapters 1 piece, die-cast aluminium, white, for the connection of Counter-balance weight
05261 KA nodes A 03 with 5-conductor through-wiring set 1.5 mm2. 05000 A20
6 counter-balance weights Required for mounting to
05000 A20 node A 03 S.
4 nodes with wire suspen-
sions A 03 S
2 wire suspensions
05000 SN
1 ceiling rose 05900 AN
1 feeding tube
05000 ZR/2m
4 through-wiring sets
3700/5LV/58
1 through-wiring set
3700/5LV/36
Closed overhead reflector Perforated overhead reflector

Solvent-free powder-coated sheet steel. For purely downward, Solvent-free powder-coated sheet steel. To increase the
direct light distribution of surface-mounted and suspended direct component of suspended luminaires or for decorative
luminaires. Simple fixing to luminaire body and potential ceiling illumination with surface-mounted luminaires. Simple
equalisation by means of screw connection. fixing to luminaire body and potential equalisation by means
of screw connection.
05261 DR/1200 for /28/54.
05261 DR/1500 for /35/49/80. 05261 DG/1200 for /28/54.
05261 DG/1500 for /35/49/80.
* Incoming cables are not supplied. They must be provided by the contractor.
168
End caps 05261 K Wire suspension Ceiling spacer 05261 AB Ceiling fixing rails
1 pair, for front-plane conclusion of individual 1 piece, for suspended mounting of 5261 1 pair, plastic material, Sheet steel, white. To cover
or continuous-line luminaires. Plastic, white. luminaires, consisting of: necessary for direct surface the mains cable for surface
To be attached without using tools. 1 ceiling fixing bracket, galvanised steel, ceiling mounting, distance mounting. Only necessary
1 steel wire, 1.0 mm, between upper luminaire for ceiling outlets located at
2 luminaire fixing clamps, edge and ceiling: 18 mm. the longitudinal luminaire
1 plastic ceiling trim cap, white. axis outside the front-plane
Wiring cover 05261 LK feeding opening of the
05000 SN for suspension lengths of up to (not illustrated) 1 piece, luminaires. Additional ceiling
Ceiling rose 05900 A* 1.0 m. plastic material, to cover the spacers 05261 AB are not
(not illustrated) 1 piece, for the connection of 05000 SN/2m for suspension lengths of up mains cable in case of direct required.
the mains cable in case of ceiling outlets. to 2.0 m. ceiling surface mounting. 05261 DBS/1200
for /28/54.
Wiring connection unit 05000 ESBN* 05261 DBS/1500
1 set, for mains feeding for 05000 SN, for /35/49/80.
0500 SN/2m, comprising the necessary
strain relief systems, fixing screws and
connection terminal 4 x 2.5 mm2.
PLEXIGLAS prismatic cover Feeding tube Through-wiring sets LIGHTGATE

1 piece, to be attached without tools. 1 piece, plastic, white, Heat-resistant, colour-coded individual wires The energy-saving lighting
To protect the lamp and the optical system 10 mm, to be shortened 1.5 mm2. management system
against unnecessarily rapid degradation. on site. 3LV 3-conductor through-wiring LIGHTGATE embodies an
Only for suspended mounting. To guide and cover the 5LV 5-conductor through-wiring individual, manually operated
mains cable. lighting control and a day-
05261 P/1200 for /28/54. 05000 ZR 1 m long, in Reference for luminaires Length light-dependent regulation
05261 P/1500 for /35/49/80. combination with 05000 SN, 3700/3LV/36 28/54 1450 mm with integrated presence
05000 ZR/2m 2 m long, in 3700/5LV/36 28/54 1450 mm detection. Description see
combination with 3700/3LV/58 35/49/80 1750 mm page 431.
05000 SN/2m or A 03 S 3700/5LV/58 35/49/80 1750 mm
with 05900 AN. 07690/5LV/25m L 25 m
169
Think cubist, think Braque 504, 505 504, 505 series surface-
mounted and suspended
luminaires are characterised
by their timeless slender
cubist design. In addition to
five different louvre options,
the computer-calculated
prismatic diffuser with inter-
nal reflector systems offers
an interesting photometric
alternative which also con-
vinces with a decorative
indirect component in case Translucent diffuser
of surface mounting. Prismatic
diffuser
made of
PLEXIGLAS with internal
highly-efficient reflector for
narrow/wide-angle light
distribution.
Page 172/178
170
RWV RWX RSV RSX/65 RPX/65
Designed for even An exclusive combi- For high-efficiency Semi-specular Superb sur-
illumination of general nation of white cross illumination in areas materials are face clarity
surfaces and utility blades and reflection- with general public becoming offers a lou-
areas. Uniform, balanced intensified parabolic side access and non-DSE office increasingly popular in the built vre that is not only fully com-
light distribution with high panels, offering a neo-classi- environments. Narrow/wide- environment. TRILUX refines pliant to the requirements
efficiency. Louvre made of cal appearance with great angle light distribution with the use of these materials with of photometric bodies, but
white-coated aluminium or performance. excellent efficiency due to a reflection-intensified material, also excels with a working
sheet-steel depending on concave-profiled aluminium offering peak photometric efficiency of up to 80 % in
application. cross blades and highly-reflec- performance with the benefits direct and over 90 % in
tive aluminium side panels. of diffuse distribution. direct/indirect applications.
Page 172 Page 174 Page 174 Page 176/180 Page 176/180
171
Surface-mounted luminaires with translucent diffuser T
or white louvre RWV,
Application
Offices, sales areas and
showrooms.
Optical system
Direct.
T
Diffuser in translucent
channel prisms and high
transmission degree exceed-
ing 80 %. Reflector made of
sheet steel, with highly-
reflective white coating.
RWV
tribution. Louvre retention by
without tools.
Luminaire body
sheet steel, white. Elegant
rectangular design with lon-
gitudinal 40 mm rim.
T
Individual luminaire with pre-
mounted end caps. Not suit-
able for non-interrupted con-
tinuous lines.
RWV-L
Luminaire body with integrat-
ed coupling brackets for pre-
cisely aligned continuous
lines with optically continu-
ous louvres. End caps for
individual luminaires or for
the completion of continu-
ous lines to be ordered
separately.
E
wattages.
ED
interface.
Indications Page
Node 182
Suspensions 183
End caps 183
Through-wiring set 183 Multi-Lamp electronic control gear Translucent diffusers
Trunking 426 The T5 series 504/505 convinces PLEXIGLAS with fine spherical inclu-
Lighting management with a striking new feature: the elec- sions made of other polymerised
system 431 tronic control gear units in Multi-Lamp methacrylates causes light output
Multi-Lamp electronic technology used in this series allow ratios that are up to 30 % higher than
control gear 436 operation of T5 lamps in different those of conventional opal diffuser
Lamp characteristics 444 wattages. luminaires.
172
Reference* Lamps D D1 D2 kg Reference** Lamps D D1 D2 kg
W mm W mm
5041 T/28/54 E 1x28/54 900 158 3.9 5041 RWV-L/28/54 E 1x28/54 900 158 293 3.2
5041 T/35/49/80 E 1x35/49/80 1200 158 4.7 5041 RWV-L/35/49/80 E 1x35/49/80 1200 158 293 3.8
5041 T/28 ED 1x28 900 158 3.9 5041 RWV-L/28 ED 1x28 900 158 293 3.2
5041 T/35 ED 1x35 1200 158 4.7 5041 RWV-L/35 ED 1x35 1200 158 293 3.8
5041 T/49 ED 1x49 1200 158 4.7 5041 RWV-L/49 ED 1x49 1200 158 293 3.8
5041 T/54 ED 1x54 900 158 3.9 5041 RWV-L/54 ED 1x54 900 158 293 3.2
5041 T/80 ED 1x80 1200 158 4.7 5041 RWV-L/80 ED 1x80 1200 158 293 3.8
* With premounted end caps. ** End caps for individual luminaires or for the completion of continuous lines to be
ordered separately.
652d

En 300 lx 500 lx En 300 lx 500 lx
20 3.4 3.9 5.7 6.5 20 4.1 4.6 6.8 7.7
30 4.8 5.3 8.0 8.8 30 5.8 6.3 9.6 10
40 6.1 6.6 10 11 40 7.3 7.9 12 13
Area Area
50 7.4 8.0 12 13 50 8.9 9.6 15 16
A A
in m2 60 8.6 9.3 14 16 in m2 60 10 11 17 19
80 11 12 19 20 80 14 14 23 24
100 14 14 23 24 100 17 17 28 29
150 20 21 33 35 150 24 25 40 42
200 26 27 43 45 200 32 33 53 55
T5 C 0 - C 180 Data table C 0 - C 180 Data table Height of the working plane e 0.85 m Height of the working plane e 0.85 m
No. 2061 No. 2062 Suspension length lp 0.00 m Suspension length lp 0.00 m
DIN 5040: A40 DIN 5040: A50 2 Max. luminaire spacings for 2 Max. luminaire spacings for
T5

g1 = Emin : E 1 : 1.5 g1 = Emin : E 1 : 1.5
CIBSE BZ: CIBSE BZ:
BZ3/1.5/BZ4 BZ2/1.5/BZ3/2/BZ2 Transverse spacing centre / centre Xmax = 1.8 h Transverse spacing centre / centre Xmax = 1.7 h
NBN L 14-002: NBN L 14-002: h = Luminaire height above working plane h = Luminaire height above working plane
BZ4 BZ3
3 Multiplication factor M 4 Photometric 3 Multiplication factor M 4 Photometric
for no. of luminaires characteristics for no. of luminaires characteristics
DLOR ULOR DLOR ULOR
5041 T/28 1.27 0.87 0.85 0.02 5041 RWV-L/28 1.27 0.70 0.70 0.00
5041 T/35 1.00 0.87 0.85 0.02 5041 RWV-L/35 1.00 0.70 0.70 0.00
5041 T/49 0.78 0.86 0.84 0.02 5041 RWV-L/49 0.78 0.68 0.68 0.00
5041 T/54 0.78 0.83 0.81 0.02 5041 RWV-L/54 0.77 0.67 0.67 0.00
5041 T/80 0.60 0.79 0.77 0.02 5041 RWV-L/80 0.57 0.66 0.66 0.00
Technical information see page 440. Technical information see page 440.
Node = Design freedom

Additional design scope for lighting planning is realised by
nodes with continuously adjustable angles. A maximum of
four connections is possible.
173
Surface-mounted luminaires with specular hybrid louvre RWX
or semi-specular cross-blade louvre RSV,
Application
showrooms. RSV also for
financial institutions.
Optical system
Direct.
RWX
ciency.
RSV
Micro-segmented louvre RSV
angle light distribution.

out tools.
Luminaire body
gitudinal 40 mm rim. Lumi-
naire body with integrated
coupling brackets for pre-
the completion of continu-
ous lines to be ordered
separately.
E
wattages.
ED
interface.
Indications Page
Node 182
Suspensions 183
End caps 183
Through-wiring set 183 Multi-Lamp electronic control gear RWX louvre
Trunking 426 The T5 series 504/505 convinces RWX louvres stand for photometric effi-
Lighting management with a striking new feature: the elec- ciency, thanks to a striking combination
system 431 tronic control gear units in Multi-Lamp of white-coated aluminium cross blades
Multi-Lamp electronic technology used in this series allow and specular side panels made of
control gear 436 operation of T5 lamps in different reflection-intensified aluminium.
Lamp characteristics 444 wattages.
174
Reference* Lamps D D1 D2 kg Reference* Lamps D D1 D2 kg
W mm W mm
5041 RWX-L/28/54 E 1x28/54 900 158 293 3.2 5041 RSV-L/28/54 E 1x28/54 900 158 293 3.2
5041 RWX-L/35/49/80 E 1x35/49/80 1200 158 293 3.8 5041 RSV-L/35/49/80 E 1x35/49/80 1200 158 293 3.8
5041 RWX-L/28 ED 1x28 900 158 293 3.2 5041 RSV-L/28 ED 1x28 900 158 293 3.2
5041 RWX-L/35 ED 1x35 1200 158 293 3.8 5041 RSV-L/35 ED 1x35 1200 158 293 3.8
5041 RWX-L/49 ED 1x49 1200 158 293 3.8 5041 RSV-L/49 ED 1x49 1200 158 293 3.8
5041 RWX-L/54 ED 1x54 900 158 293 3.2 5041 RSV-L/54 ED 1x54 900 158 293 3.2
5041 RWX-L/80 ED 1x80 1200 158 293 3.8 5041 RSV-L/80 ED 1x80 1200 158 293 3.8
* End caps for individual luminaires or for the completion of continuous lines to be ordered * End caps for individual luminaires or for the completion of continuous lines to be ordered
separately. separately.
652d
Data table no. 2063

En 300 lx 500 lx
20 3.8 4.3 6.4 7.1
30 5.4 5.8 9.0 9.7
40 6.9 7.3 12 12
Area
50 8.4 9.0 14 15
A
in m2 60 9.8 11 16 18
80 13 14 22 22
100 16 16 26 27
150 23 24 38 40
200 30 31 51 52
T5 T5

g1 = Emin : E 1 : 1.5
CIBSE BZ: CIBSE BZ:
BZ3 BZ3/2/BZ2/2.5/BZ3 Transverse spacing centre / centre Xmax = 1.7 h
BZ2/4/BZ3 BZ2
Reference M LB L
direct indirect
DLOR ULOR
5041 RSV-L/28 1.27 0.71 0.71 0.00
5041 RSV-L/35 1.00 0.71 0.71 0.00
5041 RSV-L/49 0.78 0.70 0.70 0.00
5041 RSV-L/54 0.77 0.69 0.69 0.00
5041 RSV-L/80 0.57 0.67 0.67 0.00
5041 RWX-L/28 1.14 0.79 0.79 0.00
5041 RWX-L/35 0.90 0.79 0.79 0.00
5041 RWX-L/49 0.70 0.78 0.78 0.00
5041 RWX-L/54 0.70 0.76 0.76 0.00
5041 RWX-L/80 0.51 0.75 0.75 0.00
Spring-tensioned contact clips LIGHTGATE

This tried-and-tested TRILUX security lock minimises mount- LIGHTGATE stands for an energy-saving lighting manage-
ing and maintenance costs and automatically provides earth ment system preferably used with TRILUX luminaires
continuity. The clip cannot be seen when the louvre is in equipped with dimmable electronic control gear. LIGHTGATE
place, improving the overall appearance. embodies an individual, manually operated lighting control
and a daylight-dependent regulation with integrated pres-
ence detection, see page 431.
175
Surface-mounted luminaires with reflection-intensified,
semi-specular parabolic louvre RSX
or highly-specular parabolic louvre RPX,
Application
rooms and financial institu-
normal DSE usage.
Optical system
Direct.
Micro-segmented, parabolic
louvre made of reflection-
Fully compliant to
CIBSE LG 3, Cat. II, i.e.
65 all-round.
RSX semi-specular,
out tools.
Luminaire body
the completion of contin-
uous lines to be ordered
separately.
E
in Multi-Lamp technology 25 25
wattages. 65 65
ED
interface.
Indications Page
Node 182
Suspensions 183
End caps 183
Through-wiring set 183 Multi-Lamp electronic control gear Luminance limitation
Trunking 426 The T5 series 504/505 convinces Louvres with luminances limited to L 200 cd/m2 above 60
Lighting management with a striking new feature: the elec- in the principal longitudinal and transversal planes are effec-
system 431 tronic control gear units in Multi-Lamp tive when lighting rooms with DSE workstations. A corre-
Multi-Lamp electronic technology used in this series allow sponding requirement at international level is the compliance
control gear 436 operation of T5 lamps in different to all-round luminance limitation (L 200 cd/m2 above 65).
Lamp characteristics 444 wattages. RPX and RSX louvres meet both requirements.
176
W mm W mm
5041 RSX-L/28/54 E 1x28/54 900 158 293 3.2 5041 RPX-L/28/54 E 1x28/54 900 158 293 3.2
5041 RSX-L/35/49/80 E 1x35/49/80 1200 158 293 3.8 5041 RPX-L/35/49/80 E 1x35/49/80 1200 158 293 3.8
5041 RSX-L/28 ED 1x28 900 158 293 3.2 5041 RPX-L/28 ED 1x28 900 158 293 3.2
5041 RSX-L/35 ED 1x35 1200 158 293 3.8 5041 RPX-L/35 ED 1x35 1200 158 293 3.8
5041 RSX-L/49 ED 1x49 1200 158 293 3.8 5041 RPX-L/49 ED 1x49 1200 158 293 3.8
5041 RSX-L/54 ED 1x54 900 158 293 3.2 5041 RPX-L/54 ED 1x54 900 158 293 3.2
5041 RSX-L/80 ED 1x80 1200 158 293 3.8 5041 RPX-L/80 ED 1x80 1200 158 293 3.8
652d
Data table no. 2064

En 300 lx 500 lx
20 3.2 3.6 5.4 6.0
30 4.6 4.9 7.7 8.2
40 5.9 6.2 9.8 10
Area
50 7.1 7.6 12 13
A
in m2 60 8.3 8.9 14 15
80 11 12 18 19
100 14 14 23 23
150 20 20 33 34
200 26 27 44 45
T5 T5

g1 = Emin : E 1 : 1.5
CIBSE BZ: CIBSE BZ:
BZ2/1.5/BZ1/4/BZ2 BZ2
Reference M LB L
direct indirect
DLOR ULOR
5041 RPX-L/28 1.27 0.82 0.82 0.00
5041 RPX-L/35 1.00 0.82 0.82 0.00
5041 RPX-L/49 0.78 0.80 0.80 0.00
5041 RPX-L/54 0.77 0.79 0.79 0.00
5041 RPX-L/80 0.58 0.75 0.75 0.00
5041 RSX-L/28 1.28 0.81 0.81 0.00
5041 RSX-L/35 1.01 0.81 0.81 0.00
5041 RSX-L/49 0.79 0.79 0.79 0.00
5041 RSX-L/54 0.78 0.78 0.78 0.00
5041 RSX-L/80 0.58 0.76 0.76 0.00
LIGHTGATE Reflection intensification

The energy-saving lighting manage- The surface of RPX and RSX louvres is
ment system LIGHTGATE embodies an characterised by a system of anodised
individual, manually operated lighting layers, applied to high-purity aluminium,
control and a daylight-dependent regu- with an anodising thickness orientated
lation with integrated presence detec- around the half wavelength (/2) of the
tion. Description see page 431. visible light.
177
Suspended luminaires with translucent diffuser T,
Application
showrooms.
Optical system
Direct/indirect.
Diffuser in translucent
channel prisms and high
transmission degree exceed-
ing 80 %. With ceiling-orient-
ed PLEXIGLAS cover for
improved dust protection.
Luminaire body
gitudinal 40 mm rim. One
premounted end cap, one
end cap is enclosed loose.
Not suitable for non-inter-
rupted continuous lines.
E
wattages.
ED
interface.
Indications Page
Node 182
Suspensions 183
End caps 183
Through-wiring set 183 Multi-Lamp electronic control gear Translucent diffusers
Trunking 426 The T5 series 504/505 convinces PLEXIGLAS with fine spherical inclu-
Lighting management with a striking new feature: the elec- sions made of other polymerised
system 431 tronic control gear units in Multi-Lamp methacrylates causes light output
Multi-Lamp electronic technology used in this series allow ratios that are up to 30 % higher than
control gear 436 operation of T5 lamps in different those of conventional opal diffuser
Lamp characteristics 444 wattages. luminaires.
178
Reference* Lamps D D1 kg
W mm
5051 T/28/54 E 1x28/54 1193 11 3.5
5051 T/35/49/80 E 1x35/49/80 1493 11 4.4
5051 T/28 ED 1x28 1193 11 3.5
5051 T/35 ED 1x35 1493 11 4.4
5051 T/49 ED 1x49 1493 11 4.4
5051 T/54 ED 1x54 1193 11 3.5
5051 T/80 ED 1x80 1493 11 4.4
* With premounted end caps.
652d
Data table no. 2065

En 300 lx 500 lx
20 3.9 4.5 6.6 7.4
30 5.5 6.2 9.2 10
40 7.1 7.7 12 13
Area
50 8.6 9.3 14 16
A
in m2 60 10 11 17 18
80 13 14 22 23
100 16 17 27 28
150 23 24 39 41
200 30 32 51 53
DIN 5040: B42 2 Max. luminaire spacings for
T5

g1 = Emin : E 1 : 1.5
CIBSE BZ:
BZ4/2.5/BZ5 Transverse spacing centre / centre Xmax = 2.1 h
BZ4/1.5/BZ5
Reference M LB L
direct indirect
DLOR ULOR
5051 T/28 1.27 0.83 0.54 0.29
5051 T/35 1.00 0.83 0.54 0.29
5051 T/49 0.78 0.81 0.53 0.29
5051 T/54 0.78 0.79 0.51 0.28
5051 T/80 0.58 0.77 0.50 0.27
Design-oriented suspension Decorative louvre and diffuser

504, 505 series wire suspensions luminaires
are perfectly adapted to the luminaire The 504, 505 series includes both
design. Luminaire mounting is facili- louvre and diffuser luminaires. A multi-
tated by means of the wire surrounding tude of optical systems allows numer-
the ceiling canopy for easy transversal ous applications going beyond typical
alignment. office situations.
179
Application
normal DSE usage.
Optical system
Direct/indirect.
Fully compliant to
65 all-round.
RSX semi-specular,
out tools.
Luminaire body
the completion of contin-
uous lines to be ordered
separately.
E
for T5 lamps in different 25 25
wattages.
65 65
ED
interface.
Indications Page
Node 182
PLEXIGLAS cover 182
Suspensions 183
End caps 183
Through-wiring set 183 Multi-Lamp electronic control gear Luminance limitation
Trunking 426 The T5 series 504/505 convinces Louvres with luminances limited to L 200 cd/m2 above 60
Lighting management with a striking new feature: the elec- in the principal longitudinal and transversal planes are effec-
system 431 tronic control gear units in Multi-Lamp tive when lighting rooms with DSE workstations. A corre-
Multi-Lamp electronic technology used in this series allow sponding requirement at international level is the compliance
control gear 436 operation of T5 lamps in different to all-round luminance limitation (L 200 cd/m2 above 65).
Lamp characteristics 444 wattages. RPX and RSX louvres meet both requirements.
180
Reference* Lamps D D1 kg Reference* Lamps D D1 kg
W mm W mm
5051 RSX-L/28/54 E 1x28 1193 11 3.0 5051 RPX-L/28/54 E 1x28/54 1193 11 3.0
5051 RSX-L/35/49/80 E 1x35 1493 11 3.6 5051 RPX-L/35/49/80 E 1x35/49/80 1493 11 3.6
5051 RSX-L/28 ED 1x28 1193 11 3.0 5051 RPX-L/28 ED 1x28 1193 11 3.0
5051 RSX-L/35 ED 1x35 1493 11 3.6 5051 RPX-L/35 ED 1x35 1493 11 3.6
5051 RSX-L/49 ED 1x49 1493 11 3.6 5051 RPX-L/49 ED 1x49 1493 11 3.6
5051 RSX-L/54 ED 1x54 1193 11 3.0 5051 RPX-L/54 ED 1x54 1193 11 3.0
5051 RSX-L/80 ED 1x80 1493 11 3.6 5051 RPX-L/80 ED 1x80 1493 11 3.6
652d
Data table no. 2066

En 300 lx 500 lx
20 3.5 3.8 5.8 6.4
30 4.9 5.4 8.1 9.0
40 6.3 6.8 11 11
Area
50 7.7 8.2 13 14
A
in m2 60 9.1 9.5 15 16
80 12 13 20 21
100 15 15 24 25
150 21 22 36 37
200 28 29 46 48
DIN 5040: C53 DIN 5040: C53 2 Max. luminaire spacings for
T5 T5

g1 = Emin : E 1 : 1.5
CIBSE BZ: CIBSE BZ:
BZ2/1.25/BZ1 BZ2
Reference M LB L
direct indirect
DLOR ULOR
5051 RPX-L/28 1.27 0.89 0.53 0.37
5051 RPX-L/35 1.00 0.89 0.53 0.37
5051 RPX-L/49 0.77 0.89 0.53 0.37
5051 RPX-L/54 0.74 0.89 0.53 0.37
5051 RPX-L/80 0.54 0.89 0.53 0.37
5051 RSX-L/28 1.31 0.86 0.50 0.36
5051 RSX-L/35 1.04 0.86 0.50 0.36
5051 RSX-L/49 0.79 0.86 0.50 0.36
5051 RSX-L/54 0.77 0.86 0.50 0.36
5051 RSX-L/80 0.56 0.86 0.50 0.36
Stable luminaire bodies PLEXIGLAS cover

Suspended luminaires with stability-pro- 505 suspended louvre luminaires can
moting, ceiling-oriented perforations for be easily equipped with PLEXIGLAS
wide-angle indirect component con- covers to be mounted to the luminaire
vince with increased torsional rigidity roofs. Lamps and optical system are
and excellent dimensional stability. thus efficiently protected against dust.
181
504, 505
Accessories
Ceiling node A 03 D Node with wire suspen-

1 piece, for up to four con- sion A 03 S
nections, angles continuous- 1 piece, consisting of:
ly adjustable between 90 1 node as described in
and 270. Die-cast alumini- A 03 D,
um, white. 1 steel wire, 2.0 mm, for
suspension lengths of up
Distance plate 05000 DD to 1.5 m,
(not illustrated) 1 pair, white 1 ceiling fixing unit.
plastic material, for distance
ceiling mounting of lumi- Counter-balance weight
naires 504 in combination 05000 A19
End-cap adapter 05041 KA with nodes A 03 D. One pair Required for mounting to
1 piece, die-cast aluminium, white, for the connection of of ceiling distance plates is node A 03 S and trunking
nodes A 03 with 5-conductor through-wiring set 1.5 mm2. required per luminaire. 07690.
PLEXIGLAS cover Feeding tube

1 piece, to be attached without tools. To protect the lamp 1 piece, plastic, white, 10 mm, to be shortened on site.
and the optical system of 505 suspended louvre luminaires To guide and cover the mains cable.
against unnecessarily rapid degradation. 05000 ZR 1 m long, in combination with 05051 S,
05000 ZR/2m 2 m long, in combination with 05051 S/2m
05051 P/1200 or A 03 S with 05900 AN.
for luminaires 5051 R/28/54.
Ceiling rose 05900 A*
05051 P/1500 (not illustrated), 1 piece, for the connection of the mains
for luminaires 5051 R/35/49/80. cable in case of ceiling outlets.
Ceiling rose 05900 AN*

1 piece, for the connection of the mains cable in case of
ceiling outlets. Suitable to receive the ceiling fixing unit of
A 03 S.
182
End caps 05041 K Wire suspension Through-wiring sets
1 pair, for front-plane conclusion of individual 1 piece, for suspended mounting of 5041, Heat-resistant, colour-coded individual wires
or continuous-line luminaires. Plastic, white. 5051 luminaires, consisting of: 1.5 mm2.
To be attached without using tools. 1 ceiling fixing bracket, galvanised steel, 3LV 3-conductor through-wiring
1 steel wire, 1.0 mm, 5LV 5-conductor through-wiring
2 luminaire fixing clamps,
1 plastic ceiling trim cap, white. Reference for luminaires Length
05051 S for suspension lengths of up to 3700/3LV/36 28/54 1450 mm
1.0 m. 3700/5LV/36 28/54 1450 mm
05051 S/2m for suspension lengths of up 3700/3LV/58 35/49/80 1750 mm
to 2.0 m. 3700/5LV/58 35/49/80 1750 mm
07690/5LV/25m L 25 m
Wiring connection unit 05000 ESBN*
1 set, for mains feeding for 05051 S,
05051 S/2m, comprising the necessary
strain relief systems, fixing screws and
90
2618 mm
6436 mm
Ordering example: LIGHTGATE

Geometrical arrangement according to the LIGHTGATE stands for an energy-saving and
draft above containing 8 surface-mounted comfort-enhancing lighting management sys-
luminaires 5041 RPX-L/35/49/80 E and tem preferably used with TRILUX luminaires
6 surface-mounted luminaires equipped with dimmable electronic control
5041 RPX-L/28/54 E. gear. LIGHTGATE embodies an individual,
8 luminaires 5041 RPX-L/35/49/80 E manually operated lighting control and a
6 luminaires 5041 RPX-L/28/54 E daylight-dependent regulation with integrated
14 end-cap adapters 05041 KA presence detection, see page 431.
6 ceiling nodes A 03 D
4 through-wiring sets 3700/5LV/58
183
598, 599 This series excels by its
look: luminaire unit height of
only 62 mm, characteristic
design and slender optics
create the best conditions
for architecturally appealing
lighting installations. The
series contains surface-
mounted luminaires for
exclusive use of T5 lamps
and suspended luminaires
in versions which support
both T5 and T8 lamps.
184
RSX/65 RPX/65 RWV RSV RPR/65
Semi-specular Superb sur- Designed for even For high-efficiency Designed for excel-
materials are face clarity illumination of general illumination in areas lent, high-efficiency
becoming offers a surfaces and utility with general public illumination of all
increasingly popular in the built louvre that is not only fully areas. Uniform, balanced access and non-DSE office Cat. II DSE installations.
environment. TRILUX refines compliant to the requirements light distribution with high environments. Narrow/wide- Specular side panels and
the use of these materials with of photometric bodies, but efficiency. Louvre made of angle light distribution with parabolic cross blades
a reflection-intensified material, also excels with a working white-coated aluminium or excellent efficiency due to ensure good all-round glare
offering peak photometric per- efficiency of up to 80 % in sheet steel depending on concave-profiled aluminium limitation.
formance with the benefits of direct and over 90 % in application. cross blades and highly-reflec-
diffuse distribution. direct/indirect applications. tive aluminium side panels.
Page 186/188 Page 186/188 Page 190 Page 190 Page 192
185
Application
normal DSE usage.
Optical system
Direct.
Fully compliant to
65 all-round.
RSX semi-specular,

out tools.
Luminaire body
sheet steel, white, in a par-
ticularly elegant design. The
ultra-low profile is enhanced
by a striking 20 mm biplanar
rim. The structuralised, pow-
der-coated die-cast alumini-
um end caps offer both sta-
bility and an elegant connec-
tion between the rounded
side panels. The height over-
all is a mere 62 mm, with
additional 10 mm mounting
distance to ceiling.
connection terminal. With
25 25
plied with dimmable elec- 65 65
ence suffix ED,
e.g. 5981N RSX/2x28 ED.
Indications Page
Node 194 T5 fluorescent lamps Luminance limitation
Ceiling fixing rail 195 T5 fluorescent lamps with a diameter Louvres with luminances limited to L 200 cd/m2 above 60
Continuous-line coupling 195 reduced to 16 mm enable compact in the principal longitudinal and transversal planes are effec-
Through-wiring set 195 dimensions of the optical systems and tive when lighting rooms with DSE workstations. A corre-
Lighting management the luminaire sections. sponding requirement at international level is the compliance
system 431 to all-round luminance limitation (L 200 cd/m2 above 65).
Lamp characteristics 444 RPX and RSX louvres meet both requirements.
186
Reference Lamps D D1 D2 kg Reference Lamps D D1 D2 kg
W mm W mm
5981N RSX/28 E 1x28 900 165 410 4.4 5981N RPX/28 E 1x28 900 165 410 4.4
5981N RSX/35 E 1x35 1200 165 410 5.2 5981N RPX/35 E 1x35 1200 165 410 5.2
5981N RSX/2x28 E 2x28 900 165 410 4.7 5981N RPX/2x28 E 2x28 900 165 410 4.7
5981N RSX/2x35 E 2x35 1200 165 410 5.5 5981N RPX/2x35 E 2x35 1200 165 410 5.5
652d
Data table no. 2093

En 300 lx 500 lx
20 3.1 3.5 5.2 5.9
30 4.5 4.8 7.5 8.0
40 5.8 6.1 9.6 10
Area
50 7.0 7.5 12 12
A
in m2 60 8.3 8.8 14 15
80 11 11 18 19
100 13 14 22 23
150 20 20 33 34
200 26 26 43 44
T5 T5

g1 = Emin : E 1 : 1.5
CIBSE BZ: CIBSE BZ:
BZ2/1.5/BZ1 BZ1 Transverse spacing centre / centre Xmax = 1.5 h
BZ2/0.8/BZ1 BZ1
Reference M LB L
direct indirect
DLOR ULOR
5981N RPX/28 E 1.26 0.83 0.83 0.00
5981N RPX/35 E 1.00 0.83 0.83 0.00
5981N RPX/2x28 E 0.83 0.63 0.63 0.00
5981N RPX/2x35 E 0.66 0.63 0.63 0.00
5981N RSX/28 E 1.26 0.83 0.83 0.00
5981N RSX/35 E 1.00 0.83 0.83 0.00
5981N RSX/2x28 E 0.83 0.63 0.63 0.00
5981N RSX/2x35 E 0.66 0.63 0.63 0.00
Reflection intensification Continuous-line couplings

The surface of RPX and RSX louvres is Elegant junctions between luminaires
characterised by a system of anodised can be created by continuous-line
layers, applied to high-purity aluminium, couplings, perfectly adapted to the
with an anodising thickness orientated design of the 598, 599 series. In
around the half wavelength (/2) of the addition, optically identical adapters
visible light. realise the connection to nodes.
187
Application
normal DSE usage.
Optical system
Direct/indirect.
Fully compliant to
65 all-round.
RSX semi-specular,

out tools.
Luminaire body
side panels. The height
overall is a mere 62 mm.

tronic control gear, refer- 25 25
ence suffix ED,
e.g. 5991N RPX/35 ED.
65 65
Indications Page
Node 194
Overhead reflector 194 T5 fluorescent lamps Luminance limitation
Suspensions 195 T5 fluorescent lamps with a diameter Louvres with luminances limited to L 200 cd/m2 above 60
Continuous-line coupling 195 reduced to 16 mm enable compact in the principal longitudinal and transversal planes are effec-
Through-wiring set 195 dimensions of the optical systems and tive when lighting rooms with DSE workstations. A corre-
Lighting management the luminaire sections. sponding requirement at international level is the compliance
system 431 to all-round luminance limitation (L 200 cd/m2 above 65).
Lamp characteristics 444 RPX and RSX louvres meet both requirements.
188
Reference Lamps D D1 D2 D3 kg Reference Lamps D D1 D2 D3 kg
W mm W mm
5991N RSX/28 E 1x28 1185 23 1248 1310 3.7 5991N RPX/28 E 1x28 1185 23 1248 1310 3.7
5991N RSX/35 E 1x35 1485 23 1548 1610 4.2 5991N RPX/35 E 1x35 1485 23 1548 1610 4.2
5991N RSX/2x28 E 2x28 1185 23 1248 1310 4.1 5991N RPX/2x28 E 2x28 1185 23 1248 1310 4.1
5991N RSX/2x35 E 2x35 1485 23 1548 1610 4.6 5991N RPX/2x35 E 2x35 1485 23 1548 1610 4.6
652d
. . . .
Data table no. 2067
. . . .
En 300 lx 500 lx
20 3.8 4.2 6.3 6.9
30 5.2 5.8 8.7 9.7
40 6.8 7.2 11 12
Area
. . . . . . . . . . A
50 8.2 8.7 14 15
in m2 60 9.6 10 16 17
. . . . . . . . . . 80 12 13 21 22
100 15 16 26 27
150 22 23 37 38
200 29 30 48 50
DIN 5040: D62 DIN 5040: C53 2 Max. luminaire spacings for
T5 T5

g1 = Emin : E 1 : 1.5
CIBSE BZ: CIBSE BZ:
BZ2/0.8/BZ1 BZ2/3/BZ1/4/BZ2
Reference M LB L
direct indirect
DLOR ULOR
5991N RPX/28 E 1.27 0.95 0.36 0.59
+ 05991 DR/28 1.20 0.76 0.76 0.00
+ 05991 DG/28 1.22 0.85 0.58 0.27
5991N RPX/35 E 1.00 0.95 0.36 0.59
+ 05991 DR/35 0.95 0.76 0.76 0.00
+ 05991 DG/35 0.96 0.85 0.58 0.27
5991N RPX/2x28 E 0.65 0.93 0.38 0.55
+ 05991 DR/28 0.62 0.73 0.73 0.00
+ 05991 DG/28 0.63 0.83 0.56 0.27
5991N RPX/2x35 E 0.51 0.93 0.38 0.55
+ 05991 DR/35 0.48 0.73 0.73 0.00
+ 05991 DG/35 0.49 0.83 0.56 0.27
5991N RSX/28 E 1.27 0.95 0.36 0.59
+ 05991 DR/28 1.20 0.76 0.76 0.00
+ 05991 DG/28 1.22 0.85 0.58 0.27
5991N RSX/35 E 1.00 0.95 0.36 0.59
+ 05991 DR/35 0.95 0.76 0.76 0.00
+ 05991 DG/35 0.96 0.85 0.58 0.27
5991N RSX/2x28 E 0.65 0.93 0.38 0.55
+ 05991 DR/28 0.62 0.73 0.73 0.00
+ 05991 DG/28 0.63 0.83 0.56 0.27
5991N RSX/2x35 E 0.51 0.93 0.38 0.55
+ 05991 DR/35 0.48 0.73 0.73 0.00
Overhead reflectors Metallic effect + 05991 DG/35 0.49 0.83 0.56 0.27
Perforated overhead reflectors DG pro- The TRILUX T200 series with individual luminaires in silver-
vide efficient direct light combined with grey with metallic effect (see page 99) represents an inter-
well-balanced ceiling illumination. esting alternative to the white 59 luminaires. The luminous
Closed overhead reflectors DR convert flux distribution is also variable for this versions thanks to
599 suspended luminaires into purely colour-adapted overhead reflectors.
direct systems.
189
Suspended luminaires
with white louvre RWV
or semi-specular cross-blade louvre RSV
Application Reference Lamps D D1 D2 D3 kg Reference Lamps D D1 D2 D3 kg

For the efficient and elegant W mm W mm
lighting of offices, sales 5991N RWV/36 1x36 1245 23 1308 1370 3.5 5992N RWV/36 2x36 1245 23 1308 1370 4.0
areas and showrooms. RSV 5991N RWV/58 1x58 1545 23 1608 1670 4.1 5992N RWV/58 2x58 1545 23 1608 1670 4.9
versions also recommended
for financial institutions.
Optical system
Direct/indirect.
RWV
white, for a uniform light
distribution.
RSV

out tools.
Luminaire body
sheet steel, white, in a par- . . . .
. .
. .
bility and an elegant connec- . . . . . . . . . .
tion between the rounded . . . . .
side panels. The height . . . . .
for connection. With 5-pole DIN 5040: C43 DIN 5040: C43
plug-in connection terminal CIBSE BZ: CIBSE BZ:
for mains supply and further BZ2/3/BZ3 BZ2/3/BZ3
wiring for wires up to NBN L 14-002: NBN L 14-002:
BZ3 BZ3
low-loss ballasts.
Wire suspension
Luminaires can also be sup- The ceiling-orien-
plied with electronic as well ted surrounding
as with dimmable electronic wire eases the
control gear, reference suf- transversal align-
fix E for non-dimmable ment of the lumi-
electronic control gear or naires. The deco-
ED for dimmable elec- rative ceiling can-
tronic control gear, opy with room for
e.g. 5991N RWV/58 ED. the electrical con-
nection can also
be retro-fitted.
Indications Page
Node 194
Overhead reflector 194 Ultra-low-profile design
Suspensions 195 The 598/599 series sets new
Continuous-line coupling 195 design perspectives with a height of
Through-wiring set 195 only 62 mm and an unmistakable pro-
Lighting management file design differing greatly from tradi-
system 431 tional forms.
190
W mm W mm
5991N RSV/36 1x36 1245 23 1308 1370 3.5 5992N RSV/36 2x36 1245 23 1308 1370 4.0
5991N RSV/58 1x58 1545 23 1608 1670 4.1 5992N RSV/58 2x58 1545 23 1608 1670 4.9
652d
. . . .
Data table no. 2068
. . 1 Number of luminaires
En 300 lx 500 lx
. . Room height H 2.5 m 3.0 m 2.5 m 3.0 m
20 2.7 3.1 4.6 5.1
30 3.8 4.2 6.3 7.0
40 4.9 5.3 8.2 8.8
Area
50 5.9 6.4 9.9 11
A
in m2 60 7.0 7.4 12 12
. . . . . . . . . .
80 9.0 9.5 15 16
. . . . . 100 11 12 18 19
150 16 17 27 28
. . . . . 200 21 22 35 36
DIN 5040: C53 DIN 5040: C53 2 Max. luminaire

spacings for
g1 = Emin : E 1 : 1.5
CIBSE BZ: CIBSE BZ:
BZ3/2/BZ BZ3/2/BZ Transverse spacing centre / centre Xmax = 2.2 h
BZ3/1.5/BZ2 BZ3/1.5/BZ2
Reference M LB L
direct indirect
DLOR ULOR
5991N RSV/36 1.53 0.87 0.38 0.49
5991N RSV/58 1.00 0.85 0.37 0.48
5991N RWV/36 1.54 0.86 0.37 0.49
5991N RWV/58 1.01 0.84 0.36 0.48
5992N RSV/36 0.78 0.85 0.37 0.48
5992N RSV/58 0.51 0.83 0.36 0.47
5992N RWV/36 0.79 0.84 0.36 0.48
5992N RWV/58 0.52 0.82 0.35 0.47
Continuous-line coupling and nodes RSV louvre

When it comes to architectural accents or construction Semi-specular louvres RSV avoid direct
principles to be placed or emphasised, continuous-line glare, thanks to side panels and grad-
arrangements are the right solution. Perfectly adapted uated concave-profiled cross blades
5981/5991 series continuous-line couplings and node with a cross-section composed of short
adapters offer the best possibilities to underline prestigious parabolic segments.
room architectures.
191
with highly-specular parabolic louvre RPR
Application
normal DSE usage.
Optical system
Direct/indirect.
specular louvre made of an-
odised aluminium with a sur-

out tools.
Luminaire body
side panels. The height
low-loss ballasts.

plied with electronic as well
as with dimmable electronic
control gear, reference suf-
fix E for non-dimmable
electronic control gear or 25 25
ED for dimmable elec-
tronic control gear,
65 65
e.g. 5991N RPR/58 ED.
Indications Page
Node 194
Overhead reflector 194 Luminance limitation LIGHTGATE
Suspensions 195 Louvres with luminances limited to L 200 cd/m2 above 60 LIGHTGATE stands for an energy-saving lighting manage-
Continuous-line coupling 195 in the principal longitudinal and transversal planes are effec- ment system preferably used with TRILUX luminaires
Through-wiring set 195 tive when lighting rooms with DSE workstations. A corre- equipped with dimmable electronic control gear. LIGHTGATE
Lighting management sponding requirement at international level is the compliance embodies an individual, manually operated lighting control
system 431 to all-round luminance limitation (L 200 cd/m2 above 65). and a daylight-dependent regulation with integrated pres-
Lamp characteristics 444 RPR louvres meet both requirements. ence detection, see page 431.
192
W mm W mm
5991N RPR/36 1x36 1245 23 1308 1370 3.5 5992N RPR/36 2x36 1245 23 1308 1370 4.0
5991N RPR/58 1x58 1545 23 1608 1670 4.1 5992N RPR/58 2x58 1545 23 1608 1670 4.9
652d
. . . . Data table no. 2069

. . 1 Number of luminaires
En 300 lx 500 lx
. . Room height H 2.5 m 3.0 m 2.5 m 3.0 m
20 3.0 3.5 4.9 5.8
30 4.1 4.6 6.8 7.6
40 5.2 5.7 8.6 9.5
Area
50 6.2 6.8 10 11
A
. . . . . in m2 60 7.3 7.9 12 13
. . . . .
80 9.3 10 15 17
. . . . . 100 11 12 19 20
150 16 17 27 29
. . . . . 200 21 22 35 37
DIN 5040: D53 DIN 5040: D53 2 Max. luminaire

spacings for
g1 = Emin : E 1 : 1.5
CIBSE BZ: CIBSE BZ:
BZ2 BZ2
Reference M LB L
direct indirect
DLOR ULOR
5991N RPR/36 1.52 0.88 0.39 0.49
5991N RPR/58 1.00 0.86 0.39 0.47
5992N RPR/36 0.78 0.86 0.39 0.47
5992N RPR/58 0.51 0.84 0.37 0.47
Spring-tensioned contact clips

This tried-and-tested TRILUX security
lock minimises mounting and mainte-
nance costs and automatically provides
earth continuity. The clip cannot be
seen when the louvre is in place,
improving the overall appearance.
193
598, 599
Accessories
Adapter 05990 AN Ceiling node A 03 D Node with wire suspension

1 piece, white, for the connection of luminaires 5981, 1 piece, for up to four con- A 03 S
5991 with nodes A 03, with 5-conductor through-wiring nections, angles continuously 1 piece, consisting of:
set 1.5 mm2. adjustable between 90 and 1 node as described in
270. Die-cast aluminium, A 03 D,
white. 1 steel wire, 2.0 mm, for
to 1.5 m,
1 ceiling fixing unit.
Closed overhead reflector Perforated overhead reflector

Solvent-free powder-coated sheet steel. For purely downward, Solvent-free powder-coated sheet steel. To increase the
direct light distribution of suspended luminaires. Simple direct component and reduce the indirect component of
fixing to luminaire body and potential equalisation by means suspended luminaires. Simple fixing to luminaire body and
of screw connection. potential equalisation by means of screw connection.
05991 DR/28 for luminaires 5991/28, 5991/2x28. 05991 DG/28 for luminaires 5991/28, 5991/2x28.
05991 DR/35 for luminaires 5991/35, 5991/2x35. 05991 DG/35 for luminaires 5991/35, 5991/2x35.
05991 DR/36 for luminaires 5991/36. 05991 DG/36 for luminaires 5991/36.
194
Wire suspension* Continuous-line coupling 05980 LN Ceiling fixing rails LIGHTGATE
1 piece, for suspended mounting of luminaires 1 piece, aluminium profile, white. For the Sheet steel, white, 20 mm The energy-saving lighting
5991, 5992, consisting of: connection of two surface-mounted lumi- high. To cover the mains management system
1 ceiling fixing bracket, galvanised steel, naires 598. cables for surface mounting. LIGHTGATE embodies an
1 steel wire, 1.0 mm, Only necessary for ceiling individual, manually operated
2 luminaire fixing clamps, Continuous-line coupling 05990 LN outlets located at the longi- lighting control and a daylight-
1 plastic ceiling trim cap, white. 1 piece, with integrated wire suspension for tudinal luminaire axis outside dependent regulation with
05000 SN for suspension lenghts of up to the connection of two suspended luminaires the front-plane feeding open- integrated presence detec-
1.0 m. 599, consisting of: ing of the luminaires. tion. Description see page
05000 SN/2m for suspension lengths of up 1 continuous-line coupling, aluminium profile, 431.
to 2.0 m. white, 05981 DBS/28
1 ceiling fixing bracket, galvanised steel, for /28 E, /2x28 E.
Wiring connection unit 05000 ESBN* 1 steel wire, 1.0 mm, for suspension
1 set, for mains feeding for 05000 SN, lengths of up to 1.0 m, 05981 DBS/35
0500 SN/2m, comprising the necessary 2 luminaire fixing clamps, for /35 E, /2x35 E.
strain relief systems, fixing screws and 1 plastic ceiling trim cap, white.
PLEXIGLAS prismatic cover Feeding tube* Through-wiring sets

1 piece, to be attached without tools. To pro- 1 piece, plastic, white, 10 mm, to be Heat-resistant, colour-coded individual wires
tect the lamp and the optical system against shortened on site. To guide and cover the 1.5 mm2.
unnecessarily rapid degradation. mains cable.
05000 ZR 1 m long, in combination with Reference for luminaires
05991 P/28 05000 SN, 3700/3LV/36 28, 36
for suspended luminaires 5991/28, 05000 ZR/2m 2 m long, in combination 3700/3LV/58 35, 58
5991/2x28. with 05000 SN/2m or A 03 S with 05900 AN. 3700/5LV/36 28, 36
3700/5LV/58 35, 58
05991 P/35 Ceiling rose 05900 A* 07690/5LV/25m 28, 35, 36, 58
for suspended luminaires 5991/35, (not illustrated) 1 piece, for the connection of
5991/2x35. the mains cable in case of ceiling outlets.

1 piece, for the connection of the mains
cable in case of ceiling outlets. Suitable to
receive the ceiling fixing unit of A 03 S.
195
500 The 500 series includes
versions for both modern T5
fluorescent lamps as well as
tried-and-tested T8 lamps.
A smooth transition to the
new lamp technology can be
easily planned with 500
luminaires because both
versions share the same
architectural design. The
equipment scope is ade-
quately completed by com-
pact fluorescent lamps. RSX/65
Semi-specular mate-
rials are becoming
increasingly popular
in the built environment.
TRILUX refines the use of
these materials with a reflec-
tion-intensified material,
offering peak photometric
performance with the bene-
fits of diffuse distribution.
Page 198
196
RPX/65 RWV RSV RMV RPR/65
Superb surface Designed for even For high-efficiency Optimised technology ensures Designed for excel-
clarity, aided by illumination of general illumination in areas efficient glare-reduced illumi- lent, high-efficiency
reflection-intensified surfaces and utility with general public nation for office areas and illumination of all
aluminium, offers a louvre areas. Uniform, balanced access and non-DSE office shop premises with limited Cat. II DSE installations.
that is not only fully compli- light distribution with high environments. Narrow/wide- DSE usage. Controlled lumi- Specular side panels and
ant to the requirements of efficiency. Louvre made of angle light distribution with nance distribution with semi- parabolic cross blades
photometric bodies, but also white-coated aluminium or excellent efficiency due to specular parabolic cross ensure good all-round glare
excels with a working effi- sheet steel depending on concave-profiled aluminium blades and side panels made limitation.
ciency of up to 80 % in direct application. cross blades and highly-reflec- of high-purity anodised alu-
applications. tive aluminium side panels. minium.
197
Application Reference* Lamps D D1 D2 E1 E2 kg Reference* Lamps D D1 D2 E1 E2 kg
Offices, sales areas, show- W mm W mm
rooms and financial institu- 5001 RSX-L/28 E 1x28 900 164 292 450 59 3.4 5002 RSX-L/28 E 2x28 900 164 292 450 4.6
tions. Especially recom- 5001 RSX-L/35 E 1x35 1200 164 292 600 59 4.0 5002 RSX-L/35 E 2x35 1200 164 292 600 5.4
mended for areas with * End caps for individual luminaires or for the completion of continuous lines to be ordered * End caps for individual luminaires or for the completion of continuous lines to be ordered
normal DSE usage. separately. separately.
Optical system
Direct.
Fully compliant to
65 all-round.
RSX semi-specular,

Luminaire body
sheet steel, white, 70 mm
height overall. The classic
profile (45 on the upper
plane and 55 to the lower
plane) presents an interest-
ing contrast to the ceiling.
Luminaire body with integra-
ted coupling profiles for pre-
lines. White convex end
caps, surface in characteris-
tic rib design, to be ordered
separately.
for connection. With 5-pole No. 2070 No. 2070
plug-in connection terminal DIN 5040: A60 DIN 5040: A60
T5 CIBSE BZ:
BZ2/2.5/BZ1
NBN L 14-002:
BZ1
T5 CIBSE BZ:
BZ2/2.5/BZ1
NBN L 14-002:
BZ1

ence suffix ED,
e.g. 5002 RSX/28 ED.
Indications Page
End caps 208
Node 208
Suspensions 209 T5 fluorescent lamps Parabolic louvres RSX and RPX
Counter-balance weight 209 T5 fluorescent lamps with a diameter The parabolic louvres RSX and RPX,
Through-wiring set 209 reduced to 16 mm enable compact optimised for T5 lamps, convince with
Trunking 426 dimensions of the optical systems and characteristics such as luminance limi-
Lighting management the luminaire sections. tation, high working efficiencies and a
system 431 low construction height.
198
Reference* Lamps D D1 D2 E1 E2 kg Reference* Lamps D D1 D2 E1 E2 kg
W mm W mm
5001 RPX-L/28 E 1x28 900 164 292 450 59 3.4 5002 RPX-L/28 E 2x28 900 164 292 450 4.6
5001 RPX-L/35 E 1x35 1200 164 292 600 59 4.0 5002 RPX-L/35 E 2x35 1200 164 292 600 5.4
652d
Data table no. 2070

En 300 lx 500 lx
20 3.0 3.3 5.0 5.5
30 4.3 4.5 7.1 7.5
40 5.5 5.8 9.2 9.7
Area
50 6.7 7.1 11 12
A
in m2 60 8.0 8.4 13 14
80 10 11 17 18
100 13 13 21 22
150 19 19 31 32
200 25 25 41 42
T5 T5

g1 = Emin : E 1 : 1.5
CIBSE C 71-121: CIBSE BZ:
BZ1 BZ1
Reference M LB L
direct indirect
DLOR ULOR
5001 RPX-L/28 E 1.22 0.85 0.85 0.00
5001 RPX-L/35 E 1.00 0.85 0.85 0.00
5002 RPX-L/28 E 0.62 0.83 0.83 0.00
5002 RPX-L/35 E 0.51 0.83 0.83 0.00
5001 RSX-L/28 E 1.22 0.85 0.85 0.00
5001 RSX-L/35 E 1.00 0.85 0.85 0.00
5002 RSX-L/28 E 0.62 0.83 0.83 0.00
5002 RSX-L/35 E 0.51 0.83 0.83 0.00
Reflection intensification Luminance limitation

The surface of RPX and RSX louvres is Louvres with luminances limited to L 200 cd/m2 above 60
characterised by a system of anodised in the principal longitudinal and transversal planes are effec-
layers, applied to high-purity aluminium, tive when lighting rooms with DSE workstations. A corre-
with an anodising thickness orientated sponding requirement at international level is the compliance
around the half wavelength (/2) of the to all-round luminance limitation (L 200 cd/m2 above 65).
visible light. RPX and RSX louvres meet both requirements.
199
Surface-mounted luminaires
Application Reference Lamps D D1 E1 kg

Offices, sales areas and W mm
showrooms. 5002 RWV/TC18 2xTC-L18 230 42 115 1.9
Optical system
Direct.
white, for uniform light
distribution.

out tools.
Luminaire body
separately for 36, 58,
end caps for /TC18 are
premounted.
for connection. /TC18 with
3-pole, /36, /58 with
5-pole plug-in connection
terminal for wires up to
low-loss ballasts. No. 2071
DIN 5040: A50
Luminaires can also be sup- CIBSE BZ:
plied with non-dimmable BZ3
electronic control gear, NBN L 14-002:
BZ3
36, 58 luminaires addi-
tionally also with dimmable
electronic control gear.
Reference suffix E for Decorative
non-dimmable and ED for finish
dimmable electronic control The end caps of
gear, e.g. 5001 RWV/36 ED. the 500 series
luminaires are
perfectly adapted
to the luminaire
body design. The
even contours
together with the
striking rib profile
contribute effec-
tively to the
Indications Page sophisticated
End caps 208 design of this
Node 208 luminaire series.
Suspensions 209 Made of impact- Exact fixing
Counter-balance weight 209 resistant, PVC- Ageing- and heat-resistant lamp sup-
Through-wiring set 209 free and UV- ports made of stainless steel offer
Trunking 426 stabilised ma- ideal, durable positioning of compact
Lighting management terial. fluorescent lamps with a single-ended
system 431 socket and a small cross-section.
200
W mm W mm
5001 RWV-L/36 1x36 900 191 346 450 59 3.9 5002 RWV-L/36 2x36 900 191 346 450 6.0
5001 RWV-L/58 1x58 1200 192 348 600 59 5.0 5002 RWV-L/58 2x58 1200 192 348 600 7.6
652d
Data table no. 2071

En 300 lx 500 lx
20 2.9 3.3 4.9 5.5
30 4.1 4.5 6.8 7.5
40 5.3 5.7 8.8 9.4
Area
50 6.4 6.8 11 11
A
in m2 60 7.5 8.0 13 13
80 9.7 10 16 17
100 12 13 20 21
150 18 18 29 30
200 23 23 38 39

spacings for
g1 = Emin : E 1 : 1.5
CIBSE BZ: CIBSE BZ:
BZ3 BZ3
Reference M LB L
direct indirect
DLOR ULOR
5001 RWV-L/36 1.50 0.63 0.63 0.00
5001 RWV-L/58 1.00 0.61 0.61 0.00
5002 RWV-L/36 0.78 0.61 0.61 0.00
5002 RWV-L/58 0.52 0.59 0.59 0.00
5002 RWV/TC18 2.54 0.52 0.52 0.00
Spring-tensioned contact clips Mounting to trunking

This tried-and-tested TRILUX security 500 series surface-mounted luminaires can also be sus-
lock minimises mounting and mainte- pended from trunkings 07690/, see page 426. Recom-
nance costs and automatically provides mended when ceiling heights exceed normal limits, for un-
earth continuity. The clip cannot be even ceiling surfaces or in case of ceiling joists. The trunk-
seen when the louvre is in place, ing also serves as cable duct.
201
with semi-specular cross-blade louvre RSV

Offices, sales areas, show- W mm
rooms, financial institutions. 5002 RSV/TC18 2xTC-L18 230 42 115 1.9
Optical system
Direct.

out tools.
Luminaire body
premounted.
3-pole, /36, /58 with
2.5 mm2, including earth No. 2072
connection terminal. With DIN 5040: A50
low-loss ballasts. CIBSE BZ:
BZ2
Luminaires can also be sup- NBN L 14-002:
BZ2
plied with non-dimmable
electronic control gear,
Reference suffix E for
non-dimmable and ED for
gear, e.g. 5001 RSV/36 ED.
Indications Page
End caps 208
Node 208
Suspensions 209 Design and technics LIGHTGATE
Counter-balance weight 209 The harmonious appearance is due to a The energy-saving lighting manage-
Through-wiring set 209 perfect unity of luminaire body and end ment system LIGHTGATE embodies an
Trunking 426 caps. Additional interior end caps pro- individual, manually operated lighting
Lighting management vide mechanical stability and exception- control and a daylight-dependent regu-
system 431 al rigidity. lation with integrated presence detec-
Lamp characteristics 444 tion. Description see page 431.
202
W mm W mm
5001 RSV-L/36 1x36 900 191 346 450 59 3.9 5002 RSV-L/36 2x36 900 191 346 450 6.0
5001 RSV-L/58 1x58 1200 192 348 600 59 5.0 5002 RSV-L/58 2x58 1200 192 348 600 7.6
652d
Data table no. 2072

En 300 lx 500 lx
20 2.7 3.0 4.4 5.0
30 3.8 4.1 6.3 6.8
40 4.8 5.2 8.1 8.6
Area
50 5.9 6.3 9.8 10
A
in m2 60 7.0 7.4 12 12
80 9.0 9.5 15 16
100 11 12 18 19
150 16 17 27 28
200 21 22 36 36

spacings for
g1 = Emin : E 1 : 1.5
CIBSE BZ: CIBSE BZ:
BZ2 BZ2
Reference M LB L
direct indirect
DLOR ULOR
5001 RSV-L/36 1.50 0.66 0.66 0.00
5001 RSV-L/58 1.00 0.64 0.64 0.00
5002 RSV-L/36 0.78 0.64 0.64 0.00
5002 RSV-L/58 0.52 0.62 0.62 0.00
5002 RSV/TC18 2.63 0.52 0.52 0.00
Geometrical arrangements with the 500 series RSV louvre

Whether discreet integration into the room architecture is Semi-specular louvres RSV avoid direct
required or striking means of adaptive creation a modern glare, thanks to side panels and grad-
lighting system must be able to offer this duality. 500 uated concave-profiled cross blades
series luminaires combined with nodes are versatile, follow- with a cross-section composed of short
ing given construction ideas or convincing as creatively parabolic segments.
shaped unique geometrical arrangements.
203
with semi-specular parabolic louvre RMV

Offices, classrooms, sales W mm
areas, showrooms and finan- 5002 RMV/TC18 2xTC-L18 230 42 115 1.9
cial institutions.
Optical system
Direct.
made of semi-specular an-
face purity of 99.98 % for
increased visual comfort due
to a uniform louvre appear-
ance with reduced bright-
ness contrasts.

out tools.
Luminaire body
premounted.
3-pole, /36, /58 with No. 2156
5-pole plug-in connection DIN 5040: A50
terminal for wires up to CIBSE BZ:
connection terminal. With NBN L 14-002:
BZ2
low-loss ballasts.

gear, e.g. 5001 RMV/36 ED.
Indications Page
End caps 208
Node 208
Suspensions 209 Decorative finish Exact fixing
Counter-balance weight 209 The end caps of the 500 series luminaires are perfectly Ageing- and heat-resistant lamp sup-
Through-wiring set 209 adapted to the luminaire body design. The even contours ports made of stainless steel offer
Trunking 426 together with the striking rib profile contribute effectively to ideal, durable positioning of compact
Lighting management the sophisticated design of this luminaire series. Made of fluorescent lamps with a single-ended
system 431 impact-resistant, PVC-free and UV-stabilised material. socket and a small cross-section.
204
W mm W mm
5001 RMV-L/36 1x36 900 191 346 450 59 3.9 5002 RMV-L/36 2x36 900 191 346 450 6.0
5001 RMV-L/58 1x58 1200 192 348 600 59 5.0 5002 RMV-L/58 2x58 1200 192 348 600 7.6
652d
Data table no. 2156

En 300 lx 500 lx
20 2.7 3.0 4.6 5.1
30 3.9 4.1 6.5 6.9
40 5.0 5.3 8.3 8.8
Area
50 6.1 6.5 10 11
A
in m2 60 7.1 7.6 12 13
80 9.4 9.8 16 16
100 12 12 19 20
150 17 17 28 29
200 22 23 37 38

spacings for
g1 = Emin : E 1 : 1.5
CIBSE BZ: CIBSE BZ:
BZ2 BZ2
Reference M LB L
direct indirect
DLOR ULOR
5001 RMV-L/36 1.50 0.63 0.63 0.00
5001 RMV-L/58 1.00 0.61 0.61 0.00
5002 RMV-L/36 0.78 0.61 0.61 0.00
5002 RMV-L/58 0.52 0.59 0.59 0.00
5002 RMV/TC18 2.59 0.51 0.51 0.00
Infinite photometrics Geometrical arrangements

500 continuous-line luminaires in version -L can be Universal nodes A 03 offer extended
arranged as continuous lines up to any length, without the planning scope for architecture-enhan-
interruption caused by luminaire end caps. Optically continu- cing lighting solutions, allowing the con-
ous louvres create endless luminaire rows. nection of max. four trunkings at varia-
ble angles between 90 and 270.
205
with highly-specular parabolic louvre RPR

Offices, classrooms, sales W mm
areas, showrooms and finan- 5002 RPR/TC18 2xTC-L18 230 42 115 1.9
cial institutions.
Optical system
Direct.
specular louvre made of an-

Luminaire body
premounted.
3-pole, /36, /58 with
terminal for wires up to No. 2073
2.5 mm2, including earth DIN 5040: A50
connection terminal. With CIBSE BZ:
low-loss ballasts. BZ1
NBN L 14-002:
BZ2/0.8/BZ1
gear, e.g. 5002 RPR/58 ED.
Indications Page
End caps 208
Node 208
Suspensions 209 Luminance limitation Exact fixing
Counter-balance weight 209 Louvres with luminances limited to L 200 cd/m2 above 60 Ageing- and heat-resistant lamp sup-
Through-wiring set 209 in the principal longitudinal and transversal planes are effec- ports made of stainless steel offer
Trunking 426 tive when lighting rooms with DSE workstations. A corre- ideal, durable positioning of compact
Lighting management sponding requirement at international level is the compliance fluorescent lamps with a single-ended
system 431 to all-round luminance limitation (L 200 cd/m2 above 65). socket and a small cross-section.
Lamp characteristics 444 RPR louvres meet both requirements.
206
W mm W mm
5001 RPR-L/36 1x36 900 191 346 450 59 3.9 5002 RPR-L/36 2x36 900 191 346 450 6.0
5001 RPR-L/58 1x58 1200 192 348 600 59 5.0 5002 RPR-L/58 2x58 1200 192 348 600 7.6
652d
Data table no. 2073

En 300 lx 500 lx
20 2.6 3.0 4.4 4.9
30 3.7 4.0 6.2 6.7
40 4.8 5.1 8.0 8.5
Area
50 5.9 6.2 9.8 10
A
in m2 60 6.9 7.3 12 12
80 9.0 9.4 15 16
100 11 12 18 19
150 16 17 27 28
200 21 22 35 36

spacings for
g1 = Emin : E 1 : 1.5
CIBSE BZ: CIBSE BZ:
BZ2/1BZ1 BZ2/1/BZ1 Transverse spacing centre / centre Xmax = 1.7 h
BZ2/1.5/BZ1/4BZ BZ2/1.5/BZ1/4/BZ
Reference M LB L
direct indirect
DLOR ULOR
5001 RPR-L/36 1.51 0.66 0.66 0.00
5001 RPR-L/58 1.00 0.64 0.64 0.00
5002 RPR-L/36 0.78 0.64 0.64 0.00
5002 RPR-L/58 0.52 0.62 0.62 0.00
5002 RPR/TC18 2.67 0.52 0.52 0.00
Wire suspensions Infinite photometrics

Direct luminaires 500 can also be The appealing combination of optically
suspended by means of easy-to-handle continuous louvres together with the
wire suspensions when the ceiling elegant side profiles of the luminaire
height exceeds normal limits or in body creates the impression of endless
case of ceiling joists. luminaire rows in version -L.
207
500
Accessories
End-cap adapter 05001 KA Ceiling node A 03 D Node with wire suspension End caps
1 piece, white, for the connection of single- 1 piece, for up to four con- A 03 S 1 pair, white,
lamp luminaires 5001L with nodes nections, angles continuously 1 piece, consisting of: for 500 luminaires
A 03, with 5-conductor through-wiring set adjustable between 90 and 1 node as described in 05001 K for 5001L.
1.5 mm2. 270. Die-cast aluminium, A 03 D, 05002 K for 5002L.
white. 1 steel wire, 2.0 mm, for
110
Distance plate 05000 DD to 1.5 m,
(not illustrated) 1 pair, white 1 ceiling fixing unit.
130 plastic material, for distance Required counter-balance
ceiling mounting of luminaires weights are described on
5001 in combination with page 209.
nodes A 03 D. One pair of
ceiling distance plates is Ceiling rose 05900 A*
90 required per luminaire. (not illustrated), 1 piece, for
the connection of the mains
cable in case of ceiling out-
lets.

(not illustrated), 1 piece, for
the connection of the mains
cable in case of ceiling out-
lets. Suitable to receive the
ceiling fixing unit of A 03 S.
* Incoming cables are not supplied. They
must be provided by the contractor.
Ordering example:
Geometrical arrangement according to the
draft opposite with 8 luminaires
90 5001 RPX-L/35 E, wire suspensions,
5-conductor through-wiring set.
8 luminaires 5001 RPX-L/35 E
8 end-cap adapters 05001 KA
3244 mm
4 nodes with wire suspension A 03 S

4 wire suspensions 05000 SN
1 ceiling rose 05900 AN
1 feeding tube 05000 ZR
208
Wire suspension Feeding tube Through-wiring sets
1 piece, consisting of: 1 piece, plastic, white, 10 mm, to be Heat-resistant, colour-coded individual wires
1 ceiling fixing bracket, galvanised steel, shortened site. To guide and cover the 1.5 mm2.
1 steel wire, 1.0 mm, mains cable. 3LV 3-conductor through-wiring
2 luminaire fixing clamps, 05000 ZR 1 m long, in combination with 5LV 5-conductor through-wiring
1 plastic ceiling trim cap, white. 05000 SN,
05000 SN for suspension lengths of up to 05000 ZR/2m 2 m long, in combination Reference for luminaires Length
1.0 m. with 05000 SN/2m or A 03 S with 05900 AN. 3700/3LV/36 L/36, L/28 1450 mm
05000 SN/2m for suspension lengths of up 3700/5LV/36 L/36, L/28 1450 mm
to 2.0 m. Wiring connection unit 05000 ESBN* 3700/3LV/58 L/58, L/35 1750 mm
1 set, for mains feeding for 05000 SN, 3700/5LV/58 L/58, L/35 1750 mm
0500 SN/2m, comprising the necessary 07690/5LV/25m L 25 m
strain relief systems, fixing screws and con-
nection terminal 4 x 2.5 mm2.
Distance plates 05000 DS

(not illustrated) 1 pair, for trunking mounting
of 500 surface-mounted luminaires.
Counter-balance weights
Required for 1-lamp luminaires with low-loss
ballasts or 1- and 2-lamp luminaires with
electronic control gear, when fixing to node
suspensions A 03 S and to suspended
trunkings 07690.
Reference for luminaires

Distance plates and eventually additional 05000 A10 5001/36
counter-balance weights are required when 05000 A11 5001/58
mounting to suspended trunking (see table 05000 A12 5001 ED and 5002 E
opposite). 05000 A13 5002 ED
05000 A21 5001 E
7496 mm Ordering example:

Continuous line (5 lengths) with luminaires
5002 RPX-L/35 E.
5 luminaires 5002 RPX-L/35 E
1 pair of end caps 05002 K
209
152
210
The extensive 152 range
with white louvres, semi-
specular cross-blade louvres
as well as highly- and semi-
specular parabolic louvres is
suitable for the most versa-
tile applications. The lumi-
naires, conceived to realise
lines, can also be used as
individual luminaires thanks
to end cap accessories.
The series contains direct RWV RSV RMV RPV/65
surface-mounted luminaires Designed for even For high-effi- Optimised technology ensures Efficient
and direct/indirect suspended illumination of general ciency illumi- efficient glare-reduced illumi- glare-free
luminaires. surfaces and utility nation in nation for office areas and illumination
areas. Uniform, balanced non-DSE office environments. shop premises with limited for all areas with DSE usage.
light distribution with high Narrow/wide-angle light DSE usage. Controlled lumi- Controlled luminance distri-
efficiency. Louvre made of distribution with excellent nance distribution with semi- bution with highly-specular
white-coated aluminium or efficiency due to concave- specular parabolic cross parabolic cross blades and
sheet steel depending on profiled aluminium cross blades and side panels made side panels made of high-
application. blades and highly-reflective of high-purity anodised alu- purity anodised aluminium.
aluminium side panels. minium.
Page 212/216 Page 212/216 Page 214/218 Page 214/218
211
Application Reference* Lamps D D1 D2 kg Reference* Lamps D D1 D2 kg

Offices, sales areas and W mm W mm
showrooms. 1522/136 RWV-L 1x36 1100 90 134 6,8 1522/236 RWV-L 2x36 1100 90 134 8.2
1522/158 RWV-L 1x58 1400 90 134 8,3 1522/258 RWV-L 2x58 1400 90 134 10.2
Optical system * End caps for individual luminaires or for the completion of continuous lines to be ordered separately.
Direct.
RWV
White aluminium louvre for a
uniform light distribution.
RSV
Semi-specular louvre for nar-
tion. With graduated con-
cave-profiled cross blades to
reduce the luminance con-
trasts between luminaire and
ceiling. Louvre made of high-
purity anodised aluminium.

out tools.
Luminaire body
Sheet steel, with semi-circu-
lar upper section. With ceil-
ing fixing rail. Solvent-free
powder-coated luminaire
body, white. Luminaire body
with integrated coupling
brackets for precisely
aligned continuous lines.
End caps to be ordered
separately.
C 0 - C 180 Data table C 0 - C 180 Data table
2.5 mm2, including earth No. 0051 No. 0051 Data table no. 0051
connection terminal. With DIN 5040: A50 DIN 5040: A50 1 Number of luminaires
conventional ballasts. CIBSE BZ: CIBSE BZ: En 300 lx 500 lx
BZ2/2.5/BZ3 BZ2 Room height H 2.5 m 3.0 m 2.5 m 3.0 m
20 2.8 3.2 4.7 5.3
Luminaires can also be sup- NBN L 14-002: NBN L 14-002:
30 3.9 4.3 6.5 7.2
BZ3 BZ3
plied with electronic control Area
40 5.0 5.4 8.4 9.0
50 6.1 6.5 10 11
gear, reference suffix E, A
60 7.2 7.7 12 13
in m2
e.g. 1522/158 RSV-L E. 80 9.3 9.8 15 16
100 11 12 19 20
150 17 17 28 29
200 22 22 36 37
2 Max. luminaire

spacings for
g1 = Emin : E 1 : 1.5

Reference M LB L
direct indirect
DLOR ULOR
1522/136RWV-L 1.51 0.66 0.66 0.00
1522/158RWV-L 1.00 0.64 0.64 0.00
1522/236RWV-L 0.81 0.61 0.61 0.00
1522/258RWV-L 0.55 0.58 0.58 0.00
Time-saving mounting
Indications Page The ceiling trunking of the 152 series Technical information see page 440.
Node 220 surface-mounted luminaires forms the

End caps 221 mechanical and optical junction with the
Through-wiring set 221 ceiling surface guiding the mains cable
Emergency light 428 easily to the ends, while saving time
Lamp characteristics 444 and installation costs.
212
W mm W mm
1522/136 RSV-L 1x36 1100 90 134 6.8 1522/236 RSV-L 2x36 1100 90 134 8.2
1522/158 RSV-L 1x58 1400 90 134 8.3 1522/258 RSV-L 2x58 1400 90 134 10.2
652d
Data table no. 0052

En 300 lx 500 lx
20 2.7 3.1 4.5 5.1
30 3.7 4.1 6.2 6.9
40 4.8 5.2 8.1 8.6
Area
50 5.9 6.2 9.6 11
A
in m2 60 6.9 7.4 12 13
80 8.9 9.4 15 15
100 11 12 18 19
150 16 16 27 28
200 21 21 35 36

spacings for
g1 = Emin : E 1 : 1.5
CIBSE BZ: CIBSE BZ:
BZ2 BZ2
Reference M LB L
direct indirect
DLOR ULOR
1522/136RSV-L 1.52 0.68 0.68 0.00
1522/158RSV-L 1.00 0.67 0.67 0.00
1522/236RSV-L 0.91 0.57 0.57 0.00
1522/258RSV-L 0.62 0.54 0.54 0.00
RSV louvre Decorative finish

Semi-specular louvres RSV avoid direct The end caps are perfectly adapted to
glare, thanks to side panels and grad- the luminaire body of the 152 series.
uated concave-profiled cross blades The even contours together with the
with a cross-section composed of short strinking graphical form contribute
parabolic segments. effectively to the sophisticated design
of this luminaire series.
213
or highly-specular parabolic louvre RPV
Application Reference* Lamps D D1 D2 kg Reference* Lamps D D1 D2 kg

rooms and financial institu- 1522/136 RMV-L 1x36 1100 90 134 6.8 1522/236 RMV-L 2x36 1100 90 134 8.2
tions. RPV versions especial- 1522/158 RMV-L 1x58 1400 90 134 8.3 1522/258 RMV-L 2x58 1400 90 134 10.2
ly recommended for areas * End caps for individual luminaires or for the completion of continuous lines to be ordered separately.
with normal DSE usage.
Optical system
Direct.
RMV
Semi-specular parabolic lou-
vre. Increased visual comfort
due to a uniform louvre
appearance with reduced
brightness contrasts. For
tribution. Louvre made of
anodised aluminium with a
RPV
Highly-specular parabolic
louvre. Luminance limited to
angle above 65. Louvre
made of anodised aluminium
99.98 %.

out tools.
Luminaire body
lar upper section. With ceil-
ing fixing rail. Solvent-free
powder-coated luminaire
body, white. Luminaire body
with integrated coupling
brackets for precisely
aligned continuous lines.
End caps to be ordered No. 0053 Data table no. 0053
separately. DIN 5040: A60 1 Number of luminaires
CIBSE BZ: En 300 lx 500 lx
Electrical connection BZ1 Room height H 2.5 m 3.0 m 2.5 m 3.0 m
20 2.7 3.0 4.5 5.0
Luminaires supplied ready NBN L 14-002:
30 3.9 4.1 6.5 6.9
BZ2/0.8/BZ1
for connection. With 3-pole Area
40 5.0 5.3 8.4 8.9
50 6.1 6.5 10 11
plug-in connection terminal A
60 7.3 7.6 12 13
in m2
for mains supply and further 80 9.4 9.9 16 16
wiring for wires up to 100 12 12 19 20
150 18 18 29 29
2.5 mm2, including earth 200 23 23 38 38
connection terminal. With Calculation parameters
conventional ballasts. Reflectance values 0.7 / 0.5 / 0.2
Luminaires can also be sup- Suspension length lp 0.00 m
plied with electronic control 2 Max. luminaire spacings for

gear, reference suffix E, g1 = Emin : E 1 : 1.5
e.g. 1522/158 RPV-L E. Longitudinal spacing centre / centre Ymax = 1.5 h

Reference M LB L
direct indirect
DLOR ULOR
1522/136RMV-L 1.51 0.69 0.69 0.00
1522/158RMV-L 1.00 0.67 0.67 0.00
1522/236RMV-L 0.91 0.57 0.57 0.00
1522/258RMV-L 0.62 0.54 0.54 0.00
Indications Page Technical information see page 440.
Node 220
End caps 221
Through-wiring set 221
Emergency light 428
214
W mm W mm
1522/136 RPV-L 1x36 1100 90 134 6.8 1522/236 RPV-L 2x36 1100 90 134 8.2
1522/158 RPV-L 1x58 1400 90 134 8.3 1522/258 RPV-L 2x58 1400 90 134 10.2
652d
Data table no. 0054

En 300 lx 500 lx
20 2.5 2.8 4.1 4.6
30 3.5 3.8 5.9 6.3
40 4.6 4.8 7.6 8.1
Area
50 5.6 5.9 9.3 9.8
A
in m2 60 6.6 6.9 11 12
80 8.5 9.0 14 15
100 10 11 17 18
150 15 16 26 27
200 20 21 34 35

spacings for
g1 = Emin : E 1 : 1.5
CIBSE BZ: CIBSE BZ:
BZ2 BZ2
Reference M LB L
direct indirect
DLOR ULOR
1522/136RPV-L 1.53 0.69 0.69 0.00
1522/158RPV-L 1.00 0.68 0.68 0.00
1522/236RPV-L 0.94 0.56 0.56 0.00
1522/258RPV-L 0.63 0.54 0.54 0.00
Different equipment same design Luminance limitation

Different visual tasks such as technical drawing and usual Parabolic louvres with luminances limited to L 200 cd/m2
office activities call for specially adapted illuminance levels. at reference angle 65 were found effective when light-
The 152 series combines single- and twin-lamp versions in ing areas with normal DSE usage.
one luminaire body a perfect solution for different lighting
requirements, in the same architectural design.
215
Application Reference* Lamps D** D1 kg Reference* Lamps D** D1 kg

rooms and financial institu- 1523/136 RWV-L 1x36 1234 23 6.0 1523/236 RWV-L 2x36 1234 23 7.4
tions. 1523/158 RWV-L 1x58 1534 23 7.4 1523/258 RWV-L 2x58 1534 23 9.4
Optical system ** Reduced fixing spacing of the wire suspensions 05000 SN for individual luminaires and for the first luminaire of a continuous line: 1222 mm (36 W) or 1522 mm (58 W).
Direct/indirect.
RWV
RSV
Semi-specular louvre for nar-
tion. With graduated con-
ceiling. Louvre made of high-
purity anodised aluminium.

out tools.
Luminaire body
lar upper section. Solvent-
free powder-coated lumi-
naire body, white, with inte-
precisely aligned continuous
lines. End caps to be
ordered separately. . . . .
Electrical connection . . . .
connection terminal. With No. 0056 No. 0056 Data table no. 0056
conventional ballasts. DIN 5040: C53 DIN 5040: C53 1 Number of luminaires
CIBSE BZ: CIBSE BZ: En 300 lx 500 lx
Luminaires can also be sup- BZ2 BZ4 Room height H 2.5 m 3.0 m 2.5 m 3.0 m
20 2.9 3.3 4.7 5.4
plied with electronic control NBN L 14-002: NBN L 14-002:
30 3.9 4.3 6.5 7.2
BZ3 BZ3
gear, reference suffix E, Area
40 5.0 5.4 8.2 9.0
50 6.0 6.5 9.9 11
e.g. 1523/158 RSV-L E. A
60 7.0 7.6 11 12
in m2
80 8.9 9.6 15 16
100 11 11 18 19
150 16 16 26 27
200 20 21 34 35
2 Max. luminaire

spacings for
g1 = Emin : E 1 : 1.5

Indications Page Reference M LB
direct
L
indirect
Node 220 DLOR ULOR
1523/136RWV-L 1.52 0.89 0.34 0.55
Suspensions 220 1523/158RWV-L 1.00 0.87 0.33 0.54
Through-wiring set 221 1523/236RWV-L 0.78 0.87 0.33 0.54
1523/258RWV-L 0.52 0.84 0.32 0.52
End caps 221 The vernier clip of the pendant suspen-
Secondary reflector 221 sion can be removed or attached with- Technical information see page 440.
Overhead reflector 221 out tools, allowing adaptation to

Prismatic cover 221 reduced suspension lengths on site.
Counter-balance weight 221 Furthermore, the wire suspension ceil-
Emergency light 428 ing trim cap can be installed after the
Lamp characteristics 444 main assembly has been completed.
216
Reference* Lamps D** D1 kg Reference* Lamps D** D1 kg
W mm W mm
1523/136 RSV-L 1x36 1234 23 6.0 1523/236 RSV-L 2x36 1234 23 7.4
1523/158 RSV-L 1x58 1534 23 7.4 1523/258 RSV-L 2x58 1534 23 9.4
** Reduced fixing spacing of the wire suspensions 05000 SN for individual luminaires and for the first luminaire of a continuous line: 1222 mm (36 W) or 1522 mm (58 W).
652d
Data table no. 0057

En 300 lx 500 lx
20 2.7 3.3 4.6 5.4
. . . . 30 3.8 4.2 6.3 7.1
40 4.8 5.2 8.1 8.8
. . . . Area
A
50 5.8 6.3 9.6 10.6
in m2 60 6.7 7.3 11 12
80 8.7 9.4 14 16
100 10 11 17 19
150 15 16 25 27
200 20 21 33 34
DIN 5040: C53 DIN 5040: C63 2 Max. luminaire

spacings for
g1 = Emin : E 1 : 1.5
CIBSE BZ: CIBSE BZ:
BZ2 BZ2
Reference M LB L
direct indirect
DLOR ULOR
1523/136RSV-L 1.52 0.89 0.34 0.55
1523/158RSV-L 1.00 0.87 0.33 0.54
1523/236RSV-L 0.78 0.87 0.33 0.54
1523/258RSV-L 0.52 0.85 0.32 0.53
RSV louvre
Semi-specular louvres RSV avoid direct
glare, thanks to side panels and grad-
uated concave-profiled cross blades
with a cross-section composed of short
parabolic segments.
217
or highly-specular parabolic louvre RPV
Application Reference* Lamps D** D1 kg Reference* Lamps D** D1 kg

rooms and financial institu- 1523/136 RMV-L 1x36 1234 23 6.0 1523/236 RMV-L 2x36 1234 23 7.4
tions. RPV versions especial- 1523/158 RMV-L 1x58 1534 23 7.4 1523/258 RMV-L 2x58 1534 23 9.4
ly recommended for areas * End caps for individual luminaires or for the completion of continuous lines to be ordered separately.
with normal DSE usage. ** Reduced fixing spacing of the wire suspensions 05000 SN for individual luminaires and for the first luminaire of a continuous line: 1222 mm (36 W) or 1522 mm (58 W).
Optical system
Direct/indirect.
RMV
RPV
louvre. Luminance limited to
angle above 65. Louvre
made of anodised aluminium
99.98 %.

out tools.
Luminaire body . . . .
lar upper section. Solvent- . . . .
free powder-coated lumi-
naire body, white, with inte-
precisely aligned continuous
lines. End caps to be
ordered separately.
No. 0058 No. 0058 Data table no. 0058
Electrical connection DIN 5040: D62 DIN 5040: D63 1 Number of luminaires
Luminaires supplied ready CIBSE BZ: CIBSE BZ: En 300 lx 500 lx
for connection. With 3-pole BZ1 BZ1 Room height H 2.5 m 3.0 m 2.5 m 3.0 m
20 2.5 2.9 4.2 4.8
plug-in connection terminal NBN L 14-002: NBN L 14-002:
30 3.6 3.9 5.9 6.5
BZ2/0.8/BZ1 BZ2/1.25/BZ1/4/BZ
for mains supply and further Area
40 4.6 4.9 7.5 8.1
50 5.4 5.8 9.1 9.8
wiring for wires up to A
60 6.4 6.9 11 12
in m2
2.5 mm2, including earth 80 8.3 8.8 14 15
connection terminal. With 100 9.9 11 17 18
150 9.9 16 25 26
conventional ballasts. 200 20 20 33 34
Luminaires can also be sup- Reflectance values 0.7 / 0.5 / 0.2
plied with electronic control Height of the working plane e 0.85 m
gear, reference suffix E, Suspension length lp 0.50 m
e.g. 1523/158 RPV-L E. 2 Max. luminaire spacings for

g1 = Emin : E 1 : 1.5

Indications Page Reference M LB
direct
L
indirect
Node 220 DLOR ULOR
1523/136RMV-L 1.52 0.90 0.31 0.59
Suspensions 220 1523/158RMV-L 1.00 0.88 0.30 0.58
Through-wiring set 221 1523/236RMV-L 0.78 0.88 0.30 0.58
1523/258RMV-L 0.52 0.86 0.29 0.57
End caps 221 Offset secondary reflectors
Secondary reflector 221 This accessory is designed to achieve soft illumination by Technical information see page 440.
Overhead reflector 221 precisely calculated perforations with a varying size. See
Prismatic cover 221 accessories.
Counter-balance weight 221
Emergency light 428
218
Reference* Lamps D** D1 kg Reference* Lamps D** D1 kg
W mm W mm
1523/136 RPV-L 1x36 1234 23 6.0 1523/236 RPV-L 2x36 1234 23 7.4
1523/158 RPV-L 1x58 1534 23 7.4 1523/258 RPV-L 2x58 1534 23 9.4
** Reduced fixing spacing of the wire suspensions 05000 SN for individual luminaires and for the first luminaire of a continuous line: 1222 mm (36 W) or 1522 mm (58 W).
652d
Data table no. 0059

En 300 lx 500 lx
20 2.8 3.2 4.6 5.3
. . . . 30 3.8 4.2 6.4 7.1
40 4.9 5.3 8.1 8.9
. . . . Area
A
50 5.9 6.4 9.8 11
in m2 60 6.9 7.5 11 12
80 8.8 9.5 15 16
100 11 11 18 19
150 16 16 26 27
200 20 21 34 35
DIN 5040: D62 DIN 5040: D62 2 Max. luminaire

spacings for
g1 = Emin : E 1 : 1.5
CIBSE BZ: CIBSE BZ:
BZ1 BZ1
Reference M LB L
direct indirect
DLOR ULOR
1523/136RPV-L 1.52 0.91 0.35 0.56
1523/158RPV-L 1.00 0.89 0.34 0.55
1523/236RPV-L 0.78 0.89 0.34 0.55
1523/258RPV-L 0.52 0.86 0.33 0.53
Luminance limitation
Parabolic louvres with luminances limi-
ted to L 200 cd/m2 at reference
angle 65 were found effective
when lighting areas with normal DSE
usage.
219
152
Accessories
Ceiling node A 03 D Node with wire suspension Node with pendant

1 piece, for up to four con- A 03 S suspension A 03 P/500
nections, angles continuously 1 piece, consisting of: 1 piece, consisting of:
adjustable between 90 and 1 node as described in 1 node as described in
270. Die-cast aluminium, A 03 D, A 03 D,
white. 1 steel wire, 2.0 mm, for 1 steel pendant rod, white,
suspension lengths of up 13 mm, 500 mm long,
Ceiling rose 05900 A* to 1.5 m, with vernier clip, to be
(not illustrated), 1 piece, for 1 ceiling fixing unit. shortened on site,
the connection of the mains 1 plastic ceiling trim cap,
cable in case of ceiling out- Feeding tube white.
lets. (not illustrated) 1 piece,
End-cap adapter 05220 KAE End-cap white, 10 mm, to be
1 piece, die-cast aluminium, adapter including trunking shortened.
white, for the connection of closure for the integrated 05000 ZR 1 m, in combina-
continuous-line luminaires ceiling trunking, for surface- tion with 05000 SN,
152 with nodes A 03, mounted luminaires 05000 ZR/2m 2 m, in com-
with 5-conductor through- 1522L. bination with 05000 SN/2m
wiring set 1.5 mm2. or A 03 S with 05900 AN.
05230 KA End-cap adapter
for suspended luminaires Ceiling rose 05900 AN*
1523L. (not illustrated), as 05900 A,
but suitable to receive the
ceiling fixing unit of A 03 S.
2428 mm
90
45 90
7285 mm
Ordering example: Ceiling bracket system Wire suspension* Pendant suspension

Geometrical arrangement 6 luminaires 05000 B* 1 piece, for suspended lumi- 05000 P*
according to the draft 1523/158 RPV-L E 1 piece, to mount suspended naires, consisting of: 1 piece, consisting of:
above with 6 luminaires 6 end-cap adapters luminaires with a drop of 1 ceiling fixing bracket, 1 ceiling fixing bracket,
1523/158 RPV-L E, wire 05230 KA 150 mm from the ceiling, 1 steel wire, 1.0 mm, 1 steel pendant rod, white,
suspensions and 3-conductor 6 counter-balance weights consisting of: 2 luminaire fixing clamps, 13 mm, for suspension
through-wiring set. 05000 A3 1 distance bracket, chrome, 1 ceiling trim cap, white. lengths of up to 0.5 m,
4 nodes with wire suspen- 1 ceiling fixing bracket, 05000 SN for suspension with vernier clip, to be
sions A 03 S 2 luminaire fixing clamps, lengths of up to 1.0 m. shortened on site,
3 wire suspensions 1 ceiling trim cap, white. 05000 SN/2m for suspen- 1 ceiling trim cap, white.
05000 SN sion lengths of up to 2.0 m.
1 ceiling rose 05900 AN Wiring connection unit
1 feeding tube 05000 ZR 05000 ESBN* Feeding tube is described
5 through-wiring sets 1 set, for mains feeding for above.
3700/3LV/58 05000 B and 05000 SN.
220
Overhead reflectors PLEXIGLAS Offset secondary
1 piece, sheet steel, white. prismatic cover reflectors
Easy attachment to su- 1 piece, to be attached with- 1 piece, solvent-free powder-
spended luminaires by out tools. To protect the coated sheet steel. Devel-
means of screw connection. lamp and the optical system oped in order to stabilise
DR Closed version. For of suspended luminaires ceiling illuminances. Soft
purely downward, direct light against unnecessarily rapid illumination is achieved by
distribution. degradation. precisely calculated perfora-
DG Perforated version. To tions with a varying size
increase the direct compo- 05230 P/36 for luminaires depending on their position.
nent and reduce the indirect 1523/36. This accessory for individual
component. 05230 P/58 for luminaires luminaires 1523 is designed
05230 DR/36 for 1523/58. for use in conjunction with Balanced luminance
1523/36. the 05000 SN wire suspen- transition
05230 DR/58 for sions. The perforated reflectors
1523/58. allow precise control of the
05230 DG/36 for 05230 SER/36 for illuminance projected from the
152336. suspended luminaires upper surface of the luminaire:
05230 DG/58 for 1523/36*. an intelligent and striking
1523/58. solution for soft-lighting.
05230 SER/58 for Fixing by means of 4 fixing
suspended luminaires clamps approx. 50 mm above
1523/58*. the luminaire body on the wire
suspension 05000 SN.
End caps 05230 K End-cap accessories Through-wiring sets Counter-balance weights Safety lighting
1 pair, for front-plane conclu- 05220 KE Heat-resistant, colour-coded 1 piece, necessary for 1-lamp 1522, 1523 series
sion of individual luminaires 1 pair, for front-plane conclu- individual wires 3 x 1.5 mm2. luminaires with conventional luminaires can be equipped
or continuous lines with sion of individual luminaires ballasts or electronic control on site with E14 safety
suspended luminaires 152, or continuous lines with Reference for luminaires gear and 2-lamp luminaires lighting sockets which are
die-cast aluminium, white. surface-mounted luminaires 3700/3LV/36 36 W with electronic control gear simply attached to the louvre.
1522, consisting of: 3700/3LV/58 58 W when fixing to pendant Detailed description and
1 pair of end caps, die-cast suspensions 05000 P or photometrics see page 429.
aluminium, white, node suspensions A 03 S
1 pair of trunking closures, and A 03 P/500. Can be
plastic, white, to finish the fitted without using tools.
integrated ceiling trunking.
Reference for luminaires
05000 A1 1523/136
05000 A2 1523/158
05000 A3 1523/136 E,
1523/158 E
05000 A4 1523/236 E,
1523/258 E
221
1510 1510 surface-mounted T8
louvre luminaires, charac-
terised by their timeless pro-
file design, are the perfect
lighting solution for modern
offices. Computer-calculated
louvre and reflector optics,
spring-tensioned clips and
louvre interchangeability are
just a few of the convincing
characteristics this series
has to offer.
222
RAV RWV RSV RMV RPV/65
Asymmetrical distribution is Designed for even illumina- For high-efficiency illumination Optimised technology ensures Efficient glare-free
one of the most important tion of general surfaces in areas with general public efficient glare-reduced illumi- illumination for office
requirements today. In and utility areas. Uniform, access and non-DSE office nation for office areas and areas, showrooms,
schools, the RAV system has balanced light distribution environments. Narrow/wide- shop premises with limited banks, financial institutions
proven itself to be ideal for with high efficiency. Louvre angle light distribution with DSE usage. Controlled lumi- and all other areas with DSE
board lighting in shops, made of white-coated excellent efficiency due to nance distribution with semi- usage. Controlled luminance
the system excels thanks to aluminium or sheet steel concave-profiled aluminium specular parabolic cross distribution with highly-spec-
directed vertical illuminance. depending on application. cross blades and highly-reflec- blades and side panels made ular parabolic cross blades
tive aluminium side panels. of high-purity anodised alu- and side panels made of high-
minium. purity anodised aluminium.
223
with asymmetrical reflector RAV
or white louvre RWV
Application Reference* Lamps D D1 E1 E2 kg

Schools, offices, entrances W mm
and sales areas. RAV ver- 1510/136 RAV-L 1x36 900 174.5 250 47 4.1
sions particularly recom- 1510/158 RAV-L 1x58 1200 174.5 550 47 5.3
mended for blackboard light- * End caps for individual luminaires or for the completion of continuous lines to be ordered separately.
ing in schools, lighting of
shelves on retail premises,
showrooms and storage
facilities.
Optical system
Direct.
RAV
aluminium, for asymmetrical
light distribution.
RWV

out tools.
Luminaire body
Luminaire body made of
solvent-free powder-coated D D1 D D2
sheet steel, white. White end E
E
E2
E2
caps to be ordered sepa-

205
205
E1 E1
rately.
1249/36W 96 1225/36W
96 1525/58W
1549/58W
14
conventional ballasts.
No. 0022 Data table no. 0022
Luminaires can also be sup- DIN 5040: A40 1 Number of luminaires
plied with electronic control CIBSE BZ: En 300 lx 500 lx
gear, reference suffix E, BZ4 Room height H 2.5 m 3.0 m 2.5 m 3.0 m
20 2.6 3.0 4.3 5.0
e.g. 1510/158 RAV-L E. NBN L 14-002:
30 3.6 4.0 6.1 6.7
BZ5/1.5/BZ4
40 4.6 5.1 7.7 8.4
Area
50 5.6 6.1 9.3 10
A
in m2 60 6.5 7.1 11 12
80 8.3 9.0 14 15
3.06 m 1.1 m 100 10 11 17 18
150 15 15 24 26
0.3
200 19 20 32 33
300 Calculation parameters
400
500 Reflectance values 0.7 / 0.5 / 0.2
600 Light loss factor v 0.8
1.6 m
600
2 Max. luminaire

spacings for
500 g1 = Emin : E 1 : 1.5
400 Transverse spacing centre / centre Xmax = 1.9 h
300
2.7 m 3 Multiplication factor M 4 Photometric

1.1 m
Reference M LB L
direct indirect
DLOR ULOR
1510/136RAV-L 1.53 0.76 0.76 0.00
1510/158RAV-L 1.00 0.77 0.77 0.00

Planning example:
Indications Page Blackboard lighting with 2 luminaires
Continuous-line 1510/158 RAV-L
accessories 225 illuminance distribution (indications in lux)
Through-wiring set 227 Lamp luminous flux: 5200 lm.
Emergency light 428 Light loss factor v = 0.8.
224
Reference* Lamps D D1 E1 E2 kg
W mm
1510/136 RWV-L 1x36 900 174.5 250 47 3.9
1510/158 RWV-L 1x58 1200 174.5 550 47 5.1
1510/236 RWV-L 2x36 900 174.5 250 47 4.7
1510/258 RWV-L 2x58 1200 174.5 550 47 6.1
65d
D D1 D D2
Data table no. 0023
E E
E2
E2
205
205
E1 E1 1 Number of luminaires
En 300 lx 500 lx
1249/36W 96 1225/36W Room height H 2.5 m 3.0 m 2.5 m 3.0 m
96 1525/58W
1549/58W
14 20 2.9 3.3 4.9 5.5
30 4.1 4.5 6.8 7.5
40 5.2 5.6 8.7 9.4
Area
50 6.3 6.8 10 11
A
in m2 60 7.5 8.0 13 14
80 9.7 10 16 17
100 11 13 20 21
150 18 18 29 30
200 23 23 37 38

spacings for
g1 = Emin : E 1 : 1.5
CIBSE BZ: CIBSE BZ:
BZ3 BZ3
Reference M LB L
direct indirect
DLOR ULOR
1510/136RWV-L 1.50 0.66 0.66 0.00
1510/158RWV-L 1.00 0.64 0.64 0.00
1510/236RWV-L 0.81 0.61 0.61 0.00
1510/258RWV-L 0.55 0.58 0.58 0.00
Different equipment same design Continuous-line accessories

Different visual tasks such as technical drawing and usual 01510 K End caps for 1510-L
office activities call for specially adapted illuminance levels. 01510 L Couplings for 1510-L
The 1510 series combines single- and twin-lamp versions 01510 LAS Couplings for
in one luminaire body a perfect solution for different light- 1510RAV-L
ing requirements, in the same architectural design.
225
or semi-specular parabolic louvre RMV
Application Reference* Lamps D D1 E1 E2 kg

Offices, sales areas, show- W mm
rooms and financial institu- 1510/136 RSV-L 1x36 900 174.5 250 47 3.9
tions. 1510/158 RSV-L 1x58 1200 174.5 550 47 5.1
1510/236 RSV-L 2x36 900 174.5 250 47 4.7
Optical system 1510/258 RSV-L 2x58 1200 174.5 550 47 6.1
Direct. * End caps for individual luminaires or for the completion of continuous lines to be ordered separately.
RSV
Semi-specular louvre made
of high-purity anodised alu-
minium. With graduated con-
ceiling, for narrow/wide-
RMV

Louvre can be lowered and D D1 D D2
hung from either side with- E
E
E2
E2
out tools.
205
205
E1 E1
Luminaire body 96 1249/36W

1549/58W
96 1225/36W
1525/58W
14
sheet steel, white. White end
rately.
plug-in connection terminal No. 0024 No. 0024 Data table no. 0024
for mains supply and further DIN 5040: A50 DIN 5040: A50 1 Number of luminaires
wiring for wires up to CIBSE BZ: CIBSE BZ: En 300 lx 500 lx
2.5 mm2, including earth BZ1 BZ1 Room height H 2.5 m 3.0 m 2.5 m 3.0 m
20 2.6 2.9 4.4 4.9
connection terminal. With NBN L 14-002: NBN L 14-002:
30 3.7 4.0 6.1 6.7
BZ2 BZ2
conventional ballasts. Area
40 4.8 5.1 8.0 8.5
50 5.9 6.2 9.8 10
A
in m2 60 6.9 7.4 12 13
Luminaires can also be sup- 80 8.9 9.5 15 16
plied with electronic control 100 11 12 18 19
150 16 17 27 27
gear, reference suffix E, 200 21 22 36 36
e.g. 1510/158 RSV-L E. Calculation parameters
2 Max. luminaire

spacings for
g1 = Emin : E 1 : 1.5

Reference M LB L
direct indirect
DLOR ULOR
1510/136RSV-L 1.51 0.69 0.69 0.00
1510/158RSV-L 1.00 0.67 0.67 0.00
1510/236RSV-L 0.91 0.57 0.57 0.00
1510/258RSV-L 0.62 0.54 0.54 0.00
Continuous-line versions
Indications Page Continuous-line end caps and couplings allow the arrange- Technical information see page 440.
Continuous-line ment of 1510 series luminaires as elegant continuous

accessories 225 lines. The end caps of this series are perfectly adapted to
Through-wiring set 227 the luminaire body.
Emergency light 428
226
W mm
1510/136 RMV-L 1x36 900 174.5 250 47 3.9
1510/158 RMV-L 1x58 1200 174.5 550 47 5.1
1510/236 RMV-L 2x36 900 174.5 250 47 4.7
1510/258 RMV-L 2x58 1200 174.5 550 47 6.1
65d
D D1 D D2
Data table no. 2181
E E
E2
E2
205
205
En 300 lx 500 lx
96 1525/58W
1549/58W
14 20 2.4 2.7 4.0 4.5
30 3.5 3.7 5.8 6.1
40 4.5 4.7 7.4 7.8
Area
50 5.4 5.8 9.1 9.7
A
in m2 60 6.4 6.8 11 11
80 8.4 8.7 14 15
100 10 11 17 18
150 15 16 25 26
200 20 21 34 34

spacings for
g1 = Emin : E 1 : 1.5
CIBSE BZ: CIBSE BZ:
BZ3 BZ3
Reference M LB L
direct indirect
DLOR ULOR
1510/136RMV-L 1.50 0.69 0.69 0.00
1510/158RMV-L 1.00 0.67 0.67 0.00
1510/236RMV-L 0.97 0.54 0.54 0.00
1510/258RMV-L 0.64 0.53 0.53 0.00
Infinite photometrics Through-wiring sets

1510-L continuous-line luminaires can be arranged as 3-conductor (3LV) or 5-conductor wiring (5LV)
continuous lines up to any length, without the interruption 3700/3LV/36 for luminaires /36, 1450 mm long.
caused by luminaire end caps. The appealing combination of 3700/5LV/36 for luminaires /36, 1450 mm long.
optically continuous louvres together with the elegant side 3700/3LV/58 for luminaires /58, 1790 mm long.
profiles of the 1510 luminaire unit creates the impression 3700/5LV/58 for luminaires /58, 1790 mm long.
of endless luminaire rows. 07690/5LV/25m for luminaires 36, /58, 25 m long.
227
with highly-specular parabolic louvre RPV
Application
mended for areas with nor-
mal DSE usage.
Optical system
Direct.
louvre. Fully compliant to
angle 65. Louvre made
of anodised aluminium with a

out tools.
Luminaire body
sheet steel, white. White end
rately.

e.g. 1510/158 RPV-L E.
Continuous-line accessories Safety lighting

Indications Page 01510 K End caps for 1510-L 1510 series luminaires can be equipped on site with
Continuous-line 01510 L Couplings for 1510-L E14 safety lighting sockets which are simply attached to the
accessories 225 01510 LAS Couplings for louvre. Detailed description and photometrics see page 429.
Through-wiring set 227 1510RAV-L
Emergency light 428
228
W mm
1510/136 RPV-L 1x36 900 174.5 250 47 3.9
1510/158 RPV-L 1x58 1200 174.5 550 47 5.1
1510/236 RPV-L 2x36 900 174.5 250 47 4.7
1510/258 RPV-L 2x58 1200 174.5 550 47 6.1
65d
D D1 D D2
Data table no. 0025
E E
E2
E2
205
205
En 300 lx 500 lx
96 1525/58W
1549/58W
14 20 2.6 2.9 4.4 4.9
30 3.6 4.0 6.1 6.7
40 4.7 5.0 7.9 8.4
Area
50 5.7 6.1 9.6 10
A
in m2 60 6.8 7.2 11 13
80 8.7 9.3 15 16
100 10 11 18 19
150 16 17 26 27
200 21 21 34 35

spacings for
g1 = Emin : E 1 : 1.5
CIBSE BZ: CIBSE BZ:
BZ3 BZ3
Reference M LB L
direct indirect
DLOR ULOR
1510/136RPV-L 1.53 0.69 0.69 0.00
1510/158RPV-L 1.00 0.68 0.68 0.00
1510/236RPV-L 0.96 0.55 0.55 0.54
25 25
1510/258RPV-L 0.63 0.54 0.55 0.54

65 65
Integrated reflector technology Luminance limitation

Lateral reflectors of the louvres reach Luminaires 1510/136 RPV-L and 1510/158 RPV-L convince
up to the luminaire ceiling. Mounting with luminances limited to L 200 cd/m2 at reference angle
and demounting costs can be consider- 65.
ably reduced because additional over-
head reflectors are not required.
229
Recessed TRILUX recessed louvre
luminaires do not only offer
louvre excellent photometrics, they
are also available in versions
luminaires suitable for mounting in
almost all common ceiling
systems.
In addition to series for the

tried-and-tested T8 fluores-
cent lamps, innovative sys-
tems for efficient T5 lamps
are available as well. With
slender optics and architec-
turally appearing luminaire
surfaces they offer a wide
planning scope for rooms
with suspended ceilings.
230
368, 369 390, 391 136, 236 362 Lighting systems for
Slender louvre optics for T5 The T5 series 390, 391 The T8 series 136, 236 This T5 series offers flexibility air conditioning
lamps and luminaire body convinces with slender are conceived for system in case of suspended system The TRILUX luminaire range
surfaces in a perforated louvre optics and abundant ceilings in module 600 or ceilings in module 300/600 also includes recessed louvre
design are typical charac- recess-mounting options. 625 mm as well as for cut- or 312.5/625 mm. Mounting luminaires for air conditioning.
teristics of this series for Space-saving and architec- out recess openings. The in cut-out openings is possible The necessary information on
system ceilings in mod- turally attractive lighting luminaire range with practice- as well. More information photometrics, air conditioning
ule 312.5/625 mm or solutions can be realised oriented louvres is success- can be found in the section as well as acoustic data are
300/600 mm and cut-out thanks to the markedly fully completed by luminaire Universal recessed and collected in a corresponding
recess openings. slender luminaire bodies. versions with covers. surface-mounted luminaires. catalogue, available upon
request.
231
Overview
Recessed louvre luminaires
Louvre versions Ceilings with concealed grids
TRILUX recessed louvre

luminaires do not only shine
out thanks to excellent
photometrics but also offer
compatibility with almost all
standard modular ceiling
systems.
Universal assembly is the RPV Module/mm

watchword. TRILUX recessed RWV RWX RSV RMV RSX RPX PST OA PA 185 300 600 312.5 625
louvre luminaires offer 65 65
tried-and-tested solutions
to different ceilings.
Reference Page Page Page Page Page Page Page Page Page
1361 Louvre lumin- 1361/236 248 250 252 254 257 |

aires universally suitable for 1361/258 248 250 252 254 257 |
ceilings in module 300/600 1361/318 249 251 253 255 257 |
with concealed or exposed
grids as well as for ceilings 1361/418 249 251 253 255 257 |
with cut-out recess openings.
1360/136 248 250 252 254 256 256 |
1360/2360 1360/158 248 250 252 254 256 256 |
360 Louvre luminaires 2360/236 248 250 252 254 257 257 |
universally suitable for ceilings 2360/258 248 250 252 254 257 257 |
in module 185/312.5/625
2360/318 249 251 253 255 257 257 |
with concealed or exposed
grids as well as for ceilings 2360/418 249 251 253 255 257 257 |
3604 PST/2x24 E 143 |
368 Louvre luminaires
universally suitable for ceil- 3681/28 E 234 236 238 240 242 |
ings in module 312.5/625
with concealed or exposed 3681/35 E 234 236 238 240 242 |
grids as well as for ceilings 3682/28 E 234 236 238 240 242 |
with cut-out recess openings. 3682/35 E 234 236 238 240 242 |
3683/14 E 235 237 239 241 243 |
369 Louvre lumi-
naires universally suitable for
ceilings in module 300/600 3691/28 E 234 236 238 240 242 |
with concealed or exposed 3691/35 E 234 236 238 240 242 |
grids as well as for ceilings 3692/28 E 234 236 238 240 242 |
3692/35 E 234 236 238 240 242 |
390, 391 3693/14 E 235 237 239 241 243 |
Louvre luminaires universally 3694/14 E 235 237 239 241 243 |
suitable for ceilings with
concealed or exposed grids
3901/28, 541 244 245 246 247
(390 in longitudinal module
625 mm, 391 in longitudinal 3902/28, 541 244 245 246 247
module 300/600 mm) as
well as for ceilings with 3911/28, 542 244 245 246 247
cut-out recess openings.
3911/35, 49, 803 244 245 246 247
3912/28, 542 244 245 246 247
3912/35, 49, 803 244 245 246 247
1
Luminaire length suitable for module 625 mm.
2
3
232
Ceilings with exposed grids Ceilings with cut-out recess openings
Module/mm Ceiling opening/mm

185 300 600 312.5 625
| 1180x278
| 1480x278
| 580x580
| 580x580
| 1226x165
| 1526x165
| 1226x291
| 1526x291
| 605x605
| 605x605
| 605x605
| 1230x292
| 1530x292
| 1230x292
| 1530x292
| 605x605
| 1180x280
| 1480x280
| 1180x280
| 1480x280
| 580x580
| 580x580
1226x85
1226x165
1180x85
1480x85
1180x165
1480x165
233
Recessed luminaires
with white louvre RWV,
Application Reference Lamps Module Recess kg Reference Lamps Module Recess kg

Offices, sales areas and W mm opening/mm W mm opening/mm
showrooms. 3681 D-RWV/28 E 1x28 312.5 1230x292 5.1 3682 D-RWV/28 E 2x28 312.5 1230x292 5.0
3681 D-RWV/35 E 1x35 312.5 1530x292 6.2 3682 D-RWV/35 E 2x35 312.5 1530x292 6.0
Universal luminaire system 3691 D-RWV/28 E 1x28 300 1180x280 4.8 3692 D-RWV/28 E 2x28 300 1180x280 4.7
for ceilings with concealed 3691 D-RWV/35 E 1x35 300 1480x280 5.8 3692 D-RWV/35 E 2x35 300 1480x280 5.7
or exposed grids and for
ceilings with cut-out recess
openings.
368 for module
312.5/625 mm;
369 for module
300/600 mm.
Optical system
white, for a uniform light
distribution.

out tools.
Luminaire body
sheet steel, white. Lateral
decor cover in perforated
design. With front-plane
knock-out openings for heat-
resistant through-wiring.
for connection. With 5-pole,
14 E with 3-pole plug-in
connection terminal for wires
up to 2.5 mm2, including
earth connection terminal.
With electronic control
gear (E).
No. 2084 No. 2084
ence suffix ED,
e.g. 3681 D-RWV/28 ED.
T5 CIBSE BZ:
BZ2/1/BZ3
NBN L 14-002:
BZ3
T5 CIBSE BZ:
BZ2/1/BZ3
NBN L 14-002:
BZ3
T5 fluorescent lamps LIGHTGATE

Indications Page T5 fluorescent lamps with a diameter LIGHTGATE stands for an energy-saving lighting manage-
Fixing accessories 258 reduced to 16 mm enable compact ment system preferably used with TRILUX luminaires
Through-wiring set 258 dimensions of the optical systems and equipped with dimmable electronic control gear. LIGHTGATE
Lighting management the luminaire sections. embodies an individual, manually operated lighting control
system 431 and a daylight-dependent regulation with integrated pres-
Lamp characteristics 444 ence detection, see page 431.
234
Reference Lamps Module Recess kg Reference Lamps Module Recess kg
W mm opening/mm W mm opening/mm
3683 D-RWV/14 E 3x14 625 605x605 5.1 3694 D-RWV/14 E 4x14 600 580x580 4.6
3693 D-RWV/14 E 3x14 600 580x580 4.8
652d
Data table no. 2084

En 300 lx 500 lx
20 4.0 4.5 6.7 7.5
30 5.6 6.1 9.4 10
40 7.1 7.7 12 13
Area
50 8.7 9.4 14 16
A
in m2 60 10 11 17 18
80 13 14 22 23
100 16 17 27 28
150 23 24 39 41
200 31 32 51 53
T5 T5

g1 = Emin : E 1 : 1.5
CIBSE BZ: CIBSE BZ:
BZ2/1/BZ3 BZ2/1/BZ3 Transverse spacing centre / centre Xmax = 2.0 h
BZ3 BZ3
Reference M LB L
direct indirect
DLOR ULOR
3681 D-RWV/28 E 1.26 0.72 0.72 0.00
3681 D-RWV/35 E 1.00 0.72 0.72 0.00
3682 D-RWV/28 E 0.65 0.70 0.70 0.00
3682 D-RWV/35 E 0.52 0.70 0.70 0.00
3683 D-RWV/14 E 0.90 0.72 0.72 0.00
3691 D-RWV/28 E 1.26 0.72 0.72 0.00
3691 D-RWV/35 E 1.00 0.72 0.72 0.00
3692 D-RWV/28 E 0.65 0.70 0.70 0.00
3692 D-RWV/35 E 0.52 0.70 0.70 0.00
3693 D-RWV/14 E 0.90 0.72 0.72 0.00
3694 D-RWV/14 E 0.68 0.72 0.72 0.00
Spring-tensioned contact clips Perforated design

This tried-and-tested TRILUX security 368/369 recessed louvre luminaires are equally con-
lock minimises mounting and mainte- vincing when it comes to architectural aspects. The visible
nance costs and automatically provides luminaire body in perforated design allows for perfect adap-
earth continuity. The clip cannot be tation to surrounding ceilings with the common structural
seen when the louvre is in place, and acoustic surfaces.
235
Recessed luminaires
with specular hybrid louvre RWX,

showrooms. 3681 D-RWX/28 E 1x28 312.5 1230x292 5.1 3682 D-RWX/28 E 2x28 312.5 1230x292 5.0
3681 D-RWX/35 E 1x35 312.5 1530x292 6.2 3682 D-RWX/35 E 2x35 312.5 1530x292 6.0
Universal luminaire system 3691 D-RWX/28 E 1x28 300 1180x280 4.8 3692 D-RWX/28 E 2x28 300 1180x280 4.7
for ceilings with concealed 3691 D-RWX/35 E 1x35 300 1480x280 5.8 3692 D-RWX/35 E 2x35 300 1480x280 5.7
openings.
368 for module
312.5/625 mm;
369 for module
300/600 mm.
Optical system
ciency.

out tools.
Luminaire body
up to 2.5 mm2, including No. 2085 No. 2085
earth connection terminal. DIN 5040: A50 DIN 5040: A50
gear (E).

T5 CIBSE BZ:
BZ1
NBN L 14-002:
BZ2
T5 CIBSE BZ:
BZ1
NBN L 14-002:
BZ2

ence suffix ED,
e.g. 3681 D-RWX/35 ED.
RWX louvre Increased efficiency

Indications Page RWX louvres stand for photometric effi- The perfect combination of RWX louvres with optimised
Fixing accessories 258 ciency, thanks to a striking combination photometrics and efficient electronic control gear operation
Through-wiring set 258 of white-coated aluminium cross blades helps to realise economic lighting solutions. Especially in
Lighting management and specular side panels made of areas where the lighting installations are switched on for
system 431 reflection-intensified aluminium. longer periods, e.g. in sales areas and showrooms, this
Lamp characteristics 444 allows for benefits in moneys worth.
236
3683 D-RWX/14 E 3x14 625 605x605 5.1 3694 D-RWX/14 E 4x14 600 580x580 4.6
3693 D-RWX/14 E 3x14 600 580x580 4.8
652d
Data table no. 2085

En 300 lx 500 lx
20 3.5 3.9 5.8 6.5
30 4.9 5.3 8.2 8.8
40 6.2 6.6 10 11
Area
50 7.6 8.2 13 14
A
in m2 60 8.9 9.5 15 16
80 12 12 20 20
100 14 15 24 25
150 21 22 35 36
200 28 28 46 47
T5 T5

g1 = Emin : E 1 : 1.5
CIBSE BZ: CIBSE BZ:
BZ2 BZ2
Reference M LB L
direct indirect
DLOR ULOR
3681 D-RWX/28 E 1.26 0.79 0.79 0.00
3681 D-RWX/35 E 1.00 0.79 0.79 0.00
3682 D-RWX/28 E 0.65 0.77 0.77 0.00
3682 D-RWX/35 E 0.51 0.77 0.77 0.00
3683 D-RWX/14 E 0.90 0.79 0.79 0.00
3691 D-RWX/28 E 1.26 0.79 0.79 0.00
3691 D-RWX/35 E 1.00 0.79 0.79 0.00
3692 D-RWX/28 E 0.65 0.77 0.77 0.00
3692 D-RWX/35 E 0.51 0.77 0.77 0.00
3693 D-RWX/14 E 0.90 0.79 0.79 0.00
3694 D-RWX/14 E 0.68 0.79 0.79 0.00
Fixing accessories Universal mounting

1 set for recess mounting, see TRILUX recessed luminaires for T5 fluorescent lamps are
page 258. designed for universal utilisation. They can either be mount-
03680/1 for 3681, ed in ceilings with concealed grids using the corresponding
3682, 3691, 3692. mounting accessories, be laid onto the flanges of exposed
03680/3 for 3683. grids or screwed with grids to be provided by the client for
03690/3 for 3693, 3694. ceilings with cut-out openings.
237
Recessed luminaires
with semi-specular cross-blade louvre RSV,

Offices, sales areas, show- W mm opening/mm W mm opening/mm
rooms and financial institu- 3681 D-RSV/28 E 1x28 312.5 1230x292 5.1 3682 D-RSV/28 E 2x28 312.5 1230x292 5.0
tions. 3681 D-RSV/35 E 1x35 312.5 1530x292 6.2 3682 D-RSV/35 E 2x35 312.5 1530x292 6.0
3691 D-RSV/28 E 1x28 300 1180x280 4.8 3692 D-RSV/28 E 2x28 300 1180x280 4.7
Universal luminaire system 3691 D-RSV/35 E 1x35 300 1480x280 5.8 3692 D-RSV/35 E 2x35 300 1480x280 5.7
for ceilings with concealed
openings.
368 for module
312.5/625 mm;
369 for module
300/600 mm.
Optical system

out tools.
Luminaire body
earth connection terminal. No. 2086 No. 2086
With electronic control DIN 5040: A50 DIN 5040: A50
gear (E).

T5 CIBSE BZ:
BZ3
NBN L 14-002:
BZ3/0.8/BZ2
T5 CIBSE BZ:
BZ3
NBN L 14-002:
BZ3/0.8/BZ2
ence suffix ED,

e.g. 3682 D-RSV/28 ED.
RSV louvre Compact design

Indications Page Semi-specular louvres RSV avoid direct Innovative T5 fluorescent lamps with a reduced cross-sec-
Fixing accessories 258 glare, thanks to side panels and grad- tion allow to design compact louvre luminaires. Enter the
Through-wiring set 258 uated concave-profiled cross blades new TRILUX louvres which are specially adapted to these
Lighting management with a cross-section composed of short new light sources.
system 431 parabolic segments.
238
3683 D-RSV/14 E 3x14 625 605x605 5.1 3694 D-RSV/14 E 4x14 600 580x580 4.6
3693 D-RSV/14 E 3x14 600 580x580 4.8
652d
Data table no. 2086

En 300 lx 500 lx
20 4.0 4.5 6.7 7.5
30 5.7 6.1 9.4 10
40 7.2 7.7 12 13
Area
50 8.8 9.4 15 16
A
in m2 60 10 11 17 18
80 14 14 23 24
100 17 17 28 29
150 24 25 40 42
200 32 33 53 54
T5 T5

g1 = Emin : E 1 : 1.5
CIBSE BZ: CIBSE BZ:
BZ3/0.8/BZ2 BZ3/0.8/BZ2
Reference M LB L
direct indirect
DLOR ULOR
3681 D-RSV/28 E 1.26 0.69 0.69 0.00
3681 D-RSV/35 E 1.00 0.69 0.69 0.00
3682 D-RSV/28 E 0.65 0.67 0.67 0.00
3682 D-RSV/35 E 0.52 0.67 0.67 0.00
3683 D-RSV/14 E 0.90 0.69 0.69 0.00
3691 D-RSV/28 E 1.26 0.69 0.69 0.00
3691 D-RSV/35 E 1.00 0.69 0.69 0.00
3692 D-RSV/28 E 0.65 0.67 0.67 0.00
3692 D-RSV/35 E 0.52 0.67 0.67 0.00
3693 D-RSV/14 E 0.90 0.69 0.69 0.00
3694 D-RSV/14 E 0.68 0.69 0.69 0.00
T5 fluorescent lamps Electronic control gear

T5 fluorescent lamps with a diameter TRILUX luminaires equipped with electronic control gear
reduced to 16 mm enable compact shine out thanks to the following characteristics: energy-
dimensions of the optical systems and saving operation, lamp-preserving rapid lamp start, flicker-
the luminaire sections. free light and avoidance of electrode flicker and disturbing
noises. The increased lamp service life allows for benefits
in moneys worth.
239
Recessed luminaires with reflection-intensified,

rooms and financial institu- 3681 D-RSX/28 E 1x28 312.5 1230x292 5.1 3682 D-RSX/28 E 2x28 312.5 1230x292 5.0
tions. Especially recom- 3681 D-RSX/35 E 1x35 312.5 1530x292 6.2 3682 D-RSX/35 E 2x35 312.5 1530x292 6.0
mended for areas with 3691 D-RSX/28 E 1x28 300 1180x280 4.8 3692 D-RSX/28 E 2x28 300 1180x280 4.7
normal DSE usage. 3691 D-RSX/35 E 1x35 300 1480x280 5.8 3692 D-RSX/35 E 2x35 300 1480x280 5.7
Universal luminaire system

openings.
368 for module
312.5/625 mm;
369 for module
300/600 mm.
Optical system
Micro-segmented, semi-
RSX made of reflection-
Fully compliant to CIBSE LG
3, Cat. II, i.e. L 200 cd/m2
at reference angle 60
in the planes C0/C180,
C90/C270 and above 65
all-round.

out tools.
Luminaire body
No. 2087 No. 2087
Electrical connection DIN 5040: A60 DIN 5040: A60
T5 CIBSE BZ:
BZ2/1.5/BZ1
NBN L 14-002:
BZ2/0.8/BZ1
T5 CIBSE BZ:
BZ2/1.5/BZ1
NBN L 14-002:
BZ2/0.8/BZ1

gear (E).

ence suffix ED,
e.g. 3682 D-RSX/35 ED.
RSX louvre Perforated design

Indications Page Due to their semi-specular surface, the 368/369 recessed louvre luminaires are equally con-
Fixing accessories 258 parabolic RSX louvres with a defined vincing when it comes to architectural aspects. The visible
Through-wiring set 258 luminance limitation above 65 have a luminaire body in perforated design allows for perfect adap-
Lighting management distinctive uniform appearance and tation to surrounding ceilings with the common structural
system 431 thus allow to create a particularly and acoustic surfaces.
Lamp characteristics 444 pleasant illumination.
240
3683 D-RSX/14 E 3x14 625 605x605 5.1 3694 D-RSX/14 E 4x14 600 580x580 4.6
3693 D-RSX/14 E 3x14 600 580x580 4.8
652d
Data table no. 2087

En 300 lx 500 lx
20 3.1 3.4 5.1 5.7
30 4.4 4.7 7.4 7.8
40 5.7 5.9 9.5 9.9
Area
50 6.9 7.4 12 12
A
in m2 60 8.1 8.6 14 14
80 11 11 18 19
100 13 14 22 22
150 19 20 32 33
200 26 26 43 44
T5 T5

g1 = Emin : E 1 : 1.5
CIBSE BZ: CIBSE BZ:
BZ2/0.8/BZ1 BZ2/0.8/BZ1
Reference M LB L
direct indirect
DLOR ULOR
3681 D-RSX/28 E 1.26 0.83 0.83 0.00
3681 D-RSX/35 E 1.00 0.83 0.83 0.00
3682 D-RSX/28 E 0.65 0.81 0.81 0.00
3682 D-RSX/35 E 0.51 0.81 0.81 0.00
3683 D-RSX/14 E 0.90 0.83 0.83 0.00
3691 D-RSX/28 E 1.26 0.83 0.83 0.00
3691 D-RSX/35 E 1.00 0.83 0.83 0.00
3692 D-RSX/28 E 0.65 0.81 0.81 0.00
3692 D-RSX/35 E 0.51 0.81 0.81 0.00
3693 D-RSX/14 E 0.90 0.83 0.83 0.00
3694 D-RSX/14 E 0.68 0.83 0.83 0.00
Luminance limitation
Louvres with luminances limited to L 200 cd/m2 above 60
in the principal longitudinal and transversal planes are effec-
tive when lighting rooms with DSE workstations. A corre-
sponding requirement at international level is the compliance
to all-round luminance limitation (L 200 cd/m2 above 65).
RPX and RSX louvres meet both requirements.
241

rooms and financial institu- 3681 D-RPX/28 E 1x28 312.5 1230x292 5.1 3682 D-RPX/28 E 2x28 312.5 1230x292 5.0
tions. Especially recom- 3681 D-RPX/35 E 1x35 312.5 1530x292 6.2 3682 D-RPX/35 E 2x35 312.5 1530x292 6.0
mended for areas with 3691 D-RPX/28 E 1x28 300 1180x280 4.8 3692 D-RPX/28 E 2x28 300 1180x280 4.7
normal DSE usage. 3691 D-RPX/35 E 1x35 300 1480x280 5.8 3692 D-RPX/35 E 2x35 300 1480x280 5.7

openings.
368 for module
312.5/625 mm;
369 for module
300/600 mm.
Optical system

out tools.
Luminaire body
Luminaires supplied ready DIN 5040: A60 DIN 5040: A60
T5 CIBSE BZ:
BZ2/1.5/BZ1
NBN L 14-002:
BZ2/0.8/BZ1
T5 CIBSE BZ:
BZ2/1.5/BZ1
NBN L 14-002:
BZ2/0.8/BZ1

gear (E).

ence suffix ED,
e.g. 3681 D-RPX/35 ED.
RPX louvre T5 fluorescent lamps

Indications Page Highly-specular, reflection-intensified T5 fluorescent lamps with a diameter
Fixing accessories 258 parabolic louvres RPX convince thanks reduced to 16 mm enable compact
Through-wiring set 258 to all-round luminance limitation, high dimensions of the optical systems and
Lighting management working efficiencies and compact the luminaire sections.
system 431 dimensions.
242
3683 D-RPX/14 E 3x14 625 605x605 5.1 3694 D-RPX/14 E 4x14 600 580x580 4.6
3693 D-RPX/14 E 3x14 600 580x580 4.8
652d
Data table no. 2088

En 300 lx 500 lx
20 3.1 3.4 5.1 5.7
30 4.4 4.7 7.4 7.8
40 5.7 5.9 9.5 9.9
Area
50 6.9 7.4 12 12
A
in m2 60 8.1 8.6 14 14
80 11 11 18 19
100 13 14 22 22
150 19 20 32 33
200 26 26 43 44
T5 T5

g1 = Emin : E 1 : 1.5
CIBSE BZ: CIBSE BZ:
BZ2/3/BZ1/4/BZ1 BZ2/3/BZ1/4/BZ1 Transverse spacing centre / centre Xmax = 1.5 h
BZ2/1/BZ1 BZ2/1/BZ1
Reference M LB L
direct indirect
DLOR ULOR
3681 D-RPX/28 E 1.26 0.83 0.83 0.00
3681 D-RPX/35 E 1.00 0.83 0.83 0.00
3682 D-RPX/28 E 0.65 0.81 0.81 0.00
3682 D-RPX/35 E 0.51 0.81 0.81 0.00
3683 D-RPX/14 E 0.90 0.83 0.83 0.00
3691 D-RPX/28 E 1.26 0.83 0.83 0.00
3691 D-RPX/35 E 1.00 0.83 0.83 0.00
3692 D-RPX/28 E 0.65 0.81 0.81 0.00
3692 D-RPX/35 E 0.51 0.81 0.81 0.00
3693 D-RPX/14 E 0.90 0.83 0.83 0.00
3694 D-RPX/14 E 0.68 0.83 0.83 0.00
Luminance limitation Reflection intensification

Louvres with luminances limited to L 200 cd/m2 above 60 The surface of RPX and RSX louvres is
in the principal longitudinal and transversal planes are effec- characterised by a system of anodised
tive when lighting rooms with DSE workstations. A corre- layers, applied to high-purity aluminium,
sponding requirement at international level is the compliance with an anodising thickness orientated
to all-round luminance limitation (L 200 cd/m2 above 65). around the half wavelength (/2) of the
RPX and RSX louvres meet both requirements. visible light.
243
Recessed luminaires with specular hybrid louvre RWX
or semi-specular cross-blade louvre RSV,

showrooms. RSV also rec- 3901 RWX/28 E 1x28 107 91x1230 3.6 3902 RWX/28 E 2x28 187 171x1230 5.6
ommended for financial 3901 RWX/54 E 1x54 107 91x1230 3.6 3902 RWX/54 E 2x54 187 171x1230 5.6
institutions. 3911 RWX/28 E 1x28 107 91x1180 3.4 3912 RWX/28 E 2x28 187 171x1180 5.4
3911 RWX/35 E 1x35 107 91x1480 4.1 3912 RWX/35 E 2x35 187 171x1480 6.1
Universal luminaire system 3911 RWX/49 E 1x49 107 91x1480 4.1 3912 RWX/49 E 2x49 187 171x1480 6.1
3911 RWX/54 E 1x54 107 91x1180 3.4 3912 RWX/54 E 2x54 187 171x1180 5.4
3911 RWX/80 E 1x80 107 91x1480 4.1 3912 RWX/80 E 2x80 187 171x1480 6.1
openings.
390 for 625 mm systems,
module = 107 mm (3901) or
187 mm (3902);
391 for 600 mm systems
(35, 49, 80 for
300 mm systems), module =
107 mm (3911) or 187 mm
(3912).
Optical system
RWX
ciency.
RSV

out tools.
No. 2226 No. 2226
Luminaire body DIN 5040: A50 DIN 5040: A50
sheet steel, white, elegant
design with markedly slender
shape. With front-plane
knock-out openings for
T5 CIBSE BZ:
BZ1
NBN L 14-002:
BZ2
T5 CIBSE BZ:
BZ1
NBN L 14-002:
BZ2
heat-resistant through-
wiring.

ence suffix ED,
e.g. 3901 RWX/28 ED. T5 fluorescent lamps Translucent luminaire diffuser
T5 fluorescent lamps with a diameter 390, 391 series luminaires are
reduced to 16 mm enable compact available upon request with diffusers
Indications Page dimensions of the optical systems and made of translucent PLEXIGLAS with
Fixing accessories 259 the luminaire sections. internal channel prisms and high trans-
Through-wiring set 259 mission degree.
244
3901 RSV/28 E 1x28 107 91x1230 3.6 3902 RSV/28 E 2x28 187 171x1230 5.6
3901 RSV/54 E 1x54 107 91x1230 3.6 3902 RSV/54 E 2x54 187 171x1230 5.6
3911 RSV/28 E 1x28 107 91x1180 3.4 3912 RSV/28 E 2x28 187 171x1180 5.4
3911 RSV/35 E 1x35 107 91x1480 4.1 3912 RSV/35 E 2x35 187 171x1480 6.1
3911 RSV/49 E 1x49 107 91x1480 4.1 3912 RSV/49 E 2x49 187 171x1480 6.1
3911 RSV/54 E 1x54 107 91x1180 3.4 3912 RSV/54 E 2x54 187 171x1180 5.4
3911 RSV/80 E 1x80 107 91x1480 4.1 3912 RSV/80 E 2x80 187 171x1480 6.1
652d

En 300 lx 500 lx En 300 lx 500 lx
20 3.3 3.7 5.5 6.2 20 3.8 4.3 6.4 7.1
30 4.7 5.1 7.9 8.4 30 5.4 5.8 9.0 9.7
40 6.1 6.4 10 11 40 6.9 7.3 12 12
Area Area
50 7.4 7.9 13 13 50 8.4 9.0 14 15
A A
in m2 60 8.7 9.3 15 16 in m2 60 9.8 11 16 18
80 12 12 19 20 80 13 14 22 22
100 14 15 23 24 100 16 16 26 27
150 20 21 35 36 150 23 24 38 40
200 27 27 45 46 200 30 31 51 52
T5 C 0 - C 180 Data table Height of the working plane e 0.85 m Height of the working plane e 0.85 m
DIN 5040: A50 2 Max. luminaire spacings for 2 Max. luminaire spacings for
T5

g1 = Emin : E 1 : 1.5 g1 = Emin : E 1 : 1.5
CIBSE BZ:
BZ3 Transverse spacing centre / centre Xmax = 1.6 h Transverse spacing centre / centre Xmax = 1.7 h
NBN L 14-002: h = Luminaire height above working plane h = Luminaire height above working plane
BZ3/0.8/BZ2
DLOR ULOR DLOR ULOR
3901 RWX/28 E 1.27 0.79 0.79 0.00 3901 RSV/28 E 1.27 0.71 0.71 0.00
3901 RWX/54 E 0.77 0.76 0.76 0.00 3901 RSV/54 E 0.77 0.69 0.69 0.00
3902 RWX/28 E 0.65 0.77 0.77 0.00 3902 RSV/28 E 0.65 0.69 0.69 0.00
3902 RWX/54 E 0.39 0.74 0.76 0.00 3902 RSV/54 E 0.39 0.67 0.67 0.00
3911 RWX/28 E 1.27 0.79 0.79 0.00 3911 RSV/28 E 1.27 0.71 0.71 0.00
3911 RWX/35 E 1.00 0.79 0.79 0.00 3911 RSV/35 E 1.00 0.71 0.71 0.00
3911 RWX/49 E 0.78 0.78 0.78 0.00 3911 RSV/49 E 0.78 0.70 0.70 0.00
3911 RWX/54 E 0.77 0.76 0.76 0.00 3911 RSV/54 E 0.77 0.69 0.69 0.00
3911 RWX/80 E 0.58 0.75 0.75 0.00 3911 RSV/80 E 0.57 0.67 0.67 0.00
3912 RWX/28 E 0.65 0.77 0.77 0.00 3912 RSV/28 E 0.65 0.69 0.69 0.00
3912 RWX/35 E 0.51 0.77 0.77 0.00 3912 RSV/35 E 0.51 0.69 0.69 0.00
3912 RWX/49 E 0.40 0.76 0.76 0.00 3912 RSV/49 E 0.40 0.68 0.68 0.00
3912 RWX/54 E 0.39 0.74 0.74 0.00 3912 RSV/54 E 0.39 0.67 0.67 0.00
3912 RWX/80 E 0.29 0.73 0.73 0.00 3912 RSV/80 E 0.29 0.65 0.65 0.00
Rapid-mounting swivel brackets

Louvre luminaires can be easily and
quickly mounted in ceilings with con-
cealed grids by means of the rapid-
mounting swivel bracket 370/1N.
245
rooms and financial institu- 3901 RSX/28 E 1x28 107 91x1230 3.6 3902 RSX/28 E 2x28 187 171x1230 5.6
tions. Especially recom- 3901 RSX/54 E 1x54 107 91x1230 3.6 3902 RSX/54 E 2x54 187 171x1230 5.6
mended for areas with 3911 RSX/28 E 1x28 107 91x1180 3.4 3912 RSX/28 E 2x28 187 171x1180 5.4
normal DSE usage. 3911 RSX/35 E 1x35 107 91x1480 4.1 3912 RSX/35 E 2x35 187 171x1480 6.1
3911 RSX/49 E 1x49 107 91x1480 4.1 3912 RSX/49 E 2x49 187 171x1480 6.1
3911 RSX/54 E 1x54 107 91x1180 3.4 3912 RSX/54 E 2x54 187 171x1180 5.4
3911 RSX/80 E 1x80 107 91x1480 4.1 3912 RSX/80 E 2x80 187 171x1480 6.1
openings.
390 for 625 mm systems,
module = 107 mm (3901) or
187 mm (3902);
391 for 600 mm systems
(35, 49, 80 for
300 mm systems), module =
107 mm (3911) or 187 mm
(3912).
Optical system
Fully compliant to
65 all-round.
RSX semi-specular,

out tools.
Luminaire body
sheet steel, white, elegant No. 2229 No. 2229
design with markedly slender DIN 5040: A60 DIN 5040: A60
shape. With front-plane
wiring.
T5 CIBSE BZ:
BZ2/1.5/BZ1
NBN L 14-002:
BZ2/0.8/BZ1
T5 CIBSE BZ:
BZ2/1.5/BZ1
NBN L 14-002:
BZ2/0.8/BZ1

ence suffix ED,
e.g. 3901 RPX/54 ED.
T5 fluorescent lamps Reflection intensification

T5 fluorescent lamps with a diameter The surface of RPX and RSX louvres is
reduced to 16 mm enable compact characterised by a system of anodised
Indications Page dimensions of the optical systems and layers, applied to high-purity aluminium,
Fixing accessories 259 the luminaire sections. with an anodising thickness orientated
Through-wiring set 259 around the half wavelength (/2) of the
Lamp characteristics 444 visible light.
246
3901 RPX/28 E 1x28 107 91x1230 3.6 3902 RPX/28 E 2x28 187 171x1230 5.6
3901 RPX/54 E 1x54 107 91x1230 3.6 3902 RPX/54 E 2x54 187 171x1230 5.6
3911 RPX/28 E 1x28 107 91x1180 3.4 3912 RPX/28 E 2x28 187 171x1180 5.4
3911 RPX/35 E 1x35 107 91x1480 4.1 3912 RPX/35 E 2x35 187 171x1480 6.1
3911 RPX/49 E 1x49 107 91x1480 4.1 3912 RPX/49 E 2x49 187 171x1480 6.1
3911 RPX/54 E 1x54 107 91x1180 3.4 3912 RPX/54 E 2x54 187 171x1180 5.4
3911 RPX/80 E 1x80 107 91x1480 4.1 3912 RPX/80 E 2x80 187 171x1480 6.1
652d

En 300 lx 500 lx En 300 lx 500 lx
20 3.2 3.6 5.4 6.0 20 3.2 3.6 5.4 6.0
30 4.6 4.9 7.7 8.2 30 4.6 4.9 7.7 8.2
40 5.9 6.2 9.8 10 40 5.9 6.2 9.8 10
Area Area
50 7.1 7.6 12 13 50 7.1 7.6 12 13
A A
in m2 60 8.3 8.9 14 15 in m2 60 8.3 8.9 14 15
80 11 12 18 19 80 11 12 18 19
100 14 14 23 23 100 14 14 23 23
150 20 20 33 34 150 20 20 33 34
200 26 27 44 45 200 26 27 44 45
T5 C 0 - C 180 Data table Height of the working plane e 0.85 m Height of the working plane e 0.85 m
DIN 5040: A60 2 Max. luminaire spacings for 2 Max. luminaire spacings for
T5

g1 = Emin : E 1 : 1.5 g1 = Emin : E 1 : 1.5
CIBSE BZ:
BZ2/1.5/BZ1 Transverse spacing centre / centre Xmax = 1.7 h Transverse spacing centre / centre Xmax = 1.7 h
NBN L 14-002: h = Luminaire height above working plane h = Luminaire height above working plane
BZ2/0.8/BZ1
DLOR ULOR DLOR ULOR
3901 RSX/28 E 1.27 0.82 0.82 0.00 3901 RPX/28 E 1.27 0.82 0.82 0.00
3901 RSX/54 E 0.77 0.79 0.79 0.00 3901 RPX/54 E 0.77 0.79 0.79 0.00
3902 RSX/28 E 0.65 0.80 0.80 0.00 3902 RPX/28 E 0.65 0.80 0.80 0.00
3902 RSX/54 E 0.39 0.77 0.77 0.00 3902 RPX/54 E 0.39 0.77 0.77 0.00
3911 RSX/28 E 1.27 0.82 0.82 0.00 3911 RPX/28 E 1.27 0.82 0.82 0.00
3911 RSX/35 E 1.00 0.82 0.82 0.00 3911 RPX/35 E 1.00 0.82 0.82 0.00
3911 RSX/49 E 0.78 0.80 0.80 0.00 3911 RPX/49 E 0.78 0.80 0.80 0.00
3911 RSX/54 E 0.77 0.79 0.79 0.00 3911 RPX/54 E 0.77 0.79 0.79 0.00
3911 RSX/80 E 0.58 0.75 0.75 0.00 3911 RPX/80 E 0.58 0.75 0.75 0.00
3912 RSX/28 E 0.65 0.80 0.80 0.00 3912 RPX/28 E 0.65 0.80 0.80 0.00
3912 RSX/35 E 0.51 0.80 0.80 0.00 3912 RPX/35 E 0.51 0.80 0.80 0.00
3912 RSX/49 E 0.40 0.78 0.78 0.00 3912 RPX/49 E 0.40 0.78 0.78 0.00
3912 RSX/54 E 0.39 0.77 0.78 0.00 3912 RPX/54 E 0.39 0.77 0.78 0.00
3912 RSX/80 E 0.29 0.73 0.73 0.00 3912 RPX/80 E 0.29 0.73 0.73 0.00
Continuous-line versions
390, 391 series luminaires are
also available upon request as versions
for continuous-line mounting with opti-
cally continuous louvres.
247
Recessed luminaires

showrooms. 1360/136 RWV 1x36 185 1226x165 5.4 2360/236 RWV 2x36 312.5 1226x291 7.2
1360/158 RWV 1x58 185 1526x165 6.4 2360/258 RWV 2x58 312.5 1526x291 9.6
Universal luminaire system 1361/236 RWV 2x36 300 1180x278 7.2
for ceilings with concealed 1361/258 RWV 2x58 300 1480x278 9.6
openings.
1360, 2360 for mod-
ule 185/312.5/625 mm.
1361 for module
300/600 mm.
Optical system
White aluminium louvre RWV
for a uniform light distribu-
tion.

out tools.
Luminaire body
Luminaire body made of sol-
vent-free powder-coated
sheet steel, white. 136,
158, 236, 258,
with front-plane knock-out
openings for heat-resistant
through-wiring.
318, 418 with
No. 0012 No. 0012
plied with electronic control CIBSE BZ: CIBSE BZ:
gear, reference suffix E, BZ2/2.5/BZ3 BZ2/3/BZ3
e.g. 1361/236 RWV E. NBN L 14-002: NBN L 14-002:
BZ3 BZ3
Electronic control gear Spring-tensioned contact clips

Modern lighting installations benefit This tried-and-tested TRILUX security
Indications Page from electronic control gear: higher lock minimises mounting and mainte-
Fixing accessories 259 luminous efficacy, longer lamp service nance costs and automatically provides
Through-wiring set 259 life, reduced energy consumption and earth continuity. The clip cannot be
Emergency light 429 improved thermal characteristics. seen when the louvre is in place,
Lamp characteristics 444 improving the overall appearance.
248
2360/318 RWV 3x18 625 605x605 7.1 1361/318 RWV 3x18 600 580x580 6.7
2360/418 RWV 4x18 625 605x605 7.4 1361/418 RWV 4x18 600 580x580 7.0
65d
Data table no. 0012

En 300 lx 500 lx
20 2.9 3.2 4.8 5.4
30 4.0 4.4 6.7 7.3
40 5.1 5.5 8.5 9.2
Area
50 6.2 6.7 10 11
A
in m2 60 7.2 7.8 12 13
80 9.4 9.9 16 17
100 12 12 20 20
150 17 17 28 29
200 22 23 37 38

spacings for
g1 = Emin : E 1 : 1.5
CIBSE BZ: CIBSE BZ:
BZ4/1.25/BZ BZ4/1.25/BZ
Reference M LB L
direct indirect
DLOR ULOR
1360/136 RWV 1.51 0.66 0.66 0.00
1360/158 RWV 1.00 0.64 0.64 0.00
1361/236 RWV 0.78 0.63 0.63 0.00
1361/258 RWV 0.53 0.60 0.60 0.00
1361/318 RWV 1.20 0.68 0.68 0.00
1361/418 RWV 0.97 0.63 0.63 0.00
2360/236 RWV 0.78 0.63 0.63 0.00
2360/258 RWV 0.53 0.60 0.60 0.00
2360/318 RWV 1.20 0.68 0.68 0.00
2360/418 RWV 0.97 0.63 0.63 0.00
Emergency light inserts

Louvre luminaires can be equipped with
special E14 emergency light sockets.
Both incandescent lamps and compact
fluorescent lamps with integrated elec-
tronic control gear can serve as light
source. See page 429.
249
Recessed luminaires

rooms and financial institu- 1360/136 RSV 1x36 185 1226x165 5.4 2360/236 RSV 2x36 312.5 1226x291 7.2
tions. 1360/158 RSV 1x58 185 1526x165 6.4 2360/258 RSV 2x58 312.5 1526x291 9.6
1361/236 RSV 2x36 300 1180x278 7.2
Universal luminaire system 1361/258 RSV 2x58 300 1480x278 9.6
openings.
1360, 2360 for mod-
ule 185/312.5/625 mm.
1361 for module
300/600 mm.
Optical system
Semi-specular louvre RSV for
tribution. With graduated
blades to reduce the lumi-
nance contrasts between
luminaire and ceiling. Louvre
aluminium.

out tools.
Luminaire body
158, 236, 258,
through-wiring.
for connection. With 5-pole, No. 0013 No. 0013
318, 418 with DIN 5040: A50 DIN 5040: A50
3-pole plug-in connection CIBSE BZ: CIBSE BZ:
terminal for wires up to BZ2/1.25/BZ BZ1
2.5 mm2, including earth NBN L 14-002: NBN L 14-002:
BZ2 BZ2

e.g. 1361/236 RSV E.
Ceiling systems Spring-tensioned contact clips

TRILUX recessed luminaires 1360/2360 and 1361 This tried-and-tested TRILUX security
Indications Page are designed for universal utilisation. They can either be lock minimises mounting and mainte-
Fixing accessories 259 mounted in ceilings with concealed grids using the corre- nance costs and automatically provides
Through-wiring set 259 sponding mounting accessories, laid onto the flanges of earth continuity. The clip cannot be
Emergency light 429 exposed grids or screwed with grids to be provided by the seen when the louvre is in place,
Lamp characteristics 444 client for ceilings with cut-out openings. improving the overall appearance.
250
2360/318 RSV 3x18 625 605x605 7.1 1361/318 RSV 3x18 600 580x580 6.7
2360/418 RSV 4x18 625 605x605 7.4 1361/418 RSV 4x18 600 580x580 7.0
65d
Data table no. 0013

En 300 lx 500 lx
20 2.6 2.9 4.3 4.8
30 3.7 3.9 6.1 6.6
40 4.7 5.0 7.8 8.3
Area
50 5.7 6.1 9.5 10
A
in m2 60 6.7 7.1 11 12
80 8.7 9.1 15 15
100 11 11 18 19
150 16 16 26 27
200 21 21 34 35

spacings for
g1 = Emin : E 1 : 1.5
CIBSE BZ: CIBSE BZ:
BZ3 BZ3
Reference M LB L
direct indirect
DLOR ULOR
1360/136 RSV 1.51 0.69 0.69 0.00
1360/158 RSV 1.00 0.67 0.67 0.00
1361/236 RSV 0.76 0.68 0.68 0.00
1361/258 RSV 0.52 0.65 0.65 0.00
1361/318 RSV 1.24 0.69 0.69 0.00
1361/418 RSV 0.98 0.66 0.66 0.00
2360/236 RSV 0.76 0.68 0.68 0.00
2360/258 RSV 0.52 0.65 0.65 0.00
2360/318 RSV 1.24 0.69 0.69 0.00
2360/418 RSV 0.98 0.66 0.66 0.00
RSV louvre
Semi-specular louvres RSV avoid direct
glare, thanks to side panels and grad-
uated concave-profiled cross blades
with a cross-section composed of short
parabolic segments.
251
Recessed luminaires

rooms and financial institu- 1360/136 RMV 1x36 185 1226x165 5.4 2360/236 RMV 2x36 312.5 1226x291 7.2
tions. 1360/158 RMV 1x58 185 1526x165 6.4 2360/258 RMV 2x58 312.5 1526x291 9.6
1361/236 RMV 2x36 300 1180x278 7.2
Universal luminaire system 1361/258 RMV 2x58 300 1480x278 9.6
openings.
1360, 2360 for mod-
ule 185/312.5/625 mm.
1361 for module
300/600 mm.
Optical system
vre RMV. High visual comfort

out tools.
Luminaire body
158, 236, 258,
through-wiring.
for connection. With 5-pole, No. 0014 No. 0014
318, 418 with DIN 5040: A60 DIN 5040: A50
3-pole plug-in connection CIBSE BZ: CIBSE BZ:
terminal for wires up to BZ1 BZ1
2.5 mm2, including earth NBN L 14-002: NBN L 14-002:
BZ2/0.8/BZ1 BZ2/1.25/BZ1

e.g. 1361/236 RMV E.
Parabolic louvre RMV Single battery systems 545/2G7

The semi-specular anodised surface of for stand-by switching, consisting of
Indications Page the parabolic louvre RMV creates a nice one socket 2G7 for compact fluores-
Fixing accessories 259 uniform louvre appearance, thus cent lamps TC-EL 11 W. For detailed
Through-wiring set 259 increasing the visual comfort. information see page 429.
Emergency light 429
252
2360/318 RMV 3x18 625 605x605 7.1 1361/318 RMV 3x18 600 580x580 6.7
2360/418 RMV 4x18 625 605x605 7.4 1361/418 RMV 4x18 600 580x580 7.0
65d
Data table no. 0014

En 300 lx 500 lx
20 2.6 3.0 4.4 4.9
30 3.7 4.0 6.2 6.7
40 4.7 5.0 7.9 8.4
Area
50 5.7 6.2 9.6 10
A
in m2 60 6.7 7.2 11 12
80 8.8 9.2 15 15
100 11 11 18 19
150 16 16 26 27
200 21 21 35 36

spacings for
g1 = Emin : E 1 : 1.5
CIBSE BZ: CIBSE BZ:
BZ2 BZ2
Reference M LB L
direct indirect
DLOR ULOR
1360/136 RMV 1.49 0.69 0.69 0.00
1360/158 RMV 1.00 0.66 0.66 0.00
1361/236 RMV 0.78 0.66 0.66 0.00
1361/258 RMV 0.52 0.64 0.64 0.00
1361/318 RMV 1.30 0.68 0.68 0.00
1361/418 RMV 0.93 0.69 0.69 0.00
2360/236 RMV 0.78 0.66 0.66 0.00
2360/258 RMV 0.52 0.64 0.64 0.00
2360/318 RMV 1.30 0.68 0.68 0.00
2360/418 RMV 0.93 0.69 0.69 0.00
Rapid-mounting swivel brackets

Louvre luminaires can be easily and
quickly mounted in ceilings with con-
cealed grids by means of the rapid-
mounting swivel bracket 370/1N.
253
Recessed luminaires

rooms and financial institu- 1360/136 RPV 1x36 185 1226x165 5.4 2360/236 RPV 2x36 312.5 1226x291 7.2
tions. Especially recom- 1360/158 RPV 1x58 185 1526x165 6.4 2360/258 RPV 2x58 312.5 1526x291 9.6
mended for areas with 1361/236 RPV 2x36 300 1180x278 7.2
normal DSE usage. 1361/258 RPV 2x58 300 1480x278 9.6

openings.
1360, 2360 for mod-
ule 185/312.5/625 mm.
1361 for module
300/600 mm.
Optical system
louvre RPV. Luminance limit-
ed to L 200 cd/m2 at ref-
erence angle 65, thus
corresponding fully to LG 3,
Cat. II. Louvre made of an-
face purity of 99.98 %.

out tools.
Luminaire body
158, 236, 258,
through-wiring.
for connection. With 5-pole, DIN 5040: A50 DIN 5040: A50
318, 418 with CIBSE BZ: CIBSE BZ:
3-pole plug-in connection BZ1 BZ1
terminal for wires up to NBN L 14-002: NBN L 14-002:
BZ2 BZ2/1.25/BZ1

e.g. 1361/236 RPV E.
Air conditioning Luminance limitation

136/236 series luminaires are also Louvres with luminances limited to L 200 cd/m2 at refer-
Indications Page available in versions for air condition- ence angle 65 were found effective when lighting areas
Fixing accessories 259 ing. A catalogue with all the necessary with normal DSE usage.
Through-wiring set 259 information on photometrics, air condi-
Emergency light 429 tioning as well as acoustic data is avail-
Lamp characteristics 444 able upon request.
254
2360/318 RPV 3x18 625 605x605 7.1 1361/318 RPV 3x18 600 580x580 6.7
2360/418 RPV 4x18 625 605x605 7.4 1361/418 RPV 4x18 600 580x580 7.0
65d
Data table no. 0015

En 300 lx 500 lx
20 2.5 2.7 4.1 4.6
30 3.5 3.7 5.8 6.2
40 4.5 4.7 7.4 7.9
Area
50 5.4 5.8 9.1 9.7
A
in m2 60 6.4 6.8 11 11
80 8.4 8.7 14 15
100 10 11 17 18
150 15 16 25 26
200 20 20 33 34

spacings for
g1 = Emin : E 1 : 1.5
CIBSE BZ: CIBSE BZ:
BZ2 BZ2
Reference M LB L
direct indirect
DLOR ULOR
1360/136 RPV 1.54 0.69 0.69 0.00
1360/158 RPV 1.00 0.68 0.68 0.00
1361/236 RPV 0.80 0.67 0.67 0.00
1361/258 RPV 0.52 0.65 0.65 0.00
1361/318 RPV 1.27 0.69 0.69 0.00
1361/418 RPV 1.02 0.65 0.65 0.00
2360/236 RPV 0.80 0.67 0.67 0.00
2360/258 RPV 0.52 0.65 0.65 0.00
2360/318 RPV 1.27 0.69 0.69 0.00
2360/418 RPV 1.02 0.65 0.65 0.00
Spring-tensioned contact clips

This tried-and-tested TRILUX security
lock minimises mounting and mainte-
nance costs and automatically provides
earth continuity. The clip cannot be
seen when the louvre is in place,
255
Recessed luminaires
with prismatic cover PA
or opal cover OA
Application Reference Lamps Module Recess kg

Sales areas, showrooms, W mm opening/mm
offices, foyers, corridors 1360/136 PA 1x36 185 1226x165 5.7
and production facilities. 1360/158 PA 1x58 185 1526x165 6.7
1360/136 OA 1x36 185 1226x165 5.7
Universal luminaire system 1360/158 OA 1x58 185 1526x165 6.7
openings.
1360, 2360 for mod-
ule 185/312.5/625 mm.
1361 for module
300/600 mm.
Optical system
Cover made of PMMA,
retained by a white-coated
steel frame, can be lowered
and hung from either side.
PA with photometrically
effective prisms to direct the
light primarily onto the work-
ing plane.
OA with opal cover for a
very uniform brightness
impression of the luminaire.
Luminaire body
158, 236, 258,
through-wiring.
318, 418 with
connection terminal. With No. 0017
conventional ballasts. DIN 5040: A50
CIBSE BZ:
Luminaires can also be sup- BZ2/0.75/BZ3
plied with electronic control NBN L 14-002:
BZ2/0.75/BZ3
e.g. 1361/236 PA E.
Spring-tensioned contact clips Universal luminaires

This tried-and-tested TRILUX security 136/236 series luminaires can be
Indications Page lock minimises mounting and mainte- mounted in most common ceiling con-
Fixing accessories 259 nance costs and automatically provides structions. Detailed mounting indica-
Through-wiring set 259 earth continuity. The clip cannot be tions are featured on page 259.
Emergency light 429 seen when the frame is in place,
Lamp characteristics 444 improving the overall appearance.
256
2360/236 PA 2x36 312.5 1226x291 7.5 2360/318 PA 3x18 625 605x605 7.4
2360/258 PA 2x58 312.5 1526x291 9.9 2360/418 PA 4x18 625 605x605 7.7
1361/236 PA 2x36 300 1180x278 7.5 1361/318 PA 3x18 600 580x580 7.0
1361/258 PA 2x58 300 1480x278 9.9 1361/418 PA 4x18 600 580x580 7.3
2360/236 OA 2x36 312.5 1226x291 7.5 2360/318 OA 3x18 625 605x605 7.4
2360/258 OA 2x58 312.5 1526x291 9.9 2360/418 OA 4x18 625 605x605 7.7
65d
Data table no. 0017

En 300 lx 500 lx
20 3.5 3.9 5.8 6.6
30 4.8 5.3 8.1 8.8
40 6.1 6.7 10 11
Area
50 7.4 8.1 12 13
A
in m2 60 8.6 9.3 14 16
80 11 12 19 20
100 14 15 23 24
150 20 21 33 35
200 26 27 43 45

spacings for
g1 = Emin : E 1 : 1.5
CIBSE BZ: CIBSE BZ:
BZ4 BZ3
Reference M LB L
direct indirect
DLOR ULOR
1360/136 OA 2.16 0.40 0.40 0.00
1360/136 PA 1.47 0.58 0.58 0.00
1360/158 OA 1.53 0.36 0.36 0.00
1360/158 PA 1.00 0.55 0.55 0.00
1361/236 PA 0.72 0.59 0.59 0.00
1361/258 PA 0.50 0.55 0.55 0.00
1361/318 PA 1.10 0.64 0.64 0.00
1361/418 PA 0.88 0.60 0.60 0.00
2360/236 OA 1.06 0.40 0.40 0.00
2360/236 PA 0.72 0.59 0.59 0.00
2360/258 OA 0.72 0.38 0.38 0.00
2360/258 PA 0.50 0.55 0.55 0.00
2360/318 OA 1.40 0.51 0.51 0.00
2360/318 PA 1.10 0.64 0.64 0.00
2360/418 OA 1.37 0.39 0.39 0.00
2360/418 PA 0.88 0.60 0.60 0.00
Covers Opal cover

Opal covers create a particularly uni- The 1361 series is also available with covers in opal
form brightness impression, whereas version, upon request.
prismatic covers stand for increased
efficiency.
257
368, 369
Indications and accessories for recess mounting
Ceilings with The luminaires are fixed by means of acces-

concealed grids sories 03680, 03690.
One set is necessary per luminaire.
The upper flange width of the grids must not

exceed 19 mm.
Ceilings with The luminaires are placed on the flanges of

exposed grids the ceiling grids without the requirement of
fixing accessories. Minimum dimension
between grid flange and concrete ceiling:
300 mm.
In case of lower
ceiling voids between
300 mm and 100 mm
at minimum, mounting
by means of acces-
sories 03680,
03690 is possible.
Ceilings with
cut-out
recess
openings
In case of individual mounting in ceilings with

cut-out openings, the luminaires are screwed
to the lateral ceiling grids at the front planes.
The necessary mounting accessories are
delivered with the luminaires (see upper centre
Accessories illustration).
In case of non-interrupted continuous lines,

the luminaires are mounted by means of
accessories 03680, 03690 fixed to the
grids of the ceiling tiles. One set is necessary
per luminaire (see upper right illustration).
Fixing accessories Through-wiring sets

1 set mounting rails for the mounting of luminaires in system
ceilings with concealed grids or for continuous-line mounting Reference for luminaires
in ceilings with cut-out recess openings. 3700/3LV/36 /28
3700/3LV/58 /35
Reference for luminaires 3700/5LV/36 /28
03680/1 3681, 3682, 3691, 3692 3700/5LV/58 /35
03680/3 3683 07690/5LV/25m /28, /35
03690/3 3693, 3694
258
136, 236
Indications and accessories for recess mounting
Ceilings with The luminaires are optionally fixed by means

concealed grids of rapid-mounting swivel brackets 370/1N
or swivel brackets 370/1. One set of these
fixing accessories is necessary per luminaire.
Maximum distance between lower side of

ceiling tile and upper side of grid: 56 mm or
50 mm (/136, /158). Minimum grid
height: 18 mm.
Ceilings with The luminaires are placed on the flanges of

exposed grids the ceiling grids without the requirement of
fixing accessories. Minimum distance
between grid flange and concrete ceiling:
330 mm.
In case of lower ceiling voids between

330 mm and 110 mm at minimum, mounting
by means of accessories 370/1N or 370/1
is possible.
Ceilings with In case of ceilings with cut-out openings, the

cut-out luminaires are fixed directly to the existing
recess grids of the ceiling tiles by means of screws.
openings The surrounding rim of the luminaire conceals
the saw-cut.
Alternative mounting solution with fixing

accessories 370/1N or 370/1.
Maximum distance between lower side of
ceiling tile and upper side of grid: 56 mm or
50 mm (/136, /158). Minimum grid
height: 18 mm.
Accessories
Rapid-mounting swivel Swivel brackets 370/1 Through-wiring sets

brackets 370/1N 1 set (4 pieces) swivel
1 set (4 pieces) rapid-mount- brackets for fixing of one Reference for luminaires
ing swivel brackets for fixing luminaire. Can be optionally 3700/3LV/36 36 W
of one luminaire. used instead of 370/1N. 3700/3LV/58 58 W
3700/5LV/36 36 W
3700/5LV/58 58 W
07690/5LV/25m 36 W, 58 W
259
Surface-mounted TRILUX diffuser luminaires
allow for extended mainte-
diffuser luminaires nance intervals thanks to
permanent dust protection
of photometrically efficient
system components and
mechanical lamp protection.
In addition, TRILUX diffuser

luminaires are also the per-
fect choice as far as long-
term investment is concerned:
replacement diffusers by 333
way of example are still The 333 series embodies
available 10 years after a IP 50 on the highest techno-
luminaire model is discon- logical level. The series is
tinued. developed for exclusive use
of T5 lamps, is equipped as
standard with Multi-Lamp
electronic control gear and
is available with highly-trans-
lucent diffusers and specular
reflectors.
Page 262
260
330, 331, 332 1330 F 740 654, 664, CENTA-S
Diffuser luminaires are func- This ultra-slim series features 740 circular luminaires 665, 717 748 circular luminaires
tional luminaires. This equa- the appealing trapezium- with opal diffusers in matt These series which are spe- made of impact-resistant
tion is certainly typical, yet shaped design and the tried- surface offer architectural cially designed for mirror polycarbonate are recom-
these luminaires can meet and-tested technical advan- planning scope because the lighting also include luminaires mended in case of increased
design-oriented require- tages of the 33 series. luminaires can be equipped with integrated sockets requirements as to mechani-
ments as well. 33 series The luminaire height of only with decor rings available in and switches. Wall-mounted cal safety. The high degree of
luminaires convince thanks 74 mm assures a harmon- three colours or also with luminaires 7171 in IP 54 are protection IP 65 is assured
to a modern design with a ious adaptation to the built yellow, red, blue and green recommended for damp or for both ceiling and wall
rectangular, square or circu- environment. PLEXIGLAS rings. corrosive environments. mounting.
lar profile frame.
261
Luminaires with opal PLEXIGLAS diffuser,
Application
Offices, sales areas, loun-
ges, showrooms, class-
rooms, corridors and stair-
wells.
for ceiling and wall mount-
ing with accessories also
as recessed luminaires in
cut-out recess openings,
suspension by means of wire
suspensions, or integration
into T200 is also possible.
Versions 14 W and 24 W
also for mounting in gypsum
ceilings.
Optical system
Opal PLEXIGLAS diffuser,
convex, with internal channel
prisms. Sheet steel reflector
with highly-reflective white
coating.
Luminaire body
Sheet steel, contours adapt-
ed to convex diffuser, with
integrated wiring channel for
ing. Plastic end caps, colour-
adapted to luminaire body.
W white-coated,
M silver-grey-coated
with metallic effect.
E
wattages.
ED
With dimmable electronic 3331 series luminaires
control gear with 1-10 V convince as totally conform
interface. recessed and surface-
mounted luminaires. Due to
Thanks to limited surface their convex shape with the
temperatures and IP 50 suit- contour-conform luminaire
able for production sites side parts, the luminaires
subject to fire hazards blend in perfectly with the
caused by dust and fibrous surrounding ceiling surfaces.
substance. In case of surface mounting
the optically surrounding
shadow gap provides an
appealing appearance.
Indications Page
Fixing accessories 273
Suspensions 273
Continuous-line coupling 273 Multi-Lamp electronic control gear
Trunking mounting 273 The innovative T5 series 333 convin-
Lighting management ces with a striking new feature: the
system 431 electronic control gear units in Multi-
Multi-Lamp electronic Lamp technology used in this series
control gear 436 allow operation of T5 lamps in different
262
Reference Lamps Recess kg Reference Lamps Recess kg
W opening/mm W opening/mm
3331 W/14/24 E 1x14/24 572x190 2.4 3331 M/14/24 E 1x14/24 572x190 2.4
3331 W/28/54 E 1x28/54 1172x190 4.2 3331 M/28/54 E 1x28/54 1172x190 4.2
3331 W/35/49/80 E 1x35/49/80 1472x190 4.9 3331 M/35/49/80 E 1x35/49/80 1472x190 4.9
3331 W/14 ED 1x14 572x190 2.4 3331 M/14 ED 1x14 572x190 2.4
3331 W/24 ED 1x24 572x190 2.4 3331 M/24 ED 1x24 572x190 2.4
3331 W/28 ED 1x28 1172x190 4.2 3331 M/28 ED 1x28 1172x190 4.2
3331 W/35 ED 1x35 1472x190 4.9 3331 M/35 ED 1x35 1472x190 4.9
3331 W/49 ED 1x49 1472x190 4.9 3331 M/49 ED 1x49 1472x190 4.9
3331 W/54 ED 1x54 1172x190 4.2 3331 M/54 ED 1x54 1172x190 4.2
3331 W/80 ED 1x80 1472x190 4.9 3331 M/80 ED 1x80 1472x190 4.9
652do
Data table no. 2094

En 300 lx 500 lx
20 4.2 4.8 6.9 7.9
30 5.7 6.4 9.6 11
40 7.2 7.9 12 13
Area
50 8.7 9.6 15 16
A
in m2 60 10 11 17 19
80 13 14 22 24
100 16 17 27 28
150 23 24 38 41
200 30 32 50 53
T5 T5

g1 = Emin : E 1 : 1.5
CIBSE BZ: CIBSE BZ:
BZ5 BZ5
Reference M LB L
direct indirect
DLOR ULOR
3331 M/14 2.75 0.78 0.75 0.03
3331 M/24 1.87 0.74 0.71 0.03
3331 M/28 1.27 0.78 0.75 0.03
3331 M/35 1.00 0.78 0.75 0.03
3331 M/49 0.78 0.77 0.73 0.03
3331 M/54 0.78 0.74 0.71 0.03
3331 M/80 0.60 0.70 0.67 0.03
3331 W/14 2.75 0.78 0.75 0.03
3331 W/24 1.87 0.74 0.71 0.03
3331 W/28 1.27 0.78 0.75 0.03
3331 W/35 1.00 0.78 0.75 0.03
3331 W/49 0.78 0.77 0.73 0.03
3331 W/54 0.78 0.74 0.71 0.03
3331 W/80 0.60 0.70 0.67 0.03
LIGHTGATE
The energy-saving lighting manage-
ment system LIGHTGATE embodies an
individual, manually operated lighting
control and a daylight-dependent regu-
lation with integrated presence detec-
tion. Description see page 431.
263
Luminaires with translucent PLEXIGLAS diffuser,
Application Reference Lamps Recess kg Reference Lamps Recess kg

Offices, sales areas, loun- W opening/mm W opening/mm
ges, showrooms, class- 3331 W-TS/14/24 E 1x14/24 572x190 2.0 3331 M-TS/14/24 E 1x14/24 572x190 2.0
rooms, corridors and stair- 3331 W-TS/28/54 E 1x28/54 1172x190 3.4 3331 M-TS/28/54 E 1x28/54 1172x190 3.4
wells. TA for lighting verti- 3331 W-TS/35/49/80 E 1x35/49/80 1472x190 4.0 3331 M-TS/35/49/80 E 1x35/49/80 1472x190 4.0
cal surfaces. 3331 W-TS/14 ED 1x14 572x190 2.0 3331 M-TS/14 ED 1x14 572x190 2.0
3331 W-TS/24 ED 1x24 572x190 2.0 3331 M-TS/24 ED 1x24 572x190 2.0
3331 W-TS/28 ED 1x28 1172x190 3.4 3331 M-TS/28 ED 1x28 1172x190 3.4
for ceiling and wall mount-
3331 W-TS/35 ED 1x35 1472x190 4.0 3331 M-TS/35 ED 1x35 1472x190 4.0
ing with accessories also
as recessed luminaires in 3331 W-TS/49 ED 1x49 1472x190 4.0 3331 M-TS/49 ED 1x49 1472x190 4.0
cut-out recess openings, 3331 W-TS/54 ED 1x54 1172x190 3.4 3331 M-TS/54 ED 1x54 1172x190 3.4
suspension by means of wire 3331 W-TS/80 ED 1x80 1472x190 4.0 3331 M-TS/80 ED 1x80 1472x190 4.0
suspensions, or integration
into T200 is also possible.
Versions 14 W and 24 W
also for mounting in gypsum
ceilings.
Optical system
Translucent PLEXIGLAS dif-
fuser, convex, with internal
channel prisms, transmission
degree > 80 %. Internal
highly-specular reflector,
reflection-intensified.
TS symmetrical,
TA asymmetrical.
Luminaire body
Sheet steel, contours adapt-
ed to convex diffuser, with
integrated wiring channel for
ing. Plastic end caps, colour-
adapted to luminaire body.
W white-coated,
M silver-grey-coated
with metallic effect.
for mains supply and further No. 2095 No. 2095
wiring for wires up to DIN 5040: A40 DIN 5040: A40
E
T5 CIBSE BZ:
BZ4/0.75/BZ5
NBN L 14-002:
BZ5
T5 CIBSE BZ:
BZ4/0.75/BZ5
NBN L 14-002:
BZ5

wattages.
ED
interface.
Thanks to limited surface

temperatures and IP 50 suit-
able for production sites
subject to fire hazards
caused by dust and fibrous
substance.
Indications Page
Fixing accessories 273
Suspensions 273
Continuous-line coupling 273 Multi-Lamp electronic control gear Tubular track system T200
Trunking mounting 273 The innovative T5 series 333 convin- Special fixing accessories allow the
Lighting management ces with a striking new feature: the integration of colour-adapted luminaires
system 431 electronic control gear units in Multi- 3331 M into the tubular track system
Multi-Lamp electronic Lamp technology used in this series T200. A detailed description of the
control gear 436 allow operation of T5 lamps in different T200 system is featured on page 74.
264
3331 W-TA/49/80 E 1x49/80 1472x190 4.0 3331 M-TA/49/80 E 1x49/80 1472x190 4.0
3331 W-TA/49 ED 1x49 1472x190 4.0 3331 M-TA/49 ED 1x49 1472x190 4.0
3331 W-TA/80 ED 1x80 1472x190 4.0 3331 M-TA/80 ED 1x80 1472x190 4.0
652do
Data table no. 2095

En 300 lx 500 lx
20 3.6 4.1 5.9 6.8
30 4.9 5.5 8.2 9.1
40 6.2 6.8 10 11
Area
50 7.5 8.2 13 14
A
in m2 60 8.7 9.5 15 16
80 11 12 19 20
100 14 15 23 24
150 20 21 33 35
200 26 27 43 45
T5 T5

g1 = Emin : E 1 : 1.5
CIBSE BZ: CIBSE BZ:
BZ5/0.75/BZ4/1/BZ5 BZ5/0.75/BZ4/1/BZ5 Transverse spacing centre / centre Xmax = 2.1 h
BZ5 BZ5
Reference M LB L
direct indirect
DLOR ULOR
3331 M-TS/14 2.75 0.90 0.87 0.04
3331 M-TS/24 1.87 0.86 0.82 0.04
3331 M-TS/28 1.27 0.90 0.87 0.04
3331 M-TS/35 1.00 0.90 0.87 0.04
3331 M-TS/49 0.78 0.89 0.85 0.04
3331 M-TS/54 0.78 0.86 0.82 0.04
3331 M-TS/80 0.60 0.82 0.78 0.03
3331 M-TA/49 0.85 0.81 0.79 0.02
3331 M-TA/80 0.60 0.81 0.79 0.02
3331 W-TS/14 2.75 0.90 0.87 0.04
3331 W-TS/24 1.87 0.86 0.82 0.04
3331 W-TS/28 1.27 0.90 0.87 0.04
3331 W-TS/35 1.00 0.90 0.87 0.04
3331 W-TS/49 0.78 0.89 0.85 0.04
3331 W-TS/54 0.78 0.86 0.82 0.04
3331 W-TS/80 0.60 0.82 0.78 0.03
3331 W-TA/49 0.85 0.81 0.79 0.02
3331 W-TA/80 0.60 0.81 0.79 0.02
Asymmetrical light distribution Continuous-line coupling

The asymmetrical aluminium reflector in combination with The option of external wiring passage
translucent prismatic diffusers allows to realise increased on the ceiling of surface-mounted lumi-
illuminances on vertical surfaces. Luminaires of the 3331 naires can be used for wiring of non-
series in TA version are thus predestined for efficient black- interrupted continuous lines. Special
board and shelf lighting. couplings assure a defined distance
between the luminaire diffusers.
265
with opal PLEXIGLAS diffuser
Application Reference Lamps D E1 E2 kg Reference Lamps D D1 D2 E1 kg

rooms, lounges and corri- 3302/TC11* 2xTC-S11 220 110 2.5 3302/1x36 1x36 900 193 391 450 5.0
dors. 3302/TC18 2xTC-L18 220 140 10 2.7 3302/1x58 1x58 1200 192 390 600 6.3
* For versions E: E1 = 150 mm, E2 = 25 mm 3302/36 2x36 900 193 391 450 5.6
Optical system 3302/58 2x58 1200 192 390 600 7.7
Opal PLEXIGLAS diffuser in
stylish, fine-grained matt sur-
face. Trapezium-shaped dif-
fuser, made in one piece,
particularly stable and tor-
sionally rigid. Safe retention
of the diffuser by means of
internal spring clips.
Luminaire body
Trapezium-shaped front and
side sections made of sheet
steel, joined together by cor-
ners made of die-cast zinc,
white. Longitudinal version
openings for luminaire cou-
pling with heat-resistant
through-wiring.
3323 C Circular luminaire:
sheet steel, circular, white,
surrounded by a profiled
frame.
for connection. Longitudinal
version with 5-pole, other
versions with 3-pole plug-in
With low-loss ballasts.

TC C 0 - C 180 Data table T8 C 0 - C 180 Data table
e.g. 3302/36 E. No. 2098 (page 274) No. 2096
DIN 5040: B30 DIN 5040: B30
Thanks to limited surface CIBSE BZ: CIBSE BZ:
temperatures and IP 50, ver- BZ5 BZ5
sions E are suitable for NBN L 14-002: NBN L 14-002:
BZ5 BZ5
production sites subject to
fire hazards caused by dust
and fibrous substance.
Indications Page Exact fixing Unaltered appearance

Suspensions 274 Ageing- and heat-resistant lamp sup- Different visual tasks call for corresponding lumen pack-
Luminaire coupling 274 ports made of stainless steel offer ages. The 330 series offers this versatility for single-
Through-wiring set 275 ideal, durable positioning of compact and twin-lamp versions in the same luminaire body width.
Trunking 426 fluorescent lamps with a single-ended
Emergency light 428 socket and a small cross-section.
266
Reference Lamps D E1 kg Reference Lamps D E1 E2 kg
W mm W mm
3323 C/TC11 3xTC-S11 396 198 3.5 3313/TC24 3xTC-L24 300 107 15 5.2
3304/18 4x18 500 250 250 7.9
652d (o
Data table no. 2096

En 300 lx 500 lx
20 3.8 4.4 6.4 7.3
30 5.3 5.9 8.8 9.8
40 6.6 7.3 11 12
Area
50 8.0 8.8 13 15
A
in m2 60 9.3 10 16 17
80 12 13 20 22
100 15 16 24 26
150 21 22 35 37
200 27 29 46 48
TC C 0 - C 180 Data table T8 C 0 - C 180 Data table Height of the working plane e 0.85 m
TC
DIN 5040: A40 DIN 5040: B30 2 Max. luminaire

spacings for
g1 = Emin : E 1 : 1.5
CIBSE BZ: CIBSE BZ:
BZ5 BZ5
Reference M LB L
direct indirect
DLOR ULOR
3302/1x36 1.48 0.60 0.52 0.08
3302/1x58 1.00 0.57 0.50 0.08
3302/36 0.85 0.53 0.46 0.07
3302/58 0.58 0.50 0.43 0.07
3323 C/TC11 1.98 0.56 0.51 0.04
Various equipment options

The 33 series in square version is available in three sizes
with different equipment options: linear fluorescent lamps as
well as compact fluorescent lamps complete the spectrum
adequately.
267
with prismatic PLEXIGLAS diffuser
Application Reference Lamps D E1 E2 kg Reference Lamps D D1 D2 E1 kg

rooms, lounges and corri- 3302 P/TC11* 2xTC-S11 220 110 2.5 3302 PS/1x36 1x36 900 193 391 450 5.0
dors. 3302 P/TC18 2xTC-L18 220 140 10 2.7 3302 PS/1x58 1x58 1200 192 390 600 6.3
PSA recommended for * For versions E: E1 = 150 mm, E2 = 25 mm 3302 PSA/1x58 1x58 1200 192 390 600 6.3
lighting of vertical surfaces. 3302 P/36 2x36 900 193 391 450 5.6
3302 P/58 2x58 1200 192 390 600 7.7
Optical system
Diffuser with photometrically
ing plane. Trapezium-shaped
diffuser made in one piece,
particularly stable and tor-
PS With aluminium reflec-
tor, symmetrical.
PSA With aluminium reflec-
tor, asymmetrical.
Luminaire body
Trapezium-shaped front and
side sections made of sheet
steel, joined together by cor-
ners made of die-cast zinc,
white. Longitudinal version
openings for luminaire cou-
pling with heat-resistant
through-wiring.
3323 C Circular luminaire:
sheet steel, circular, white,
surrounded by a profiled
frame.
for connection. Longitudinal
version with 5-pole, other
versions with 3-pole plug-in
TC C 0 - C 180 Data table T8 C 0 - C 180 Data table
up to 2.5 mm2, including No. 2098 (page 274) No. 2097
earth connection terminal. DIN 5040: A30 DIN 5040: A30
With low-loss ballasts. CIBSE BZ: CIBSE BZ:
BZ/1.25/BZ5 BZ/1.25/BZ5
BZ5 BZ5
e.g. 3302 P/36 E.

temperatures and IP 50, ver-
sions E are suitable for
Indications Page Exact fixing 33 luminaires with prismatic diffusers

Suspensions 274 Ageing- and heat-resistant lamp sup- provide a specific light guiding in preferred directions thanks
Luminaire coupling 274 ports made of stainless steel offer to precise prismatic facets. Especially single-lamp versions
Through-wiring set 275 ideal, durable positioning of compact with internal reflector systems shine out thanks to their high
Trunking 426 fluorescent lamps with a single-ended working efficiencies and good glare limitation.
Emergency light 428 socket and a small cross-section.
268
Reference Lamps D E1 kg Reference Lamps D E1 E2 kg
W mm W mm
3323 C-P/TC11 3xTC-S11 396 198 3.5 3313 P/TC24 3xTC-L24 300 107 15 5.2
3304 P/18 4x18 500 250 250 7.9
652d (o
Data table no. 2097

En 300 lx 500 lx
20 2.8 3.2 4.7 5.4
30 3.9 4.3 6.5 7.2
40 4.9 5.4 8.2 9.0
Area
50 5.9 6.5 9.8 11
A
in m2 60 6.9 7.5 12 13
80 8.9 9.5 15 16
100 11 12 18 19
150 16 16 26 27
200 20 21 34 36
TC C 0 - C 180 Data table T8 C 0 - C 180 Data table Height of the working plane e 0.85 m
TC

spacings for
g1 = Emin : E 1 : 1.5
CIBSE BZ: CIBSE BZ:
BZ4/4/BZ5 BZ4/2/BZ5 Transverse spacing centre / centre Xmax = 2.4 h
BZ4 BZ4/3/BZ5
Reference M LB L
direct indirect
DLOR ULOR
3302 P/36 0.94 0.62 0.56 0.06
3302 P/58 0.63 0.59 0.54 0.05
3302 PS/1x36 1.49 0.78 0.70 0.07
3302 PS/1x58 1.00 0.75 0.68 0.07
3302 PSA/1x58 1.03 0.73 0.68 0.05
3323 C-P/TC11 2.11 0.68 0.64 0.04
Luminaire coupling Various equipment options

Luminaire couplings in contour-conform The 33 series in square version is available in three sizes
design enable wiring passage and dis- with different equipment options: linear fluorescent lamps as
tance fixing in accordance with the well as compact fluorescent lamps complete the spectrum
degree of protection in case of non- adequately.
interrupted continuous lines.
269
with PLEXIGLAS diffuser
Application Reference Lamps D D1 D2 E1 E2 kg Reference Lamps D D1 D2 E1 E2 kg

rooms, lounges and corri- 1330 F/136 O 1x36 900 192 390 450 20 4.3 1330 F/236 O 2x36 900 192 390 450 20 4.9
dors. 1330 F/158 O 1x58 1200 192 390 600 20 5.5 1330 F/258 O 2x58 1200 192 390 600 20 5.8
Optical system
PLEXIGLAS trapezium-
shaped diffuser made in one
piece, particularly stable and
torsionally rigid. Safe reten-
tion by means of internal
spring clips.
O Opal diffuser in stylish,
fine-grained matt surface.
P Diffuser with photometri-
cally effective prisms to
direct the light primarily onto
the working plane.
Luminaire body
sheet steel, white, slim pro-
file. End caps made of
impact-resistant ABS.
With conventional ballasts.

e.g. 1330 F/236 O E.

No. 2173 No. 2173
DIN 5040: B31 DIN 5040: B31
CIBSE BZ: CIBSE BZ:
BZ5 BZ5
NBN L 14-002: NBN L 14-002:
BZ5 BZ5
Slim profile sophisticated photometrics One after another!

Due to an ultra-slim profile with a total height of only 74 mm, TRILUX diffusers are manufactured in
the 1330 F series allows for a harmonious integration to one piece. The result: particularly solid
the built environment. The tried-and-tested photometric corners, easy maintenance, better
qualities of TRILUX diffuser luminaires embodied in a new, appearance and improved longevity.
Indications Page appealing design!
270
Reference Lamps D D1 D2 E1 E2 kg Reference Lamps D D1 D2 E1 E2 kg
W mm W mm
1330 F/136 P 1x36 900 192 390 450 20 4.3 1330 F/236 P 2x36 900 192 390 450 20 4.9
1330 F/158 P 1x58 1200 192 390 600 20 5.5 1330 F/258 P 2x58 1200 192 390 600 20 5.8
652d
Data table no. 2173

En 300 lx 500 lx
20 3.0 3.5 5.1 5.8
30 4.2 4.7 7.0 7.8
40 5.3 5.8 8.8 9.7
Area
50 6.3 7.0 11 12
A
in m2 60 7.4 8.1 12 13
80 9.5 10 16 17
100 12 12 19 21
150 17 18 28 29
200 22 23 36 38
CIBSE BZ: DIN 5040: B30 2 Max. luminaire

spacings for
BZ5 g1 = Emin : E 1 : 1.5
CIBSE BZ:
NBN L 14-002: BZ5 Transverse spacing centre / centre Xmax = 2.4 h
BZ5 Longitudinal spacing centre / centre Ymax = 1.5 h
BZ5
Reference M LB L
direct indirect
DLOR ULOR
1330F/136 O 1.50 0.75 0.63 0.11
1330F/136 P 1.33 0.85 0.74 0.11
1330F/158 O 1.00 0.72 0.61 0.11
1330F/158 P 0.88 0.82 0.72 0.10
1330F/236 O 0.86 0.65 0.55 0.10
1330F/236 P 0.76 0.74 0.65 0.09
1330F/258 O 0.59 0.61 0.51 0.10
1330F/258 P 0.51 0.71 0.62 0.09
Prismatic perfection
TRILUX prismatic diffusers stand for
computer-optimised photometrics, with
thousands of precise elements control-
ling the light by refraction. Use of
high-grade base materials underlines
our devotion to quality and efficiency.
271
333
Accessories
Universal solution
The 333 series is a true
jack-of-all-trades regarding
its mounting possibilities:
the luminaire bodies can be
equally installed to walls or
ceilings. The luminaires can
be surface-mounted, recess-
mounted in cut-out openings
or suspended as individual
or continuous-line luminaires
by means of delicate wire
suspensions. Versions with a
length of almost 600 mm
which can be additionally
mounted in mortar ceilings
or walls by means of recess
frames offer a practice-
oriented lighting solution for
staircases or corridors.
Integration in the innovative

tubular track system T200
is favourable for prestigious
lighting solutions. In this way
333 luminaires can be
easily combined with other
lighting systems, e.g. with
spotlights for accentuation
lighting.
Another option is trunking

mounting, recommended in
case of uneven ceilings or
higher rooms.
The illustrations opposite

show 333 luminaires as
surface-mounted/recessed
luminaires (left photo), as
suspended luminaires (photo
in the middle) and as light
components within the
tubular track system T200
(right photo).
Ordering example Ordering example
Continuous line for Continuous line suspended

ceiling mounting: by wire suspensions:
Continuous line (5 lengths) Continuous line (5 lengths) with
with luminaires luminaires 3331W/35/49/80 E
3331W/35/49/80 E. suspended by wire suspensions.
5 luminaires 5 luminaires
3331 W/35/49/80 E 3331 W/35/49/80 E
4 luminaire couplings 1 pair of wire suspensions
03331 W-L 03331 SE
4 wire suspensions
03331 W-SL
1 wiring connection unit
05000 ESBN
272
Luminaire coupling Fixing accessories 03331 EB Fixing accessories Tubular track system fixing
1 piece, without wiring. For luminaire 1 set, to mount luminaires 3331 03331 ER/600 03331 T200
connection in accordance with the in ceilings with cut-out openings. 1 set, to mount luminaires 1 set, for integration of luminaires
degree of protection and for a defined 3331/14/24 E in mortar surfaces 3331 into the T200 tubular track
distance (60 mm) between the lumi- or walls. system, including connection cable.
naires in case of non-interrupted
continuous lines. Only for surface Detailed description of the T200
mounting system see page 72.
03331 W-L white-coated, for lumi-
naires 3331 W.
03331 M-L silver-grey-coated
with metallic effect, for luminaires
3331 M.
Wire suspension 03331 SE Wire suspension Trunking fixing 03331 TRS Geometrical arrangements
1 pair, for individual luminaires or for 1 piece, for the connection of two 1 set, support brackets and counter- The universal node A 03 offers
continuous-line ends. Steel wires luminaires. Steel wires 1 mm, balance weight to fix luminaires extended planning scope for archi-
1 mm, for suspension lengths of for suspension lengths of up to 1 m, 3331 to trunkings 07690. tecture-enhancing geometrical
up to 1 m, including suspension including luminaire connection A luminaire distance of at least arrangements. It can be easily used
brackets and ceiling caps with element, suspension bracket and 60 mm has to be observed for in case diffuser luminaires 3331
knock-out opening 12 mm, for ceiling cap with knock-out opening trunking mounting. are mounted to trunkings 07690.
sheathed cable* up to 5 x 1.5 mm2. 12 mm, for sheathed cable* up
to 5 x 1.5 mm2. Detailed description of the trunkings
Wiring connection unit 03331 W-SL white-coated, for lumi- 07690 see page 426.
05000 ESBN* naires 3331 W.
1 set, for mains feeding for 03331 03331 M-SL silver-grey-coated
SE, 03331 SL. with metallic effect, for luminaires
* Incoming cables are not supplied. They must be
3331 M.
provided by the contractor.
273
330
Accessories
Data table no. 2098

En 300 lx 500 lx
20 4.8 5.6 8.1 9.3
30 6.7 7.4 11 12
40 8.4 9.3 14 16
Area
50 10 11 17 19
A
in m2 60 12 13 20 22
80 15 16 26 27
100 19 20 31 33
150 27 28 45 47
200 35 37 58 61
2 Max. luminaire

spacings for
g1 = Emin : E 1 : 1.5

Reference M LB L
direct indirect
DLOR ULOR
3302/TC11 2.43 0.52 0.46 0.06
3302/TC18 1.95 0.48 0.43 0.05
3302 P/TC11 1.91 0.66 0.61 0.04
3302 P/TC18 1.59 0.59 0.55 0.04
3304/18 0.79 0.55 0.51 0.04 Luminaire coupling 3300 Wire suspension 03310 SE Wire suspension 03320 SL
3304 P/18 0.63 0.67 0.64 0.03 1 piece, without wiring, for individual 1 pair, complete for an individual lumi- 1 piece, for the connection of two
3313/TC24 1.00 0.42 0.38 0.04
3313 P/TC24 0.78 0.53 0.50 0.03 cables max. 10 x 2.5 mm2. For luminaire naire or for the front planes of continu- luminaires in case of non-interrupted
connection in accordance with the ous lines. continuous lines.
degree of protection and for a defined
distance between the luminaires in Steel wires 1 mm, for suspension Steel wires 1 mm, for suspension
case of non-interrupted continuous lengths of up to 1 m, including suspen- lengths of up to 1 m, including suspen-
lines. sion brackets, luminaire connection ele- sion brackets, luminaire connection ele-
ments and ceiling caps with knock-out ments and ceiling caps with knock-out
opening 12 mm for sheathed cable* opening 12 mm for sheathed cable*
up to 5 x 1.5 mm2. up to 5 x 1.5 mm2.
* Incoming cables are not supplied. They must be provided
by the contractor.
Ordering example:
Continuous line (5 lengths) with
luminaires 3302 P/58.
5 luminaires 3302 P/58
1 pair of pendant suspensions
03330 PE-N
4 pendant suspensions
03340 PL-N
274
Pendant suspension 03330 PE-N Pendant suspension 03340 PL-N Trunkings
1 pair, complete for an individual lumi- 1 piece, for the connection of two lumi- For ceiling mounting and suspended
naire or for the front planes of continu- naires in case of non-interrupted contin- mounting of surface-mounted luminaires.
ous lines. uous lines. Also to be used as wiring channel.
Trunkings made of sheet steel, gal-
Pendant rod, steel, white, 13 mm, Pendant rod, steel, white, 13 mm, vanised, with white polyester coating,
500 mm long, with vernier clip, to be 500 mm long, with vernier clip, to be equipped as standard with stable
shortened on site, including suspension shortened on site, including suspension couplings, galvanised. See page 426.
brackets, luminaire connection elements brackets, luminaire connection elements
and white ceiling caps. and white ceiling caps.
Through-wiring sets
Heat-resistant, colour-coded individual
wires 1.5 mm2, including luminaire
coupling 3300.
3LV 3-conductor through-wiring
Reference for luminaires Length

3300/3LV/36 36 1400 mm
3300/5LV/36 36 1400 mm
3300/3LV/58 58 1700 mm
3300/5LV/58 58 1700 mm
07690/5LV/25m* 25 m
* without luminaire coupling
Safety lighting
330 series luminaires can be
equipped on site with screwed E14
sockets. Detailed description and
photometrics see page 430.
275
Circular surface-mounted luminaires
Application Reference Lamps D E1 E2 kg

Ceiling- and wall-mounted W mm
luminaires for entrance 7401N/TR22 E 1xTR22 90 65 26.5 1.0
areas, corridors, stairwells, 7401N/2xTC9 2xTC-S9 90 100 26.5 1.2
lounges, hotels, restaurants 7401N/2xTCD13 2xTC-D13 90 100 26.5 1.5
and residential areas. 7401N/E27 1x max. 60 90 100 26.5 0.8
Optical system
Opal PLEXIGLAS diffuser
with stylish, fine-grained,
matt surface. Circular diffu-
ser in spherical form, partic-
ularly stable. Safe retention
of the diffuser by means of a
simple bayonet fixing mecha-
nism.
Luminaire body
sheet steel, white. /TC11,
/TC18 with stainless steel
lamp holders for compact
fluorescent lamps. Suitable
for mounting to ceilings and
walls.
/2xTC9, /TC11,
/2xTCF24, /2xTCF36
with 4-pole plug-in connec-
connection terminal. Lumi-
naires for compact fluores-
cent lamps with low-loss bal-
lasts. Luminaires for circular
lamps TR are supplied as
standard with electronic con-
trol gear (E).
Luminaires for compact

fluorescent lamps can also
TR C 0 - C 180 Data table
be supplied with electronic TC No. 2101
control gear, reference TC-F DIN 5040: B31
suffix E, A
CIBSE BZ:
e.g. 7401N/2xTC9 E. BZ6
NBN L 14-002:
BZ6
7401N/E27 for incandes-
cent lamp up to 60 W, with-
out ballast.
PLEXIGLAS coloured decor ring (tool-free installation) Decorative ceiling ring, white
07401 ( 340 mm) for 7401, 07402 ( 440 mm) for Conical ceiling ring made of powder-coated sheet steel,
7402, 07403 ( 560 mm) for 7403. white. Attached to the luminaire body during mounting with-
Blue Green Red Yellow out tools, unified with the luminaire diffuser.
Indications Page 07401 RB 07401 RG 07401 RR 07401 RY 07401 W 349 mm, for 7401N.
Emergency light 428 07402 RB 07402 RG 07402 RR 07402 RY 07402 W 450 mm, for 7402N.
Lamp characteristics 444 07403 RB 07403 RG 07403 RR 07403 RY 07403 W 561 mm, for 7403N.
276
Reference Lamps D E1 E2 kg Reference Lamps D E1 E2 kg
W mm W mm
7402N/1xTCF36 1xTC-F36 220 30 2.2 7403N/1xTR22+40 E 1xTR22+1xTR40 396 77 26.5 2.3
7402N/1xTR40 E 1xTR40 220 110 26.5 1.6 7403N/TC11 3xTC-S11 396 198 3.3
7402N/TC11* 2xTC-S11 220 110 2.1 7403N/2xTCF24 2xTC-F24 396 198 3.7
7402N/TC18* 2xTC-L18 220 110 2.2 7403N/2xTCF36 2xTC-F36 396 198 3.7
7402N/E27 1x max. 60 220 30 1.8
* For versions E: E1 = 13 mm, E2 = 62 mm.
652d
Data table no. 2101

En 100 lx 200 lx
20 2.5 2.9 5.1 5.8
30 3.5 3.9 7.0 7.8
40 4.4 4.9 8.9 9.7
Area
50 5.3 5.9 11 12
A
in m2 60 6.2 6.8 12 14
80 8.0 8.6 16 17
100 9.8 10 20 21
150 14 15 28 30
200 18 19 37 38
TR C 0 - C 180 Data table TR C 0 - C 180 Data table Height of the working plane e 0.85 m
TC TC
TC-F DIN 5040: A30 TC-F DIN 5040: B30 2 Max. luminaire

spacings for
g1 = Emin : E 1 : 1.5
CIBSE BZ: CIBSE BZ:
BZ5 BZ5/2/BZ6/2.5/BZ5
Reference M LB L
direct indirect
DLOR ULOR
7401N/TR22 E 1.21 0.67 0.56 0.11
7401N/2xTC9 1.99 0.62 0.53 0.09
7401N/2xTCD13 1.48 0.55 0.47 0.08
7402N/1xTCF36 0.93 0.56 0.50 0.06
7402N/1xTR40 E 0.72 0.68 0.58 0.10
7402N/TC11 1.33 0.61 0.54 0.07
7402N/TC18 1.00 0.61 0.54 0.07
7403N/2xTCF24 0.71 0.60 0.55 0.06
7403N/2xTCF36 0.45 0.58 0.52 0.06
7403N/1xTR22+40 E 0.51 0.60 0.53 0.07
7403N/TC11 1.07 0.51 0.46 0.04
Decorative ceiling ring, anodised Decorative ceiling ring, titanium-coloured

Conical ceiling ring made of anodised aluminium. Attached Conical ceiling ring made of aluminium, coated in transpar-
to the luminaire body during mounting without tools, unified ent lacquer. Attached to the luminaire body during mounting
with the luminaire diffuser. without tools, unified with the luminaire diffuser.
07401 C 349 mm, for 7401N. 07401 T 349 mm, for 7401N.
07402 C 450 mm, for 7402N. 07402 T 450 mm, for 7402N.
07403 C 561 mm, for 7403N. 07403 T 561 mm, for 7403N.
277
Application Reference Lamps D D1 E1 E2 kg Reference Lamps D D1 E1 E2 kg

Wall-mounted luminaires for W mm W mm
sales areas, corridors and 6651 C/14 E 1x14 500 25 135 27 1.1 6651/14 E 1x14 500 25 135 27 1.1
waiting areas. 6651 C/28 E 1x28 800 25 27 1.8 6651/28 E 1x28 800 25 27 1.8
6651 C-S/14 E 1x14 500 25 135 27 1.1 6651 S/14 E 1x14 500 25 135 27 1.1
Optical system 6651 C-S/28 E 1x28 800 25 27 1.8 6651 S/28 E 1x28 800 25 27 1.8
Opal PLEXIGLAS diffuser
with internal channel prisms,
made in one piece.
Luminaire body
Extruded aluminium, solvent-
free powder-coated, white,
with integrated wiring chan-
nel at the rear for wiring pas-
sage in case of shifted wall
outlet. White-coated end
caps or in version C
chrome-finished end caps.
6651
With optimised length for tile
and mirror dimensions. With
plastic end caps, flat at the
front planes.
6641
With end caps made of
die-cast aluminium, subtly
inclined at the front planes,
S End cap with integrat-

ed rocker switch.
terminal. 6651 supplied as
standard with electronic con-
trol gear (E), 6641 with
low-loss ballasts.
6641 luminaires can also

be supplied with electronic
fix E, e.g. 6641/36 E.
T5 fluorescent lamps Adapted luminaire lengths

Indications Page T5 fluorescent lamps in efficient ver- With a length of 600 mm or 1200 mm, the 6651 series
Wall-mounted sion with a diameter reduced to 16 mm luminaires are perfectly adapted to the tile module 200 mm.
luminaires extend the equipment scope of the The luminaires harmonise with the wider mirror dimensions
with switch 280 66 series wall-mounted luminaires. as well.
with sockets 280
278
Reference Lamps D D1 E1 E2 kg Reference Lamps D D1 E1 E2 kg
W mm W mm
6641 C/18 1x18 550 25 27 1.8 6641/18 1x18 550 25 27 1.8
6641 C/36 1x36 800 25 27 2.5 6641/36 1x36 800 25 27 2.5
6641 C/58 1x58 1000 25 27 3.2 6641/58 1x58 1000 25 27 3.2
652d
Data table no. 2103

En 100 lx 200 lx
20 1.8 2.1 3.6 4.2
30 2.5 2.8 4.9 5.6
40 3.1 3.5 6.2 6.9
Area
50 3.7 4.1 7.4 8.3
A
in m2 60 4.3 4.8 8.6 9.5
80 5.5 6.0 11 12
100 6.6 7.2 13 14
150 9.5 10 19 20
200 12 13 25 26
2 Max. luminaire

spacings for
g1 = Emin : E 1 : 1.5

Reference M LB L
direct indirect
DLOR ULOR
6641/18 2.66 0.69 0.49 0.20
6641/36 1.00 0.74 0.52 0.22
6641/58 0.69 0.70 0.49 0.21
6641 C/18 2.66 0.69 0.49 0.20
6641 C/36 1.00 0.74 0.52 0.22
6641 C/58 0.69 0.70 0.49 0.21
6651/14 E 2.63 0.79 0.56 0.23
6651/28 E 1.18 0.81 0.57 0.24
6651 C/14 E 2.63 0.79 0.56 0.23
6651 C/28 E 1.18 0.81 0.57 0.24
6651 C-S/14 E 2.63 0.79 0.56 0.23
6651 C-S/28 E 1.18 0.81 0.57 0.24
6651 S/14 E 2.63 0.79 0.56 0.23
6651 S/28 E 1.18 0.81 0.57 0.24
End caps
The appearance of the 665 series is
characterised by its functional design
with flat end caps. Aluminium end caps
of the 664 series on the other hand
are subtly inclined and can be optional-
ly equipped with sockets.
279
Application Reference Lamps D D1 E1 E2 IP kg Reference Lamps D D1 E1 E2 IP kg

Wall-mounted luminaires, W mm W mm
optionally available with 6641 C/18 1x18 550 25 27 40 1.8 6641/18 1x18 550 25 27 40 1.8
switch and/or socket. 6641 C/TC18 1xTC-L18 240 25 281 27 40 1.5 6641/TC18 1xTC-L18 240 25 281 27 40 1.5
7171: safety class II.
Optical system
Opal PLEXIGLAS diffuser,
made in one piece.
6641 with internal channel
prisms,
6541 P/18 with clear pris-
matic diffuser.
Luminaire body
6641
Extruded aluminium, solvent- Reference Lamps D D1 E1 E2 IP kg Reference Lamps D D1 E1 E2 IP kg
free powder-coated, white. W mm W mm
White-coated end caps or 6641 C-S/18 1x18 550 25 27 40 1.8 6641 S/18 1x18 550 25 27 40 1.8
in version C chrome- 6641 C-St-S/18 1x18 550 25 27 20 1.9 6641 St-S/18 1x18 550 25 27 20 1.9
finished end caps, made of
die-cast aluminium, subtly
inclined at the front planes.
6541
sheet steel, white.
7171
Glass-fibre reinforced poly-
ester, grey, with internal
reflector made of white poly-
ester, safety class II, pro-
tected against the ingression
of water. Reference Lamps D D1 E1 E2 IP kg Reference Lampen D D1 E1 E2 IP kg
W mm W mm
Equipment 6641 C-St/18 1x18 550 25 27 20 1.9 6641 St/18 1x18 550 25 27 20 1.9
S
With integrated rocker switch.
St
With earthed socket 230 V,
16 A.
St-S
With earthed socket 230 V,
16 A and rocker switch.
Other international socket

types are available on
request.
for connection, with 2-pole
up to 2.5 mm2, 6541,
6641 with additional earth
connection terminal. Ver-
sions St and St-S
with 3-pole connection termi-
nal. 6541, 6641 lumi-
naires can also be supplied
with electronic control gear,
reference suffix E, e.g.
6641 C-St/18 E.
Indications Page
280
Reference Lamps D D1 E1* E2 IP kg Reference Lamps D D1 E1* E2 IP kg
W mm W mm
6541/15 1x15 360 71 205 40 1.1 6541 P/18 1x18 510 72 255 40 1.5
6541/18 1x18 510 72 255 40 1.5 * For version with electronic control gear: E1 = 340 mm
* For version with electronic control gear: /15 E1 = 280 mm, /18 E1 = 340 mm
Reference Lamps D D1 E1* E2 IP kg Reference Lamps D D1 E1* E2 IP kg

W mm W mm
6541 St/18 1x18 510 84 255 20 1.7 6541 St-S/18 1x18 510 84 255 20 1.7
* For version with electronic control gear: E1 = 340 mm * For version with electronic control gear: E1 = 340 mm
65 2d M
7171
SN, St, St-S IP 20
7171 IP 54
Reference Lamps D D1 E1* E2 IP kg Reference Lamps D D1 E1 E2 IP kg

W mm W mm
6541 SN/18 1x18 510 72 255 20 1.5 7171/15 1x15 310 94 250 54 1.5
* For version with electronic control gear: E1 = 340 mm 7171/18 1x18 460 95 230 54 1.9
Short-time operation
The use of electronic starters
leads to reduced start-up
times and to increased lamp
service life. It is therefore
often recommended to
replace glow starters by
electronic starters, e.g. in
bathing areas or sanitary
zones.
281
282
Recessed TRILUX recessed luminaires
diffuser are available for almost all
common ceiling systems.
luminaires
Stable diffusers, reliable
closure mechanisms and
ageing-resistant sealing
guarantee permanent pro-
tection of lamps and optical
systems.
4401 3331 1360/2360 PA/OA

4401 series is specially Universal luminaires 3331 Recessed luminaires with pris-
conceived for integration in for T5 lamps offer in addition matic and opal PLEXIGLAS
strip ceilings in module 100, to numerous other mounting diffusers round off the TRILUX
strip width 84 mm and a possibilities also recess range of recessed diffuser
gap width of 16 mm. Lateral mounting solutions for walls luminaires. Detailed infor-
black profiles made of plas- and ceilings. Detailed information can be found in the
tic assure the optical contin- mation can be found in the section Recessed louvre
uation of the shadow gaps in section Surface-mounted luminaires.
strip ceilings. diffuser luminaires.
283
Recessed luminaires for strip ceilings
with opal or prismatic PLEXIGLAS diffuser
Application
rooms, locker-rooms, e.g. in
sports halls, indoor swim-
ming-pools and covered
exterior areas.
For strip ceilings in module

100, strip width 84 mm, gap
width 16 mm.
Optical system
PLEXIGLAS diffuser made in
one piece, particularly sta-
ble. Safe retention of the dif-
fuser by means of internal
spring clips.
4401 F/ With opal
PLEXIGLAS diffuser.
4401 PF/ With
PLEXIGLAS diffuser with pho-
tometrically effective prisms
to direct the light primarily
onto the working plane.
Luminaire body
sheet steel, white, with later-
al black plastic profiles for
the optical continuation of
the shadow gap. /36,
/58 with front-plane
wiring.
for connection. /18 with
3-pole, /36, /58 with
5-pole connection terminal
terminal. Sealing and
mechanical protection of the
ing by means of two grom-
mets. With low-loss ballasts.

e.g. 4401 PF/36 E.

Shadow gap Fixing accessories

Lateral black plastic profiles assure the Angle sections, 1 set (2 pieces), fully galvanised. To mount
optical continuation of the shadow gaps 4401 luminaires in strip ceilings.
in strip ceilings for a harmonious 832 1266 mm long, for luminaires 4401/18, 4401/36.
Indications Page appearance. 833 1566 mm long, for luminaires 4401/58.
Emergency light 428
284
Reference Lamps Strip ceiling Length kg Reference Lamps Strip ceiling Length kg
W Module mm W Module mm
4401 F/18 1x18 1x100 640 2.9 4401 PF/18 1x18 1x100 640 2.9
4401 F/36 1x36 1x100 1250 4.0 4401 PF/36 1x36 1x100 1250 4.0
4401 F/58 1x58 1x100 1550 5.1 4401 PF/58 1x58 1x100 1550 5.1
652d (o
Data table no. 2106

En 300 lx 500 lx
20 6.0 6.9 10 12
30 8.3 9.2 14 15
40 10 12 17 19
Area
50 13 14 21 23
A
in m2 60 15 16 24 27
80 19 20 32 34
100 23 25 38 41
150 33 35 55 58
200 43 45 72 76

spacings for
g1 = Emin : E 1 : 1.5
CIBSE BZ: CIBSE BZ:
BZ5 BZ3/1/BZ4 Transverse spacing centre / centre Xmax = 2.2 h
BZ5 BZ3/1/BZ4
Reference M LB L
direct indirect
DLOR ULOR
4401 F/18 3.94 0.34 0.31 0.02
4401 F/36 1.47 0.37 0.34 0.02
4401 F/58 1.00 0.35 0.32 0.02
4401 PF/18 3.24 0.41 0.39 0.03
4401 PF/36 1.16 0.46 0.44 0.03
4401 PF/58 0.78 0.44 0.42 0.02
Continuous-line mounting Through-wiring sets

The angle brackets for installation of the 44 luminaires Heat-resistant, colour-coded individual
overlap. Thus the precise alignment in case of non-inter- wires 1.5 mm2, with 1 grommet.
rupted continuous lines is assured. 6890/3LV/36 1450 mm length.
6890/5LV/36 1450 mm length.
6890/3LV/58 1750 mm length.
6890/5LV/58 1750 mm length.
285
Weather-proof TRILUX weather-proof sur-
face-mounted luminaires shine
surface-mounted out thanks to high corrosion
and ageing resistance.
luminaires Highly-resistant materials
also guarantee efficient and
long-term protection against
the ingression of dust and
humidity.
The product segment in-

cludes luminaires in IP 54
and IP 65. ARAGON
The solid weather-proof
luminaires ARAGON convince
thanks to their innovative
rapid closure mechanism
without individual compo-
nents. The luminaire body
and diffuser also withstand
increased mechanical strain.
Page 288
286
713 1715 719 CENTA-S WINLIGHT-Q
High-quality opal or pris- The luminaire bodies of the 719 battens are recommend- Weather-proof circular lumi- High lumen packages char-
matic PLEXIGLAS diffusers 1715 series are made ed for interior and exterior naires 748 guarantee a acterise the 798 series.
characterise the architectural of highly-resistant polyester areas which are not working high IP 65-rating for ceiling They are recommended for
design of the tried-and-tested resin, characterised by a areas with general illumination as well as for wall mounting. higher halls as well as for
series. The connection with very low inflammability. requirements. The FF versions Luminaire body and diffuser covered exterior areas.
the flat base luminaire body A further advantage is the are also suitable for produc- are made of impact-resistant IP 54 is achieved in combi-
made of polyester resin is prismatic diffuser made of tion sites exposed to fire polycarbonate. The luminaire nation with glass covers.
effected by means of internal ageing-resistant PLEXIGLAS hazards. Also recommended design can be varied by A detailed description can
spring clips. which is easy to clean thanks for simple working rooms means of attractive decora- be found in the section
to its smooth surface. when equipped with reflectors. tive ceiling rings. Industrial luminaires.
287
Weather-proof surface-mounted luminaires ARAGON
with polycarbonate diffuser,
Application
Ceiling- and wall-mounted
luminaires for damp or cor-
rosive environments and
covered exterior areas. Rec-
ommended for increased
requirements as to mechan-
ical stability.
Optical system
Diffuser made of clear,
impact-resistant and UV-sta-
bilised polycarbonate with
stylish, fine-grained front
planes, smooth exterior fin-
ish, with internal channel
prisms. Diffuser made in one
piece, mechanically stable.
Safe retention of the diffuser
by means of inter-lock pairs
closed without tools.
Luminaire body
Polycarbonate, recyclable,
very low inflammability,
transparant, for additional
indirect light component.
With upper- and front-plane
perforations for mains sup-
ply and further wiring as well
as for through-wiring by
means of heat-resistant
internal wiring. Grommets
are enclosed loose. Internal
wiring to be ordered sepa-
rately.
Mounting by means of en-

closed stainless steel fixing
clamps. With stainless steel
wire bracket for steel strip
suspension or for chain su-
spension to be provided by
the contractor.
terminal. With electronic
control gear (E).

substance.
T5 fluorescent lamps Zip-like fastening principle

T5 fluorescent lamps with a diameter Diffuser mounting is realised by means of an easy closure
Indications Page reduced to 16 mm in efficient or mechanism: a multitude of inter-lock pairs on the diffuser
Internal wiring 291 lumen-rich version offer application- and the luminaire body is clipped onto each other for a safe
Suspensions 293 oriented lumen packages in different and tight retention. After unlocking the first inter-lock pair,
Trunking 300 wattages. the diffuser can be easily opened in a flash for maintenance
Lamp characteristics 444 purposes thanks to the zip-like fastening principle.
288
W mm W mm
ARAGON 114 T E 1x14 390 1.6 ARAGON 214 T E 2x14 390 2.5
ARAGON 124 T E 1x24 390 1.6 ARAGON 224 T E 2x24 390 2.5
ARAGON 128 T E 1x28 800 235 475 2.4 ARAGON 228 T E 2x28 800 235 475 3.4
ARAGON 180 T E 1x80 1100 235 475 2.7
652do
Data table no. 2194

En 300 lx 500 lx
20 4.6 5.4 7.6 8.9
30 6.2 7.0 11 12
40 7.8 8.7 13 15
Area
50 9.4 11 16 18
A
in m2 60 11 12 19 20
80 14 16 23 26
100 17 19 28 31
150 24 26 40 43
200 32 33 52 55
DIN 5040: B20 DIN 5040: B31 2 Max. luminaire spacings for
T5 T5

g1 = Emin : E 1 : 1.5
CIBSE BZ: CIBSE BZ:
BZ7/4/BZ6 BZ5/1.25/BZ6 Transverse spacing centre / centre Xmax = 3.3 h
BZ7/4/BZ6 BZ6
Reference M LB L
direct indirect
DLOR ULOR
ARAGON 114T E 2,75 0.84 0.65 0.19
ARAGON 124T E 1.99 0.80 0.62 0.18
ARAGON 128T E 1.27 0.84 0.65 0.19
ARAGON 135T E 1.00 0.84 0.65 0.19
ARAGON 149T E 0.78 0.83 0.64 0.19
ARAGON 154T E 0.78 0.80 0.62 0.18
ARAGON 180T E 0.60 0.77 0.59 0.17
ARAGON 214T E 1.45 0.81 0.61 0.19
ARAGON 224T E 1.05 0.77 0.58 0.18
ARAGON 228T E 0.67 0.81 0.61 0.19
ARAGON 235T E 0.53 0.81 0.61 0.19
ARAGON 249T E 0.41 0.79 0.60 0.19
ARAGON 254T E 0.41 0.77 0.58 0.18
Multiple connection possibilities Rapid mounting and maintenance

A multitude of pre-formed perforations, located at the lumi- Gear trays and diffusers can be suspended from the lumi-
naire front planes or luminaire roof, ensures different feeding naire body during electrical connection and later mainte-
possibilities for mains supply and further wiring. nance. This feature saves time since the components do not
Continuous-line arrangement by means of system-conform have to be placed on the scaffolding or the floor.
internal wiring accessories (see page 291).
289
with polycarbonate diffuser,
Application Reference Lamps D D1 D2 kg

luminaires for damp or cor- ARAGON 114 E 1x14 390 1.7
rosive environments and ARAGON 124 E 1x24 390 1.7
covered exterior areas. Rec- ARAGON 128 E 1x28 800 235 475 2.6
ommended for increased ARAGON 135 E 1x35 1100 235 475 2.9
requirements as to mechan- ARAGON 149 E 1x49 1100 235 475 2.9
ical stability.
ARAGON 154 E 1x54 800 235 475 2.6
ARAGON 180 E 1x80 1100 235 475 2.9
Optical system
S With highly-specular
reflector, reflection-intensi-
fied, for symmetrical light
distribution.
Luminaire body
very low inflammability, light-
grey. With upper- and front-
plane perforations for mains
supply and further wiring as
well as for through-wiring by
rately.

clamps. With stainless steel
wire bracket for steel strip
suspension or for chain su- No. 2912
spension to be provided by DIN 5040: B20
the contractor.
T5 CIBSE BZ:
BZ6
NBN L 14-002:
BZ7/2/BZ6

terminal. With electronic
control gear (E).

substance.
T5 fluorescent lamps T5 and electronic control gear

T5 fluorescent lamps with a diameter Innovative T5 lamps are operated with
Indications Page reduced to 16 mm in efficient or energy-saving electronic control gear
Internal wiring 291 lumen-rich version offer application- as a matter of principle. T5 lighting
Suspensions 293 oriented lumen packages in different systems thus embody a symbiosis of
Trunking 300 wattages. the latest in both lamp and control gear
Lamp characteristics 444 technology.
290
W mm W mm
ARAGON 214 E 2x14 390 2.3 ARAGON 128 S E 1x28 800 235 475 3.2
ARAGON 224 E 2x24 390 2.3 ARAGON 135 S E 1x35 1100 235 475 3.5
ARAGON 228 E 2x28 800 235 475 3.6 ARAGON 149 S E 1x49 1100 235 475 3.5
ARAGON 254 E 2x54 800 235 475 3.6
652do
Data table no. 2912

En 300 lx 500 lx
20 4.0 4.7 6.7 7.8
30 5.4 6.2 9.0 10
40 6.8 7.6 11 13
Area
50 8.1 9.1 14 15
A
in m2 60 9.4 10 16 17
80 12 13 20 22
100 15 16 24 26
150 21 22 35 37
200 27 28 45 47
DIN 5040: B30 DIN 5040: A40 2 Max. luminaire spacings for
T5 T5

g1 = Emin : E 1 : 1.5
CIBSE BZ: CIBSE BZ:
BZ6 BZ5
Reference M LB L
direct indirect
DLOR ULOR
ARAGON 114 E 2.75 0.98 0.81 0.17
ARAGON 124 E 1.99 0.93 0.77 0.16
ARAGON 128 E 1.27 0.98 0.81 0.17
ARAGON 135 E 1.00 0.98 0.81 0.17
ARAGON 149 E 0.78 0.96 0.79 0.17
ARAGON 154 E 0.78 0.93 0.77 0.16
ARAGON 180 E 0.60 0.88 0.73 0.15
ARAGON 128 S E 1.19 0.92 0.87 0.05
ARAGON 135 S E 0.94 0.92 0.87 0.05
ARAGON 149 S E 0.73 0.90 0.85 0.05
ARAGON 154 S E 0.73 0.87 0.82 0.05
ARAGON 180 S E 0.56 0.83 0.79 0.04
ARAGON 214 E 1.45 0.93 0.78 0.15
ARAGON 224 E 1.05 0.88 0.74 0.14
ARAGON 228 E 0.67 0.93 0.78 0.15
ARAGON 235 E 0.53 0.93 0.78 0.15
ARAGON 249 E 0.41 0.91 0.76 0.15
ARAGON 254 E 0.41 0.88 0.74 0.14
Production sites exposed to fire hazards Internal wiring

ARAGON luminaires equipped with electronic control gear Five heat-resistant, colour-coded individual wires 1.5 mm2,
can also be used in areas exposed to fire hazards caused by with connection terminal for wires up to 5 x 2.5 mm2.
dust and fibrous substance. Luminaires for T5 lamps are ARAGON LV 5x1200
equipped as standard with electronic control gear. for luminaires 28 E, 36, 54 E.
ARAGON LV 5x1500
for luminaires 35 E,49 E, 58, 80 E.
291
with polycarbonate diffuser
Application Reference Lamps D D1 D2 kg

luminaires for damp or cor- ARAGON 118 1x18 390 2.2
rosive environments and ARAGON 136 1x36 800 235 475 3.2
covered exterior areas. Rec- ARAGON 158 1x58 1100 235 475 3.5
ical stability.
Optical system
S With highly-specular
fied, for symmetrical light
distribution.
SA With highly-specular
fied, for asymmetrical light
distribution.
Luminaire body
very low inflammability, light-
grey. With upper- and front-
plane perforations for mains
supply and further wiring as
well as for through-wiring by
rately.
clamps. With stainless steel No. 2913
wire bracket for steel strip DIN 5040: B20
suspension or for chain su- CIBSE BZ:
spension to be provided by BZ6
the contractor. NBN L 14-002:
BZ7/2/BZ6
lasts.
e.g. ARAGON 158 E.

and fibrous substance. Mechanical safety Zip-like fastening principle
Many applications call for particularly solid weather-proof Diffuser mounting is realised by means of an easy closure
Indications Page luminaires. ARAGON equipped as standard with anti-van- mechanism: a multitude of inter-lock pairs on the diffuser
Internal wiring 291 dalism closure mechanism is the correct choice because and the luminaire body is clipped onto each other for a safe
Suspensions 293 luminaire body and diffuser are made of highly impact- and tight retention. After unlocking the first inter-lock pair,
Trunking 300 resistant polycarbonate. the diffuser can be easily opened in a flash for maintenance
Lamp characteristics 444 purposes thanks to the zip-like fastening principle.
292
W mm W mm
ARAGON 218 2x18 390 2.9 ARAGON 136 S 1x36 800 235 475 4.3
ARAGON 236 2x36 800 235 475 4.8 ARAGON 158 S 1x58 1100 235 475 4.6
ARAGON 258 2x58 1100 235 475 5.2 ARAGON 136 SA 1x36 800 235 475 4.3
ARAGON 158 SA 1x58 1100 235 475 4.6
652d (o
Data table no. 2913

En 300 lx 500 lx
20 3.4 4.0 5.7 6.6
30 4.6 5.3 7.7 8.8
40 5.8 6.5 9.7 11
Area
50 6.9 7.8 12 13
A
in m2 60 8.1 8.9 13 15
80 10 11 17 19
100 12 13 21 22
150 18 19 30 32
200 23 24 38 41
DIN 5040: B30 DIN 5040: A40 2 Max. luminaire

spacings for
g1 = Emin : E 1 : 1.5
CIBSE BZ: CIBSE BZ:
BZ6/7.5/BZ5/1/BZ6 BZ5 Transverse spacing centre / centre Xmax = 3.4 h
BZ6 BZ5
Reference M LB L
direct indirect
DLOR ULOR
ARAGON 118 3.61 0.81 0.64 0.17
ARAGON 136 1.47 0.81 0.64 0.17
ARAGON 158 1.00 0.76 0.60 0.16
ARAGON 136 S 1.35 0.79 0.75 0.04
ARAGON 136 SA 1.36 0.74 0.70 0.04
ARAGON 158 S 0.92 0.73 0.69 0.04
ARAGON 158 SA 0.92 0.70 0.66 0.04
ARAGON 218 2.08 0.71 0.59 0.11
ARAGON 236 0.84 0.71 0.59 0.11
ARAGON 258 0.58 0.66 0.55 0.11
Ceiling mounting Steel strip suspension ARAGON SB

The luminaire fixing is effected by means of the CLICK-sys- 1 pair, 1 m long, made of stainless steel.
tem with stainless steel clamps. Longitudinal and transversal
clearance ease the alignment and enable a stressfree mate- Trunking (not illustrated)
rial-specific heat expansion. Luminaire body perforations and ARAGON luminaires can be fixed to trunkings 190 and
large-scale sealing technology are completely omitted: IP 66 190 VZ (see page 300).
is permanentely assured.
293
Application Reference Lamps D D1 D2 E1 kg Reference Lamps D D1 D2 E1 kg

Damp or corrosive environ- W mm W mm
ments and covered exterior 7131/36 1x36 900 195 390 400 3.7 7132/18 2x18 530 65 215 3.3
areas. 7131/58 1x58 1200 195 390 550 5.0 7132/36 2x36 900 195 390 400 6.6
7171/15 1x15 310 94 250 1.5 7132/58 2x58 1200 195 390 550 8.7
Optical system 7171/18 1x18 460 95 230 1.9
PLEXIGLAS diffuser made in
one piece, particularly sta-
ble, opal.
P With PLEXIGLAS dif-
fuser with photometrically
ing plane.

by means of internal spring
clips.
S With highly-specular,
anodised reflector.
Luminaire body
ester resin, very low inflam-
mability, light-grey. 7171
with internal reflector made
of polyester resin, very low
inflammability, white. /36
and /58 with front-plane,
self-sealing openings for
through-wiring inside the
luminaire. Projections and
indentations in the front
planes ensure precise align-
ment of the luminaires in the
continuous line.
for connection. /15, /18
with 2-pole, /36, /58
with 4-pole connection termi-
nal for wires up to 2.5 mm2
and additional earth connec- No. 2110 No. 2110
tion terminal. With low-loss DIN 5040: B21 DIN 5040: B31
ballasts. 7171 in safety CIBSE BZ: CIBSE BZ:
class II, without earth con- BZ6 BZ6
nection terminal. NBN L 14-002: NBN L 14-002:
BZ6 BZ6
Luminaires 713 can also

be supplied with electronic
fix E, e.g. 7131 P/36 E.

Steel strip suspension 75N Through-wiring sets

1 pair, 1 m long, stainless steel V2A, with luminaire fixing Heat-resistant, colour-coded individual wires 1.5 mm2.
brackets for 713 luminaires. 7130/3LV/36 for luminaires /36, 1450 mm long.
Indications Page 7130/5LV/36 for luminaires /36, 1450 mm long.
Wall-mounted luminaires 278 7130/3LV/58 for luminaires /58, 1790 mm long.
Trunking 300 7130/5LV/58 for luminaires /58, 1790 mm long.
Lamp characteristics 444 07690/5LV/25m for luminaires 36, /58, 25 m long.
294
Reference Lamps D D1 D2 E1 kg Reference Lamps D D1 D2 E1 kg
W mm W mm
7131 P/36 1x36 900 195 390 400 3.9 7132 P/36 2x36 900 195 390 400 7.0
7131 P/58 1x58 1200 195 390 550 5.2 7132 P/58 2x58 1200 195 390 550 9.4
7132 PS/1x58 1x58 1200 195 390 550 8.3
7132 P/TC11 2xTC-S11 215 25 2.1
652d (o
7171 Safety class II
Data table no. 2110

En 300 lx 500 lx
20 2.0 2.4 3.4 3.9
30 2.8 3.2 4.7 5.3
40 3.5 3.9 5.9 6.5
Area
50 4.3 4.7 7.1 7.8
A
in m2 60 5.0 5.4 8.3 9.1
80 6.4 6.9 11 12
100 7.7 8.3 13 14
150 11 12 19 20
200 14 15 24 25

spacings for
g1 = Emin : E 1 : 1.5
CIBSE BZ: CIBSE BZ:
BZ5/1/BZ6 BZ3/1.25/BZ4 Transverse spacing centre / centre Xmax = 2.7 h
BZ5/1/BZ6 BZ4/1.5/BZ5
Reference M LB L
direct indirect
DLOR ULOR
7131/36 2.38 0.73 0.51 0.23
7131/58 1.63 0.69 0.48 0.21
7132/18 3.81 0.57 0.44 0.13
7132/36 1.45 0.60 0.47 0.14
7132/58 1.00 0.56 0.44 0.13
7131 P/36 2.15 0.81 0.57 0.24
7131 P/58 1.46 0.77 0.54 0.23
7132 P/36 1.24 0.70 0.56 0.14
7132 P/58 0.85 0.66 0.53 0.14
7132 P/TC11 6.10 0.53 0.43 0.10
7132 PS/1x58 1.43 0.79 0.65 0.13
7171/15 8.71 0.71 0.49 0.22
7171/18 6.13 0.71 0.49 0.22
IP-conform continuous-line mounting Equipment variety

Self-sealing, front-plane feeding entries enable the IP-con- Version /TC11 for compact fluorescent lamps is the
form installation, also for internal through-wiring by means of practice-oriented complement of the 713 series.
heat-resistant individual wires. Additional sealing elements Recommended for areas where smaller versions with a
are not required. Front-plane projections and indentations high IP-rating are required.
ensure precise alignment of the luminaires in the continuous
line.
295
with PLEXIGLAS or polycarbonate diffuser
Application
Damp or corrosive environ-
ments and covered exterior
areas. 1715NPC also
recommended for areas with
increased requirements as
to mechanical stability.
Optical system
Trapezium-shaped
PLEXIGLAS diffuser, smooth
external finish, with internal
prisms, made in one piece,
mechanically stable and tor-
rocker fasteners made of
glass-fibre reinforced poly-
amide.
PC V2A
Polycarbonate diffuser,
impact-resistant, smooth
exterior surface, with internal
prisms, made in one piece,
mechanically stable and tor-
V2A stainless steel rocker
fasteners.
Luminaire body
mability, light-grey. Gear tray
can be removed without
using tools and hung from
the luminaire body for main-
tenance purposes. Double
front-plane feeding possibili-
ty for mains supply and fur-
ther wiring as well as for
heat-resistant through-wir-
ing. Additional ceiling-orien-
ted feeding possibilities.
2 grommets are enclosed
loose.
up to 2.5 mm2 and additional
With low-loss ballasts.

e.g. 1715N/158 PC V2A E.

Mains supply and further wiring Continuous-line accessories

Easy mains supply and further wiring is enabled by the dou- Weather-proof luminaires can be arranged as continuous
ble front-plane feeding possibility with grommets in diffuser lines. Internal through-wiring is realised by means of heat-
Indications Page luminaires. resistant internal wiring accessory 02715N/5LV/ and
Trunking 300 between the luminaires by means of a sheathed cable, to
Steel strip suspensions 301 be provided by the contractor.
296
W mm W mm
1715N/118 1x18 310 178 356 1.8 1715N/218 2x18 310 178 356 2.2
1715N/136 1x36 840 218 436 2.6 1715N/236 2x36 840 218 436 3.3
1715N/136 PC V2A 1x36 840 218 436 2.6 1715N/236 PC V2A 2x36 840 218 436 3.3
1715N/158 1x58 1140 218 436 4.3 1715N/258 2x58 1140 218 436 5.8
1715N/158 PC V2A 1x58 1140 218 436 4.3 1715N/258 PC V2A 2x58 1140 218 436 5.8
652d (o
Data table no. 2178

En 300 lx 500 lx
20 3.3 3.8 5.5 6.4
30 4.5 5.1 7.5 8.5
40 5.6 6.3 9.4 11
Area
50 6.8 7.5 11 13
A
in m2 60 7.9 8.7 13 15
80 10 11 17 18
100 12 13 20 22
150 17 19 29 31
200 23 24 38 40

spacings for
g1 = Emin : E 1 : 1.5
CIBSE BZ: CIBSE BZ:
BZ7/0.8/BZ6 BZ6
Reference M LB L
direct indirect
DLOR ULOR
1715N/118 3.77 0.73 0.59 0.14
1715N/136 1.45 0.77 0.62 0.14
1715N/136 PC 1.48 0.75 0.61 0.14
1715N/158 1.00 0.71 0.58 0.13
1715N/158 PC 1.03 0.69 0.56 0.13
1715N/218 1.90 0.72 0.62 0.11
1715N/236 0.77 0.72 0.62 0.11
1715N/236 PC 0.79 0.70 0.59 0.11
1715N/258 0.53 0.67 0.57 0.10
1715N/258 PC 0.56 0.64 0.54 0.10
Internal wiring accessories Ceiling-oriented feeding

For continuous lines and central feeding. 5 colour-coded Cables can be inserted thanks to knock-out openings in the
individual wires 1.5 mm2, with 2 connection terminals. luminaire roof in case of prepared ceiling openings or in
02715N/5LV/36 for 36, 02715N/5LV/58 for 58. case of mounting to trunking.
Ring eyelet 02715 AR The cable feeding within the luminaire up to the connection
(not illustrated) 1 pair, M5, made of galvanised metal. For point is realised by means of the accessory
luminaire fixing to steel strip 194N (page 301). 02715N/5LV/36.
297
Application Reference Lamps D D1 E1 E2 E3 kg Reference Lamps D D1 E1 E2 E3 kg

Damp or corrosive environ- W mm W mm
ments and covered exterior 7191/18 1x18 400 130 89 200 200 1.5 7192/18 2x18 400 130 89 200 200 2.0
areas. Versions without 7191/36 1x36 800 233 189 440 360 2.0 7192/36 2x36 800 233 189 440 360 2.9
reflector preferably for damp 7191/36 FF E 1x36 800 233 189 440 360 1.6 7192/36 FF E 2x36 800 233 189 440 360 1.9
and wet environments with 7191/58 1x58 1100 233 189 590 510 2.7 7192/58 2x58 1100 233 189 590 510 4.1
general illumination require- 7191/58 FF E 1x58 1100 233 189 590 510 2.0 7192/58 FF E 2x58 1100 233 189 590 510 2.3
ments, e.g. boiler-houses
and greenhouses.
719 Safety class II
719E Safety class I
Luminaire body
mability, light-grey. With
front-plane feeding and
grommets for mains supply.
Further wiring, central feed-
ing or continuous-line
arrangements by means of
internal wiring accessory
07191/4LV/.
FF E
For production sites
exposed to fire hazards
substance. Identical with
7191, 7192, but with
impact-resistant lamp pro-
tection tubes and equipped
as standard with electronic
control gear (E) because of
higher thermal safety
requirements.
up to 2.5 mm2. With low-loss
ballasts.
Luminaires can also be sup- No. 2111 No. 2111
plied with electronic control DIN 5040: B21 DIN 5040: A30
gear, reference suffix E, CIBSE BZ: CIBSE BZ:
e.g. 7191/36 E. Versions BZ6/1.25/BZ5 BZ6/1.25/BZ5
FF E with electronic control NBN L 14-002: NBN L 14-002:
BZ6/1.5/BZ5 BZ6/1.5/BZ5
gear and additional earth
connection terminal as
standard.
Reflectors (accessories)
1 piece, solvent-free pow-
der-coated sheet steel,
white. Universally suitable for
single- and twin-lamp ver-
sions.
07190 R/18 for 719/18.
07190 R/36 for 719/36.
07190 R/58 for 719/58.
Manifold feeding possibilities Internal wirings

Front-plane knock-out openings enable mains supply and For continuous lines and in case of central feeding. Colour-
continuous-line arrangement cables can also be inserted coded individual wires 1.5 mm2, with 2 connection terminals.
thanks to knock-out openings in the luminaire roof in case 07191/4LV/36 for luminaires /36.
Indications Page of prepared ceiling openings or in case of mounting to 07191/4LV/58 for luminaires /58.
Trunking 300 trunking. 07191/5LV/36 for luminaires /36 E.
Lamp characteristics 444 07191/5LV/58 for luminaires /58 E.
298
Reference Lamps D D1 E1 E2 E3 kg Reference Lamps D D1 E1 E2 E3 kg
Luminaire + refl.* W mm Luminaire + refl.* W mm
7191/18 7192/18
+ 07190 R/18 1x18 400 130 89 200 200 2.0 + 07190 R/18 2x18 400 130 89 200 200 2.6
7191/36 7192/36
+ 07190 R/36 1x36 800 233 189 440 360 3.1 + 07190 R/36 2x36 800 233 189 440 360 4.0
7191/36 FF E 7192/36 FF E
+ 07190 R/36 1x36 800 233 189 440 360 2.7 + 07190 R/36 2x36 800 233 189 440 360 3.0
7191/58 7192/58
+ 07190 R/58 1x58 1100 233 189 590 510 4.0 + 07190 R/58 2x58 1100 233 189 590 510 5.4
7191/58 FF E 7192/58 FF E
+ 07190 R/58 1x58 1100 233 189 590 510 3.2 + 07190 R/58 2x58 1100 233 189 590 510 3.5
* Reflector to be ordered separately. * Reflector to be ordered separately.
652dM+o
719E Safety class I
Data table no. 2111

En 300 lx 500 lx
20 2.7 3.2 4.6 5.3
30 3.7 4.2 6.2 7.0
40 4.7 5.2 7.8 8.7
Area
50 5.7 6.3 9.4 10
A
in m2 60 6.6 7.2 11 12
80 8.4 9.1 14 15
100 10 11 17 18
150 15 16 24 26
200 19 20 32 33
DIN 5040: B21 DIN 5040: A30 2 Max. luminaire

spacings for
g1 = Emin : E 1 : 1.5
CIBSE BZ: CIBSE BZ:
BZ6/1.5/BZ5 BZ6/1.5/BZ5
Reference M LB L
direct indirect
DLOR ULOR
7191/18 3.85 0.93 0.57 0.36
7191/18 + 07190 R/18 3.45 0.87 0.87 0.00
7191/36 1.55 0.93 0.57 0.36
7191/36 + 07190 R/36 1.39 0.87 0.87 0.00
7191/36 FF E 1.94 0.74 0.46 0.28
7191/36 FF E
+ 07190 R/36 1.74 0.70 0.70 0.00
7191/58 1.00 0.93 0.57 0.36
7191/58 + 07190 R/58 0.92 0.85 0.85 0.00
7191/58 FF E 1.25 0.74 0.46 0.28
7191/58 FF E
+ 07190 R/58 1.15 0.68 0.68 0.00
7192/18 1.97 0.91 0.57 0.34
7192/18 + 07190 R/18 1.65 0.85 0.85 0.00
7192/36 0.79 0.91 0.57 0.34
7192/36 + 07190 R/36 0.71 0.85 0.85 0.00
7192/36 FF E 0.99 0.73 0.46 0.27
7192/36 FF E
+ 07190 R/36 0.89 0.68 0.68 0.00
7192/58 0.51 0.91 0.57 0.34
7192/58 + 07190 R/58 0.47 0.83 0.83 0.00
7192/58 FF E 0.64 0.73 0.46 0.27
7192/58 FF E
Steel strip suspension 75N Production sites exposed to fire hazards + 07190 R/58 0.59 0.68 0.68 0.00
1 pair, 1 m long, stainless steel V2A, with luminaire fixing 719FF E series luminaires are equipped as standard with Technical information see page 440.
brackets, complete for 719 luminaires. electronic control gear (E) and a lamp protection tube made
of impact-resistant polycarbonate. Particularly suitable for
areas exposed to fire hazards caused by dust and fibrous
substance.
299
Trunking 190 VZ
for damp or corrosive environments
195 VZ
193N 194N 197 VZ
Trunking 190 VZ
for weather-proof surface-
mounted luminaires. Made
of sheet steel, galvanised, 191 VZ 190 B/58 192 VZ
particularly torsionally rigid.
Upper side with dovetailed
profile for positioning of su- Ceiling-fixing claw 193N Steel strip suspension Luminaire support
spensions at will. For sheathed 1 piece, made of stainless 194N brackets 195 VZ
cable up to 12 mm, front- steel V2A, spacing between 1 piece, 1 m long, made of 1 pair, made of galvanised
plane cable introduction. trunking and fixing surface stainless steel V2A, including steel. For safe and sealed
15 mm. fixing claw. luminaire fixing.
190 VZ/II/58 2 lengths,
3148 mm long. Trunking coupling 191 VZ Blanking cover 190 B/58 Cable holders 197 VZ
190 VZ/III/58 3 lengths, 1 piece, made of galvanised 1 piece, plastic profile, 6 pieces, bright galvanised,
4722 mm long. steel, particularly stable, for light-grey, 1570 mm long, for sheathed cable
precisely aligned continuous snapped into place without 12 mm. For cable feeding
lines. tools, to be shortened on in trunkings 190 VZ/.
site.
End caps 192 VZ
1 pair, plastic, light-grey.
One pair of end caps is
required for each continuous
line.
300
Trunking 190
for hostile atmospheres
193N 194N 195

193 CL 194 CL 197
Polyester trunking 190

for weather-proof surface-
mounted luminaires. Made
191 190 B/58 192N of glass-fibre reinforced
polyester resin, very low
inflammability, light-grey,
Ceiling-fixing claw Steel strip suspension Luminaire support brackets particularly torsionally rigid.
1 piece, spacing between 194N 1 pair, for safe and sealed Chemically resistant against
trunking and fixing surface 1 piece,1 m long, made of luminaire fixing. low and medium concentra-
15 mm. stainless steel V2A, including 195N made of stainless tions of inorganic acids and
193N made of stainless fixing claw. steel V2A. against almost all organic
steel V2A. 195 CL specially corrosion- acids as well as against
193 CL specially corrosion- Blanking cover 190 B/58 resistant, suitable for use organic solvents with the
resistant, suitable for use 1 piece, plastic profile, in chloric and acidic atmos- exception of acetone and
in chloric and acidic atmos- light-grey, 1570 mm long, pheres. chlorinated hydrocarbons.
pheres. snapped into place without Upper side with dovetailed
tools, to be shortened on Cable holders 197 profile for positioning of su-
Trunking coupling 191 site. 6 pieces, bright galvanised, spensions at will. For sheathed
1 piece, made of stainless for sheathed cable cable up to 12 mm, front-
steel, particularly stable, for 12 mm. For cable feeding plane cable introduction.
precisely aligned continuous in trunkings 190/.
lines. 190/II/58 2 lengths,
End caps 192N 3148 mm long.
1 pair, plastic, light-grey. One 190/III/58 3 lengths,
pair of end caps is required 4722 mm long.
for each continuous line.
301
CENTA-S
Circular weather-proof surface-mounted luminaires
with opal polycarbonate diffuser
Application Reference Lamps D D1 D2 E1 E2 kg

luminaires for damp or cor- 7481 PC/TCD13 1xTC-D13 110 80 28 1.0
rosive environments and 7481 PC/TCD18 1xTC-D18 110 80 28 1.1
covered exterior areas. Rec-
ical safety.
Optical system
Opal diffuser made of
impact-resistant polycarbon-
ate with stylish, fine-grained,
matt surface. Circular diffu-
ser in spherical form, partic-
ularly stable. Safe retention
Luminaire body
Polycarbonate, white. Suita-
ble for mounting to ceiling
and walls. With two plug-in
nipples for mains supply and
further wiring. With integra-
ted ventilation valve at the
rear, for safe pressure com-
pensation in case of temper-
ature fluctuations. Versions
for compact fluorescent
lamps TC-L equipped with
lampholders made of stain-
less steel.
lasts.

plied with electronic control No. 2112
gear, reference suffix E, DIN 5040: B30
e.g. 7481 PC/TCD18 E. CIBSE BZ:
Luminaires for circular lamps BZ5
TR as standard with elec- NBN L 14-002:
BZ5

Increased stability Wall mounting

CENTA-S luminaire bodies and diffusers The photometric and electrotechnical characteristics of the
are made of highly impact-resistant CENTA-S series are not restricted in case of wall mounting.
polycarbonate, thus particularly rec- The maximum luminous flux of circular lamps is achieved in
Indications Page ommended for areas with increased case the luminaires are mounted in such a way that the
Emergency light 428 requirements as to mechanical lampholders are located below.
Lamp characteristics 444 stability.
302
Reference Lamps D D1 D2 E1 E2 kg Reference Lamps D D1 D2 E1 E2 kg
W mm W mm
7482 PC/1xTR22 E 1xTR22 134 51 32 28 0.9 7483 PC/1xTR40 E 1xTR40 169 85 100 83 28 1.9
7482 PC/TCL18 2xTC-L18 134 51 32 28 1.7 7483 PC/2xTCL24 2xTC-L24 169 85 100 130 28 3.0
652d (o
Data table no. 2112

En 100 lx 200 lx
20 3.5 4.0 6.9 7.9
30 4.8 5.3 9.6 11
40 6.0 6.6 12 13
Area
50 7.3 8.0 15 16
A
in m2 60 8.5 9.3 17 19
80 11 12 22 24
100 13 14 27 28
150 19 20 39 41
200 25 26 50 53
TR C 0 - C 180 Data table TR C 0 - C 180 Data table Height of the working plane e 0.85 m
TC-L TC-L

spacings for
g1 = Emin : E 1 : 1.5
CIBSE BZ: CIBSE BZ:
BZ5 BZ5
Reference M LB L
direct indirect
DLOR ULOR
7481 PC/TCD13 2.28 0.51 0.46 0.05
7481 PC/TCD18 2.00 0.44 0.39 0.04
7482 PC/1xTR22 E 1.04 0.56 0.51 0.05
7482 PC/TCL18 1.00 0.45 0.43 0.03
7483 PC/1xTR40 E 0.64 0.55 0.50 0.05
7483 PC/2xTCL24 0.72 0.41 0.39 0.03
Decorative ceiling ring, small Decorative ceiling ring, wide

Conical ceiling ring with surrounding rim, made of aluminium, Conical ceiling ring, made of aluminium, titanium-coloured,
titanium-coloured, coated in transparent lacquer. For com- coated in transparent lacquer. For combined mounting with
bined mounting with mounting body. luminaire body.
07481 DD 310 mm, for 7481. 07491 DD 410 mm, for 7481.
07482 DD 384 mm, for 7482. 07492 DD 470 mm, for 7482.
07483 DD 498 mm, for 7483. 07493 DD 572 mm, for 7483.
303
Weather-proof TRILUX weather-proof
recessed luminaires can
recessed be mounted in almost all
common ceiling systems.
luminaires In addition to square and
rectangular luminaires the
product group also includes
circular downlights in IP 54.
The covers consist of opal,

translucent or prismatic
PLEXIGLAS, glass covers
retained in bezel rings are 739 720P, 721P
used for downlights. The 739 series for mount- The luminaires with prismatic
ing in ceilings with cut-out PLEXIGLAS diffusers are uni-
recess openings is equipped versally suitable for mounting
with prismatic diffusers and in ceilings with concealed
optional internal specular or exposed grids as well as
reflectors. A remarkable char- in cut-out recess openings.
acteristic is the surrounding The necessary fixing acces-
seal in the luminaire rim for sories are integrated in the
sealing towards the ceiling luminaires as standard.
void.
Page 308
Page 306
304
720T, 721T 722, 723 2911 4401 Clean-room
The series supports mini- A clear, chemically-resistant 2911 series downlights The IP 54 series 4401 is luminaires
mised energy consumption safety glass cover protects achieve the degree of pro- specially conceived for The catalogue
because the nearly low-loss the lamps and the optical tection IP 54 when com- integration in strip ceilings Lighting systems for
forward light diffusion of system of this series. Wide- bined with covers in clear or in module 100, strip width operating theatres
the diffuser material causes angle specular reflectors or Fresnel version. The closed 84 mm and a gap width of and clean-room envi-
high working efficiencies. parabolic louvres suitable for luminaire body offers protec- 16 mm. Detailed description ronments features
The diffuser surfaces with a DSE usage are optionally tion against the ingression can be found in the section luminaires for hospi-
smooth external finish are available. of dust and humidity towards Recessed diffuser lumi- tals and clean-room
easy to clean. the ceiling void. naires. production sites.
Catalogue available
Page 310 Page 312 Page 316 Page 284 upon request.
305
for cut-out recess openings
Application Reference Lamps Recess kg

Damp or corrosive environ- W opening/mm
ments and covered exterior 7392 P/36 2x36 1252x206 7.5
areas. 7392 P/58 2x58 1555x206 10.7
For ceilings with cut-out

recess openings.
Optical system
onto the working plane, par-
ticularly stable, diffuser fits
flush in the luminaire body
and is safely retained by
internal spring clips. A tool
for simple removal of the dif-
fuser is sent with each lumi-
naire.
Luminaire body
sheet steel, white. The sur-
rounding rim covers the saw
cut. Durable sealing of ceil-
ing void against dust and
moisture by surrounding seal
in luminaire rim, in ageing-
resistant foam rubber.
for connection. /TC with
3-pole, others with 5-pole
lasts. Mains supply and fur-
ther wiring by means of two
grommets.

plied with electronic control No. 2114
gear, reference suffix E, DIN 5040: A50
e.g. 7392 P/58 E. CIBSE BZ:
BZ2/0.75/BZ3
Thanks to limited surface NBN L 14-002:
BZ3/4/BZ4
Electronic control gear Ceilings with cut-out openings

TRILUX luminaires equipped with electronic control gear Luminaires are fixed directly to the
shine out thanks to the following characteristics: energy- existing grids of the ceiling tiles by
saving operation, lamp-preserving rapid lamp start, flicker- means of screws. The surrounding
Indications Page free light and avoidance of electrode flicker and disturbing luminaire rim covers the saw cut. The
Emergency light 428 noises. The increased lamp service life allows for benefits gasket in the luminaire rim ensures the
Lamp characteristics 444 in moneys worth. sealing towards the ceiling void.
306
7392 P/TC11 2xTC-S11 304x304 2.9 7393 P/TC24 3xTC-L24 404x404 5.9
7392 P/TC18 2xTC-L18 304x304 3.0
652d (o
Data table no. 2114

En 300 lx 500 lx
20 1.6 1.9 2.7 3.1
30 2.3 2.5 3.8 4.2
40 2.9 3.2 4.9 5.3
Area
50 3.6 3.8 5.9 6.4
A
in m2 60 4.2 4.5 6.9 7.4
80 5.4 5.7 9.0 9.5
100 6.6 6.9 11 12
150 9.6 10 16 17
200 13 13 21 22
TC C 0 - C 180 Data table TC C 0 - C 180 Data table Height of the working plane e 0.85 m

spacings for
g1 = Emin : E 1 : 1.5
CIBSE BZ: CIBSE BZ:
BZ3 BZ3
Reference M LB L
direct indirect
DLOR ULOR
7392 P/TC11 6.03 0.54 0.54 0.00
7392 P/TC18 4.39 0.55 0.55 0.00
7392 P/36 1.49 0.58 0.58 0.00
7392 P/58 1.00 0.56 0.56 0.00
7393 P/TC24 2.15 0.50 0.50 0.00
Easy removal of diffuser

A tool for easy removal of the diffuser
is supplied with each luminaire. Lock at
the front plane between diffuser and
luminaire body remove diffuser.
307

Damp or corrosive environ- W mm opening/mm W mm opening/mm
ments and covered exterior 7202 PS/1x36 1x36 312.5 1226x291 7.0 7202 P/36 2x36 312.5 1226x291 7.3
areas. 7212 PS/1x36 1x36 300 1176x278 6.5 7212 P/36 2x36 300 1176x278 6.8

openings.
Optical system
onto the working plane, par-
ticularly stable, diffuser fits
flush in the luminaire body
and is safely retained by
internal spring clips. A tool
for simple removal of the dif-
fuser is sent with each lumi-
naire.
S With highly-specular,
anodised reflector.
Luminaire body
sheet steel, white, with 4
swivel brackets for luminaire
fixing. Durable sealing of
ceiling void against dust and
lasts. Mains supply and fur- No. 2115 No. 2115
ther wiring by means of two DIN 5040: A50 DIN 5040: A50
grommets. CIBSE BZ: CIBSE BZ:
BZ2/1.25/BZ3 BZ2/0.75/BZ3
BZ3 BZ3/1.5/BZ4
e.g. 7202 P/36 E.

Metal case ceilings Fixing accessories for mounting in

Angle sections based on the dimensions of longitudinal lumi- metal case ceilings
naires ensure the safe retention of TRILUX luminaires 72 in 1 set (2 pieces) angle brackets, fully
those ceilings where the clamping profiles of metal cases galvanised.
Indications Page are parallel to the luminaire front planes. 07200/36 for luminaires
Emergency light 428 7202/36, 7202/1x36,
Lamp characteristics 444 7212/36, 7212/1x36.
308
Reference Lamps Module Recess kg
W mm opening/mm
7204 P/3x18 3x18 625 603x603 7.0
7214 P/3x18 3x18 600 578x578 6.6
652d (o
Data table no. 2115

En 300 lx 500 lx
20 2.5 2.9 4.2 4.8
30 3.6 3.9 5.9 6.5
40 4.5 4.9 7.5 8.1
Area
50 5.5 5.9 9.1 9.9
A
in m2 60 6.4 6.9 11 12
80 8.4 8.8 14 15
100 10 11 17 18
150 15 16 25 26
200 19 20 32 34

spacings for
g1 = Emin : E 1 : 1.5
CIBSE BZ:
BZ4
Reference M LB L
direct indirect
DLOR ULOR
7202 P/36 1.00 0.56 0.56 0.00
7202 PS/1x36 1.54 0.73 0.73 0.00
7204 P/3x18 1.33 0.70 0.67 0.03
7212 P/36 0.85 0.66 0.66 0.00
7212 PS/1x36 1.56 0.72 0.72 0.00
7214 P/3x18 1.37 0.68 0.65 0.03
Universally suitable
for ceilings with concealed or exposed grids as well as for
ceilings with cut-out recess openings. These characteristics
of weather-proof luminaires enable recess mounting of the
72 series in almost all common ceiling systems. The gas-
ket in the surrounding luminaire rim ensures the sealing
towards surrounding ceiling grids or plates.
309
Recessed clean-room luminaires
with translucent PLEXIGLAS diffuser

Damp or corrosive environ- W mm opening/mm
ments, covered exterior 7202 T/36 2x36 312.5 1226x291 7.3
areas and clean rooms with 7212 T/36 2x36 300 1176x278 6.8
increased hygienic require-
ments.

openings.
Optical system
Translucent PLEXIGLAS dif-
fuser, allowing transmission
of more than 80 %. Easy-to-
clean smooth exterior sur-
face, particularly stable. Dif-
fuser fits flush in the lumi-
naire body and is safely
retained by internal spring
clips. A tool for simple
removal of the diffuser is
sent with each luminaire.
Luminaire body
lasts. Mains supply and fur-
ther wiring by means of two No. 2116
grommets. DIN 5040: A40
CIBSE BZ:
Luminaires can also be sup- BZ3/0.75/BZ4
plied with electronic control NBN L 14-002:
BZ4
e.g. 7202 T/36 E.

Translucent diffusers Sealing towards the ceiling void

PLEXIGLAS with fine spherical inclu- Weather-proof recessed luminaires with
Indications Page sions made of other polymerised flush-fitted diffuser and sealing towards
Recess mounting in methacrylates causes light output the ceiling void are intended for use in
metal case ceilings 308 ratios that are up to 30 % higher than areas with higher air-purity require-
Emergency light 428 those of conventional opal diffuser ments.
Lamp characteristics 444 luminaires.
310
W mm opening/mm
7204 T/3x18 3x18 625 603x603 7.0
7204 T/3xTC36 3xTC-L36 625 603x603 7.8
7214 T/3x18 3x18 600 578x578 6.6
652d (o
Data table no. 2116

En 300 lx 500 lx
20 2.2 2.5 3.6 4.2
30 3.0 3.3 5.1 5.6
40 3.8 4.2 6.4 7.0
Area
50 4.7 5.1 7.8 8.5
A
in m2 60 5.4 5.9 9.0 9.8
80 7.1 7.5 12 13
100 8.6 9.1 14 15
150 12 13 21 22
200 16 17 27 28
TC

spacings for
g1 = Emin : E 1 : 1.5
CIBSE BZ:
BZ4
Reference M LB L
direct indirect
DLOR ULOR
7202 T/36 1.00 0.68 0.68 0.00
7204 T/3x18 1.61 0.70 0.70 0.00
7204 T/3xTC36 0.85 0.61 0.61 0.00
7212 T/36 1.04 0.65 0.65 0.00
7214 T/3x18 1.65 0.68 0.68 0.00
max. 56 mm max. 56 mm max. 56 mm
Swivel brackets Exposed grids Concealed grids Cut-out recess openings

72 luminaires include four 72 luminaires support on The same luminaire fixing as The luminaires support on
integrated swivel brackets the grids by means of swivel for ceilings with exposed the grids of the ceiling plates
allowing a rapid mounting in brackets. The luminaires grids. The luminaires and the by means of swivel brackets.
all usual ceiling systems, cover the half width of the surrounding ceiling plates The surrounding luminaire
observing the degree of grids towards the room. cover the grids towards the rim covers the saw cut.
protection. room.
311
with specular reflector SB

Damp or corrosive environ- W mm opening/mm
ments and clean rooms with 7222 W-SB/36 2x36 312,5 1226x291 11.8
increased hygienic require- 7222 W-SB/58 2x58 312,5 1526x291 15.4
ments, e.g. operating thea- 7232 W-SB/36 2x36 300 1176x278 11.2
tres, zones adjacent to oper- 7232 W-SB/58 2x58 300 1476x278 14.8
ating theatres and intensive-
care units.

openings.
Optical system
Luminaire cover made of
highly-resistant toughened
safety glass with white-coat-
ed aluminium frame. Resist-
ant to disinfectants and
intensive UV radiation. Inter-
nal spring-tensioned contact
clips automatically provide
earth continuity.
SB
With highly-specular, an-
odised reflectors for wide-
Luminaire body
plug-in connection terminal No. 2180
for wires up to 2.5 mm2, DIN 5040: A40
including earth connection CIBSE BZ:
terminal. With low-loss bal- BZ5/0.75/BZ4
lasts. Mains supply and fur- NBN L 14-002:
BZ4/4/BZ3
ther wiring by means of two
grommets.

e.g. 7222 W-SB/36 E.

Safety glass cover Plug-in socket 545/E14

An efficient protection of the optical system and the lamps is For safety lighting with luminaires 722, 723 (exception:
ensured by the smooth, easy-to-clean cover made of tough- 7232 RPV), 724 in continuous and stand-by switching,
ened safety glass. This material is highly-resistant to impact consisting of a colour-coded E14 socket for tubular incan-
Indications Page and bending stress, intense UV radiation as well as to deter- descent lamps or compact fluorescent lamps with integrated
Emergency light 428 gents used in case of wet disinfection. electronic control gear.
312
W mm opening/mm
7224 W-SB/3x36 3x36 625 1226x603 19.5
7224 W-SB/3x58 3x58 625 1526x603 25.2
7234 W-SB/3x36 3x36 600 1176x578 18.5
652d
Data table no. 2180

En 300 lx 500 lx
20 1.5 1.7 2.5 2.9
30 2.1 2.3 3.5 3.8
40 2.6 2.9 4.4 4.8
Area
50 3.2 3.5 5.3 5.8
A
in m2 60 3.7 4.0 6.2 6.7
80 4.8 5.1 8.0 8.5
100 5.9 6.2 9.8 10
150 8.5 8.9 14 15
200 11 12 19 19

spacings for
g1 = Emin : E 1 : 1.5
CIBSE BZ:
BZ2
Reference M LB L
direct indirect
DLOR ULOR
7222 W-SB/36 1.46 0.67 0.67 0.00
7222 W-SB/58 1.00 0.63 0.63 0.00
7224 W-SB/3x36 0.93 0.71 0.71 0.00
7224 W-SB/3x58 0.63 0.67 0.67 0.00
7232 W-SB/36 1.51 0.65 0.65 0.00
7232 W-SB/58 1.03 0.61 0.61 0.00
7234 W-SB/3x36 0.95 0.69 0.69 0.00
Metal case ceilings Fixing accessories for mounting in

Angle sections based on the dimensions of longitudinal lumi- metal case ceilings
naires ensure the safe retention of TRILUX luminaires 72 in 1 set (2 pieces) angle brackets.
those ceilings where the clamping profiles of metal cases 07200/36 for luminaires
are parallel to the luminaire front planes. 72236, 72336,
07200/58 for luminaires
72258, 72358.
313

Damp or corrosive environ- W mm opening/mm W mm opening/mm
ments and clean rooms with 7222 W-RPV/36 2x36 312.5 1226x291 12.2 7224 W-RPV/3x18 3x18 625 603x603 11.5
increased hygienic require- 7222 W-RPV/58 2x58 312.5 1526x291 15.8 7224 W-RPV/3xTC36 3xTC-L36 625 603x603 12.3
ments, e.g. operating thea- 7232 W-RPV/36 2x36 300 1176x278 11.6 7234 W-RPV/3x18 3x18 600 578x578 11.0
tres, zones adjacent to oper- 7232 W-RPV/58 2x58 300 1476x278 15.2
ating theatres and intensive-
care units. Recommended
for DSE applications.

openings.
Optical system
Luminaire cover made of
highly-resistant toughened
safety glass with white-coat-
ed aluminium frame. Resist-
ant to disinfectants and
intensive UV radiation. Inter-
nal spring-tensioned contact
clips automatically provide
earth continuity.
4 x 18 W and 4 x 36 W ver-
sions are available upon
request.
Parabolic louvre RPV

Internal, highly-specular.
Luminance limited to
angle 60. Louvre made
of anodised aluminium with a
Luminaire body
ceiling void against dust and No. 2179 No. 2179
moisture by surrounding seal DIN 5040: A50 DIN 5040: A50
in luminaire rim, in ageing- CIBSE BZ: CIBSE BZ:
resistant foam rubber. BZ2 BZ2
NBN L 14-002: NBN L 14-002:
BZ2/1.25/BZ1 BZ2
(/3x18) or 5-pole plug-in
With low-loss ballasts. Mains
supply and further wiring by
means of two grommets.

e.g. 7222 W-RPV/36 E.

production sites subject to Luminance limitation Geometrical arrangements
fire hazards caused by dust Monitors are also used in operating Longitudinal clean-room luminaires 72 can be installed by
and fibrous substance. theatres, wake-up zones and intensive- means of stable recess frames as non-interrupted continu-
care units. Clean-room luminaires in ous lines or rectangular and/or square configurations in gyp-
Indications Page RPV version offer luminance limitation sum plaster ceilings. Detailed description can be found in
Emergency light 428 at L 200 cd/m2 at reference angle the clean-room luminaires catalogue, available upon request.
Lamp characteristics 444 60.
314
W mm opening mm
7224 W-RPV/3x36 3x36 625 1226x603 20.1
7224 W-RPV/3x58 3x58 625 1526x603 26.0
7234 W-RPV/3x36 3x36 600 1176x578 19.1
652d
Data table no. 2179

En 300 lx 500 lx
20 1.5 1.7 2.5 2.8
30 2.2 2.3 3.6 3.9
40 2.8 2.9 4.6 4.9
Area
50 3.4 3.6 5.6 6.1
A
in m2 60 4.0 4.2 6.6 7.1
80 5.3 5.4 8.8 9.1
100 6.4 6.6 11 11
150 9.4 9.7 16 16
200 13 13 21 21

spacings for
g1 = Emin : E 1 : 1.5
CIBSE BZ:
BZ2
Reference M LB L
direct indirect
DLOR ULOR
7222 W-RPV/36 1.45 0.58 0.58 0.00
7222 W-RPV/58 1.00 0.54 0.54 0.00
7224 W-RPV/3x18 2.37 0.59 0.59 0.00
7224 W-RPV/3x36 0.85 0.66 0.66 0.00
7224 W-RPV/3x58 0.58 0.62 0.62 0.00
7224 W-RPV/3xTC36 1.23 0.53 0.53 0.00
7232 W-RPV/36 1.49 0.56 0.56 0.00
7232 W-RPV/58 1.04 0.52 0.52 0.00
7234 W-RPV/3x18 2.42 0.58 0.58 0.00
7234 W-RPV/3x36 0.88 0.64 0.64 0.00
Vacuum plug 40
The vacuum plug facilitates easy
removal of the glass cover for
72 series luminaires.
315
Weather-proof downlights and covers
Application
2911 downlights in combi-
nation with covers 02901A
suitable for use in damp or
corrosive environments and
covered exterior areas.
Optical system
aluminium. With smooth
reflector.
reflector.
Luminaire body
Die-cast aluminium, with inte-
grated bezel ring. Shadow
gap between bezel ring and
reflector rim. Ceiling recess
mounting by means of inte-
grated swivel brackets.
Luminaire+covers* W opening/mm Luminaire+covers* W opening/mm
Electrical connection 2911/TCD18 2911/TCD18
Luminaires supplied ready + 02901 WA 1xTC-D18/G24d-2 224 2.0 + 02901 CA 1xTC-D18/G24d-2 224 2.0
for connection. With 5-pole 2911/TCT26 2911/TCT26
plug-in connection terminal + 02901 WA 1xTC-T26/GX24d-3 224 3.0 + 02901 CA 1xTC-T26/GX24d-3 224 3.0
and strain relief system for * Optical accessories to be ordered separately. * Optical accessories to be ordered separately.
terminal. Sealing and me-
chanical protection of the
cable by means of grom-

e.g. 2911/TCT26 E.

temperatures and IP 54 in TC-T(EL) No. 2117 TC-T(EL) No. 2117
combination with covers, DIN 5040: A60 DIN 5040: A60
versions E are suitable for CIBSE BZ: CIBSE BZ:
production sites subject to BZ1 BZ1
fire hazards caused by dust NBN L 14-002: NBN L 14-002:
BZ2 BZ2
Optical accessory
1 piece, transparent float
glass, integrated in spherical
bezel ring, to be fixed with-
out tools in basic downlights
2911 to achieve IP 54
all-round. Safe retention by
means of spring catches.
02901 CA With chrome
decorative bezel ring.
02901 WA With white
decorative bezel ring.
Rapid mounting Mounting plate

2911 downlights are rapidly and easily 1 piece, sheet steel, 1 mm, fully galvanised, for recess
Indications Page set into place with swivel brackets. mounting of downlights in system ceilings or in closed ceil-
Downlights IP 20/IP 44 20 After this, the swivel brackets are ings (wood, gypsum plaster, etc.) with low load-bearing
Concrete sealed swung out and fixed down into place capability or little impression resistance.
housing 319 by a screwdriver. 02900/625 for 291, for ceilings in module 625 mm.
Lamp characteristics 444 02900/600 for 291, for ceilings in module 600 mm.
316
Luminaire+covers* W opening/mm Luminaire+covers* W opening/mm
2911 B/TCD18 2911 B/TCD18
+ 02901 WA 1xTC-D18/G24d-2 224 2.0 + 02901 CA 1xTC-D18/G24d-2 224 2.0
2911 B/TCT26 2911 B/TCT26
+ 02901 WA 1xTC-T26/GX24d-3 224 3.0 + 02901 CA 1xTC-T26/GX24d-3 224 3.0 652d (o
* Optical accessories to be ordered separately. * Optical accessories to be ordered separately. Degree of protection IP 54
Data table no. 2117

En 100 lx 200 lx
20 5.4 6.1 11 12
30 7.7 8.3 15 17
40 9.9 11 20 21
Area
50 12 13 24 26
A
in m2 60 14 15 28 30
80 19 19 37 39
100 23 24 46 47
150 34 35 67 69
200 44 46 89 91
TC-T(EL) TC-T(EL)

spacings for
g1 = Emin : E 1 : 1.5
CIBSE BZ: CIBSE BZ:
BZ2 BZ2
Reference M LB L
direct indirect
DLOR ULOR
2911/TCD18
+ 02901 CA 1.00 0.44 0.44 0.00
2911/TCD18
+ 02901 WA 1.00 0.44 0.44 0.00
2911/TCT26
+ 02901 CA 0.48 0.62 0.62 0.00
2911/TCT26
+ 02901 WA 0.48 0.62 0.62 0.00
2911 B/TCD18
+ 02901 CA 1.00 0.44 0.44 0.00
2911 B/TCD18
+ 02901 WA 1.00 0.44 0.44 0.00
2911 B/TCT26
+ 02901 CA 0.48 0.62 0.62 0.00
2911 B/TCT26
+ 02901 WA 0.48 0.62 0.62 0.00
Mounting case 02900/284

1 piece, sheet steel, 1 mm, white, with press-folded sides
and integrated angle brackets to be used when mounting
downlights 2911 in strip ceilings in 100 mm module with
16 mm shadow gap. Ceiling recess opening 284 x 284 mm.
317
Weather-proof downlights and Fresnel lenses
Application
2911 downlights in combi-
nation with Fresnel lens
02901F suitable for use
in damp or corrosive envi-
ronments and covered exte-
rior areas.
Optical system
made of post-anodised
high-purity aluminium. With
smooth reflector.
reflector.
Luminaire body
Die-cast aluminium, with inte-
grated bezel ring. Shadow Reference Lamps/socket Recess kg Reference Lamps/socket Recess kg
gap between bezel ring and Luminaire+Fresnel lens* W opening/mm Luminaire+Fresnel lens* W opening/mm
reflector rim. Ceiling recess 2911/TCD18 2911/TCD18
mounting by means of inte- + 02901 W-FT 1xTC-D18/G24d-2 224 2.5 + 02901 C-FT 1xTC-D18/G24d-2 224 2.5
grated swivel brackets.
2911/TCT26 2911/TCT26
+ 02901 W-FT 1xTC-T26/GX24d-3 224 3.6 + 02901 C-FT 1xTC-T26/GX24d-3 224 3.6
Luminaires supplied ready 2911 B/TCD18 2911 B/TCD18
for connection. With 5-pole + 02901 W-FT 1xTC-D18/G24d-2 224 2.5 + 02901 C-FT 1xTC-D18/G24d-2 224 2.5
plug-in connection terminal 2911 B/TCT26 2911 B/TCT26
and strain relief system for + 02901 W-FT 1xTC-T26/GX24d-3 224 3.6 + 02901 C-FT 1xTC-T26/GX24d-3 224 3.6
mains supply and further wir- * Fresnel lens accessories to be ordered separately. * Fresnel lens accessories to be ordered separately.
terminal. Sealing and me-
chanical protection of the
cable by means of grom-

e.g. 2911/TCT26 E.

temperatures and IP 54 in
combination with Fresnel TC-T(EL) No. 2118 TC-T(EL) No. 2118
lenses, versions E are DIN 5040: A50 DIN 5040: A50
suitable for production sites CIBSE BZ: CIBSE BZ:
subject to fire hazards BZ1/4/BZ2 BZ1/4/BZ2
caused by dust and fibrous NBN L 14-002: NBN L 14-002:
BZ2 BZ2
substance.
Fresnel lens accessories

1 piece, made of silicate
glass, integrated into spher-
ical decorative bezel ring,
white (W) or chrome
(C). To be fixed without
tools in downlights 2911
to achieve IP 54 all-round.
Safe retention by means of
spring catches.
02901FT transparent, to
intensify the narrow-angle
distribution effect.
02901FS frosted, for
optical accentuation of the
downlight with additional
light scattering effect.
Fresnel lenses IP 54 all-round
Four versions are available. The transparent versions intensi- The fully closed luminaire body made of corrosion-resistant
Indications Page fy the narrow-angle effect of the reflector, the frosted ver- die-cast aluminium offers protection against the ingression
Downlights IP 20/IP 44 20 sions on the other hand accentuate the 2911 downlights of dust and humidity in the ceiling void. IP 54 all-round is
Mounting plates 316 with an additional light scattering effect. The lenses are assured thanks to Fresnel lenses or transparent float glass
Mounting cases 317 optionally available in combination with white or chrome covers (see page 316).
Lamp characteristics 444 decorative bezel rings.
318
Luminaire+Fresnel lens* W opening/mm Luminaire+Fresnel lens* W opening/mm
2911/TCD18 2911/TCD18
+ 02901 W-FS 1xTC-D18/G24d-2 224 2.5 + 02901 C-FS 1xTC-D18/G24d-2 224 2.5
2911/TCT26 2911/TCT26
+ 02901 W-FS 1xTC-T26/GX24d-3 224 3.6 + 02901 C-FS 1xTC-T26/GX24d-3 224 3.6
2911 B/TCD18 2911 B/TCD18
+ 02901 W-FS 1xTC-D18/G24d-2 224 2.5 + 02901 C-FS 1xTC-D18/G24d-2 224 2.5
2911 B/TCT26 2911 B/TCT26
+ 02901 W-FS 1xTC-T26/GX24d-3 224 3.6 + 02901 C-FS 1xTC-T26/GX24d-3 224 3.6 652d (o
* Fresnel lens accessories to be ordered separately. * Fresnel lens accessories to be ordered separately. Degree of protection IP 54
Data table no. 2118

En 100 lx 200 lx
20 6.7 7.6 13 15
30 9.4 10 19 21
40 12 13 24 26
Area
50 15 16 29 32
A
in m2 60 17 18 34 37
80 22 24 45 47
100 27 29 54 57
150 40 41 79 83
200 52 54 104 108
TC-T(EL) TC-T(EL)

spacings for
g1 = Emin : E 1 : 1.5
CIBSE BZ: CIBSE BZ:
BZ3 BZ3
Reference M LB L
direct indirect
Dry DLOR ULOR
2911/TCD18
environments + 02901 FS 1.00 0.39 0.39 0.00
2911/TCD18
In case of IP 20/ + 02901 FT 0.90 0.43 0.43 0.00
IP 44 applications, 2911/TCT26
+ 02901 FS 0.49 0.53 0.53 0.00
290 series 2911/TCT26
+ 02901 FT 0.45 0.58 0.58 0.00
TRILUX downlights 2911 B/TCD18
offer an excellent + 02901 FS 1.00 0.39 0.39 0.00
2911 B/TCD18
all-round package + 02901 FT 0.90 0.43 0.43 0.00
and convince with 2911 B/TCT26
+ 02901 FS 0.49 0.53 0.53 0.00
specific charac- 2911 B/TCT26
+ 02901 FT 0.45 0.58 0.58 0.00
teristics such as
versatile decora- Technical information see page 440.
tive accessories
and particularly
high-quality mate-
rials. Description
Sealed housing 02900/150 from page 16 on.
1 piece, sheet steel, fully galvanised, with two connection
openings 37 mm as well as four fixing brackets, to be
fixed on the panel with nails. Total height 150 mm. For
recess mounting of downlights 2911.
319
Sports hall Luminaires for sports halls
must be resistant to ball
luminaires impact. All TRILUX sports
hall luminaires are therefore
tested using our facilities
simulating ball impact.
Surface-mounted sports hall

luminaires are also available
in versions for T5 lamps in
80 W. These lumen-rich sys-
tems are especially recom-
mended for sports facilities RWS
where increased illuminance Stable louvre made of sheet
values are required in con- steel with integrated strength-
formance with the new har- ening rods and highly-reflec-
monised standard EN 12193. tive white coating. A uniform
light distribution and high
working efficiencies are the
photometric characteristics.
Page 322/326
320
RST PSN WINLIGHT Q Floodlights LIGHTGATE
Post-anodised specular louvre Ball-impact-resistant pris- The compact industrial lumi- The catalogue Flood- Intelligent lighting
RST with graduated concave- matic cover, safely retained naires WINLIGHT Q for high- lights for sports and management
profiled cross blades for a in aluminium frame, creates pressure lamps embody a working facilities, reduces energy
narrow/wide-angle light dis- application-oriented, narrow/ lighting alternative to sys- traffic installations consumption in
tribution. Strengthening rods wide-angle light distributions, tems for fluorescent lamps. and accentuation sports halls thanks
cause higher mechanical effectively supported by Resistant to ball impact lighting contains to daylight-depend-
stability and prevent tennis internal, highly-specular when combined with covers. clearly arranged ent regulation and
balls from getting stuck in reflectors. Description in the section product information. presence detection.
the louvre cells. Industrial luminaires.
Catalogue available Catalogue available
upon request. upon request.
Page 322/326 Page 324/326 Page 422
321
Surface-mounted luminaires, resistant to ball impact,
with white louvre RWS or
specular cross-blade louvre RST
Application Reference Lamps D D1 D2 D3 D4 E1 kg Reference Lamps D D1 D2 D3 D4 E1 kg

Ball-impact-resistant lumi- W mm W mm
naires for sports halls, tennis 5062 RWS/58 2x58 1200 174 150 349 600 75 13.7 5063 RWS/58 3x58 1200 174 280 349 600 210 18.2
halls and multi-purpose halls. 5062 RWS/80 E 2x80 1200 174 150 349 600 75 11.8 5063 RWS/80 E 3x80 1200 174 280 349 600 210 15.1
Optical system
Direct.
RWS
Louvre made of solvent-free
powder-coated sheet steel,
tribution.
RST
Specular louvre with gradu-
ated, concave-profiled cross
blades, made of post-anod-
ised aluminium, oxide film
thickness 8 m, no dis-
turbing iridescence phenom-
ena, insensitive to soiling,
long-time stable reflection
characteristics.

out tools.
Luminaire body
sheet steel, white. With front-
plane knock-out openings
for heat-resistant through-
wiring.
for wires up to 2.5 mm2 and
additional earth connection
terminal. /58 with low-loss
ballasts, /80 E with elec- T8 No. 2119 T8 No. 2119
tronic control gear (E). DIN 5040: A50 DIN 5040: A50
CIBSE BZ: CIBSE BZ:
Luminaires /58 can also BZ2/1.5/BZ3/2/BZ2/2.5 BZ2/1.5/BZ3/2/BZ2/2.5
be supplied with non-dim- NBN L 14-002: NBN L 14-002:
BZ3 BZ3
mable or /58, /80 lumi-
naires also with dimmable
electronic control gear, ref-
erence suffix E for non-
gear or ED for dimmable
e.g. 5063 RST/80 ED.
Indications Page
Through-wiring set 328 T5 fluorescent lamps
Trunking 328 Increased lighting requirements for
Planning suggestions 329 many sports disciplines have to be
Emergency light 428 met according to the new standard
Lighting management EN 12193. In most of these cases T5
system 431 fluorescent lamps in lumen-rich version
Lamp characteristics 444 are recommended.
322
Reference Lamps D D1 D2 D3 D4 E1 kg Reference Lamps D D1 D2 D3 D4 E1 kg
W mm W mm
5062 RST/58 2x58 1200 174 150 349 600 75 12.3 5063 RST/58 3x58 1200 174 280 349 600 210 17.0
5062 RST/80 E 2x80 1200 174 150 349 600 75 10.4 5063 RST/80 E 3x80 1200 174 280 349 600 210 13.9
652de
Data table no. 2119

En 300 lx 500 lx
200 14 15 23 25
400 25 27 42 45
600 36 38 60 64
Area
800 48 49 79 82
A
in m2 1000 58 60 97 100
1200 69 70 115 117
1400 80 82 133 137
1600 90 93 150 155
1800 100 103 167 172
T8 T8

spacings for
g1 = Emin : E 1 : 1.5
CIBSE BZ: CIBSE BZ:
BZ2 BZ2
Reference M LB L
direct indirect
DLOR ULOR
5062 RST/58 1.00 0.61 0.61 0.00
5062 RST/80 E 0.87 0.59 0.59 0.00
5062 RWS/58 0.91 0.70 0.70 0.00
5062 RWS/80 E 0.73 0.70 0.70 0.00
5063 RST/58 0.69 0.61 0.61 0.00
5063 RST/80 E 0.57 0.60 0.60 0.00
5063 RWS/58 0.60 0.70 0.70 0.00
5063 RWS/80 E 0.49 0.70 0.70 0.00
Luminaire alignment
Very good visual conditions are
achieved when sports hall luminaires
are turned around their longitudinal axis
in the direction of the court. These
turning angles can be easily realised
by means of angle sections.
323
Surface-mounted luminaires, resistant to ball impact,
with prismatic cover PSN
Application
Ball-impact-resistant lumi-
naires for sports halls, tennis
halls, squash halls and multi-
purpose halls.
Optical system
Direct.
PSN
PLEXIGLAS prismatic cover
with photometrically effec-
tive prisms, retained in alu-
minium frame which can be
hung for maintenance pur-
poses. With highly-specular,
anodised reflectors for nar-
bution.
Luminaire body
wiring.
terminal. /58 with low-loss
ballasts, /80 E with elec-
Luminaires /58 can also

be supplied with non-dim-
mable or /58, /80 also
with dimmable electronic
electronic control gear or
e.g. 5063 PSN/58 ED.
Indications Page
Through-wiring set 328 T5 fluorescent lamps LIGHTGATE
Trunking 328 Increased lighting requirements for LIGHTGATE stands for an energy-saving lighting manage-
Planning suggestions 329 many sports disciplines have to be ment system preferably used with TRILUX luminaires
Emergency light 428 met according to the new standard equipped with dimmable electronic control gear. LIGHTGATE
Lighting management EN 12193. In most of these cases T5 embodies an individual, manually operated lighting control
system 431 fluorescent lamps in lumen-rich version and a daylight-dependent regulation with integrated pres-
Lamp characteristics 444 are recommended. ence detection, see page 431.
324
Reference Lamps D D1 D2 D3 D4 E1 kg Reference Lamps D D1 D2 D3 D4 E1 kg
W mm W mm
5062 PSN/58 2x58 1200 174 150 349 600 75 11.9 5063 PSN/58 3x58 1200 174 280 349 600 210 16.5
5062 PSN/80 E 2x80 1200 174 150 349 600 75 10.1 5063 PSN/80 E 3x80 1200 174 280 349 600 210 13.4
652de
Data table no. 2120

En 300 lx 500 lx
200 16 17 26 29
400 28 30 46 50
600 39 42 66 70
Area
800 51 54 86 89
A
in m2 1000 63 65 104 109
1200 74 76 124 127
1400 85 89 142 149
1600 96 100 161 167
1800 107 111 179 186
T8 T8

spacings for
g1 = Emin : E 1 : 1.5
CIBSE BZ: CIBSE BZ:
BZ3 BZ3
Reference M LB L
direct indirect
DLOR ULOR
5062 PSN/58 1.00 0.61 0.61 0.00
5062 PSN/80 E 0.81 0.61 0.61 0.00
5063 PSN/58 0.66 0.62 0.62 0.00
5063 PSN/80 E 0.54 0.61 0.61 0.00
Ball-impact-resistant prismatic Squash halls

covers Sports hall luminaires with PLEXIGLAS
unite high mechanical safety and appli- covers have proved suitable for use in
cation-optimised photometrics. In com- squash courts. The prismatic cover
bination with internal reflector systems with its impact-absorbing mounting reli-
they create the conditions for good ably withstands all contacts with balls.
glare-limitation and high efficiency.
325
Recessed luminaires, resistant to ball impact,
with white louvre RWS, specular cross-blade louvre RST or
with prismatic cover PSN
Application Reference Lamps Recess kg Reference Lamps Recess kg

Sports halls and multi- W opening/mm W opening/mm
purpose halls. 3662 RWS/58 2x58 1540x291 11.5 3662 RST/58 2x58 1540x291 11.4
PSN: also for squash halls
Optical system
RWS
Louvre made of solvent-free
powder-coated sheet steel,
tribution.
RST
Specular louvre with gradu-
ated, concave-profiled cross
blades, made of post-anod-
ised aluminium, oxide film
thickness 8 m, no dis-
turbing iridescence phenom-
ena, insensitive to soiling,
long-time stable reflection
characteristics. Louvre re-
tention by means of spring-
tensioned clips providing
earth continuity. Louvre can
be lowered and hung from
either side without tools.
PSN
PLEXIGLAS prismatic cover
with photometrically effec-
tive prisms, retained in alu-
minium frame which can be
hung for maintenance pur-
poses. With highly-specular,
anodised reflectors for nar-
bution.
Luminaire body
wiring.
No. 2121 No. 2121
Electrical connection DIN 5040: A50 DIN 5040: A50
Luminaires supplied ready CIBSE BZ: CIBSE BZ:
for connection. With 4-pole BZ2/1.5/BZ3/2/BZ2/2.5 BZ1
plug-in connection terminal NBN L 14-002: NBN L 14-002:
BZ3 BZ2
lasts.

plied with non-dimmable or
with dimmable electronic
electronic control gear or
e.g. 3662 RST/58 ED.
Recessed sports hall lumi-

naires for T5 lamps 80 W
available upon request.
Indications Page Ball impact resistance Spring-tensioned contact clips

Through-wiring set 328 High stability is required in sports halls. This tried-and-tested TRILUX security lock minimises mount-
Planning suggestions 329 TRILUX sports hall luminaires are re- ing and maintenance costs and automatically provides earth
Emergency light 428 sistant to ball impact and are accord- continuity. The louvres of luminaires resistant to ball impact
Lighting management ingly labelled. are extra secured against falling down by means of pivotable
system 431 locking latches.
326
3663 RST/58 3x58 1540x428 16.4 3762 PSN/58 2x58 1540x291 11.4
3763 PSN/58 3x58 1540x428 16.3
652de
RWS, RST: Degree of protection IP 20
PSN: Degree of protection IP 40
Data table no. 2121

En 300 lx 500 lx
200 15 16 24 26
400 26 28 44 47
600 38 40 63 66
Area
800 49 51 82 85
A
in m2 1000 60 62 101 104
1200 72 73 120 122
1400 83 86 138 143
1600 94 97 156 161
1800 104 108 174 180

spacings for
g1 = Emin : E 1 : 1.5
CIBSE BZ: CIBSE BZ:
BZ2 BZ3
Reference M LB L
direct indirect
DLOR ULOR
3662 RST/58 1.00 0.61 0.61 0.00
3662 RWS/58 0.87 0.70 0.70 0.00
3663 RST/58 0.67 0.61 0.61 0.00
3762 PSN/58 0.99 0.62 0.62 0.00
3763 PSN/58 0.66 0.62 0.62 0.00
Universal plug-in socket 545/E14 Twin-lamp version

The universal plug-in socket 545/E14 for incandescent Ball-impact-resistant twin-lamp luminaires create the best
lamps and compact fluorescent lamps with integrated elec- conditions for a uniform light distribution and cost-minimised
tronic control gear also enables retrofitting of individual lou- operation, preferably if illuminances of up to 300 lx are
vre luminaires into combined emergency luminaires. The required.
system can be attached at the front planes of the lateral
reflectors.
327
Trunking 110N
for sports and tennis halls
Trunking
mounting
In sports or ten-
nis halls it is often not possi- 112
ble or not advisable to install
the surface luminaires directly
to the ceiling of the hall.
111
This is the case when a con-
tinuous mounting surface for 110N/155
continuous lines is not given 110N/310
because of ceiling joists or
sky lights or when a luminaire 113N
arrangement directed towards
the court offers photometric
advantages, especially in
tennis halls.
In these cases, the mounting

of the luminaires as non-
interrupted or interrupted
continuous line to trunkings
is recommended. TRILUX
sports hall luminaires of the Reference Designation L x W x H mm kg
506 series are therefore
110N/155 1 pair of angle sections for one luminaire length 58 W or 80 W 1550 x 35 x 35 4.0
connected to the angle sec-
110N/310 1 pair of angle sections for two luminaire lengths 58 W or 80 W 3100 x 35 x 35 8.0
tions 110N. Even with this
mounting type they are tested 111 Angle section suspensions, 1 set per luminaire length 0.2
on ball impact resistance. 112 Link chain G 3.5 x 18, welded and galvanised by the metre 0.2
113N 1 pair of angle section couplings 0.7
Suspension spacings in
accordance with the draft
opposite are to be observed.
Fixing accessories provided
on site (dowels, screws)
must be capable of support-
ing five times the weight of
the luminaires to be mounted
on them, at least 125 kg.
Angle sections 110N/ Link chain 112 Number and arrangement

1 pair, perforated, sendzimir-galvanised. Supplied by the metre, welded and of the chain links
110N/155 one length, 1550 mm long. galvanised. Necessary total length to for inclined suspension
110N/310 two lengths, 3100 mm long. be ordered by the metre.
Use of two-length trunkings for con- Angle for luminaires
tinuous-line mounting is recommended, Angle section coupling 113N 5062 RWS/ 5063 RWS/ No. of
one-length trunkings serve as comple- 1 pair, including fixing components. 5062 RST/ 5063 RST/ chain
tion. 5062 PSN/ 5063 PSN/ links
Counter-balance weight
Angle section suspensions 111 (not illustrated) A B A B total
1 set, consisting of mounting plate with 1 piece, necessary for the following 0 13 13 13 13 27
openable chain link, bottle-screw with luminaires when mounted to trunkings 15 12 14 11 15 27
locking wire for 40 mm height adjust- 110N/. 30 10 16 9 17 27
ment, openable chain link, fast-locking 05063 A/58 for luminaires
chain link, galvanised chain and fixing 5063/58 with low-loss ballasts.
pieces. 05081 AE for luminaires 5063/58 E
with electronic control gear.
Through-wiring sets
Heat-resistant, colour-coded individual
wires 1.5 mm2.
Reference for luminaires Length

3700/3LV/58 58, 80 1750 mm
3700/5LV/58 58, 80 1750 mm
07690/5LV/25m 25 m
328
Lighting of sports halls
Selection of Lighting class I Lighting class II Lighting class III EN 12193

lighting classes The European lighting stand-
ard EN 12193, published in
November 1999, deals with
interior and exterior sports
facilities and aims at good
visual conditions for sports-
men, arbitrators and the
public. The standard also
describes special require-
ments for film and television
recordings.
The requirements specific

for the different sports disci-
plines depend upon the light-
ing class which considers
the competitive level and the
observance distance for the
public:
Lighting class I:
Competitive level
High-performance competi-

International/national tions such as international

Regional and national matches are

generally characterised by a
Local lot of visitors and high visual
Training distances. This class can
also include high-performance
School/leisure sports training.
Minimum requirements Horizontal illuminances, uni- Horizontal illuminances, uni- Horizontal illuminances, uni- Lighting class II:
for the lighting of formity and colour rendering formity and colour rendering formity and colour rendering Competitions on a medium
sports halls level such as regional or
local matches are generally
Eav 1)lx Emin/Eav1) Ra Eav1)lx Emin/Eav1) Ra Eav1)lx Emin/Eav1) Ra characterised by a medium
amount of visitors and
Badminton
medium visual distances.
Ice hockey/figure skating 2)
This class can also include
Fencing
750 0.7 60 500 0.7 60 300 0.7 20 high-performance training.
Hockey
Squash
Lighting class III:
Table tennis
Simple competitions such
Basketball as local or small associa-
Indoor soccer (small field) tions matches are generally
Weight-lifting played without public. This
Handball class also includes general
Judo, kendo, karate 750 0.7 60 500 0.7 60 200 0.5 20 training, general school and
Indoor cycle racing leisure sports.
Wrestling
School sports The requirements as to
Volleyball /fist ball horizontal illuminance, uni-
Aerobics/dancing formity and colour rendering,
Speed ice-scating described in the table oppo-
Climbing site, refer to sports disci-
Climbing (on a climbing wall) plines in indoor sports facili-
Track-and-field sports 500 0.7 60 300 0.6 60 200 0.5 20 ties without film or television
Horseback riding recording.
Sports gymnastics
Roller skating
Gymnastics
Tennis 3) 750 0.7 60 500 0.7 60 300 0.5 20
Archery
Bowling 200 0.5 60 200 0.5 60 200 0.5 60
Shooting
Boccie
Boule 300 0.7 60 200 0.7 60 200 0.5 20
Ptanque
Bowls (short course) 500 0.8 60 500 0.8 60 300 0.5 20 1)
In EN 12193 the medium illuminance is indi-
cated with Eav.
Boxing: ring 2000 0.8 80 1000 0.8 80 500 0.5 60
2)
training area 300 80 300 80 300 60 For light point height under 8 m Emin/Emax 0.5,
for class III also 0.5 is possible.
Curling: house 300 0.7 60 300 0.7 60 300 0.7 60
3)
No luminaires over the pitch and up to 3 m
rink 200 0.7 60 200 0.7 60 200 0.7 60 behind the base-line.
329
Planning examples for the
lighting of sports halls
Planning examples Planning parameters Arrangement Optical systems

The dimensions of sports The calculations originate Sports hall luminaires should RWS
halls are widely standardised. from following marginal con- preferably be installed in Solid louvre made of sheet
L For common single sports ditions: continuous lines, parallel to steel with highly-reflective
H
halls (left table) or triple the longer sides of the hall. powder-coating.
sports halls (right table) Working plane: 0m RST
installation examples for the Reflect. values: 0.5/0.5/0.3 In the planning tables below, Post-anodised aluminium
illuminance levels 750 lx, Light loss factor: 0.8 w1 stands for the distance louvre for narrow/wide-angle
wb11 500 lx and 300 lx are listed Luminous flux (58 W) 5000 lm of the first continuous line to light distribution, insensitive
w b22
11/2 B
in the table below. Luminous flux (80 W) 6150 lm the nearest wall, w2 for the to soiling.
W
2
WB distance dimension of the PSN

Final intensification Evaluation zone for the cal- second continuous line, see Prismatic cover, resistant to
If necessary, the lighting uni- culations in the tables below draft opposite. In case of an ball impact, also to small balls
formity at the front planes of is the standardised volleyball uneven number of continuous with higher kinetic energy,
the hall can also be increased field (24 x 15 m) in the single lines, one continuous line is e.g. squash balls.
by additional luminaires be- hall or the standardised installed in the middle of the
tween the continuous lines. handball field (40 x 20 m) in hall.
the triple hall.
If halls can be split up it can
be mostly assumed that
single parts of the hall are
classified as lighting class III
but the total hall on the other
hand as lighting class I or II.
Single sports halls

L x W x H: 27.0 x 15.0 x 5.5 m Planning results
Louvre version/ Lamp Reference
luminaire cover type 750 lx 500 lx 300 lx

5062 RWS/58 No. of luminaires 3 x 13 = 39 3 x 8 = 24

T8 3662 RWS/58 Illuminance Eav
Luminaire arrangement w1 /w2
501 lx
w1 = 2.2
300 lx
w1 = 2.2
5062 RWS/80 E No. of luminaires 3 x 11 = 33 3 x 7 = 21
T5 Illuminance Eav
508 lx
w1 = 2.1
315 lx
w1 = 2.1
5063 RWS/58 No. of luminaires 3 x 14 = 42 3 x 9 = 27 3 x 6 = 18

T8 Illuminance Eav
770 lx
w1 = 1.8
505 lx
w1 = 2.1
335 lx
w1 = 2.1
5063 RWS/80 E No. of luminaires 3 x 11 = 33 3 x 8 = 24 3 x 5 = 15
T5 Illuminance Eav
751 lx
w1 = 1.8
532 lx
w1 = 1.5
333 lx
w1 = 1.5
5062 RST/58 No. of luminaires 3 x 15 = 45 3 x 9 = 27

T8 3662 RST/58 Illuminance Eav
517 lx
w1 = 2.2
311 lx
w1 = 2.2
5062 RST/80 E No. of luminaires 3 x 12 = 36 3 x 8 = 24
T5 Illuminance Eav
504 lx
w1 = 2.2
329 lx
w1 = 2.2
5063 RST/58 No. of luminaires 3 x 15 = 45 3 x 10 = 30 3 x 6 = 18

771 lx
w1 = 2.1
515 lx
w1 = 2.1
310 lx
w1 = 2.1
5063 RST/80 E No. of luminaires 3 x 12 = 36 3 x 8 = 24 3 x 5 = 15
T5 Illuminance Eav
753 lx
w1 = 2.1
503 lx
w1 = 2.1
313 lx
w1 = 2.1
5062 PSN/58 No. of luminaires 3 x 15 = 45 3 x 10 = 30

T8 3762 PSN/58 Illuminance Eav
501 lx
w1 = 2.2
326 lx
w1 = 2.2
5062 PSN/80 E No. of luminaires 3 x 12 = 36 3 x 8 = 24
T5 Illuminance Eav
501 lx
w1 = 2.2
325 lx
w1 = 2.2
5063 PSN/58 No. of luminaires 3 x 15 = 45 3 x 10 = 30 3 x 6 = 18

751 lx
w1 = 2.2
507 lx
w1 = 2.2
302 lx
w1 = 2.2
5063 PSN/80 E No. of luminaires 3 x 12 = 36 3 x 8 = 24 3 x 5 = 15
T5 Illuminance Eav
739 lx
w1 = 2.2
502 lx
w1 = 2.2
307 lx
w1 = 2.2
330
Multiple contact switching Lighting management LIGHTGATE controllers are Ball impact resistance Ball impact resistance test
Triple-lamp TRILUX sports Further possibilities for light- usually installed in subvisions Sports halls do not only Sports hall luminaires must
hall luminaires with low-loss ing control and regulation outside the luminaires. The require photometric but also be resistant to ball impact
ballasts and electronic control arise in combination with the sensors are also installed mechanical quality. Lumi- and are therefore tested
gear can be connected in energy-saving lighting man- outside the luminaires or naires for sports halls must using our facilities simulating
series. The lighting level e.g. agement system LIGHTGATE, in the sports hall ceiling in be resistant to ball impact. ball impact. After 36 shots
in 750 lx installations can see page 431. combination with ball impact with impact speeds of
thus be reduced to 500 lx. protection covers. A further This demand is met by all 54 km/h or around 35 mph
The system version requirement are dimmable TRILUX sports hall luminaires the luminaires must not
Twin-lamp luminaires can LIGHTGATE LG 31, which luminaires. All TRILUX sports mounted in or to solid ceil- show sign of severe damage
be connected in series in is adjustable to the three set hall luminaires are available ings or substructures as well or have lost luminaire com-
combination with inductive values 750 lx, 500 lx and with dimmable electronic as for suspended mounting ponents. Furthermore, while
ballasts. This is not possible 300 lx typical for sports halls, control gear, reference suffix using the appropriate trunk- lamp failure is permissible,
for standard twin-lamp lumi- saves energy by considering ED. ings 110N, see page 328. lamp fracture is naturally
naires with electronic control the sensored daylight com- prohibited.
gear because twin-lamp ponent. Further saving potential
electronic control gear is results from presence detec-
used. tion, another function of the
LIGHTGATE system.
Triple sports halls

L x W x H: 45.0 x 27.0 x 7.0 m Planning results

5062 RWS/58 No. of luminaires 5 x 24 = 120 4 x 18 = 72

T8 3662 RWS/58 Illuminance Eav
542 lx
w1 = 1.8 w2 = 7.2
314 lx
w1 = 1.8 w2 = 9.5
5062 RWS/80 E No. of luminaires 4 x 24 = 96 4 x 15 = 60
T5 Illuminance Eav
5 x 27 = 135
753 lx 524 lx
w1 = 1.8 w2 = 9.5
326 lx
w1 = 1.8 w2 = 9.5
w1 = 1.8 w2 = 7.2
5063 RWS/58 No. of luminaires 5 x 24 = 120 4 x 21 = 84 4 x 12 = 48
T8 Illuminance Eav
814 lx
w1 = 1.8 w2 = 7.2
549 lx
w1 = 1.8 w2 = 9.5
314 lx
w1 = 1.8 w2 = 9.5
5063 RWS/80 E No. of luminaires 5 x 18 = 90 4 x 15 = 60 4 x 9 = 36
T5 Illuminance Eav
777 lx
w1 = 2.3 w2 = 7.9
509 lx
w1 = 2.3 w2 = 9.5
306 lx
w1 = 2.3 w2 = 9.5
5062 RST/58 No. of luminaires 5 x 24 = 120 4 x 21 = 84
510 lx
w1 = 2.3 w2 = 7.9
338 lx
w1 = 2.3 w2 = 9.5
5062 RST/80 E No. of luminaires 4 x 27 = 108 4 x 15 = 60
T5 Illuminance Eav
524 lx
w1 = 2.3 w2 = 9.5
301 lx
w1 = 2.3 w2 = 9.5
5063 RST/58 No. of luminaires 5 x 24 = 120 4 x 21 = 84 4 x 15 = 60
766 lx
w1 = 2.3 w2 = 7.9
508 lx
w1 = 2.3 w2 = 9.5
362 lx
w1 = 2.3 w2 = 9.5
5063 RST/80 E No. of luminaires 5 x 21 = 105 4 x 18 = 72 4 x 12 = 48
T5 Illuminance Eav
806 lx
w1 = 2.3 w2 = 7.9
528 lx
w1 = 2.3 w2 = 9.5
352 lx
w1 = 2.3 w2 = 9.5
5062 PSN/58 No. of luminaires 5 x 24 = 120 4 x 21 = 84
503 lx
w1 = 2.3 w2 = 9.5
330 lx
w1 = 2.3 w2 = 9.5
5062 PSN/80 E No. of luminaires 4 x 27 = 108 4 x 18 = 72
T5 Illuminance Eav
523 lx
w1 = 2.3 w2 = 9.5
347 lx
w1 = 2.3 w2 = 9.5
5063 PSN/58 No. of luminaires 5 x 24 = 120 4 x 21 = 84 4 x 12 = 48
757 lx
w1 = 2.3 w2 = 7.9
504 lx
w1 = 2.3 w2 = 9.5
301 lx
w1 = 2.6 w2 = 9.5
5063 PSN/80 E No. of luminaires 4 x 27 = 108 4 x 18 = 72 4 x 12 = 48
T5 Illuminance Eav
785 lx
w1 = 2.3 w2 = 9.5
521 lx
w1 = 2.3 w2 = 9.5
347 lx
w1 = 2.3 w2 = 9.5
331
Planning examples for the
lighting of tennis halls
Standard demands Luminaires for tennis halls The luminaires are arranged three luminaires at a light Planning parameters
EN 12193 defines the refer- Due to the diameter of tennis parallel to the ceiling, tilted point height of 5.0 m with a The calculations are based
ence area for indoor tennis balls at 63.5 to 66 mm, at angle = 30 to the distance of approx. 3.40 m on the following assumptions:
as an area with the dimen- the spacing between cross court. to the base-line.
sions 36 m x 18 m for each blades of louvre luminaires Working plane: 0m
court. For the lighting class- for tennis halls has to be A uniform light distribution Reflect. values: 0.5/0.5/0.3
es I /II /III, illuminance levels appropriately reduced, this across the playing area is Light loss factor: 0.8
of 750 lx/500 lx/ 300 lx being 60 mm maximum in achieved by arranging two or
with a uniformity of 0.7 the case of TRILUX louvre
(class I, II) or 0.5 (class III) luminaires for sports halls. S
are required there. This means that all TRILUX
louvre luminaires for sports
Arrangement halls can be used for tennis
Luminaires in tennis halls halls.
5,0
must be arranged as conti-
nuous lines, both parallel to Planning examples
the side lines (outside of The planning examples below
H1
the court) as well as parallel were developed for halls with
to the ceiling, for adequate two courts. The indicated
lighting of balls that are photometric values can be 3,2
served high. The luminaires used as approximate values 8,6 12,4

must be mounted along their for tennis halls with other
main axis, tilted at angle dimensions. 23,77
4,2
to the court. 36,6 36,6
Maangaben
Dimensions in m
12,4 Ceiling inclination = 15
Dachneigung
Lichtband-Drehwinkel
Continuous-line = 30
angle of tilt
3,2
Tennis halls
with 2 courts L x W: 36.6 x 36.6 m 1) Planning results
No. of luminaires 8 x 8 + 4 x 2 = 72
T8 5062 RWS/58

Illuminance Eav 318 lx

3662 RWS/58
Luminaire arrangement H1/S H1 = 4.9 m S = 10.7 m
T5 5062 RWS/80 E


T8 5063 RWS/58


T5 5063 RWS/80 E


T8 5062 RST/58


3662 RST/58
T5 5062 RST/80 E


T8 5063 RST/58


3663 RST/58
T5 5063 RST/80 E


T8 5062 PSN/58


3762 PSN/58
T5 5062 PSN/80 E


T8 5063 PSN/58


3763 PSN/58
T5 5063 PSN/80 E


1)
Dimensions single court L x W: 23.77 x 10.97 m
332
Indoor sports disciplines with
special lighting requirements
Due to their extensive diver-

sity, many sports activities
are not possible without
artificial lighting. Depending
on the sports discipline
totally different visual tasks
and conditions have to be
observed, thus resulting in
sports-type-specific lighting
requirements, e.g. as defined
by the recent standard
EN 12193. Moreover, various
other recommendations
might have to be observed,
e.g. those of the UEFA, the
FIFA and other sports organi-
sations.
Also the partly special ambi-

ent conditions determine
the luminaire selection.
In addition to the luminaire
systems resistant to ball
impact described in the
section for sports halls,
luminaires from different
product groups are recom-
mended for some kinds of
sports disciplines as well.
Luminaires for
special indoor sports disciplines These TRILUX luminaire
Sports disciplines Product group/series Remarks series are listed in the table
opposite with direct refer-
Badminton ence to the specific sports
discipline. They are docu-
mented on the indicated
pages in this catalogue or
260 268 396 in the exterior lighting cata-
Bowling Batten luminaires for cove lighting. logue 99/12 Floodlights
Archery Additional covers might be required for for sports and working
Shooting diffuser and louvre luminaires. facilities, traffic installations
and accentuation lighting.
152 260 420
Boxing (ring) TRILUX floodlights MAXILUX, see catalogue
99/12.
8
Ice hockey Weather-proof luminaires for fluorescent
Ice figure skating lamps are recommended for halls with
Speed ice-skating ceiling heights of up to approx. 7 m.
Roller-skating TRILUX floodlights RECTALUX and
OPTILUX, see catalogue 99/12.
286 11 15
Gymnastics Sports hall luminaires resistant to ball
impact, see page 320.
152 260
Indoor cycling TRILUX floodlights RECTALUX and
11 15
Horseback riding In case of ammonia atmospheres, please
contact your local TRILUX support centre.
TRILUX floodlights RECTALUX and
286 11 15
Schwimming Increased number of lamps/luminaires
might be necessary in the diving area. In
case of corrosive atmospheres, please
contact your local TRILUX support centre.
286 284 422
Numbers in the illustrations refer to the corresponding pages in the catalogue or in brochures.
333
Continuous-line luminaires, TRILUX industrial systems
and individual luminaires
batten luminaires, characterised by rapid and
easy installation create the
WINLIGHT Q best conditions for demand-
oriented, economic lighting.
Depending on the equipment
level, these luminaires are
suitable for use in different
areas such as simple stor-
age facilities, high halls or
for precision mounting with
sophisticated visual tasks. DELTA
The rapid-mounting continu-
ous-line system DELTA for
T5 and T8 lamps is based
on reflector profiles with
integrated trunking function.
DELTA is also predestined
for architecture-oriented
applications thanks to its
modern design concept.
Page 336
334
E-LINE 796 1615, 6141 WINLIGHT Q Floodlights
The modular rapid-mounting The solid, rapid-mounting Individual batten luminaires High lumen packages char- TRILUX offers a comprehen-
continuous-line system con- continuous-line system 796 are used in areas with acterise 798 industrial sive range of floodlights
sists of individual compo- with covers in chemically- uncomplicated visual tasks. luminaires. Recommended for sports and working
nents suitable for function- resistant silicate glass is Battens can be arranged as for the lighting of higher facilities, traffic installations
and task-oriented combina- predestined for workplaces totally conform reflector lumi- halls and covered exterior and accentuation lighting.
tion. Four different reflector with an increased degree of naires by means of optionally areas. Symmetrical or Detailed planning and prod-
types and versatile optical pollution. 3-lamp versions available accessories. asymmetrical optics enable uct information are featured
accessories offer an exten- with specular reflectors are demand-oriented lighting. in the corresponding cata-
sive planning scope. available for increased light logues which are available
requirements. upon request.
335
The concept for an attractive continuous-line design
Design perspectives
DELTA embodies a futuristic
construction principle within
the sector of rapid-mounting
continuous-line systems:
cross-section-optimised,
extremely stable base units
specially conceived for T5
fluorescent lamps with a
diameter of only 16 mm
form a unit taking over the
function of conventional
trunkings and reflectors.
This construction principle
creates the conditions for a
modern design concept.
DELTA differs greatly from

the comparatively voluminous
rapid-mounting, continuous-
line systems in conventional
shape. Beyond the tradi-
tional application ranges for
continuous lines, DELTA is
predestined for areas where
increased demands are
placed on the architectural
aspect of a lighting installa-
tion.
DELTA variety
DELTA is available in three
basic versions: versions with
reflectors for direct light
distribution and those with a
decorative indirect compo-
nent cover the whole appli-
cation range of conventional
continuous-line systems.
These systems optionally
equipped with louvres can
also be used as continuous
Uniform reflector cross-section lines or geometrical arrange-
All gear trays of the DELTA range are inserted into a uniform ments in architecture-oriented
base profile. The slender design of the lighting installation is areas. Rooms with increased
thus always assured, independent of the photometrical risk of pollution are however
demands. For example, if different illuminances are required predestined applications for
in various zones and the installation must, in consequence, DELTA base units with silicate
include single-lamp and twin-lamp gear trays. glass covers.
336
337
DELTA
a truly rapid-mounting continuous-line system
1st suspension point
Continuous-line length/m
0 1.54
Time is money Tool-free attachment

In practical terms, the DELTA base units are suspended from the
mounting costs of continu- ceiling by means of wires or chains. The
ous lines are essentially stainless steel clips of these fixing acces-
determined by the number sories are attached without using tools.
of fixing points required.
As far as continuous lines Maximum suspension distances can be
are concerned, dimensional achieved by fixing the suspension accessories
stability is a condition for always directly above the joint of the base
increased suspension dis- units.
tances and thus offers a
successful way to reduce
the installation expenditure.
The advantageous DELTA

construction principle opens
new horizons. The cross-
section-optimised base pro-
files as a unit of trunking Integrated reflectors
and reflector convince with Reflectors form an integral element of the
extreme bending rigidity. DELTA base units. No more need to unpack
The benefit in moneys worth: the reflectors, transport them to the site
as opposed to conventional and to connect them to the conventional
rapid-mounting luminaires, trunkings. The attachment of junction con-
the number of necessary nectors is reduced to the transitions between
fixing points is considerably the 2- or 3-length base units.
reduced thanks to increased
suspension distances of up to
4500 mm.
338
max. 4.50 m
2nd suspension point
3.07 4.60
Plug connections between through- A minimum of

wirings and gear trays fixing points ...
Modern connector technology guarantees ... realised with DELTA lumi-
tool-free rapid electrical connection of gear naires with integrated base
trays with the through-wiring in the base profile.
units.
For example: a 12-length
Slide contacts of the male connector on the DELTA continuous line with
gear tray allow tool-free selection of the a length of 18.38 m con-
desired phase conductor and therewith the sisting of four 3-length base
easy allocation of the respective gear tray to units only needs 5 fixing
the desired switching group. points. The suspension
clamps of the suspension
accessories are positioned
above the joints of the base
units.
Easy-to-handle auxiliary sus-

Plug connections for through-wirings pensions ease the luminaire
Standard connectors and sockets at the weight during the mounting
ends of pre-mounted 5- or 7-conductor work at the joints.
through-wirings guarantee a time-saving
electrical connection of DELTA base units.
A 7-pole mains cable can equally be con-

nected to the socket of the connector.
339
DELTA equipment variety for optimised lighting planning
and flexibility towards future lighting requirements
Production hall
DELTA for optimised DELTA flexible when it
plannings comes to future lighting
Lighting plannings including requirements
continuous-line systems are Today, variable use of rooms
not routinely solved. From is not only typical for pro-
time to time room geometries duction sites where certain
and illuminance requirements areas are used varyingly as
can change considerably. warehouse, transport zone m
.48
This calls for varied plannings. or production area with the 47
most different visual tasks.
A lighting system with todays The same goes for handicraft
required deployment can enterprises, schools and
only meet the respective sales areas.
individual case if situation-
oriented lumen packages are DELTA embodies a flexible
available. lighting system allowing a
wide range of utilisation
DELTA offers this desirable changes since complicated
variety in form of single- reinstallations are not neces-
and twin-lamp gear trays for sary. The tool-free exchange
tried-and-tested T8 lamps of gear trays allows illumi- 0m
as well as for innovative nance values to be adapted 2.5
m
T5 lamps in efficient and to the current visual tasks .0
10
lumen-rich versions. The without further installation
spectrum of corresponding work. m
lumen packages ranges in .0
10
six levels from 3 300 lm up to 0m
12 300 lm. 2.5
Planning data
Production hall Length x width x height m 50 x 25 x 7
Reflectance values Ceiling/walls/floor % 50/50/20
Height of the working plane m 0.85
Height of the luminaire plane m 6.00
Lighting requirements

Normal mounting work Nominal illuminance lx 300

Lighting installation
3 non-interrupted continuous lines, each with
31 lamp lengths, each equipped with
31 gear trays 1 x 80 W Reference 7601N/80 E
Calculation result Illuminance lx 309
Uniformity g1 0.69
T8 T5 T5
1x 58 W 2 x 58 W 1x 35 W 2 x 35 W 1x 80 W 2 x 80 W Additional requirements
Easy conversion for
One base unit six lumen packages modified production

DELTA base profiles can be optionally equipped with one of e.g. precision mounting Nominal illuminance lx 500
six gear trays. Solution
Conversion to gear tray 2 x 80 W Reference 7602N/80 E
Lamp Luminous flux Calculation result Illuminance lx 568
1 x 58 W/T8/ 26 mm 5 000 lm Uniformity g1 0.67
2 x 58 W/T8/ 26 mm 10 000 lm
1 x 35 W/T5/ 16 mm 3 300 lm
2 x 35 W/T5/ 16 mm 6 600 lm
1 x 80 W/T5/ 16 mm 6 150 lm
2 x 80 W/T5/ 16 mm 12 300 lm
340
Sales area Classroom
3.2
4m
0 m 7m
8.3 7.6
3
0m
3.0 5m
m 1.1
5 .50 0m
0 m 2.4
5.5 0m
0m 2.4
5.5 5m
0 m 1.1
5.5
0m
3.0
Planning data Planning data

Sales area Length x width x height m 40 x 28 x 6 Classroom Length x width x height m 8.9 x 7.1 x 3.3
Cash register zone Length x width x height m 7 x 24 x 6 Reflectance values Ceiling/walls/floor % 70/50/20
Reflectance values Ceiling/walls/floor % 50/50/20 Height of working plane m 0.85
Height of working plane m 0.85 Height of luminaire plane m 2.80
Height of luminaire plane m 4.50 Light loss factor v 0.80
Lighting requirements

General lighting requirements Normal class Nominal illuminance lx 300

Sales area Nominal illuminance lx 300 Lighting installation

Lighting installation 3 interrupted continuous lines, each with
5 non-interrupted continuous lines, each with 5 lamp lengths, each equipped with
25 lamp lengths, each equipped with 3 gear trays 1 x 35 W Reference 7601N/35 E
18 gear trays 1 x 58 W Reference 7601N/58 E 3 parabolic louvres RPV Reference 07600 RPV/1500
18 lamella louvres RW Reference 07600 RW/1500 2 blanking covers Reference 07600 B 1500
Calculation result* Illuminance lx 346 plus blackboard lighting with
Uniformity g1 0.68 2 asym. gear trays 1 x 35 W Reference 7601NA/35 E
2 asym. specular reflectors SA Reference 07601 SA/1500
Additional requirements Calculation result* Illuminance lx 339
Increased illuminance for Uniformity g1 0.64

the cash register zone Nominal illuminance lx 500

Solution Additional requirements
Complemented by 2-lamp gear tray in the cash register zone Easy conversion for use as

5 x 7 gear trays 2 x 58 W Reference 7602N/58 E special study zone Nominal illuminance lx 500
5 x 7 lamella louvres RW Reference 07600 RW/1500 Solution
Calculation result Illuminance lx 514 Conversion to gear tray 2 x 35 W Reference 7602N/35 E
Uniformity g1 0.89 Calculation result* Illuminance lx 581
* in combination with cashier lighting Uniformity g1 0.71
* in combination with blackboard lighting
341
Combinations of base units
and optical accessories
Base units All DELTA base units see

As a constructional unit, page 344 can be com-
DELTA base units assume bined with all available gear
the function of both trunking trays see page 348. The
and reflector of conventional high equipment variety thus
rapid-mounting continuous- leads to an economic energy
line systems. consumption by choosing the
Three versions are available: right illumination package.
Direct for IP 20
Direct/indirect for IP 20
Direct for IP 50
Base units can be equipped

with optical accessories
suitable for the relevant
application, thus creating
optimal conditions for
demand-oriented lighting
solutions.
Base units Gear trays
see page 344 see page 348
Direct IP 20
Base units with integrated
direct reflectors in IP 20
offer versatility because they
can be combined with all
optical accessories. Page 350
Direct/indirect IP 20
Base units in IP 20 with inte-
grated perforated reflectors
provide an indirect compo-
nent of around 6 %. This
enhances the style of the
luminaires and creates an
appealing room atmosphere. Page 352
Direct IP 50
Special base units in IP 50
offer effective protection of
the optical systems against
soiling, thanks to integrated
silicate glass covers. Page 362
342
Combination versatility Standard equipment with
The matrix below shows the electronic control gear
compatibility of DELTA base Electronic control gear
units with different optical embodies cost-minimised
accessories. operation efficiency and eco-
logical benefits. In addition to
The pages indicated relate typical comfort advantages,
to the following application the considerable increase
pages 350 to 363, featuring of the lamp life as opposed
the characteristics of the to operation with inductive
respective components, ballasts stands out as well.
their dimensions and the
resulting photometrics as DELTA gear trays are
well as product and applica- equipped as standard with
tion illustrations. electronic control gear.
Versions with dimmable
electronic control gear are
available as well, reference
suffix ED.
Optical accessories
see pages 350-363
Page 350 Page 354 Page 354 Page 356 Page 356 Page 358 Page 360
Page 352
Page 362
343
DELTA
Base units
Base units Reference Length IP kg Reference Length IP kg

Integrated trunking and for individual luminaires mm for individual luminaires, perforated mm
reflector profile, sheet steel, 07600 E/1500 1531 20 2.6 07600 G-E/1500 1531 20 2.5
galvanised, with white poly- for continuous lines for continuous lines, perforated
ester coating. For tool-free 07600/II/5LV/1500 3062 20 5.2 07600 G/II/5LV/1500 3062 20 5.0
equipment with gear trays, 07600/II/7LV/1500 3062 20 5.4 07600 G/III/7LV/1500 3062 20 5.2
both for T5 and T8 lamps, in 07600/III/5LV/1500 4593 20 7.8 07600 G/III/5LV/1500 4593 20 7.5
single- and twin-lamp version. 07600/III/7LV/1500 4593 20 8.0 07600 G/III/7LV/1500 4593 20 7.7
Base units can be equipped with T5 and T8 gear trays, Base units can be equipped with T5 and T8 gear trays,
Base units for individual both in single-lamp and twin-lamp version. both in single-lamp and twin-lamp version.
luminaires, with 5-pole Gear trays to be ordered separately. Gear trays to be ordered separately.
female connector:
07600 E/1500
Direct, IP 20.
07600 G-E/1500
With defined perforations
in the reflector, for a well-
balanced ceiling illumination,
IP 20.
07610 E/1500
With transparent silicate
glass cover, safely retained
in the surrounding frame, to
be hung and lowered from
the reflector for maintenance
purposes, IP 50.
Base units for continuous

lines, prewired with heat-
resistant individual conduc-
tors 1.5 mm2, with 5- or
7-pole female connectors
and integrated mechanical
coupling:
07600//1500
Direct, IP 20.
07600 G//1500
With defined perforations
in the reflector, for a well-
balanced ceiling illumination,
IP 20.
07610//1500
With transparent silicate
glass cover, safely retained
in the surrounding frame, to
be hung and lowered from
the reflector for maintenance
purposes, IP 50.
End caps and connectors IP 20

End caps in impact-resistant, PVC-free and UV-stabilised
ABS snapped into place without tools complete DELTA
base units in IP 20, either for individual luminaires or at the
ends of continuous lines.
Indications Page
Photometric Components for the connection of DELTA base units assure
combinations 342 precise alignment of non-interrupted continuous lines and
Suspensions 347 surely avoid unintentional light leakage at the joints of the
Gear trays 348 reflectors.
Planning 366 End caps are to be ordered separately. Connectors are
Substitute references delivered as standard with the 2- and 3-length base units.
for computer
calculations 443
344
Reference Length IP kg
for individual luminaires mm
07610 E/1500 1538 50 5.9
for continuous lines
07610/II/5LV/1500 3062 50 11.8
07610/III/5LV/1500 4593 50 17.7
07610/II/7LV/1500 3062 50 12.0
07610/III/7LV/1500 4593 50 17.9
Base units can be equipped with T5 and T8 gear trays,
both in single-lamp and twin-lamp version.
Gear trays to be ordered separately.
End caps IP 20 End caps IP 50

1 piece, for base units 07600, 07610 RK
white plastic material, with 2 knock- 1 piece, for base units 07610,
out openings, snapped into place white plastic material, with 2 knock-
without tools. One pair of end caps out openings. For IP 50.
is required per continuous line or One pair of end caps is required per
individual luminaire. continuous line or individual luminaire.
07600 RK for continuous lines and For continuous lines and individual
individual luminaires (not for RPV). luminaires in IP 50.
07600 RK-RPV for continuous lines
and individual luminaires in combina-
tion with parabolic louvre RPV.
End caps and connectors IP 50 Blanking cover Feeding accessory 07600 ESB
Safely fixed end caps in impact-resistant, PCV-free and 07600 B/1500 1 piece, necessary for the entry of
UV-stabilised ABS complete DELTA base units in accordance 1 piece, for base units cables at the upper plane of the
with the degree of protection (here IP 50), either for individual 07600 and 07610, base units 07600 and 07610.
luminaires or at the ends of continuous lines. sheet steel, white.
Components for the connection of DELTA base units in

accordance with the degree of protection assure precise
alignment of non-interrupted continuous lines and surely avoid
unintentional light leakage at the joints of the reflectors.
End caps are to be ordered separately. Connectors are

delivered as standard with the 2- and 3-length base units.
345
Node
90 - 270
A 03 D
07600 KA/7LV
07600 KA-RPV/7LV
110 110
75 75
3062
3212
110 110
75 75
4593
4743
Node A 03 D Node adapter Ordering example

1 piece, for up to 4 connec- 1 piece, for the connection of Node for star-shaped
tions, angles continuously nodes A 03 D with base units arrangement of three
adjustable between 90 and 07600, consisting of end continuous lines:
270. Die-cast aluminium, cap, white plastic material, 1 node A 03 D
white. with integrated node attach- 3 adapters 07600 KA/7LV
ment in die-cast aluminium
and flange-mounted inner
coupling in aluminium, for
stable connection with the
base unit. Complete with
through-wiring 7 x 1.5 mm2
with connection element.
Can only be used on one
side for individual luminaires.
07600 KA/7LV
For continuous lines in IP 20
(not in combination with
louvres RPV).
07600 KA-RPV/7LV
For continuous lines in combi-
nation with parabolic louvres
RPV in IP 20.
346
Wire and chain suspensions
A 01 DSD A 01 SD A 01 KD
A 01 DSD-IP50 A 01 SD-IP50 A 01 KD-IP50
E 03 SD E 03 KD
E 07 E 03 SD-IP50 E 03 KD-IP50
07600 MH E 01 E 06 E 04 E 05N
Mounting aid 07600 MH Ceiling fixing plate Decorative wire Wire suspension Chain suspension
1 pair, suspension aid for E 01 suspension 1 piece, consisting of steel 1 piece, consisting of link
mounting of continuous 1 piece, sheet steel, gal- 1 piece, consisting of steel wire, galvanised, 1.75 mm, chain, galvanised, 1500 mm
lines. Recommended for vanised, with safety spring wire, galvanised, 1.75 mm, 1500 mm long, and suspen- long, with turnbuckle and
mounting of suspensions at hook to attach chains or 1500 mm long, and suspension clamp. Wire length fully suspension clamp.
the joints of base units. wires without tools. sion clamp. Wire length fully adjustable without tools. A 01 KD for IP 20
Handling is described on adjustable without tools. A 01 SD for IP 20 A 01 KD-IP50 for IP 50.
page 367. A 01 DSD for IP 20. A 01 SD-IP50 for IP 50.
A 01 DSD-IP50 for IP 50. Suspension clamp
For safety reasons, fixing Suspension clamp 1 piece, for chain suspen-
accessories must be able Wire accessory E 07 1 piece, for wire suspensions sions, stainless steel, to be
to support five times the to realise wire suspensions in combination with acces- attached to the base unit
weight of the luminaires to on site, with steel wire E 06 sories E 06 and E 07. Stain- without tools.
be mounted on them. In and suspension clamps less steel, to be attached to E 03 KD for IP 20
case the maximum fixing E 03 SD. Wire accessory the base units without tools. E 03 KD-IP50 for IP 50.
spacings are retained this consisting of 12 grommets Wire length fully adjustable
results in loads of 30 kg as wire protection in the without tools. Turnbuckle E 05N
maximum per suspension suspension area, together E 03 SD for IP 20 1 piece, for height compen-
point. All suspension acces- with 12 pressure clamps to E 03 SD-IP50 for IP 50. sation in chain link length as
sories in the DELTA range make suspension eyelets with well as a chain-quick-action
are therefore designed for at pliers, recess size 10 mm. Link chain E 04 lock.
least 150 kg weight load. 20 m, galvanised, to be
Fixing accessories provided Steel wire E 06 shortened on site.
on site such as dowels, ceil- 20 m, 1.75 mm, gal-
ing hooks, etc. must meet vanised, with quick-acting
with these requirements. glue to seal the wire ends
from splicing when short-
ened. Only to be used in
combination with accessory
E 07.
347
DELTA
Gear trays for T8 fluorescent lamps 26 mm
direct or asymmetrical
Gear tray Reference Lamps Ballast System kg Reference Lamps Ballast System kg
Sheet steel, white. Fixed to Gear tray T8 rating Gear tray T8 rating
the base unit without tools 7601N/58 E 1x58W E 55W 1.7 7601N A/58 E 1x58W E 55W 1.7
by means of plastic-coated, 7602N/58 E 2x58W E 110W 1.8 For asymmetrical light distribution please combine with asymmetri-
metal turn-lock fasteners. Base units (see page 344) can be equipped with T5 and T8 gear cal specular reflector 07601 SA/1500.
trays, both in single- and twin-lamp version.
Production sites exposed
to fire hazards
Base units in IP 50 in combi-
nation with gear trays with
switchable or dimmable elec-
tronic control gear shine out
thanks to limited surface
temperatures and are la-
belled D. They are there-
fore predestined for use in
production sites exposed to
Electrical connection is
made automatically when the
gear tray is attached to the
base unit. Lamp circuit con-
nections can be set to each
phase conductor without
tools. With electronic control
gear (E).
Gear trays can also be sup-

T8
tronic control gear (not for
2x80 W), reference suf-
fix ED, e.g. 7601/80 ED.
Various equipment options Tool-free phase connection

with DELTA Female connectors of the through-wiring and complementary
Numerous gear trays for the most dif- male connectors on the gear trays allow for automatic elec-
ferent equipments, to be mounted into trical contact when inserting the gear trays into the DELTA
identical base units, facilitate optimised base units.
photometric planning.
Tool-free adjustable slide contacts of the male connector
Indications Page Due to the fact that single- and twin- allow the selection of the desired phase conductor and the
Photometric lamp gear trays for T5 and T8 lamps easy allocation of the individual lamp circuits to the switching
combinations 342 have the same dimensions and an iden- groups.
Base units tical position of the male connector,
and accessories 344 they can be interchanged in the base
Suspensions 347 units.
Emergency light 364
Planning 366
348
DELTA
Gear trays for T5 fluorescent lamps 16 mm
direct or asymmetrical
Reference Lamps Ballast System kg Reference Lamps Ballast System kg

Gear tray T5 rating Gear tray T5 rating
7601N/35 E 1x35W E 39W 1.7 7601N A/35 E 1x35W E 39W 1.7
7601N/80 E 1x80W E 88W 1.7 7601N A/80 E 1x80W E 88W 1.7
7602N/35 E 2x35W E 78W 1.8 For asymmetrical light distribution please combine with asymmetri-
7602N/80 E 2x80W E 176W 1.8 cal specular reflector 07601 SA/1500.
Base units (see page 344) can be equipped with T5 and T8 gear
trays, both in single- and twin-lamp version.
652do
Degree of protection IP 20, IP 50
T5
Equipment options
for 5-conductor (5LV) and
T5 7-conductor (7LV) wiring
Mains cable 3 con.

Mains cable 5 con.
Dimming 1-10 V
Emergency syst.
EB single battery
UR switch. relay
E 14 socket
No. of conductors
Wiring type
3 3
3 1 4
3 2 5
5LV
3 2 5
3 2 5
5 5
3 2 1 6
3 2 2 7
3 2 2 7
5 1 6 7LV
5 2 7
5 2 7
5 2 7
Safe fastening technology Electronic control gear

Plastic-coated metal turn-lock fasten- TRILUX luminaires equipped with electronic control gear
ers, to be used without tools, assure shine out thanks to the following characteristics: energy-
easy manipulation and permanently saving operation, lamp-preserving rapid lamp start, flicker-
safe retention of the gear tray in the free light and avoidance of electrode flicker and disturbing
base unit. The triangular contour of the noises. The increased lamp service life allows for benefits
base unit facilitates the adjustment of in moneys worth.
the gear trays during installation.
Also the sheet steel blanking covers

used to realise blank sections within a
continuous line are fixed by means of
turn-lock fasteners.
349
Applications for DELTA gear trays:
Base unit, direct
Base unit, direct, with lamella louvre RW or RW-G
Application Reference Specification for degree

Production facilities, work- of protection
shops, assembly halls, Base unit
supermarkets, exhibition 07600 E/1500 for individual luminaires IP 20
halls, sales areas and train- 07600/II/5LV/1500 2 lengths IP 20
ing rooms. 07600/II/7LV/1500 2 lengths IP 20
07600/III/5LV/1500 3 lengths IP 20
Base unit
Unit composed of trunking
Accessories
and reflector, sheet steel,
galvanised, with white poly- 07600 RK End cap IP 20
ester coating. To be equip- Gear trays to be ordered separately.
ped with gear trays and opti-
cal accessories, universally
suitable for single- and twin-
lamp gear trays for T5 and
T8 lamps. IP 20.
Lamella louvre RW
Sheet steel, white. To be
used in base units 07600.
Safe retention and easy
manipulation by means of
snap fasteners.
Lamella louvre RW-G

Sheet steel, white, with per-
forated cross blades. To be
snap fasteners. No. 0622
122
DIN 5040: A40
CIBSE BZ:
BZ3
140
NBN L 14-002:
BZ5/1.25/BZ4
Ordering example: continuous line (8 lengths) with Easy mounting

lamella louvres RW DELTA rapid-mounting continuous lines shine out thanks to a
2 base units 07600/III/5LV/1500 very easy and rapid installation. The base units are clipped
1 base unit 07600/II/5LV/1500 into the clamps of the wire or chain suspensions without
8 gear trays 7601N/58 E tools.
8 lamella louvres 07600 RW/1500
Indications Page 2 end caps 07600 RK A further system advantage: it is not necessary to mount
Photometric additional reflectors, since these are already integrated into
combinations 342 Suspensions see page 347. the base units. This also leads to a reduction of reflector
Base units joints which only exist at the transitions between two base
and accessories 344 units.
Suspensions 347
Gear trays 348
Emergency light 364
Planning 366
350
Reference Specification for degree Reference Specification for degree
of protection of protection
Base unit Base unit
07600 E/1500 for individual luminaires IP 20 07600 E/1500 for individual luminaires IP 20
07600/II/5LV/1500 2 lengths IP 20 07600/II/5LV/1500 2 lengths IP 20
07600/II/7LV/1500 2 lengths IP 20 07600/II/7LV/1500 2 lenghts IP 20
07600/III/5LV/1500 3 lengths IP 20 07600/III/5LV/1500 3 lengths IP 20
Accessories Accessories
07600 RW/1500 Lamella louvre RW IP 20 07600 RW-G/1500 Perforated lamella louvre RW-G IP 20
07600 RK End cap IP 20 07600 RK End cap IP 20
Gear trays to be ordered separately. Gear trays to be ordered separately.
652d
C 0 - C 180 Data table Data table

No. 0623 No. 0623 Data table no. 0622 Data table no. 0623
122
DIN 5040: A40 DIN 5040: A40 1 Number of luminaires 1 Number of luminaires
CIBSE BZ: CIBSE BZ: En 300 lx 500 lx En 300 lx 500 lx
BZ3 BZ3 Room height H 3.0 m 5.0 m 3.0 m 5.0 m Room height H 3.0 m 5.0 m 3.0 m 5.0 m
140
NBN L 14-002: NBN L 14-002: 20 4.2 6.8 7.0 11 20 4.4 7.0 7.4 12
BZ4 BZ4 30 5.6 8.4 9.3 14 30 5.9 8.7 9.8 15
40 6.9 9.9 12 16 40 7.4 10 12 17
Area Area
50 8.4 12 14 20 50 9.0 12 15 21
A A
in m2 60 9.7 13 16 22 in m2 60 10 14 17 23
80 12 16 21 27 80 13 17 22 29
100 15 19 25 32 100 16 20 27 34
150 21 26 36 43 150 23 28 39 46
200 28 33 46 55 200 30 35 50 59
Height of the working plane e 0.85 m Height of the working plane e 0.85 m
Suspension length lp 0.00 m Suspension length lp 0.00 m
2 Max. luminaire


spacings for
g1 = Emin : E 1 : 1.5 g1 = Emin : E 1 : 1.5
Transverse spacing centre / centre Xmax = 2.3 h Transverse spacing centre / centre Xmax = 2.2 h
h = Luminaire height above working plane h = Luminaire height above working plane

DLOR ULOR DLOR ULOR
1 x 35 W E 1.00 0.85 0.85 0.00 1 x 35 W E 1.00 0.77 0.77 0.00
1 x 58 W E 0.74 0.76 0.76 0.00 1 x 58 W E 0.74 0.69 0.69 0.00
1 x 80 W E 0.52 0.89 0.89 0.00 1 x 80 W E 0.52 0.80 0.80 0.00
2 x 35 W E 0.55 0.77 0.77 0.00 2 x 35 W E 0.57 0.68 0.68 0.00
2 x 58 W E 0.42 0.67 0.67 0.00 2 x 58 W E 0.44 0.59 0.59 0.00
2 x 80 W E 0.29 0.80 0.80 0.00 2 x 80 W E 0.30 0.70 0.70 0.00
Rapid connection of the through-wiring Perforated lamella

DELTA is designed for rapid electrical connection. louvre RW-G
The RW-G louvre version with
Installation is facilitated by means of standard connectors or perforated cross-blades of-
sockets at the ends of pre-mounted through-wiring sets. fers an interesting alternative
These 7-pole components do not only allow for rapid con- to traditional white lamella
nection of three-phase current mains supply lines but also louvres and is particularly
for connection of two additional conductors, e.g. control suitable for the subtle light-
lines for dimming. Corresponding mains cables can equally ing of sales areas.
be connected to the socket.
351
Base unit, direct/indirect
Base unit, direct/indirect, with lamella louvre RW or RW-G

Workshops, precision of protection
assembly, sales areas, Base unit
supermarkets, training 07600 G-E/1500 for indiv. luminaires, perforated IP 20
rooms and lounges. 07600 G/II/5LV/1500 2 lengths, perforated IP 20
07600 G/II/7LV/1500 2 lengths, perforated IP 20
Perforated base unit 07600 G/III/5LV/1500 3 lengths, perforated IP 20
07600 G/III/7LV/1500 3 lengths, perforated IP 20
and reflector with defined
Accessories
perforations, sheet steel,
galvanised, with white poly- 07600 RK End cap IP 20
ester coating. To be equip- Gear trays to be ordered separately.
T8 lamps. IP 20.
Lamella louvre RW
snap fasteners.
Lamella louvre RW-G

snap fasteners. No. 0624
122
DIN 5040: A40
CIBSE BZ:
BZ4
140
NBN L 14-002:
BZ5
Ordering example: continuous line (5 lengths) with Base units with indirect component
perforated base unit and lamella louvres RW Partial perforations at the lateral sur-
1 base unit 07600 G/III/5LV/1500 face of base units in G version create
1 base unit 07600 G/II/5LV/1500 a very decorative and comfortable
5 gear trays 7601N/35 E lighting atmosphere.
5 lamella louvres 07600 RW/1500
Indications Page 2 end caps 07600 RK Due to their appealing design base
Photometric units with indirect component are rec-
combinations 342 Suspensions see page 347. ommended for areas where special
Base units demands are placed on the architec-
and accessories 344 tural aspect of a lighting installation.
Suspensions 347
Gear trays 348
Emergency light 364
Planning 366
352
Base unit Base unit
07600 G-E/1500 for indiv. luminaires, perforated IP 20 07600 G-E/1500 for indiv. luminaires, perforated IP 20
07600 G/II/5LV/1500 2 lengths, perforated IP 20 07600 G/II/5LV/1500 2 lengths, perforated IP 20
07600 G/II/7LV/1500 2 lengths, perforated IP 20 07600 G/II/7LV/1500 2 lengths, perforated IP 20
07600 G/III/5LV/1500 3 lengths, perforated IP 20 07600 G/III/5LV/1500 3 lengths, perforated IP 20
07600 G/III/7LV/1500 3 lengths, perforated IP 20 07600 G/III/7LV/1500 3 lengths, perforated IP 20
652d

122
BZ3/2/BZ4 BZ3/2/BZ4 Room height H 3.0 m 5.0 m 3.0 m 5.0 m Room height H 3.0 m 5.0 m 3.0 m 5.0 m
140
NBN L 14-002: NBN L 14-002: 20 4.4 7.2 7.4 12 20 4.8 7.6 8.0 13
BZ4/4/BZ5 BZ4/4/BZ5 30 5.9 8.9 9.9 15 30 6.4 9.4 11 16
40 7.4 10 12 17 40 8.1 11 14 19
Area Area
50 9.0 13 15 21 50 9.8 13 16 22
A A
in m2 60 10 14 17 23 in m2 60 11 15 19 25
80 13 17 22 29 80 15 19 24 31
100 16 20 27 34 100 18 22 29 37
150 23 28 38 46 150 25 30 42 50
200 30 35 50 59 200 33 39 55 64
2 Max. luminaire


spacings for
g1 = Emin : E 1 : 1.5 g1 = Emin : E 1 : 1.5

DLOR ULOR DLOR ULOR
1 x 35 W E 1.00 0.81 0.76 0.05 1 x 35 W E 1.00 0.74 0.68 0.06
1 x 58 W E 0.73 0.74 0.69 0.05 1 x 58 W E 0.73 0.67 0.61 0.06
1 x 80 W E 0.52 0.84 0.79 0.05 1 x 80 W E 0.51 0.77 0.71 0.06
2 x 35 W E 0.53 0.77 0.73 0.04 2 x 35 W E 0.53 0.70 0.65 0.05
2 x 58 W E 0.39 0.68 0.64 0.04 2 x 58 W E 0.40 0.62 0.57 0.05
2 x 80 W E 0.27 0.80 0.76 0.04 2 x 80 W E 0.27 0.73 0.68 0.05
Interior decoration with DELTA equipment scope

geometrical arrangements Numerous gear trays for the
DELTA convinces not only with photom- most different equipments,
etric efficiency but also offers free to be mounted into identical
scope to realise striking continuous-line base units, extend the plan-
arrangements, thanks to nodes which ning scope.
allow the combination of up to four con-
tinuous lines at variable angles as
attractive architectural elements.
353
Base unit, direct, with specular reflector S
Base unit, direct, with specular reflector S and
lamella louvre RW or RW-G
halls, machine workstations 07600/II/5LV/1500 2 lengths IP 20
and precision assembly. 07600/II/7LV/1500 2 lengths IP 20
Base unit
Accessories
galvanised, with white poly- 07600 S/1500 Specular reflector S IP 20
ester coating. To be equip- 07600 RK End cap IP 20
ped with gear trays and opti- Gear trays to be ordered separately.
T8 lamps. IP 20.
Specular reflector S
Made of reflection-intensified
purity of 99.99 %, for nar-
tion, for base units 07600,
07610 (not suitable for
base units 07600 G with
indirect component). For
emergency light versions
with gear trays 760+E14
special specular reflectors
07600 S/1500/E14 are to
be ordered separately. No. 0626
122
DIN 5040: A50
Lamella louvre RW CIBSE BZ:
Sheet steel, white. To be BZ5/1.25/BZ4
140
used in base units 07600. NBN L 14-002:
BZ4/0.8/BZ3
snap fasteners.
Lamella louvre RW-G

snap fasteners.
Ordering example: continuous line (13 lengths), Safety lighting

dimmable, with specular reflectors S and lamella Special gear trays with emergency light sockets, single bat-
louvres RW teries or switching relays allow for an easy integration of
3 base units 07600/III/7LV/1500 safety lighting in DELTA continuous lines or individual lumi-
2 base units 07600/II/7LV/1500 naires.
13 gear trays 7601N/58 ED
Indications Page 13 specular reflectors 07600 S/1500 The necessary electrical connections are realised by the
Photometric 13 lamella louvres 07600 RW/1500 standard delivered connectors, without tools.
combinations 342 2 end caps 07600 RK
Base units
and accessories 344 Suspensions see page 347.
Suspensions 347
Gear trays 348
Emergency light 364
Planning 366
354
Base unit Base unit
07600 S/1500 Specular reflector S IP 20 07600 S/1500 Specular reflector S IP 20
652d

122
BZ2/0.75/BZ3 BZ2/0.75/BZ3 Room height H 3.0 m 5.0 m 3.0 m 5.0 m Room height H 3.0 m 5.0 m 3.0 m 5.0 m
140
NBN L 14-002: NBN L 14-002: 20 3.6 5.8 6.0 9.6 20 3.9 6.1 6.6 10
BZ3 BZ3 30 4.8 7.0 8.0 12 30 5.3 7.5 8.8 13
40 6.0 8.1 10 14 40 6.6 8.8 11 15
Area Area
50 7.4 10 12 17 50 8.1 11 14 18
A A
in m2 60 8.6 11 14 19 in m2 60 9.4 12 16 21
80 11 14 18 24 80 12 15 20 26
100 13 17 22 28 100 15 18 24 30
150 19 23 32 38 150 21 25 35 41
200 25 29 42 49 200 28 32 46 53
2 Max. luminaire


spacings for
g1 = Emin : E 1 : 1.5 g1 = Emin : E 1 : 1.5

DLOR ULOR DLOR ULOR
1 x 35 W E 1.00 0.92 0.92 0.00 1 x 35 W E 1.00 0.84 0.84 0.00
1 x 58 W E 0.73 0.83 0.83 0.00 1 x 58 W E 0.75 0.74 0.74 0.00
1 x 80 W E 0.52 0.95 0.95 0.00 1 x 80 W E 0.52 0.86 0.86 0.00
2 x 35 W E 0.58 0.80 0.80 0.00 2 x 35 W E 0.58 0.72 0.72 0.00
2 x 58 W E 0.45 0.68 0.68 0.00 2 x 58 W E 0.46 0.60 0.60 0.00
2 x 80 W E 0.30 0.83 0.83 0.00 2 x 80 W E 0.30 0.75 0.75 0.00
Tool-free mounting Stable base units

DELTA base units can be mounted The installation costs of con-
rapidly by means of chains or wires. tinuous lines depend mainly
To do so, the stainless steel clips of on the number of fixing
the suspension accessories are simply points. DELTA creates the
snapped onto the upper side of the conditions for a cost-saving
base units. rapid mounting since the
base units with a torsionally
In case fixing accessories are to be rigid section allow suspen-
positioned at the joint of two base units sion distances of more than
in order to achieve a maximum suspen- 4500 mm.
sion distance, the fixing aid 07600 MH
eases the luminaire weight.
355
Applications for asymmetrical DELTA gear trays:
Base unit, direct, with specular reflector SA
Base unit, direct, with specular reflector SA and
lamella louvre RW or RW-G
halls, sales areas and train- 07600/II/5LV/1500 2 lengths IP 20
ing rooms. 07600/II/7LV/1500 2 lengths IP 20
Base unit
Accessories
galvanised, with white poly- 07601 SA/1500 Specular reflector, asymmetrical IP 20
ester coating. To be equip- 07600 RK End cap IP 20
ped with gear trays and opti- Gear trays (asymmetrical) to be ordered separately.
T8 lamps. IP 20.
Specular reflector SA
purity of 99.99 %, for asym-
metrical light distribution,
for base units 07600,
indirect component). Can
only be used in combination
with asymmetrical gear tray
7601N A.
Lamella louvre RW No. 0631
Sheet steel, white. To be DIN 5040: A40
used in base units 07600. CIBSE BZ:
Safe retention and easy BZ3/0.75/BZ2/1/BZ3
manipulation by means of NBN L 14-002:
BZ4
snap fasteners.
Lamella louvre RW-G

snap fasteners.
550
600
650
700
1.60 m
700
650
600
550
2.70 m
Ordering example: continuous line (5 lengths) with Wall zone lighting with a continuous line
asymmetrical light distribution (2 lengths) illuminance distribution
1 base unit 07600/III/5LV/1500 (indications in lux)
1 base unit 07600/II/5LV/1500 Luminaire level height: 3.0 m
5 gear trays 7601N A/58 E Lower wall zone height: 0.9 m
5 specular reflectors, asymmetrical 07601 SA/1500 Distance to wall: 1.0 m
Indications Page 5 lamella louvres 07600 RW/1500 Gear trays: 7601N A/58 E
Photometric 2 end caps 07600 RK Specular reflectors: 07601 SA/1500
combinations 342 Lamp luminous flux: 5200 lm
Base units Suspensions see page 347.
and accessories 344
Suspensions 347
Gear trays 348
Emergency light 364
Planning 366
356
Base unit Base unit
07601 SA/1500 Specular reflector, asymmetrical IP 20 07601 SA/1500 Specular reflector, asymmetrical IP 20
Gear trays (asymmetrical) to be ordered separately. Gear trays (asymmetrical) to be ordered separately.
652d

BZ3 BZ3 Room height H 3.0 m 5.0 m 3.0 m 5.0 m Room height H 3.0 m 5.0 m 3.0 m 5.0 m
NBN L 14-002: NBN L 14-002: 20 3.9 6.5 6.5 11 20 4.2 6.8 7.0 11
BZ4 BZ4 30 5.2 7.9 8.6 13 30 5.6 8.3 9.3 14
40 6.5 9.2 11 15 40 7.0 9.7 12 16
Area Area
50 7.8 11 13 18 50 9.0 12 14 20
A A
in m2 60 9.0 12 15 21 in m2 60 10 13 16 22
80 12 15 19 25 80 13 16 21 27
100 14 18 23 30 100 15 19 25 32
150 20 24 33 40 150 22 26 36 43
200 26 33 43 51 200 28 33 47 55
2 Max. luminaire


spacings for
g1 = Emin : E 1 : 1.5 g1 = Emin : E 1 : 1.5

DLOR ULOR DLOR ULOR
1 x 35 W E 1.00 0.90 0.90 0.00 1 x 35 W E 1.00 0.82 0.82 0.00
1 x 58 W E 0.73 0.81 0.81 0.00 1 x 58 W E 0.73 0.74 0.74 0.00
1 x 80 W E 0.56 0.86 0.86 0.00 1 x 80 W E 0.57 0.77 0.77 0.00
357
Base unit, direct, with highly-specular parabolic louvre RPV
Application
Production facilities or work-
shops with CNC machines,
switchgear control rooms,
offices and rooms with DSE
workstations.
Base unit
galvanised, with white poly-
ester coating. To be equip-
T8 lamps. IP 20.
louvre RPV
Made of highly-specular
surface purity of 99.98 %,
luminance limited to
angle 60, thus corre-
sponding fully to LG 3,
Cat. II, in combination with
base units 07600 (not
suitable for base units
07600 G with indirect
component). Louvre reten-
tion by means of spring-ten-
sioned clips. Louvre can be
lowered and hung from ei-
ther side without tools.
Ordering example: continuous line (7 lengths) with DELTA individual luminaires

highly-specular parabolic louvres RPV In addition to modular continuous-line systems the DELTA
1 base unit 07600/III/5LV/1500 range is equally suited for the installation of individual lumi-
2 base units 07600/II/5LV/1500 naires. These are based on single-length base units where
7 gear trays 7601N/80 E electrical connection is realised directly at the 5-pole female
7 highly-specular parabolic louvres 07600 RPV/1500 connector.
Indications Page 2 end caps 07600 RK-RPV
Photometric DELTA individual luminaires present an alternative to conven-
combinations 342 Suspensions see page 347. tional reflector or louvre luminaires. In combination with
Base units DELTA continuous lines they are specially recommended for
and accessories 344 applications such as individual lighting of workstations or
Suspensions 347 lighting of small separated room zones.
Gear trays 348
Emergency light 364
Planning 366
358
Reference Specification for degree
of protection
Base unit
07600 E/1500 for individual luminaires IP 20
07600/II/5LV/1500 2 lengths IP 20
07600/II/7LV/1500 2 lengths IP 20
Accessories
07600 RPV/1500 Parabolic louvre RPV IP 20
07600 RK-RPV End cap IP 20
652d

141
DIN5040: A50 1 Number of luminaires
CIBSE BZ: En 300 lx 500 lx
BZ2 Room height H 3.0 m 5.0 m 3.0 m 5.0 m
NBN L 14-002: 140 20 3.5 5.6 5.8 9.4
BZ2 30 4.8 6.7 7.9 11
40 6.0 7.8 10 13
Area
50 7.4 9.6 12 16
A
in m2 60 8.6 11 14 18
80 11 14 19 23
100 14 16 23 27
150 20 22 33 37
200 26 29 43 49
2 Max. luminaire

spacings for
g1 = Emin : E 1 : 1.5

Reference M LB L
direct indirect
DLOR ULOR
1 x 35 W E 1.00 0.86 0.86 0.00
1 x 58 W E 0.84 0.68 0.68 0.00
1 x 80 W E 0.53 0.87 0.87 0.00
2 x 35 W E 0.59 0.73 0.73 0.00
2 x 58 W E 0.51 0.55 0.55 0.00
2 x 80 W E 0.30 0.76 0.76 0.00
Highly-specular parabolic Mounting and maintenance

louvre RPV made easy
With DSE units being a part of modern Numerous DELTA details offer prac-
production sites, special lighting solu- tice-oriented functionality, thus saving
tions are called for. Highly-specular time and money. Due to its patented
parabolic louvres RPV avoid contrast- clip system, the highly-specular para-
reducing reflections of the luminaires bolic louvre RPV can be hung on the
on inclined screens and are thus spe- reflector from either side, facilitating
cially designed for these tasks. maintenance and lamp replacement.
359
Base unit, direct, with specular reflector HRL,
extremely narrow-angle light distribution
Application
High-bay warehouses, high
gangways and high halls.
Base unit
ester coating. To be equipped
with gear trays and optical
accessories, universally sui-
table for T5 and T8 lamps.
IP 20.
Specular reflector HRL

anodised aluminium, for
extremely narrow-angle light
distribution, suitable for base
units 07600 in IP 20 in
combination with single-lamp
gear trays.
Indications Page
Photometric
combinations 342
Base units
and accessories 344
Suspensions 347
Gear trays 348
Planning 366
360
Reference Designation for degree
of protection
Base unit
07600 E/1500 for individual luminaires IP 20
07600/II/5LV/1500 2 lengths IP 20
07600/II/7LV/1500 2 lengths IP 20
Accessories
07601 HRL/1500 Specular reflector HRL for IP 20
single-lamp gear tray 7601N/
07600 RK End cap IP 20
Base units in combination with specular reflector HRL can only be equipped
with single-lamp T5 and T8 gear trays.
Gear tray to be ordered separately.
652d
C 0 - C 180 Photometric data

for combination 07600
+ 7601N/35 E
+ 07601 HRL/1500
DIN 5040: A50
CIBSE BZ:
BZ4/0.75/BZ3
NBN L 14-002:
BZ3/1.25/BZ2
Diagrams to determine horizontal illuminances Lighting of high-bay

warehouses
Installation data Illustration 1 Illustration 2 Illustration 3 Due to missing or reduced
Gangway length: L = 25 m Installation sketch Average illuminance Illuminance distribution daylight, high-bay warehou-
Gangway width: B Gangway in high-bay warehouse B/2: on the centre line EP across the gangway, ses are mainly artificially lit.
Light point height: h B = ...: on the whole gangway y = 12.5 m Due to the resulting increa-
Transverse coordinate: x surface sed operating times, the use
Longitudinal coordinate: y of highly-efficient lamps and
Evaluation level: e = 0.2 m economical luminaires is
recommended.
Luminaires:
Non-interrupted continuous line DELTA gear trays with elec-
with 16 units tronic control gear for redu-
07600 + 7601N/35 E 500 500
ced energy consumption and
+ 07601 HRL/1500
450 increased lamp life are per-
Lamps: 400 400
fect for these applications.
T5 lamps 35 W
Luminous flux: 350 DELTA in HRL versions excels
LP = 3300 Im with extremely narrow-angle
Average illuminance E in lx
L 300 300
B/2
Light loss factor: v = 0.8 luminous intensity distribution
Point illuminance EP in lx
250
B=3m with high light output ratios,
Multiplication factors 200 200 allowing efficient realisation
for luminaire inserts B=6m of standard-conform illumi-
150
7601N/58 E: M = 1.34 h=6m nances even in case of ele-
7601N/80 E: M = 1.98 h
100 100 vated light point heights.
h = 14 m
h = 22 m
50 50
y 20 h = 30 m
x 0 0
4 8 12 16 20 24 28 0 1m 2m 3m
B/2 e
B Light point height Lat. distance x to
h in m gangway centre
361
Base unit IP 50, direct
Base unit IP 50, direct, with specular reflector S
Application
Workplaces with increased
degree of pollution. Also rec-
ommended in areas where
drilling emulsions are used
or oil gases are formed.
Base unit IP 50
ester coating. To be equip-
T8 lamps. Efficient protec-
tion against pollution in
accordance with IP 50 by
means of a silicate glass
cover retained by the con-
tinuous frame.
Specular reflector S
purity of 99.99 %, for nar-
tion, for base units 07600,
indirect component). For
emergency light versions
with gear trays 760+E14
special specular reflectors
07600 S/1500/E14 are to
Ordering example: continuous line (9 lengths) in IP 50 Production sites exposed to fire

with specular reflectors S hazards
3 base units 07610/III/5LV/1500 Thanks to their standard equipment
9 gear trays 7601N/35 E with electronic control gear DELTA
9 specular reflectors 07600 S/1500 IP 50 base units are specially recom-
2 end caps 07610 RK mended for areas exposed to fire haz-
Indications Page ards caused by dust and fibrous sub-
Photometric Suspensions see page 347. stance. Additional special accessories
combinations 342 are not necessary.
Base units
and accessories 344
Suspensions 347
Gear trays 348
Emergency light 364
Planning 366
362
Base unit Base unit
07610 RK End cap IP 50 07600 S/1500 Specular reflector S IP 50
Gear trays to be ordered separately. 07610 RK End cap IP 50
652do

135
BZ2/2.5/BZ3 BZ2 Room height H 3.0 m 5.0 m 3.0 m 5.0 m Room height H 3.0 m 5.0 m 3.0 m 5.0 m
NBN L 14-002: 140 NBN L 14-002: 20 5.2 8.3 8.6 14 20 4.7 7.1 7.8 12
BZ4/2/BZ3 BZ3 30 6.9 10 12 17 30 6.4 8.8 11 15
40 8.7 12 15 20 40 8.0 11 13 17
Area Area
50 11 14 18 24 50 9.8 13 16 22
A A
in m2 60 12 16 20 27 in m2 60 11 15 19 24
80 16 20 26 33 80 15 18 24 31
100 19 24 32 39 100 18 22 30 36
150 27 32 46 54 150 26 30 43 50
200 36 41 59 69 200 34 39 56 64
2 Max. luminaire


spacings for
g1 = Emin : E 1 : 1.5 g1 = Emin : E 1 : 1.5

DLOR ULOR DLOR ULOR
1 x 35 W E 1.00 0.65 0.65 0.00 1 x 35 W E 1.00 0.67 0.67 0.00
1 x 58 W E 0.77 0.56 0.56 0.00 1 x 58 W E 0.76 0.58 0.58 0.00
1 x 80 W E 0.52 0.67 0.67 0.00 1 x 80 W E 0.52 0.70 0.69 0.00
2 x 35 W E 0.55 0.59 0.59 0.00 2 x 35 W E 0.55 0.60 0.60 0.00
2 x 58 W E 0.49 0.44 0.44 0.00 2 x 58 W E 0.46 0.48 0.48 0.00
2 x 80 W E 0.28 0.61 0.61 0.00 2 x 80 W E 0.29 0.63 0.63 0.00
Efficient protection against pollution Easy maintenance

The covers of the IP 50 base units safely retained in the For easy maintenance and
continuous frame consist of chemically resistant silicate rapid lamp replacement the
glass. Even oil gases or drilling emulsions do not leave covers of the IP 50 versions
irreversible pollution. can be hung on the base
units without tools. Four
Maintenance intervals especially in rooms with an in- frame hinges in stainless
creased degree of pollution are extended and thus steel per lamp length as-
reduce the costs for the lighting installation. sure a permanently safe
retention.
363
DELTA
Gear trays for safety lighting
Requirements Minimum Switching Emergency power source Illumination Reference Lamps kg

illuminance period Nominal Admissible of escape W
operating alternatives1) signs Gear trays with
time emergency light socket E14,
for stand-by switching
Meeting rooms 1 lx max. 1 s 3h Permanent
Business rooms switching 7601N/54 E + E14 1x54 1.9
Exhibition rooms 7601N/36 E + E14 1x36 1.9
7602N/54 E + E14 2x54 2.1
Meeting rooms with 1 lx max. 1 s 3h Single batteries Permanent
max. 20 safety switching 7602N/36 E + E14 2x36 2.0
luminaires
Schools 1 lx max. 15 s 3h Single batteries Permanent
Em. power generator switching
Escape routes in 1 lx 50 % of required 1h Single batteries Permanent
working facilities illuminance in 5 s, Em. power generator switching not
100 % in 60 s Specially safe- necessary
guarded mains
Anti-panic 0.5 lx 50 % of required 1h No information No information
lighting2) illuminance in 5 s
100 % in 60 s
Workplaces with min. 0.1Em3) max. 0.5 s Time of Single batteries Permanent
special risk min. 15 lx risk Specially safe- switching not
guarded mains necessary
1)
Central battery, group battery with or without inventor, rapid stand-by and
immediate stand-by power generator.
2)
... in order to reach a point where an escape route can be clearly recognised.
3)
Em = Maintenance value of illuminance.
A B A 7601N/54 E + E 14
Emergency lighting takes over in the event of mains failure
8 10
8 10
Eh = 0.25 lx Eh = 0.25 lx + 07600/ Base unit
of the general artificial lighting. It has to ensure that activities B 7601N/54 E + E 14
can be ended without risk and working facilities can be left
6
6
0.5 lx 0.5 lx + 07600 G/ Base unit, perforated
4
4
safely. Emergency lighting is divided into stand-by lighting C 7601N/54 E + E 14
+ 07600/ Base unit
2
and safety lighting. The safety lighting is further divided into 1 lx 1 lx + 07600 RW/1500 White louvre
0
Safety lighting for escape routes, Anti-panic lighting and 10 8 6 4 2 0 0 2 4 6 8 10
m
C 7601N/54 E + E 14
10 8 6 4 2 0 0 2 4 6 8 10
Safety lighting for workplaces with special risks. + 07600 G/ Base unit, perforated
0
1 lx 1 lx
+ 07600 RW/1500 White louvre
2
Multiplication factor for other equipments

4
0.5 lx 0.5 lx 7601N/E + E14 M = 1.00

6
7602N/E + E14 M = 1.00

10 8
10 8
Eh = 0.25 lx Eh = 0.25 lx Suspension length 3 m

C m D Suspension length 5 m
Equipment options for Isolux curves The following luminous fluxes + E14 Gear tray
5-conductor and Illuminances achieved with are taken into account: Gear trays for continuous Sheet steel, white. Fixed to
7-conductor wiring DELTA gear trays for safety lines and individual lumi- the base unit by means of a
lighting are documented in Isolux curves + E14 naires with electronic control plastic-coated, metal turn-
Mains cable 3 con.
Mains cable 5 con.
Dimming 1-10 V
Emergency syst.
EB single battery
UR switch. relay
E 14 socket
No. of conductors
Wiring type
the isolux curves opposite. Equipment: tubular incandes- gear and emergency light lock fastener without using
They refer to a level on the cent lamp, 40 W, luminous socket E14, red-marked. tools. With electronic control
floor and a light loss factor flux 380 lm. (Not suitable in combination gear.
of 0.8. Indirect portions are with extremely narrow-
not taken into consideration. Isolux curves + EB angle specular reflectors Electrical connection
Equipment: T5 fluorescent 07601 HRL/1500. Special The electrical connection with
lamps 35 W. Luminous flux version for narrow/wide- general and safety lighting
3 3 3300 lm (referred to nominal angle specular reflectors: circuit is made automatically
operation). The diagrams 07600 S/1500/E14.) when the gear tray is attached
3 1 4
opposite are based on bat- to the base unit. Lamp circuit
3 2 5 tery operation with corre- 7601 for 1 fluorescent connections can be set to
5LV
3 2 5 spondingly adjusted lumi- lamp 36 W or 54 W. the phase conductor without
3 2 5 nous flux. tools.
7602 for 2 fluorescent
5 5 Isolux curves + UR lamps 36 W or 54 W.
3 2 1 6 Equipment: T5 fluorescent
3 2 2 7 lamps 35 W, luminous flux With additional emergency
3300 lm. light socket E14 for tubular
3 2 2 7
incandescent lamps up to
5 1 6 7LV In case of different equip- 40 W, max. lamp length
5 2 7 ments the illuminance values 103 mm, max. diameter
5 2 7
must be multiplied by the 30 mm, as well as for com-
given factors. Deviating lumi- pact fluorescent lamps with
5 2 7 nous fluxes have to be con- integrated electronic control
sidered accordingly. gear. Max. lamp length
125 mm, max. diameter
42 mm.
364
Reference Nominal Lamps kg Reference Lamps kg
operating time W W
Gear trays with Gear trays with
single battery supply switching relay for
for permanent switching permanent switching
7601N/35 E + EB3 3 hours 1x35 2.7 7601N/35 E + UR 1x35 1.9
7601N/80 E + EB1 1 hour 1x80 2.5 7601N/80 E + UR 1x80 1.9
652do
Degree of protection IP 20, IP 50
A B A 7601N/35 E + EB A B A 7601N/35 E + UR
12 16
12 16
8 10
8 10
Eh = 0.25 lx Eh = 0.25 lx + 07600/ Base unit Eh = 0.25 lx Eh = 0.25 lx + 07600/ Base unit
B 7601N/35 E + EB B 7601N/35 E + UR
0.5 lx
6
0.5 lx 0.5 lx + 07600/ Base unit 0.5 lx + 07600/ Base unit

8
+ 07600 RW/1500 White louvre + 07600 RW/1500 White louvre

4
C 7602N/35 E + EB C 7602N/35 E + UR
2
1 lx 1 lx + 07600/ Base unit 1 lx 1 lx + 07600/ Base unit

0
0
0
10 8 6 4 2 0 0 2 4 6 8 10 16 12 8 4 0 0 4 8 12 16
m
C 7602N/35 E + EB C 7602N/35 E + UR
m
10 8 6 4 2 0 0 2 4 6 8 10 16 12 8 4 0 0 4 8 12 16
+ 07600/ Base unit + 07600/ Base unit
0
0
0
1 lx 1 lx 1 lx 1 lx
+ 07600 RW/1500 White louvre + 07600 RW/1500 White louvre
2
Multiplication factor for other equipments Multiplication factor for other equipments
4
0.5 lx 0.5 lx 760N/58 E + EB M = 1.37 0.5 lx 0.5 lx 760N/58 E + UR M = 1.35

6
7601N/80 E + EB M = 3.32 7601N/80 E + UR M = 2.02

12
12
10 8
10 8
Eh = 0.25 lx Eh = 0.25 lx Eh = 0.25 lx Eh = 0.25 lx

16
Suspension length 3 m Suspension length 3 m

16
C m D Suspension length 5 m C m D Suspension length 5 m
+ EB Gear tray + UR Gear tray

Gear trays for continuous Sheet steel, white. Fixed to Gear trays for continuous Sheet steel, white. Fixed to
lines and individual lumi- the base unit by means of a lines and individual luminaires. the base unit by means of a
naires equipped with elec- plastic-coated, metal turn- Version with electronic con- plastic-coated, metal turn-
tronic control gear and sin- lock fastener without using trol gear and relay to switch lock fastener without using
gle battery. tools. With electronic control over to safety power supply. tools. With electronic control
gear. Fluorescent lamps switched gear.
7601 for 1 fluorescent permanently, in the event of
lamp 35 W, 58 W or 80 W. Electrical connection mains failure one lamp is Electrical connection
The electrical connection with operated by the emergency The electrical connection with
7602 for 2 fluorescent general and safety lighting power source on site. general and safety lighting
lamps 35 W or 58 W. circuit is made automatically circuit is made automatically
when the gear tray is attached 7601 for 1 fluorescent when the gear tray is attached
Fluorescent lamps switched to the base unit. Lamp circuit lamp 35 W, 58 W or 80 W. to the base unit. Lamp circuit
permanently, in the event of connections can be set to connections can be set to
mains failure one lamp is the phase conductor without 7602 for 2 fluorescent the phase conductor without
operated by a single battery tools. lamps 35 W or 58 W. tools.
with maintenance-free, gas-
proof high-temperature nick-
el-cadmium accumulators.
LED indicates the charge
state of the battery.
+ EB1
Nominal operation time
1 hour.
+ EB3
Nominal operation time
3 hours.
365
Planning
Overhang Next fixing point on the joint

min. 65 mm / max. 1000 mm of the next base unit

235-1000
65-100
E E
E
Fixing above the joints Run Lamp Base unit Base unit Fixing
Opposite table contains length length 076/II/ 076/III/ points
information on the composi-
tion of DELTA continuous m No. Pieces Pieces No.
lines. The required number 3.07 2 1 2
of base units as well as the 4.61 3 1 2
minimum number of fixing 6.14 4 2 3
points for different continu- 7.67 5 1 1 3
ous line lengths is given, 9.20 6 2 3
assuming that the fixing 10.73 7 2 1 4
clamps of the suspen- 12.26 8 1 2 4
sions are directly placed 13.79 9 3 4
above the joints of the 15.32 10 2 2 5
base profiles. 16.85 11 1 3 5
18.38 12 4 5
All information for single- and 19.92 13 2 3 6
twin-lamp gear trays, inde- 21.45 14 1 4 6
pendent of the kind of opti- 22.98 15 5 6
cal equipment and the fixing 24.51 16 2 4 7
type. 26.04 17 1 5 7
27.57 18 6 7
Overhang dimensions 29.10 19 2 5 8
The overhang dimension at 30.63 20 1 6 8
the ends of continuous lines
must be min. 65 mm or
max. 1000 mm.
Ordering example: 1. Base unit: Base units, 3 lengths ..............................3 x 07600/III/7LV/1500

Non-interrupted continuous line 35 W
(T5 lamp) with ceiling-oriented feeding. 2. Base unit and fixing Feeding accessory ..............................................1 x 07600 ESB
accessory: End caps ......................................................2 x 07600 RK-RPV
13.79 m long (equals 9 lamp lengths),
Decorative wire suspensions ..................................4 x A 01 DSD
equipped with single-lamp, dimmable gear
trays and parabolic louvres. Decorative wire
3. Gear tray: Gear trays, single-lamp 35 W ..........................9 x 7601N/35 ED
suspensions. IP 20.
4. Optical equipment: Parabolic louvres........................................9 x 07600 RPV/1500
Ordering example: 1. Base unit: Base unit, 2 lengths ................................1 x 07600/II/5LV/1500

Modular continuous line 58 W (T8 Base units, 3 lengths ..............................2 x 07600/III/5LV/1500
lamp), with blanking cover for each 3rd
lamp length and feeding via end caps 2. Base unit and fixing End caps ..............................................................2 x 07600 RK
of the base units. accessory: Blanking covers ............................................2 x 07600 B/1500
Chain suspensions....................................................4 x A 01 KD
12.26 m long (equals 8 lamp lengths),
equipped with single-lamp gear trays and
3. Gear tray: Gear trays, single-lamp 58 W ............................6 x 7601N/58 E
lamella louvres. Chain suspensions. IP 20.
4. Optical equipment: Lamella louvres ..........................................6 x 07600 RW/1500
366
Mounting
Suspension of base units

directly above the joints by
using the two auxiliary sus-
pensions of accessory
07600 MH.
1. While the first profile is
held by the suspension at
the beginning and, temporar-
ily, by one auxiliary suspen-
sion at the joint, the second
auxiliary suspension is tem-
porarily used at the end of
the second base profile.
1000 40 mm 40 1000 mm
2. Following the mechanical
connection of the base units
by means of solid interior
couplings, spacer brackets
are positioned at each joint.
3. Reflector connectors
avoid light leakage between
the base profiles.
Fixing next to the joints 4. The suspension clamp of

If DELTA continuous lines cannot be fixed directly above the the wire or chain suspension
joints of the base units to the shell ceiling by means of wire is positioned directly above
or chain suspension, they have to be suspended at the left the joint without using tools.
and right side of the joint according to the illustration above.
5. Wires or chains are

removed from the auxiliary
suspension and fixed to the
suspension clamp above the
joint.
6. The auxiliary suspension

of the first base unit can be
removed without using tools.
7. End caps form a stylish

conclusion of the DELTA
base units at the ends of the
continuous line.
367
E-LINE system components
Example with trunking, gear tray (IP 20), reflector and lamella louvre
The rapid-mounting continu-

ous-line system E-LINE is a
universal system for individ-
ual solutions consisting of
practical single components
which can be adapted to
individual requirements such
as visual-task-associated
photometrics, increased
efficiency and compatibility
with various architectural
environments.
Snap fasteners
Fastening components in
stainless steel, for use
without tools, assure rapid
mounting and permanent,
safe retention of gear trays
and reflectors.
1 Fixing accessories
2 Trunking
3 Trunking end cap
4 Male connector
5 Snap fastener
6 Gear tray
7 Reflector
8 Reflector end cap
9 Louvre
368
Reflectors T Reflectors R Reflectors RH Industrial self-suspended
Trapezium-shaped reflectors T Radial reflectors and an ex- With their elevated form, high reflectors F
are universally suitable for tensive range of accessories radial reflectors are designed Industrial self-suspended
both single-lamp and twin- such as louvres, specular primarily to house specular reflectors can directly be
lamp gear trays. They can reflectors and diffusers do louvres or DSE-suitable attached to the gear tray,
also be combined with white not only provide good light- parabolic louvres, but can without additional coverings,
lamella louvres. ing but also shine out thanks equally be equipped with thus providing a demand-
to their attractive design. white louvres or diffusers. oriented, cost-optimised
solution within the E-LINE
range.
369
E-LINE wiring options offering
increased planning scope
Increased planning scope

E-LINE consists of three
trunking systems:
single-length prewired
trunking for individual
luminaires,
twin-length, triple-length
prewired trunking for
lines or continuous lines
with blanking covers in
lamp length,
twin-length, triple-length
unwired trunking. This
must be equipped by the
client with through- wiring
sets such as wiring sets
with integrated connector
sockets in modular spacing
or flatband cables which can
be equipped at any place
with connector sockets.
Trunking Accessories for unwired trunking Gear trays

IP 20, IP 50, IP 50 D
Individual luminaires,
prewired trunking
Gear trays, reflectors and optical acces-
sories can be combined to versatile indi-
vidual luminaires.
Modular system,
prewired trunkings
Continuous lines with modular luminaire
spacing are rapidly installed, saving both
time and money!
Modular system,
unwired trunking
Trunking wired on site allows continuous-
line installation with modular luminaire
spacing.
Variable system,
unwired trunking
Trunking wired on site allows continuous-
line installation with variable luminaire
spacing.
370
Single-length trunking
prewired
for individual luminaires
Trunking prewired
for modular system
Trunking unwired
for modular system for
through-wiring sets with
integrated connector sockets
in modular spacing or for
variable system for flatband
cables and connector sockets
to be located at will.
The E-LINE trunking is available for both 5-conductor

and 7-conductor wiring sets. These are
particularly recommended for three-phase current
connection and simultaneous operation of gear trays
equipped with dimming or other lighting management
systems, or emergency light inserts.
Examples for individual luminaires

and continuous-line arrangements
Individual luminaire with gear

tray 58 W and single-length
trunking 07690/I/58 -7 LV/E
Continuous line with gear

trays 36 W or 58 W in modular
spacing. Trunking prewired.
Continuous line with gear trays

36 W or 58 W in modular
spacing. Trunking wired on site.
Continuous line with gear

trays 58 W in 510 mm spacing.
Trunking wired on site.
Continuous line 36 W or 58 W
with spacings to be chosen at
will. Trunking wired on site.
371
E-LINE
Combinations of reflectors
and optical accessories
Optical accessories
Lamella louvre Lamella louvre
T-RW RW
07690 T-RW/36 07691 RW/36, 58

07690 T-RW/58 07692 RW/36, 58
Combination versatility Trapezium-

Self-suspended E-LINE shaped
reflectors contain a light- reflector T
controlling optical system,
thus additional optical
accessories are not required.
Trapezium-shaped and radial 07690 T/36
reflectors can be combined 07690 T/58 Page 382 Page 384
in manifold ways with optical
accessories, allowing per- Radial
fect adaptation of E-LINE reflector R
continuous lines to project-
specific photometrical and 07691 R/36
architectural demands. 07691 R/58
07692 R/36
The matrix opposite shows 07692 R/58 Page 386 Page 386
the compatibility of reflec-
tors with different optical Perforated
accessories. radial reflector G
The pages indicated relate to
the subsequent application
pages featuring the charac-
teristics of the respective 07691 G/58
components, their dimen- 07692 G/58 Page 398 Page 399
sions and the resulting pho-
tometrics as well as product High
and application illustrations. reflector RH
The indication Option
means that a combination is
technically possible, but not
described on the following 07691 RH/58
application pages. Rough 07692 RH/58 Option Option
photometrical plannings
Perforated
for these versions can be
high reflector GH
realised using the photom-
etric data tables of com-
parable combinations.
A variety of different TRILUX
software systems is avail- 07691 GH/58
able for more detailed plan- 07692 GH/58 Option Option
nings, please contact your
local TRILUX support centre. Self-suspended
reflector STF
narrow/wide-angle
Self-suspended
reflector SAF
asymmetrical 07690 STF/58
07690 SAF/58 Page 406 Page 407
Self-suspended
reflector HRF
extremely
narrow-angle
07691 HRF/58 Page 408
372
Specular reflectors Prismatic diffuser Cross-blade louvre Parabolic louvre
SB wide-angle SA asymmetrical ST narrow-angle P RSV RMV semi-spec. RPV highly-spec.
07691 SB/58 07691 SA/58 07691 ST/58 07691 P/58 07691 RSV/58 07691 RMV/58 07691 RPV/58
07692 SB/58 07692 SA/58 07692 ST/58 07692 P/58 07692 RSV/58 07692 RMV/58 07692 RPV/58
Option
Option Page 400 Page 401 Page 402
Option Page 404 Option Page 405
Reflector accessories Reference Designation

in ABS, white, impact-resist-
ant, PVC-free, UV-stabilised. Accessories for trapezium- 07690 RKT Reflector end cap, 1 piece
To be inserted into the reflec- shaped reflectors T 07690 RVT* Reflector connector, 1 set
tors without tools. Illustrations
see pages 382 and 383.
Accessories for radial 07691 RK Reflector end cap, 1 piece
Reflector end caps are to reflectors R, G 07692 RK Reflector end cap, 1 piece
be ordered for front-plane 07691 RV* Reflector connector, 1 set
conclusion at continuous-line 07692 RV* Reflector connector, 1 set
ends or at adjacent blanking
covers. Accessories for radial 07691 RKH Reflector end cap, 1 piece
reflectors RH, GH 07692 RKH Reflector end cap, 1 piece
Reflector connectors are 07691 RVH* Reflector connector, 1 set
necessary for precise con- 07692 RVH* Reflector connector, 1 set
nection of reflectors.
* 1 set for each joint
373
E-LINE basis:
Universal trunking for IP 20 and IP 50
Trunking versions Reference Length kg Reference Length Connector kg

The E-LINE rapid-mounting Trunking for individual luminaires mm Trunking 5 conductors mm spacings/mm
system is based on a dimen- 07690/I/58 -7LV/E 1530 1.8 07690/II/36-5LV 2460 1230 2.7
sionally stable trunking which 07690/III/36-5LV 3690 1230 4.0
can house gear trays in both 07690/II/58-5LV 3060 1530 3.3
IP 20 or IP 50. IP 50 can be 07690/II/58-5LV 2.5 mm2 3060 1530 3.3
achieved by special trunking 07690/III/58-5LV 4590 1530 5.0
end caps and gasket acces- 07690/III/58-5LV 2.5 mm2 4590 1530 5.0
sories for the joints.
Trunking 7 conductors
07690/II/36-7LV 2460 1230 2.8
The twin-and triple-length
trunking equipped as stan- 07690/III/36-7LV 3690 1230 4.2
dard with stable couplings 07690/II/58-7LV 3060 1530 3.5
is the basis of E-LINE continu- 07690/III/58-7LV 4590 1530 5.2
ous lines. The single-length
version is primarily designed
for combination as individual
luminaires, but can also be
used for a subsequent pro-
longation of E-LINE continu-
ous lines.
Trunking 07690/I/58-7LV/E Trunking 07690//5LV, 07690//7LV

Sheet steel, galvanised, with white polyester coating, Sheet steel, galvanised, white, completely prewired with
completely prewired with heat-resistant individual conduc- heat-resistant individual conductors 5 x 1.5 mm2 or
tors 7 x 1.5 mm2 and a 7-pole female connector. 5 x 2.5 mm2 (5LV) or 7 x 1.5 mm2 (7LV), each with a
7-pole female connector per lamp length.
Equipment options
for 5-conductor (5LV) and
7-conductor (7LV) wiring
Mains cable 5 cond.
Mains cable 3 cond.
Dimming 1-10 V
Emergency syst.
EB single battery
UR switch. relay
E 14 socket
No. of conductors
Wiring type
3 3
3 1 4
3 2 5
5LV
3 2 5
3 2 5 Trunking 07690/I/58-7LV/E is the basis for individual lumi- Trunking 07690//5LV, 07690//7LV for non-interrupted
naires. It is equipped as standard with a 7-pole female con- continuous lines or continuous lines with blanking covers in
5 5 nector and a 7-conductor through-wiring set. Sockets and lamp length is prewired and equipped with a female connector
3 2 1 6 connectors protect the cable ends and allow for electrical per lamp length for tool-free electrical connection with the
3 2 2 7 connection as well as rapid connection with through-wiring gear tray.
sets of existing E-LINE continuous lines in case these are pro-
3 2 2 7
longated. 5-conductor through-wiring sets and 7-conductor through-
5 1 6 7LV wiring sets are optionally available for extended electrical
5 2 7 All E-LINE gear trays and reflectors as well as corresponding continuous-line equipment, see the table opposite.
5 2 7
optical accessories can be used for individual luminaires.
5 2 7 E-LINE individual luminaires are specially recommended for
applications such as individual lighting of workstations or light-
ing of small separated room zones.
374
Reference Length kg
Trunking unwired mm
07690/II/36-U 2460 2.4
07690/III/36-U 3690 3.6
07690/II/58-U 3060 3.0
07690/III/58-U 4590 4.5
Additional modules
07690/510/U 510 0.5
07690/1020/U 1020 1.0
IP 20
IP 50
IP 50 D
End caps IP 20 End cap IP 50

1 piece, for trunking 07690. Plastic 07680 E-R
material, white, with 2 knock-out 1 piece, for trunking 07690 in com-
openings. To be snapped into place bination with radial reflectors. Plastic
without tools. For IP 20. material, white, with 2 knock-out
One pair of end caps is required per openings and 2 grommets Pg11.
continuous line. End caps to be snapped into place,
Trunking 07690/-U 07690 E-T for continuous lines without tools. For IP 50.
Sheet steel, galvanised, with white polyester coating, with trapezium-shaped One pair of end caps is required per
unwired. reflectors, continuous line.
Trunking can easily be wired on site. 07690 E-R for continuous lines
with radial reflectors.
Trunking 07690/-U is the basis for the variable system for Blanking cover IP 20 Blanking cover IP 50
continuous lines with longitudinal luminaire spacings to be 1 piece, for trunking 07690. 07680 B/58
chosen at will. Connector sockets are connected on site with Plastic extrusion, white, to be easily 1 piece, for continuous lines in IP 50
auto-connect flatband cables. shortened on site. For IP 20. with trunking 07690.... Plastic extru-
07690 B/510 mm 510 mm long, sion, white, 1530 mm long.
Continuous lines can also be wired on site by means of 07690 B/1020 mm 1020 mm long,
5-conductor or 7-conductor through-wiring sets which are 07690 B/36 1230 mm long, Trunking connection gasket IP 50
equipped with connector sockets in a modular spacing of 07690 B/58 1530 mm long. 07680 KD
510 mm, 1230 mm or 1530 mm, allowing to realise rapidly 1 set, for continuous lines in IP 50.
corresponding modular blanking spacings or multiple spac- Cable holders IP 20 and IP 50 Interior, not visible from the outside.
ings. In case of wirings in 510 mm module additional trunking 07690 LHA Necessary for a durable and safe
sections may be necessary, see page 413. Through-wiring 1 piece, for trunking 07690. sealing of trunking joints. One set is
sets and wiring accessories see page 377. Stainless steel, for max. 4 sheathed required per joint.
cables 5 x 2.5 mm2, to be snapped
onto trunking without tools.
375
Through-wiring sets and accessories
for unwired E-LINE trunking units
Modular system with female connector spacings Modular system with female connector spacings
1230 mm or 1530 mm (1 lamp length) 510 mm (13 lamp length)
E-LINE trunking units can be
wired on site easily with the
following four options:
Modular system with

female connector spac-
ings 1230 or 1530 mm
(lamp length)
Modular system with

female connector
spacings 510 mm
(13 lamp length in 58 W)
Variable system with

flatband cable
Variable system with

individual conductors
Reference Number of Connector Length
The advantages of rapid
conductors spacings/mm m Reference Number of Connector Length
mounting are especially valid
07690/5LV-36/37m 5 x 1.5 mm2 1230 37 conductors spacings/mm m
for the modular system where
the female connectors of the 07690/5LV-58/46m 5 x 1.5 mm2 1530 46 07690/5LV-510/46m 5 x 1.5 mm2 510 46
through-wiring accessories 07690/7LV-58/46m 7 x 1.5 mm2 1530 46 07690/7LV-510/46m 7 x 1.5 mm2 510 46
are positioned by means of
defined stops in the trunking
units and fixed without using
tools. An easy insertion of
the gear trays is thus guar-
anteed.
Through-wiring sets 07690 / 5LV-36/37m Through-wiring sets 07690 / 5LV-510mm/46m
The modular system with To wire unwired trunking on 5 conductors, 37 m long, for To wire unwired trunking on 5 conductors, 46 m long, for
female connectors mounted site in case gear trays are 30 lamp lengths 36 W. site in case gear trays are gear trays 58 W. Female con-
at 510 mm spacings allows mounted at modular spacings Female connectors in modu- mounted at modular spacings nectors in modular distance
easy realisation of blanking in lamp length. For gear lar spacing of 1230 mm. 510 mm. For gear trays of 510 mm.
distances equaling a third of trays 36 W and 58 W. With 58 W. With 3 female connec-
or multiples of a lamp length 1 female connector per lamp 07690 / 5LV-58/46m tors per lamp length. 07690 / 7LV-510mm/46m
based on the deployment of length. 5 conductors, 46 m long, for 7 conductors, 46 m long, for
58 W luminaire units. 30 lamp lengths 58 W. Consisting of colour-coded gear trays 58 W. Female con-
Consisting of colour-coded Female connectors in modu- individual conductors nectors in modular distance
The variable wiring systems individual conductors lar spacing of 1530 mm. 1.5 mm2, cable holders and of 510 mm.
offer maximum freedom when 1.5 mm2, cable holders and premounted female connec-
positioning the gear trays premounted female connec- 07690 / 7LV-58/46m tors.
within the continuous line. tors. 7 conductors, 46 m long, for
Here, the upper parts of the 30 lamp lengths 58 W.
female connector contact Female connectors in modu-
with the wiring at any posi- lar spacing of 1530 mm.
tion: in case of the flatband
cable by means of contact
cutting edges (female con-
nectors are secured by flat Obligatory accessories Obligatory accessories
nose pliers) and in case of Wiring connector Wiring connector
individual conductor through- 07690 VV 07690 VV
wiring by means of custom- 7-pole jack connection for 7-pole jack connection for
ary plug-connection. secure electrical completion secure electrical completion
of through-wiring sets. Jack of through-wiring sets. Jack
Through-wiring sets 2.5 mm2 suitable for mains connec- suitable for mains connec-
are available on request (not tion. Also necessary for tion. Also necessary for
as flatband cable). interconnection of through- interconnection of through-
wiring sets or for mains con- wiring sets or for mains con-
nection within the through- nection within the through-
wiring. wiring.
376
Variable system Variable system
with flatband cable with individual conductors
Earthed feeding
All through-wiring sets must
be electrically secured at
their conclusion by means
of the wiring connector
07690 VV. Mains connection
is also effected with this
component. It is fixed to a
metal contact stud at the
Reference Number of Length
beginning of the trunking and
conductors m Reference Number of Length
thus includes the complete
07690/5LV/46m 5 x 1.5 mm2 46 conductors m trunking in the earthing
07690/7LV/46m 7 x 1.5 mm2 46 07690/5LV/25m 5 x 1.5 mm2 25 process, without using tools.
Through-wiring sets 07690/5LV/46m Through-wiring sets 07690/5LV/25m Equipment options

To wire unwired trunking on 5 conductors, 46 m long, To wire unwired trunking on 5 colour-coded, intertwined for 5-conductor (5LV) and
site in case gear trays are female connnector spacings site in case gear trays are heat-resistant individual con- 7-conductor (7LV) wiring
mounted at variable spac- to be chosen at will. mounted at variable spac- ductors, 25 m long, female
Mains cable 3 con.

Mains cable 5 con.
Dimming 1-10 V
Emergency syst.
EB single battery
UR switch. relay
E 14 socket
No. of conductors
Wiring type
ings. For gear trays 58 W. ings. For gear trays 58 W. connector spacings to be
07690/7LV/46m chosen at will.
Consisting of flatband cable 7 conductors, 46 m long, Consisting of five colour-
1.5 mm2 with colour-coded female connnector spacings coded individual conductors Cable holders for fixing to
earthed wire, including cable to be chosen at will. 1.5 mm2. the trunking to be ordered
holders for fixing to the separately.
trunking.
3 3
3 1 4
3 2 5
5LV
3 2 5
3 2 5
5 5
3 2 1 6
Obligatory accessories Obligatory accessories 3 2 2 7
07690 SK 07690 TO
3 2 2 7
Female connector Female connector
7-pole, for electrical connec- 5-pole, for electrical connec- 5 1 6 7LV
tion of flatband cables tion of individual conductors. 5 2 7
07690/5LV/46m or 5 2 7
07690/7LV/46m. Cable holders 07690 LHI
(not illustrated) 10 pieces, 5 2 7
Wiring connector for approx. 4.5 m trunking
07690 VV length, plastic material, for
7-pole jack connection for max. 25 individual conduc-
secure electrical completion tors 2.5 mm2, to be snapped
of through-wiring sets. Jack onto trunking.
suitable for mains connec-
tion. Also necessary for Wiring connector
interconnection of through- 07690 VV
wiring sets or for mains con- Jack connection for mains
nection within the through- supply and tool-free earthing
wiring. of the trunking.
377
Nodes
07690 KA/7LV
> 60
< 300
A 03 S A 03 P A 03 D
110 180 1530 180 110
1538/58W
2000
Node with wire Node with pendant Node A 03 D Node adapter

suspension A 03 S suspension A 03 P 1 piece for up to 4 connec- 07690 KA/7LV
1 piece, consisting of: 1 piece, consisting of: tions, angles continuously 1 piece, for the connection of
x. 2
500 1 node for up to 4 connec- 1 node for up to 4 connec- adjustable between 60 and nodes A 03 with trunkings
ma
tions, angles continuously tions, angles continuously 300. Die-cast aluminium, 07690, for continuous lines
adjustable between 60 adjustable between 60 white. in IP 20, consisting of
and 300, die-cast alu- and 300, die-cast 1 adapter profile, white sheet
minium, white, aluminium, white, Ordering example: steel, with integrated
1 steel wire, 2.0 mm, 1 steel pendant rod, X-shaped node with adapter element in die-cast
galvanised, 1500 mm long, 13 mm, with vernier clip 4 connections: aluminium, white,
length continuously for height compensation up 1 node A 03 D, 1 stable inner coupling, sheet
adjustable without tools, to 20 mm, 1500 mm long, 4 adapters 07690 KA/7LV. steel, galvanised,
1 ceiling fixing unit, nickeled. to be adapted to reduced 1 blanking cover, plastic
50 0 suspension lengths on site extrusion, white,
x. 1
ma Ceiling rose 05900 AN* thanks to the tool-free 1 through-wiring set
(not illustrated) adjustable vernier clip 7 x 1.5 mm2,
1 piece, for the connection of threading is not necessary. 1 connection element for
the mains cable in case of 1 plastic ceiling trim cap, electrical connection with
nodes with wire suspension. white. through-wiring set in the
continuous line, premounted
Feeding tube or mounted on site.
1 piece, plastic, white,
10 mm, to be shortened
on site. To guide and cover
the mains cable.
05000 ZR 1 m long,
05000 ZR/2m 2 m long,
in combination with A 03 S.
378
Suspension accessories for wire,
chain or pendant suspensions
The fixing accessories shown

are universally suitable for
trunking 07690 in combina-
tion with all E-LINE gear trays
and corresponding optical
components and, in addition,
when using trunking units as
trunking rails for TRILUX
surface-mounted luminaires.
Maximum fixing spacing

between the fixing acces-
sories shown: 2500 mm.
Reduced spacings in case of
node arrangements, see
page 378.
For safety reasons, fixing

A 01 DSX A 01 SX A 01 KX A 01 PX accessories must be able
to support five times the
weight of the luminaires to
be mounted on them. In case
the maximum fixing spacings
are retained this results in
loads of 20 kg maximum
per suspension point. All sus-
pension accessories in the
E-LINE range are therefore
designed for at least 100 kg
weight load. Fixing acces-
E 07 E 03 SX E 03 KX D 01 X sories provided on site such
as dowels, ceiling hooks,
etc. should meet with these
requirements.
E 06 E 04 E 05 N E 01
Decorative wire suspension Wire suspension A 01 SX Chain suspension A 01 KX Pendant suspension

A 01 DSX Consisting of steel wire, Consisting of link chain, gal- A 01 PX
Consisting of steel wire, galvanised 1.75 mm, vanised, 1500 mm long, with Consisting of pendant rod,
galvanised 1.75 mm, 1500 mm long and suspension turnbuckle and suspension steel, white, 13 mm,
1500 mm long and suspen- clamp E 03 SX. Wire length clamp E 03 KX. with vernier clip, stainless
sion clamp. Wire length fully fully adjustable without tools. steel, for tool-free height
adjustable without tools. Suspension clamp compensation of up to
Suspension clamp E 03 SX E 03 KX 20 mm, 1500 mm long, to
Wire accessory E 07 For wire suspensions in For chain suspensions, stain- be shortened on site, as well
To realise wire suspensions combination with accessories less steel, to be attached to as suspension clamp, stain-
on site, with steel wire E 06 E 06 and E 07. Stainless the trunking without tools. less steel, to be attached to
and suspension clamps steel, to be attached to the the trunking without tools.
E 03 SX. Wire accessory trunking without tools. Wire Turnbuckle E 05 N Plastic ceiling cap, white.
consisting of 12 grommets length fully adjustable without For height compensation in
as wire protection in the tools. chain link length as well as a Fixing clamp D 01 X
suspension area, together chain quick-action lock. Stainless steel, with slotted
with 12 pressure clamps to Link chain E 04 plate for direct ceiling mount- Vernier clip for increased
make suspension eyelets Galvanised, 20 m long, to be ing, to snap the trunking into flexibility
with pliers (e.g. Klauke K 39 shortened on site. place without tools. Distance The vernier clip of the pend-
or Cimco BH), recess size between trunking and fixing ant suspensions in stainless
10 mm. surface 9 mm. steel can be removed or
attached to the pendant
Steel wire E 06 Ceiling fixing plate E 01 without tools. Thus, pendant
1.75 mm, galvanised, Sheet steel, galvanised, with rods can easily be adapted to
20 m long, with quick-acting safety spring hook to attach reduced suspension lengths
glue to seal the wire ends chains, wires or pendant rods on site.
from splicing when shortened. without tools.
Only to be used in combination
with accessory E 07.
379
E-LINE
Gear trays IP 20
Application Reference Lamps IP Ballast System kg Reference Lamps IP Ballast System kg

For non-specific, passive or Gear tray rating rating Gear tray rating rating
tertiary building areas with 7691/36 EU 1x36W IP 20 KVG 45W 1.3 7692/36 EU 2x36W IP 20 KVG 90W 2.0
general illumination require- 7691/36 E 1x36W IP 20 E 36W 1.1 7692/36 E 2x36W IP 20 E 72W 1.4
ments, e.g. storage rooms, 7691/36 ED 1x36W IP 20 ED 36W 1.3 7692/36 ED 2x36W IP 20 ED 72W 1.4
technical rooms or ancillary 7691/58 EU 1x58W IP 20 KVG 70W 2.0 7692/58 EU 2x58W IP 20 KVG 140W 3.0
rooms without continuously 7691/58 E 1x58W IP 20 E 55W 1.4 7692/58 E 2x58W IP 20 E 110W 1.6
occupied workplaces.
7691/58 ED 1x58W IP 20 ED 55W 1.6 7692/58 ED 2x58W IP 20 ED 110W 1.6
Gear trays
Sheet steel, white. Fixed to
the trunking by means of
stainless steel snap fasten-
ers without tools. With
low-loss ballasts.
EU With conventional bal-

last.
gear.
ED With dimmable elec-
tronic control gear with
1-10 V interface.
769 To observe IP 20.

768 With dust-protection
joints to observe IP 50.
768D/ For production
sites exposed to fire haz-
ards. IP 50 version with im-
pact-resistant lamp protec-
tion tubes and electronic No. 2131
control gear (E) meeting for gear tray
87
768, 769 92
increased thermal safety DIN 5040
requirements. B - u = 0.71
2 - su = 0.39
1 - so = 0.29
Electrical connection 63 101
Electrical connection is
made automatically when the
gear tray is attached to the
trunking. Lamp circuit con-
nections can be set to each
phase conductor without
tools.
Battens in IP 20 Tool-free phase selection

E-LINE battens in IP 20 consist of trunk- Female connectors on the through-wiring and additional male
ing rails and gear trays which can be connectors on the gear tray allow for automatic electrical
combined with conventional ballasts, contact when inserting the gear tray into the trunking.
electronic control gear and dimmable
electronic control gear. Tool-free adjustable slide contacts of the male connector
allow the selection of the desired phase conductor and the
Indications Page All further optical accessories as de- easy allocation of the individual lamp circuits to the switching
Trunking / accessories 374 scribed on the following pages 382 groups.
Suspensions 379 to 409 are based on the battens.
Emergency light inserts 410 In case of dimmable control gear, the 7-pole connector
Planning 412 socket also assures the connection to the 1-10 V electronic
Lighting management control gear interface.
system 431
380
E-LINE
Gear trays IP 50
Reference Lamps IP Ballast System kg Reference Lamps IP Ballast System kg

Gear tray rating rating Gear tray rating rating
7681/58 1x58W IP 50 VVG 66W 2.0 7682/58 2x58W IP 50 VVG 132W 3.0
7681/58 E 1x58W IP 50 E 55W 1.4 7682/58 E 2x58W IP 50 E 110W 1.6
7681 D/58 E 1x58W IP 50 E 55W 1.7 7682 D/58 E 2x58W IP 50 E 110W 2.4
652d ]o
Degree of protect. IP 20, IP 50, IP 50 D

for gear tray
768/58, 769 1 Number of luminaires
105
105
DIN 5040 En 300 lx 500 lx

B - u = 0.71 Room height H 3.0 m 5.0 m 3.0 m 5.0 m
2 - su = 0.39 20 3.0 4.8 5.0 7.9
1 - so = 0.29 30 4.0 6.2 6.6 10
63 116
40 5.0 7.4 8.3 12
Area
50 5.9 8.5 9.8 14
A
in m2 60 6.9 9.6 11 16
80 8.6 12 14 20
100 10 14 17 23
150 15 18 24 31
200 19 23 31 39
2 Max. luminaire

spacings for
g1 = Emin : E 1 : 1.5

for no. characteristics
of luminaires
In combination LB L
with direct indirect
gear tray M DLOR ULOR
1 x 36 W 1.55 0.96 0.68 0.27
1 x 58 W 1.00 0.96 0.68 0.27
2 x 36 W 0.84 0.94 0.60 0.34
2 x 58 W 0.54 0.94 0.60 0.34
1 x 36 W E 1.63 0.96 0.68 0.27
1 x 58 W E 1.04 0.96 0.68 0.27
2 x 36 W E 0.88 0.94 0.60 0.34
2 x 58 W E 0.56 0.94 0.60 0.34
1 x 58 W D 1.33 0.75 0.54 0.21
Battens in IP 50 Version D 2 x 58 W D 0.72 0.69 0.44 0.25
Special E-LINE gear trays in IP 50 E-LINE gear trays in version D, equipped as standard with Technical information see page 440.
offer a safe and permanent protection lamp protection tubes in polycarbonate, offer efficient pro-
against the ingression of dust. They tection in case of increased mechanical stress.
can be combined with all radial reflec-
tors and the respective optical acces- Equipped as standard with electronic control gear and rated
sories, in accordance with their IP IP 50, these versions are predestined for use in production
rating and application suitability. IP 50 sites exposed to fire hazards.
is respected in combination with all
available E-LINE trunking units. When
ordering simply add special trunking
end caps 07680 E-R and trunking con-
nection gaskets 07680 KD for the
mechanical trunking couplings.
381
Applications for E-LINE gear trays:
Trapezium-shaped reflector T
Application
Production facilities, work-
shops, assembly halls,
supermarkets, exhibition
halls and storage rooms.
Reflector T
Universally suitable for sin-
gle-lamp and twin-lamp gear
trays in IP 20. Trapezium-
shaped reflector made of
sheet steel, galvanised, with
white polyester coating.
Fixed to the gear tray by
means of stainless steel
snap fasteners without tools.
Due to increased operating times of

the lighting installation, printing works
require economic lighting systems. Tra-
pezium-shaped E-LINE reflectors with
increased luminous efficiency and gear
trays equipped with efficient electronic
control gear create the conditions for
minimised energy consumption.
Ordering example: continuous line Reflector end caps Reflector connectors

(5 lengths) with reflectors T Tool-free adjustable reflector Reflector connectors in
5 gear trays 7691/58 E end caps in impact-resistant, impact-resistant, PVC-free
5 reflectors 07690 T/58 PVC-free and UV-stabilised and UV-stabilised ABS as-
Indications Page 4 sets of reflector connectors ABS form a decorative con- sure precise alignment and
Trunking / accessories 374 07690 RVT clusion of trapezium-shaped connection of trapezium-
Suspensions 379 2 reflector end caps 07690 RKT reflectors T at continuous- shaped E-LINE reflectors T
Gear trays 380 line ends or at transitions to at joints of non-interrupted
Emergency light inserts 410 Trunking see page 374, suspensions blanking covers. continuous lines.
Planning 412 see page 379.
Lighting management Reflector end caps to be Reflector connectors to be
system 431 ordered separately. ordered separately.
Substitute references for
computer calculations 443
382
Reference Designation for Reference Designation for
gear tray gear tray
07690 T/36 Reflector T 1x36W 07690 T/36 Reflector T 2x36W
Reflector accessories Reflector accessories
07690 RKT Reflector end cap 07690 RKT Reflector end cap
07690 RVT Reflector connector 07690 RVT Reflector connector
Trunking and gear trays to be ordered separately. Trunking and gear trays to be ordered separately.
652d

for combination
146
146
769
+07690T/ En 300 lx 500 lx
DIN 5040 Room height H 3.0 m 5.0 m 3.0 m 5.0 m
A - u = 1.00 20 3.0 4.9 5.0 8.1
4 - su = 0.56 209 209 30 4.0 6.2 6.6 10
0 - so = 0.00 40 5.0 7.3 8.3 12
Area
50 6.0 8.4 10 14
A
in m2 60 7.0 9.6 12 16
80 9.0 12 15 20
100 11 14 18 23
150 15 19 26 32
200 20 24 33 40
2 Max. luminaire

spacings for
g1 = Emin : E 1 : 1.5

of luminaires
In combination LB L
1 x 36 W 1.52 0.75 0.75 0.00
1 x 58 W 1.00 0.74 0.74 0.00
2 x 36 W 0.82 0.70 0.70 0.00
2 x 58 W 0.54 0.69 0.69 0.00
1 x 36 W E 1.59 0.75 0.75 0.00
1 x 58 W E 1.04 0.74 0.74 0.00
2 x 36 W E 0.85 0.70 0.70 0.00
2 x 58 W E 0.56 0.69 0.69 0.00
Universal reflectors
Trapezium-shaped reflectors T are designed as universal
reflectors, to be used for both single-lamp and twin-lamp
gear trays in IP 20. In addition, the reflector accessories
such as reflector connectors, reflector end caps and
lamella louvres are suitable both for single-lamp and
twin-lamp versions.
E-LINE continuous lines with reflectors T thus present a

uniform design, independent from the gear tray equipment.
383
Trapezium-shaped reflector T
and lamella louvre T-RW
Application
shops, assembly halls, sales
areas, supermarkets and
training rooms.
Reflector T
Universally suitable for sin-
gle-lamp and twin-lamp gear
trays in IP 20. Trapezium-
shaped reflector made of
sheet steel, galvanised, with
white polyester coating.
Fixed to the gear tray by
means of stainless steel
snap fasteners without tools.
Lamella louvre T-RW

Sheet steel, white. To
be used in reflectors
07690 T. Can be hung
on the reflector for easy
maintenance.
Detailed visual tasks such as sorting

jobs require glare-free lighting. Reflec-
tors with lamella louvres within the
E-LINE range are predestined to corre-
spond to these demanding visual tasks.
Ordering example: continuous line Rapid mounting thanks to stainless Mounting and maintenance
(8 lengths) with reflectors T and steel snap fasteners made easy
lamella louvres T-RW Stainless steel snap fasteners, to be Numerous E-LINE details offer practice-
8 gear trays 7691/36 E connected without tools, allow for oriented functionality, thus saving time
Indications Page 8 reflectors 07690 T/36 rapid mounting of all gear trays and and money. Lamella louvres, specular
Trunking / accessories 374 8 lamella louvres 07690 T-RW/36 reflectors of the E-LINE range. louvres and parabolic louvres can be
Suspensions 379 7 sets of reflector connectors hung on the reflectors from either side,
Gear trays 380 07690 RVT Removal of the reflectors is equally facilitating maintenance and rapid lamp
Emergency light inserts 410 2 reflector end caps 07690 RKT facilitated: the integrated self-locking replacement.
Planning 412 device prevents inadvertent loosening
Lighting management Trunking see page 374, suspensions of the gear trays when handling the
system 431 see page 379. fasteners.
384
gear tray gear tray
07690 T-RW/36 Lamella louvre T-RW 1x36W 07690 T-RW/36 Lamella louvre T-RW 2x36W
07690 T-RW/58 Lamella louvre T-RW 1x58W 07690 T-RW/58 Lamella louvre T-RW 2x58W
07690 RKT Reflector end cap 07690 RKT Reflector end cap
07690 RVT Reflector connector 07690 RVT Reflector connector
652d

for combination
146
146
769
+07690T/ En 300 lx 500 lx
+07690RW/ Room height H 3.0 m 5.0 m 3.0 m 5.0 m
DIN 5040 20 3.2 5.2 5.3 8.6
A - u = 1.00 209 209 30 4.3 6.6 7.1 11
4 - su = 0.56 40 5.4 7.9 8.9 13
0 - so = 0.00 Area
50 6.5 9.0 11 15
A
in m2 60 7.6 10 13 17
80 9.7 13 16 21
100 12 15 20 25
150 17 21 28 34
200 22 26 36 43
2 Max. luminaire

spacings for
g1 = Emin : E 1 : 1.5

of luminaires
In combination LB L
1 x 36 W 1.52 0.68 0.68 0.00
1 x 58 W 1.00 0.67 0.67 0.00
2 x 36 W 0.81 0.64 0.64 0.00
2 x 58 W 0.54 0.62 0.62 0.00
1 x 36 W E 1.59 0.68 0.68 0.00
1 x 58 W E 1.04 0.67 0.67 0.00
2 x 36 W E 0.85 0.64 0.64 0.00
2 x 58 W E 0.56 0.62 0.62 0.00
Continuous lines in module 510 mm Continuous lines with variable spacings between the
The new E-LINE wiring with female connectors premounted gear trays
at a regular 510 mm spacing supports continuous lines with Variable continuous lines allow variable lengths of blanking
a modular spacing of luminaire inserts of 510 mm or a cor- covers to be inserted between the luminaire inserts.
responding multiple dimension. Through-wiring on site can be effected by means of
5-pole or 7-pole flatband cables.
Installation is rapid and easy:
Perforations in the trunking units facilitate insertion of female During mounting the self-cutting connector sockets are fixed
connectors on site, defining the mounting site and fixing the to the flatband cable by flat nose pliers and then snapped
connectors. onto the trunking. An alternative wiring of variable systems
can also be realised by means of a 5-conductor through-
wiring set and conventional connectors. See page 377.
385
Radial reflector R
Application
halls and sales areas.
Reflector R
Radial sheet steel reflector,
ester coating. Fixed to the
gear tray by means of stain-
less steel snap fasteners
without tools.
A lighting conception for high halls

could be realised by means of spot-
lights providing the basic illumination
and additional task-oriented continuous
lines. E-LINE presents a multitude of
photometrical variants offering lighting
solutions which are specifically adapted
to the respective visual tasks.
Ordering example: continuous line Reflector end caps Reflector connectors

(4 lengths) in IP 50 with reflectors R Tool-free adjustable reflector end caps Reflector connectors in impact-resist-
4 gear trays 7681/58 E in impact-resistant, PVC-free and UV- ant, PVC-free and UV-stabilised ABS
4 reflectors 07691 R/58 stabilised ABS form a decorative con- assure precise alignment and connec-
Indications Page 3 sets of reflector connectors clusion of radial reflectors at contin- tion of radial E-LINE reflectors R at
Trunking / accessories 374 07691 RV uous-line ends or at transitions to joints of non-interrupted continuous
Suspensions 379 2 reflector end caps 07691 RK blanking covers. lines.
Gear trays 380
Emergency light inserts 410 Trunking see page 374, suspensions Reflector end caps to be ordered Reflector connectors can subsequently
Planning 412 see page 379. separately. be attached to premounted reflectors.
Lighting management
system 431 Reflector connectors to be ordered
Substitute references for separately.
386
gear tray gear tray
07691 R/36 Reflector R 1x36W 07692 R/36 Reflector R 2x36W
07691 RK Reflector end cap 1-lamp 07692 RK Reflector end cap 2-lamp
07691 RV Reflector connector 1-lamp 07692 RV Reflector connector 2-lamp
652do

for combination
115
129
768, 769
+0769R/ En 300 lx 500 lx
DIN 5040 Room height H 3.0 m 5.0 m 3.0 m 5.0 m
A - u = 1.00 20 2.8 4.5 4.7 7.5
4 - su = 0.52 175 258 30 3.8 5.8 6.3 9.7
0 - so = 0.00 40 4.7 7.0 7.8 12
Area
50 5.6 8.1 9.4 13
A
in m2 60 6.6 9.1 11 15
80 8.3 11 14 19
100 10 13 17 22
150 14 18 24 30
200 18 22 31 37
2 Max. luminaire

spacings for
g1 = Emin : E 1 : 1.5

of luminaires
In combination LB L
1 x 36 W 1.52 0.84 0.84 0.00
1 x 58 W 1.00 0.82 0.82 0.00
2 x 36 W 0.79 0.81 0.81 0.00
2 x 58 W 0.52 0.79 0.79 0.00
1 x 36 W E 1.59 0.84 0.84 0.00
1 x 58 W E 1.04 0.82 0.82 0.00
2 x 36 W E 0.83 0.81 0.81 0.00
2 x 58 W E 0.54 0.79 0.79 0.00
1 x 58 W D 1.33 0.64 0.64 0.00
Stainless steel snap fasteners 2 x 58 W D 0.69 0.62 0.62 0.00
Snap fasteners assure the mechanical connection of the Technical information see page 440.
E-LINE trunking, gear trays and reflectors. They can be
operated without tools and are completely integrated
into the gear tray, avoiding time-consuming positioning
of fastening elements in case of the variable system.
All fastening components are made of stainless steel,

rust-proof and ageing-resistant.
387
Radial reflector R and lamella louvre RW
Application
halls, sales areas and
training rooms.
Reflector R
without tools.
Lamella louvre RW
used in reflectors 0769 R,
0769 G, 0769 RH,
0769 GH. Can be hung on
the reflector for easy mainte-
nance.
A lighting level adapted to specific

visual tasks in production facilities
can often be realised by means of
interrupted continuous lines. E-LINE
prewired trunking units allow the
realisation of blanking covers in lamp
length, whereas trunking units to be
wired on site also permit spacings at
any length between the gear trays.
Ordering example: continuous line Tool-free mounting Decorative wire suspensions

(10 lengths) with reflectors R and The E-LINE trunking can be mounted The E-LINE accessory range includes
lamella louvres RW rapidly, either directly to the ceiling or ceiling fixing systems as well as chain,
10 gear trays 7691/36 E suspended by means of chains, wires pendant and wire suspensions assuring
Indications Page 10 reflectors 07691 R/36 or pendant rods. To do so, the stain- a permanently secure retention of the
Trunking / accessories 374 10 lamella louvres 07691 RW/36 less steel clips of suspension or ceiling continuous lines, thanks to superior
Suspensions 379 9 sets of reflector connectors fixing accessories are simply snapped materials and design.
Gear trays 380 07691 RV onto the upper plane of the trunking,
Emergency light inserts 410 2 reflector end caps 07691 RK without tools. Cable holders can be These accessories equally include deco-
Planning 412 mounted in the same way, allowing the rative wire suspensions, extending the
Lighting management Trunking see page 374, suspensions guidance of up to four sheathed cables E-LINE application range to demanding
system 431 see page 379. at the upper plane of the trunking, in architectural environments.
Substitute references for addition to the continuous-line wiring.
388
gear tray gear tray
07691 RW/36 Lamella louvre RW 1x36W 07692 RW/36 Lamella louvre RW 2x36W
652do

for combination
133
147
768, 769
+0769R/ En 300 lx 500 lx
+0769RW/ Room height H 3.0 m 5.0 m 3.0 m 5.0 m
DIN 5040 20 3.0 4.7 5.1 7.9
A - u = 1.00 175 258 30 4.1 6.1 6.8 10
4 - su = 0.54 40 5.1 7.4 8.4 12
0 - so = 0.00 Area
50 6.1 8.5 10 14
A
in m2 60 7.1 9.7 12 16
80 9.0 12 15 20
100 11 14 18 23
150 16 19 26 32
200 20 24 34 40
2 Max. luminaire

spacings for
g1 = Emin : E 1 : 1.5

of luminaires
In combination LB L
1 x 36 W 1.52 0.75 0.75 0.00
1 x 58 W 1.00 0.74 0.74 0.00
2 x 36 W 0.76 0.75 0.75 0.00
2 x 58 W 0.51 0.73 0.73 0.00
1 x 36 W E 1.59 0.75 0.75 0.00
1 x 58 W E 1.04 0.74 0.74 0.00
2 x 36 W E 0.80 0.75 0.75 0.00
2 x 58 W E 0.53 0.73 0.73 0.00
1 x 58 W D 1.33 0.58 0.58 0.00
Rapid connection of the through-wiring Mains connection 2 x 58 W D 0.68 0.57 0.57 0.00
E-LINE is designed for rapid electrical connection. Mains cables can be connected to the sockets of the Technical information see page 440.
through-wiring set by means of knock-out openings in
Installation is facilitated by means of standard connectors the end caps of the trunkings.
or sockets at the ends of pre-mounted through-wiring sets.
These 7-pole components do not only allow for rapid con- The mains cable can be alternatively connected to the
nection of three-phase current mains supply lines but also socket of a wiring connector in the continuous line: ceiling-
for connection of two additional conductors, e.g. control oriented knock-out openings at the beginning of the trunking
lines for dimming. The corresponding mains cables can enable cable entry at all couplings.
equally be connected to the socket.
Cable holders are also available as accessories for installa-

tion of through-wiring sets on site.
389
Radial reflector R and specular reflector SB,
wide-angle light distribution
Application Reference Designation for Reference Designation for

Production facilities, work- gear tray gear tray
shops, assembly halls, 07691 R/58 Reflector R 1x58W 07692 R/58 Reflector R 2x58W
supermarkets, exhibition 07691 SB/58 Specular reflector SB 1x58W 07692 SB/58 Specular reflector SB 2x58W
halls, machine workstations Reflector accessories Reflector accessories
and precision assembly. 07691 RK Reflector end cap 1-lamp 07692 RK Reflector end cap 2-lamp
Reflector R
without tools.
Specular reflectors SB
anodised aluminium for
wide-angle light distribution.
To be inserted into the
reflector 0769 R without
tools.
Lamella louvre RW
used in reflectors 0769 R.
Can be hung on the reflector
for easy maintenance.

No. 2136
for combination
115
129
769/58
+0769R/58
+0769SB/58
DIN 5040
A - u = 1.00 175 258
4 - su = 0.52
0 - so = 0.00
Ordering example: individual lumi-

naire with reflector R, specular
reflector SB and lamella louvre RW
1 gear tray 7691/58 E
Indications Page 1 reflector 07691 R/58
Trunking / accessories 374 1 set of specular reflectors
Suspensions 379 07691 SB/58
Gear trays 380 1 lamella louvre 07691 RW/58
Emergency light inserts 410 2 reflector end caps 07691 RK
Planning 412
Lighting management Trunking see page 374, suspensions
system 431 see page 379.
390
Radial reflector R, specular reflector SB, wide-angle light distribution,
and lamella louvre RW

gear tray gear tray
07691 SB/58 Specular reflector SB 1x58W 07692 SB/58 Specular reflector SB 2x58W
652d
Degree of protection IP 20*
*IP 50 possible please consider dust risk.

No. 2137 Data table no. 2136 Data table no. 2137
for combination
133

147
769/58
+0769R/58 En 300 lx 500 lx En 300 lx 500 lx
+0769SB/58 Room height H 3.0 m 5.0 m 3.0 m 5.0 m Room height H 3.0 m 5.0 m 3.0 m 5.0 m
+0769RW/58
20 2.8 4.5 4.6 7.5 20 2.9 4.6 4.9 7.7
DIN 5040 175 258 30 3.7 5.7 6.1 9.6 30 3.9 6.0 6.5 10
A - u = 1.00 40 4.6 6.8 7.6 11 40 4.9 7.1 8.1 12
4 - su = 0.56 Area Area
50 5.5 7.8 9.1 13 50 5.8 8.2 9.7 14
0 - so = 0.00 A A
in m2 60 6.4 8.9 11 15 in m2 60 6.8 9.3 11 16
80 8.1 11 13 18 80 8.7 11 15 19
100 9.8 13 16 21 100 11 13 18 22
150 14 18 23 29 150 15 18 26 31
200 18 22 30 36 200 19 23 32 39
2 Max. luminaire


spacings for
g1 = Emin : E 1 : 1.5 g1 = Emin : E 1 : 1.5

for no. characteristics for no. characteristics
of luminaires of luminaires
In combination LB L In combination LB L
with direct indirect with direct indirect
gear tray M DLOR ULOR gear tray M DLOR ULOR
1 x 58 W 1.00 0.83 0.83 0.00 1 x 58 W 1.00 0.75 0.75 0.00
2 x 58 W 0.52 0.81 0.81 0.00 2 x 58 W 0.51 0.73 0.73 0.00
1 x 58 W E 1.04 0.83 0.83 0.00 1 x 58 W E 1.04 0.75 0.75 0.00
2 x 58 W E 0.54 0.81 0.81 0.00 2 x 58 W E 0.53 0.73 0.73 0.00
LIGHTGATE Mounting and mainte-

LIGHTGATE stands for an energy-saving lighting manage- nance made easy
ment system preferably used with TRILUX luminaires Numerous E-LINE details
equipped with dimmable electronic control gear. LIGHTGATE offer practice-oriented func-
embodies an individual, manually operated lighting control tionality, thus saving time
and a daylight-dependent regulation with integrated pres- and money. Lamella louvres,
ence detection, see page 431. specular louvres and para-
bolic louvres can be hung on
the reflectors from either
side, facilitating maintenance
and rapid lamp replacement.
391
Radial reflector R and specular reflector SA,
asymmetrical light distribution

shops, assembly halls, 07691 R/58 Reflector R 1x58W 07692 R/58 Reflector R 2x58W
supermarkets, exhibition 07691 SA/58 Specular reflector SA 1x58W 07692 SA/58 Specular reflector SA 2x58W
halls as well as wall, black- Reflector accessories Reflector accessories
board and shelf lighting. 07691 RK Reflector end cap 1-lamp 07692 RK Reflector end cap 2-lamp
Reflector R
without tools.
Specular reflector SA
asymmetrical light distribu-
tion. To be inserted into the
tools.
Lamella louvre RW

No. 2138
for combination
115
129
769/58
+0769R/58
+0769SA/58
DIN 5040
A - u = 1.00 175 258
4 - su = 0.52
0 - so = 0.00
Ordering example: continuous line

(2 lengths) with reflectors R,
specular reflectors SA and
lamella louvres RW
Indications Page 2 gear trays 7691/58 E
Trunking / accessories 374 2 reflectors 07691 R/58
Suspensions 379 2 specular reflectors 07691 SA/58
Gear trays 380 2 lamella louvres 07691 RW/58
Emergency light inserts 410 1 set of reflector connectors 07691 RV Asymmetrical luminous intensity distribution
Planning 412 2 reflector end caps 07691 RK Asymmetrical specular reflectors guide the luminous flux in
Lighting management the pronounced directions, for increased illuminances on
system 431 Trunking see page 374, suspensions vertical surfaces. They can be inserted in the radial reflec-
Substitute references for see page 379. tors of the E-LINE system and can also be combined with
computer calculations 443 white lamella louvres in case luminance limitation is required.
392
Radial reflector R, specular reflector SA, asymmetrical light distribution,

gear tray gear tray
07691 SA/58 Specular reflector SA 1x58W 07692 SA/58 Specular reflector SA 2x58W
Tunking and gear trays to be ordered separately. Trunking and gear trays to be ordered separately.
652d

for combination
133

147
769/58
+0769R/58 En 300 lx 500 lx En 300 lx 500 lx
+0769SA/58 Room height H 3.0 m 5.0 m 3.0 m 5.0 m Room height H 3.0 m 5.0 m 3.0 m 5.0 m
+0769RW/58
20 2.8 4.4 4.6 7.3 20 2.9 4.6 4.9 7.7
DIN 5040 175 258 30 3.7 5.7 6.1 9.5 30 3.9 6.0 6.5 9.9
A - u = 1.00 40 4.6 6.8 7.6 11 40 4.9 7.1 8.1 12
50 5.5 7.8 9.1 13 50 5.9 8.2 9.8 14
0 - so = 0.00 A A
in m2 60 6.4 8.9 11 15 in m2 60 6.9 9.4 11 16
80 8.1 11 13 18 80 8.7 11 15 19
100 9.8 13 16 21 100 11 13 18 22
150 14 18 23 29 150 16 18 26 31
200 18 22 30 36 200 20 23 33 39
300
400 2 Max. luminaire


spacings for
500 g1 = Emin : E 1 : 1.5 g1 = Emin : E 1 : 1.5
600 Transverse spacing centre / centre Xmax = 2.3 h Transverse spacing centre / centre Xmax = 2.3 h
700 Longitudinal spacing centre / centre Ymax = 1.5 h Longitudinal spacing centre / centre Ymax = 1.5 h

1.60 m
800 for no. characteristics for no. characteristics

700 with direct indirect with direct indirect
600 1 x 58 W 1.00 0.83 0.83 0.00 1 x 58 W 1.00 0.75 0.75 0.00

2 x 58 W 0.52 0.81 0.81 0.00 2 x 58 W 0.51 0.73 0.73 0.00
500 1 x 58 W E 1.04 0.83 0.83 0.00 1 x 58 W E 1.04 0.75 0.75 0.00
2 x 58 W E 0.54 0.81 0.81 0.00 2 x 58 W E 0.53 0.73 0.73 0.00
2.70 m
Example:
Wall zone lighting with a continuous line
(2 lengths) illuminance distribution
(indications in lux)
Room height: 3.00 m
Distance to wall: 1.10 m
Gear tray: 7692/58 E
Reflectors: 07692 R/58
Specular reflectors: 07692 SA/58
Lamp luminous flux: 5200 lm
393
Radial reflector R and specular reflector ST,
narrow-angle light distribution

Workshops, assembly halls, gear tray gear tray
supermarkets, exhibition 07691 R/58 Reflector R 1x58W 07692 R/58 Reflector R 2x58W
halls, machine workstations 07691 ST/58 Specular reflector ST 1x58W 07692 ST/58 Specular reflector ST 2x58W
and precision assembly. Reflector accessories Reflector accessories
Reflector R 07691 RV Reflector connector 1-lamp 07692 RV Reflector connector 2-lamp
without tools.
Specular reflectors ST
anodised aluminium for nar-
row-angle light distribution.
To be inserted into the
tools.
Lamella louvre RW

No. 2140
for combination
115
129
769/58
+0769R/58
+0769ST/58
DIN 5040
A - u = 1.00 175 258
4 - su = 0.59
0 - so = 0.00

(14 lengths) with reflectors R,
specular reflectors ST and
lamella louvres RW
Trunking / accessories 374 14 reflectors 07691 R/58
Suspensions 379 14 sets of specular reflectors
Gear trays 380 07691 ST/58
Emergency light inserts 410 14 lamella louvres 07691 RW/58
Planning 412 13 sets of reflector connectors
Lighting management 07691 RV
system 431 2 reflector end caps 07691 RK
computer calculations 443 Trunking see page 374, suspensions
Lamp characteristics 444 see page 379.
394
Radial reflector R, specular reflector ST, narrow-angle light distribution,

gear tray gear tray
07691 ST/58 Specular reflector ST 1x58W 07692 ST/58 Specular reflector ST 2x58W
652d

for combination
133

147
769/58
+0769R/58 En 300 lx 500 lx En 300 lx 500 lx
+0769ST/58 Room height H 3.0 m 5.0 m 3.0 m 5.0 m Room height H 3.0 m 5.0 m 3.0 m 5.0 m
+0769RW/58
20 2.6 3.8 4.3 6.3 20 2.8 4.1 4.7 6.8
DIN 5040 175 258 30 3.4 5.0 5.7 8.4 30 3.8 5.4 6.3 9.1
A - u = 1.00 40 4.3 6.1 7.2 10 40 4.7 6.7 7.9 11
50 5.2 7.2 8.7 12 50 5.7 7.8 9.5 13
0 - so = 0.00 A A
in m2 60 6.1 8.2 10 14 in m2 60 6.7 8.9 11 15
80 7.8 10 13 17 80 8.5 11 14 18
100 9.4 12 16 20 100 10 13 17 22
150 14 17 23 27 150 15 18 25 30
200 18 21 29 34 200 19 23 32 38
2 Max. luminaire


spacings for
g1 = Emin : E 1 : 1.5 g1 = Emin : E 1 : 1.5

1 x 58 W 1.00 0.83 0.83 0.00 1 x 58 W 1.00 0.75 0.75 0.00
2 x 58 W 0.51 0.81 0.81 0.00 2 x 58 W 0.51 0.74 0.74 0.00
1 x 58 W E 1.04 0.83 0.83 0.00 1 x 58 W E 1.04 0.75 0.75 0.00
2 x 58 W E 0.53 0.81 0.81 0.00 2 x 58 W E 0.53 0.74 0.74 0.00
Electronic control gear

Electronic control gear used in TRILUX luminaires offers in-
creased lighting comfort and technical advantages thanks to
the following characteristics: energy-saving operation, lamp-
preserving rapid lamp start, flicker-free light and avoidance
of electrode flicker and disturbing noises. The increased
lamp service life (15 000 hours in case of linear fluorescent
lamps) also for applications with increased switching fre-
quency allows for benefits in moneys worth, thanks to a sig-
nificant reduction of costs for lamps, lamp disposal and
lamp replacement.
All gear trays in IP 20 and IP 50 of the E-LINE range are

available with electronic control gear, reference suffix E.
395
Radial reflector R and prismatic diffuser P
Application
Sales areas, showrooms,
lounges, offices, precision
assembly, production facili-
ties, workshops and training
rooms.
Reflector R
without tools.
Prismatic diffuser P
Convex-shaped diffuser
made of PLEXIGLAS, with
computer-calculated longitu-
dinal prisms. Safe retention
by means of stainless steel
clips. To be used in reflec-
tors 0769 R, 0769 G,
0769 RH, 0769 GH. Can
be hung on the reflector for
easy maintenance.
Ordering example: individual lumi- E-LINE individual luminaires

naire with reflector R and prismatic In addition to variable and modular continuous-line systems the E-LINE range is
diffuser P equally suited to the installation of individual luminaires.
1 gear tray 7691/58 E These are based on a single-length trunking pre-equipped with integrated 7-con-
Indications Page 1 reflector 07691 R/58 ductor wiring and 7-pole female connector. Individual luminaires can therefore
Trunking / accessories 374 1 prismatic diffuser 07691 P/58 also be combined with gear trays equipped with dimmable control gear or emer-
Suspensions 379 2 reflector end caps 07691 RK gency light inserts, without having to insert additional cables as well as connec-
Gear trays 380 tion terminals into the trunking on site.
Emergency light inserts 410 Trunking see page 374, suspensions
Planning 412 see page 379. E-LINE individual luminaires present an alternative to conventional reflector, dif-
Lighting management fuser or louvre luminaires. In combination with E-LINE continuous lines they are
system 431 specially recommended for applications such as individual lighting of workstations
Substitute references for or lighting of separated room zones. Subsequent changes of the area designation
computer calculations 443 can be transferred to the E-LINE unit with additional accessories.
396
gear tray gear tray
07691 P/58 Prismatic diffuser P 1x58W 07692 P/58 Prismatic diffuser P 2x58W
07691 RK Reflecor end cap 1-lamp 07692 RK Reflector end cap 2-lamp
652d

for combination
769/58 1 Number of luminaires
+0769R/58 En 300 lx 500 lx
+0769P/58 Room height H 3.0 m 5.0 m 3.0 m 5.0 m
DIN 5040 20 3.0 4.6 5.0 7.6
A - u = 0.98 30 4.0 6.0 6.7 10
4 - su = 0.55 40 5.1 7.2 8.4 12
0 - so = 0.53 Area
50 6.1 8.4 10 14
A
in m2 60 7.1 9.5 12 16
80 9.1 12 15 20
100 11 14 19 23
150 16 19 27 32
200 21 24 34 40
2 Max. luminaire

spacings for
g1 = Emin : E 1 : 1.5

of luminaires
In combination LB L
1 x 58 W 1.00 0.71 0.71 0.00
2 x 58 W 0.53 0.68 0.68 0.00
1 x 58 W E 1.04 0.71 0.71 0.00
2 x 58 W E 0.55 0.68 0.68 0.00
E-LINE prismatic diffusers Combination with specular reflectors or perforated

The convex-shaped E-LINE diffusers in reflectors G
high-quality, non-yellowing PLEXIGLAS Distinctive luminous intensity distributions and above-aver-
are perfectly adapted to the radial re- age glare limitation can be realised by combining prismatic
flectors. Thanks to computer-calculat- diffusers with additional specular reflectors. Specular reflec-
ed longitudinal prisms the photometric tors are available in versions for wide-angle, narrow-angle or
characteristics are equally convincing. asymmetrical light distribution.
The increased ageing resistance of
PLEXIGLAS and the long-standing In combination with perforated reflectors offering an indirect
TRILUX experience in plastics proces- component of approx. 10 % prismatic diffusers promote a
sing assure a maximum service life of particularly well-balanced brightness distribution within the
E-LINE diffusers. room.
397
Perforated radial reflector G

Workshops, precision gear tray gear tray
assembly, sales areas, 07691 G/58 Perforated reflector G 1x58W 07692 G/58 Perforated reflector G 2x58W
supermarkets and training Reflector accessories Reflector accessories
rooms. 07691 RK Reflector end cap 1-lamp 07692 RK Reflector end cap 2-lamp
Reflector G Trunking and gear trays to be ordered separately. Trunking and gear trays to be ordered separately.
ester coating. With defined
perforation for balanced
uplighting. Fixed to the gear
tray by means of stainless
steel snap fasteners without
tools.
Lamella louvre RW
used in reflectors 0769 R,
0769 G, 0769 RH,
0769 GH. Can be hung on
the reflector for easy mainte-
nance.

No. 2143
for combination
115
129
769/58
+0769G/58
DIN 5040
A - u = 0.90
3 - su = 0.49 175 258
0 - so = 0.37
Ordering example: continuous line Perforated reflectors for Combination with

(7 lengths) with perforated reflec- balanced ceiling lighting prismatic diffusers P
tors G and lamella louvres RW Perforated reflectors in ver- PLEXIGLAS prismatic dif-
7 gear trays 7691/58 E sion G or GH convince thanks fusers are perfectly adapted
Indications Page 7 reflectors 07691 G/58 to a well-balanced indirect to the perforated radial re-
Trunking / accessories 374 7 lamella louvres 07691 RW/58 component. They create a flectors G and GH and thus
Suspensions 379 6 sets of reflector connectors balanced brightness distribu- emphasise the harmonious
Gear trays 380 07691 RV tion within the room which is impression of such a com-
Emergency light inserts 410 2 reflector end caps 07691 RK specially recommended for bination.
Planning 412 visual tasks requiring a fre-
Lighting management Trunking see page 374, suspensions quent change of views be-
system 431 see page 379. tween horizontal and vertical
Substitute references for surfaces. These applications
computer calculations 443 include sales areas and
Lamp characteristics 444 training rooms.
398
Perforated radial reflector G

gear tray gear tray
07691 G/58 Perforated reflector G 1x58W 07692 G/58 Perforated reflector G 2x58W
652d

for combination
1 1 Number of luminaires
133
Number of luminaires
147
769/58
+0769G/58 En 300 lx 500 lx En 300 lx 500 lx
+0769RW/58 Room height H 3.0 m 5.0 m 3.0 m 5.0 m Room height H 3.0 m 5.0 m 3.0 m 5.0 m
DIN 5040 20 3.2 5.0 5.3 8.4 20 3.4 5.3 5.6 8.8
B - u = 0.86 175 258 30 4.2 6.5 7.0 11 30 4.5 6.9 7.5 11
4 - su = 0.52 40 5.3 7.8 8.8 13 40 5.6 8.2 9.4 14
1 - so = 0.39 Area Area
50 6.3 9.0 11 15 50 6.8 9.5 11 16
A A
in m2 60 7.3 10 12 17 in m2 60 7.9 11 13 18
80 9.3 12 15 21 80 10 13 17 22
100 11 15 19 24 100 12 16 20 26
150 16 20 27 33 150 17 22 29 36
200 20 25 34 42 200 22 27 37 45
Nice surroundings Suspension length lp 0.00 m Suspension length lp 0.00 m
Thanks to their indirect com- 2 Max. luminaire spacings for 2 Max. luminaire spacings for

ponent, perforated reflectors g1 = Emin : E 1 : 1.5 g1 = Emin : E 1 : 1.5
create a well-balanced Longitudinal spacing centre / centre Ymax = 1.5 h Longitudinal spacing centre / centre Ymax = 1.5 h
brightness distribution within h = Luminaire height above working plane h = Luminaire height above working plane
the room. The friendly visual 3 Multiplication factor M 4 Photometric 3 Multiplication factor M 4 Photometric
ambience and the attractive for no. characteristics for no. characteristics
design make this E-LINE ver-
sion the perfect choice for with direct indirect with direct indirect
sales-promoting illumination gear tray M DLOR ULOR gear tray M DLOR ULOR
1 x 58 W 1.00 0.77 0.70 0.07 1 x 58 W 1.00 0.71 0.61 0.10
of shop premises. 2 x 58 W 0.49 0.79 0.69 0.10 2 x 58 W 0.49 0.73 0.61 0.12
1 x 58 W E 1.04 0.77 0.70 0.07 1 x 58 W E 1.04 0.71 0.61 0.10
2 x 58 W E 0.51 0.79 0.69 0.10 2 x 58 W E 0.51 0.73 0.61 0.12
399
High reflector RH
and semi-specular cross-blade louvre RSV

Precision assembly, preci- gear tray gear tray
sion mechanics, training 07691 RH/36 High reflector RH 1x36W 07692 RH/36 High reflector RH 2x36W
rooms, schools, offices, 07691 RH/58 High reflector RH 1x58W 07692 RH/58 High reflector RH 2x58W
laboratories, showrooms 07691 RSV/36 Semi-specular cross-blade louvre RSV 1x36W 07692 RSV/36 Semi-specular cross-blade louvre RSV 2x36W
and sales areas. Reflector accessories 07692 RSV/58 Semi-specular cross-blade louvre RSV 2x58W
07691 RSV/58 Semi-specular cross-blade louvre RSV 1x58W Reflector accessories
Reflector RH
Reflector accessories 07692 RKH Reflector end cap 2-lamp
For gear trays in IP 20.
07691 RKH Reflector end cap 1-lamp 07692 RVH Reflector connector 2-lamp
galvanised, with white poly- 07691 RVH Reflector connector 1-lamp Trunking and gear trays to be ordered separately.
ester coating. High form, Trunking and gear trays to be ordered separately.
combination with louvres
RSV, RMV, RPV. Fixed to the
without tools.
Semi-specular
cross-blade louvre RSV
For narrow/wide-angle light
distribution, with graduated
blades, made of anodised
aluminium. To be used in
reflectors 0769 RH,
0769 GH. Can be hung
on the reflector for easy
maintenance.
Semi-specular parabolic No. 2145
louvre RMV for combination
143
142
769/58
Made of semi-specular an- +0769RH/58
+0769RSV/58
DIN 5040
face purity of 99.98 %. High A - u = 1.00 176 258
visual comfort due to a uni- 5 - su = 0.68
0 - so = 0.00
form louvre appearance with
reduced brightness con-
trasts. To be used in reflec-
tors 0769 RH, 0769 GH.
Ordering example: continuous line Emergency lighting

(10 lengths) with high reflectors RH Special gear trays with emergency light sockets, single bat-
and semi-specular cross-blade teries or switching relays allow for an easy integration of
louvres RSV emergency lighting in E-LINE continuous lines or individual
Indications Page 10 gear trays 7691/58 E luminaires.
Trunking / accessories 374 10 reflectors 07691 RH/58
Suspensions 379 10 semi-specular cross-blade louvres Installation is facilitated thanks to 7-conductor through-wiring
Gear trays 380 07691 RSV/58 sets, either pre-installed or installed on site. In addition to
Emergency light inserts 410 9 sets of reflector connectors the three-phase current mains supply, the units can also
Planning 412 07691 RVH include the wiring of the safety circuit or the charging cir-
Lighting management 2 reflector end caps 07691 RKH cuit. Tool-free connection of gear trays and through-wiring
system 431 sets within the trunking is effected by means of 7-pole con-
Substitute references for Trunking see page 374, suspensions nectors.
computer calculations 443 see page 379.
400
High reflector RH
and semi-specular parabolic louvre RMV

gear tray gear tray
07691 RH/36 High reflector RH 1x36W 07692 RH/36 High reflector RH 2x36W
07691 RMV/36 Semi-specular parabolic louvre RMV 1x36W 07692 RMV/36 Semi-specular parabolic louvre RMV 2x36W
07691 RMV/58 Semi-specular parabolic louvre RMV 1x58W 07692 RMV/58 Semi-specular parabolic louvre RMV 2x58W
07691 RKH Reflector end cap 1-lamp 07692 RKH Reflector end cap 2-lamp
07691 RVH Reflector connector 1-lamp 07692 RVH Reflector connector 2-lamp
652d

for combination
142
143
769/58
+0769RH/58 En 300 lx 500 lx En 300 lx 500 lx
+0769RMV/58 Room height H 3.0 m 5.0 m 3.0 m 5.0 m Room height H 3.0 m 5.0 m 3.0 m 5.0 m
DIN 5040 20 3.0 4.4 5.0 7.4 20 2.9 4.3 4.8 7.2
A - u = 1.00 176 258 30 4.1 5.9 6.9 9.8 30 4.0 5.3 6.6 8.9
5 - su = 0.70 40 5.2 7.1 8.7 12 40 5.1 6.3 8.4 11
50 6.3 8.3 11 14 50 6.2 7.9 10 13
A A
in m2 60 7.5 9.6 12 16 in m2 60 7.3 9.0 12 15
80 9.6 12 16 20 80 9.4 11 16 19
100 12 14 20 23 100 11 14 19 22
150 17 20 29 33 150 17 19 28 31
200 22 25 37 42 200 22 25 37 41
Glare-free lighting with Suspension length lp 0.00 m Suspension length lp 0.00 m
semi-specular cross- 2 Max. luminaire spacings for 2 Max. luminaire spacings for

blade louvres RSV g1 = Emin : E 1 : 1.5 g1 = Emin : E 1 : 1.5
Visual details, low contrasts Longitudinal spacing centre / centre Ymax = 1.5 h Longitudinal spacing centre / centre Ymax = 1.5 h
or frequent change of views h = Luminaire height above working plane h = Luminaire height above working plane
require increased illumi- 3 Multiplication factor M 4 Photometric 3 Multiplication factor M 4 Photometric
nances and freedom from for no. characteristics for no. characteristics
glare, e.g. in case of preci-
sion mechanics, electronic with direct indirect with direct indirect
production or testing of gear tray M DLOR ULOR gear tray M DLOR ULOR
1 x 36 W 1.52 0.64 0.64 0.00 1 x 36 W 1.52 0.64 0.64 0.00
goods. 1 x 58 W 1.00 0.63 0.63 0.00 1 x 58 W 1.00 0.63 0.63 0.00
2 x 36 W 0.76 0.64 0.64 0.00 2 x 36 W 0.75 0.65 0.65 0.00
2 x 58 W 0.50 0.63 0.63 0.00 2 x 58 W 0.49 0.64 0.64 0.00
RSV louvres have been 1 x 36 W E 1.58 0.64 0.64 0.00 1 x 36 W E 1.58 0.64 0.64 0.00
designed for these visual 1 x 58 W E 1.04 0.63 0.63 0.00 1 x 58 W E 1.04 0.63 0.63 0.00
2 x 36 W E 0.79 0.64 0.64 0.00 2 x 36 W E 0.78 0.65 0.65 0.00
tasks: The concave-profiled 2 x 58 W E 0.52 0.63 0.63 0.00 2 x 58 W E 0.51 0.64 0.64 0.00
cross blades reproduce a
parabolic contour, section
by section, which allows for
a particularly effective light
direction. Lighting installa-
tions with RSV louvres can
be set to more than 1000 lx,
with complete glare
limitation.
401
High reflector RH
and highly-specular parabolic louvre RPV
Application
Production facilities or work-
shops with CNC machines,
switchgear control rooms,
offices and rooms with DSE
workstations.
Reflector RH
ester coating. High form,
without tools.
louvre RPV
Cat. II. To be used in reflec-
tors 0769 RH, 0769 GH.
Ordering example: individual E-LINE individual luminaires

luminaire with high reflector RH In addition to variable and modular continuous-line systems the E-LINE range is
and highly-specular parabolic equally suited to the installation of individual luminaires.
louvre RPV These are based on a single-length trunking pre-equipped with integrated 7-con-
Indications Page 1 gear tray 7691/58 E ductor wiring and 7-pole female connector. Individual luminaires can therefore
Trunking / accessories 374 1 reflector 07691 RH/58 also be combined with gear trays equipped with dimmable control gear or emer-
Suspensions 379 1 highly-specular parabolic louvre gency light inserts, without having to insert additional cables as well as connec-
Gear trays 380 07691 RPV/58 tion terminals into the trunking on site.
Emergency light inserts 410 2 reflector end caps 07691 RKH
Planning 412 E-LINE individual luminaires present an alternative to conventional reflector, dif-
Lighting management Trunking see page 374, suspensions fuser or louvre luminaires. In combination with E-LINE continuous lines they are
system 431 see page 379. specially recommended for applications such as individual lighting of workstations
Substitute references for or lighting of separated room zones. Subsequent changes of the area designation
computer calculations 443 can be transferred to the E-LINE unit with additional accessories.
402
gear tray gear tray
07691 RPV/36 Highly-specular parabolic louvre RPV 1x36W 07692 RPV/36 Highly-specular parabolic louvre RPV 2x36W
652d

for combination
142
143
769/58
+0769RH/58 En 300 lx 500 lx
+0769RPV/58 Room height H 3.0 m 5.0 m 3.0 m 5.0 m
DIN 5040 20 3.0 4.5 5.0 7.4
A - u = 1.00 176 258 30 4.1 5.9 6.8 9.8
5 - su = 0.68 40 5.2 7.1 8.6 12
0 - so = 0.00 Area
50 6.3 8.3 10 14
A
in m2 60 7.4 9.5 12 16
80 9.5 12 16 20
100 12 14 19 23
150 17 20 28 32
200 22 25 36 41
2 Max. luminaire

spacings for
g1 = Emin : E 1 : 1.5

of luminaires
In combination LB L
1 x 36 W 1.52 0.65 0.65 0.00
1 x 58 W 1.00 0.64 0.64 0.00
2 x 36 W 0.75 0.66 0.66 0.00
2 x 58 W 0.49 0.65 0.65 0.00
1 x 36 W E 1.58 0.65 0.65 0.00
1 x 58 W E 1.04 0.64 0.64 0.00
2 x 36 W E 0.78 0.66 0.66 0.00
2 x 58 W E 0.51 0.65 0.65 0.00
louvre RPV
With DSE units being a part of modern
production sites, artificial lighting for
these areas must meet with demanding
visual requirements and avoid contrast-
reducing reflections of the luminaires
on the monitors.
Highly-specular parabolic louvres

RPV are specially designed for LG3,
CAT I / II applications to guarantee
an optimum luminance limitation in
conjunction with complex lighting
challenges.
403
Perforated high reflector GH
and semi-specular cross-blade louvre RSV

Precision assembly, preci- gear tray gear tray
sion mechanics, training 07691 GH/58 Perforated high reflector GH 1x58W 07692 GH/58 Perforated high reflector GH 2x58W
rooms, schools and offices. 07691 RSV/58 Semi-specular cross-blade louvre RSV 1x58W 07692 RSV/58 Semi-specular cross-blade louvre RSV 2x58W
RPV: Recommended for Reflector accessories Reflector accessories
areas with normal DSE 07691 RKH Reflector end cap 1-lamp 07692 RKH Reflector end cap 2-lamp
usage. 07691 RVH Reflector connector 1-lamp 07692 RVH Reflector connector 2-lamp
Reflector GH
ester coating. With defined
perforation for balanced
uplighting. High form, espe-
cially recommended for
without tools.
Semi-specular
cross-blade louvre RSV
For narrow/wide-angle light
distribution, with graduated
blades, made of anodised
aluminium. To be used in
reflectors 0769 RH,
0769 GH. Can be hung
on the reflector for easy No. 2148
maintenance. for combination
143
142
769/58
+0769GH/58
+0769RSV/58
DIN 5040
louvre RPV B - u = 0.86 176 258
Made of highly-specular 5 - su = 0.67
1 - so = 0.46
Cat. II. To be used in reflec-
tors 0769 RH, 0769 GH.

(3 lengths) with high perforated
reflectors GH and semi-specular
cross-blade louvres RSV
Trunking / accessories 374 3 reflectors 07691 GH/58
Suspensions 379 3 semi-specular cross-blade louvres
Gear trays 380 07691 RSV/58
Emergency light inserts 410 2 sets of reflector connectors Perforated reflectors with louvres RSV or RPV
Planning 412 07691 RVH Perforated reflectors with semi-specular cross-blade louvres
Lighting management 2 reflector end caps 07691 RKH RSV provide economic lighting and also shine out thanks to
system 431 a decorative bright appearance. Perforated reflectors in
Substitute references for Trunking see page 374, suspensions combination with highly-specular parabolic louvres RPV
computer calculations 443 see page 379. are specially recommended for illumination of DSE
Lamp characteristics 444 environments.
404
Perforated high reflector GH
and highly-specular parabolic louvre RPV

gear tray gear tray
07691 GH/58 Perforated high reflector GH 1x58W 07692 GH/58 Perforated high reflector GH 2x58W
652d

for combination
142
143
769/58
+0769GH/58 En 300 lx 500 lx En 300 lx 500 lx
+0769RPV/58 Room height H 3.0 m 5.0 m 3.0 m 5.0 m Room height H 3.0 m 5.0 m 3.0 m 5.0 m
DIN 5040 20 3.7 5.5 6.1 9.2 20 3.8 5.6 6.3 9.3
B - u = 0.88 176 258 30 5.0 6.9 8.3 12 30 5.2 7.0 8.6 12
5 - su = 0.69 40 6.3 8.2 11 14 40 6.6 8.3 11 14
50 7.7 10 13 17 50 8.1 10 13 17
A A
in m2 60 9.0 11 15 19 in m2 60 9.4 12 16 20
80 12 14 19 24 80 12 15 20 25
100 14 17 23 28 100 15 18 25 29
150 21 24 34 39 150 22 25 36 41
200 27 30 45 51 200 28 32 47 53
2 Max. luminaire


spacings for
g1 = Emin : E 1 : 1.5 g1 = Emin : E 1 : 1.5

1 x 58 W 1.00 0.61 0.58 0.03 1 x 58 W 1.00 0.62 0.59 0.03
2 x 58 W 0.50 0.65 0.57 0.08 2 x 58 W 0.45 0.60 0.52 0.08
1 x 58 W E 1.04 0.61 0.58 0.03 1 x 58 W E 1.04 0.62 0.59 0.03
2 x 58 W E 0.52 0.65 0.57 0.08 2 x 58 W E 0.47 0.60 0.52 0.08
Combination with parabolic louvres RMV

Perforated reflectors GH in high form can also be equipped
with semi-specular parabolic louvres RMV.
The satin-finish anodised surface creates a uniform louvre

appearance which harmonises perfectly with the elegantly
brightened outer surface of the perforated reflector GH,
making this reflector-louvre combination an excellent choice
for architectural applications.
405
Self-suspended specular reflector STF,
narrow/wide-angle light distribution

shops and assembly halls. 07690 STF/58 Specular reflector STF 1x58W 07690 STF/58 Specular reflector STF 2x58W
SAF: Recommended for wall Trunking and gear trays to be ordered separately. Trunking and gear trays to be ordered separately.
and shelf lighting.
Self-suspended specular
reflector STF
narrow/wide-angle light
distribution. To be fixed
directly to gear trays in
IP 20.
Self-suspended specular
reflector SAF
Made of highly-specular an-
odised aluminium for asym-
metrical light distribution.
To be fixed directly to gear
trays in IP 20.

No. 2150
for combination
138
138
769/58
+07690STF/58
DIN 5040
A - u = 1.00
4 - su = 0.60 184 184
0 - so = 0.00
Ordering example: continuous line Self-suspended reflectors

(20 lengths) with self-suspended Demand-oriented, self-suspended reflectors are available in
reflectors STF versions for narrow/wide-angle, extremely narrow-angle or
20 gear trays 7691/58 E asymmetrical light distribution. They are fixed directly to the
Indications Page 20 reflectors 07691 STF/58 gear tray by means of stainless steel snap fasteners.
Trunking / accessories 374
Suspensions 379 Trunking see page 374, suspensions Additional reflector accessories such as end caps and con-
Gear trays 380 see page 379. nectors are not necessary. A uniform transition to adjacent
Emergency light inserts 410 self-suspended reflectors is assured thanks to the enclosed
Planning 412 connection components which can be snapped onto the
Lighting management lower reflector edge without tools.
system 431
406
Self-suspended specular reflector SAF,
asymmetrical light distribution

gear tray gear tray
07690 SAF/58 Specular reflector SAF 1x58W 07690 SAF/58 Specular reflector SAF 2x58W
652d

for combination
1 1 Number of luminaires
138
138
769/58 Number of luminaires

+07690SAF/58 En 300 lx 500 lx En 300 lx 500 lx
DIN 5040 Room height H 3.0 m 5.0 m 3.0 m 5.0 m Room height H 3.0 m 5.0 m 3.0 m 5.0 m
A - u = 1.00 20 2.6 4.5 4.4 7.5 20 4.0 6.8 6.7 11
4 - su = 0.55 215 215 30 3.6 5.5 5.9 9.1 30 5.3 8.3 8.9 14
0 - so = 0.00 40 4.5 6.3 7.5 11 40 6.7 9.7 11 16
Area Area
50 5.4 7.4 8.9 12 50 8.0 11 13 19
A A
in m2 60 6.3 8.3 10 14 in m2 60 9.2 13 15 21
80 8.0 10 13 17 80 12 16 20 26
100 9.7 12 16 20 100 14 18 24 30
150 14 17 24 28 150 20 25 34 41
200 18 21 31 35 200 27 31 44 52
2 Max. luminaire


spacings for
g1 = Emin : E 1 : 1.5 g1 = Emin : E 1 : 1.5

1 x 58 W 1.00 0.79 0.79 0.00 1 x 58 W 1.00 0.85 0.85 0.00
2 x 58 W 0.53 0.74 0.74 0.00 2 x 58 W 0.55 0.77 0.77 0.00
1 x 58 W E 1.04 0.79 0.79 0.00 1 x 58 W E 1.04 0.85 0.85 0.00
2 x 58 W E 0.56 0.74 0.74 0.00 2 x 58 W E 0.57 0.77 0.77 0.00
Easy height compensation

E-LINE continuous lines convince thanks to easy height
compensation when mounting the trunking, without tools.
All wire suspensions are equipped with integrated regulation

devices for continuous height compensation. The vernier
clips of the pendant suspensions further allow the user to
shorten pendant rods on site.
Chain suspensions are equipped as standard with turn-

buckles in chain link length, for rapid height compensation.
407
Self-suspended specular reflector HRF,
extremely narrow-angle light distribution
Application
High-bay warehouses, high
gangways and high halls.
Self-suspended
reflector HRF
anodised aluminium, for
extremely narrow-angle light
distribution. To be fixed
directly to gear trays in IP 20.
Indications Page
Trunking / accessories 374
Suspensions 379
Gear trays 380
Emergency light inserts 410
Planning 412
Lighting management
system 431
408
Reference Designation for
gear trays
07691 HRF/58 Extremely narrow-angle reflector HRF 1 x 58 W
652d
C 0 - C 180 Photometric
data for
combination
138
7691/58
+ 07691 HRF/58
Classification
DIN 5040:
A - u = 1.00
A - su = 0.67 223
A - so = 0.00
Diagrams to determine horizontal illuminances Lighting of high-bay

warehouses
Installation data Illustration 1 Illustration 2 Illustration 3 Due to missing or reduced
Gangway length: L = 25 m Installation sketch Average illuminance Illuminance distribution daylight, high-bay warehouses
Gangway width: B Gangway in high-bay warehouse B/2: on the centre line EP across the gangway, are mainly artificially lit. Due
Light point height: h B = ...: on the whole gangway y = 12.5 m to the resulting increased
Transverse coordinate: x surface operating times, the use of
Longitudinal coordinate: y highly-efficient lamps and
Evaluation level: e = 0.2 m economical luminaires is
recommended.
Luminaires:
Non-interrupted continuous line Gear trays with electronic
with 16 units control gear for reduced
7691/58 + 7691 HRF/58 500 500
energy consumption and
Lamps: 450 increased lamp life are per-
B/2
Triphosphor lamps 58 W 400 400
fect for these applications.
Luminous flux:
LP = 5200 Im 350 E-LINE in HRF versions excels
B=6m
Light loss factor: v = 0.8 with extremely narrow-angle
Average illuminance E in lx
L 300 300
luminous intensity distribu-
Point illuminance EP in lx
250
B=6m tion with high light output
200 200 ratios, allowing efficient reali-
150 h=6m sation of standard-conform
h h = 14 m
illuminances even in case of
100 100 elevated light point heights.
50 50 h = 22 m
y 20 h = 30 m
x 0 0
4 8 12 16 20 24 28 0 1m 2m 3m
B/2 e
B Light point height Lat. distance x to
h in m gangway centre
409
E-LINE
Gear trays for emergency lighting
Requirements Minimum Switching Emergency power source Illumination Reference Lamps IP kg

illuminance period Nominal Admissible of escape Gear trays with rating
operating alternatives1) signs emergency light socket E 14,
time for stand-by switching
Meeting rooms 1 lx max. 1 s 3h Permanent 7691/58 + E14 1 x 36 W IP 20 1.8
Business rooms switching 7692/58 + E14 2 x 58 W IP 20 3.7
Exhibition rooms
Meeting rooms with 1 lx max. 1 s 3h Single Permanent
max. 20 safety batteries switching
luminaires
Em. power generator switching
Escape routes in 1 lx 50 % of required 1h Single batteries Permanent
working facilities illuminance in 5 s, Em. power generator switching not
100 % in 60 s Specially safe- necessary
guarded mains
Anti-panic- 0.5 lx 50 % of required 1h No information No information
lighting2) illuminance in 5 s
100 % in 60 s
Workplaces with min. 0.1Em3) max. 0.5 s Time of Single batteries Permanent
special risk min. 15 lx risk Specially safe- switching not
guarded mains necessary
1)
2)
... in order to reach a point where an escape route can be clearly recognised.
3)
A B Illustration A:
Emergency lighting takes over in the event of mains failure
8 10
8 10
Eh = 0.5 lx Eh = 0.5 lx 7691/58 + E 14
of the general artificial lighting. It has to ensure that activities batten
can be ended without risk and working facilities can be left
6
6
Illustration B:
7691/58 + E 14
4
4
safely. Emergency lighting is divided into stand-by lighting 5 lx 1 lx
in combination with reflector R
2
and safety lighting. The safety lighting is further divided into 1 lx 5 lx Illustration C:
0
Safety lighting for escape routes, Anti-panic lighting and 10 8 6 4 2 0 0 2 4 6 8 10

7692/58 + E 14 batten
m
10 8 6 4 2 0 0 2 4 6 8 10
Safety lighting for workplaces with special risks. Illustration D:
0
5 lx 5 lx
7692/58 + E 14
2
1 lx in combination with reflector R

4
1 lx
6
6
10 8
10 8
Eh = 0.5 lx Eh = 0.5 lx
Suspension length 3 m
C m D Suspension length 5 m
Equipment options Isolux curves The following luminous fluxes + E14 Gear tray
for 5-conductor (5LV) and Illuminances achieved with are taken into account: Gear trays for continuous Sheet steel, white. Fixed to
7-conductor (7LV) wiring E-LINE gear trays for safety lines and individual luminaires the trunking by means of
lighting are documented in Isolux curves + E14 with emergency light socket stainless steel snap fasteners,
Mains cable 5 cond.
Mains cable 3 cond.
Dimming 1-10 V
Emergency syst.
EB single battery
UR switch. relay
E 14 socket
No. of conductors
Wiring type
the isolux curves opposite. Equipment: tubular incandes- E14, red-marked, IP 20. without tools. With low-loss
They refer to a level on the cent lamp, 40 W, luminous ballasts and plug-in terminal
floor and a light loss factor flux 380 lm. 7691 for 1 fluorescent for series capacitors to oper-
of 0.8. Indirect portions are lamp 36 W with additional ate the general lighting.
not taken into consideration. Isolux curves + EB emergency light socket E14
Equipment: triphosphor fluo- for tubular incandescent Electrical connection
rescent lamps 58 W. Lumi- lamps up to 40 W as well as The electrical connection with
3 3 nous flux 5200 lm (referred for compact fluorescent general and safety lighting
to nominal operation). The lamps with integrated ballast. circuit is made automatically
3 1 4
diagrams opposite are based Max. lamp length 126 mm, when the gear tray is attached
3 2 5 on battery operation with max. diameter 42 mm. to the trunking. Lamp circuit
5LV
3 2 5 25% luminous flux. connections can be set to the
3 2 5 7692 for 2 fluorescent phase conductor without
Isolux curves + UR lamps 58 W with additional tools.
5 5 Equipment: triphosphor fluo- emergency light socket E14
3 2 1 6 rescent lamps 58 W, luminous for tubular incandescent
3 2 2 7 flux 5200 lm. lamps up to 40 W e.g.
OSRAM T30/73 (40 W).
3 2 2 7
In case of deviating luminous Max. lamp length 73 mm,
5 1 6 7LV fluxes the illuminance values max. diameter 42 mm.
5 2 7 must be corrected accor-
5 2 7
dingly.
5 2 7
Indications Page
Emergency light 428
410
Reference Nominal Lamps IP kg Reference Lamps IP kg
Gear trays with operating time rating Gear trays with rating
single battery supply for switching relay for
permanent switching permanent switching
7691/58 E + EB (1 h) 1 hour 1 x 58 W IP 20 2.6 7691/58 E + UR 1 x 58 W IP 20 1.4
7691/58 E + EB (3 h) 3 hours 1 x 58 W IP 20 3.2 7692/58 E + UR 2 x 58 W IP 20 1.6
7692/58 E + EB (1 h) 1 hour 2 x 58 W IP 20 2.8
7692/58 E + EB (3 h) 3 hours 2 x 58 W IP 20 3.4
652d
A B Illustration A: A B Illustration A:
8 10
8 10
12 16
12 16
Eh = 0.5 lx Eh = 0.5 lx 7691/58 E + EB 7691/58 E + UR

Eh = 0.5 lx Eh = 0.5 lx
batten batten
6
Illustration B: Illustration B:
8
7691/58 E + EB 1 lx 7691/58 E + UR
4
5 lx 1 lx 1 lx
in combination with reflector R in combination with reflector R
4
4
2
1 lx 5 lx 5 lx 5 lx
Illustration C: Illustration C:
0
10 8 6 4 2 0 0 2 4 6 8 10 16 12 8 4 0 0 4 8 12 16
7692/58 E + EB 7692/58 E + UR
m
10 8 6 4 2 0 0 2 4 6 8 10 batten 16 12 8 4 0 0 4 8 12 16 batten
0
0
1 lx 5 lx 5 lx 5 lx
Illustration D: Illustration D:
2
5 lx 1 lx 7692/58 E + EB 1 lx 7692/58 E + UR
4
in combination with reflector R in combination with reflector R

8
1 lx
6
12
12
10 8
10 8
Eh = 0.5 lx Eh = 0.5 lx Eh = 0.5 lx

Suspension length 3 m Eh = 0.5 lx Suspension length 3 m
16
16
C m D Suspension length 5 m C m D Suspension length 5 m
+ EB Gear tray + UR Gear tray

Gear trays for continuous Sheet steel, white. Fixed to Gear trays for continuous Sheet steel, white. Fixed to
lines and individual luminaires the trunking by means of lines and individual luminaires. the trunking by means of
equipped with single battery, stainless steel snap fasteners, Version with electronic control stainless steel snap fasteners,
IP 20. without tools. With electronic gear (E) and relay to switch without tools. With electronic
control gear (E) to operate over to safety power supply. control gear (E) to operate
Fluorescent lamps switched the general lighting. Fluorescent lamps switched the general lighting.
permanently, in the event of permanently, in the event of
mains failure one lamp is Electrical connection mains failure, one lamp is Electrical connection
operated by a single battery The electrical connection with operated by the emergency The electrical connection with
with maintenance-free, gas- general lighting circuit and power source on site. general and safety lighting
proof high-temperature nickel- charging circuit is made auto- circuits is made automatically
cadmium accumulators. LED matically when the gear tray when the gear tray is attached
indicates the charge state of is attached to the trunking. to the trunking. Lamp circuit
the battery. Lamp circuit connections can connections can be set to the
be set to the phase conduc- phase conductor without
+ EB (1h) tor without tools. tools.
Nominal operating time 1 hour.
+ EB (3h)
Nominal operating time
3 hours (not in combination
with continuous-line wirings
in module 510 mm).
411
E-LINE
Planning, ordering and installation
Overhang
min. 50 mm/max. 500 mm
E-LINE allows for suspension Planning suggestions Planning suggestions

spacings of up to 2500 mm. for continuous lines with gear trays 36 W for continuous lines with gear trays 58 W
Spacings might have to be Run Lamp Trunking Fixing Run Lamp Trunking Fixing
reduced in case of node length length 07690/II/36 U 07690/III/36 U points length length 07690/II/58 U 07690/III/58 U points
suspensions, see page 378. 07690/II/36-5 LV 07690/III/36-5 LV 07690/II/58-5 LV 07690/III/58-5 LV
At continuous-line ends a 07690/II/36-7 LV 07690/III/36-7 LV 07690/II/58-7 LV 07690/III/58-7 LV
minimum overhang dimension m No. Pieces Pieces No. m No. Pieces Pieces No.
of 50 mm or a maximum 2.47 2 1 2 3.07 2 1 2
overhang dimension of 3.70 3 1 3 4.60 3 1 3
500 mm has to be observed. 4.93 4 2 3 6.13 4 2 4
6.16 5 1 1 4 7.66 5 1 1 4
All indications apply to single- 7.39 6 2 4 9.19 6 2 5
lamp and twin-lamp gear 8.62 7 2 1 5 10.72 7 2 1 5
trays, independent of ballast 9.85 8 1 2 5 12.25 8 1 2 6
type, optical equipment and 11.08 9 3 6 13.78 9 3 7
fixing type. 12.31 10 2 2 6 15.31 10 2 2 7
13.54 11 1 3 7 16.84 11 1 3 8
The tables opposite provide a 14.77 12 4 7 18.37 12 4 8
quick overview regarding the 16.00 13 2 3 7 19.90 13 2 3 9
composition of E-LINE contin- 17.23 14 1 4 8 21.43 14 1 4 10
uous lines. In case of differ- 18.46 15 5 8 22.96 15 5 10
ent continuous-line lengths 19.69 16 2 4 9 24.49 16 2 4 11
the required number of 20.92 17 1 5 9 26.02 17 1 5 12
trunking units as well as 22.15 18 6 10 27.55 18 6 12
the minimum number of 23.38 19 2 5 10 29.08 19 2 5 13
fixing points (based on a 24.61 20 1 6 11 30.61 20 1 6 13
maximum fixing spacing of
2500 mm)
is given.
As to trunking units in module Ordering example: 1. Trunking Trunking units, 2 lengths ............................2 x 07690/II/36-7LV
510 mm to be wired on site, Non-interrupted continuous line 36 W Trunking units, 3 lengths ............................2 x 07690/III/36-7LV
please check the tables on with prewired trunking (7-conductor
2. Trunking and fixing Trunking end caps ..............................................2 x 07690 E-T
wiring).
page 413 with information on accessory Ceiling fixing clamps ..................................................6 x D 01 X
additional trunking sections 12.31 m long (equals 10 lamp lengths),
which might be necessary. equipped with single-lamp dimmable gear 3. Gear tray Gear trays, single-lamp ....................................10 x 7691/36 ED
trays, trapezium-shaped reflectors and
lamella louvres. Direct ceiling mounting. 4. Reflector + accessory Reflectors, trapezium-shaped............................10 x 07690 T/36
IP 20. Reflector connectors ..........................................9 x 07690 RVT
Reflector end caps ..............................................2 x 07690 RKT
5. Optical equipment Lamella louvres ........................................10 x 07690 T-RW/36
Ordering example: 1. Trunking Trunking, 2 lengths..........................................1 x 07690/II/58-U

Variable continuous line 58 W with Trunking units, 3 lengths ................................2 x 07690/III/58-U
trunking to be wired on site (5-conduc-
2. Trunking and fixing Trunking end caps ................................................2 x 07690 E-R
tor wiring) and uniform spacings of
accessory Blanking covers ................................................3 x 07690 B/58
612 mm between the gear trays.
Flatband cable ............................................1 x 07690/5LV/46m
12.25 m long (equals 8 lamp lengths), Wiring connector ..................................................1 x 07690 VV
equipped with twin-lamp gear trays, radial Female connectors................................................6 x 07690 SK
reflectors and prismatic diffusers. Chain Chain suspensions ....................................................6 x A 01 KX
suspension. IP 20.
3. Gear tray Gear trays, twin-lamp ..............................................6 x 7692/58
4. Reflector + accessory Radial reflectors ..............................................6 x 07692 R/58

Reflector end caps ..............................................12 x 07692 RK
5. Optical equipment Prismatic diffusers ............................................6 x 07692 P/58
412
Spacing between fixings Further spacings between fixings
max. 2500 mm max. 2500 mm
Planning suggestions for modular system Planning suggestions for modular system
with 510 mm spacing between the gear trays 58 W with 1020 mm spacing between the gear trays 58 W
Run Lamp Trunking Additional trunking section Fixing Run Lamp Trunking Additional trunking section Fixing
length length 07690/ 07690/ 07690/ 07690/ points length length 07690 07690 07690 07690 points
/II/58 U /III/58 U /510/U /1020/U /II/58 U /III/58 U /510/U /1020/U
m No. Pieces Pieces Pieces Pieces No. m No. Pieces Pieces Pieces Pieces No.
3.58 2 1 1 3 4.09 2 1 1 3
5.62 3 1 1 3 6.64 3 2 1 4
7.66 4 1 1 4 9.19 4 2 5
9.70 5 2 1 5 11.74 5 2 1 1 6
11.74 6 2 1 1 6 14.29 6 3 1 7
13.78 7 3 7 16.84 7 1 3 8
15.82 8 2 2 1 7 19.39 8 4 1 9
17.86 9 1 3 1 8 21.94 9 1 4 1 10
19.90 10 2 3 9 24.49 10 2 4 11
21.94 11 1 4 1 10 27.04 11 1 5 1 12
23.98 12 5 1 11 29.59 12 2 5 1 13
26.02 13 1 5 11 32.14 13 7 14
28.06 14 6 1 12 34.69 14 2 6 1 15
30.10 15 2 5 1 13 37.24 15 8 1 16
32.14 16 7 14 39.79 16 1 8 17
34.18 17 2 6 1 15 42.34 17 9 1 18
36.22 18 1 7 1 16 44.89 18 1 9 1 19
38.26 19 2 7 16 47.44 19 2 9 20
40.30 20 1 8 1 17 49.99 20 1 10 1 21
IP 50
Special gear trays for 58 W
fluorescent lamps are avail-
Ordering example: 1. Trunking Trunking units, 3 lengths ................................2 x 07690/III/58-U able for continuous lines or
Modular continuous line 58 W with Additional trunking............................................1 x 07690/510/U individual luminaires in IP 50
trunking to be wired on site and reference 7681/58 or
2. Trunking and fixing Trunking end caps ................................................2 x 07690 E-R
uniform blanking cover spacings of
510 mm between the gear trays
accessory Blanking covers ..............................................4 x 07690 B/510 7682/58. This allows to
Through-wiring set ................................1 x 07690/5LV-510/46m realise non-interrupted contin-
9.70 m long (equals 5 lamp lengths and Wiring connector ..................................................1 x 07690 VV uous lines or continuous lines
4 blanking covers 510 mm), equipped with Decorative wire suspensions ..................................5 x A 01 DSX
twin-lamp gear trays with electronic control with IP 50 blanking covers for
gear (E), radial reflectors and parabolic 3. Gear tray Gear trays, twin-lamp ..........................................5 x 7692/58 E module 1530 mm.
louvres. Decorative wire suspension. IP 20.
4. Reflector + accessory Radial reflectors ..............................................5 x 07692 RH/58 In addition, special trunking
Reflector end caps ............................................10 x 07692 RKH end caps 07680 E-R and
5. Optical Highly-specular parabolic louvres ....................5 x 07692 RPV/58
gasket accessories 07680 KD
equipment for the joints are neccessary
in order to observe IP 50.
Only radial reflectors and
corresponding optical acces-
sories are used trapezium-
shaped or industrial self-
Ordering example: 1. Trunking Trunking units, 3 lengths ................................3 x 07690/III/58-U suspended reflectors are not
Modular continuous line 58 W with Additional trunking............................................1 x 07690/510/U available for IP 50.
trunking to be wired on site and
2. Trunking and fixing Trunking end caps ................................................2 x 07690 E-T
uniform blanking cover spacings of
accessory Blanking covers ............................................5 x 07690 B/1020
1020 mm between the gear trays
Through-wiring set ................................1 x 07690/5LV-510/46m
14.29 m long (equals 6 lamp lengths and Wiring connector ..................................................1 x 07690 VV
5 blanking covers 1020 mm), equipped with Wire suspensions......................................................7 x A 01 SX
single-lamp gear trays and industrial self-
suspended reflectors, asymmetrical light 3. Gear tray Gear trays, single-lamp............................................6 x 7691/58
distribution. Wire suspension. IP 20.
4. Reflectors Industrial self-suspended reflectors, asymm.....6 x 07690 SAF/58
413
Rapid-mounting continuous-line luminaires
with silicate glass cover
Application Reference Lamps LxWxH kg

Workplaces with an in- W mm
creased degree of pollution. 7961 S/I/58 1x58 1555x228x135 12.4
Also recommended in areas 7961 S/II/58 2x58 3103x228x135 24.8
where drilling emulsions are 7961 S/III/58 3x58 4651x228x135 37.2
used or oil gases are formed.
Optical system
Highly-specular, anodised
reflectors for narrow/wide-
Luminaire body
With integrated trunking,
sheet steel, white, stove-
enamelled. Gear tray can be
removed and hung in the
luminaire body without using
tools. Protection against
soiling by means of silicate
glass cover, clear, safely
retained in a continuous
frame, easily lowered and
removed for maintenance.
for connection, each lamp
length with 4-pole connec-
tion terminal and additional
earth connection terminal for
wires up to 2.5 mm2, con-
nected with individual wires
5 x 1.5 mm2. Electrical con-
nection with gear tray by
means of 4-pole female con-
nector, quick-release button
to rearrange the lamp circuit
connection to L1, L2 or L3.
With two grommets at each
front plane for mains supply
and further wiring. With
low-loss ballasts.
Luminaires can also be sup- No. 2152
plied with electronic control DIN 5040: A40
gear, reference suffix E, CIBSE BZ:
e.g. 7961 S/I/58 E. BZ3
Versions equipped with elec- NBN L 14-002:
BZ4/1/BZ3
tronic control gear are suit-
able for use in production
sites exposed to fire hazards
substance.
Electronic control gear Production sites exposed to fire hazards

TRILUX luminaires equipped with electronic control gear Continuous-line luminaires 796 equipped with electronic
Indications Page shine out thanks to the following characteristics: energy- control gear can also be used in areas exposed to fire
Fixing accessories 416 saving operation, lamp-preserving rapid lamp start, flicker- hazards caused by dust and fibrous substance.
Planning suggestions 416 free light and avoidance of electrode flicker and disturbing
Through-wiring set 417 noises. The increased lamp service life allows for benefits
Lamp characteristics 444 in moneys worth.
414
Reference Lamps LxWxH kg Reference Lamps LxWxH kg
W mm W mm
7962 S/I/58 2x58 1555x228x135 13.4 7963 S/I/58 3x58 1555x372x187 21.2
7962 S/II/58 4x58 3103x228x135 26.8 7963 S/II/58 6x58 3103x372x187 42.2
7962 S/III/58 6x58 4651x228x135 40.2 7963 S/III/58 9x58 4651x372x187 63.6
652d (o
Data table no. 2152

En 300 lx 500 lx
20 3.0 4.7 5.0 7.8
30 4.0 5.7 6.7 9.5
40 5.0 6.7 8.4 11
Area
50 6.1 8.3 10 14
A
in m2 60 7.1 9.3 12 16
80 9.0 12 15 19
100 11 14 18 23
150 16 19 26 31
200 21 24 34 40

spacings for
g1 = Emin : E 1 : 1.5
CIBSE BZ: CIBSE BZ:
BZ5/0.8/BZ4 BZ3
Reference M LB L
direct indirect
DLOR ULOR
7961 S/58 1.00 0.73 0.73 0.00
7962 S/58 0.60 0.61 0.61 0.00
7963 S/58 0.36 0.68 0.68 0.00
Protection against soiling Reduced maintenance intervals

The covers in chemically resistant sili- The internal optical systems are efficiently protected by sili-
cate glass are safely retained in the cate glass covers. Maintenance intervals especially in
continuous frame. Even oil gases or rooms with an increased degree of pollution are extended
drilling emulsions do not leave irre- and thus reduce the costs of the lighting installation.
versible pollution on the panes.
415
796
Accessories and fixing spacings
Overhang Spacing between fixings

50 -780 mm max. 1440 (796/I/58); max. 2330 (796/II/58)
Fixing spacings:
Direct ceiling mounting
Overhang Spacing between fixings Spacing between fixings

50 -780 mm max. 2330 mm max. 2330 mm
Suspended mounting
Planning suggestions 796 continuous lines 796 continuous lines

Fixing spacings of up to
Component combination Direct ceiling mounting Suspended mounting
2330 mm (approx. 112 lamp
lengths) can be realised when Run Lamp 796 continuous-line lumin. Through-wiring Fixing points Couplings Susp. Overhang
suspending continuous-line length lengths 58 W /I/58 /II/58 /III/58 sets 07771/5LV 07770/5LV points approx.
luminaires with integrated m No. Pieces Pieces Pieces Pieces No. Pieces No. mm
trunking. At continuous-line 1.56 1 1 2 2 50
ends a maximum overhang 3.11 2 1 2 2 390
dimension of 780 mm 4.66 3 1 3 3 50
(approx. 12 lamp length) or a 6.21 4 2 1 4 1 3 780
minimum overhang dimension 7.76 5 1 1 1 5 1 4 390
of 50 mm has to be observed. 9.31 6 2 1 6 1 5 50
10.86 7 2 1 2 7 2 5 780
Continuous-line couplings 12.41 8 1 2 2 8 2 6 390
are not required in case of 13.96 9 3 2 9 2 7 50
direct ceiling mounting. Each 15.52 10 2 2 3 10 3 7 780
continuous-line luminaire is 17.06 11 1 3 3 11 3 8 390
separately fixed to the ceiling. 18.61 12 4 3 12 3 9 50
The electrical connection in 20.17 13 2 3 4 13 4 9 780
conformance with the degree 21.72 14 1 4 4 14 4 10 390
of protection is made by 23.26 15 5 4 15 4 11 50
means of a through-wiring 24.82 16 2 4 5 16 5 11 780
set with connection tube, 26.37 17 1 5 5 17 5 12 390
reference 07771/5LV. 27.92 18 6 5 18 5 13 50
Ceiling fixing clamp D 01N Link chain E 04 Chain suspension A 02 K-SP

with mounting plate, sheet steel, white. galvanised, 20 m long, to be shortened consisting of link chain, galvanised,
Spacing between trunking and fixing on site. 1500 mm long, suspension clamp
surface 86 mm. Not suitable for fixing B 03, safety spring hook and turnbuckle
to walls. Suspension clamp B 03 with 40 mm height compensation.
sheet steel, galvanised.
Ceiling fixing plate E 01 Wire suspension A 02 S/2.5
sheet steel, galvanised, with safety consisting of steel wire, galvanised,
spring hook to attach chains and wires 2.5 mm, 1500 mm long, suspension
without tools. clamp B 03 and safety spring hook.
Wire length fully adjustable without
tools also after continuous-line
mounting.
416
Spacing between fixings
max. 2280 (796/III/58)
For safety reasons, fixing

accessories must be able to
support five times the weight
of the luminaires to be
mounted on them. In case
the maximum fixing spacings
are retained this results in
loads of 30 kg maximum per
Spacing between fixings
max. 2330 mm suspension point. All suspen-
sion accessories are there-
fore designed for at least
150 kg weight load. Fixing
accessories provided on site
such as dowels, ceiling
hooks, etc. should meet with
these requirements.
Ordering example for Ordering example for

direct ceiling mounting suspended mounting
Continuous line (5 lengths) with Continuous line (5 lengths) with The table opposite provides a quick
continuous-line luminaires 7961 S//58 continuous-line luminaires 7961 S//58 overview regarding the component
(total length 7.76 m) (total length 7.76 m) combination of 796 continuous lines.
The necessary accessories for the dif-
1. Luminaire 1. Luminaire ferent kinds of mounting are described.
Continuous-line Continuous-line
luminaire (2 lenghts) ........ 1 x 7961 S/II/58 luminaire (2 lenghts) ........ 1 x 7961 S/II/58 The possible maximum fixing spacing is
Continuous-line Continuous-line based on the information in the table.
luminaire (3 lengths) ....... 1 x 7961 S/III/58 luminaire (3 lengths) ....... 1 x 7961 S/III/58
2. Mounting accessory 2. Mounting accessory

Through-wiring set ............. 1 x 07771/5LV Continuous-line coupling
with through-wiring set ...... 1 x 07770/5LV
3. Fixing accessory
Ceiling fixing clamp .................. 5 x D 01N 3. Fixing accessory
Ceiling fixing plate ...................... 4 x E 01
Chain suspension ............... 4 x A 02 K-SP
5 lamp lengths and fixing spacings of max. 2330 mm 5 lamp lengths and max. 2330 mm suspension spacing
(2-length trunking) or 2280 mm (3-length trunking) result result in 4 suspension points according to the table above.
in 5 fixing points according to the table above.
Supporting clips for T-beam 07770/5LV

E 02/70, E 02/80, E 02/100 Continuous-line coupling with
with flange widths 70 mm, 80 mm or through-wiring set
100 mm, sheet steel, galvanised. (Only for suspended mounting.) Stable
With safety spring hook to attach exterior coupling, sheet steel, galvani-
chains and wires without tools. sed, with wiring accessory 07771/5LV.
Inclined suspension B 05* 07771/5LV

for inclined luminaire mounting up to D 02* Through-wiring set IP 50 * Inclined mounting with fixing accessories
D 02 or B 05 results in deviating fixing
30 around the longitudinal axis. Steel, Inclined fixing (Only for direct ceiling mounting.) dimensions:
white, with safety spring hook to attach Steel, white, for direct ceiling or wall 5-conductor through-wiring set
7961, 7962 maximum fixing spa-
chains and wires without tools. mounting. 1.5 mm2, 700 mm long, and plastic cing 1550 mm, maximum overhang
connection tube for max. 8 individual dimension 775 mm (approx. 12 lamp
length).
conductors 1.5 mm2.
7963 not suitable for inclined mounting.
417
Batten luminaires
Application Reference Lamps D D1 E1 kg Reference Lamps D D1 E1 kg

Production facilities, work- W mm W mm
shops, assembly halls and 1615/118 1x18 500 60 250 1.4 1615/218 2x18 500 60 250 1.5
storage facilities. Versions 1615/136 1x36 900 165 450 2.1 1615/236 2x36 900 165 450 4.3
without reflector preferably 1615/158 1x58 1100 215 550 2.9 1615/258 2x58 1100 215 550 5.3
for non-specific, passive or
tertiary building areas with
general illumination require-
ments, e.g. storage rooms,
technical rooms or ancillary
rooms without continuously
Luminaire body
Sheet steel, with white poly-
ester coating, end caps
made of white polystyrene
plastic.
up to 2.5 mm2 and additional
With inductive ballasts.

e.g. 1615/158 E.
Reflectors (accessories)
1 piece, solvent-free pow-
der-coated sheet steel,
white. Universally suitable
for single- and twin-lamp
versions:
01615 R/36 for 36 W,
01615 R/58 for 58 W.

No. 2157 No. 2157
DIN 5040: B21 DIN 5040: B32
CIBSE BZ: CIBSE BZ:
BZ6 BZ6
NBN L 14-002: NBN L 14-002:
BZ6 BZ6
Electronic control gear

TRILUX luminaires equipped with electronic control gear
shine out thanks to the following characteristics: energy-
saving operation, lamp-preserving rapid lamp start, flicker-
free light and avoidance of electrode flicker and disturbing
Indications Page noises. The increased lamp service life allows for benefits
Lamp characteristics 444 in moneys worth.
418
Reference Lamps D D1 E1 kg Reference Lamps D D1 E1 kg
Luminaire + reflector* W mm Luminaire + reflector* W mm
1615/36 + 01615 R/36 1x36 900 165 450 3.7 1615/236 + 01615 R/36 2x36 900 165 450 5.9
1615/58 + 01615 R/58 1x58 1100 215 550 4.9 1615/258 + 01615 R/58 2x58 1100 215 550 7.3
* Accessories, to be ordered separately. * Accessories, to be ordered separately.
652d
Data table no. 2157

En 300 lx 500 lx
20 2.6 3.0 4.4 5.0
30 3.6 4.0 6.0 6.7
40 4.5 5.0 7.5 8.3
Area
50 5.4 6.0 9.0 10
A
in m2 60 6.3 6.9 10 12
80 8.0 8.7 13 15
100 9.7 11 16 17
150 14 15 23 25
200 18 19 30 32
T8 C 0 - C 180 Data table T8 C 0 - C 180 Datenblock Height of the working plane e 0.85 m
No. 2157 Nr. 2157 Suspension length lp 0.00 m

spacings for
g1 = Emin : E 1 : 1.5
CIBSE BZ: CIBSE BZ:
BZ3/4/BZ4 BZ4 Transverse spacing centre / centre Xmax = 3.3 h
B4 BZ4
Reference M LB L
direct indirect
DLOR ULOR
1615/118 3.85 0.96 0.64 0.32
1615/136 1.55 0.96 0.64 0.32
+ 01615R/36 31.4 0.87 0.87 0.00
1615/158 1.00 0.96 0.64 0.32
+ 01615R/58 0.97 0.85 0.85 0.00
1615/218 1.97 0.94 0.59 0.35
1615/236 0.79 0.94 0.59 0.35
+ 01615R/36 0.79 0.82 0.82 0.00
1615/258 0.51 0.94 0.59 0.35
+ 01615R/58 0.51 0.80 0.80 0.00
Tested safety
Standard TRILUX luminaires are marked with the ENEC, EMV
as well as the fire protection label, thus documenting that
the luminaires were tested by a neutral certification institute
and that the current production is being supervised.
419
Individual battens
Application Reference Lamps D D1 E1 kg Reference Lamps D D1 E1 kg

Production facilities, work- W mm W mm
shops, assembly halls and 6141/18 1x18 470 76 470 1.4 6142/36 2x36 920 156 2.7
storage facilities. Versions 6141/36 1x36 920 156 1.9 6142/58 2x58 1100 216 4.0
without reflector preferably 6141/58 1x58 1100 216 2.7
for non-specific, passive or
tertiary building areas with
general illumination require-
ments, e.g. storage rooms,
technical rooms or ancillary
rooms without continuously
Luminaire body
Sheet steel, white, galva-
nised. End caps made of
plastic ABS, white. Easy
mounting by means of
separate mounting profile.
Ceiling-oriented integrated
channel duct for external
mains supply and further
wiring. Luminaires are fixed
to the mounting profile by
means of plastic-coated
metal turn-lock fasteners
without using tools.
Plug-type connection for
wires up to 2.5 mm2 to
3-pole (including earth con-
nection terminal) female con-
nector located at the mount-
ing profile. Luminaire con-
nection is made automatical-
ly when placing the luminaire
on the mounting profile. With
low-loss ballasts.

e.g. 6141/58 E.
No. 2153 No. 2153
Reflectors (accessories) DIN 5040: B21 DIN 5040: B32
1 piece, sheet steel, white, CIBSE BZ: CIBSE BZ:
to be fixed without using BZ6 BZ6
tools. With reflector end NBN L 14-002: NBN L 14-002:
BZ6 BZ6
caps, ABS, white. Universally
suitable for single- and
twin-lamp versions:
06140 R/36 for 614/36,
06140 R/58 for 614/58.
Female connector technology

Modern female connector technology
creates the conditions for tool-free,
rapid electrical connection of individual
luminaires 614 with the connection
Indications Page unit on the mounting profile.
420
Reference Lamps D D1 E1 kg Reference Lamps D D1 E1 kg
Luminaire + reflector* W mm Luminaire + reflector* W mm
6141/36 + 06140 R/36 1x36 920 156 3.6 6142/36 + 06140 R/36 2x36 920 156 4.4
6141/58 + 06140 R/58 1x58 1100 216 4.8 6142/58 + 06140 R/58 2x58 1100 216 6.1
* Accessories, to be ordered separately. * Accessories, to be ordered separately.
652d
Data table no. 2153

En 300 lx 500 lx
20 2.7 3.1 4.5 5.2
30 3.7 4.2 6.2 7.0
40 4.7 5.2 7.8 8.7
Area
50 5.6 6.2 9.3 10
A
in m2 60 6.5 7.2 11 12
80 8.3 9.1 14 15
100 10 11 17 18
150 15 15 24 26
200 19 20 31 33

spacings for
g1 = Emin : E 1 : 1.5
CIBSE BZ: CIBSE BZ:
BZ3/4/BZ4 BZ4 Transverse spacing centre / centre Xmax = 3.3 h
B4 BZ4
Reference M LB L
direct indirect
69N DLOR ULOR
6141/18 3.85 0.96 0.64 0.32
Chain suspension, 6141/36 1.56 0.96 0.64 0.32
1 pair, knotted-link 6141/36
+ 06140 R/36 1.61 0.74 0.74 0.00
chain 0.9 m long, + 07690 T-RW/36 1.75 0.68 0.68 0.00
6141/58 1.00 0.96 0.64 0.32
bright galvanised, 6141/58
complete with ring + 06140 R/58
+ 07690 T-RW/58
1.03
1.14
0.74
0.67
0.74
0.67
0.00
0.00
screw, hanger 6142/36 0.80 0.94 0.59 0.35
and ceiling trim 6142/36
+ 06140 R/36 0.85 0.69 0.69 0.00
cap. + 07690 T-RW/36 0.92 0.64 0.64 0.00
6142/58 0.51 0.94 0.69 0.35
6142/58
73N + 06140 R/58
+ 07690 T-RW/58
0.55
0.60
0.69
0.63
0.69
0.63
0.00
0.00
(not illustrated) Technical information see page 440.
Chain suspension
as 69N, but with-
out hanger and
ceiling trim cap.
Lamella louvre
Sheet steel, white for use in reflec-
tors 06140 R/, can be hung from
the reflector for easy maintenance.
07690 T-RW/36 for 06140 R/36.
07690 T-RW/58 for 06140 R/58.
421
Industrial luminaires WINLIGHT Q
symmetrical
Application
High rooms, halls, storage
facilities and production
sites, trade fair and exhibi-
tion halls. In combination
with cover suitable for use
in high sports halls, damp
or corrosive environments
and covered exterior areas.
HST-HIT
Hybrid version can be
optionally equipped with
tubular high-pressure sodium
vapour lamps or tubular
metal halide lamps.
Optical system
Narrow/wide-angle optical
system for symmetrical light
distribution. Reflector made
of anodised aluminium.
SD textured, specular,
SH smooth, highly-spec-
ular.
Luminaire body
Powder-coated sheet steel,
white, separate ballast hous-
ing and lamp housing. Gear
tray with all operating com-
ponents can be swung out.
Plug-type luminaire fixing on
enclosed galvanised mount-
ing plate. Cable entry by
means of two grommets
Pg 16 for mains supply
and further wiring.
up to 4 mm2, including earth
inductive ballasts,
HST-HIT with integrated
thermal fuse.
TRILUX industrial luminaires WINLIGHT Q are equipped with Lamella louvres and covers
specular reflectors made of anodised aluminium. Adapted to Industrial luminaires WINLIGHT Q can be equipped with alu-
Indications Page tubular HST/HIT lamps or ellipsoid HME lamps, equipment- minium louvres and/or glass covers. In combination with
Cover 424 optimised reflectors with a textured or smooth surface are covers made of thermally hardened safety glass, WINLIGHT
Lamella louvre 425 used. luminaires are resistant to ball impact and protected against
Emergency light 428 moisture and the ingression of dust in accordance with
Lamp characteristics 444 IP 54. Accessories are described on page 424/425.
422
W mm W mm
7981 SD/HST150 1xHST150 400 204 252 10.0 7983 SH/1xHME250 1xHME250 400 204 252 13.4
7981 SD/HST-HIT250* 1xHST/HIT250 400 204 252 11.1 7983 SH/1xHME400 1xHME400 400 204 252 14.7
7983 SD/1xHST-HIT400*1xHST/HIT400 400 204 252 14.9
* In case luminaires are utilised without cover GA, only use lamps suitable for operation
in open luminaires (self-shielded lamps).
652d ?*e
O
With covers GA IP 54
Data table no. 2154

En 300 lx 500 lx
100 4.1 6.6 6.8 11
200 7.1 8.7 12 14
400 12 15 21 25
Area
600 17 20 28 33
A
in m2 800 22 25 36 42
1000 27 30 45 50
1200 32 35 53 58
1400 36 39 60 65
1600 41 44 69 74
HST C 0 - C 180 Data table HME C 0 - C 180 Data table Height of the working plane e 0.85 m
HIT

spacings for
g1 = Emin : E 1 : 1.5
CIBSE BZ: CIBSE BZ:
BZ3/1.5/BZ2/4/BZ3 BZ3
Reference M LB L
direct indirect
Chain suspen- DLOR ULOR
7981 SD/HIT250 1.00 0.85 0.85 0.00
sion A 01 WQ 7981 SD/HIT250 + GA 1.15 0.74 0.74 0.00
1 set, for stable 7981 SD/HIT250 + RS 1.21 0.71 0.71 0.00
7981 SD/HIT250 + GA + RS 1.33 0.64 0.64 0.00
4-point suspen- 7981 SD/HST150 1.14 0.85 0.85 0.00
sion of 798 7981 SD/HST150 + GA 1.31 0.74 0.74 0.00
7981 SD/HST150 + RS 1.38 0.71 0.71 0.00
luminaires. 7981 SD/HST150 + GA + RS 1.52 0.64 0.64 0.00
Consisting of four 7981 SD/HST250 0.61 0.85 0.85 0.00
7981 SD/HST250 + GA 0.70 0.74 0.74 0.00
link chains, bright 7981 SD/HST250 + RS 0.73 0.71 0.71 0.00
galvanised, 7981 SD/HST250 + GA + RS 0.81 0.64 0.64 0.00
1000 mm long, 7983 SD/1xHIT400 0.63 0.84 0.84 0.00
7983 SD/1xHIT400 + GA 0.72 0.76 0.76 0.00
four safety spring 7983 SD/1xHIT400 + RS 0.75 0.71 0.71 0.00
hooks, four ring 7983 SD/1xHIT400 + GA + RS 0.84 0.65 0.65 0.00
7983 SD/1xHST400 0.36 0.84 0.84 0.00
screws. Not 7983 SD/1xHST400 + GA 0.41 0.76 0.76 0.00
resistant to ball 7983 SD/1xHST400 + RS 0.43 0.71 0.71 0.00
7983 SD/1xHST400 + GA + RS 0.48 0.65 0.65 0.00
impact. 7983 SH/1xHME250 1.70 0.77 0.77 0.00
7983 SH/1xHME250 + GA 1.84 0.71 0.71 0.00
7983 SH/1xHME250 + RS 1.95 0.67 0.67 0.00
Emergency light 7983 SH/1xHME250 + GA + RS 2.15 0.61 0.61 0.00
The E27 screwed socket 684/1 for halogen incandescent 7983 SH/1xHME400 1.00 0.77 0.77 0.00
lamps QT 32 also enables retrofitting of individual luminaires 7983 SH/1xHME400 + GA 1.08 0.71 0.71 0.00
7983 SH/1xHME400 + RS 1.21 0.64 0.64 0.00
into combined emergency luminaires. 7983 SH/1xHME400 + GA + RS 1.46 0.58 0.58 0.00
423
Industrial luminaires WINLIGHT Q
asymmetrical
Application
High rooms, halls, storage
facilities and production
sites, trade fair and exhibi-
tion halls. In combination
with cover suitable for use
in high sports halls, damp
or corrosive environments
and covered exterior areas.
HST-HIT
Hybrid version can be
optionally equipped with
tubular high-pressure sodium
vapour lamps or tubular
metal halide lamps.
Optical system
With asymmetrical light dis-
anodised aluminium,
AD textured, specular,
AH smooth, highly-spec-
ular.
Luminaire body
Powder-coated sheet steel,
white, separate ballast hous-
ing and lamp housing. Gear
tray with all operating com-
ponents can be swung out.
Plug-type luminaire fixing on
enclosed galvanised mount-
ing plate. Cable entry by
means of two grommets
Pg 16 for mains supply
and further wiring.
up to 4 mm2, including earth
inductive ballasts,
HST-HIT with integrated
thermal fuse.
Covers Ball impact resistance

1 piece, made of 5 mm thermally hardened safety glass, In combination with covers 0798GA, industrial luminaires
with integrated continuous silicon sealing. Easy-to-handle WINLIGHT Q are resistant to ball impact. Versions with lumen
Indications Page safety turn-fasteners. Required for ball impact resistance packages exceeding 30 000 lm offer practice-oriented alter-
Suspensions 423 or IP 54. natives to luminaires equipped with fluorescent lamps, espe-
Emergency light 428 07981 GA for luminaires 7981. cially for the lighting of higher sports halls.
Lamp characteristics 444 07983 GA for luminaires 7983.
424
W mm W mm
7981 AD/HST150 1xHST150 400 204 252 10.0 7983 AH/1xHME250 1xHME250 400 204 252 13.4
7981 AD/HST-HIT250* 1xHST/HIT250 400 204 252 11.1 7983 AH/1xHME400 1xHME400 400 204 252 14.7
7983 AD/1xHST-HIT400*1xHST/HIT400 400 204 252 14.9
* In case luminaires are utilised without cover GA, only use lamps suitable for operation
in open luminaires (self-shielded lamps).
652d ?*e
O
With covers GA IP 54
Data table no. 2155

En 300 lx 500 lx
100 5.6 9.2 9.4 15
200 8.8 12 15 20
400 14 18 24 31
Area
600 20 24 33 40
A
in m2 800 25 30 41 49
1000 30 35 51 58
1200 35 40 59 67
1400 40 45 67 75
1600 46 51 76 85
HST C 0 - C 180 Data table HME C 0 - C 180 Data table Height of the working plane e 0.85 m
HIT

spacings for
g1 = Emin : E 1 : 1.5
CIBSE BZ: CIBSE BZ:
BZ4/0.8/BZ3/1.0/BZ4 BZ4
Reference M LB L
direct indirect
DLOR ULOR
7981 AD/HIT250 1.00 0.82 0.82 0.00
7981 AD/HIT250 + GA 1.15 0.71 0.71 0.00
7981 AD/HIT250 + RS 1.24 0.66 0.66 0.00
7981 AD/HIT250 + GA + RS 1.37 0.60 0.60 0.00
7981 AD/HST150 1.14 0.82 0.82 0.00
7981 AD/HST150 + GA 1.31 0.71 0.71 0.00
7981 AD/HST150 + RS 1.42 0.66 0.66 0.00
7981 AD/HST150 + GA + RS 1.56 0.60 0.60 0.00
7981 AD/HST250 0.61 0.82 0.82 0.00
7981 AD/HST250 + GA 0.70 0.71 0.71 0.00
7981 AD/HST250 + RS 0.75 0.66 0.66 0.00
7981 AD/HST250 + GA + RS 0.84 0.60 0.60 0.00
7983 AD/1xHIT400 0.46 0.84 0.84 0.00
7983 AD/1xHIT400 + GA 0.53 0.73 0.73 0.00
7983 AD/1xHIT400 + RS 0.71 0.72 0.72 0.00
7983 AD/1xHIT400 + GA + RS 0.59 0.65 0.65 0.00
7983 AD/1xHST400 0.35 0.84 0.84 0.00
7983 AD/1xHST400 + GA 0.40 0.73 0.73 0.00
7983 AD/1xHST400 + RS 0.41 0.72 0.72 0.00
7983 AD/1xHST400 + GA + RS 0.45 0.65 0.65 0.00
7983 AH/1xHME250 1.60 0.79 0.79 0.00
7983 AH/1xHME250 + GA 1.83 0.69 0.69 0.00
7983 AH/1xHME250 + RS 1.98 0.64 0.64 0.00
Easy mounting Aluminium louvre 7983 AH/1xHME250 + GA + RS 2.22 0.57 0.57 0.00
Industrial luminaires WINLIGHT Q can be easily and efficiently Semi-specular lamella louvre made of aluminium, for in- 7983 AH/1xHME400 0.99 0.75 0.75 0.00
fixed by means of the enclosed mounting plate: once this creased glare limitation for industrial luminaires WINLIGHT Q. 7983 AH/1xHME400 + GA 1.14 0.65 0.65 0.00
7983 AH/1xHME400 + RS 1.27 0.59 0.59 0.00
plate is mounted, the industrial luminaires are fixed onto it To be lowered and hung from one side for easy mainte- 7983 AH/1xHME400 + GA + RS 1.40 0.53 0.53 0.00
without using tools. Special chain accessories A 01 WQ turn nance. Can also be combined with covers GA. Technical information see page 440.
WINLIGHT Q into a suspended luminaire. 07981 RS for luminaires 7981.
07983 RS for luminaires 7983.
425
Trunking for ceiling mounting and
suspended mounting of surface-mounted luminaires
Reference Length kg
mm
07690/II/36-U 2460 2.4
07690/III/36-U 3690 3.6
07690/II/58-U 3060 3.0
07690/III/58-U 4590 4.5
Trunking
For ceiling mounting and for
suspended mounting of
surface-mounted luminaires.
Can also be used as wiring
channel.
Trunking made of sheet
steel, galvanised, with white
polyester coating, as stand-
ard with stable couplings,
galvanised.
/II/ twin-length version,
/III/ triple-length
version.
Wiring feeding
at the ceiling by means
of unilateral knock-out
openings at a distance of
220 mm and 385 mm from
62 max. 775 max. 2325
the trunking beginning,
max. 150
at the front planes by
41
means of knock-out
openings in the end caps
07690 E-T.
110 180 1530 180 110
Wiring arrangement
within the trunking for
max. 2 sheathed cables
5 x 2.5 mm2 or approx.
25 individual conductors.
1538/58W
Cable holders 07690 LHI
to be ordered separately 2000
for this purpose.
wiring arrangement on the
trunking upper plane with
cable holders 07690 LHA
to be ordered separately
(see page 375).
07690 TL 07690 VK 07690 LHI
Counter-balance weights
for luminaires to suspended
trunkings
Counter-bal-
Series lance weight
1510/136 05000 A1
1510/136 E 05000 A4 07690 E-T 07690 B/ 07690/5LV/25m
1510/158 05000 A1
1510/158 E 05000 A4
1510/236 2x 05000 A4 Luminaire fixing device Connection terminal Internal cable holder
1510/236 E 05000 A4 07690 TL 07690 VK 07690 LHI
1510/258 2x 05000 A1 1 pair, sheet steel, galvanised, 4-pole, with earth connection 10 pieces, for approx. 4.5 m
1510/258 E 05000 A1 for mounting of luminaires, terminal for mains supply and trunking length, plastic,
333 03331 TRS* to be positioned within the further wiring for wires up for max. 25 individual wires
5001/36 05000 A10** trunking at will. to 2.5 mm2. Earth connection 2.5 mm2, to be snapped into
5001/58 05000 A11** Not for 333 (see page 273). of the trunking is effected the trunking without tools.
5001/E 05000 A12** automatically.
5002/E 05000 A12** End cap 07690 E-T Through-wiring set
5041 05000 A19 1 piece, plastic, white, with Blanking cover 07690/5LV/25m
* Trunking fixing including counter-balance two knock-out openings, to 07690 B/36, 07690 B/58 5 colour-coded, intertwined,
weight, see page 273. be snapped into the trunking Plastic extrusion 1230 mm heat-resistant individual
** Additional distance plates 05000 DS
are necessary for fixing the luminaires, front planes. 2 pieces of or 1530 mm long, white, can wires 1.5 mm2, 25 m long.
see page 209. end caps are required per be easily shortened on site.
continuous line.
426
Trunking units with nodes
The combinations of trunking
units and nodes offer addi-
tional scope for planning and
realisation of lighting installa-
60 tions. Continuously adjustable
angles and cross points with
up to four connections create
300
the conditions for optimally
adjusted geometries. Stylish
geometrical arrangements
offer interior design perspec-
Node with wire Node with pendant Ceiling node A 03 D Node adapter tives.
suspension A 03 S suspension A 03 P 1 piece, for up to four con- 07690 KA/7LV
1 piece, consisting of: 1 piece, consisting of: nections, angles continuously 1 piece, for the connection
1 node for up to four con- 1 node for up to four con- adjustable between 60 and of nodes A 03 with
nections, angles continu- nections, angles continu- 300. Die-cast aluminium, trunkings 07690, con-
ously adjustable between ously adjustable between white. sisting of:
60 and 300, die-cast 60 and 300, die-cast 1 adapter profile, white
aluminium, white, aluminium, white, Ordering example: sheet steel, with integrated
1 steel wire, 2.0 mm, 1 steel pendant rod, X-shaped node with 4 con- adapter element made of
galvanised, 1500 mm 13 mm, with vernier clip nections: die-cast aluminium, white,
long, length continuously for height compensation of 1 ceiling node A 03 D, 1 stable inner coupling,
adjustable without using up to 20 mm, 1500 mm 4 adapters 07690 KA/7LV. sheet steel, galvanised,
tools, long, to be shortened on 1 blanking cover, plastic
1 ceiling fixing unit, with site threading not extrusion, white,
threaded cap. required. 1 through-wiring set
1 plastic ceiling trim cap, 7 x 1.5 mm2.
white.
500
x. 1
ma
500
x. 2
ma
Vernier clip for more Ceiling rose 05900 A* When mounting more than Spacings between fixings Suspension accessories
flexibility (not illustrated) 1 piece, for two node adapters, the for suspended mounting Continuous grooves in the
The stainless steel vernier clip the connection of the mains spacing between fixings is with nodes inclined upper planes of the
of the pendant suspension can cable in case of ceiling out- reduced to max. 1500 mm. The maximum suspension trunkings enable the tool-free
be removed or re-attached lets. spacings according to the attachment of stainless steel
without tools, allowing Feeding tube* drafts above are to be clamps of suspension or
easy adaptation to reduced Ceiling rose 05900 AN* 1 piece, plastic, white, observed for nodes with wire ceiling fixing accessories at
suspension lengths. 1 piece, for the connection 10 mm, to be shortened or pendant suspensions. The will (suspension accessories
of the mains cable in case of on site. To guide and cover maximum spacing between see page 379).
ceiling outlets. Suitable to the mains cable. fixings for nodes with one
receive the ceiling fixing unit 05000 ZR 1 m long, or two connections is max.
of A 03 S. 05000 ZR/2m 2 m long, 2500 mm.
in combination with A 03 S.
427
Emergency lighting
Emergency lighting
Safety lighting in accordance with EN 1838 Stand-by lighting

Safety lighting Anti-panic lighting Safety lighting to continue the vital
for escape routes for workplaces activities
with special risk
Emergency lighting takes EN 1838 requires a minimum Anti-panic lighting is required Safety lighting for workplaces Stand-by lighting takes over
over in the event of mains safety lighting illuminance of to avoid disturbance in case with special risk must be the tasks of the general arti-
failure of the general artificial 1 lx along the centre axis of the failure of artificial provided to enable necessary ficial lighting as a substitute
lighting. It has to ensure that on the floor. The centre line lighting, thus assuring a safe tasks to be completed with- for the essentially unaltered
activities can be ended with- of the escape route (not less arrival of the escape routes. out hazards, thus observing continuation of the vital activ-
out risk and working facilities than half the route width) Apart from 0.5 m wide mar- the safety of the present ities.
can be left safely. Emer- has to be illuminated with ginal zones, the minimum persons and the service per-
gency lighting is divided into at least 50 % of this value. horizontal illuminance of 0.5 lx sonnel. If stand-by lighting is arranged
stand-by lighting and safety The relation of the highest on the free floor surface is for organisational reasons
lighting. The safety lighting is to the lowest illuminance on required. In all other aspects In order to limit the physio- instead of safety reasons
further divided into Safety the centre line of the escape the same requirements as to logical glare, maximum lumi- (e.g. to prevent lost produc-
lighting for escape routes, route may not exceed 40 : 1. horizontal escape routes nous intensities depending tion) the minimum general
Anti-panic lighting and TRILUX emergency light apply. on the light point height h illuminance must be observed.
Safety lighting for work- inserts in luminaires for work- are required, e.g. 3200 cd
places with special risks. ing facilities surely observe for 2.5 m h < 3.0 m. If stand-by lighting would
the required limits of the take over tasks of the emer-
physiological glare. gency lighting, the require-
ments described in EN 1838
must be met.
General requirements as Requirements Minimum Switching period Emergency power source Illumination of
to the safety power supply illuminance Nominal op- Admissible escape signs
erating time alternatives1)
installation
Fundamental requirements as Meeting rooms 1 lx max. 1 s 3h Permanent
Business rooms switching
to the safety power supply Exhibition rooms
installation of the safety
lighting are described in the Meeting rooms with 1 lx max. 1 s 3h Single batteries Permanent
max. 20 safety switching
table opposite. luminaires
The information is based Emergency power generator switching
on EN 1838 and
DIN VDE 0108 part 1. Escape routes in 1 lx 50 % of required 1h Single batteries Permanent
working facilities illuminance in 5 s, Emergency power generator switching
100 % in 60 s Specially safeguarded mains not necessary
Anti-panic- 0.5 lx 50 % of required 1h No information No information
lighting2) illuminance in 5 s,
100 % in 60 s
Workplaces with min. 0.1 Em3) max. 0.5 s Time of Single batteries Permanent
special risk min. 15 lx risk Specially safeguarded mains switching
not necessary
1)
2)
...in order to reach a point where an escape route can be clearly recognised.
3)
Emergency light units Emergency light Louvre Diffuser Rapid-mounting, WINLIGHT Q

Each TRILUX emergency unit units for luminaires luminaires continuous-line systems DELTA and E-LINE
is adjusted to its field of appli- Reference Plug-in Single-battery Emmergency Gear tray Gear tray Gear tray E27 Screwed
cation in accordance with socket system light inserts E14 EB UR socket
DIN VDE 0108 and EN 1838. 545/E14 545/2G7 EB 67, 68 684/1
Description Page 429 Page 429 Page 430 Page 364, 410 Page 365, 411 Page 365, 411 Page 423
Emergency light gear trays for Switching type Stand-by Stand-by Stand-by Stand-by Permanent Permanent Stand-by
DELTA and/or E-LINE are des- or permanent switching or permanent or permanent switching switching or permanent
cribed on pages 364 and 410, switching switching switching switching
emergency light inserts for Escape routes * *
WINLIGHT Q on page 423. Anti-panic lighting * *
Emergency light units for
Workplaces with
recess mounting in louvre and special risk

diffuser luminaires are explained
Stand-by lighting
on the following pages.
*Uniformity of illuminances has to be observed.
428
Emergency components
for louvre luminaires
Plug-in sockets for Single battery systems

tubular lamps E14/25 W for compact fluorescent lamps TC-EL 11 W
Plug-in socket 545/E14 Single battery systems 545/2G7 With 2-pole connection terminal for
for permanent and stand-by switching, for stand-by switching, consisting of one wires up to 2.5 mm2 for the connection
consisting of a socket E14, charac- socket 2G7 for compact fluorescent of the charging circuit.
terised by a green dot, for tubular lamps TC-EL 11 W. Including stainless EB1
incandescent lamps or compact fluo- steel clamps for attachment to louvre with gear tray for recess mounting in
rescent lamps with integrated elec- lateral reflectors, single supply unit with surface-mounted or suspended louvre
tronic control gear. Lamp rating max. sealed high-temperature nickel-cadmi- luminaires according to selection table.
25 W, lamp diameter max. 30 mm. um accumulators and connection wiring EB2
Including stainless steel clamps for with plug-in coupling. Nominal operation with housing to be installed outside, for
attachment to louvre lateral reflectors, time 3 hours. Transit time < 0.5 s. recessed louvre luminaires according
2-pole connection terminal for wires Integrated LED in socket as indication to selection table.
up to 2.5 mm2 on self-adhesive clamp for charging.
support and connection wiring with Photometric data are documented in
plug-in coupling. the Isolux curve diagram 3.
Photometric data are documented in

the Isolux curve diagrams 1 and 2.
Recessed Surface-mounted and suspended Selection table

louvre luminaires louvre luminaires Emergency light inserts
for louvre luminaires
Luminaire Insert Insert Luminaire Insert Insert
number E14 EB number E14 EB
1361R 545/E14 545/2G7 EB2 1522 545/E14 545/2G7 EB1

2360R 545/E14 545/2G7 EB2 1523 545/E14 545/2G7 EB1
3662 R 545/E14 545/2G7 EB2
3663 RST 545/E14 545/2G7 EB2 1510 545/E14 545/2G7 EB1
722.SB 545/E14 545/2G7 EB2 5062 R 545/E14 545/2G7 EB1

723.SB 545/E14 545/2G7 EB2 5063 R 545/E14 545/2G7 EB1
Isolux curve diagram1 Isolux curve diagram2 Isolux curve diagram3 Explanation of Isolux
545/E14 545/E14 545/2G7... curve diagrams
Tubular lamp 25 W, Tubular lamp 25 W, Compact fluorescent Illuminances for safety light-
165 lm 165 lm lamp TC-EL 11 W,
120 lm
ing are documented in the
Light point height Light point height Light point height Isolux curves opposite. They
2.5 m 5.5 m 2.5 m refer to a level on the floor
3.0 m 7.0 m 3.0 m and a light loss factor of
5 5 5 0.8. Indirect portions are not
4 4 4 taken into consideration.
Eh = 0.5 lx
3 3 3
2 Eh = 0.5 lx 2 1 lx 2 Eh = 0.5 lx
1 lx 1 lx
1 1 1
m 1 2 3 4 5 m 1 2 3 4 5 m 1 2 3 4 5
429
Emergency components
for diffuser luminaires
Emergency light inserts

67, 68
Many TRILUX diffuser lumi-
naires for dry and wet envi-
ronments can be equipped
with special E14 emergency
light sockets. Both incandes-
cent lamps and compact
fluorescent lamps with inte-
grated electronic control gear
can serve as light source.
Easy installation and retro-

fitting on site of emergency
light inserts in diffuser
luminaires is possible by
means of screw connection. Emergency light inserts 67, 68 676/1 Emergency light socket E14, 682/1 Emergency light socket E14,
for permanent and stand-by switching, for tubular lamp 25 W. for tubular lamp 25 W.
consisting of socket E14, charac-
terised by a green dot, for tubular 677/1 Emergency light socket E14, 683/1 Emergency light socket E14,
incandescent lamps, lamp rating max. for tubular lamp 25 W. for tubular lamp 25 W.
25 W, lamp diameter max. 30 mm.
With 2-pole connection terminal for 678/1, 678/2 Emergency light socket 688/1, 688/2 Emergency light socket
wires up to 2.5 mm2, including fixing E14, for tubular lamp 25 W. E14, for tubular lamp 25 W.
material and accessories for cable
feeding in conformance with the degree 679/1 Emergency light socket E14, 545/E14 Emergency light socket E14,
of protection (not required for 677/1 for tubular lamp 25 W. for tubular lamp 25 W, (see page 429).
and 682/1), version in safety class II.
The complete references of the emer- 680/1 Emergency light socket E14,
gency light inserts, depending on the for tubular lamp 25 W.
respective luminaire, are featured in the
selection table opposite.
Selection table Surface-mounted Surface-mounted Recessed

Emergency light inserts diffuser luminaires diffuser luminaires diffuser luminaires
for diffuser luminaires
Luminaire Insert Isolux curve Luminaire Insert Isolux curve Luminaire Insert Isolux curve
The arrangement of the number E14 diagram number E14 diagram number E14 diagram
emergency light inserts to
the diffuser luminaires is 3302/1x 678/1 5 7402N4) 682/1 5 4401 F 676/1 6
documented in the selection 3302 PS/1x1) 678/1 7 7403N/2x 682/1 5 4401 PF 676/1 8
table opposite. 3302 PS/1x2) 678/2 7 7403N/TC11 676/1 5
3302 PSA/1x58 678/1 7 7202 676/1 7
The corresponding illlumances 3302 PSA/1x2) 678/2 7 7481/TCD13 ind. 683/1 5 7202 PS/1x36 545/E14 7
are featured in the Isolux 33023) 676/1 5 7481/TCD18 ind. 683/1 5 7204 676/1 7
curve diagrams below. 3302 P3) 676/1 7 7482/TCL18 ind. 683/1 5 7212 676/1 7
3304 676/1 5 7483/2xTCL24 ind. 683/1 5 7212 PS/1x36 545/E14 7
3304 P 676/1 7 7483/2xTCL24 E 683/1 5 7214 676/1 7
3313 676/1 5 7483/1xTR40 E 683/1 5 7302 P 676/1 7
3313 P 676/1 7
3323 C 676/1 5 7392 P3) 680/1 7
3323 C-P 676/1 7 7392 PS/1x 679/1 7
1)
For T8 lamps.
2)
For T5 lamps.
3)
Not for TC 11 W or TC 18 W.
4)
Not for TR lamps.
Isolux curve diagram5 Isolux curve diagram6 Isolux curve diagram7 Isolux curve diagram8 Explanation of Isolux
curve diagrams
Tubular lamp 25 W, Tubular lamp 25 W, Tubular lamp 25 W, Tubular lamp 25 W, The horizontal illumanances
165 lm 165 lm 165 lm 165 lm
refer to a level on the floor
Light point height Light point height Light point height Light point height and a light loss factor of
2.5 m 2.5 m 2.5 m 2.5 m 0.8. Indirect portions are not
3.0 m 3.0 m 3.0 m 3.0 m taken into consideration.
5 5 5 5
4 4 4 4
3 3 3 3
Eh = 0.5 lx Eh = 0.5 lx
2 2 Eh = 0.5 lx 2 1 lx 2
1 lx Eh = 0.5 lx
1 1 1 1 1 lx
1 lx
m 1 2 3 4 5 m 1 2 3 4 5 m 1 2 3 4 5 m 1 2 3 4 5
430
LIGHTGATE
Intelligent lighting management
Energy saving and comfort

The TRILUX lighting manage-
ment system LIGHTGATE
offers equally comfortable
manual light control by means
of push-buttons to be installed
on site or radio remote con-
trol, perfectly adapted to in-
dividual lighting requirements.
It also provides energy-saving
automatic light regulation
with adjustable set values.
These functions are realised
by:
a controller that, as an
option, can be pre-mounted
in many TRILUX luminaires
or alternatively remote-
mounted, e.g. in a junction
box
a sensor unit for light
measurement, presence
detection and reception of
radio control commands.
In addition to integration
in many TRILUX louvre
luminaires, this unit can
be recessed or surface-
mounted using the corre-
sponding fixing acces-
sories.
LIGHTGATE consists of three

components:
Controller and sensor
Radio remote control
(optional)
Ceiling recess or ceiling
surface mounting acces-
sories for sensor (only
necessary when not inte-
grated into the louvre).
Additional mounting acces-

sories may be necessary,
depending on the mounting
type (e.g. data cable for
remotely mounted sensor
unit, feeding accessories for
suspended luminaires etc.).
LIGHTGATE 1 LIGHTGATE 2 LIGHTGATE 3
System solution for manual light System solution for daylight- System solution for daylight-
control dependent light regulation and dependent light regulation and
LIGHTGATE 1 is available as a version manual dimming functions manual light level control
without sensor unit, exclusively for bright- LIGHTGATE 2 offers automatic light LIGHTGATE 3 offers the same regulation
ness control by means of customary regulation with optional switch-off function as LIGHTGATE 2, however,
push-buttons for dimming, activating function in case of sufficient daylight for three set value levels, to be chosen
up to two light levels and switching the and optional reignition function in case individually.
lighting installation on and of. the lighting falls short of the set illumi-
nance. Instead of allowing continuous dimming
In combination with sensor, LIGHTGATE 1 in manual mode, LIGHTGATE 3 offers
also allows to control dimmable lighting The manual, daylight-independent the possibility to activate, by means
installations by means of radio remote brightness control can be realised by of customary push-buttons or radio
control (accessories). A presence de- means of customary push-buttons or remote control (accessories), three The brochure LIGHTGATE
tection (which can be switched off) is by means of a radio remote control daylight-independent light levels, to be Intelligent Light Management
also integrated. (accessories). The system automatically chosen individually. The return to regu- offers more detailed informa-
turns from manual mode to regulation lation mode is effected automatically. tion as to function and planning,
mode after one hour. available upon request.
431
LIGHTGATE Three systems for
intelligent lighting management
Wiring scheme
LIGHTGATE has been con-
ceived for use in lighting Controller Data line
Mains voltage supply 4-conductor, RJ11 connectors
installations equipped with
230 V/50 Hz at both ends. Included in mounting
dimmable electronic control accessories 0RM and 0SM.
gear.
The functions:
manual light control,
automatic daylight-
dependent control,
presence-dependent
switching of the lighting
installation.
Switching output L
The LIGHTGATE controller Mains Switched phase of connected
transforms the pilot signals switch luminaires. Switching capacity
from the connected control max. 1000 VA.
keys and sensors into Control output +/ Push-button entries 1...5
switching and dimming 1-10 V interface to control for the connection of up to
signals for the lighting instal- dimmable HF gear (ED). Current five standard push-buttons.
lations. Each push button is carrying capacity max. 50 mA, Line length max. 50 m.
connected according to the for mains-voltage-stable line. Protective low voltage (SELV).
selected function.
LIGHTGATE systems LIGHTGATE Reference Sensor Push-button

The various LIGHTGATE systems Included components functions functions
versions offer practice-
T1 - Light level 1
oriented solutions for the LIGHTGATE 1 LG 11/000 T2 - Light level 2
most differing applications. Manual light control Controller T3 - Dim up
5 T4 - Dim down
LIGHTGATE 1 is intended without sensor unit T5 - OFF
solely as a manual control
unit for lighting installations LG 11/RP0* T1 - Light level 1
and can be additionally Controller T2 - Light level 2
T3 - Dim up
equipped with a presence Sensor unit with receiver element 5 T4 - Dim down
detector and a receiver and presence detector T5 - OFF
for radio remote control.

LIGHTGATE 2 and 3 offer
the automatic functions of LIGHTGATE 2 LG 21/RPL*
a daylight-dependent light Daylight-dependent Controller T1 - ON/OFF
control and a presence light control Sensor unit with light sensor, T2 - Dim up
T3 - Dim down
detection. LIGHTGATE 2 + receiver element and presence 5 T4 - AUTO /MAN
Manual dimming detector T5 - OFF
and 3 differ in manual mode
possibilities by means of the functions
wall push-button. Parallel
controlling by means of an
additional radio remote con- LIGHTGATE 3 LG 31/RPL*
trol is optionally available. Daylight-dependent Controller
T1 - Light level 1
light control Sensor unit with light sensor, T2 - Light level 2
+ receiver element and presence 5
T3 - Light level 3
T4 - AUTO / MAN
Manual light detector T5 - OFF
level control
* Surface-mounting accessory OSM or recess-mounting accessory ORM to be ordered separately.
Integration in Pre-installation of LIGHTGATE components

TRILUX luminaires in TRILUX luminaires with dimmable electronic control gear (ED)
The luminaire series featured Luminaire Reference suffix for pre-installation of
in the table opposite are series controller: controller + sensor:
available with pre-installed + LG 21/RPL* + LG 21/RPL+0LM Restrictions Ordering example
controllers or controllers and T200 Only for louvre luminaires 5931, 5931ED+LG21/RPL+0LM
sensor units. When placing 594154, 594180
an order, please indicate the 362 Not for 3622/TC11 3621ED+LG21/RPL+0LM
corresponding suffixes. For 368/369 3681ED+LG21/RPL+0LM
other series please consult
500 Not for 5002/TC18 5001ED+LG21/RPL+0LM
your local TRILUX support
centre. 504 1) 1)
Not for versions T 5041ED+LG21/RPL+0LM
505 Not for versions TS 5051ED+LG21/RPL+0LM
526 + 05261 DBS 5261ED+LG21/RPL
526 + 05000 SN Only non-interrupted continuous line 5261ED+LG21/RPL+0LM
598/599 5981ED+LG21/RPL
333 Not for /14 E, /24 E 3331ED+LG21/RPL
* Sensor unit is separately enclosed for mounting outside the luminaire. Surface-mounted accessory 0SM or recess-mounting accessory 0RM to be ordered separately.
432
Installation example: Installation example:
Individual suspended luminaires with Continuous-line surface-
LG 21/RPL+0LM, sensor integrated mounted luminaires with
in master luminaire LG 21/RPL, sensor remote from the luminaire
Sensor unit
Sensor
5 6 5 5
6 6
Push-buttons Mains supply cable Mains supply cable Push-buttons

T1 up to T5 230 V/50 Hz 230 V/50 Hz T1 up to T5
Wiring scheme of master luminaire Wiring scheme of master luminaire

Further luminaires Mains supply cable Line to push-buttons Mains supply cable Line to push-buttons
H05VV-U3G1.5 230 V/50 Hz e.g. J-Y(St)Y3x2x0.6 230 V/50 Hz e.g. J-Y(St)Y3x2x0.6
H05VV-U3G1.5 H05VV-U3G1.5
5 6 6
Data line 0L
to sensor
6 x H05V2-U1.5
1 Presence detector Further 5 5 Further

2 Radio receiver aerial luminaires luminaires
3 Light sensor 1 2 3
Dimmable HF gear (ED) Controller Sensor Dimmable HF gear (ED) Controller Sensor

Function description 6 suspended luminaires with LG 21/RPL+OLM 6 surface-mounted luminaires with LG 21/RPL
sensor integrated in master luminaire sensor remote from the luminaire
Two adjustable light levels
Manual dimming 1. Luminaires ..........................5 x 5991N RPX/35 ED 1. Luminaires ...........................5 x 3331 W-TS/35 ED
2. Master luminaire with controller 2. Master luminaire with
and integrated sensor..........1 x 5991N RPX/35 ED controller .............................1 x 3331 W-TS/35 ED
Two adjustable light levels + LG 21/RPL+OLM + LG 21/RPL
Manual dimming 3. Wire suspensions ...........................11 x 05000 SN 3. Ceiling surface-mounting box with
Prepared for radio remote control 4. Wire suspension with data line 5 m ............................................1 x 0SM
Presence-dependent switching feeding tube 13 mm ..................1 x 05000 S-LG 4. Luminaire couplings.........................4 x 03331 W-L
5. Feeding tubes 10 mm ...................6 x 05000 ZR
6. Feeding accessories ....................7 x 05000 ESBN 3331 luminaires are through-wired by means of
AUTOMATIC and MANUAL mode cables to be provided by the contractor
Daylight-dependent light control in Cables according to the layout wiring diagram are to (e.g. HO5VV-U3G1.5).
AUTOMATIC mode be provided by the contractor.
Dimming in MANUAL mode
Prepared for radio remote control
Presence-dependent switching
AUTOMATIC and MANUAL mode

Daylight-dependent light control in
AUTOMATIC mode
3 light level set values (AUTOMATIC)
3 light level constant values (MANUAL)
Prepared for radio remote control
Presence-dependent switching
Mounting references for Accessories for LIGHTGATE lighting management

special applications
Ceiling recess-mounting set Radio remote control Protection device 0BS
0RM RC 200-02 For mechanical protection of sen-
Sports hall luminaires For remote mounting of sensor For operation and control of sor unit, e.g. in sports halls.
Controllers are preferably mounted in distribution unit, plastic, white, 120 mm, LIGHTGATE systems (except
boxes, remote from the luminaires, sensors in with 3 sheet steel springs for for LG11/000). With addressing Wire suspension (not illustrated)
combination with accessories 0SM or 0RM and safe retention in recess opening for interference-free parallel For suspended luminaires with
protection device 0BS are mounted to the ceiling. ( 100 mm), plate thickness up to operation. Transmitter frequency: LIGHTGATE controllers. Ceiling
The LG 31/RPL system is recommended for use 25 mm, recess depth 44 mm; approx. 433 MHz, effective canopy, white plastic material.
in sports halls. and data line 5 m to connect the radius up to 20 m. Feeding tube with increased cross-
sensor unit to the controller. section, 13 mm, to receive the
DELTA, E-LINE Data line (not illustrated) mains supply and further wiring.
Surface-mounting set 0SM 4-conductor line with irreversible 05000 S-LG 1000 mm,
Controllers are preferably mounted in distribution
boxes, remote from the luminaires, sensors in
As 0RM, but with additional ceiling RJ11 connectors. For the connec- 05000 S-LG/2m 2000 mm.
combination with accessories 0SM or 0RM and surface-mounting box, plastic, tion of controller and sensor unit.
protection device 0BS are mounted to the ceiling. white, with fixing holes and cable OL 10 10 m long,
entries. OL 20 20 m long.
433
Lighting controller LR 803
Lighting controller LR 803 Reference Designation

The lighting controller LR 803 LR 803 Electronic lighting controller including light-measuring sensor
helps to reduce the energy
costs in rooms with windows
or light domes considerably.
Depending on the daylight,
up to three luminaire groups
can be switched on and off.
The LR 803 system consists
of a lighting controller and a
light-measuring sensor.
The lighting controller is a

high-quality compact device.
It has three independent
separate outputs, which
enables three groups of
luminaires to be switched on
and off automatically depend-
ing on the daylight. The
maximum rated current is
10 A per output, the corre-
sponding number of tubular
fluorescent lamps can be
found in the table. The num-
ber of fluorescent lamps
can be correspondingly
increased by using controller
outputs to operate contrac-
tors.
Lighting controller Light-measuring sensor Application example

The control points for the The light-measuring sensor Three luminaire groups A, B
luminaire groups A, B and C comprises a light sensor with and C are installed in a room
can be adjusted on poten- terminal block and a box (see adjacent sketch). The
tiometers. To facilitate set- with grommet. It is mounted controller is switched out in
ting the control points, a LED so that only daylight insofar switch position manual, and
is assigned to each of the as it effects the lighting levels the groups of luminaires can
three potentiometers which in the room reaches the be switched on and off in the
shows the switching state sensor and measures day- usual way by the switches
that the device has initiated, light illuminances between S1, S2, S3 in the room.
ignoring the time delay. 100 and 10 000 lx. The wiring After closing switches S1,
between the sensor and the S2 and S3, and switching
The delay on the switching controller is by commercial- the controller to automatic
commands for the luminaire quality cable. The high level operation, the luminaire
circuits can be set to meet of interference suppression groups are switched on and
the particular requirements of the device makes it pos- off automatically, according
(approx. 15 s ...10 min.). sible to use cable lengths up to the daylight.
It is set to 5 minutes at the to 100 m between controller Luminaire group A B C
factory, a time long enough and sensor.
to prevent short-duration
changes in the daylight level
from initiating unnecessary
switching operations.
Daylight-exposed surface
434
Technical information
d label
All luminaires documented in
this catalogue are marked
with the d label which guar-
antees that during abnormal
operation (constant preheat-
ing of the lamp electrodes)
a temperature of 130C at
the fixing area or in case
of defect ballasts (shorted
coil) a temperature of 180C
at the fixing area is not
exceeded.
The TRILUX luminaires fea-

tured in this catalogue are
suitable for mounting on
constructional materials
which retain their shape and
remain stable at tempera-
tures up to 180C (normal
and very low inflammability
according to DIN 4102-1).

TRILUX support centre if
TRILUX luminaires should be
sheathed with heat-insulating
materials.
o label
Operating conditions Special operating 6 label 4 label dd label
All TRILUX interior luminaires conditions All luminaires documented in All luminaires documented in The design of D or FF marked
are supplied ready for con- In case of deviating operating this catalogue in inductive this catalogue are tested luminaires is such that the
nection for a mains voltage of conditions, please contact or parallel-compensated ver- according to EN 55015 and temperature limits must not
230 V + 6 % /-10 % (for low- your local TRILUX support sions as well as luminaires carry the EMV label for radio be exceeded on either the
loss ballasts) or 230 V 10 % centre. Especially in the case equipped with electronic interference suppression horizontal or vertical sur-
(for electronic control gear) of other voltage networks or control gear are marked with from the VDE test board. faces of the luminaire. In
with a nominal frequency of instability in supply, we can the VDE or the ENEC-VDE addition, they prevent the
50 Hz. They are intended if offer a variety of solutions. label. Multi-lamp luminaires equipped lamps against mechanical
not indicated differently for with inductive ballasts are damage and are always
ceiling mounting (in case of This also applies in case of Ball impact resistance of subject to radio interference equipped with electronic
surface-mounted luminaires less favourable operating sports hall luminaires is suppression for single-phase control gear due to the higher
with total installation to even conditions such as special tested and these luminaires connection. When dividing thermal safety requirements.
fixing surfaces). chemical or physical influ- are correspondingly marked the lamp circuits for series D or FF labelled TRILUX lumi-
ences, e.g. humidity, salt with the e symbol. switching, an additional radio naires are predestined for
The luminaires are if not mist, alkaline solutions, acids, interference suppression use in areas exposed to fire
indicated differently planned softeners, gases, maritime TRILUX luminaires are tested capacitor must be installed on hazards caused by dust and
for the exclusive use in inte- or tropical climates, UV by the VDE test board as site for each further circuit. fibrous substance.
riors with rated ambient tem- radiation, constant or short neutral institute according to Radio interference suppres-
peratures of + 25C. vibrations, cleaning methods, EN 60598 (VDE 0711) and sion capacitors are to be
etc. carry the VDE or ENEC label. connected between conduc-
Appropriate mounting in In addition, the production is tor and neutral conductor.
accordance with the mount- supervised by VDE inspectors
ing instructions is required in who take samples at random
order to observe the assured for further examination.
characteristics.
435
Multi-lamp electronic control gear
Added value in T5 systems
Multi-Lamp technology Standard high technology Tangible advantages

First ignition of Electronic control gear units Luminaires for T5 fluores- Electronic control gear
the luminaire in Multi-Lamp technology cent lamps with a reduced units allow operation of
represent a new era in the diameter of only 16 mm T5 lamps in different
Start of identification routine further development of elec- stand for particular user wattages
tronic control gear for fluo- advantages: Illuminances are variable
rescent lamps. Independent Highly-efficient or lumen-rich in case of changing light
recognition, optimal start T5 lamps can be exchanged requirements without
and standard-conform opera- thanks to the use of elec- exchanging the lamps
tion of different lamps are tronic control gear in Multi- Simplified logistics
the characteristics of the Lamp technology. Warm start of all lamps
system-immanent intelligence <1s
1st identification step of these devices. The innovative louvre and dif- Digital ideal start resulting
During the start phase of the fuser luminaires of the series in increased lamp service
Lamp ignition: fluorescent lamps, the micro- 5261, 504/505 and life independent of the
recognition of processor-controlled elec- 3331 are equipped as stan- switching frequency.
the electrode impedance tronic control gear system dard with Multi-Lamp electro- Voltage life up to 380 V
takes various measurements nic control gear. These se- mains VAC
of the lamp operating param- ries essentially consist of Efficient protection in
eters and compares these only two luminaire bodies case of neutral conductor
with the internationally stand- in module 1200 mm and interferences
ardised lamp data stored 1500 mm. Multi-Lamp tech-
within the micro controller. nology allows the operation
2nd identification step This way, preheating currents, of T5 fluorescent lamps in
electrode voltage and elec- wattages of 28W/54W or
Lamp operation: trode impedance as well as 35W/49W/80W.
recognition of operating current and lamp
the lamp voltage voltage are measured. Once Also other T5 series fea-
the identification process is tured in this catalogue are
over, the operating data of available with Multi-Lamp
the electronic control gear technology. For further infor-
are adapted to the type and mation please contact your
the wattage class of the local TRILUX support centre.
used fluorescent lamps and
3rd identification step they remain stored (see also
flow chart opposite).
Definition of the lamp type and Only a quick test measure-
corresponding operating parameter by ment is conducted during
comparison with stored data the next start phases. The
system recognises the use
of a lamp with differing per-
formance data which leads
to a renewed lamp identifica-
tion process.
Lamp operation in conformance

with standards
Adjustment to standardised operating
data (preheating current and time as
well as stationary lamp current)
5261 504/505 3331

Equipped as standard with Multi-Lamp electronic control gear: 5261, 504/505 and 3331 series.
436
Standard warm-start electronic control gear
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Electronic control gear Electronic control gear rep- 1 Quality 4 Emergency lighting 7 ENEC label
In addition to the series resent modern operating Electronic control gear in Suitable for operation to direct The ENEC label documents
5261, 504/505 and electronics for fluorescent TRILUX luminaires are high- voltage of 220 V in emergency tested safety and methods
3331 which are developed lamps. The practice-oriented quality products of a renowned lighting installations. of working according to
for the exclusive use of elec- advantages electronic con- manufacturer. Developed EN 61347/60929.
tronic control gear in Multi- trol gear units have to offer, and produced according to 5 High power factor
Lamp technology, following create decisive requirements international quality assurance High power factor 0.95, 8 EMC label
series are equipped as stand- as to saving energy, environ- requirements in compliance therefore no additional steps The EMC label (Electro
ard with warm-start elec- mental compatibility, comfort with ISO 9001. for wattless compensation Magnetic Compatibility)
tronic control gear (without and safety: required. confirms the conformity
Multi-Lamp function): Minimal stray power 2 Input voltage with the standards for elec-
T200 according to CELMA Constant luminous flux output 6 Lamp ignition, also in tromagnetic compatibility
DiVisio level A2 within the mains voltage case of low temperatures EN 55015,
DIALOG Little stroboscopic effect, bracket of 230 V - 10 % up to Electronic control gear guar- EN 61000 part 3-2,
CENERA no lamp flickering 240 V + 10 %. antee safe lamp ignition and EN 61547.
362 Flicker-free warm lamp lamp operation according
368, 369 start 3 Mains frequency to the standards for up to
39 High performance factor Suitable for operation in ser- - 20C. Please consult your
compensation capacitors vice band of the mains VAC local TRILUX support centre
Besides, most TRILUX lumi- are therefore not required of 50 to 60 Hz or for direct for further details.
naires are optionally also Safety cut-off in case of voltage.
available with these electronic defect lamp
control gear units. High thermal safety
Unlimited use according
TRILUX luminaires with elec- to EU regulation
tronic control gear are indicat- 2000/55/EG Max. number of electronic control gear per line safety switch
ed with the reference suffix
E at the end of their refer- Digital switching Safety Number of electronic control gear units
ence, e.g. 2360/418 RPV E, technology cutout
luminaires with dimmable Electronic control gear in
electronic control gear with TRILUX luminaires is usually T8, TC, TC-L, TC-DEL, TC-TEL, TC-F T5 T5 -
1 - 10 V interface with the operated with digital switch- MLS
characteristic
reference suffix ED, e.g. ing technology, resulting in a

5-13W 18W 3- & TC 24-55W T8 36-58W 14W 21-35W 49/54W 80W 80W
current A
7691/58 ED. maximum lamp service life of

Nominal
Trigger
15 000 hours for tubular fluo- 1- 2- 1- 2- 4- 1- 2- 1- 2- 1- 2- 3- 1- 2- 1- 2- 1- 1-

Dimmable electronic control rescent lamps, independent lamp lamp lamp lamp lamp lamp lamp lamp lamp lamp lamp lamp lamp lamp lamp lamp lamp lamp
gear with DALI*-interface are of the switching frequency, B 10 18 18 16 10 8 12 8 13 8 19 11 14 17 14 19 8 8 18
available where required. e.g. presence detectors, 16 28 28 25 16 12 19 12 21 12 30 18 19 23 19 30 12 13 28
stairwell switches. Their 20 35 35 31 19 16 23 16 26 16 37 22 23 28 23 37 15 16 34
*DALI: Digital Addressable characteristics are listed in 25 44 44 39 23 20 28 20 32 20 47 28 28 34 28 47 18 20 41
Lighting Interface the following table. C 10 29 29 26 17 13 20 13 22 13 31 19 22 27 22 31 12 13 29
16 48 48 43 27 20 32 20 29 20 51 31 31 38 31 51 20 21 42
20 58 58 52 33 26 39 26 36 26 62 37 37 46 37 62 25 27 52
25 73 73 65 42 32 49 32 54 32 78 47 46 57 46 78 31 33 63
437
Low-loss ballasts
Inductive ballasts 230 V at an ambient temper-

All low-loss ballasts in TRILUX ature of 25C.
luminaires are marked with
the ENEC as well as with the The use of B2 class induc-
EMV label and correspond tive ballasts in combination
to class B2 of the CELMA with TRILUX luminaires is not
system rating classification limited in conformance with
(exception: 1361, 1615 guideline 2000/55/EG by
series with class C ballasts). means of energy efficiency
All ballasts are planned for requirements as to ballasts
an operating voltage of for fluorescent lamps.
Max. number of lamps per line safety switch with conventional or low-loss ballasts
Trigger Nominal current TC-S 9 W TC-D 18 W TL 18 W TL 18 W TL 18 W TC-L 24 W TL 36 W TL 58 W

characteristic TC-S 11 W TC-L 18 W TC-L 18 W TC-L 18 W TC-F 24 W TC-L 36 W
TC-D 13 W Single Tandem in 3-lamp TC-D 26 W TC-F 36 W
switching switching luminaires TC-T 26 W
Inductive lamp switching
10 A 55 42 26 44 36 28 22 14
16 A 88 67 42 70 57 45 35 22
B, C
20 A 110 84 52 88 72 56 44 28
25 A 137 105 65 110 90 70 55 35
Parallel-compensated lamp switching
10 A 71 71 32 64 48 32 32 20
16 A 114 114 51 102 75 51 51 32
B
20 A 144 144 64 128 96 64 64 41
25 A 179 179 79 158 120 79 79 51
10 A 99 99 44 88 66 44 44 27
16 A 159 159 71 142 105 71 71 44
C
20 A 201 201 89 178 132 89 89 56
25 A 250 250 110 220 165 110 110 71
Series-compensated lamp switching (duo or ind./cap.)
10 A 78 88 90 62 44 28
16 A 124 140 144 99 70 46
B, C
20 A 156 176 180 124 88 56
25 A 195 220 225 155 110 72
Line safety switch ambient temperatures the The maximum number of

Apart from the trigger char- load and therefore also the electronic control gear units
acteristic and the rating of number of lamps must be for each line safety switch is
the fluorescent lamps, the reduced by 5 % for each 10C. limited because of currents
maximum number of fluores- at make arising at the same
cent lamps for each line In case of several LS switch- time.
safety switch also depends es arranged directly next to
on their switching type. each other and with a high
current load at the same
The table above applies for time, an additional reduction
an ambient temperature of of the load by 25 % is
30C. In case of higher required.
C.E.L.M.A* ballast classification
Ballasts guidelines Lamp Lamp Class Lamp Lamp Class

Ballasts in TRILUX luminaires type rating EVG EVG VVG KVG type rating EVG EVG VVG KVG
are characterised by an indi- dim. dim.
cation for the ballast class 50Hz HF A1 A2 A3 B1 B2 C D 50Hz HF A1 A2 A3 B1 B2 C D
according to the definition T8 15W 13.5W < 9W <16W <18W <21W <23W <25W >25W TC-D/TC-DE 10W 9.5W < 6.5W < 11W <13W <14W <16W <18W >18W
opposite. The ballast guide- 18W 16W <10.5W <19W <21W <24W <26W <28W >28W 13W 12.5W < 8W < 14W <16W <17W <19W <21W >21W
line 2000/55/EG forbids the 36W 32W < 19W <36W <38W <41W <43W <45W >45W 18W 16.5W < 10.5W < 19W <21W <24W <26W <28W >28W
use of ballasts of class D 58W 50W <29.5W <55W <59W <64W <67W <70W >70W 26W 24W < 14.5W < 27W <29W <32W <34W <36W >36W
starting from May 21, 2002.
This catalogue does not TC-L 18W 16W <10.5W <19W <21W <24W <26W <28W >28W TC-T/TC-TE 18W 16.5W < 10.5W < 19W <21W <24W <26W <28W >28W
contain luminaires equipped 24W 22W <13.5W <25W <27W <30W <32W <34W >34W 26W 24W < 14.5W < 27W <29W <32W <34W <36W >36W
with this type of ballast. 36W 32W < 19W <36W <38W <41W <43W <45W >45W 32W < 19.5W < 36W <39W
55W <32.5W <61W <65W 42W < 25W < 46W <49W
TC-F 24W 22W <13,5W <25W <27W <30W <32W <34W >34W
36W 32W < 19W <36W <38W <41W <43W <45W >45W
* Committee Of European Luminaires Manufacturers
EVG: Electronic control gear
VVG: Low-loss ballast
438 KVG: Conventional ballast
Starters
Standard starters Safety starters Electronic starters

Luminaires with inductive Safety starters protect lumi- Electronic starters lead to
ballasts are pre-equipped naire components against reduced start-up times and
with high-quality standard thermal stress by safely in case of regular and
starters (exception: lumi- disconnecting lamps at the short luminaire operation
naires for compact fluores- end of their service life or to increased lamp service life
cent lamps with integrated defect lamps. They avoid thanks to improved ignition.
starter). Tandem switchings disagreeable lamp flickering Recommended in bathing
require special starters. if regular luminaire mainte- areas and sanitary zones.
nance is not guaranteed.
In case of special operating

conditions it can sometimes
be recommended to exchange
pre-equipped standard starters
for safety starters or electron-
ic starters. The starters can
be easily exchanged on site.
Blind current compensation Switching type Series capacitors in case of inductive ballasts
Blind current of luminaires for parallel compensated for fluorescent lamps 230 V/50 Hz*)
the limitation of the current Most TRILUX luminaires (Temperature range -25C up to + 85C)
load of conductors, switches equipped with low-loss bal-
and safety arrangements lasts with a lamp wattage Lamp Series capacitor
should be compensated if exceeding 18 W are available Type Wattage Capacity Nominal volt.
possible. parallel compensated, (LBS)
Blind current compensation offering following advantages Tubular fluorescent lamps
can be realised by means of compared with series capa- LL 18 W 2.7 F 2% 480 V
series or parallel capacitors citors: 2x18 W1) 3.4 F 2% 450 V
as a matter of principle. Par- Energy saving by means of 3x18 W2) 3.4 F 2% 450 V
allel compensation is recom- reduced system current 36 W 3.4 F 2% 450 V
58 W 5.3 F 2% 450 V
mended considering energy No reduced lamp start-up
consumption, lamp service times and lamp service life Compact fluorescent lamps
life and starting behaviour. compared with inductive TC-L 18 W 2.7 F 2% 480 V
24 W 2.7 F 2% 480 V
Luminaires in switching type operation 36 W 3.4 F 2% 450 V
parallel compensated con- Increased service life of
TC-D 26 W 2.5 F 2% 480 V
tain a pre-equipped PCB-free luminaire components
parallel capacitor. Parallel-compensated lumi- TC-T 26 W 2.5 F 2% 480 V
naires must be characterised TC-F 18 W 2.7 F 2% 480 V
by the reference suffix komp. 24 W 2.7 F 2% 480 V
36 W 3.4 F 2% 450 V
Example:
5991 RPR/58 komp. 1)
2x18 W in tandem switching to ballast 36 W
2)
3x18 W in a tandem switching to ballast 36 W + a single switching to ballast 18 W
Switching type inductive Selection of Labels

for installation of series capacitors Series compensation capac-
series capacitors Regarding the nominal cur- itors have to correspond
TRILUX luminaires in switching rent, the capacitance and the with EN 61048, realised as
type inductive with tubular capacity tolerance, series metal bucket and labelled by
fluorescent lamps exceeding compensation capacitors the approved control system
18 W or with compact fluore- must correspond with the such as e.g. BSI, VDE, KEMA,
scent lamps of min. 26 W indications on the ballast. DEMKO, SEV or VE.
are equipped with capacitor They must be thermally sta-
plug-in terminals (exception: bilised for operating condi-
series 719). They enable tions from -25C to + 85C.
the connection of series
compensation capacitors.
439
Photometric planning

The photometric planning of The required number of lumi- No. 0012
lighting installations with naires for general lighting is DIN 5040: A40
TRILUX luminaires can be determined in a flash thanks CIBSE BZ:
easily and rapidly accom- to the general lighting BZ2
plished by means of the cor- data tables. NBN L 14-002:

BZ3
responding photometric data
tables. Depending on the Installation data tables
luminaire type and its appli- document the photometric
cation area, the luminaires effect of task-area luminaires The relevant photometric data table can be easily found
are documented on the prod- and other wall-mounted and thanks to the data table number next to the polar diagram
uct pages of this catalogue free-standing luminaires or below the illustration of the desired luminaire. The actual
by means of different data floodlights in exemplary polar diagram describes the luminous intensity distribution of
table types. applications. the respective luminaires.
Spotlight data tables help

to determine the average
and point illuminances on
illuminated surfaces and
imaginary levels.
Data table no. 0012 General lighting data rendering), the data table respective corresponding 2 Max. luminaire

spacings for
tables indications are based on the multiplication factor from the g1 = Emin : E 1 : 1.5
1 Number of luminaires Transverse spacing centre / centre Xmax = 1.9 h
En 300 lx 500 lx The purpose of the photom- respective higher values. basic data. Longitudinal spacing centre / centre Ymax = 1.5 h
Room height H 2.5 m 3.0 m 2.5 m 3.0 m etric planning by means of the h = Luminaire height above working plane
20 2.9 3.2 4.8 5.4 Example 1
30 4.0 4.4 6.7 7.3 general lighting data tables All further marginal condi- The uniformity of the illumi-
Luminaire ..........................1360/136RWV
Area
40 5.1 5.5 8.5 9.2 is to determine the number tions which have to be con- nance distribution on the
50 6.2 6.7 10 11 Data table number...........................0012
A
60 7.2 7.8 12 13
of luminaires required for a sidered for calculation of the working plane depends on
in m2 Area A............................................90 m2
80 9.4 9.9 16 17 particular area and to check table Number of luminaires Room height H...............................2.5 m
the luminaire spacing and
100 12 12 20 20
150 17 17 28 29
if the given uniformity has are documented in the calcu- Nominal illuminance En ....................500 lx
the luminaire height h above
200 22 23 37 38 been observed. General lation parameter section. Luminous flux per lamp (p. 444) ...3350 lm
the working plane e. The
Calculation parameters lighting data tables are there- Following parameters can be Number of basic luminaires ..................18 maximum admissible longitu-
Reflectance values 0.7 / 0.5 / 0.2 fore divided into four sub- found in the table: Multiplication factor M dinal and transverse spac-
Height of the working plane e 0.85 m tables. Reflectance values for ceil- for luminaire 1360/136RWV .............1.51 ings (from luminaire centre
Suspension length lp 0.00 m ing/walls/floor, Number of luminaires ......18 x 1.51 = 27.2 to luminaire centre) for a uni-
Data table no. 0012 Light loss factor consider- Selected number of luminaires .............28 formity Emin/E of minimum
2 Max. luminaire

spacings for
(adjusted to the structural factors)
g1 = Emin : E 1 : 1.5 ing the ageing and pollution 1: 1.5 are indicated in sub-
En 300 lx 500 lx influences, table 2 I Max. luminaire
Longitudinal spacing centre / centre Ymax = 1.5 h If the luminous flux of the
Room height H 2.5 m 3.0 m 2.5 m 3.0 m Height of the working plane spacings as multiple values
used lamps should deviate
3 Multiplication factor M 4 Photometric The table 1I Number of above the floor and eventu- of the height of the photom-
from the maximum values,
for no. of luminaires characteristics luminaires indicates the ally the suspension length etric point h. The spacings
Reference M LB L the following should also be
required number of lumi- for suspended luminaires. between the luminaires are
direct indirect
observed: the required num-
DLOR ULOR
naires: measured centre-to-centre.
1360/136 RWV 1.51 0.66 0.66 0.00 ber of luminaires are at a
1360/158 RWV 1.00 0.64 0.64 0.00 For the most frequent nom- Please note that the lumen
reverse ratio to the luminous
1361/236 RWV 0.78 0.63 0.63 0.00 inal illuminances (usually output of fluorescent lamps Example 3
1361/258 RWV 0.53 0.60 0.60 0.00 flux.
1361/318 RWV 1.20 0.68 0.68 0.00 300 lx and 500 lx). can differ depending on the Luminaire ...........................1360/136RWV
1361/418 RWV 0.97 0.63 0.63 0.00 For the most frequent control gear, and therefore Room height H...............................2.50 m
2360/236 RWV 0.78 0.63 0.63 0.00 Example 2
2360/258 RWV 0.53 0.60 0.60 0.00 room heights (in case of marginal adjustment of the Height of the working plane e..........0.85 m
Original number of luminaires
2360/318 RWV 1.20 0.68 0.68 0.00 luminaires for offices e.g. calculation can be neces- Suspension length lp ......................0.00 m
2360/418 RWV 0.97 0.63 0.63 0.00 according to the example..................27.2
2.5 m and 3.0 m). sary. Luminaire height above working plane h......
Luminous flux in the table
For room surface areas 2.50 m - 0.85 m - 0.00 m = 1.65 m
Number of luminaires ...............2350 lm
from 20 m2 to 200 m2. 3 Multiplication factor M 4 Photometric Max. transverse
for no. of luminaires characteristics Deviating luminous flux of
spacing.........1.9 h = 1.9 x 1.65 m = 3.14 m
Reference M LB L the intended lamp type ................3250 lm
Max. longitudinal
The number of luminaires direct indirect
Number of luminaires for
DLOR ULOR
spacing .........1.5 h = 1.5 x 1.65 m = 2.48 m
determined must be rounded 1360/136 RWV 1.51 0.66 0.66 0.00 deviating luminous flux
to meet installation require- The values given in the table 27.2 x 3350/2350 = 38.8
ments. The number refers to Number of luminaires refer Selected number of luminaires .............40
the respective luminous flux- directly to the respective
es with the corresponding luminaire with the factor For each luminaire, together
lamps in the lamp table (see 1.00 (basic luminaire) in the with the overall working effi-
page 444-447). In case of subtable 3 I Multiplication ciency, the values of lumi-
different luminous fluxes for factor M for no. of luminous flux in the upper and
lamp types of the same naires. The number of lumi- lower hemisphere are quoted
manufacturer and with the naires for luminaires with in subtable 4 I Photometric
same performance (e.g. vari- deviating equipment can be characteristics.
ants with different colour determined by using the
440
Installation data tables Data table no. 2035 Suspended luminaire for workstation lighting 5302 ADH/80 E
The photometric characteris-
y 0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0 2.5 3.0 3.5 4.0 4.5 5.0
0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0 2.5

Evaluation zone for
tics of luminaires intended for 2-workstation-office
contrast rendering
Room width m 3.40
special application geometries 200
are documented by installa- Room height m 2.70 400
tion data tables. They contain Reflectance values 500
installation-specific geometry Ceiling/walls/floor % 80/ 50/ 30
and lighting data as well as Luminaire 5302 ADH/ 80 E
0
luminaire-specific light data. Lamps W 2 x 80 (T5) 500
2.5 2.0 1.5 1.0 0.5

(desk) lx 576 300
Contrast rendering factor Working plane above Working plane above 200
CRFm 0.95 floor 0.75 m floor 0.75 m
CRFmin 0.91 Illuminance (lx) m x 0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0 2.5 3.0 Illuminance (lx) m 2.0 1.5 1.0 0.5 0 0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0
Installation description dering factor has an average with the relevant standards Isolux curve diagram 2 installed at a distance of
The installation description value of 0.95 and a minimum and regulations. Apart from (right) 3.50 m from each other, the
refers to all luminaires used value of 0.91. the photometric results The Isolux curve diagram on lowest value in the middle
in the specific application, given in the installation the right characterises the between the two luminaires
the installation geometry and Isolux curve diagram 1 description, the Isolux curve luminaire-specific photom- (on a direct perpendicular
its marginal conditions, the (left) diagram clearly illustrates etrics in the empty room. from luminaire centre to
light loss factor and the The example installation the illuminance distribution Mutual influences of lumi- luminaire centre, at a dis-
achieved photometric values. described in the data table on the working or evaluation naires can be considered by tance of 1.75 m from each
In the above example 576 lx is a recommendation for a plane. This example shows (linear) superimposition of of both luminaires) neverthe-
are achieved on the desk and typical and suitable luminaire an illuminance of 500 lx or the corresponding Isolux less still achieves 400 lx.
345 lx in the whole room; application that, among more. curves. If for instance similar
the important contrast ren- other things, fully complies task area luminaires are
Spotlight data tables at a reference angle of 0 Example 1 Example 2

Data table no. 2022
Spotlight data tables contain in order to calculate the illu- Luminaire (page 84) .5951 HO/QT150 For 2.00 m distance, following
Data table no. ...........................2022 applies: in a circle with a diameter of 1 Luminous intensity distribution
information on the distribu- minance for a point that is 1.20 m an average illuminance of 4 000
Distance r..............................2.00 m
tion characteristic and the illuminated in the main trans- 575 lx is achieved. Because the illumi- 3 500
Luminous intensity I (0) ........3500 cd nated surface opposite the perpendi- 3 000
average illuminance in the mission direction. Afterwards,
Angle between the surfaces culars is inclined by 30 towards the 2 500
illuminated area. Besides, the point illuminance can of the illuminated surface light emission direction, the effective 2 000
they enable the calculation be calculated in accordance and angle of incidence .................30 average illuminance is calculated in 1 500
of the point illuminance in a with the Inverse Square Point illuminance E on this way: .....575 lx x cos 30 = 498 lx 1 000
point of the illuminated area. Law (E = I/r2) with I being vertically illuminated (imaginary) 500

surface .3500 cd/(2 m x 2 m) = 875 lx 3 Lamp data
I/cd
the luminous intensity and r -45 -30 -15 0 15 30 45
Point illuminance E on Lamp type
1 Luminous intensity distribution the distance of the spotlight surface inclined by 30 Mains-voltage halogen lamp 230 V 2 Cone diagram, beam angle 33
4 000 to the illuminated point. (effective) ...875 lx x cos 30 = 758 lx with semi-specular bulb
3 500 Socket /m 0.30
3 000
If this point is located on a E 27 0.60
9 200
2 300
2 500 surface whose perpendicular 2 Cone diagram, beam angle 33 Apart from the LBS and 0.90
1 000
1.20
The diagram 1I Luminous (standard surface) includes /m 0.30
9 200 ILCOS classification for the 1.50
575
0.60 375
intensity distribution repres- an angle bigger than 0 with 0.90
2 300 clear marking of the usable 1.80
250
1 000
ents an axial section through the connection line to the 1.20
575
lamps, the table 3 I Lamp
a rotationally symmetrical spotlight, the determined The beam angle indicated in data also features the multi-
Illuminance
luminous intensity distribu- illuminance has to be multi- the heading is the aperture plication factors for deviat-
Em / lx
tion body. It is important to plied with the cosine of this (twice the corresponding ing equipments in order to
check the luminous intensity angle. beam angle) for which the determine the valid values 0 0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0 2.5 3.0 Spacing h/m
luminous intensity reaches for the selected lamp types. 3 Lamp data
half the maximum luminous The factors are to be applied Lamp type
(circle) = 1.2 m
Virtual surface
angle 33
Angle of
incidence
Standard surface
of real surface
Real surface
Beam
(ellipse)
intensity. In this example to all basic data. Mains-voltage halogen lamp 230 V
the beam angle is 33. Fur- Socket
Example 3
thermore the average illumi- E 27
Equipment ........................................100 W Lamp designation Luminous Multipl.
nances are documented on a flux / lm factor
LBS ................................QT32 100W/mE27
vertically illuminated surface LBS QT32 150W/m E27
2400 1.00
Luminous flux ................................1430 lm ILCOS HEGT/F/UB-150-320-E27
which is cut out of the illumi- Multiplication factor .............................0.60 LBS QT32 100W/m E27
1430 0.60
nated surface by a cone with Point illuminance on the
LBS QT32 75W/m E27
the beam angle as aperture. surface inclined by 30 ILCOS HEGT/F/UB-75-320-E27
1050 0.44
This value and the corre- (example 1) ...............758 lx x 0.60 = 455 lx LBS QT32 60W/m E27
780 0.33
sponding surface diameter is Average illuminance on the
indicated for several distance inclined surface within
the beam angle
r = 2.0
2,0 m parameters. (33, example 2)........498 lx x 0.60 = 299 lx
Point Attention:
illumi- 30 All data in the spotlight data tables are as-
nance E new values (v = 1), a light loss factor is, if
required, to apply in addition to all calcula-
tion results.
30
441
Computer-assisted lighting planning
Computer-assisted plannings on PC For these purposes several computer programs with different characteristics and
basis allow the planner to make object- specifications can be obtained.
specific calculations on site with high
accuracy. Thus important characteristic TX-WIN Generic software
values of a lighting installation can be TX-WIN is the easy-to-operate computer Beyond that, TRILUX also offers
determined, e.g. point illuminances, program TRILUX developed for rapid photometric data in different formats
average illuminances and illuminance planning. for market-common lighting calculation
uniformities. Furthermore luminance software.
distributions on surfaces in the room DIALux
can be calculated and visualised. DIALux in version 2.5 is the new light Special application programs
planning program developed by the Useful tools which facilitate the daily
German Institute for Applied Photom- planning work are also available for
etrics (DIAL). sub-scenes of the lighting planning.
Exact lighting calculation TX-WIN The luminaires can be arranged in

helps to minimise the energy The rapid-planning program TX-WIN is the room according to a suggestion
consumption and increase based on a TRILUX-specific software based on the working efficiency pro-
the environmental compatibil- development. It runs within a har- cedure in a uniform table with param-
ity of the lighting installation monised WINDOWS environment, is eterised characteristic data. But each
because only projection pro- self-explanatory and perfectly suitable luminaire can also be individually
cedures which consider the for a lighting planning with detailed arranged. Circular arrangements are
individual data, the lighting results thanks to its user-friendly possible as well and luminaire rows
installation as well as the overview. can be positioned as a line or a raster.
specific ambient characteris-
tics offer optimised values The output parameters of TX-WIN
for the required number of can be freely configured so that the
lamps and luminaires. most important results presented in User-friendliness is guaranteed by a
tables or graphics turn the planning so-called rapid track as well as by
documents into a convincing docu- various planning assistants according
ment. to the modern WINDOWS programs.
Stored information regarding program
applications and photometrics can be
reviewed at any time thanks to the
extensive online assistance. This
software also includes a photometric
lexicon.
The program operation is mainly
supported and facilitated by the fact Generic software
that all the necessary working steps Also other programs similar to the
can be sequentially accomplished or above-described software refer to
in individual order. In doing so, the standardised and quasi-standardised
user is constantly informed in the main data formats whereby the photometric
input screen about the information characteristic data of luminaires are
he has already entered or still has to DIALux registered and brought into computer-
give in. DIALux does not only represent a assisted plannings.
light planning program, but it is also
a project of the German Institute Photometric data from TRILUX, beyond
for Applied Photometrics which is TX-WIN and DIALux, is also available in
supported by a consortium of leading the formats EULUMDAT, EULUMDAT/2,
luminaire manufacturers in Europe. IES and TM14. For information on
other formats, please contact your
One made it its duty to apply the latest local TRILUX support centre.
technologies regarding the processing
and representation of 3D graphic
objects.
Striking representation possibilities,

rapid system reaction times and long-
range calculation possibilities are the
In addition to this, TX-WIN offers an result. DIALux 2.5 offers an extensive
excellent overview of the total range planning repertoire ranging from the
of TRILUX luminaires with valuable creation and photometric considera-
application indications by means of a tion of detailed objects in the room to
well-structured luminaire selection in the direct glare evaluation according
words and pictures. to the latest procedures.
442
CALIS
DELTA and E-LINE substitute references
Light simulation
CALIS (Computer Aided
Light Simulation) is a special
TRILUX internal program
offering photo-realistic possi-
bilities. This exceptional
planning software allows to
visualise the illuminated room
and thus shows the effect of
the illumination even during
the design stages. Please
contact your local TRILUX
support centre for more
details.
DELTA Substitute reference Substitute reference DELTA and E-LINE

Technical version for equipment with for equipment with substitute references
of continuous-line unit 1 x 35 W* 2 x 35 W* The rapid-mounting continu-
ous-line systems DELTA and
E-LINE usually consist of
direct DELTA R 1x35W E DELTA R 2x35W E several separately ordered
direct, with white louvre DELTA RW 1x35W E DELTA RW 2x35W E components. Their respec-
direct, with white, perforated louvre DELTA RW-G 1x35W E DELTA RW-G 2x35W E tive combination is decisive
direct/indirect DELTA G 1x35W E DELTA G 2x35W E for the photometric charac-
direct/indirect, with white louvre DELTA G-RW 1x35W E DELTA G-RW 2x35W E teristics. In order to enable
direct/indirect, with white, perforated louvre DELTA G-RW-G 1x35W E DELTA G-RW-G 2x35W E computer-assisted lighting
direct, with specular reflector DELTA S 1x35W E DELTA S 2x35W E projections, the photometric
direct, with specular reflector and white louvre DELTA S-RW 1x35W E DELTA S-RW 2x35W E data sets for the respective
direct, with specular reflector and white, perforated louvre DELTA S-RW-G 1x35W E DELTA S-RW-G 2x35W E component combinations
asymmetrical, direct, with specular reflector DELTA SA 1x35W E DELTA SA 2x35W E were assigned to correspond-
asymmetrical, direct, with specular reflector and white louvre DELTA SA-RW 1x35W E DELTA SA-RW 2x35W E ing substitute references in
asymmetrical, direct, with specular reflector and white, perf. louvre DELTA SA-RW-G 1x35W E DELTA SA-RW-G 2x35W E calculation programs.
direct, with highly-specular parabolic louvre DELTA RPV 1x35W E DELTA RPV 2x35W E
direct, with extremely narrow-angle specular reflector DELTA HRL 1x35W E DELTA HRL 2x35W E
direct, IP 50, for production sites exposed to fire hazards DELTA R 1x35W IP50-D E DELTA R 2x35W IP50-D E
direct, with spec. reflector, IP 50, for prod. sites exposed to fire hazards DELTA S 1x35W IP50-D E DELTA S 2x35W IP50-D E
The suffix ED is added for dimmable versions, e.g. DELTA R 2x35W ED

*For the equipments 58 W and 80 W corresponding references are given.
E-LINE Substitute Substitute Substitute Substitute

Technical version reference for reference for reference for reference for
of continuous-line unit equipment equipment equipment equipment
with 1 x 58 W with 2 x 58 W with 1 x 36 W with 2 x 36 W
batten E-LINE 1x58W 2x58W 1x36W 2x36W

batten, protected against dust E-LINE 1x58W IP50 2x58W IP50
batten, for production sites exposed to fire hazards E-LINE 1x58W IP50-D 2x58W IP50-D
with trapezium-shaped reflector, white E-LINE T 1x58W T 2x58W T 1x36W T 2x36W
with trapezium-shaped reflector and white louvre E-LINE T-RW 1x58W T-RW 2x58W T-RW 1x36W T-RW 2x36W
with circular reflector, white E-LINE R 1x58W R 2x58W R 1x36W R 2x36W
with circular reflector, white, protected against dust E-LINE R 1x58W IP50 R 2x58W IP50
with circ. reflector, white, for prod. sites exp. to fire haz. E-LINE R 1x58W IP50-D R 2x58W IP50-D
with circular reflector and white louvre E-LINE RW 1x58W RW 2x58W RW 1x36W RW 2x36W
with circular reflector and white louvre, prot. against dust E-LINE RW 1x58W IP50 RW 2x58W IP50
with circ. refl. and white louvre, for prod. s. exp. to fire haz. E-LINE RW 1x58W IP50-D RW 2x58W IP50-D
with narrow-angle specular reflector E-LINE ST 1x58W ST 2x58W
with narrow-angle specular reflector and white louvre E-LINE ST-RW 1x58W ST-RW 2x58W
with wide-angle specular reflector E-LINE SB 1x58W SB 2x58W
with wide-angle specular reflector and white louvre E-LINE SB-RW 1x58W SB-RW 2x58W
with asymmetrical specular reflector E-LINE SA 1x58W SA 2x58W
with asymmetrical specular reflector and white louvre E-LINE SA-RW 1x58W SA-RW 2x58W
with prismatic diffuser E-LINE P 1x58W P 2x58W
with prismatic diffuser and narrow-angle specular reflector E-LINE P-ST 1x58W P-ST 2x58W
with perforated reflector, white E-LINE G 1x58W G 2x58W
with perforated reflector and white louvre E-LINE G-RW 1x58W G-RW 2x58W
with semi-specular cross-blade louvre E-LINE RSV 1x58W RSV 2x58W
with semi-specular parabolic louvre E-LINE RMV 1x58W RMV 2x58W
with highly-specular parabolic louvre E-LINE RPV 1x58W RPV 2x58W
with semi-specular cross-blade louvre, with ind. component E-LINE G-RSV 1x58W G-RSV 2x58W
with highly-specular parabolic louvre, with ind. component E-LINE G-RPV 1x58W G-RPV 2x58W
with self-suspended specular reflector, narrow/wide-angle E-LINE STF 1x58W STF 2x58W
with self-suspended specular reflector, asymmetrical E-LINE SAF 1x58W SAF 2x58W
with self-suspended specular reflector, extr. narrow-angle E-LINE HRF 1x58W
443
Lamp characteristics & data
for TRILUX interior luminaires
OSRAM PHILIPS
Lamp diameter
Lamp length
Lamp rating
Conven- Elec- Conven- Elec-

Lamp type
CCT class
Ra group
tional/ tronic tional/ tronic
Sales name low-loss control Sales name low-loss control
ballast gear ballast gear
* * * *
W mm mm lm lm lm lm
1 B FH 14W/827 1200 TL5 14W HE/827 1200

ww
1 B FH 14W/830 1200 TL5 14W HE/830 1200
14 16
nw 1 B FH 14W/840 1200 TL5 14W HE/840 1200
tw 1 B FH 14W/860 1100 TL5 14W HE/865 1200
ww 1 B FQ 24W/830 1750 TL5 24W HO/830 1750
24 550 16 nw 1 B FQ 24W/840 1750 TL5 24W HO/840 1750
tw 1 B FQ 24W/860 1600
ww 1 B FQ 39W/830 3100 TL5 39W HO/830 3100
39 850 16 nw 1 B FQ 39W/840 3100 TL5 39W HO/840 3100
tw 1 B FQ 39W/860 2850
1 B FH 28W/827 2600 TL5 28W HE/827 2600
ww
1 B FH 28W/830 2600 TL5 28W HE/830 2600
28 16
nw 1 B FH 28W/840 2600 TL5 28W HE/840 2600
T16 (T5)
tw 1 B FH 28W/860 2400 TL5 28W HE/865 2600
1150
ww 1 B FQ 54W/830 4450 TL5 54W HO/830 4450
54 16 nw 1 B FQ 54W/840 4450 TL5 54W HO/840 4450
tw 1 B FQ 54W/860 4100
1 B FH 35W/827 3300 TL5 35W HE/827 3300
ww
1 B FH 35W/830 3300 TL5 35W HE/830 3300
35 16
nw 1 B FH 35W/840 3300 TL5 35W HE/840 3300
tw 1 B FH 35W/860 3300 TL5 35W HE/865 3300
1450 ww 1 B FQ 49W/830 4300 TL5 49W HO/830 4300
49 16
nw 1 B FQ 49W/840 4300 TL5 49W HO/840 4300
ww 1 B FQ 80W/830 6150 TL5 80W HO/830 6150
80 16 nw 1 B FQ 80W/840 6150 TL5 80W HO/840 6150
tw 1 B FQ 80W/860 5700 TL5 80W HO/865 5850
1B L 15W/41-827 PLUS ECO 950 1000 TLD 15W/827 1000

ww
1B L 15W/31-830 PLUS ECO 950 1000 TLD 15W/830 1000
nw 1B L 15W/21-840 PLUS ECO 950 1000 TLD 15W/840 1000
15 438 26
tw 1B TLD 15W/865 1000
ww 1A L 15W/32-930 650 680
tw 1A L 15W/12-950 680 710
1B L 18W/41-827 PLUS ECO 1350 1300 TLD 18W/827 1350 1300
ww
1B L 18W/31-830 PLUS ECO 1350 1300 TLD 18W/830 1350 1300
nw 1B L 18W/21-840 PLUS ECO 1350 1300 TLD 18W/840 1350 1300
18 590 26 tw 1B L 18W/11-860 PLUS ECO 1300 1250 TLD 18W/865 1300 1250
ww 1A L 18W/32-930 1000 950 TLD 18W/930 1000 950
nw 1A L 18W/22-940 1000 950 TLD 18W/940 1000 950
tw 1A L 18W/12-950 1000 950 TLD 18W/950 1000 950
T26 (T8) 1B L 36W/41-827 PLUS ECO 3350 3200 TLD 36W/827 3350 3200
ww
1B L 36W/31-830 PLUS ECO 3350 3200 TLD 36W/830 3350 3200
ww 1A L 36W/32-930 2350 2250 TLD 36W/930 2350 2250
nw 1A L 36W/22-940 2350 2250 TLD 36W/940 2350 2250
tw 1A L 36W/12-950 2350 2250 TLD 36W/950 2350 2250
1B L 58W/41-827 PLUS ECO 5200 5000 TLD 58W/827 5200 5000
ww
1B L 58W/31-830 PLUS ECO 5200 5000 TLD 58W/830 5200 5000
ww 1A L 58W/32-930 3750 3600 TLD 58W/930 3700 3600
nw 1A L 58W/22-940 3750 3600 TLD 58W/940 3700 3600
tw 1A L 58W/12-950 3700 3550 TLD 58W/950 3700 3550
ww 1 B FC 22W/830 1800 TL5 C 22W/830 1800

22 231 16 nw 1 B FC 22W/840 1800 TL5 C 22W/840 1800
tw 1 B FC 22W/860 1710
ww 1 B FC 40W/830 3200 TL5 C 40W/830 3300
T-R 16
40 306 16 nw 1 B FC 40W/840 3200 TL5 C 40W/840 3300
(T-R 5)
tw 1 B FC 40W/860 3000
ww 1 B FC 55W/830 4000 TL5 C 55W/830 4200
55 306 16 nw 1 B FC 55W/840 4000 TL5 C 55W/840 4200
tw 1 B FC 55W/860 3800
* All luminous flux indications referred to 25C
ww warm white, nw neutral white, tw daylight white
444
OSRAM PHILIPS Conventional/ Electronic
low-loss ballast control gear
Lamp length
Lamp rating
Lamp type
CCT class
Ra group
Sales name Sales name Socket * Socket *
W mm lm lm
1 B DULUX S 5W/41-827 PL-S/2p 5W/827 G23 250

ww
5 85 1 B DULUX S 5W/31-830 G23 250
nw 1 B DULUX S 5W/21-840 PL-S/2p 5W/840 G23 250
1 B DULUX S 9W/41-827 PL-S/2p 9W/827 G23 600
ww
1 B DULUX S 9W/31-830 PL-S/2p 9W/830 G23 600
9 145
TC-S nw 1 B DULUX S 9W/21-840 PL-S/2p 9W/840 G23 600
tw 1 B DULUX S 9W/11-860 G23 565
1 B DULUX S 11W/41-827 PL-S/2p 11W/827 G23 900
ww
1 B DULUX S 11W/31-830 PL-S/2p 11W/830 G23 900
11 215
nw 1 B DULUX S 11W/21-840 PL-S/2p 11W/840 G23 900
tw 1 B DULUX S 11W/11-860 G23 850
1 B DULUX S/E 11W/41-827 PL-S/4p 11W/827 2G7 900
ww
TC-SEL 11 215 1 B DULUX S/E 11W/31-830 PL-S/4p 11W/830 2G7 900
nw 1 B DULUX S/E 11W/21-840 PL-S/4p 11W/840 2G7 900
ww 1A DULUX L 18W/32 2G11 750 2G11 750

nw 1A DULUX L 18W/22 2G11 750 2G11 750
tw 1A DULUX L 18W/12 2G11 750 2G11 750
18 225
1B DULUX L 18W/41-827 PL-L/4p 18W/827 2G11 1200 2G11 1200
ww
nw 1B DULUX L 18W/21-840 PL-L/4p 18W/840 2G11 1200 2G11 1200
ww 1A DULUX L 24W/32 2G11 1200 2G11 1200
nw 1A DULUX L 24W/22 2G11 1200 2G11 1200
tw 1A DULUX L 24W/12 2G11 1200 2G11 1200
24 317
ww
TC-L ww 1A DULUX L 36W/32 2G11 1900 2G11 1900
nw 1A DULUX L 36W/22 2G11 1900 2G11 1900
tw 1A DULUX L 36W/12 2G11 1900 2G11 1900
36 411 1B DULUX L 36W/41-827 PL-L/4p 36W/827 2G11 2900 2G11 2900
ww
tw 1B DULUX L 36W/11-860 2G11 2750 2G11 2750
ww 1A DULUX L 55W/32 2G11 3000
1A DULUX L 55W/22 2G11 3000
tw
1A DULUX L 55W/12 2G11 3000
55 535
1B DULUX L 55W/41-827 2G11 4800
ww
1B DULUX L 55W/31-830 PL-L/4p 55W/830 HF 2G11 4800
nw 1B DULUX L 55W/21-840 PL-L/4p 55W/840 HF 2G11 4800
1 B DULUX D 10W/41-827 PL-C/2p PRO NG 10W/827 G24d-1 600

ww
10 95 1 B DULUX D 10W/31-830 PL-C/2p PRO NG 10W/830 G24d-1 600
nw 1 B DULUX D 10W/21-840 PL-C/2p PRO NG 10W/840 G24d-1 600
ww
TC-D
ww
ww
1 B DULUX D/E 10W/41-827 PL-C/4p PRO NG 10W/827 G24q-1 600
ww
10 95 1 B DULUX D/E 10W/31-830 PL-C/4p PRO NG 10W/830 G24q-1 600
nw 1 B DULUX D/E 10W/21-840 PL-C/4p PRO NG 10W/840 G24q-1 600
ww
TC-DEL
ww
ww
445
Lamp characteristics & data
for TRILUX interior luminaires
OSRAM PHILIPS Conventional/ Electronic

low-loss ballast control gear
Lamp length
Lamp rating
Lamp type
CCT class
Ra group
Sales name Sales name Socket * Socket *
W mm lm lm
1 B DULUX T 26W/41-827 (IN)** PL-T/2p 26W/827 GX24d-3 1800

ww
TC-T(I) 26 125 1 B DULUX T 26W/31-830 (IN)** PL-T/2p 26W/830 GX24d-3 1800
nw 1 B DULUX T 26W/21-840 (IN)** PL-T/2p 26W/840 GX24d-3 1800
1 B DULUX T/E 18W/41-827 (IN)** PL-T/4p 18W/827 GX24q-2 1200
ww
18 105 1 B DULUX T/E 18W/31-830 (IN)** PL-T/4p 18W/830 GX24q-2 1200
nw 1 B DULUX T/E 18W/21-840 (IN)** PL-T/4p 18W/840 GX24q-2 1200
ww
TC-TEL(I)
ww
ww
1 B DULUX F 24W/41-827 2G10 1700 2G10 1700

ww
24 165 1 B DULUX F 24W/31-830 2G10 1700 2G10 1700
nw 1 B DULUX F 24W/21-840 2G10 1700 2G10 1700
TC-F
1 B DULUX F 36W/41-827 2G10 2800 2G10 2800
ww
36 217 1 B DULUX F 36W/31-830 2G10 2800 2G10 2800
nw 1 B DULUX F 36W/21-840 2G10 2800 2G10 2800
** With suffix IN for increased ambient temperatures
446
OSRAM PHILIPS Socket
Lamp diameter
Lamp length
Lamp rating
Lamp type
CCT class
Ra group
Sales name Sales name
W mm mm lm lm
Metal halide lamps, ellipsoid

ww 1 B HQI-E 70/WDL 4900 E27
70 141 55
nw 1 B HQI-E 70/NDL 4900 E27
ww 1 B HQI-E 100/WDL 8000 E27
100 141 55
HIE 1 B HQI-E 100/NDL 7300 E27
nw
150 139 55 1 B HQI-E 150/NDL 10500 E27
1 A HQI-E 250/D 19000 E40
250 226 90 tw
2 B HPI Plus 250W BU 19000 E40
Metal halide lamps, tubular (CRI with ceramic burner)
35 100 19 1 B HCI-T 35/WDL 3300 CDM-T 35W/830 3300 G12
ww
1 B HCI-T 70/WDL 6600 CDM-T 70W/830 6600 G12
70 100 19
HIT (-CRI) nw 1 A HCI-T 70/NDL 5800 CDM-T 70W/942 6600 G12
ww 1 B HCI-T 150/WDL 14000 CDM-T 150W/830 14000 G12
150 105 19
nw 1 A HCI-T 150/NDL 12700 CDM-T 150W/942 12700 G12
225 46 1 A HQI-T 250/D 20000 E40
250
257 47 1A HPI-T 250W 19000 E40
HIT tw
275 62 1 A HQI-BT 400/D1) 32000 E40
400
283 47 1A HPI-T 400W 35000 E40
Metal halide lamps, double-ended
ww 1 B HCI-TS 70/WDL 6500 CDM-TD 70W/830 6100 RX7s
nw 1 A HCI-TS 70/NDL 5700 CDM-TD 70W/942 5400 RX7s
70 114.2 22 ww 1 B HQI-TS 70/WDL 5000 MHW-TD 70W 6000 RX7s
nw 1 B HQI-TS 70/NDL 5500 MHN-TD 70W 5500 RX7s
tw 1 B HQI-TS 70/D 5000 RX7s
HIT-DE
ww 1 B HCI-TS 150/WDL 13500 CDM-TD 150W/830 12500 RX7s-24
nw 1 A HCI-TS 150/NDL 13400 CDM-TD 150W/942 12700 RX7s-24
150 132 25 ww 1 B HQI-TS 150/WDL 11000 MHW-TD 150W 13800 RX7s-24
nw 1 B HQI-TS 150/NDL 11250 MHN-TD 150W 12900 RX7s-24
tw 1 B HQI-TS 150/D 11000 RX7s-24
High-pressure mercury vapour lamps
3 HQL 250 13000 HPL-N 250W HG 12700 E40
250 226 90
3 HQL 250 DE LUXE 14000 HPL COMFORT 250W HG 14200 E40
HME
3 HQL 400 22000 HPL-N 400W HG 22000 E40
400 290 120
3 HQL 400 DE LUXE 24000 HPL COMFORT 400W HG 24200 E40
High-pressure sodium vapour lamps, tubular
50 156 37 4 NAV-T 50 SUPER 4000 SON-T PLUS 50W 4400 E27
100 211 46 4 NAV-T 100 SUPER 10000 SON-T PLUS 100W 10500 E40
4 NAV-T 150 14500 SON-T 150W 15000 E40
150 211 46
4 NAV-T 150 SUPER 17500 SON-T PLUS 150W 16500 E40
HST
4 NAV-T 250 27000 SON-T 250W 28000 E40
250 257 46
4 NAV-T 400 48000 SON-T 250W 48000 E40
400 285 46
High-pressure sodium vapour lamps
50 149 32 1B SDW-T 50W 2300 PG12-1
HST-CRI ww
100 149 32 1B SDW-T 100W 4800 PG12-1
Mains-voltage halogen lamps
60 105 32 1 A Halolux Ceram 64472IM 780 Halogena T32/13658 780 E27
75 105 32 1 A Halolux Ceram 64474IM 1050 E27
QT 32 100 105 32 ww 1 A Halolux Ceram 64476IM 1430 Halogena T32/13662 1525 E27
150 105 32 1 A Halolux Ceram 64478IM 2400 Halogena T32/13946 2450 E27
250 105 32 1 A Halolux Ceram 64480IM 4000 E27
Mains-voltage halogen lamps, linear
QT-DE 12 150 114.2 12 ww 1A HALOLINE 64696 2200 R7s
Low-voltage halogen lamps 12V
35 44 12 1 A Halostar Starlite 64432S 600 Super 13103 600 GY6.35
50 44 12 1 A Halostar Starlite 64440S 930 Super 13102 950 GY6.35
QT-ax 12 75 44 12 ww 1 A Halostar Starlite 64450S 1450 Super 13101 1575 GY6.35
90 44 12 1 A Halostar Starlite 64458S 1800 GY6.35
100 44 12 1 A Super 13100 2200 GY6.35
Mains-voltage halogen reflector lamps
1A Halopar 64841SP PAR 30S spot E27
QPAR 30 75 90.5 97 ww
1A Halopar 64841FL PAR 30S flood E27
1) Operation with ballast for high-pressure sodium vapour lamps
447
Reference number index
Reference Page Reference Page Reference Page Reference Page Reference Page
TRILUX TRILUX TRILUX TRILUX TRILUX
ARAGON 29 368, 369 530 DiVisio 72

ARAGON 292 2901 C 20 3692 D-RPX 242 5302 ADH 115 7212 P, PS 308
ARAGON E 290 2901 C CAT2 22 3692 D-RSV 238 5302 RPX 113 7212 T 310
ARAGON S 293 2901 C-B 21 3692 D-RSX 240 5302 RSX 112 7214 P 309
ARAGON S E 291 2901 C-B CAT2 23 3692 D-RWV 234 7214 T 311
ARAGON SA 293 2901 W 20 3692 D-RWX 236 536 7222 W-RPV 314
ARAGON T E 289 2901 W CAT2 22 3693 D-RPX 243 5361 ROB 56 7222 W-SB 312
2901 W-B 21 3693 D-RSV 239 5361 ROD 54 7224 W-RPV 314
CLASSICA 2901 W-B CAT2 23 3693 D-RSX 241 5361 ROS 53 7224 W-SB 313
CLASSICA F 62-67 2902 C 20 3693 D-RWV 235 5361 ROT 51 7232 W-RPV 314
CLASSICA R 62-67 2902 C CAT2 22 3693 D-RWX 237 5363 ROB 57 7232 W-SB 312
CLASSICA S 62-67 2902 C-B 21 3694 D-RPX 243 5363 ROD 55 7234 W-RPV 314
CLASSICA W-F 62-67 2902 C-B CAT2 23 3694 D-RSV 239 5363 ROT 51 7234 W-SB 313
CLASSICA W-R 62-67 2902 W 20 3694 D-RSX 241 5365 ROB 57
CLASSICA W-S 62-67 2902 W CAT2 22 3694 D-RWV 235 5365 ROD 55 73
2902 W-B 21 3694 D-RWX 237 7392 P 306
ES 50 2902 W-B CAT2 23 538, 539 7393 P 307
ES 502, W 137 2911 316 376 5383 PSH 45
2911 B 317 3762 PSN 327 5393 PSH 47 740
LIGHTGATE 2931 C 24 3763 PSN 327 5393N PSG 46 7401N 276
LG11/000 432 2931 C-B 25 7402N 277
LG11/RP0 432 2931 W 24 39 593, 594, 7403N 277
LG21/RPL 432 2931 W-B 25 3901 RPX 247 595, 596, 597
LG31/RPL 432 3901 RSV 245 5931 RPX 99 748 CENTA-S
330, 331, 332 3901 RSX 246 5931 RSX 98 7481 PC 302
LR 803 3302 266 3901 RWX 244 5941 AD 101 7482 PC 303
LR 803 434 3302 P, PS, PSA 268 3902 RPX 247 595 HO/QPAR75 86 7483 PC 303
3304 267 3902 RSV 245 595 HO/QT150 84
110 3304 P 269 3902 RSX 246 595 HO/QT90 82 760 DELTA
110N 328 3313 267 3902 RWX 244 595/QT50 80 Gear tray
3313 P 269 3911 RPX 247 5951 HO/HIT 89 7601N, A 348
128 3323 C 267 3911 RSV 245 5951 HO/HST 91 7602N 348
1280 H, HW 35 3323 C-P 269 3911 RSX 246 5961 RPX 95 7601N/+E14 364
1280 W 34 3911 RWX 244 5961 RPX/TCD 93 7601N/+EB3, +UR 365
333 3912 RPX 247 5961 RSV/QT-DE150 93
1281 H, HW 37 7602N/+E14 364
1281 W 36 3331 M 263 3912 RSV 245 5971 PST 97 7602N/+EB3, +UR 365
3331 M-TA 265 3912 RSX 246
129 3331 M-TS 264 3912 RWX 244 598, 599 Base units 076
3331 W 263 07600 344
1295 40 5981N RPX 187
3331 W-TA 265 40 07610 345
1296 40 5981N RSX 187
3331 W-TS 264 4022 139 5991N RPR 193 768, 769 E-LINE
133 5991N RPX 189
360 440 5991N RSV 191 Gear tray
1330 F/ O 270 7681, D 381
1330 F/ P 271 3604 PST 143 4401 F, PF 285 5991N RSX 189
5991N RWV 190 7682, D 381
362 500 5992N RPR 193 7691 380
136 7692 380
1360 OA, PA 256 3621 RPX 148 5001 RMV-L 205 5992N RSV 191
3621 RSX 146 5992N RWV 190 7691/+E14 410
1360 RMV 252 5001 RPR-L 207
3621 RWX 144 7691/+EB, +UR 411
1360 RPV 254 5001 RPX-L 199
3622 RPX 148 60 DIALOG 7692/+E14 410
1360 RSV 250 5001 RSV-L 203
3622 RSX 146 7692/+EB, +UR 411
1360 RWV 248 5001 RSX-L 198 6001 DT 125
1361 PA 257 3622 RWX 144 5001 RWV-L 201 6013 AS 129 Trunking
1361 RMV 252 3623 RPX 149 5002 RMV 204 6014 AS, AT 129 07690/ 374
1361 RPV 254 3623 RSX 147 5002 RMV-L 205 6021 AS 127 Optical accessories
1361 RSV 250 3623 RWX 145 5002 RPR 206 6024 AS 127 0769 373
1361 RWV 248 5002 RPR-L 207 6041 UW 133
363 CENERA 5002 RPX-L 199 6042 UW 133 796
151 3631 PST 142 5002 RSV 202 6052 UW 135 7961 S 414
1510 RAV-L 224 3633 PST 143 5002 RSV-L 203 6052 UW-G 135 7962 S 415
1510 RMV-L 227 5002 RSX-L 198 7963 S 415
366 5002 RWV 200 614
1510 RPV-L 229
1510 RSV-L 226 3662 RST, RWS 326 5002 RWV-L 201 6141 420 798 WINLIGHT Q
1510 RWV-L 225 3663 RST 327 6142 420 7981 AD 425
504, 505
367 65 7981 SD 423
152 5041 RPX-L 177 7983 AD, AH 425
1522 RMV-L 214 3672N C-RPH 41 5041 RSV-L 175 6541, P, SN 281 7983 SD, SH 423
1522 RPV-L 215 3673N C-RPH 41 5041 RSX-L 177 6541 St, St-S 281
1522 RSV-L 213 5041 RWV-L 173 Trunking
368, 369 5041 RWX-L 175 66
1522 RWV-L 212 07690//-U 426
1523 RMV-L 218 3681 D-RPX 242 5041 T 173 6641, C 279
1523 RPV-L 219 3681 D-RSV 238 5051 RPX-L 181 6641, C/TC, C-S 280
1523 RSV-L 217 3681 D-RSX 240 5051 RSX-L 181 6641 C-St, C-St-S 280
1523 RWV-L 216 3681 D-RWV 234 5051 T 179 6641 S, St, St-S 280
3681 D-RWX 236 6651, C, C-S, S 278
161 3682 D-RPX 242 506 All technical data including
3682 D-RSV 238 5062 PSN 325 71 details of weight and dimen-
1615 418
3682 D-RSX 240 5062 RST 323 7131 294 sions have been compiled
171 3682 D-RWV 234 5062 RWS 322 7131 P 295 with all due care. Errors
3682 D-RWX 236 5063 PSN 325 7132 294
1715N, PC V2A 297 excepted. We reserve the
3683 D-RPX 243 5063 RST 323 7132 P 295
190 3683 D-RSV 239 5063 RWS 322 7132 PS 295 right to make alterations in
190 VZ 300
3683 D-RSX 241
526
7171 281/294 the interest of improving our
3683 D-RWV 235 7191 298 products.
190 301
3683 D-RWX 237 5261 RPX-L 166 7192 298
236 3691 D-RPX 242 5261 RSV-L 162
3691 D-RSV 238 5261 RSX-L 164 72 Printed on environmentally-
2360 OA, PA 257 3691 D-RSX 240 5261 RWV-L 158
2360 RMV 252 7202 P, PS 308 friendly paper, made of 50 %
3691 D-RWV 234 5261 RWX-L 160 7202 T 310
2360 RPV 254 3691 D-RWX 236 recycled, de-inked fibre and
2360 RSV 250 7204 P 309
7204 T 311 50 % cellulose bleached with-
2360 RWV 248
out chlorine.
448
Europe Middle East Asia-Pacific
Subsidiaries and exclusive distributors: Exclusive distributors: Exclusive distributors:
A-Austria GB-United Kingdom PL-Poland Bahrain Australia

TRILUX LEUCHTEN GesmbH TRILUX LIGHTING LIMITED PM LIGHTING BAHRAIN TRADING AGENCIES PIERLITE PTY LTD
1230 Wien Boreham Interchange ul. Kosciuszki 175 P.O. Box 30540 96-112 Gow Street
Carlbergergasse 68 CM2 5PD Essex 50-438 Wroclaw Manama NSW 2211, Padstow
Tel. + 43 (0) 1/8 69 35 38-0 TRILUX HOUSE, Winsford Way Tel. + 48 (0) 71/3 72 36 77 Tel. + 973 2919 27 Tel. + 61 (0) 2/97 94 93 00
Fax + 43 (0) 1/8 69 35 38-22 Tel. + 44 (0) 12 45/46 34 63 Fax + 48 (0) 71/3 72 45 58 Fax + 973 2918 83 Fax + 61 (0) 2/97 07 41 90
wien@trilux.at Fax + 44 (0) 12 45/46 26 46 pmlighting@pmlighting.pl bta1@batelco.com.bh lighting@pierlite.com.au
www.trilux.at sales@trilux.co.uk www.pierlite.com.au
www.trilux.co.uk ES-SYSTEM S.A. Kuwait
B-Belgium ul. Przemyslowa 2 AL RABIAH LIGHTING Hong Kong
TRILUX B.V.B.A. H-Hungary 30-701 Krakw COMPANY W.L.C. MAXGRAND Limited
2800 Mechelen TRILUX Hungria Kft. Tel. + 48 (0) 12/6 56 36-33 P.O. Box 22158 Rm. 1302,
Generaal de Wittelaan 9/3 Hunyadi Jnos t 9 Fax + 48 (0) 12/6 56 36-49 13082 Safat Kwai Cheong Centre
Tel. + 32 (0) 15/40 90 10 1117 Budapest essystem@essystem.pl Tel. + 965 5 73 28 54 40-52, Kwai Cheong Road
Fax + 32 (0) 15/20 86 24 Tel. + 36 1 4 81 01 88 www.essystem.pl Fax + 965 5 71 51 36 Kwai Chung N.T.
info@trilux.be Fax + 36 1 4 81 04 70 rabiah@qualitynet.net Tel. + 852 24 23 22 83
www.trilux.be info@trilux.hu SK-Slovakia Fax + 852 24 23 28 51
www.trilux.hu TRILUX Slovakia s.r.o. Oman maxgrand@netvigator.com
CH-Switzerland SK-82101 Bratislava AL-MUTAWAH TRADING
TRILUX AG I-Italy Nevdzov 5 COMPANY LLC New Zealand
8953 Dietikon TRILUX ITALIA S.r.l. SK-Slovakia Al Ghobra, Muscat ENLIGHTENZ
Bernstrasse 85 24124 Bergamo (BG) Tel. + 421 2 48 28 75 18 P.O. Box No. 17 9A Douglas Alexander Parade
Tel. + 41 (0) 1/7 44 57-57 Via Cesare Correnti, 47 Fax + 421 2 48 28 76 05 114 Muttrah North Harbour
Fax + 41 (0) 1/7 44 57-58 Tel. + 39 035/36 83-01 trilux@nextra.sk Tel. + 968 59 18 71 North Shore City
mail@trilux.ch Fax + 39 035/36 83-11 www.trilux.sk Fax + 968 59 23 70 Auckland
www.trilux.ch info@trilux.it almutawa@omantel.net.om Tel. + 64 94 14 49-50
www.trilux.it TR-Turkey
. Fax + 64 94 14 49-51
CZ-Czech Republic UNITEM Uluslararasi Qatar headoffice@enlightenz.co.nz
TRILUX Cesk republika s.r.o. IRL-Eire Levent Caddesi. No. 17 AL-SHAIBEH ESTABLISHMENT
17000 Praha 7 MALONE LIGHTING (Ire.) LTD 1. Levent 80620 P.O. Box 3975 Singapore
Veletrzni 24/200 Unit 15 80620 Istanbul Doha CAL LIGHTING PTE. Ltd.
Tel. + 42 (0) 2/33 37 3178 Finglas Business Centre Temsilcilik ve Dis. Tic. A.S. Tel. + 974 32 21 40 100E Pasir Panjang Road
Fax + 42 (0) 2/33 37 3178 Jamestown Road Tel. + 90 (0) 212/2 79 27 27 Fax + 974 41 66 50 No. 07-03 Century Warehouse
trilux@trilux.cz Dublin 11 Fax + 90 (0) 212/2 80 26 26 shaibeh@qatar.net.qa Zip Code 118521
www.trilux.cz Tel. + 353 (0) 1/8 06 84 30 contact@unitempro.com Tel. + 65 2 73 68-26
Fax + 353 (0) 1/8 36 24 49 www.unitempro.com United Arab Emirates Fax + 65 2 73 68-56
D-Deutschland sales@malonelighting.com BAHRI + MAZROEI TRADING CO. callite@singnet.com.sg
TRILUX-LENZE GmbH + Co KG www.trilux.co.uk P.O. Box 1247
59759 Arnsberg Deira Taiwan
Heidestrae 4 L-Luxembourg Dubai COCK ROOSTER LIGHTING
Tel. + 49 (0) 29 32/3 01-0 SIPEL Srl Tel. + 971 (0)/42 69 16 10 CO. LTD.
Fax + 49 (0) 29 32/3 01-5 07 8055 Bertrange Fax + 971 (0)/42 66 46 27 No. 327, 15F-2, Fu Shing S. Rd.
sales@trilux.de 166, rue de Dippach info@bmtconline.com Sec. 2
www.trilux.de Tel. + 352/3166-60 Taipei R.O.C.
Fax + 352/3166-64 Tel. + 886 (0) 2/27 32 91 27
E-Spain info@sipel.lu Fax + 886 (0) 2/27 36 74 59
ZALUX S.A. www.sipel.lu khcock@ms33.hinet.net
Ctra. Logroo,
Km. 13,200, Nave 12 NL-The Netherlands
(Pol. Ind. El Aguila) TRILUX C.V.
50180 Utebo-Zaragoza 3981 AJ Bunnik
Tel. + 34 976/77 03 70 Kosterijland 48
Fax + 34 976/77 40 61 Tel. + 31 (0) 30/6 57 11 17
comercial@zalux.com Fax + 31 (0) 30/6 57 08 20
www.zalux.com trilux@worldonline.nl
www.trilux.nl
F-France
TRILUX FRANCE S.A.S. Northern Ireland
2, rue Denis Papin BP 5 MALONE LIGHTING LTD
Z.I. Duttlenheim Lisburn
67127 Molsheim Cedex Co. Antrim
Tel. + 33 (0) 3/88 49 57 80 Belfast BT27 5EN
Fax + 33 (0) 3/88 38 39 82 3 Ava Street
contact@trilux.fr Tel. + 44 (0) 28 92/66 92-77
www.trilux.fr Fax + 44 (0) 28 92/66 92-88
sales@malonelighting.com
www.trilux.co.uk
TRILUX-LENZE GmbH + Co KG
Heidestrae D-59759 Arnsberg
Postfach 19 60 D-59753 Arnsberg
Tel. +49 2932/3 01-0
Fax +49 2932/3 01-5 07
sales@trilux.de
www.trilux.de
020-GB-int. 072 703

Lighting Handbook A Lot of Good Examples For Interior Lighting PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Lighting Handbook A Lot of Good Examples For Interior Lighting PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Lighting Design Light and interiors

Corresponding product infor-

See. Perceive. Experience.

Downlights and circular luminaires

Voltage-track spotlights CLASSICA

Tubular track system T200

Bidirectional office lighting system DiVisio

Surface-mounted and suspended louvre luminaires

Recessed louvre luminaires

Recessed diffuser luminaires

Weather-proof surface-mounted luminaires

Weather-proof recessed luminaires

Sports hall luminaires

Continuous-line luminaires, batten luminaires,

Accessories, technical information

See. Perceive. Experience. E-Mails

CD-ROM The relevance of this medi-

The CD contains everything

Communication Beyond that, TRILUX defines

The international identity of

Sales branches and produc-

The power of emotion, illuminated

*Conception: A.S.E. Building owner: SERS

The value of specular louvres Reflection-intensified Post-anodised reflectors

Louvres RWV, RWX, RSV

Diffuser luminaires enable Diffusers in unbreakable Opal diffusers Prismatic diffusers

Page 34 Page 40 Page 44 Page 50 Page 54

Both sizes are optionally

Page 20 Page 24 Page 316

Luminaires can also be sup-

A wide range of accessories for the 29 series downlights,

Data table no. 2001

Cover accessories Luminance limitation

Data table no. 0307

DIN 5040: A60 DIN 5040: A60 2 Max. luminaire

Luminaires can also be sup-

Decor disk 02930 DS Conical lens 02930 KS

Data table no. 2002

DIN 5040: A40 DIN 5040: A40 2 Max. luminaire

Conical lens 02930 KT

The design of 290 series

The cross-blade louvre with

Data table no. 2003

frosted glass attachment. Technical information see page 440.

Transparent glass covers

In addition, Fresnel lenses

Glass covers Transparent Fresnel lenses Frosted Fresnel lenses

Downlight series 2911 in IP 54 all-round is described from

293 series compact down-

All accessories can be retro-

Decor disk 02930 DS Conical lens 02930 KS Conical lens 02930 KT

Perfectly adapted installation

Mounting plate Mounting case Sealed housing

Sheet steel, galvanised. Ceil-

to integrated spring brack-

System rating per luminaire / W 48 36

Annual energy savings / kWh 3 594

Electronic control gear Prismatic covers

130 130 Data table no. 0300

185-190 185-190 En 100 lx 200 lx

DIN 5040: A40 DIN 5040: A40 2 Max. luminaire

Technical information see page 440.

ets, does not require tools.